Beyond Linux ® From Scratch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/cracklib

Installation of CrackLib

Install CrackLib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-default-dict=/lib/cracklib/pw_dict &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /usr/lib/libcrack.so.2* /lib &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libcrack.so.2.8.0 /usr/lib/libcrack.so

Issue the following commands as the root user to install the recommended word list and create the CrackLib dictionary. Other word lists (text based, one word per line) can also be used by simply installing them into /usr/share/dict and adding them to the create-cracklib-dict command.

install -v -m644 -D ../cracklib-words-20080203.gz \
    /usr/share/dict/cracklib-words.gz &&
gunzip -v /usr/share/dict/cracklib-words.gz &&
ln -v -s cracklib-words /usr/share/dict/words &&
echo $(hostname) >>/usr/share/dict/cracklib-extra-words &&
install -v -m755 -d /lib/cracklib &&
create-cracklib-dict /usr/share/dict/cracklib-words \
                     /usr/share/dict/cracklib-extra-words

If desired, check the proper operation of the library as an unprivileged user by creating a test data file and running the tests using the following commands:

cat > test-data <<"EOF" &&
antzer
G@ndalf
neulinger
lantzer
Pa$$w0rd
PaS$W0rd
Pas$w0rd
Pas$W0rd
Pa$sw0rd
Pa$sW0rd
EOF

make test

Important

If you are installing CrackLib after your LFS system has been completed and you have the Shadow package installed, you must reinstall Shadow-4.0.18.1 if you wish to provide strong password support on your system. If you are now going to install the Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 package, you may disregard this note as Shadow will be reinstalled after the Linux-PAM installation.

Command Explanations

--with-default-dict=/lib/cracklib/pw_dict: This parameter forces the installation of the CrackLib dictionary to the /lib hierarchy.

mv -v /usr/lib/libcrack.so.2* /lib and ln -v -sf ../../lib/libcrack.so.2.8.0 ...: These two commands move the libcrack.so.2.8.0 library and associated symlink from /usr/lib to /lib, then recreates the /usr/lib/libcrack.so symlink pointing to the relocated file.

install -v -m644 -D ...: This command creates the /usr/share/dict directory (if it doesn't already exist) and installs the compressed word list there.

ln -v -s cracklib-words /usr/share/dict/words: The word list is linked to /usr/share/dict/words as historically, words is the primary word list in the /usr/share/dict directory. Omit this command if you already have a /usr/share/dict/words file installed on your system.

echo $(hostname) >>...: The value of hostname is echoed to a file called cracklib-extra-words. This extra file is intended to be a site specific list which includes easy to guess passwords such as company or department names, user's names, product names, computer names, domain names, etc.

create-cracklib-dict ...: This command creates the CrackLib dictionary from the word lists. Modify the command to add any additional word lists you have installed.

Installed Programs: cracklib-check, cracklib-format, cracklib-packer, cracklib-unpacker and create-cracklib-dict

Installed Libraries: libcrack.{so,a} and the cracklibmodule.{so,a} Python module

Installed Directories: /lib/cracklib, /usr/share/dict and /usr/share/cracklib

Short Descriptions

`create-cracklib-dict`	is used to create the CrackLib dictionary from the given word list(s).
`libcrack.{so,a}`	provides a fast dictionary lookup method for strong password enforcement.

Last updated on 2008-08-17 08:22:54 -0500

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0

Introduction to Linux-PAM

The Linux-PAM package contains Pluggable Authentication Modules. This is useful to enable the local system administrator to choose how applications authenticate users.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/pre/library/Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/pre/library/Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: be4dd1d34ac5933408e13e48f3eb710a
Download size: 911 kB
Estimated disk space required: 23 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Additional Downloads

Optional documentation: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0-docs.tar.bz2

Linux-PAM Dependencies

Optional

CrackLib-2.8.12, and Prelude

Optional (To {,Re}build the Documentation)

libxslt-1.1.22, DocBook XML DTD-4.5, DocBook XSL Stylesheets-1.71.1, w3m, and FOP-0.93

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/linux-pam

Installation of Linux-PAM

If you downloaded the documentation, unpack the tarball from the same top-level directory you unpacked the source tarball from. The files will unpack into the correct directories of the source tree.

Install Linux-PAM by running the following commands:

./configure --libdir=/lib \
            --sbindir=/lib/security \
            --enable-securedir=/lib/security \
            --docdir=/usr/share/doc/Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 \
            --enable-read-both-confs \
            --with-xauth=/usr/X11R6/bin/xauth &&
make

The test suite will not provide meaningful results until the package has been installed and minimally configured. If, after installing the package and creating a minimum configuration as shown below in the 'other' example, you wish to run the tests, issue make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 4755 /lib/security/unix_chkpwd &&

mv -v /lib/security/pam_tally /sbin &&

mv -v /lib/libpam{,c,_misc}.la /usr/lib &&
sed -i 's| /lib| /usr/lib|' /usr/lib/libpam_misc.la &&

if [ -L /lib/libpam.so ]; then
   for LINK in libpam{,c,_misc}.so; do
       ln -v -sf ../../lib/$(readlink /lib/${LINK}) /usr/lib/${LINK} &&
       rm -v /lib/${LINK}
   done
fi

Command Explanations

--libdir=/lib: This parameter results in the libraries being installed in /lib as they may be required in single-user mode.

--sbindir=/lib/security: This parameter results in two executables, one of which is not intended to be run from the command line, being installed in the same directory as the PAM modules. The other executable is later moved to the /sbin directory.

--enable-securedir=/lib/security: This parameter results in the PAM modules being installed in /lib/security.

--docdir=...: This parameter results in the documentation being installed in a versioned directory name.

--enable-read-both-confs: This parameter allows the local administrator to choose which configuration file setup to use.

--with-xauth=/usr/X11R6/bin/xauth: This parameter forces the build of the pam_xauth module, even if xauth is not yet installed. Omit this switch if you have no plans to build Xorg, or modify the path if you intend to install Xorg into a non-standard path.

chmod -v 4755 /lib/security/unix_chkpwd: The unix_chkpwd password-helper program must be setuid so that non-root processes can access the shadow-password file.

mv -v /lib/security/pam_tally /sbin: The pam_tally program is designed to be run by the system administrator, possibly in single-user mode, so it is moved to the appropriate directory.

mv -v /lib/libpam{,c,_misc}.la /usr/lib: This command moves the Libtool library files to /usr/lib as they are expected to reside there.

sed -i 's| /lib| /usr/lib|' /usr/lib/libpam_misc.la: This command corrects an installation reference due to the file being moved in the previous step.

for ...; do ...; done: These commands are used to relocate the .so symbolic links into the /usr/lib directory by cloning and then removing the existing symlinks. Using readlink ensures the new symlinks point at the correct library filenames.

Configuring Linux-PAM

Config Files

/etc/security/* and /etc/pam.d/* or /etc/pam.conf

Configuration Information

Configuration information is placed in /etc/pam.d/ or /etc/pam.conf depending on system administrator preference. Below are example files of each type:

# Begin /etc/pam.d/other

auth            required        pam_unix.so     nullok
account         required        pam_unix.so
session         required        pam_unix.so
password        required        pam_unix.so     nullok

# End /etc/pam.d/other

# Begin /etc/pam.conf

other           auth            required        pam_unix.so     nullok
other           account         required        pam_unix.so
other           session         required        pam_unix.so
other           password        required        pam_unix.so     nullok

# End /etc/pam.conf

The PAM man page (man pam) provides a good starting point for descriptions of fields and allowable entries. The Linux-PAM System Administrators' Guide is recommended for additional information.

Refer to http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/modules.html for a list of various modules available.

Important

You should now reinstall the Shadow-4.0.18.1 package.

Installed Program: pam_tally

Installed Libraries: libpam.{so,a}, libpamc.{so,a}, and libpam_misc.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/pam.d, /etc/security, /lib/security and /usr/include/security

Short Descriptions

pam_tally	is used to view or manipulate the `faillog` file.
`libpam.{so,a}`	provides the interfaces between applications and the PAM modules.

Last updated on 2008-05-16 01:37:44 -0500

Shadow-4.0.18.1

Introduction to Shadow

Shadow was indeed installed in LFS and there is no reason to reinstall it unless you installed CrackLib or Linux-PAM after your LFS system was completed. If you have installed CrackLib after LFS, then reinstalling Shadow will enable strong password support. If you have installed Linux-PAM, reinstalling Shadow will allow programs such as login and su to utilize PAM.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/LFS/lfs-packages/development/shadow-4.0.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e7751d46ecf219c07ae0b028ab3335c6
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/shadow-4.0.18.1-useradd_fix-2.patch

Shadow Dependencies

Required

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 and/or CrackLib-2.8.12

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/shadow

Installation of Shadow

Important

The installation shown below is for a situation where Linux-PAM has been installed (with or without a CrackLib installation) and Shadow is being reinstalled to support the Linux-PAM installation. If you are reinstalling Shadow to provide strong password support via the CrackLib library and you have not installed Linux-PAM, ensure you add the --with-libcrack parameter to the configure script below.

Reinstall Shadow by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../shadow-4.0.18.1-useradd_fix-2.patch &&

./configure --libdir=/lib \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --enable-shared \
            --without-selinux &&

sed -i 's/groups$(EXEEXT) //' src/Makefile &&
find man -name Makefile -exec sed -i 's/groups\.1 / /' {} \; &&
sed -i -e 's/ ko//' -e 's/ zh_CN zh_TW//' man/Makefile &&

for i in de es fi fr id it pt_BR; do
    convert-mans UTF-8 ISO-8859-1 man/${i}/*.?
done &&

for i in cs hu pl; do
    convert-mans UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 man/${i}/*.?
done &&

convert-mans UTF-8 EUC-JP man/ja/*.? &&
convert-mans UTF-8 KOI8-R man/ru/*.? &&
convert-mans UTF-8 ISO-8859-9 man/tr/*.? &&

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /usr/bin/passwd /bin &&
mv -v /lib/libshadow.*a /usr/lib &&
rm -v /lib/libshadow.so &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libshadow.so.0 /usr/lib/libshadow.so

Command Explanations

--without-selinux: Support for selinux is enabled by default, but selinux is not built in a base LFS system. The configure script will fail if this option is not used.

sed -i 's/groups$(EXEEXT) //' src/Makefile: This command is used to suppress the installation of the groups program as the version from the Coreutils package installed during LFS is preferred.

find man -name Makefile -exec ... {} \;: This command is used to suppress the installation of the groups man pages so the existing ones installed from the Coreutils package are not replaced.

sed -i -e '...' -e '...' man/Makefile: This command disables the installation of Chinese and Korean manual pages, since Man-DB cannot format them properly.

convert-mans ...: These commands are used to convert some of the man pages so that Man-DB will display them in the expected encodings.

mv -v /usr/bin/passwd /bin: The passwd program may be needed during times when the /usr filesystem is not mounted so it is moved into the root partition.

mv -v ...; rm -v ...; ln -v ...: These commands are used to move the libshadow library to the root partition to support the moving of the passwd program earlier.

Configuring Shadow

Shadow's stock configuration for the useradd utility is not suitable for LFS systems. Use the following commands as the root user to change the default home directory for new users and prevent the creation of mail spool files:

useradd -D -b /home &&
sed -i 's/yes/no/' /etc/default/useradd

Configuring Linux-PAM to Work with Shadow

Note

The rest of this page is devoted to configuring Shadow to work properly with Linux-PAM. If you do not have Linux-PAM installed, and you reinstalled Shadow to support strong passwords via the CrackLib library, no further configuration is required.

Config Files

/etc/pam.d/* or alternatively /etc/pam.conf, /etc/login.defs and /etc/security/*

Configuration Information

Configuring your system to use Linux-PAM can be a complex task. The information below will provide a basic setup so that Shadow's login and password functionality will work effectively with Linux-PAM. Review the information and links on the Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 page for further configuration information. For information specific to integrating Shadow, Linux-PAM and CrackLib, you can visit the following links:

Configuring /etc/login.defs

The login program currently performs many functions which Linux-PAM modules should now handle. The following sed command will comment out the appropriate lines in /etc/login.defs, and stop login from performing these functions (a backup file named /etc/login.defs.orig is also created to preserve the original file's contents). Issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m644 /etc/login.defs /etc/login.defs.orig &&
for FUNCTION in LASTLOG_ENAB MAIL_CHECK_ENAB \
                PORTTIME_CHECKS_ENAB CONSOLE \
                MOTD_FILE NOLOGINS_FILE PASS_MIN_LEN \
                SU_WHEEL_ONLY MD5_CRYPT_ENAB \
                CONSOLE_GROUPS ENVIRON_FILE \
                ULIMIT ENV_TZ ENV_HZ ENV_SUPATH \
                ENV_PATH QMAIL_DIR MAIL_DIR MAIL_FILE \
                CHFN_AUTH FAILLOG_ENAB QUOTAS_ENAB FTMP_FILE \
                OBSCURE_CHECKS_ENAB CRACKLIB_DICTPATH \
                PASS_CHANGE_TRIES PASS_ALWAYS_WARN ISSUE_FILE
do
    sed -i "s/^$FUNCTION/# &/" /etc/login.defs
done

Configuring the /etc/pam.d/ Files

As mentioned previously in the Linux-PAM instructions, Linux-PAM has two supported methods for configuration. The commands below assume that you've chosen to use a directory based configuration, where each program has its own configuration file. You can optionally use a single /etc/pam.conf configuration file by using the text from the files below, and supplying the program name as an additional first field for each line.

As the root user, create the /etc/pam.d directory with the following command:

install -v -d -m755 /etc/pam.d

While still the root user, add the following Linux-PAM configuration files to the /etc/pam.d/ directory (or add the contents to the /etc/pam.conf file) with the following commands:

'login' (with CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/login << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/login

auth        requisite      pam_nologin.so
auth        required       pam_securetty.so
auth        required       pam_unix.so
account     required       pam_access.so
account     required       pam_unix.so
session     required       pam_env.so
session     required       pam_motd.so
session     required       pam_limits.so
session     optional       pam_mail.so      dir=/var/mail standard
session     optional       pam_lastlog.so
session     required       pam_unix.so
password    required       pam_cracklib.so  retry=3
password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow use_authtok

# End /etc/pam.d/login
EOF

'login' (without CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/login << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/login

auth        requisite      pam_nologin.so
auth        required       pam_securetty.so
auth        required       pam_env.so
auth        required       pam_unix.so
account     required       pam_access.so
account     required       pam_unix.so
session     required       pam_motd.so
session     required       pam_limits.so
session     optional       pam_mail.so      dir=/var/mail standard
session     optional       pam_lastlog.so
session     required       pam_unix.so
password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow

# End /etc/pam.d/login
EOF

'passwd' (with CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/passwd << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/passwd

password    required       pam_cracklib.so  type=Linux retry=1 \
                                            difok=5 diffignore=23 minlen=9 \
                                            dcredit=1 ucredit=1 lcredit=1 \
                                            ocredit=1 \
                                            dictpath=/lib/cracklib/pw_dict
password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow use_authtok

# End /etc/pam.d/passwd
EOF

Note

In its default configuration, owing to credits, pam_cracklib will allow multiple case passwords as short as 6 characters, even with the minlen value set to 11. You should review the pam_cracklib(8) man page and determine if these default values are acceptable for the security of your system.

'passwd' (without CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/passwd << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/passwd

password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow

# End /etc/pam.d/passwd
EOF

'su'

cat > /etc/pam.d/su << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/su

auth        sufficient      pam_rootok.so
auth        required        pam_unix.so
account     required        pam_unix.so
session     optional        pam_mail.so     dir=/var/mail standard
session     optional        pam_xauth.so
session     required        pam_env.so
session     required        pam_unix.so

# End /etc/pam.d/su
EOF

'chage'

cat > /etc/pam.d/chage << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/chage

auth        sufficient      pam_rootok.so
auth        required        pam_unix.so
account     required        pam_unix.so
session     required        pam_unix.so
password    required        pam_permit.so

# End /etc/pam.d/chage
EOF

'chpasswd', 'chgpasswd', 'groupadd', 'groupdel', 'groupmems', 'groupmod', 'newusers', 'useradd', 'userdel', and 'usermod'

for PROGRAM in chpasswd chgpasswd groupadd groupdel groupmems \
               groupmod newusers useradd userdel usermod
do
    install -v -m644 /etc/pam.d/chage /etc/pam.d/$PROGRAM
    sed -i "s/chage/$PROGRAM/" /etc/pam.d/$PROGRAM
done

Warning

At this point, you should do a simple test to see if Shadow is working as expected. Open another terminal and log in as a user, then su to root. If you do not see any errors, then all is well and you should proceed with the rest of the configuration. If you did receive errors, stop now and double check the above configuration files manually. You can also run the test suite from the Linux-PAM package to assist you in determining the problem. If you cannot find and fix the error, you should recompile Shadow adding the --without-libpam switch to the configure command in the above instructions (also move the /etc/login.defs.orig backup file to /etc/login.defs). If you fail to do this and the errors remain, you will be unable to log into your system.

Other

Currently, /etc/pam.d/other is configured to allow anyone with an account on the machine to use PAM-aware programs without a configuration file for that program. After testing Linux-PAM for proper configuration, install a more restrictive other file so that program-specific configuration files are required:

cat > /etc/pam.d/other << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/other

auth        required        pam_deny.so
auth        required        pam_warn.so
account     required        pam_deny.so
session     required        pam_deny.so
password    required        pam_deny.so
password    required        pam_warn.so

# End /etc/pam.d/other
EOF

If you preserved the source tree from the Linux-PAM package (or you feel like unpacking that tarball, then running configure and make), now would be a good time to run the test suite from this package. This test suite will use the configuration you just finished during the tests. All the tests should pass.

Configuring Login Access

Instead of using the /etc/login.access file for controlling access to the system, Linux-PAM uses the pam_access.so module along with the /etc/security/access.conf file. Rename the /etc/login.access file using the following command:

if [ -f /etc/login.access ]; then
    mv -v /etc/login.access /etc/login.access.NOUSE
fi

Configuring Resource Limits

Instead of using the /etc/limits file for limiting usage of system resources, Linux-PAM uses the pam_limits.so module along with the /etc/security/limits.conf file. Rename the /etc/limits file using the following command:

if [ -f /etc/limits ]; then
    mv -v /etc/limits /etc/limits.NOUSE
fi

Configuring Default Environment

During previous configuration, several items were removed from /etc/login.defs. Some of these items are now controlled by the pam_env.so module and the /etc/security/pam_env.conf configuration file. In particular, the default path has been changed. To recover your default path, execute the following commands:

ENV_PATH=`grep '^ENV_PATH' /etc/login.defs.orig | \
    awk '{ print $2 }' | sed 's/PATH=//'` &&
echo 'PATH        DEFAULT='`echo "${ENV_PATH}"`\
'        OVERRIDE=${PATH}' \
    >> /etc/security/pam_env.conf &&
unset ENV_PATH

Note

ENV_SUPATH is no longer supported. You must create a valid /root/.bashrc file to provide a modified path for the super-user.

A list of the installed files, along with their short descriptions can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/6.3/chapter06/shadow.html#contents-shadow.

Last updated on 2008-06-27 00:27:03 -0500

Iptables-1.3.8

Introduction to Iptables

The next part of this chapter deals with firewalls. The principal firewall tool for Linux, as of the 2.4 kernel series, is iptables. It replaces ipchains from the 2.2 series and ipfwadm from the 2.0 series. You will need to install iptables if you intend on using any form of a firewall.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.netfilter.org/projects/iptables/files/iptables-1.3.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.netfilter.org/pub/iptables/iptables-1.3.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0a9209f928002e5eee9cdff8fef4d4b3
Download size: 169 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/iptables

Kernel Configuration

A firewall in Linux is accomplished through a portion of the kernel called netfilter. The interface to netfilter is iptables. To use it, the appropriate kernel configuration parameters are found in Networking ⇒ Networking Options ⇒ Network Packet Filtering ⇒ Core Netfilter Configuration (and) IP: Netfilter Configuration.

Installation of Iptables

Note

The installation below does not include building some specialized extension libraries which require the raw headers in the Linux source code. If you wish to build the additional extensions (if you aren't sure, then you probably don't), you can look at the INSTALL file to see an example of how to change the KERNEL_DIR= parameter to point at the Linux source code. Note that if you upgrade the kernel version, you may also need to recompile iptables and that the BLFS team has not tested using the raw kernel headers.

For some non-x86 architectures, the raw kernel headers may be required. In that case, modify the KERNEL_DIR= parameter to point at the Linux source code.

Install iptables by running the following commands:

sed -i 's/name="$node/name="node/' iptables.xslt &&
make LIBDIR=/lib KERNEL_DIR=/usr

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr LIBDIR=/lib BINDIR=/sbin \
    MANDIR=/usr/share/man install &&
install -v -m644 iptables.xslt /lib/iptables

Command Explanations

sed -i 's/name="$node/name="node/' iptables.xslt: This corrects a syntax error in the XSLT stylesheet for use with iptables-xml.

PREFIX=/usr LIBDIR=/lib BINDIR=/sbin: Compiles and installs iptables modules into /lib, binaries into /sbin and the remainder into the /usr hierarchy instead of /usr/local. Firewalls are generally activated during the boot process and /usr may not be mounted at that time.

KERNEL_DIR=/usr: This parameter is used to point at the sanitized kernel headers in /usr and not use the raw kernel headers in /usr/src/linux.

Configuring Iptables

Introductory instructions for configuring your firewall are presented in the next section: Firewalling

Boot Script

To set up the iptables firewall at boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/iptables init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-iptables

Installed Programs: iptables, iptables-restore, iptables-save, iptables-xml and ip6tables

Installed Libraries: libip6t_*.so and libipt_*.so

Installed Directory: /lib/iptables

Short Descriptions

iptables	is used to set up, maintain, and inspect the tables of IP packet filter rules in the Linux kernel.
iptables-restore	is used to restore IP Tables from data specified on STDIN. Use I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file.
iptables-save	is used to dump the contents of an IP Table in easily parseable format to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
iptables-xml	is used to convert the output of iptables-save to an XML format. Using the `iptables.xslt` stylesheet converts the XML back to the format of iptables-restore.
ip6tables	is used to set up, maintain, and inspect the tables of IPv6 packet filter rules in the Linux kernel. Several different tables may be defined. Each table contains a number of built-in chains and may also contain user-defined chains.
`libip*.so`	library modules are various modules (implemented as dynamic libraries) which extend the core functionality of iptables.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

Setting Up a Network Firewall

Before you read this part of the chapter, you should have already installed iptables as described in the previous section.

Introduction to Firewall Creation

The general purpose of a firewall is to protect a computer or a network against malicious access.

In a perfect world, every daemon or service on every machine is perfectly configured and immune to flaws such as buffer overflows or other problems regarding its security. Furthermore, you trust every user accessing your services. In this world, you do not need to have a firewall.

In the real world however, daemons may be misconfigured and exploits against essential services are freely available. You may wish to choose which services are accessible by certain machines or you may wish to limit which machines or applications are allowed external access. Alternatively, you may simply not trust some of your applications or users. You are probably connected to the Internet. In this world, a firewall is essential.

Don't assume however, that having a firewall makes careful configuration redundant, or that it makes any negligent misconfiguration harmless. It doesn't prevent anyone from exploiting a service you intentionally offer but haven't recently updated or patched after an exploit went public. Despite having a firewall, you need to keep applications and daemons on your system properly configured and up to date. A firewall is not a cure all, but should be an essential part of your overall security strategy.

Meaning of the Word "Firewall"

The word firewall can have several different meanings.

Personal Firewall

This is a hardware device or software program commercially sold (or offered via freeware) by companies such as Symantec which claims that it secures a home or desktop computer connected to the Internet. This type of firewall is highly relevant for users who do not know how their computers might be accessed via the Internet or how to disable that access, especially if they are always online and connected via broadband links.

Masquerading Router

This is a system placed between the Internet and an intranet. To minimize the risk of compromising the firewall itself, it should generally have only one role—that of protecting the intranet. Although not completely risk free, the tasks of doing the routing and IP masquerading (rewriting IP headers of the packets it routes from clients with private IP addresses onto the Internet so that they seem to come from the firewall itself) are commonly considered relatively secure.

BusyBox

This is often an old computer you may have retired and nearly forgotten, performing masquerading or routing functions, but offering non-firewall services such as a web-cache or mail. This may be used for home networks, but is not to be considered as secure as a firewall only machine because the combination of server and router/firewall on one machine raises the complexity of the setup.

Firewall with a Demilitarized Zone [Not Further Described Here]

This box performs masquerading or routing, but grants public access to some branch of your network which, because of public IPs and a physically separated structure, is essentially a separate network with direct Internet access. The servers on this network are those which must be easily accessible from both the Internet and intranet. The firewall protects both networks. This type of firewall has a minimum of three network interfaces.

Packetfilter

This type of firewall does routing or masquerading, but does not maintain a state table of ongoing communication streams. It is fast, but quite limited in its ability to block undesired packets without blocking desired packets.

Now You Can Start to Build your Firewall

Caution

This introduction on how to setup a firewall is not a complete guide to securing systems. Firewalling is a complex issue that requires careful configuration. The scripts quoted here are simply intended to give examples of how a firewall works. They are not intended to fit into any particular configuration and may not provide complete protection from an attack.

Customization of these scripts for your specific situation will be necessary for an optimal configuration, but you should make a serious study of the iptables documentation and creating firewalls in general before hacking away. Have a look at the list of links for further reading at the end of this section for more details. There you will find a list of URLs that contain quite comprehensive information about building your own firewall.

The firewall configuration script installed in the iptables section differs from the standard configuration script. It only has two of the standard targets: start and status. The other targets are clear and lock. For instance if you issue:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/iptables start

the firewall will be restarted just as it is upon system startup. The status target will present a list of all currently implemented rules. The clear target turns off all firewall rules and the lock target will block all packets in and out of the computer with the exception of the loopback interface.

The main startup firewall is located in the file /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables. The sections below provide three different approaches that can be used for a system.

Note

You should always run your firewall rules from a script. This ensures consistency and a record of what was done. It also allows retention of comments that are essential for understanding the rules long after they were written.

Personal Firewall

A Personal Firewall is designed to let you access all the services offered on the Internet, but keep your box secure and your data private.

Below is a slightly modified version of Rusty Russell's recommendation from the Linux 2.4 Packet Filtering HOWTO. It is still applicable to the Linux 2.6 kernels.

cat > /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh

# Begin $rc_base/rc.iptables

# Insert connection-tracking modules
# (not needed if built into the kernel)
modprobe ip_tables
modprobe iptable_filter
modprobe ip_conntrack
modprobe ip_conntrack_ftp
modprobe ipt_state
modprobe ipt_LOG

# Enable broadcast echo Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts

# Disable Source Routed Packets
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_source_route

# Enable TCP SYN Cookie Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_syncookies

# Disable ICMP Redirect Acceptance
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_redirects

# Don¹t send Redirect Messages
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/send_redirects

# Drop Spoofed Packets coming in on an interface, where responses
# would result in the reply going out a different interface.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter

# Log packets with impossible addresses.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/log_martians

# be verbose on dynamic ip-addresses  (not needed in case of static IP)
echo 2 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr

# disable Explicit Congestion Notification
# too many routers are still ignorant
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_ecn

# Set a known state
iptables -P INPUT   DROP
iptables -P FORWARD DROP
iptables -P OUTPUT  DROP

# These lines are here in case rules are already in place and the
# script is ever rerun on the fly. We want to remove all rules and
# pre-existing user defined chains before we implement new rules.
iptables -F
iptables -X
iptables -Z

iptables -t nat -F

# Allow local-only connections
iptables -A INPUT  -i lo -j ACCEPT

# Free output on any interface to any ip for any service
# (equal to -P ACCEPT)
iptables -A OUTPUT -j ACCEPT

# Permit answers on already established connections
# and permit new connections related to established ones
# (e.g. port mode ftp)
iptables -A INPUT -m state --state ESTABLISHED,RELATED -j ACCEPT

# Log everything else. What's Windows' latest exploitable vulnerability?
iptables -A INPUT -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:INPUT "

# End $rc_base/rc.iptables
EOF
chmod 700 /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables

This script is quite simple, it drops all traffic coming into your computer that wasn't initiated from your computer, but as long as you are simply surfing the Internet you are unlikely to exceed its limits.

If you frequently encounter certain delays at accessing FTP servers, take a look at BusyBox example number 4.

Even if you have daemons or services running on your system, these will be inaccessible everywhere but from your computer itself. If you want to allow access to services on your machine, such as ssh or ping, take a look at BusyBox.

Masquerading Router

A true Firewall has two interfaces, one connected to an intranet, in this example eth0, and one connected to the Internet, here ppp0. To provide the maximum security for the firewall itself, make sure that there are no unnecessary servers running on it such as X11 et al. As a general principle, the firewall itself should not access any untrusted service (think of a remote server giving answers that makes a daemon on your system crash, or even worse, that implements a worm via a buffer-overflow).

cat > /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh

# Begin $rc_base/rc.iptables

echo
echo "You're using the example configuration for a setup of a firewall"
echo "from Beyond Linux From Scratch."
echo "This example is far from being complete, it is only meant"
echo "to be a reference."
echo "Firewall security is a complex issue, that exceeds the scope"
echo "of the configuration rules below."
echo "You can find additional information"
echo "about firewalls in Chapter 4 of the BLFS book."
echo "http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs"
echo

# Insert iptables modules (not needed if built into the kernel).

modprobe ip_tables
modprobe iptable_filter
modprobe ip_conntrack
modprobe ip_conntrack_ftp
modprobe ipt_state
modprobe iptable_nat
modprobe ip_nat_ftp
modprobe ipt_MASQUERADE
modprobe ipt_LOG
modprobe ipt_REJECT

# Enable broadcast echo Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts

# Disable Source Routed Packets
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_source_route

# Enable TCP SYN Cookie Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_syncookies

# Disable ICMP Redirect Acceptance
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_redirects

# Don¹t send Redirect Messages
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/send_redirects

# Drop Spoofed Packets coming in on an interface where responses
# would result in the reply going out a different interface.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter

# Log packets with impossible addresses.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/log_martians

# Be verbose on dynamic ip-addresses  (not needed in case of static IP)
echo 2 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr

# Disable Explicit Congestion Notification
# Too many routers are still ignorant
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_ecn

# Set a known state
iptables -P INPUT   DROP
iptables -P FORWARD DROP
iptables -P OUTPUT  DROP

# These lines are here in case rules are already in place and the
# script is ever rerun on the fly. We want to remove all rules and
# pre-existing user defined chains before we implement new rules.
iptables -F
iptables -X
iptables -Z

iptables -t nat -F

# Allow local connections
iptables -A INPUT  -i lo -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -o lo -j ACCEPT

# Allow forwarding if the initiated on the intranet
iptables -A FORWARD -m state --state ESTABLISHED,RELATED -j ACCEPT
iptables -A FORWARD  -i ! ppp+ -m state --state NEW      -j ACCEPT

# Do masquerading
# (not needed if intranet is not using private ip-addresses)
iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o ppp+ -j MASQUERADE

# Log everything for debugging
# (last of all rules, but before policy rules)
iptables -A INPUT   -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:INPUT  "
iptables -A FORWARD -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:FORWARD"
iptables -A OUTPUT  -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:OUTPUT "

# Enable IP Forwarding
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
EOF
chmod 700 /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables

With this script your intranet should be reasonably secure against external attacks. No one should be able to setup a new connection to any internal service and, if it's masqueraded, makes your intranet invisible to the Internet. Furthermore, your firewall should be relatively safe because there are no services running that a cracker could attack.

Note

If the interface you're connecting to the Internet doesn't connect via PPP, you will need to change <ppp+> to the name of the interface (e.g., eth1) which you are using.

BusyBox

This scenario isn't too different from the Masquerading Router, but additionally offers some services to your intranet. Examples of this can be when you want to administer your firewall from another host on your intranet or use it as a proxy or a name server.

Note

Outlining a true concept of how to protect a server that offers services on the Internet goes far beyond the scope of this document. See the references at the end of this section for more information.

Be cautious. Every service you have enabled makes your setup more complex and your firewall less secure. You are exposed to the risks of misconfigured services or running a service with an exploitable bug. A firewall should generally not run any extra services. See the introduction to the Masquerading Router for some more details.

If you want to add services such as internal Samba or name servers that do not need to access the Internet themselves, the additional statements are quite simple and should still be acceptable from a security standpoint. Just add the following lines into the script before the logging rules.

iptables -A INPUT  -i ! ppp+  -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -o ! ppp+  -j ACCEPT

If daemons, such as squid, have to access the Internet themselves, you could open OUTPUT generally and restrict INPUT.

iptables -A INPUT -m state --state ESTABLISHED,RELATED -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -j ACCEPT

However, it is generally not advisable to leave OUTPUT unrestricted. You lose any control over trojans who would like to "call home", and a bit of redundancy in case you've (mis-)configured a service so that it broadcasts its existence to the world.

To accomplish this, you should restrict INPUT and OUTPUT on all ports except those that it's absolutely necessary to have open. Which ports you have to open depends on your needs: mostly you will find them by looking for failed accesses in your log files.

Have a Look at the Following Examples:

Squid is caching the web:

iptables -A OUTPUT -p tcp --dport 80 -j ACCEPT
iptables -A INPUT  -p tcp --sport 80 -m state --state ESTABLISHED \
  -j ACCEPT

Your caching name server (e.g., named) does its lookups via UDP:
```
iptables -A OUTPUT -p udp --dport 53 -j ACCEPT
```

You want to be able to ping your computer to ensure it's still alive:

iptables -A INPUT  -p icmp -m icmp --icmp-type echo-request -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -p icmp -m icmp --icmp-type echo-reply   -j ACCEPT

If you are frequently accessing FTP servers or enjoy chatting, you might notice certain delays because some implementations of these daemons have the feature of querying an identd on your system to obtain usernames. Although there's really little harm in this, having an identd running is not recommended because many security experts feel the service gives out too much additional information.

To avoid these delays you could reject the requests with a 'tcp-reset':
```
iptables -A INPUT  -p tcp --dport 113 -j REJECT --reject-with tcp-reset
```
To log and drop invalid packets (packets that came in after netfilter's timeout or some types of network scans):
```
iptables -I INPUT -p tcp -m state --state INVALID \
  -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:INVALID"
iptables -I INPUT -p tcp -m state --state INVALID -j DROP
```
Anything coming from the outside should not have a private address, this is a common attack called IP-spoofing:
```
iptables -A INPUT -i ppp+ -s 10.0.0.0/8     -j DROP
iptables -A INPUT -i ppp+ -s 172.16.0.0/12  -j DROP
iptables -A INPUT -i ppp+ -s 192.168.0.0/16 -j DROP
```
There are other addresses that you may also want to drop: 0.0.0.0/8, 127.0.0.0/8, 224.0.0.0/3 (multicast and experimental), 169.254.0.0/16 (Link Local Networks), and 192.0.2.0/24 (IANA defined test network).

If your firewall is a DHCP client, you need to allow those packets:

iptables -A INPUT  -i ppp0 -p udp -s 0.0.0.0 --sport 67 \
   -d 255.255.255.255 --dport 68 -j ACCEPT

To simplify debugging and be fair to anyone who'd like to access a service you have disabled, purposely or by mistake, you could REJECT those packets that are dropped.

Obviously this must be done directly after logging as the very last lines before the packets are dropped by policy:
```
iptables -A INPUT -j REJECT
```

These are only examples to show you some of the capabilities of the firewall code in Linux. Have a look at the man page of iptables. There you will find much more information. The port numbers needed for this can be found in /etc/services, in case you didn't find them by trial and error in your log file.

Conclusion

Finally, there is one fact you must not forget: The effort spent attacking a system corresponds to the value the cracker expects to gain from it. If you are responsible for valuable information, you need to spend the time to protect it properly.

Extra Information

Where to Start with Further Reading on Firewalls

www.netfilter.org - Homepage of the netfilter/iptables project
Netfilter related FAQ
Netfilter related HOWTO's
en.tldp.org/LDP/nag2/x-087-2-firewall.html
en.tldp.org/HOWTO/Security-HOWTO.html
en.tldp.org/HOWTO/Firewall-HOWTO.html
www.linuxsecurity.com/docs/
www.little-idiot.de/firewall (German & outdated, but very comprehensive)
linux.oreillynet.com/pub/a/linux/2000/03/10/netadmin/ddos.html
staff.washington.edu/dittrich/misc/ddos
www.e-infomax.com/ipmasq
www.circlemud.org/~jelson/writings/security/index.htm
www.securityfocus.com
www.cert.org - tech_tips
security.ittoolbox.com
www.insecure.org/reading.html

Last updated on 2007-10-16 08:26:18 -0500

GnuPG-1.4.7

Introduction to GnuPG

The GnuPG package contains a public/private key encryptor. This is becoming useful for signing files or emails as proof of identity and preventing tampering with the contents of the file or email. For a more enhanced version of GnuPG which supports S/MIME, see the GnuPG-2.0.8 package.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/g/gnupg-1.4.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/gnupg/gnupg-1.4.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b06a141cca5cd1a55bbdd25ab833303c
Download size: 3.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 40 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

GnuPG Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, libusb-0.1.12, cURL-7.16.3, an MTA, DocBook-utils-0.6.14, and docbook-to-man

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnupg

Installation of GnuPG

Install GnuPG by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and you wish to create documentation in alternate formats, issue the following command:

make -C doc pdf html

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 4755 /usr/bin/gpg &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnupg-1.4.7 &&
mv -v /usr/share/gnupg/{FAQ,faq.html} /usr/share/doc/gnupg-1.4.7 &&
install -v -m644 \
    doc/{highlights-1.4.txt,OpenPGP,samplekeys.asc,DETAILS,*.texi} \
    /usr/share/doc/gnupg-1.4.7

If you created alternate formats of the documentation, install it using the following command as the root user:

cp -v -R doc/gnupg1.{html,pdf} /usr/share/doc/gnupg-1.4.7

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib: This command creates a gnupg directory in /usr/lib instead of /usr/libexec.

chmod -v 4755 /usr/bin/gpg: gpg is installed setuid root to avoid swapping out sensitive data.

Installed Programs: gpg, gpg-zip, gpgsplit, and gpgv

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/gnupg, /usr/share/gnupg and /usr/share/doc/gnupg-1.4.7

Short Descriptions

gpg	is the backend (command-line interface) for this OpenPGP implementation.
gpgsplit	separates key rings.
gpgv	is a verify only version of gpg.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 11:52:33 -0500

GnuPG-2.0.8

Introduction to GnuPG 2

The GnuPG 2 package is GNU's tool for secure communication and data storage. It can be used to encrypt data and to create digital signatures. It includes an advanced key management facility and is compliant with the proposed OpenPGP Internet standard as described in RFC2440 and the S/MIME standard as described by several RFCs. GnuPG 2 is the stable version of GnuPG integrating support for OpenPGP and S/MIME. It does not conflict with an installed GnuPG-1.4.7 OpenPGP-only version.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/g/gnupg-2.0.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/gnupg/gnupg-2.0.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fc4377ca67e1bf687eeaf22e79c0b9d1
Download size: 3.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 65 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

GnuPG Dependencies

Required

Pth-2.0.7, Libassuan-1.0.4, Libgcrypt-1.2.4, and Libksba-1.0.2

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.3.39, libusb-0.1.12, cURL-7.16.3, and an MTA

Optional (Run-time Requirement For Most of the Package's Functionality)

PIN-Entry-0.7.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnupg2

Installation of GnuPG 2

Install GnuPG 2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib/gnupg2 &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and you wish to create documentation in alternate formats, issue the following commands:

make -C doc pdf ps html &&
makeinfo --html --no-split -o doc/gnupg_nochunks.html doc/gnupg.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext       -o doc/gnupg.txt           doc/gnupg.texi

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

install -v -m755 -d         /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8 &&
ln -sv ../../gnupg/FAQ      /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8 &&
ln -sv ../../gnupg/faq.html /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8 &&

install -v -m644 doc/{DETAILS,KEYSERVER,OpenPGP,TRANSLATE} \
                            /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8

If you created alternate formats of the documentation, install it using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8/html       &&
install -v -m644 doc/gnupg.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8/html       &&
install -v -m644 doc/gnupg_nochunks.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8/gnupg.html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.texi \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8            &&
install -v -m644 doc/gnupg.{pdf,dvi,ps,txt} \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnupg-2.0.8

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib/gnupg2: This switch creates a gnupg directory in /usr/lib instead of /usr/libexec.

Installed Programs: addgnupghome, applygnupgdefaults, gpg-agent, gpg-connect-agent, gpg2, gpgconf, gpgkey2ssh, gpgparsemail, gpgsm, gpgsm-gencert.sh, gpgv2, kbxutil, scdaemon, symcryptrun, and watchgnupg

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/gnupg2, /usr/share/gnupg and /usr/share/doc/gnupg2-2.0.8

Short Descriptions

addgnupghome	is used to create and populate user's `~/.gnupg` directories
applygnupgdefaults	is a wrapper script used to run gpgconf with the `--apply-defaults` parameter on all user's GnuPG home directories.
gpg-agent	is a daemon used to manage secret (private) keys independently from any protocol. It is used as a backend for gpg and gpgsm as well as for a couple of other utilities.
gpg-connect-agent	is a utility used to communicate with a running gpg-agent.
gpg2	is the OpenPGP part of the GNU Privacy Guard (GnuPG). It is a tool used to provide digital encryption and signing services using the OpenPGP standard.
gpgconf	is a utility used to automatically and reasonable safely query and modify configuration files in the `~/.gnupg` home directory. It is designed not to be invoked manually by the user, but automatically by graphical user interfaces.
gpgparsemail	is a utility currently only useful for debugging. Run it with `--help` for usage information.
gpgsm	is a tool similar to gpg used to provide digital encryption and signing services on X.509 certificates and the CMS protocol. It is mainly used as a backend for S/MIME mail processing.
gpgsm-gencert.sh	is a simple tool used to interactivly generate a certificate request which will be printed to stdout.
gpgv2	is a verify only version of gpg2.
kbxutil	is used to list, export and import Keybox data.
scdaemon	is a daemon used to manage smartcards. It is usually invoked by gpg-agent and in general not used directly.
symcryptrun	is a simple symmetric encryption tool.
watchgnupg	is used to listen to a Unix Domain socket created by any of the GnuPG tools.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 11:52:33 -0500

Tripwire-2.4.1.2

Introduction to Tripwire

The Tripwire package contains programs used to verify the integrity of the files on a given system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/tripwire/tripwire-2.4.1.2-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 1147c278b528ed593023912c4b649a
Download size: 700 KB
Estimated disk space required: 28 MB
Estimated build time: 1.6 SBU

Tripwire Dependencies

Required

Optional

An MTA

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/tripwire

Installation of Tripwire

Compile Tripwire by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's@TWDB="${prefix}@TWDB="/var@' install/install.cfg &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/tripwire &&
make

Warning

The default configuration is to use a local MTA. If you don't have an MTA installed and have no wish to install one, modify install/install.cfg to use an SMTP server instead. Otherwise the install will fail.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
cp -v policy/*.txt /usr/doc/tripwire

Command Explanations

sed -i -e 's@TWDB="${prefix}@TWDB="/var@' install/install.cfg: This command tells the package to install the program database and reports in /var/lib/tripwire.

make install: This command creates the Tripwire security keys as well as installing the binaries. There are two keys: a site key and a local key which are stored in /etc/tripwire/.

cp -v policy/*.txt /usr/doc/tripwire: This command installs the tripwire sample policy files with the other tripwire documentation.

Configuring Tripwire

Config Files

/etc/tripwire/*

Configuration Information

Tripwire uses a policy file to determine which files are integrity checked. The default policy file (/etc/tripwire/twpol.txt) is for a default installation and will need to be updated for your system.

Policy files should be tailored to each individual distribution and/or installation. Some example policy files can be found in /usr/doc/tripwire/ (Note that /usr/doc/ is a symbolic link on LFS systems to /usr/share/doc/).

If desired, copy the policy file you'd like to try into /etc/tripwire/ instead of using the default policy file, twpol.txt. It is, however, recommended that you edit your policy file. Get ideas from the examples above and read /usr/doc/tripwire/policyguide.txt for additional information. twpol.txt is a good policy file for learning about Tripwire as it will note any changes to the file system and can even be used as an annoying way of keeping track of changes for uninstallation of software.

After your policy file has been edited to your satisfaction you may begin the configuration steps (perform as the root):

twadmin --create-polfile --site-keyfile /etc/tripwire/site.key \
    /etc/tripwire/twpol.txt &&
tripwire --init

Depending on your system and the contents of the policy file, the initialization phase above can take a relatively long time.

Usage Information

Tripwire will identify file changes in the critical system files specified in the policy file. Using Tripwire while making frequent changes to these directories will flag all these changes. It is most useful after a system has reached a configuration that the user considers stable.

To use Tripwire after creating a policy file to run a report, use the following command:

tripwire --check > /etc/tripwire/report.txt

View the output to check the integrity of your files. An automatic integrity report can be produced by using a cron facility to schedule the runs.

Reports are stored in binary and, if desired, encrypted. View reports, as the root user, with:

twprint --print-report -r /var/lib/tripwire/report/<report-name.twr>

After you run an integrity check, you should examine the report (or email) and then modify the Tripwire database to reflect the changed files on your system. This is so that Tripwire will not continually notify you that files you intentionally changed are a security violation. To do this you must first ls -l /var/lib/tripwire/report/ and note the name of the newest file which starts with your system name as presented by the command uname -n and ends in .twr. These files were created during report creation and the most current one is needed to update the Tripwire database of your system. As the root user, type in the following command making the appropriate report name:

tripwire --update --twrfile /var/lib/tripwire/report/<report-name.twr>

You will be placed into vim with a copy of the report in front of you. If all the changes were good, then just type :wq and after entering your local key, the database will be updated. If there are files which you still want to be warned about, remove the 'x' before the filename in the report and type :wq.

A good summary of tripwire operations can be found at http://www.redhat.com/docs/manuals/linux/RHL-9-Manual/ref-guide/ch-tripwire.html.

Changing the Policy File

If you are unhappy with your policy file and would like to modify it or use a new one, modify the policy file and then execute the following commands as the root user:

twadmin --create-polfile /etc/tripwire/twpol.txt &&
tripwire --init

Installed Programs: siggen, tripwire, twadmin, and twprint

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/tripwire, /var/lib/tripwire, and /usr/share/doc/tripwire

Short Descriptions

siggen	is a signature gathering utility that displays the hash function values for the specified files.
tripwire	is the main file integrity checking program.
twadmin	administrative and utility tool used to perform certain administrative functions related to Tripwire files and configuration options.
twprint	prints Tripwire database and report files in clear text format.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Heimdal-1.1

Introduction to Heimdal

Heimdal is a free implementation of Kerberos 5 that aims to be compatible with MIT Kerberos 5 and is backward compatible with Kerberos 4. Kerberos is a network authentication protocol. Basically it preserves the integrity of passwords in any untrusted network (like the Internet). Kerberized applications work hand-in-hand with sites that support Kerberos to ensure that passwords cannot be stolen or compromised. A Kerberos installation will make changes to the authentication mechanisms on your network and will overwrite several programs and daemons from the Shadow, Inetutils and Qpopper packages. See http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/heimdal-overwrites for a complete list of all the files and commands to rename each of them.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.h5l.org/dist/src/heimdal-1.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.pdc.kth.se/pub/heimdal/src/heimdal-1.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 7892e97b346534cc9afeeee461fe3bab
Download size: 3.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 136 MB
Estimated build time: 4.0 SBU (additional 1.5 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/heimdal-1.1-blfs_docs-1.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/heimdal-1.1-libss-1.patch

Heimdal Dependencies

Required to Build the Server-Side Tools

Berkeley DB-4.5.20 is recommended (installed in LFS) or GDBM-1.8.3

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, X Window System, and libcap

Note

Some sort of time synchronization facility on your system (like NTP-4.2.4p0) is required since Kerberos won't authenticate if the time differential between a kerberized client and the KDC server is more than 5 minutes.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/heimdal

Installation of Heimdal

Warning

Ensure you really need a Kerberos installation before you decide to install this package. Failure to install and configure the package correctly can alter your system so that users cannot log in.

Install Heimdal by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../heimdal-1.1-blfs_docs-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../heimdal-1.1-libss-1.patch &&

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/heimdal \
            --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib/heimdal \
            --datadir=/var/lib/heimdal \
            --with-hdbdir=/var/lib/heimdal \
            --with-readline=/usr \
            --enable-kcm &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and wish to create alternate forms of the documentation, change into the doc directory and issue any or all of the following commands:

pushd doc                                        &&

make html                                        &&

texi2pdf                            heimdal.texi &&
texi2dvi                            heimdal.texi &&
dvips                -o heimdal.ps  heimdal.dvi  &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o heimdal.txt heimdal.texi &&

texi2pdf                            hx509.texi   &&
texi2dvi                            hx509.texi   &&
dvips                -o hx509.ps    hx509.dvi    &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o hx509.txt   hx509.texi   &&

popd

To test the results, issue: make -k check. The ipropd test is known to fail but all others should pass.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/heimdal-1.1 &&
install -v -m644    doc/{init-creds,layman.asc} \
                    /usr/share/doc/heimdal-1.1 &&

ln -sfv         mech.5 /usr/share/man/man5/qop.5  &&
ln -sfv ../man5/mech.5 /usr/share/man/cat5/qop.5  &&
ln -sfv ../man5/mech.5 /usr/share/man/cat5        &&

mv -v /bin/login          /bin/login.SHADOW &&
mv -v /bin/su             /bin/su.SHADOW    &&
mv -v /usr/bin/{login,su} /bin              &&
ln -v -sf ../../bin/login /usr/bin          &&

for LINK in   lib{otp,kafs,krb5,hx509,asn1,roken,crypto}; do
    mv -v     /usr/lib/${LINK}.so.* /lib &&
    ln -v -sf ../../lib/$(readlink  /usr/lib/${LINK}.so) \
              /usr/lib/${LINK}.so
done &&

mv -v     /usr/lib/$(readlink /usr/lib/libdb.so) \
          /usr/lib/libdb-?.so \
          /lib &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/$(readlink /usr/lib/libdb.so) \
          /usr/lib/libdb.so &&

ldconfig

If you built any of the alternate forms of documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m644 doc/{heimdal,hx509}.{dvi,ps,pdf,html,txt} \
                 /usr/share/doc/heimdal-1.1

If you wish to use the CrackLib-2.8.12 library to enforce strong passwords in the KDC database, issue the following commands as the root user:

sed -e 's|/usr/pkg|/usr|' \
    -e 's|/usr/lib/cracklib_dict|/lib/cracklib/pw_dict|' \
    -e 's|/var/heimdal|/var/lib/heimdal|' \
        lib/kadm5/check-cracklib.pl \
    > /bin/krb5-check-cracklib.pl &&

chmod -v 755 /bin/krb5-check-cracklib.pl

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: This switch causes the daemon programs to be installed into /usr/sbin.

Tip

If you want to preserve all your existing Inetutils package daemons, install the Heimdal daemons into /usr/sbin/heimdal (or wherever you want). Since these programs will be called from (x)inetd or rc scripts, it really doesn't matter where they are installed, as long as they are correctly specified in the /etc/(x)inetd.conf file and rc scripts. If you choose something other than /usr/sbin, you may want to move some of the user programs (such as kadmin) to /usr/sbin manually so they'll be in the privileged user's default PATH.

--localstatedir=/var/lib/heimdal, --datadir=/var/lib/heimdal and --with-hdbdir=/var/lib/heimdal: These parameters are used so that the KDC database and associated files will all reside in /var/lib/heimdal.

--with-readline=/usr: This parameter must be used so that the configure script properly locates the installed Readline package.

--enable-kcm: This parameter enables building the Kerberos Credentials Manager.

ln -sfv .../mech.5 /usr/share/man/...: These commands are used to fix some broken symbolic links.

mv ... ...SHADOW, mv ... /bin and ln ... /usr/bin: The login and su programs installed by Heimdal belong in the /bin directory. The login program is symlinked because Heimdal is expecting to find it in /usr/bin. The old executables from the Shadow package are preserved before the move so that they can be restored if you experience problems logging into the system after the Heimdal package is installed and configured.

for LINK in ...; do ...; done, mv ... /lib and ln ... /usr/lib/libdb.so: The login and su programs previously moved into the /lib directory link against Heimdal libraries as well as libraries provided by the OpenSSL and Berkeley DB packages. These libraries are also moved to /lib so they are FHS compliant and also in case /usr is located on a separate partition which may not always be mounted.

Configuring Heimdal

Config Files

/etc/heimdal/*

Configuration Information

Note

All the configuration steps shown below must be accomplished by the root user unless otherwise noted.

Master KDC Server Configuration

Many of the commands below use <replaceable> tags to identify places where you need to substitute information specific to your network. Ensure you replace everything in these tags (there will be no angle brackets when you are done) with your site-specific information.

Create the Kerberos configuration file with the following commands:

install -v -m755 -d /etc/heimdal &&
cat > /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf

[libdefaults]
    default_realm = <EXAMPLE.COM>
    encrypt = true

[realms]
    <EXAMPLE.COM> = {
        kdc = <hostname.example.com>
        admin_server = <hostname.example.com>
        kpasswd_server = <hostname.example.com>
    }

[domain_realm]
    .<example.com> = <EXAMPLE.COM>

[logging]
    kdc = FILE:/var/log/kdc.log
    admin_server = FILE:/var/log/kadmin.log
    default = FILE:/var/log/krb.log

# End /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf
EOF
chmod -v 644 /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf

You will need to substitute your domain and proper hostname for the occurrences of the <hostname> and <EXAMPLE.COM> names.

default_realm should be the name of your domain changed to ALL CAPS. This isn't required, but both Heimdal and MIT Kerberos recommend it.

encrypt = true provides encryption of all traffic between kerberized clients and servers. It's not necessary and can be left off. If you leave it off, you can encrypt all traffic from the client to the server using a switch on the client program instead. The [realms] parameters tell the client programs where to look for the KDC authentication services. The [domain_realm] section maps a domain to a realm.

Store the master password in a key file using the following commands:

install -v -m755 -d /var/lib/heimdal &&
kstash

Create the KDC database:

kadmin -l

The commands below will prompt you for information about the principles. Choose the defaults for now unless you know what you are doing and need to specify different values. You can go in later and change the defaults, should you feel the need. You may use the up and down arrow keys to use the history feature of kadmin in a similar manner as the bash history feature.

At the kadmin> prompt, issue the following statement:

init <EXAMPLE.COM>

The database must now be populated with at least one principle (user). For now, just use your regular login name or root. You may create as few, or as many principles as you wish using the following statement:

add <loginname>

The KDC server and any machine running kerberized server daemons must have a host key installed:

add --random-key host/<hostname.example.com>

After choosing the defaults when prompted, you will have to export the data to a keytab file:

ext host/<hostname.example.com>

This should have created two files in /etc/heimdal: krb5.keytab (Kerberos 5) and srvtab (Kerberos 4). Both files should have 600 (root rw only) permissions. Keeping the keytab files from public access is crucial to the overall security of the Kerberos installation.

Eventually, you'll want to add server daemon principles to the database and extract them to the keytab file. You do this in the same way you created the host principles. Below is an example:

add --random-key ftp/<hostname.example.com>

(choose the defaults)

ext ftp/<hostname.example.com>

Exit the kadmin program (use quit or exit) and return back to the shell prompt. Start the KDC daemon manually, just to test out the installation:

/usr/sbin/kdc &

Attempt to get a TGT (ticket granting ticket) with the following command:

kinit <loginname>

You will be prompted for the password you created. After you get your ticket, you should list it with the following command:

klist

Information about the ticket should be displayed on the screen.

To test the functionality of the keytab file, issue the following command:

ktutil list

This should dump a list of the host principals, along with the encryption methods used to access the principals.

At this point, if everything has been successful so far, you can feel fairly confident in the installation, setup and configuration of your new Heimdal Kerberos 5 installation.

If you wish to use the CrackLib-2.8.12 library to enforce strong passwords in the KDC database, you must do two things. First, add the following lines to the /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf configuration file:

[password_quality]
    policies = builtin:external-check
    external_program = /bin/krb5-check-cracklib.pl

Next you must install the Crypt::Cracklib Perl module. Download it from the CPAN site. The URL at the time of this writing is http://cpan.org/authors/id/D/DA/DANIEL/Crypt-Cracklib-1.2.tar.gz. After unpacking the tarball and changing into the newly created directory, issue the following command to add the BLFS Cracklib dictionary location to one of the source files:

sed -i 's|pw_dict|&\n\t\t/lib/cracklib/pw_dict|' Cracklib.pm

Then use the standard perl Makefile.PL; make; make test; make install commands. Note that one test fails due to an unknown reason.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/heimdal init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package:

make install-heimdal

Using Kerberized Client Programs

To use the kerberized client programs (telnet, ftp, rsh, rxterm, rxtelnet, rcp, xnlock), you first must get a TGT. Use the kinit program to get the ticket. After you've acquired the ticket, you can use the kerberized programs to connect to any kerberized server on the network. You will not be prompted for authentication until your ticket expires (default is one day), unless you specify a different user as a command line argument to the program.

The kerberized programs will connect to non-kerberized daemons, warning you that authentication is not encrypted.

In order to use the Heimdal X programs, you'll need to add a service port entry to the /etc/services file for the kxd server. There is no 'standardized port number' for the 'kx' service in the IANA database, so you'll have to pick an unused port number. Add an entry to the services file similar to the entry below (substitute your chosen port number for <49150>):

kx              <49150>/tcp   # Heimdal kerberos X
kx              <49150>/udp   # Heimdal kerberos X

For additional information consult the Heimdal hint on which the above instructions are based.

Installed Programs: afslog, ftp, ftpd, gss, hprop, hpropd, hxtool, iprop-log, ipropd-master, ipropd-slave, kadmin, kadmind, kauth, kcm, kdc, kdestroy, kdigest, kf, kfd, kgetcred, kimpersonate, kinit, klist, kpasswd, kpasswdd, krb5-check-cracklib.pl, krb5-config, kstash, ktutil, kx, kxd, login, mk_cmds-krb5, otp, otpprint, pagsh, pfrom, popper, push, rcp, rsh, rshd, rxtelnet, rxterm, string2key, su, telnet, telnetd, tenletxr, verify_krb5_conf and xnlock

Installed Libraries: hdb_ldap.{so,a}, libasn1.{so,a}, libeditline.{so,a}, libgssapi.{so,a}, libhdb.{so,a}, libheimntlm.{so,a}, libhx509.{so,a}, libkadm5clnt.{so,a}, libkadm5srv.{so,a}, libkafs.{so,a}, libkdc.{so,a}, libkrb5.{so,a}, libotp.{so,a}, libroken.{so,a}, libsl.{so,a}, libss-krb5.{so,a} and windc.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/heimdal, /usr/include/gssapi, /usr/include/kadm5, /usr/include/krb5, /usr/include/roken, /usr/include/ss, /usr/share/doc/heimdal-1.1 and /var/lib/heimdal

Short Descriptions

afslog	obtains AFS tokens for a number of cells.
ftp	is a kerberized FTP client.
ftpd	is a kerberized FTP daemon.
hprop	takes a principal database in a specified format and converts it into a stream of Heimdal database records.
hpropd	is a server that receives a database sent by hprop and writes it as a local database.
iprop-log	is used to maintain the iprop log file.
ipropd-master	is a daemon which runs on the master KDC server which incrementally propagates changes to the KDC database to the slave KDC servers.
ipropd-slave	is a daemon which runs on the slave KDC servers which incrementally propagates changes to the KDC database from the master KDC server.
kadmin	is a utility used to make modifications to the Kerberos database.
kadmind	is a server for administrative access to the Kerberos database.
kauth	is a symbolic link to the kinit program.
kcm	is a process based credential cache for Kerberos tickets.
kdc	is a Kerberos 5 server.
kdestroy	removes a principle's current set of tickets.
kf	is a program which forwards tickets to a remote host through an authenticated and encrypted stream.
kfd	is a server used to receive forwarded tickets.
kgetcred	obtains a ticket for a service.
kinit	is used to authenticate to the Kerberos server as a principal and acquire a ticket granting ticket that can later be used to obtain tickets for other services.
klist	reads and displays the current tickets in the credential cache.
kpasswd	is a program for changing Kerberos 5 passwords.
kpasswdd	is a Kerberos 5 password changing server.
krb5-config	gives information on how to link programs against Heimdal libraries.
kstash	stores the KDC master password in a file.
ktutil	is a program for managing Kerberos keytabs.
kx	is a program which securely forwards X connections.
kxd	is the daemon for kx.
login	is a kerberized login program.
otp	manages one-time passwords.
otpprint	prints lists of one-time passwords.
pfrom	is a script that runs push --from.
popper	is a kerberized POP-3 server.
push	is a kerberized POP mail retrieval client.
rcp	is a kerberized rcp client program.
rsh	is a kerberized rsh client program.
rshd	is a kerberized rsh server.
rxtelnet	starts a secure xterm window with a telnet to a given host and forwards X connections.
rxterm	starts a secure remote xterm.
string2key	maps a password into a key.
su	is a kerberized su client program.
telnet	is a kerberized telnet client program.
telnetd	is a kerberized telnet server.
tenletxr	forwards X connections backwards.
verify_krb5_conf	checks `krb5.conf` file for obvious errors.
xnlock	is a program that acts as a secure screen saver for workstations running X.
`libasn1.{so,a}`	provides the ASN.1 and DER functions to encode and decode the Kerberos TGTs.
`libeditline.a`	is a command-line editing library with history.
`libgssapi.{so,a}`	contain the Generic Security Service Application Programming Interface (GSSAPI) functions which provides security services to callers in a generic fashion, supportable with a range of underlying mechanisms and technologies and hence allowing source-level portability of applications to different environments.
`libhdb.{so,a}`	is a Heimdal Kerberos 5 authentication/authorization database access library.
`libkadm5clnt.{so,a}`	contains the administrative authentication and password checking functions required by Kerberos 5 client-side programs.
`libkadm5srv.{so,a}`	contain the administrative authentication and password checking functions required by Kerberos 5 servers.
`libkafs.{so,a}`	contains the functions required to authenticated to AFS.
`libkrb5.{so,a}`	is an all-purpose Kerberos 5 library.
`libotp.{so,a}`	contains the functions required to handle authenticating one time passwords.
`libroken.{so,a}`	is a library containing Kerberos 5 compatibility functions.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

MIT Kerberos V5-1.6

Introduction to MIT Kerberos V5

MIT Kerberos V5 is a free implementation of Kerberos 5. Kerberos is a network authentication protocol. It centralizes the authentication database and uses kerberized applications to work with servers or services that support Kerberos allowing single logins and encrypted communication over internal networks or the Internet.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/dist/krb5/1.6/krb5-1.6-signed.tar
Download MD5 sum: a365e39ff7d39639556c2797a0e1c3f4
Download size: 12.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 124 MB
Estimated build time: 1.4 SBU

MIT Kerberos V5 Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 (for xdm based logins), OpenLDAP-2.3.39, and DejaGnu-1.4.4 (required to run the test suite)

Note

Some sort of time synchronization facility on your system (like NTP-4.2.4p0) is required since Kerberos won't authenticate if there is a time difference between a kerberized client and the KDC server.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/mitkrb

Installation of MIT Kerberos V5

MIT Kerberos V5 is distributed in a TAR file containing a compressed TAR package and a detached PGP ASC file. You'll need to unpack the distribution tar file, then unpack the compressed tar file before starting the build.

After unpacking the distribution tarball and if you have GnuPG-1.4.7 installed, you can authenticate the package with the following command:

gpg - -verify krb5-1.6.tar.gz.asc

Build MIT Kerberos V5 by running the following commands:

cd src &&
./configure CPPFLAGS="-I/usr/include/et -I/usr/include/ss" \
            --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/krb5 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --with-system-et \
            --with-system-ss \
            --enable-dns-for-realm \
            --mandir=/usr/share/man &&
make

The regression test suite is designed to be run after the installation has been completed.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

mv -v /usr/bin/ksu /bin &&
chmod -v 755 /bin/ksu &&
mv -v /usr/lib/libkrb5.so.3* /lib &&
mv -v /usr/lib/libk5crypto.so.3* /lib &&
mv -v /usr/lib/libkrb5support.so.0* /lib &&

ln -v -sf ../../lib/libkrb5.so.3.3 /usr/lib/libkrb5.so &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libk5crypto.so.3.1 /usr/lib/libk5crypto.so &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libkrb5support.so.0.1 /usr/lib/libkrb5support.so&&

install -m644 -v ../doc/*.info* /usr/share/info &&
for INFOFILE in 425 5-admin 5-install 5-user; do
    install-info --info-dir=/usr/share/info \
                 /usr/share/info/krb$INFOFILE.info
    rm ../doc/krb$INFOFILE.info*
done &&

install -m755 -v -d /usr/share/doc/krb5-1.6 &&
cp -Rv ../doc/* /usr/share/doc/krb5-1.6

Warning

login.krb5 does not support Shadow passwords. As a result, when the Kerberos server is unavailable, the default fall through to /etc/passwd will not work because the passwords have been moved to /etc/shadow during the LFS build process. Entering the following commands without moving the passwords back to /etc/passwd could prevent any logins.

After considering (and understanding) the above warning, the following commands can be entered as the root user to replace the existing login program with the Kerberized version (after preserving the original) and move the support libraries to a location available when the /usr filesystem is not mounted:

mv -v /bin/login /bin/login.shadow &&
install -m755 -v /usr/sbin/login.krb5 /bin/login &&

mv -v /usr/lib/libdes425.so.3* /lib &&
mv -v /usr/lib/libkrb4.so.2* /lib &&

ln -v -sf ../../lib/libdes425.so.3.0 /usr/lib/libdes425.so &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libkrb4.so.2.0 /usr/lib/libkrb4.so &&

ldconfig

To test the installation, you must have DejaGnu-1.4.4 installed and issue: make check. The RPC layer tests will require a portmap daemon (see portmap-6.0) running and configured to listen on the regular network interface (not localhost). See the “Testing the Build” section of the krb5-install.html file in the ../doc directory for complete information on running the regression tests.

Command Explanations

--enable-dns-for-realm: This parameter allows realms to be resolved using the DNS server.

--with-system-et: This parameter causes the build to use the system-installed versions of the error-table support software.

--with-system-ss: This parameter causes the build to use the system-installed versions of the subsystem command-line interface software.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This parameter is used so that the Kerberos variable run-time data is located in /var/lib instead of /usr/var.

mv -v /usr/bin/ksu /bin: Moves the ksu program to the /bin directory so that it is available when the /usr filesystem is not mounted.

mv -v ... /lib && ln -v -sf ...: These libraries are moved to /lib so they are available when the /usr filesystem is not mounted.

Configuring MIT Kerberos V5

Config Files

/etc/krb5/krb5.conf and /var/lib/krb5kdc/kdc.conf

Configuration Information

Kerberos Configuration

Tip

You should consider installing some sort of password checking dictionary so that you can configure the installation to only accept strong passwords. A suitable dictionary to use is shown in the CrackLib-2.8.12 instructions. Note that only one file can be used, but you can concatenate many files into one. The configuration file shown below assumes you have installed a dictionary to /usr/share/dict/words.

Create the Kerberos configuration file with the following commands issued by the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /etc/krb5 &&
cat > /etc/krb5/krb5.conf << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/krb5/krb5.conf

[libdefaults]
    default_realm = <LFS.ORG>
    encrypt = true

[realms]
    <LFS.ORG> = {
        kdc = <belgarath.lfs.org>
        admin_server = <belgarath.lfs.org>
        dict_file = /usr/share/dict/words
    }

[domain_realm]
    .<lfs.org> = <LFS.ORG>

[logging]
    kdc = SYSLOG[:INFO[:AUTH]]
    admin_server = SYSLOG[INFO[:AUTH]]
    default = SYSLOG[[:SYS]]

# End /etc/krb5/krb5.conf
EOF

You will need to substitute your domain and proper hostname for the occurences of the <belgarath> and <lfs.org> names.

default_realm should be the name of your domain changed to ALL CAPS. This isn't required, but both Heimdal and MIT recommend it.

The [realms] parameters tell the client programs where to look for the KDC authentication services.

The [domain_realm] section maps a domain to a realm.

Create the KDC database:

kdb5_util create -r <LFS.ORG> -s

Now you should populate the database with principles (users). For now, just use your regular login name or root.

kadmin.local
kadmin: add_policy dict-only
kadmin: addprinc -policy dict-only <loginname>

The KDC server and any machine running kerberized server daemons must have a host key installed:

kadmin: addprinc -randkey host/<belgarath.lfs.org>

After choosing the defaults when prompted, you will have to export the data to a keytab file:

kadmin: ktadd host/<belgarath.lfs.org>

This should have created a file in /etc/krb5 named krb5.keytab (Kerberos 5). This file should have 600 (root rw only) permissions. Keeping the keytab files from public access is crucial to the overall security of the Kerberos installation.

Eventually, you'll want to add server daemon principles to the database and extract them to the keytab file. You do this in the same way you created the host principles. Below is an example:

kadmin: addprinc -randkey ftp/<belgarath.lfs.org>
kadmin: ktadd ftp/<belgarath.lfs.org>

Exit the kadmin program (use quit or exit) and return back to the shell prompt. Start the KDC daemon manually, just to test out the installation:

/usr/sbin/krb5kdc &

Attempt to get a ticket with the following command:

kinit <loginname>

You will be prompted for the password you created. After you get your ticket, you can list it with the following command:

klist

Information about the ticket should be displayed on the screen.

To test the functionality of the keytab file, issue the following command:

ktutil
ktutil: rkt /etc/krb5/krb5.keytab
ktutil: l

This should dump a list of the host principal, along with the encryption methods used to access the principal.

At this point, if everything has been successful so far, you can feel fairly confident in the installation and configuration of the package.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/kerberos init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-kerberos

Using Kerberized Client Programs

To use the kerberized client programs (telnet, ftp, rsh, rcp, rlogin), you first must get an authentication ticket. Use the kinit program to get the ticket. After you've acquired the ticket, you can use the kerberized programs to connect to any kerberized server on the network. You will not be prompted for authentication until your ticket expires (default is one day), unless you specify a different user as a command line argument to the program.

The kerberized programs will connect to non kerberized daemons, warning you that authentication is not encrypted.

Using Kerberized Server Programs

Using kerberized server programs (telnetd, kpropd, klogind and kshd) requires two additional configuration steps. First the /etc/services file must be updated to include eklogin and krb5_prop. Second, the inetd.conf or xinetd.conf must be modified for each server that will be activated, usually replacing the server from Inetutils-1.5.

Additional Information

For additional information consult Documentation for krb-1.6 on which the above instructions are based.

Installed Programs: ftp, ftpd, gss-client, gss-server, k5srvutil, kadmin, kadmin.local, kadmind, kdb5_ldap_util, kdb5_util, kdestroy, kinit, klist, klogind, kpasswd, kprop, kpropd, krb5-config, krb5-send-pr, krb524d, krb524init, krb5kdc, kshd, ksu, ktutil, kvno, login.krb5, rcp, rlogin, rsh, sclient, sim_client, sim_server, sserver, telnet, telnetd, uuclient, uuserver and v4rcp

Installed Libraries: libdes425.so, libgssapi_krb5.so, libgssrpc.so, libk5crypto.so, libkadm5clnt.so, libkadm5srv.so, libkdb5.so, libkdb_ldap.so, libkrb4.so, libkrb5.so and libkrb5support.so

Installed Directories: /etc/krb5, /usr/include/{gssapi,gssrpc,kerberosIV,krb5}, /usr/lib/krb5, /usr/share/{doc/krb5-1.6,examples,gnats} and /var/lib/krb5kdc

Short Descriptions

ftp	is a kerberized FTP client.
ftpd	is a kerberized FTP daemon.
k5srvutil	is a host keytable manipulation utility.
kadmin	is an utility used to make modifications to the Kerberos database.
kadmind	is a server for administrative access to a Kerberos database.
kdb5_util	is the KDC database utility.
kdestroy	removes the current set of tickets.
kinit	is used to authenticate to the Kerberos server as a principal and acquire a ticket granting ticket that can later be used to obtain tickets for other services.
klist	reads and displays the current tickets in the credential cache.
klogind	is the server that responds to rlogin requests.
kpasswd	is a program for changing Kerberos 5 passwords.
kprop	takes a principal database in a specified format and converts it into a stream of database records.
kpropd	receives a database sent by kprop and writes it as a local database.
krb5-config	gives information on how to link programs against libraries.
krb5kdc	is a Kerberos 5 server.
kshd	is the server that responds to rsh requests.
ksu	is the super user program using Kerberos protocol. Requires a properly configured `/etc/shells` and `~/.k5login` containing principals authorized to become super users.
ktutil	is a program for managing Kerberos keytabs.
kvno	prints keyversion numbers of Kerberos principals.
login.krb5	is a kerberized login program.
rcp	is a kerberized rcp client program.
rlogin	is a kerberized rlogin client program.
rsh	is a kerberized rsh client program.
telnet	is a kerberized telnet client program.
telnetd	is a kerberized telnet server.
`libgssapi_krb5.so`	contain the Generic Security Service Application Programming Interface (GSSAPI) functions which provides security services to callers in a generic fashion, supportable with a range of underlying mechanisms and technologies and hence allowing source-level portability of applications to different environments.
`libkadm5clnt.so`	contains the administrative authentication and password checking functions required by Kerberos 5 client-side programs.
`libkadm5srv.so`	contain the administrative authentication and password checking functions required by Kerberos 5 servers.
`libkdb5.so`	is a Kerberos 5 authentication/authorization database access library.
`libkrb5.so`	is an all-purpose Kerberos 5 library.

Last updated on 2007-10-16 06:29:13 -0500

Cyrus SASL-2.1.22

Introduction to Cyrus SASL

The Cyrus SASL package contains a Simple Authentication and Security Layer, a method for adding authentication support to connection-based protocols. To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions. If its use is negotiated, a security layer is inserted between the protocol and the connection.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.andrew.cmu.edu/pub/cyrus-mail/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.andrew.cmu.edu/pub/cyrus-mail/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 45dde9d19193ae9dd388eb68b2027bc9
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Cyrus SASL Dependencies

Required

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, JDK-6 Update 5, MySQL-5.0.41, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, GDBM-1.8.3, krb4, SQLite, and Dmalloc

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/cyrus-sasl

Installation of Cyrus SASL

Install Cyrus SASL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --with-dbpath=/var/lib/sasl/sasldb2 \
            --with-saslauthd=/var/run/saslauthd &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite. If you are planning on using the GSSAPI authentication mechanism, it is recommended to test it after installing the package using the sample server and client programs which were built in the preceding step. Instructions for performing the tests can be found at http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/hints/downloads/files/cyrus-sasl.txt.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{*.{html,txt,fig},ONEWS,TODO} \
    saslauthd/LDAP_SASLAUTHD /usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22 &&
install -v -m700 -d /var/lib/sasl /var/run/saslauthd

Command Explanations

--with-dbpath=/var/lib/sasl/sasldb2: This parameter forces the sasldb database to be created in /var/lib/sasl instead of /etc.

--with-saslauthd=/var/run/saslauthd: This parameter forces saslauthd to use the FHS compliant directory /var/run/saslauthd for variable run-time data.

--with-dblib=gdbm: This parameter forces GDBM to be used instead of Berkeley DB.

--with-ldap: This parameter enables use with OpenLDAP.

--enable-ldapdb: This parameter enables the LDAPDB authentication backend. There is a circular dependency with this parameter. See http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/cyrus-sasl for a solution to this problem.

install -v -m644 ...: These commands install documentation which is not installed by the make install command.

install -v -m700 -d /var/lib/sasl /var/run/saslauthd: These directories must exist when starting saslauthd or using the sasldb plugin. If you're not going to be running the daemon or using the plugins, you may omit the creation of this directory.

Configuring Cyrus SASL

Config Files

/etc/saslauthd.conf (for saslauthd LDAP configuration) and /etc/sasl2/Appname.conf (where "Appname" is the application defined name of the application)

Configuration Information

See file:///usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22/sysadmin.html for information on what to include in the application configuration files. See file:///usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22/LDAP_SASLAUTHD for configuring saslauthd with OpenLDAP.

Init Script

If you need to run the saslauthd daemon at system startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/cyrus-sasl init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-cyrus-sasl

Note

You'll need to modify the init script and replace the <authmech> parameter to the -a switch with your desired authentication mechanism.

Installed Programs: saslauthd, sasldblistusers2, and saslpasswd2

Installed Libraries: libjavasasl.so, libsasl2.so, and numerous SASL plugins and Java classes

Installed Directories: /usr/include/sasl, /usr/lib/java/classes/sasl, /usr/lib/sasl2, /usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.22, and /var/lib/sasl

Short Descriptions

saslauthd	is the SASL authentication server.
sasldblistusers2	is used to list the users in the SASL password database `sasldb2`.
saslpasswd2	is used to set and delete a user's SASL password and mechanism specific secrets in the SASL password database `sasldb2`.
`libsasl2.so`	is a general purpose authentication library for server and client applications.

Last updated on 2007-09-04 07:50:55 -0500

Stunnel-4.21

Introduction to Stunnel

The Stunnel package contains a program that allows you to encrypt arbitrary TCP connections inside SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) so you can easily communicate with clients over secure channels. Stunnel can be used to add SSL functionality to commonly used Inetd daemons like POP-2, POP-3, and IMAP servers, to standalone daemons like NNTP, SMTP and HTTP, and in tunneling PPP over network sockets without changes to the server package source code.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.stunnel.org/download/stunnel/src/stunnel-4.21.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://stunnel.mirt.net/stunnel/stunnel-4.21.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1eaec5228979beca4d548f453304e311
Download size: 528 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/stunnel-4.21-setuid-1.patch

Stunnel Dependencies

Required

Optional

TCP Wrapper-7.6

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/stunnel

Installation of Stunnel

The stunnel daemon will be run in a chroot jail by an unprivileged user. Create the new user and group using the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 51 stunnel &&
useradd -c "Stunnel Daemon" -d /var/lib/stunnel \
        -g stunnel -s /bin/false -u 51 stunnel

Note

A signed SSL Certificate and a Private Key is necessary to run the stunnel daemon. If you own, or have already created a signed SSL Certificate you wish to use, copy it to /etc/stunnel/stunnel.pem before starting the build (ensure only root has read and write access), otherwise you will be prompted to create one during the installation process. The .pem file must be formatted as shown below:

-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
<many encrypted lines of unencrypted key>
-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
<many encrypted lines of certificate>
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

Install Stunnel by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../stunnel-4.21-setuid-1.patch &&

sed -i 's|nogroup|stunnel|g' configure &&
sed -i 's|$(prefix)/var/lib|$(localstatedir)|' tools/Makefile.in &&

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --disable-libwrap &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make docdir=/usr/share/doc/stunnel-4.21 install

Command Explanations

sed -i 's|nogroup|stunnel|g' configure: This command is used to change the default group for the installed files in /var/lib/stunnel from nogroup to stunnel.

sed -i '...' tools/Makefile.in: This command ensures that the chroot jail will be located in /var/lib/stunnel instead of /usr/var/lib/stunnel.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This parameter forces the configuration directory to /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This parameter sets the installation to use /var/lib/stunnel instead of creating and using /usr/var/stunnel.

--disable-libwrap: This parameter is required if you don't have tcpwrappers installed. Remove the parameter if tcpwrappers is installed.

make docdir=... install: This command installs the package, changes the documentation installation directory to standard naming conventions and, if you did not copy an stunnel.pem file to the /etc/stunnel directory, prompts you for the necessary information to create one. Ensure you reply to the

Common Name (FQDN of your server) [localhost]:

prompt with the name or IP address you will be using to access the service(s).

Configuring Stunnel

Config Files

/etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf

Configuration Information

As the root user, create the directory used for the .pid file that is created when the Stunnel daemon starts:

install -v -m750 -o stunnel -g stunnel -d /var/lib/stunnel/run

Next, create a basic /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf configuration file using the following commands as the root user:

cat >/etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf << "EOF" &&
; File: /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf

pid    = /run/stunnel.pid
chroot = /var/lib/stunnel
client = no
setuid = stunnel
setgid = stunnel

EOF
chmod -v 644 /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf

Finally, you need to add the service(s) you wish to encrypt to the configuration file. The format is as follows:

[<service>]
accept  = <hostname:portnumber>
connect = <hostname:portnumber>

If you use Stunnel to encrypt a daemon started from [x]inetd, you may need to disable that daemon in the /etc/[x]inetd.conf file and enable a corresponding <service>_stunnel service. You may have to add an appropriate entry in /etc/services as well.

For a full explanation of the commands and syntax used in the configuration file, run man stunnel. To see a BLFS example of an actual setup of an stunnel encrypted service, read the the section called “Configuring SWAT” in the Samba instructions.

Boot Script

To automatically start the stunnel daemon when the system is rebooted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/stunnel bootscript from the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-stunnel

Installed Programs: stunnel and stunnel3

Installed Library: libstunnel.so

Installed Directories: /etc/stunnel, /usr/lib/stunnel, /usr/share/doc/stunnel-4.21 and /var/lib/stunnel

Short Descriptions

stunnel	is a program designed to work as an SSL encryption wrapper between remote clients and local ({x}inetd-startable) or remote servers.
stunnel3	is a Perl wrapper script to use stunnel 3.x syntax with stunnel >=4.05.
`libstunnel.so`	contains the API functions required by Stunnel.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 13:33:19 -0500

Sudo-1.6.9p15

Introduction to Sudo

The sudo package allows a system administrator to give certain users (or groups of users) the ability to run some (or all) commands as root or another user while logging the commands and arguments.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.sudo.ws/sudo/dist/sudo-1.6.9p15.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.twaren.net/Unix/Security/Sudo/sudo-1.6.9p15.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 06cfeed4ececfce6c82e03974c588066
Download size: 581 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.9 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Sudo Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, Opie, SecurID, FWTK, an MTA (that provides a sendmail command), krb4, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, and AFS

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/sudo

Installation of Sudo

Install sudo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib \
    --with-ignore-dot --with-all-insults \
    --enable-shell-sets-home --disable-root-sudo \
    --with-logfac=auth --without-pam --without-sendmail &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-ignore-dot: This switch causes sudo to ignore '.' in the PATH.

--with-all-insults: This switch includes all the sudo insult sets.

--enable-shell-sets-home: This switch sets HOME to the target user in shell mode.

--disable-root-sudo: This switch keeps the root user from running sudo, preventing users from chaining commands to get a root shell.

--with-logfac=auth: This switch forces use of the auth facility for logging.

--without-pam: This switch disables the use of PAM authentication. Omit if you have PAM installed.

--without-sendmail: This switch disables the use of sendmail. Remove if you have a sendmail compatible MTA.

--enable-noargs-shell: This switch allows sudo to run a shell if invoked with no arguments.

Note

There are many options to sudo's configure command. Check the configure --help output for a complete list.

Configuring Sudo

Config File

/etc/sudoers

Configuration Information

The sudoers file can be quite complicated. It is composed of two types of entries: aliases (basically variables) and user specifications (which specify who may run what). The installation installs a default configuration that has no privileges installed for any user.

One example usage is to allow the system administrator to execute any program without typing a password each time root privileges are needed. This can be configured as:

# User alias specification
User_Alias  ADMIN = YourLoginId

# Allow people in group ADMIN to run all commands without a password
ADMIN       ALL = NOPASSWD: ALL

For details, see man sudoers.

Note

The Sudo developers highly recommend using the visudo program to edit the sudoers file. This will provide basic sanity checking like syntax parsing and file permission to avoid some possible mistakes that could lead to a vulnerable configuration.

If you've built Sudo with PAM support, issue the following command as the root user to create the PAM configuration file:

sed -e 's@/su@/sudo@' -e '/pam_rootok/d' \
    /etc/pam.d/su > /etc/pam.d/sudo

Installed Programs: sudo, sudoedit, and visudo

Installed Library: sudo_noexec.so

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

sudo	executes a command as another user as permitted by the `/etc/sudoers` configuration file.
sudoedit	is a hard link to sudo that implies the `-e` option to invoke an editor as another user.
visudo	allows for safer editing of the `sudoers` file.
`sudo_noexec.so`	enables support for the "noexec" functionality which prevents a dynamically-linked program being run by sudo from executing another program (think shell escapes).

Last updated on 2008-08-17 11:30:32 -0500

NSS-3.11.7

Introduction to NSS

The Network Security Services (NSS) package is a set of libraries designed to support cross-platform development of security-enabled client and server applications. Applications built with NSS can support SSL v2 and v3, TLS, PKCS #5, PKCS #7, PKCS #11, PKCS #12, S/MIME, X.509 v3 certificates, and other security standards. This is useful for implementing SSL and S/MIME or other Internet security standards into an application.

The NSS package requires the Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) libraries as a prerequisite for building. The NSS package tarball contains the code necessary to build the NSPR libraries. These libraries are built and installed using the instructions below. Essentially, the NSS package is now a combined NSS/NSPR installation.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/security/nss/releases/NSS_3_11_7_RTM/src/nss-3.11.7-with-nspr-4.6.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/security/nss/releases/NSS_3_11_7_RTM/src/nss-3.11.7-with-nspr-4.6.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0b0c6bdf63c442d68453e470b8747a9d
Download size: 5.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 71 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU (additional 0.9 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/nss-3.11.7-with-nspr-4.6.7-fedora_fixes-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/nss

Installation of NSS

Install NSS by running the following commands:

bash

export WORKINGDIR=$PWD &&
export BUILD_OPT=1 &&

patch -Np1 -i ../nss-3.11.7-with-nspr-4.6.7-fedora_fixes-1.patch &&

cd mozilla/security/nss &&
make nss_build_all &&
cd ../.. &&

export NSS_LINUXDIR=$(basename `ls -d $WORKINGDIR/mozilla/dist/Linux*`)

To test the results, you'll need to set the domain name of your system in the DOMSUF environment variable. Most of the tests will fail if you don't provide the correct domain name. A self-generated log file will be parsed at the end of the test to display how many tests passed. It should return 800. To run the tests, ensure you change the export DOMSUF command below to an appropriate value, e.g., mydomain.com and issue the following commands:

bash

export DOMSUF=<validdomain.name> &&
export PATH=$PATH:$WORKINGDIR/mozilla/dist/$NSS_LINUXDIR/bin &&
export TEST_RESULTSDIR=$WORKINGDIR/mozilla/tests_results/security &&

cd security/nss/tests &&
sed -i 's/gmake/make/' common/init.sh &&
./all.sh &&

grep Passed $TEST_RESULTSDIR/$(hostname).1/results.html | wc -l &&

exit

Caution

If you switch to the root user using a method that does not inherit the environment from the unprivileged user, ensure that root's NSS_LINUXDIR environment variable is set correctly before proceeding with the installation commands.

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m755 nsprpub/$NSS_LINUXDIR/config/nspr-config \
                 security/nss/cmd/config/nss-config \
    /usr/bin &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/lib/pkgconfig &&
install -v -m644 nsprpub/lib/pkgconfig/nspr.pc \
                 security/nss/lib/pkgconfig/nss.pc \
    /usr/lib/pkgconfig &&

cd dist &&

install -v -m755 $NSS_LINUXDIR/lib/*.so /usr/lib &&
install -v -m644 $NSS_LINUXDIR/lib/{*.chk,libcrmf.a} /usr/lib &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/include/{nss,nspr} &&
install -v -m644 {public,private}/nss/* /usr/include/nss &&
cp -v -RL $NSS_LINUXDIR/include/* /usr/include/nspr &&
chmod -v 644 /usr/include/nspr/prvrsion.h

Now as the unprivileged user, exit the bash shell started at the beginning of the installation to restore the environment to the original state.

exit

Command Explanations

bash: Shells are started as many environment variables are created during the installation process. Exiting the shells serves the purpose of restoring the environment and returning back to the original directory when the installation is complete.

export WORKINGDIR=$PWD: This variable is set because many of the commands are dependent on knowing the full path of certain directories. WORKINGDIR establishes a known path so that all others can be determined relative to this.

export BUILD_OPT=1: This variable is set so that the build is performed with no debugging symbols built into the binaries and that the default compiler optimizations are used.

export NSS_LINUXDIR=...: This variable is set so that the exact name of the architecture specific directories where the binaries are stored in the source tree can be determined.

make nss_build_all: This command builds the NSPR and NSS libraries and creates a dist directory which houses all the programs, libraries and interface headers. None of the programs created by this process are installed onto the system using the default instructions. If you need any of these programs installed, you can find them in the mozilla/dist/bin directory of the source tree.

export PATH=...: This command sets the PATH environment variable to include the executables in the source tree as some of them are required to run the test suite.

sed -i 's/gmake/make/' common/init.sh: This command changes the command used to compile some test programs.

Installed Programs: nspr-config and nss-config

Installed Libraries: libcrmf.a, libfreebl3.so, libnspr4.so, libnss3.so, libnssckbi.so, libplc4.so, libplds4.so, libsmime3.so, libsoftokn3.so and libssl3.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/nspr and /usr/include/nss

Short Descriptions

nspr-config	is used to determine the NSPR installation settings of the installed NSPR libraries.
nss-config	is used to determine the NSS library settings of the installed NSS libraries.

The libnspr4.so, libplc4.so and libplds4.so libraries make up the Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) libraries. These libraries provide a platform-neutral API for system level and libc like functions. The API is used in the Mozilla client, many of the Netscape/AOL/iPlanet offerings and other software applications.

The libcrmf.a, libfreebl.so, libnss3.so, libnssckbi.so, libsmime3.so, libsoftokn3.so and libnssl3.so libraries make up the NSS libraries.

Last updated on 2007-07-15 10:53:33 -0500

Chapter 5. File Systems

Journaling file systems reduce the time needed to recover a file system that was not unmounted properly. While this can be extremely important in reducing downtime for servers, it has also become popular for desktop environments. This chapter contains two other journaling file systems you can use instead of the default LFS third extended file system.

ReiserFS-3.6.20

Introduction to ReiserFS

The ReiserFS package contains various utilities for use with the Reiser file system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/r/reiserfsprogs-3.6.20.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/r/reiserfsprogs-3.6.20.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 3b3392f59c5d302cf858bc4cf194b258
Download size: 500 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/reiser

Installation of ReiserFS

Install ReiserFS by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sbindir=/sbin &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -sf reiserfsck /sbin/fsck.reiserfs &&
ln -sf mkreiserfs /sbin/mkfs.reiserfs

Command Explanations

--prefix=/usr: This ensures that the manual pages are installed in the correct location while still installing the programs in /sbin as they should be.

--sbindir=/sbin: This ensures that the ReiserFS utilities are installed in /sbin as they should be.

Installed Programs: debugreiserfs, mkreiserfs, reiserfsck, reiserfstune, and resize_reiserfs

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

debugreiserfs	can sometimes help to solve problems with ReiserFS file systems. If it is called without options, it prints the super block of any ReiserFS file system found on the device.
mkreiserfs	creates a ReiserFS file system.
reiserfsck	is used to check or repair a ReiserFS file system.
reiserfstune	is used for tuning the ReiserFS journal. WARNING: Don't use this utility without first reading the man page thoroughly.
resize_reiserfs	is used to resize an unmounted ReiserFS file system.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 11:52:33 -0500

XFS-2.9.7

Introduction to XFS

The XFS package contains administration and debugging tools for the XFS file system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/sources/xfsprogs_2.9.7-1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 2bba6d3e4183defacf99e5e8ce805460
Download size: 976 KB
Estimated disk space required: 37 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Caution

The XFS developers regularly remove the current package when a new package is available. Unfortunately, this has led to severe incompatibilities, including unmountable filesystems, due to kernel version requirements in new versions of the package. Using a version not in the book is strongly discouraged. Additional information, is available at the XFS project page.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xfs

Installation of XFS

Install XFS by running the following commands:

make DEBUG=-DNDEBUG INSTALL_USER=root INSTALL_GROUP=root \
    LOCAL_CONFIGURE_OPTIONS="--enable-readline=yes"

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-dev &&
chmod -v 755 /lib/libhandle.so* &&
rm -f /lib/libhandle.{a,la,so} &&
ln -svf ../../lib/libhandle.so.1 /usr/lib/libhandle.so

Command Explanations

make DEBUG=-DNDEBUG: Turns off debugging symbols.

INSTALL_USER=root INSTALL_GROUP=root: This sets the owner and group of the installed files.

LOCAL_CONFIGURE_OPTIONS="...": This passes extra configuration options to the configure script. The example --enable-readline=yes parameter enables linking the XFS programs with the libreadline.so library, in order to allow editing interactive commands.

OPTIMIZER="...": Adding this parameter to the end of the make command overrides the default optimization settings.

make install-dev: This command installs static XFS libraries, their headers and the corresponding documentation.

Installed Programs: fsck.xfs, mkfs.xfs, xfs_admin, xfs_bmap, xfs_check, xfs_copy, xfs_db, xfs_freeze, xfs_growfs, xfs_info, xfs_io, xfs_logprint, xfs_mdrestore, xfs_metadump, xfs_mkfile, xfs_ncheck, xfs_quota, xfs_repair, and xfs_rtcp

Installed Libraries: libdisk.a, libhandle.{so,a}, libxcmd.a, libxfs.a, and libxlog.a

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/xfsprogs

Short Descriptions

fsck.xfs	simply exits with a zero status, since XFS partitions are checked at mount time.
mkfs.xfs	constructs an XFS file system.
xfs_admin	changes the parameters of an XFS file system.
xfs_bmap	prints block mapping for an XFS file.
xfs_check	checks XFS file system consistency.
xfs_copy	copies the contents of an XFS file system to one or more targets in parallel.
xfs_db	is used to debug an XFS file system.
xfs_freeze	suspends access to an XFS file system.
xfs_growfs	expands an XFS file system.
xfs_info	is equivalent to invoking xfs_growfs, but specifying that no change to the file system is to be made.
xfs_io	is a debugging tool like xfs_db, but is aimed at examining the regular file I/O path rather than the raw XFS volume itself.
xfs_logprint	prints the log of an XFS file system.
xfs_mdrestore	restores an XFS metadump image to a filesystem image.
xfs_metadump	copies XFS filesystem metadata to a file.
xfs_mkfile	creates an XFS file, padded with zeroes by default.
xfs_ncheck	generates pathnames from inode numbers for an XFS file system.
xfs_quota	is a utility for reporting and editing various aspects of filesystem quota.
xfs_repair	repairs corrupt or damaged XFS file systems.
xfs_rtcp	copies a file to the real-time partition on an XFS file system.
`libhandle.so`	contains XFS-specific functions that provide a way to perform certain filesystem operations without using a file descriptor to access filesystem objects.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Chapter 6. Editors

This chapter is referenced in the LFS book for those wishing to use other editors on their LFS system. You're also shown how some LFS installed programs benefit from being recompiled after GUI libraries have been installed.

Vim-7.1

Introduction to Vim

The Vim package, which is an abbreviation for VI IMproved, contains a vi clone with extra features as compared to the original vi.

The default LFS instructions install vim as a part of the base system. If you would prefer to link vim against X, you should recompile vim to enable GUI mode. There is no need for special instructions since X support is automatically detected.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.at.vim.org/pub/vim/unix/vim-7.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/unix/vim-7.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 44c6b4914f38d6f9aa959640b89da329
Download size: 6.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 75 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/vim-7.1-mandir-1.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/vim-7.1-fixes-6.patch
Translated Vim messages: http://ftp.at.vim.org/pub/vim/extra/vim-7.1-lang.tar.gz

Vim Dependencies

Optional

GTK+-2.10.13 or LessTif-0.95.0 or GTK+-1.2.10, Python-2.5.2, Tcl-8.4.18, Ruby-1.8.6-p111, and GPM-1.20.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/vim

Installation of Vim

Note

If you recompile Vim to link against X and your X libraries are not on the root partition, you will no longer have an editor for use in emergencies. You may choose to install an additional editor, not link Vim against X, or move the current vim executable to the /bin directory under a different name such as vi.

If desired, unpack the translated messages archive:

tar -xf ../vim-7.1-lang.tar.gz --strip-components=1

Install Vim by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../vim-7.1-mandir-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../vim-7.1-fixes-6.patch &&
echo '#define SYS_VIMRC_FILE "/etc/vimrc"' >> src/feature.h &&
echo '#define SYS_GVIMRC_FILE "/etc/gvimrc"' >> src/feature.h &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-features=huge &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test. The vim test suite outputs a lot of binary data to the screen, which can cause issues with the settings of the current terminal. This can be resolved by redirecting the output to a log file. Even if one of the tests fails to produce the file test.out in src/testdir, the remaining tests will still be executed. If all goes well,the final message in the log file will be ALL DONE. Note: Some color tests expect to be executed under the xterm terminal emulator.

Now, as the root user:

make install

By default, Vim's documentation is installed in /usr/share/vim. The following symlink allows the documentation to be accessed via /usr/share/doc/vim-7.1, making it consistent with the location of documentation for other packages:

ln -snfv ../vim/vim71/doc /usr/share/doc/vim-7.1

If you wish to update the runtime files, issue the following command (requires rsync-3.0.2):

rsync -avzcP --delete --exclude="/dos/" --exclude="/spell/" \
    ftp.nluug.nl::Vim/runtime/ ./runtime/

To install the runtime files and regenerate the tags file, as the root user issue:

make -C src installruntime &&
vim -c ":helptags /usr/share/doc/vim-7.1" -c ":q"

Command Explanations

patch …: These patches are the same as the ones in the LFS build used to update the package with upstream patches and ensure the man pages are placed in the proper locations.

--with-features=huge: This switch enables all the additional features available in Vim.

--enable-gui=no: This will prevent compilation of the GUI. Vim will still link against X, so that some features such as the client-server model or the x11-selection (clipboard) are still available.

--without-x: If you prefer not to link Vim against X, use this switch.

--enable-perlinterp, --enable-pythoninterp, --enable-tclinterp, --enable-rubyinterp: These options include the Perl, Python, Tcl, or Ruby interpreters that allow using other application code in vim scripts.

Configuring Vim

Config Files

/etc/vimrc and ~/.vimrc

Configuration Information

Vim has an integrated spell checker which you can enable it if you issue the following in a vim window:

:setlocal spell spelllang=ru

This setting will enable spell checking for the Russian language for the current session.

By default, Vim only installs spell files for the English language. If a spell file is not available for a language, then Vim will call the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin/spellfile.vim plugin and will try to obtain the *.spl and optionally *.sug from the vim ftp server, by using the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim plugin.

Alternatively you can manually download the *.spl and *.sug files from: ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/runtime/spell/ and save them to ~/.vim/spell or in /usr/share/vim/vim71/spell/.

To find out what's new in Vim-7.1 issue the following command:

:help version-7.1

For additional information on setting up Vim configuration files, see The vimrc Files and http://www.vi-improved.org/vimrc.php.

A list of the reinstalled files, along with their short descriptions can be found in the LFS Vim Installation Instructions

Installed Programs: gview, gvim, gvimdiff, rgview, and rgvim

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/vim

Short Descriptions

gview	starts gvim in read-only mode.
gvim	is the editor that runs under X and includes a GUI.
gvimdiff	edits two or three versions of a file with gvim and shows the differences.
rgview	is a restricted version of gview.
rgvim	is a restricted version of gvim.

Last updated on 2008-08-12 10:41:54 -0500

Emacs-22.1

Introduction to Emacs

The Emacs package contains an extensible, customizable, self-documenting real-time display editor.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/emacs/emacs-22.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/emacs/emacs-22.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6949df37caec2d7a2e0eee3f1b422726
Download size: 36.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 260 MB
Estimated build time: 3.3 SBU

Emacs Dependencies

Optional

X Window System, libjpeg-6b, libpng-1.2.29, LibTIFF-3.8.2, and libungif

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/emacs

Installation of Emacs

Install Emacs by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --libexecdir=/usr/lib \
            --localstatedir=/var &&
make bootstrap

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v -R root:root /usr/share/emacs/22.1

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib: Place library executables in a Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FHS) location.

--localstatedir=/var: Create game score files in /var/games/emacs instead of /usr/var/games/emacs.

Installed Programs: b2m, ctags, ebrowse, emacs, emacsclient, etags, grep-changelog, and rcs-checkin

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/emacs, /usr/share/emacs and /var/games/emacs

Short Descriptions

b2m	is a program to convert mail files from RMAIL format to Unix “mbox” format.
ctags	creates cross-reference tagfile database files for source code.
ebrowse	permits browsing of C++ class hierarchies from within emacs.
emacs	is an editor.
emacsclient	attaches an emacs session to an already running emacsserver instance.
etags	is another program to generate source code cross-reference tagfiles.
grep-changelog	prints entries in Change Logs matching various criteria.
rcs-checkin	is a shell script used to check files into RCS.

Last updated on 2007-08-17 14:03:17 -0500

Nano-2.0.7

Introduction to Nano

The nano package contains a small, simple text editor which aims to replace Pico, the default editor in the Pine package.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.nano-editor.org/dist/v2.0/nano-2.0.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/nano/nano-2.0.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 16187fed2bdefec6275ece6401ce4cd2
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 8.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Nano Dependencies

Optional

S-Lang-2.1.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Nano

Installation of Nano

Install nano by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/nano \
    --enable-color --enable-multibuffer --enable-nanorc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/nanorc.sample /etc/nano/nanorc.sample &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/nano-2.0.7 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{,man/,texinfo/}*.html /usr/share/doc/nano-2.0.7

Configuring nano

Config Files

/etc/nano/nanorc and ~/.nanorc

Configuration Information

Example configuration (create as a system-wide /etc/nano/nanorc or a personal ~/.nanorc file)

set autoindent
set const
set fill 72
set historylog
set multibuffer
set nohelp
set regexp
set smooth
set suspend

Another example is the nanorc.sample file in the /etc/nano directory. It includes color configurations and has some documentation included in the comments.

Installed Programs: nano and rnano

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/nano, /usr/share/nano and /usr/share/doc/nano-2.0.7

Short Descriptions

nano	is a small, simple text editor which aims to replace Pico, the default editor in the Pine package.
rnano	is a restricted mode for nano.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 06:22:57 -0500

JOE-3.5

Introduction to JOE

JOE (Joe's own editor) is a small text editor capable of emulating WordStar, Pico, and Emacs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/joe-editor/joe-3.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9bdffecce7ef910feaa06452d48843de
Download size: 600 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.13 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/joe

Installation of JOE

Install JOE by running the following commands:

./configure --sysconfdir=/etc --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring JOE

Config Files

/etc/joe/jmacsrc, /etc/joe/joerc, /etc/joe/jpicorc, /etc/joe/jstarrc, /etc/joe/rjoerc, and ~/.joerc

Installed Programs: jmacs, joe, jpico, jstar, rjoe, and termidx

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /etc/joe

Short Descriptions

jmacs	is a symbolic link to joe used to launch Emacs emulation mode.
joe	is a small text editor capable of emulating WordStar, Pico, and Emacs.
jpico	is a symbolic link to joe used to launch Pico emulation mode.
jstar	is a symbolic link to joe used to launch WordStar emulation mode.
rjoe	is a symbolic link to joe that restricts JOE to editing only files which are specified on the command-line.
termidx	is a program used by joe to generate the termcap index file.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Ed-0.8

Introduction to Ed

Ed is a line-oriented text editor. It is used to create, display, modify and otherwise manipulate text files, both interactively and via shell scripts. Ed isn't something which many people use. It's described here because it can be used by the patch program if you encounter an ed-based patch file. This happens rarely because diff-based patches are preferred these days.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ed/ed-0.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ed/ed-0.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b359451fb32097974484b5ba7c19f5fb
Download size: 66 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.3 MB
Estimated build time: Less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/ed

Installation of Ed

Install Ed by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-man

Installed Programs: ed and red

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ed	is a line-oriented text editor.
red	is a restricted ed—it can only edit files in the current directory and cannot execute shell commands.

Last updated on 2008-04-25 18:22:22 -0500

Bluefish-1.0.7

Introduction to Bluefish

The Bluefish package contains a powerful X Window System editor designed for web designers, but also suitable as a programmer's editor. Bluefish supports many programming and markup languages, and as such is ideal for editing XML and HTML files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.bennewitz.com/bluefish/stable/source/bluefish-1.0.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/bluefish-1.0.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2c3b3c9c8f8e32b9473dfd879f216dea
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Bluefish Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13 and PCRE-7.6

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1 (for remote files), Aspell-0.60.5 (for spellchecking), libgnomeui-2.18.1, GNOME MIME Data-2.4.3, desktop-file-utils-0.13, and shared-mime-info-0.21

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/bluefish

Installation of Bluefish

Install Bluefish by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Bluefish

Config Files

~/.bluefish/*

Configuration Information

The directory ~/.bluefish is created by the program when it is first run, and the configuration files are maintained by the program automatically to preserve settings from run to run.

Installed Program: bluefish

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/bluefish

Short Descriptions

bluefish

is an X Window System editor for markup and programming.

Last updated on 2008-04-09 10:40:36 -0500

Other Editors

pico is a text editor installed as a part of Pine-4.64.

mcedit is a text editor installed as part of MC-4.6.1.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Chapter 7. Shells

We are all familiar with the Bourne Again SHell, but there are two other user interfaces that are considered useful modern shells – the Berkeley Unix C shell and the Korn shell. This chapter installs packages compatible with these additional shell types.

Tcsh-6.15.00

Introduction to Tcsh

The Tcsh package contains “an enhanced but completely compatible version of the Berkeley Unix C shell (csh)”. This is useful as an alternative shell for those who prefer C syntax to that of the bash shell, and also because some programs require the C shell in order to perform installation tasks.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/utils/shells/tcsh/tcsh-6.15.00.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.funet.fi/pub/unix/shells/tcsh/tcsh-6.15.00.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 67a0611620b080bd0eb032b1774382b6
Download size: 870 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/tcsh

Installation of Tcsh

Install Tcsh by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --bindir=/bin &&
make &&
sh ./tcsh.man2html

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that test #68 (“nice” test) is known to fail.

Now, as the root user:

make install install.man &&
ln -v -sf tcsh   /bin/csh &&
ln -v -sf tcsh.1 /usr/man/man1/csh.1 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.15.00/html &&
install -v -m644 tcsh.html/* /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.15.00/html &&
install -v -m644 FAQ         /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.15.00

Command Explanations

--bindir=/bin: This installs the tcsh program in /bin instead of /usr/bin.

sh ./tcsh.man2html: This creates HTML documentation from the formatted man page.

ln -v -sf tcsh /bin/csh: The FHS states that if there is a C shell installed, there should be a symlink from /bin/csh to it. This creates that symlink.

Configuring Tcsh

Config Files

There are numerous configuration files for the C shell. Examples of these are /etc/csh.cshrc, /etc/csh.login, /etc/csh.logout, ~/.tcshrc, ~/.cshrc, ~/.history, ~/.cshdirs, ~/.login, and ~/.logout. More information on these files can be found in the tcsh(1) man page.

Configuration Information

Update /etc/shells to include the C shell program names (as the root user):

cat >> /etc/shells << "EOF"
/bin/tcsh
/bin/csh
EOF

Installed Program: tcsh

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.15.00

Short Descriptions

tcsh

is an enhanced but completely compatible version of the Berkeley Unix C shell, csh. It is usable as both an interactive shell and a script processor.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

ZSH-4.3.6

Introduction to ZSH

The ZSH package contains a command interpreter (shell) usable as an interactive login shell and as a shell script command processor. Of the standard shells, ZSH most closely resembles KSH but includes many enhancements.

Note

This version of ZSH is a development release. The BLFS staff has determined that it provides a stable program which works properly with multibyte locales (e.g., UTF-8). To find the current stable release, refer to the ZSH home page and compile ZSH with the same instructions.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/zsh/zsh-4.3.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 16f399af1081ad3c303a794c9c7dc47e
Download size: 2.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 49 MB (includes installing all documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

Additional Downloads

Optional Documentation: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/zsh/zsh-4.3.6-doc.tar.bz2
MD5 sum: cab29228a90f58b1431a66ab24a0a0c2

ZSH Dependencies

Optional

PCRE-7.6 and libcap

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/zsh

Installation of ZSH

If you downloaded the optional documentation, unpack it with the following command:

tar --strip-components=1 -xvf ../zsh-4.3.6-doc.tar.bz2

Install ZSH by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --bindir=/bin \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/zsh \
            --enable-etcdir=/etc/zsh &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed, you can build additional formats of the documentation by issuing any or all of the following commands:

texi2pdf  Doc/zsh.texi -o Doc/zsh.pdf &&
texi2html Doc/zsh.texi --output=Doc/zsh_1file_t.html &&
makeinfo  Doc/zsh.texi --html --no-split --no-headers \
                       -o Doc/zsh_1file_m.html &&
makeinfo  Doc/zsh.texi --plaintext -o Doc/zsh.txt

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make infodir=/usr/share/info install.info

If you downloaded the optional documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

make htmldir=/usr/share/doc/zsh-4.3.6/html install.html &&
install -v -m644 Doc/zsh.dvi /usr/share/doc/zsh-4.3.6

If you built any additional formats of the documentation, install them by issuing the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 Doc/{zsh_1file*,*.{pdf,txt}} \
        /usr/share/doc/zsh-4.3.6

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/zsh and --enable-etcdir=/etc/zsh: These parameters are used so that all the ZSH configuration files are consolidated into the /etc/zsh directory. Omit these parameters if you wish to retain historical compatibility by having all the files located in the /etc directory.

--bindir=/bin: This parameter places the zsh binaries into the root filesystem.

--enable-cap: This parameter enables POSIX capabilities.

--enable-pcre: This parameter allows to use the PCRE regular expression library in shell builtins. Note: Linking ZSH dynamically against PCRE, produces a runtime dependency on libpcre.so. If /usr is a separate mount point and zsh needs to be available at boot time, either you have to statically link ZSH against PCRE (you can examine the config.modules file on how to link statically the module), or move the library to /lib as follows:

mv -v /usr/lib/libpcre.so.* /lib/ &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libpcre.so.0 /usr/lib/libpcre.so

Configuring ZSH

Config Files

There are a whole host of configuration files for ZSH including /etc/zsh/zshenv, /etc/zsh/zprofile, /etc/zsh/zshrc, /etc/zsh/zlogin and /etc/zsh/zlogout. You can find more information on these in the zsh(1) and related manual pages.

Configuration Information

Update /etc/shells to include the ZSH shell program names (as the root user):

cat >> /etc/shells << "EOF"
/bin/zsh
/bin/zsh-4.3.6
EOF

Installed Programs: zsh and zsh-4.3.6

Installed Libraries: Numerous plugin helper modules

Installed Directories: /etc/zsh, /usr/lib/zsh, /usr/share/doc/zsh-4.3.6 and /usr/share/zsh

Short Description

zsh

is a shell which has command-line editing, built-in spelling correction, programmable command completion, shell functions (with autoloading), a history mechanism, and a host of other features.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Dash-0.5.4

Introduction to Dash

Dash is a POSIX compliant shell. It can be installed as /bin/sh or as the default shell for either root or a second user with a userid of 0. It depends on fewer libraries than the Bash shell and is therefore less likely to be affected by an upgrade problem or disk failure. Dash is also useful for checking that a script is completely compatible with POSIX syntax.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gondor.apana.org.au/~herbert/dash/files/dash-0.5.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: bc457e490a589d2f87f2333616b67931
Download size: 200 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Dash Dependencies

Optional

libedit (command line editor library)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dash

Installation of Dash

Install Dash by running the following commands:

./configure --bindir=/bin --mandir=/usr/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you would like to make dash the default sh, recreate the /bin/sh symlink as the root user:

ln -svf dash /bin/sh

Command Explanations

--bindir=/bin: This parameter places the dash binary into the root filesystem.

--with-libedit: To compile Dash with libedit support.

Configuring Dash

Config Files

Dash sources /etc/profile and $HOME/.profile

Configuration Information

Update /etc/shells to include the Dash shell by issuing the following command as the root user:

cat >> /etc/shells << "EOF"
/bin/dash
EOF

Installed Program: dash

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Description

dash

is a POSIX compliant shell.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

ksh-2008-02-02

Introduction to ksh

ksh is the AT&T Korn Shell.

Note

You must agree to the terms of the CPL-1.0 license in order to download the software. The download site is password protected, and the username and password are listed at the bottom of this license.

Package Information

Ksh Download (HTTP): http://www.research.att.com/~gsf/download/tgz/ast-ksh.2008-02-02.tgz
Ksh Download MD5 sum: d2a71e320fbaa7a0fd950a27c7e4b099
Ksh Download size: 1.6 MB
INIT Download (HTTP): http://www.research.att.com/~gsf/download/tgz/INIT.2008-02-02.tgz
INIT Download MD5 sum: 740c6fc775bf2f7b6bff463bdbad1c31
INIT Download size: 340 KB
Estimated disk space required: 32 MB
Estimated build time: 2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/ksh

Installation of ksh

Unlike other BLFS packages, you will need to first create a working directory in which to extract the sources and perform the build. Install ksh by running the following commands:

mkdir ksh &&
cd ksh &&
tar -xf ../INIT.2008-02-02.tgz &&
tar -xf ../ast-ksh.2008-02-02.tgz &&
bin/package make

The test suite for this package requires other packages from the AT&T ast software library, namely nmake, in which case, you'd be better to install the ast-base package using the same instructions. The package command will accept a test argument to test the package.

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m755 arch/linux.i386/bin/ksh /bin &&
install -v -m644 arch/linux.i386/man/man1/sh.1 \
    /usr/share/man/man1/ksh.1 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/ksh-2008-02-02 &&
install -v -m644 lib/package/{ast-ksh,INIT}.html \
    /usr/share/doc/ksh-2008-02-02

Command Explanations

bin/package make: This command rebuilds the ast INIT package and builds the ast ksh package.

Configuring ksh

Config Files

ksh sources /etc/profile, /etc/suid_profile, and $HOME/.profile.

Configuration Information

Update /etc/shells to include the ksh shell by issuing the following command as the root user:

cat >> /etc/shells << "EOF"
/bin/ksh
EOF

Installed Program: ksh

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Description

ksh

is the AT&T ast Korn shell.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

Part III. General Libraries and Utilities

Chapter 8. General Libraries

Libraries contain code which is often required by more than one program. This has the advantage that each program doesn't need to duplicate code (and risk introducing bugs), it just has to call functions from the libraries installed on the system. The most obvious example of a set of libraries is Glibc which is installed during the LFS book. This contains all of the C library functions which programs use.

There are two types of libraries: static and shared. Shared libraries (usually libXXX.so) are loaded into memory from the shared copy at runtime (hence the name). Static libraries (libXXX.a ) are actually linked into the program executable file itself, thus making the program file larger. Quite often, you will find both static and shared copies of the same library on your system.

Generally, you only need to install libraries when you are installing software that needs the functionality they supply. In the BLFS book, each package is presented with a list of (known) dependencies. Thus, you can figure out which libraries you need to have before installing that program. If you are installing something without using BLFS instructions, usually the README or INSTALL file will contain details of the program's requirements.

There are certain libraries which nearly everyone will need at some point. In this chapter we list these and some others and explain why you may want to install them.

PCRE-7.6

Introduction to PCRE

The PCRE package contains Perl Compatible Regular Expression libraries. These are useful for implementing regular expression pattern matching using the same syntax and semantics as Perl 5.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/pcre/pcre-7.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/programming/pcre/pcre-7.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2af38e083fb90ef60fa9eda7cc290e86
Download size: 780 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/pcre-7.6-abi_breakage-1.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/pcre-7.6-security_fix-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pcre

Installation of PCRE

Install PCRE by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../pcre-7.6-abi_breakage-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../pcre-7.6-security_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --docdir=/usr/share/doc/pcre-7.6 \
            --enable-utf8 \
            --enable-pcregrep-libz \
            --enable-pcregrep-libbz2 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note: The third set of the tests cannot be run if the "fr_FR" locale is missing from the system.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you reinstall Grep after installing PCRE, Grep will get linked against PCRE and may cause problems if /usr is a separate mount point. To avoid this, either pass the option --disable-perl-regexp when executing ./configure for Grep or move libpcre to /lib as follows.

mv -v /usr/lib/libpcre.so.* /lib/ &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libpcre.so.0 /usr/lib/libpcre.so

Command Explanations

--enable-utf8: This switch includes the code for handling UTF-8 character strings in the library.

--enable-unicode-properties: This switch enables Unicode properties support.

--enable-pcregrep-libz: This switch adds support to pcregrep to read .gz compressed files.

--enable-pcregrep-libbz2: This switch adds support to pcregrep to read .bz2 compressed files.

Installed Programs: pcregrep, pcretest, and pcre-config

Installed Libraries: libpcre.{so,a}, libpcrecpp.{so,a} and libpcreposix.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/pcre-7.6

Short Descriptions

pcregrep	is a grep that understands Perl compatible regular expressions.
pcretest	can test a Perl compatible regular expression.
pcre-config	is used during the compile process of programs linking to the PCRE libraries.

Last updated on 2008-07-09 09:23:33 -0500

Popt-1.10.4

Introduction to Popt

The popt package contains the popt libraries which are used by some programs to parse command-line options.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://rpm5.org/files/popt/popt-1.10.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/p/popt-1.10.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: dd22a6873b43d00f75e1c1b7dcfd1ff7
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 8.3 MB (includes installing documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/popt

Installation of Popt

Install popt by running the following commands:

sed -i -e "/*origOptString ==/c 0)" popt.c &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have Doxygen-1.5.2 installed and wish to build the API documentation, issue doxygen.

To test the results, issue:

make check

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the API documentation, install it using the following commands issued by the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/popt-1.10.4 &&
install -v -m644 doxygen/html/* /usr/share/doc/popt-1.10.4

Command Explanations

sed ...: This fix taken backported from the development version of popt fixes a problem identified by the included testsuite.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libpopt.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/popt-1.10.4

Short Descriptions

libpopt.{so,a}

is used to parse command-line options.

Last updated on 2008-08-10 16:20:02 -0500

S-Lang-2.1.3

Introduction to S-Lang

The S-Lang package contains the S-Lang library, which provides facilities such as display/screen management, keyboard input, and keymaps.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/editors/davis/slang/v2.1/slang-2.1.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://space.mit.edu/pub/davis/slang/v2.1/slang-2.1.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0e4ae3aac75441eaa230bceb7811f088
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 26 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

S-Lang Dependencies

Optional

libpng-1.2.29, PCRE-7.6, and Oniguruma

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/slang

Installation of S-Lang

Install S-Lang by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that this will also create a static version of the library which will then be installed in the next step.

Now, as the root user:

make \
    install_doc_dir=/usr/share/doc/slang-2.1.3 \
    SLSH_DOC_DIR=/usr/share/doc/slang-2.1.3/slsh \
    install-all &&
chmod -v 755 /usr/lib/libslang.so.2.1.3 \
             /usr/lib/slang/v2/modules/*.so

Command Explanations

make install_doc_dir=/usr/share/doc/slang-2.1.3 SLSH_DOC_DIR=/usr/share/doc/slang-2.1.3/slsh install-all: This command installs the static library as well as the dynamic shared version and related modules. It also changes the documentation installation directories to a versioned directory.

--with-readline=gnu: Use this parameter to use the Gnu Readline parser instead of the S-Lang internal version.

Configuring S-Lang

Config Files

~/.slshrc and /etc/slsh.rc

Configuration Information

As with most libraries, there is no configuration to do, save that the library directory, i.e., /opt/lib or /usr/local/lib should appear in /etc/ld.so.conf so that ldd can find the shared libraries. After checking that this is the case, /sbin/ldconfig should be run while logged in as root.

Installed Program: slsh

Installed Libraries: libslang.{so,a} and numerous support modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/slang, /usr/share/doc/slang-2.1.3 and /usr/share/slsh

Short Descriptions

slsh

is a simple program for interpreting S-Lang scripts. It supports dynamic loading of S-Lang modules and includes a Readline interface for interactive use.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 11:43:44 -0500

Gamin-0.1.9

Introduction to Gamin

The Gamin package contains a File Alteration Monitor which is useful for notifying applications of changes to the file system. Gamin is compatible with FAM.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.gnome.org/~veillard/gamin/sources/gamin-0.1.9.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/gamin-0.1.9.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 2d3a6a70df090ed923238e381e6c2982
Download size: 632 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU (up to 3 minutes, processor independent, to run the test suite)

Gamin Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gamin

Installation of Gamin

Install Gamin by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/sbin &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that some tests may display errors.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gamin-0.1.9 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{html,fig,gif,txt} /usr/share/doc/gamin-0.1.9

Configuring Gamin

Configuration Information

No configuration is generally required and the default options should work for most users. See http://www.gnome.org/~veillard/gamin/config.html for details.

Installed Program: gam_server

Installed Libraries: libfam.{so,a}, libgamin-1.{so,a}, libgamin_shared.a and optionally, Python _gamin.{so,a} module

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/gamin-0.1.9

Short Descriptions

gam_server	is the file alteration monitor daemon that is started on demand for each user.
`libgamin.{so,a}`	contains functions that support the file allocation monitor.
`libfam.{so,a}`	contains functions that provide compatibility with FAM.

Last updated on 2008-03-09 22:43:40 -0500

libxml2-2.6.31

Introduction to libxml2

The libxml2 package contains XML libraries. These are useful for parsing XML files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xmlsoft.org/sources/libxml2-2.6.31.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://xmlsoft.org/libxml2/libxml2-2.6.31.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 714b0683b1ec4bdc63bc356d729f9b18
Download size: 4.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 85 MB (additional 184 MB to run the test suite)
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU (additional 1.0 SBU to run the test suite)

libxml2 Dependencies

Optional

libxslt-1.1.22 (used for the test suite if found, but not required) and Python-2.5.2 (will install a Python library module if found)

Optional (Required to Run the Full Suite of Tests)

Python-2.5.2 and Wget-1.10.2

Note

Some packages which utilize libxml2 (such as GNOME Doc Utils) need the Python module installed to function properly and some packages (such as GNOME Panel) will not build properly if the Python module is not available.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libxml2

Installation of libxml2

Install libxml2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-history: If this option is used, it enables readline support when running xmlcatalog or xmllint in shell mode.

Caution

When using history support, make check will hang forever if either /etc/inputrc or ~/.inputrc has the option show-all-if-ambiguous or show-all-if-available turned on.

Installed Programs: xml2-config, xmlcatalog, and xmllint

Installed Libraries: libxml2.{so,a} and optionally, the libxml2mod.{so,a} Python module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libxml2, /usr/share/doc/libxml2-2.6.31, /usr/share/doc/libxml2-python-2.6.31 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libxml2

Short Descriptions

xml2-config	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use `libxml2`.
xmlcatalog	is used to monitor and manipulate XML and SGML catalogs.
xmllint	parses XML files and outputs reports (based upon options) to detect errors in XML coding.
`libxml2.{so,a}`	libraries provide the functions for programs to parse files that use the XML format.

Last updated on 2008-03-09 09:20:31 -0500

libxslt-1.1.22

Introduction to libxslt

The libxslt package contains XSLT libraries. These are useful for extending libxml2 libraries to support XSLT files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xmlsoft.org/sources/libxslt-1.1.22.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://xmlsoft.org/libxslt/libxslt-1.1.22.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: d6a9a020a76a3db17848d769d6c9c8a9
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 39 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

libxslt Dependencies

Required

libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

Python-2.5.2 and Libgcrypt-1.2.4

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libxslt

Installation of libxslt

Install libxslt by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: xslt-config and xsltproc

Installed Libraries: libexslt.{so,a}, libxslt.{so,a} and optionally, libxsltmod.{so,a} Python modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/lib{e}xslt, /usr/lib/libxslt-plugins, /usr/share/doc/libxslt-1.1.22, and /usr/share/doc/libxslt-python-1.1.22

Short Descriptions

xslt-config	is used to find out the pre-processor, linking and compiling flags necessary to use the libxslt libraries in 3rd-party programs.
xsltproc	is used to apply XSLT stylesheets to XML documents.
`libxslt.{so,a}`	provides extensions to the `libxml2` libraries to parse files that use the XSLT format.
`libexslt.{so,a}`	is used to provide extensions to XSLT functions.

Last updated on 2008-03-09 19:24:21 -0500

libgtkhtml-2.11.1

Introduction to libgtkhtml

The libgtkhtml package contains the libgtkhtml-2 library. This library provides an API for rendering HTML.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgtkhtml/2.11/libgtkhtml-2.11.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgtkhtml/2.11/libgtkhtml-2.11.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a1d1a197dcff8c4571659deef5495e24
Download size: 597 KB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

libgtkhtml Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

GAIL-1.18.0 and GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1 (only used in the test suite)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgtkhtml

Installation of libgtkhtml

Install libgtkhtml by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --disable-accessibility &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite. You can run a test program which includes many test cases; if desired, issue: ( cd tests; ./testgtkhtml )

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-accessibility: This forces the package to build without linking to the libgailutil accessibility library. Remove this switch if you have GAIL installed.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgtkhtml-2.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/gtkhtml-2.0

Short Descriptions

libgtkhtml-2.{so,a}

provides the functions necessary to render and/or edit HTML.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 13:45:14 -0500

GMP-4.2.2

Introduction to GMP

The GMP package contains math libraries. These have useful functions for arbitrary precision arithmetic.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gmp/gmp-4.2.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gmp/gmp-4.2.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7ce52531644e6d12f16911b7e3151f3f
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB (additional 11 MB for alternative documentation)
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU (additional 0.6 SBU to run the testsuite)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gmp

Installation of GMP

Install GMP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-cxx --enable-mpbsd &&
make

If you wish to create alternate formats of the documentation (Postscript, PDF and chunked HTML versions require a teTeX-3.0 installation), issue any or all of the following commands:

make -C doc pdf &&
make -C doc ps &&
make -C doc html &&
texi2html -o doc/gmp_nochunks.html  doc/gmp.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o doc/gmp.txt doc/gmp.texi

To test the results, issue: make check. Due to various reports of mis-compilations, the maintainer strongly recommends running the test suite and reporting any failures. The libraries should not be used in a production environment if there are problems running make check. An easy way to determine if all the tests passed is to redirect the output of the tests to a file (make check >check.log 2>&1) and issue the following command:

awk '/tests passed/{total+=$2} ; END{print total}' check.log

139 should be returned.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gmp-4.2.2 &&
install -v -m644    doc/{isa_abi_headache,configuration} doc/*.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/gmp-4.2.2

If you created any of the alternate formats of the documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gmp-4.2.2/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/gmp.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gmp-4.2.2/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/gmp.{pdf,dvi,ps,html,txt} \
                    /usr/share/doc/gmp-4.2.2

Command Explanations

--enable-cxx: This parameter enables C++ support by building the libgmpxx libraries.

--enable-mpbsd: This parameter enables building the Berkeley MP compatibility (libmp) libraries.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgmp.{so,a}, libgmpxx.{so,a} and libmp.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libgmp.{so,a}

contains functions to operate on signed integers, rational numbers, and floating point numbers.

Last updated on 2008-04-08 21:22:47 -0500

GDBM-1.8.3

Introduction to GDBM

The GDBM package contains the GNU Database Manager. This is a disk file format database which stores key/data-pairs in single files. The actual data of any record being stored is indexed by a unique key, which can be retrieved in less time than if it was stored in a text file.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gdbm/gdbm-1.8.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gdbm/gdbm-1.8.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1d1b1d5c0245b1c00aff92da751e9aa1
Download size: 223 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.75 MB
Estimated build time: 0.08 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gdbm

Installation of GDBM

Install GDBM by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make BINOWN=root BINGRP=root install

In addition, you may need to install the DBM and NDBM compatibility headers and library since some applications look for these older dbm routines.

make BINOWN=root BINGRP=root install-compat

Command Explanations

make BINOWN=root BINGRP=root install: This command overrides the BINOWN and BINGRP variables in the Makefile changing ownership of the installed files to root instead of the bin user.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgdbm.{so,a} and libgdbm_compat.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libgdbm.{so,a}

contains functions to manipulate a hashed database.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

GLib-1.2.10

Introduction to GLib

The glib package contains a low-level core library. This is useful for providing data structure handling for C, portability wrappers and interfaces for such runtime functionality as an event loop, threads, dynamic loading, and an object system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/graphics/gimp/gtk/v1.2/glib-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v1.2/glib-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6fe30dad87c77b91b632def29dd69ef9
Download size: 412 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.19 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/glib-1.2.10-gcc34-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/glib

Installation of GLib

Install glib by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../glib-1.2.10-gcc34-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 755 /usr/lib/libgmodule-1.2.so.0.0.10

Installed Programs: glib-config

Installed Libraries: libglib.{so,a}, libgmodule.{so,a} and libgthread.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/glib-1.2 and /usr/lib/glib

Short Descriptions

glib-config	is a tool that is used by configure scripts to determine the compiler and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use GLib.
`libglib.{so,a}`	libraries contain a low-level core library for the GIMP Toolkit.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

GLib-2.12.12

Introduction to GLib

The GLib package contains a low-level core library. This is useful for providing data structure handling for C, portability wrappers and interfaces for such runtime functionality as an event loop, threads, dynamic loading, and an object system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/glib/2.12/glib-2.12.12.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/glib/2.12/glib-2.12.12.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0b3a42098243d054475ff6eb51ed2be1
Download size: 2.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 53 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU (additional 1.3 SBU to run the test suite)

GLib Dependencies

Required

pkg-config-0.22

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/glib2

Installation of GLib

Install GLib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Configuring GLib

Configuration Information

By default, GLib assumes that all filenames are in the UTF-8 charset. See the Wrong Filename Encoding section of the Locale Related Issues page for more details on this kind of issue. In order to tell GLib and applications that use it that filenames are in the default locale encoding, set the variable G_FILENAME_ENCODING to the value "@locale":

cat > /etc/profile.d/glib2-locale.sh << "EOF"
# Use the current locale charset for filenames
# in applications using GLib
export G_FILENAME_ENCODING=@locale
EOF

Installed Programs: glib-genmarshal, glib-gettextize, glib-mkenums, and gobject-query

Installed Libraries: libglib-2.0.so, libgobject-2.0.so, libgmodule-2.0.so, and libgthread-2.0.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/glib-2.0, /usr/lib/glib-2.0, /usr/share/glib-2.0, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/glib, and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gobject

Short Descriptions

glib-genmarshal	is a C code marshaller generation utility for GLib closures.
glib-gettextize	is a variant of the gettext internationalization utility.
glib-mkenums	is a C language enum description generation utility.
gobject-query	is a small utility that draws a tree of types.
GLib libraries	contain a low-level core library for the GIMP Toolkit.

Last updated on 2007-06-29 20:13:01 -0500

LibIDL-0.8.8

Introduction to LibIDL

The libIDL package contains libraries for Interface Definition Language files. This is a specification for defining portable interfaces.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libIDL/0.8/libIDL-0.8.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libIDL/0.8/libIDL-0.8.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 187c17f42533d76da435e90afb7b48cf
Download size: 328 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

LibIDL Dependencies

Required

Optional to Build Documentation

teTeX-3.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libidl

Installation of LibIDL

Install libIDL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have teTeX installed and wish to build the documentation, issue the following commands:

make pdf &&
make ps &&
makeinfo --plaintext libIDL2.texi >libIDL2.txt

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the documentation, issue the following commands as the root user to install it:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libIDL-0.8.8 &&
install -v -m644 libIDL2.{pdf,dvi,ps,txt} README \
    /usr/share/doc/libIDL-0.8.8

Installed Program: libIDL-config-2

Installed Library: libIDL-2.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libIDL-2.0/libIDL and /usr/share/doc/libIDL-0.8.8

Short Descriptions

libIDL-config-2	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use `libIDL-2`.
`libIDL-2.{so,a}`	libraries provide the functions to create and maintain trees of CORBA Interface Definition Language (IDL) files.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Libcroco-0.6.1

Introduction to libcroco

The libcroco package contains libcroco libraries. This is useful for providing a CSS API.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libcroco/0.6/libcroco-0.6.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libcroco/0.6/libcroco-0.6.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b0975bd01eb11964f1b3f254f267a43d
Download size: 381 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

libcroco Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12 and libxml2-2.6.31

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libcroco

Installation of libcroco

Install libcroco by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$(pwd)/src/.libs make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libcroco-0.6.1/examples &&
install -v -m644 README docs/usage.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/libcroco-0.6.1 &&
install -v -m644 docs/examples/*.c \
    /usr/share/doc/libcroco-0.6.1/examples

Installed Programs: croco-0.6-config and csslint-0.6

Installed Library: libcroco-0.6.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libcroco-0.6.1 and /usr/share/doc/libcroco-0.6.1

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libgsf-1.14.7

Introduction to libgsf

The libgsf package contains libgsf-1 libraries. These are useful for providing an extensible input/output abstraction layer for structured file formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgsf/1.14/libgsf-1.14.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgsf/1.14/libgsf-1.14.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 6612f1e57d3974d609bedd2fd8ff6317
Download size: 580 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

libgsf Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12, libxml2-2.6.31, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

PyGTK-2.10.6, GConf-2.18.0.1 (required to build the gsf-office-thumbnailer program), GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1 and libbonobo-2.18.0 (required to build the libgsf-gnome-1.so library which provides GNOME-2 support), and GTK-Doc-1.8

Note: you should build the libgsf-gnome-1.so library if you plan on building GnuCash-2.2.4 or Gnumeric-1.8.2 with GNOME support.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgsf

Installation of libgsf

Install libgsf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Running make check will build a battery of test programs which are built using the just-created libgsf-1 library. All the programs should build successfully with no errors displayed.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3: Pass this parameter to the configure script if you have GNOME-2 installed so that the GConf schema files are installed in the correct location.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: gsf, gsf-office-thumbnailer (optional), and gsf-vba-dump

Installed Libraries: libgsf-1.{so,a} and optionally, libgsf-gnome-1.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libgsf-1 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gsf

Last updated on 2008-03-09 18:59:14 -0500

libglade-2.6.1

Introduction to libglade

The libglade package contains libglade libraries. These are useful for loading Glade interface files in a program at runtime.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libglade/2.6/libglade-2.6.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libglade/2.6/libglade-2.6.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 489be887b26b9973f77e2c6111ab7d5a
Download size: 346 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libglade Dependencies

Required

libxml2-2.6.31 and GTK+-2.10.13

Optional

Python-2.5.2 and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libglade

Installation of libglade

Install libglade by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: libglade-convert (requires python)

Installed Library: libglade-2.0.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libglade-2.0, /usr/share/xml/libglade, and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libglade

Short Descriptions

libglade-convert	is used to convert old Glade interface files to Glade-2.0 standards.
`libglade-2.0.{so,a}`	contain the functions necessary to load Glade interface files.

Last updated on 2007-07-08 10:04:29 -0500

Expat-2.0.1

Introduction to Expat

The Expat package contains a stream oriented C library for parsing XML.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/expat/expat-2.0.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ee8b492592568805593f81f8cdf2a04c
Download size: 446 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/expat

Installation of Expat

Install Expat by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/expat-2.0.1 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{html,png,css} /usr/share/doc/expat-2.0.1

To test the results, issue: make check as an unprivileged user. Note this must be done after the package is installed.

Installed Program: xmlwf

Installed Library: libexpat.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/expat-2.0.1

Short Descriptions

xmlwf	is a non-validating utility to check whether or not XML documents are well formed.
`libexpat.{so,a}`	contains API functions for parsing XML.

Last updated on 2007-07-02 13:22:33 -0500

libESMTP-1.0.4

Introduction to libESMTP

The libESMTP package contains the libESMTP libraries which are used by some programs to manage email submission to a mail transport layer.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.stafford.uklinux.net/libesmtp/libesmtp-1.0.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libesmtp-1.0.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8b4e8a794adc46268f0c6a0b3fb79486
Download size: 351 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

libESMTP Dependencies

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libesmtp

Installation of libESMTP

Install libESMTP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: libesmtp-config

Installed Libraries: libesmtp.{so,a} and libESMTP SASL plugins

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/esmtp-plugins

Short Descriptions

libesmtp-config	displays version information and the options used to compile libESMTP.
`libesmtp.{so,a}`	is used to manage submission of electronic mail to a Mail Transport Agent.
`libesmtp SASL plugins`	are used to integrate libesmtp with SASL authentication.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

Aspell-0.60.5

Introduction to Aspell

The Aspell package contains an interactive spell checking program and the Aspell libraries. Aspell can either be used as a library or as an independent spell checker.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/aspell/aspell-0.60.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/aspell/aspell-0.60.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 17fd8acac6293336bcef44391b71e337
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 40 MB (Additional 8 MB for EN dictionary)
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

Additional Downloads

You'll need to download at least one dictionary. The link below will take you to a page containing links to dictionaries in many languages.

Aspell dictionaries: ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/aspell/dict

Aspell Dependencies

Required

which-2.19

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/aspell

Installation of Aspell

Install Aspell by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/aspell-0.60.5/aspell{,-dev}.html &&
install -v -m644 manual/aspell.html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/aspell-0.60.5/aspell.html &&
install -v -m644 manual/aspell-dev.html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/aspell-0.60.5/aspell-dev.html

If you do not plan to install Ispell, then copy the wrapper script ispell:

install -v -m 755 scripts/ispell /usr/bin/

If you do not plan to install Spell, then copy the wrapper script spell:

install -v -m 755 scripts/spell /usr/bin/

Configuring Aspell

Configuration Information

After Aspell is installed, you must set up at least one dictionary. Install one or more dictionaries by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: aspell, aspell-import, precat, preunzip, prezip, prezip-bin, pspell-config, run-with-aspell, word-list-compress and optionally, ispell and spell

Installed Libraries: libaspell.so and libpspell.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/pspell and /usr/lib/aspell-0.60

Short Descriptions

aspell	is a utility that can function as an ispell -a replacement, as an independent spell checker, as a test utility to test out Aspell features, and as a utility for managing dictionaries.
ispell	is a wrapper around aspell to invoke it in ispell compatible mode.
spell	is a wrapper around aspell to invoke it in spell compatible mode.
aspell-import	imports old personal dictionaries into Aspell.
precat	decompresses a prezipped file to stdout.
preunzip	decompresses a prezipped file.
prezip	is a prefix delta compressor, used to compress sorted word lists or other similar text files.
prezip-bin	is called by the various wrapper scripts to perform the actual compressing and decompressing.
pspell-config	displays information about the `libpspell` installation, mostly for use in build scripts.
run-with-aspell	is a script to help use Aspell as an ispell replacement.
word-list-compress	compresses or decompresses sorted word lists for use with the Aspell spell checker.
`libaspell.so`	contains spell checking API functions.
`libpspell.so`	is an interface to the `libaspell` library. All the spell checking functionality is now in `libaspell` but this library is included for backward compatibility.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

SLIB-3a4

Introduction to SLIB

The SLIB package is a portable library for the Scheme programming language. It provides a platform independent framework for using “packages” of Scheme procedures and syntax. Its catalog can be transparently extended to accommodate packages specific to a site, implementation, user or directory. SLIB provides compatibility and utility functions for all standard Scheme implementations including Bigloo, Chez, ELK 3.0, GAMBIT 3.0, Guile, JScheme, MacScheme, MITScheme, PLT Scheme (DrScheme and MzScheme), Pocket Scheme, RScheme, scheme->C, Scheme48, SCM, SCM Mac, scsh, Stk, T3.1, umb-scheme, and VSCM.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://swiss.csail.mit.edu/ftpdir/scm/OLD/slib3a4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 87bc0b62370c0bf8a510a2acf6868eb9
Download size: 877 KB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB (includes building and installing docs)
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/slib-3a4-guile_fixes-1.patch

SLIB Dependencies

There are no build dependencies as this package is nothing but many text script files which are copied to the system. If you are installing this package to support a GnuCash installation, you should ensure that Guile-1.8.2 is installed so the SLIB catalog for Guile can be created.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/slib

Installation of SLIB

Install SLIB by issuing the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../slib-3a4-guile_fixes-1.patch &&
sed -i 's|usr/lib|usr/share|' {RScheme,guile}.init

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and wish to build PDF, Postscript, HTML or text documentation, issue any or all of the following commands:

texi2pdf  slib.texi           &&
texi2html slib.texi           &&
texi2dvi  slib.texi           &&
dvips    -o slib.ps  slib.dvi &&
makeinfo -o slib.txt --plaintext slib.texi

This package does not come with a functional test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr/ \
     libdir=/usr/share/ \
     mandir=/usr/share/man/ \
     infodir=/usr/share/info/ \
  install installinfo &&

install -v -m755 -d                  /usr/share/doc/slib-3a4 &&
install -v -m644 ANNOUNCE FAQ README /usr/share/doc/slib-3a4

If you have Guile-1.8.2 installed, create the following symbolic link as the root user to satisfy Guile's default “Implementation Vicinity” directory.

ln -v -s ../slib /usr/share/guile

If you built any of the documentation, install it using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 slib.{pdf,html,dvi,ps,txt,texi} \
                 /usr/share/doc/slib-3a4

Command Explanations

sed -i 's|usr/lib|usr/share|' {RScheme,guile}.init: This command is used to change the libdir variable embedded in the two scripts to match the installation variable.

make ... install installinfo: This command installs the package and the info documentation into the indicated directories.

Configuring SLIB

For many of the Scheme implementations, an SLIB Scheme implementation catalog must be created. If you have Guile-1.8.2 installed to support a GnuCash installation, you must create a catalog. You can use the make catalogs command, but there will be many warnings and confusing messages as it tries to create a catalog for many of the possible Scheme implementations which are probably not installed on the system. To create a single catalog just for the Guile installation, issue the following command as the root user:

guile -l guile.init \
      -c "(use-modules (ice-9 slib)) (require 'new-catalog)"

If there was no output from the previous command, and the file /usr/share/guile/slibcat now exists, the catalog was properly created.

Installed Program: slib

Installed Libraries: a Scheme library system

Installed Directory: /usr/share/slib and /usr/share/doc/slib-3a4

Short Descriptions

slib

is a shell script used to initialize SLIB in a named Scheme implementation. It can also be used to initialize an SLIB session using a given executable.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 08:08:51 -0500

G-Wrap-1.3.4

Introduction to G-Wrap

The G-Wrap package contains tools for exporting C libraries into Scheme interpreters.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.gnucash.org/pub/g-wrap/source/g-wrap-1.3.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/g-wrap-1.3.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: bf29b8b563cc27d9f7fd90a6243653aa
Download size: 403 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

G-Wrap Dependencies

Required

SLIB-3a4 and GLib-1.2.10

Optional

guile-gtk and GCC-4.1.2 (build Java so that libffi is built)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gwrap

Installation of G-Wrap

Install G-Wrap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and wish to create alternate formats of the documentation, issue the following commands:

cd doc &&
texi2pdf g-wrap.texi &&
texi2html g-wrap.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o g-wrap.txt g-wrap.texi &&
mv texinfo.tex texinfo.tex.SAVE &&
texi2dvi g-wrap.texi &&
dvips -o g-wrap.ps g-wrap.dvi &&
cd ..

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you created the alternate formats of the documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/g-wrap-1.3.4 &&
install -v -m644 doc/g-wrap.{pdf,html,txt,dvi,ps} \
                 /usr/share/doc/g-wrap-1.3.4

Installed Program: g-wrap-config

Installed Libraries: libgw-glib.{so,a}, libgw-gtk.{so,a}, libgw-standard.{so,a}, libgw-wct.{so,a}, libgwrap-glib.{so,a} and libgwrap-wct.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/g-wrap, /usr/share/doc/g-wrap-1.3.4 and /usr/share/guile/site

Short Descriptions

g-wrap-config

is a tool to generate CFLAGS for linking C code to the Scheme runtime libraries.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

LZO-2.02

Introduction to LZO

LZO is a data compression library which is suitable for data decompression and compression in real-time. This means it favors speed over compression ratio.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.oberhumer.com/opensource/lzo/download/lzo-2.02.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uni-koeln.de/util/arc/lzo-2.02.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6760e5819f4238328709bf93bf10071c
Download size: 599 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (additional 0.4 SBU to run the tests)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/lzo

Installation of LZO

Install LZO by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue make check. All the checks should pass. Now issue make test to run the full suite of tests.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/lzo-2.02 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/lzo-2.02

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: liblzo2.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/lzo and /usr/share/doc/lzo-2.02

Short Descriptions

liblzo2.{so,a}

is a data compression and decompression library.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libusb-0.1.12

Introduction to libusb

The libusb package contains a library used by some applications for USB device access.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/libusb/libusb-0.1.12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: caf182cbc7565dac0fd72155919672e6
Download size: 389 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.4 MB (includes installing all documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (includes building all documentation)

libusb Dependencies

Optional

pkg-config-0.22

Optional (Required to Build the HTML User Manual)

OpenJade-1.3.2 and DocBOOK SGML DTD-4.2

Optional (Required to Build the API Documentation)

Doxygen-1.5.2 and Graphviz-2.12

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libusb

Installation of libusb

Install libusb by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --disable-build-docs &&
make

If you wish to build the API documentation (see the required dependencies), issue the following command:

make apidox

To test the results, issue make -k check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the HTML user manual (by having the required dependencies installed and removing the --disable-build-docs parameter from the configure command), install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.12/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/html/* /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.12/html

If you built the API documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.12/apidocs &&
install -v -m644 apidocs/html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.12/apidocs

Command Explanations

--disable-build-docs: This switch avoids building the HTML user manual. Remove it if you have the required dependencies installed and wish to build the manual.

Configuring Libusb

To access raw USB devices (those not treated as a disk by the mass-storage driver), appropriate support must be available in the kernel. Check your kernel configuration for Device Drivers ⇒ USB support ⇒ Support for Host-side USB. Select any USB hardware device drivers you may need on the same page.

To have raw USB devices set up properly, add the following udev rule.

cat > /etc/udev/rules.d/23-usb.rules << "EOF"
# Set group ownership for raw USB devices
SUBSYSTEM=="usb", ENV{DEVTYPE}=="usb_device", GROUP="usb"
EOF

Add any users that need to access raw USB devices to the usb group.

usermod -a -G usb <username>

Installed Program: libusb-config

Installed Libraries: libusb.{so,a} and libusbpp.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.12

Short Descriptions

libusb-config	is a script that provides the right compiler and linker flags for programs using `libusb`.
`libusb.{so,a}`	libraries contain C functions for accessing USB hardware.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

ISO Codes-1.2

Introduction to ISO Codes

The ISO Codes package contains a list of country, language and currency names. This is useful when used as a central database for accessing this data.

Package Information

Download (FTP): ftp://pkg-isocodes.alioth.debian.org/pub/pkg-isocodes/iso-codes-1.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9326469ec0e9e97d604821bd3c132fc6
Download size: 6.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 73 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

ISO Codes Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/iso-codes

Installation of ISO Codes

Install ISO Codes by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/iso-codes, /usr/share/xml/iso-codes and many directories in the /usr/share/locale hierarchy

Last updated on 2007-07-22 09:03:36 -0500

GMime-2.2.10

Introduction to GMime

The GMime package contains a set of utilities for parsing and creating messages using the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) as defined by the applicable RFCs. See the GMime web site for the RFCs resourced. This is useful as it provides an API which adheres to the MIME specification as closely as possible while also providing programmers with an extremely easy to use interface to the API functions.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://spruce.sourceforge.net/gmime/sources/v2.2/gmime-2.2.10.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6b5be6a0d4d9380fd0491ad2536c4087
Download size: 947 KB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU (includes building the Mono bindings)

GMime Dependencies

Required

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8 and Gtk# (requires Mono)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gmime

Installation of GMime

Install GMime by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have DocBook-utils-0.6.14 installed and you wish to generate the API tutorials, issue the following commands:

cd docs/tutorial &&
docbook2html --nochunks gmime-tut.sgml &&
docbook2pdf             gmime-tut.sgml &&
docbook2ps              gmime-tut.sgml &&
docbook2txt             gmime-tut.sgml &&
cd ../..

To test the results, issue make check. Note that some tests may fail because the corresponding sub-system is not installed or configured properly.

This package will overwrite the uudecode and uuencode programs installed by the sharutils package (or any other package that may install these programs) if they exist in /usr/bin. If you wish to preserve the existing programs, ensure you rename them before issuing the following commands.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gmime-2.2.10 &&
install -v -m644 README docs{,/tutorial}/gmime* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gmime-2.2.10

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: gmime-config, uudecode and uuencode

Installed Libraries: libgmime-2.0.{so,a} and optionally, Mono bindings

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gmime-2.0, /usr/lib/mono/gac/gmime-sharp, /usr/lib/mono/gmime-sharp, /usr/share/doc/gmime-2.2.10 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gmime

Short Descriptions

gmime-config	is used to gather information about how and where GMime was installed. It is typically used by other programs seeking to link to the GMime library.
uudecode	is used to decode files or data encoded with uuencode.
uuencode	is a method of encoding binary data into 7-bit ASCII data.
`libgmime-2.0.{so,a}`	contains API functions used by programs that need to adhere to the MIME standards.

Last updated on 2007-07-20 15:41:06 -0500

Libidn-0.6.14

Introduction to Libidn

Libidn is a package designed for internationalized string handling based on the Stringprep, Punycode, IDNA and TLD specifications defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Internationalized Domain Names (IDN) working group, used for internationalized domain names. This is useful for converting data from the system's native representation into UTF-8, transforming Unicode strings into ASCII strings, allowing applications to use certain ASCII name labels (beginning with a special prefix) to represent non-ASCII name labels, and converting entire domain names to and from the ASCII Compatible Encoding (ACE) form.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/libidn-0.6.14.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://alpha.gnu.org/pub/gnu/libidn/libidn-0.6.14.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 040f012a45feb56168853998bb87ad4d
Download size: 2.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Libidn Dependencies

Optional

Emacs-22.1, pkg-config-0.22, GTK-Doc-1.8, a Java compiler—one of (looked for in this order) GCC-4.1.2 (for gcj and you must also have the gjdoc package installed), Jikes or JDK-6 Update 5, and a C# compiler—Mono or DotGNU Portable.NET

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libidn

Installation of Libidn

Install Libidn by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
find doc -name "Makefile*" -exec rm {} \; &&

install -v -m755 -d \
    /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14/{api,java,specifications,tld} &&
install -v -m644 doc/components* \
                 doc/libidn.{pdf,ps,html} \
    /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14 &&
install -v -m644 doc/reference/html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14/api &&
install -v -m644 doc/specifications/* \
    /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14/specifications &&
install -v -m644 doc/tld/* /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14/tld &&
cp -v -R doc/java/* /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14/java

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: idn

Installed Libraries: libidn.{so,a} and optionally, Java and C# modules

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libidn-0.6.14

Short Descriptions

idn

is a command line interface to the internationalized domain name library.

libidn.{so,a}

contains a generic Stringprep implementation that does Unicode 3.2 NFKC normalization, mapping and prohibition of characters, and bidirectional character handling. Profiles for Nameprep, iSCSI, SASL and XMPP are included as well as support for Punycode and ASCII Compatible Encoding (ACE) via IDNA. A mechanism to define Top-Level Domain (TLD) specific validation tables, and to compare strings against those tables, as well as default tables for some TLDs are included.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 11:52:33 -0500

libdrm-2.3.0

Introduction to libdrm

libdrm provides core library routines for the X Window System to directly interface with video hardware using the Linux kernel's Direct Rendering Modules.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://dri.freedesktop.org/libdrm/libdrm-2.3.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libdrm-2.3.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f2f5d3186bee51be49e1389bed39a7ed
Download size: 382 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libdrm

Installation of libdrm

Install libdrm by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$XORG_PREFIX &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libdrm.{so,a}

Installed Directory: $XORG_PREFIX/include/drm

Short Descriptions

libdrm.{so,a}

contains the Direct Rendering Module library functions.

Last updated on 2008-02-05 11:44:55 -0600

D-Bus Bindings

Introduction to D-Bus Bindings

The D-Bus Bindings are a group of packages that contain programming language and platform interfaces to the D-Bus API. This is useful for programmers to easily interface D-Bus with their supported platform or language of choice. Some non-D-Bus packages will require one or more of the Bindings packages in order to build successfully.

The GLib, Python and Qt3 Bindings are included on this page. Other language bindings will be added soon. Until then, see the D-Bus Bindings page for information.

D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74
D-Bus Python Bindings-0.82.0
D-Bus Qt3 Bindings-0.62

D-Bus GLib Bindings

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://dbus.freedesktop.org/releases/dbus-glib/dbus-glib-0.74.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0923d825a0aff2e4eb23338b630286fb
Download size: 654 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

D-Bus GLib Dependencies

Required

D-BUS-1.0.2, GLib-2.12.12, and expat-2.0.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dbus-glib

Installation of D-Bus GLib Bindings

Install D-Bus GLib Bindings by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: dbus-binding-tool

Installed Library: libdbus-glib-1.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/dbus-glib

Short Descriptions

dbus-binding-tool	is a tool used to interface with the D-Bus API.
`libdbus-glib-1.{so,a}`	contains GLib interface functions to the D-Bus API.

D-Bus Python Bindings

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://dbus.freedesktop.org/releases/dbus-python/dbus-python-0.82.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 024522ffba612f0d41b64269e925835c
Download size: 482 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

D-Bus Python Dependencies

Required

Python-2.5.2 and D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74

Optional

PyGObject (required to run the test suite)

Optional (Required to build the API Documentation)

Epydoc and Docutils

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dbus-python

Installation of D-Bus Python Bindings

Install D-Bus Python Bindings by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note you must have PyGObject installed.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Python D-Bus modules

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/dbus and /usr/share/doc/dbus-python

D-Bus Qt3 Bindings

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/sources/dbus-qt3-0.62.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 307e119f501c207a437d1dd087c9af80
Download size: 390 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

D-Bus Qt3 Dependencies

Required

D-BUS-1.0.2 and Qt-3.3.8b

Installation of D-Bus Qt3 Bindings

Install D-Bus Qt3 Bindings by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libdbus-qt-1.so

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libdbus-qt-1.{so,a}

contains Qt3 interface functions to the D-Bus API.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

libpthread-stubs-0.1

Introduction to libpthread-stubs

The libpthread-stubs package provides weak aliases for pthread functions not provided in libc or otherwise available by default. This is useful for libraries that rely on pthread stubs to use pthreads optionally. On Linux, all necessary pthread functions are available, so this package is simply a placeholder.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xcb.freedesktop.org/dist/libpthread-stubs-0.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/lib/libpthread-stubs-0.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 774eabaf33440d534efe108ef9130a7d
Download size: 190 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libpthread-stubs

Installation of libpthread-stubs

Install libpthread-stubs by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Last updated on 2007-07-09 23:30:55 -0500

Pth-2.0.7

Introduction to Pth

The Pth package contains a very portable POSIX/ANSI-C based library for Unix platforms which provides non-preemptive priority-based scheduling for multiple threads of execution (multithreading) inside event-driven applications. All threads run in the same address space of the server application, but each thread has its own individual program-counter, run-time stack, signal mask and errno variable.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/pth/pth-2.0.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/pth/pth-2.0.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9cb4a25331a4c4db866a31cbe507c793
Download size: 652 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pth

Installation of Pth

Caution

Don't add the --enable-pthread parameter to the configure command below else you will overwrite the pthread library and interface header installed by the Glibc package in LFS.

Install Pth by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/pth-2.0.7 &&
install -v -m644    README PORTING SUPPORT TESTS \
                    /usr/share/doc/pth-2.0.7

Installed Program: pth-config

Installed Library: libpth.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/pth-2.0.7

Short Descriptions

pth-config	is a utility used to configure and build applications based on the pth(3) library. It can be used to query the C compiler and linker flags which are required to correctly compile and link the application against the pth(3) library.
`libpth.{so,a}`	contains the API functions used by the GNU Portable Threads Library.

Last updated on 2007-08-15 19:36:18 -0500

Libassuan-1.0.4

Introduction to Libassuan

The Libassuan package contains an IPC library used by some of the other GnuPG related packages. Libassuan's primary use is to allow a client to interact with a non-persistent server. Libassuan is not, however, limited to use with GnuPG servers and clients. It was designed to be flexible enough to meet the demands of many transaction based environments with non-persistent servers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/libassuan-1.0.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libassuan/libassuan-1.0.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ffb95bf2bac23e173f5a83a270f7524a
Download size: 297 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Libassuan Dependencies

Optional

Pth-2.0.7

Other packages (such as GnuPG-2) will require that the Libassuan library is linked to the Pth library. Ensure Pth is installed before beginning the build if you have any doubts.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libassuan

Installation of Libassuan

Install Libassuan by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Only info documentation is shipped in the package tarball. If you wish to build alternate formats of the documentation, you must have teTeX-3.0 installed, then issue the following commands:

make -k -C doc pdf ps html &&
makeinfo --html --no-split -o doc/assuan_nochunks.html doc/assuan.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext       -o doc/assuan.txt           doc/assuan.texi

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D README /usr/share/doc/libassuan-1.0.4/README

If you built the additional documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libassuan-1.0.4/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/assuan.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/libassuan-1.0.4/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/assuan_*.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/libassuan-1.0.4 &&
install -v -m644 doc/assuan.{pdf,ps,dvi,txt,texi} \
                    /usr/share/doc/libassuan-1.0.4

Installed Program: libassuan-config

Installed Libraries: libassuan.a and libassuan-pth.a

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libassuan-1.0.4

Short Descriptions

libassuan-config	is a utility used to configure and build applications based on the libassuan(3) library. It can be used to query the C compiler and linker flags which are required to correctly compile and link the application against the libassuan(3) library.
`libassuan.a`	is the IPC library.
`libassuan-pth.a`	is the IPC library linked with the GNU Portable Threads Library.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 11:52:33 -0500

Libgpg-error-1.5

Introduction to Libgpg-error

The Libgpg-error package contains a library that defines common error values for all GnuPG components. Among these are GPG, GPGSM, GPGME, GPG-Agent, libgcrypt, Libksba, DirMngr, Pinentry, SmartCard Daemon and more.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/libgpg-error-1.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgpg-error/libgpg-error-1.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8599b96c911b1df1be24a6ff4ec3c364
Download size: 372 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgpg-error

Installation of Libgpg-error

Install Libgpg-error by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D README /usr/share/doc/libgpg-error-1.5/README

Installed Program: libgpg-error and libgpg-error-config

Installed Library: liblibgpg-error.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/common-lisp

Short Descriptions

gpg-error	is used to determine Libgpg-error error codes.
gpg-error-config	is a utility used to configure and build applications based on the Libgpg-error library. It can be used to query the C compiler and linker flags which are required to correctly compile and link the application against the Libgpg-error library.
`liblibgpg-error.{so,a}`	contains the Libgpg-error API functions.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

Libgcrypt-1.2.4

Introduction to Libgcrypt

The Libgcrypt package contains a general purpose crypto library based on the code used in GnuPG. The library provides a high level interface to cryptographic building blocks using an extendable and flexible API.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/libgcrypt-1.2.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgcrypt/libgcrypt-1.2.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3675d3e74c3a44aed629d9b12a30bb51
Download size: 799 KB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Libgcrypt Dependencies

Required

Libgpg-error-1.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgcrypt

Installation of Libgcrypt

Install Libgcrypt by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Only info documentation is shipped in the package tarball. If you wish to build alternate formats of the documentation, you must have teTeX-3.0 installed, then issue the following commands:

make -C doc pdf ps html &&
makeinfo --html --no-split -o doc/gcrypt_nochunks.html doc/gcrypt.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext       -o doc/gcrypt.txt           doc/gcrypt.texi

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D README /usr/share/doc/libgcrypt-1.2.4/README

If you built the additional documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libgcrypt-1.2.4/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/gcrypt.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/libgcrypt-1.2.4/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/gcrypt_*.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/libgcrypt-1.2.4 &&
install -v -m644 doc/gcrypt.{pdf,ps,dvi,txt,texi} \
                    /usr/share/doc/libgcrypt-1.2.4

Installed Program: libgcrypt-config

Installed Libraries: libgcrypt.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libgcrypt-1.2.4

Short Descriptions

libgcrypt-config	is a utility used to configure and build applications based on the libgcrypt(3) library. It can be used to query the C compiler and linker flags which are required to correctly compile and link the application against the libgcrypt(3) library.
`libgcrypt.{so,a}`	contains the cryptographic API functions.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

Libksba-1.0.2

Introduction to Libksba

The Libksba package contains a library used to make X.509 certificates as well as making the CMS (Cryptographic Message Syntax) easily accessible by other applications. Both specifications are building blocks of S/MIME and TLS. The library does not rely on another cryptographic library but provides hooks for easy integration with Libgcrypt.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/libksba-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libksba/libksba-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3cccb3ef697e1e69eeceeea0715ff220
Download size: 525 KB
Estimated disk space required: 13 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Libksba Dependencies

Required

Libgpg-error-1.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libksba

Installation of Libksba

Install Libksba by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Only info documentation is shipped in the package tarball. If you wish to build alternate formats of the documentation, you must have teTeX-3.0 installed, then issue the following commands:

tex --output-directory=doc ksba.texi &&
dvips -o doc/ksba.ps doc/ksba.dvi    &&
make -C doc pdf html                 &&
makeinfo --html --no-split -o doc/ksba_nochunks.html doc/ksba.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext       -o doc/ksba.txt           doc/ksba.texi

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D README /usr/share/doc/libksba-1.0.2/README

If you built the additional documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libksba-1.0.2/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/ksba.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/libksba-1.0.2/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/ksba_*.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/libksba-1.0.2 &&
install -v -m644 doc/ksba.{pdf,ps,dvi,txt,texi} \
                    /usr/share/doc/libksba-1.0.2

Installed Program: libksba-config

Installed Libraries: libksba.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libksba-1.0.2

Short Descriptions

libksba-config	is a utility used to configure and build applications based on the libksba(3) library. It can be used to query the C compiler and linker flags which are required to correctly compile and link the application against the libksba(3) library.
`libksba.{so,a}`	contains the cryptographic API functions.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

Mowgli-0.6.1

Introduction to Mowgli

The Mowgli package contains a development framework for C, similar to GLib-2.12.12. It provides high performance and highly flexible algorithms for routine tasks such as reference-counting, linked lists and spinlocks, and thus helps programmers write better engineered code.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://distfiles.atheme.org/libmowgli-0.6.1.tgz
Download MD5 sum: 80f8a27f1b44b0b129215f858ab1ab82
Download size: 106 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.0 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Mowgli

Installation of Mowgli

Install Mowgli by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a formal test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libmowgli.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libmowgli

Short Descriptions

libmowgli.so

libraries contain optimized functions for various common C programming tasks.

Last updated on 2008-03-17 10:09:51 -0500

mcs-0.7.0

Introduction to mcs

The mcs package is a library and set of tools which abstract the storage of configuration settings away from userland applications. There are similar projects like this (such as GConf), but unlike those projects, mcs strictly handles abstraction. It does not impose any specific data storage requirement, nor is it tied to any desktop environment or software suite.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://distfiles.atheme.org/libmcs-0.7.0.tgz
Download MD5 sum: 0f0c779609b3481a79937c2e86660a99
Download size: 103 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.3 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

mcs Dependencies

Required

Mowgli-0.6.1

Optional

GConf-2.18.0.1 and kdelibs-3.5.9

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/mcs

Installation of mcs

Install mcs by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D README /usr/share/doc/mcs-0.7.0/README

Command Explanations

--with-qt-path=/usr/share/qt: If you have kdelibs-3.5.9 installed, you must pass additional parameters to the configure script to identify the location of Qt and, possibly, KDE libraries and interface headers.

For additional information about the various storage backends (including the default XDG-compliant backend), see the README file in the source tree.

Configuring mcs

There are various ways to configure mcs to use a specific backend on a site-wide or individual user basis. If the default file-based storage backend is suitable, no configuration steps are required. See section 2 of the README file in the source tree for details.

Installed Programs: mcs-getconfval, mcs-info, mcs-query-backends and mcs-setconfval

Installed Libraries: libmcs.so and backend storage modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/mcs, /usr/lib/mcs and /usr/share/doc/mcs-0.7.0

Short Descriptions

mcs-getconfval	queries mcs for a configuration value.
mcs-info	displays information about the current installation and configuration of mcs.
mcs-query-backends	queries mcs to determine what backends are available.
mcs-setconfval	instructs mcs to change a configuration value.
`libmcs.so`	contains the API functions required by the mcs userspace tools.

Last updated on 2008-03-17 11:00:11 -0500

Chapter 9. Graphics and Font Libraries

Depending on what your system will be used for, you may or may not require the graphics and font libraries. Most desktop machines will want them for use with graphical applications. Most servers on the other hand, will not require them.

libjpeg-6b

Introduction to libjpeg

The libjpeg package contains libraries that allow compression of image files based on the Joint Photographic Experts Group standard. It is a "lossy" compression algorithm.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.ijg.org/files/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: dbd5f3b47ed13132f04c685d608a7547
Download size: 599 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libjpeg

Installation of libjpeg

Install libjpeg by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-static --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-static --enable-shared: These switches tell libjpeg to build both shared and static libraries.

Configuring libjpeg

Configuration Information

Installed Programs: cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgcom

Installed Library: libjpeg.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

cjpeg	compresses image files to produce a JPEG/JFIF file on the standard output. Currently supported input file formats are: PPM (PBMPLUS color format), PGM (PBMPLUS gray-scale format), BMP, and Targa.
djpeg	decompresses image files from JPEG/JFIF format to either PPM (PBMPLUS color format), PGM (PBMPLUS gray-scale format), BMP, or Targa format.
jpegtran	is used for lossless transformation of JPEG files.
rdjpgcom	displays text comments from within a JPEG file.
wrjpgcom	inserts text comments into a JPEG file.
`libjpeg.{so,a}`	library is used by many programs for reading and writing JPEG format files.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libpng-1.2.29

Introduction to libpng

The libpng package contains libraries used by other programs for reading and writing PNG files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/libpng/libpng-1.2.29.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f588cb4ee39e3a333604096f937ea157
Download size: 616 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libpng

Installation of libpng

Install libpng by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libpng-1.2.29 &&
install -v -m644 README libpng-1.2.29.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/libpng-1.2.29

Configuring libpng

Configuration Information

Installed Programs: libpng-config and libpng12-config

Installed Libraries: libpng.so and libpng12.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libpng12 and /usr/share/doc/libpng-1.2.29

Short Descriptions

libpng-config	is a symlink to libpng12-config.
libpng12-config	provides configuration information for libpng.
`libpng.so and libpng12.{so,a}`	are a collection of routines used to create and manipulate PNG format graphics files. The PNG format was designed as a replacement for GIF and, to a lesser extent, TIFF, with many improvements and extensions and lack of patent problems.

Last updated on 2008-07-09 11:49:35 -0500

LibTIFF-3.8.2

Introduction to LibTIFF

The LibTIFF package contains the TIFF libraries and associated utilities. The libraries are used by many programs for reading and writing TIFF files and the utilities are useful for general work with TIFF files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://libtiff.maptools.org/dl/tiff-3.8.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.remotesensing.org/libtiff/tiff-3.8.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: fbb6f446ea4ed18955e2714934e5b698
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

LibTIFF Dependencies

Optional

libjpeg-6b, X Window System, and freeglut-2.4.0

Note that if you installed the optional MesaGLUT package with the MesaLib-6.5.2 package during an Xorg7 installation, a GLUT library is already installed and you don't need freeglut.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libtiff

Installation of LibTIFF

Install LibTIFF by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: bmp2tiff, fax2ps, fax2tiff, gif2tiff, pal2rgb, ppm2tiff, ras2tiff, raw2tiff, rgb2ycbcr, thumbnail, tiff2bw, tiff2pdf, tiff2ps, tiff2rgba, tiffcmp, tiffcp, tiffdither, tiffdump, tiffgt, tiffinfo, tiffmedian, tiffset, and tiffsplit

Installed Libraries: libtiff.{so,a} and libtiffxx.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/tiff-3.8.2

Short Descriptions

bmp2tiff	converts a Microsoft Windows Device Independent Bitmap image file to a TIFF image.
fax2ps	converts a TIFF facsimile to compressed PostScript file.
fax2tiff	creates a TIFF Class F fax file from raw fax data.
gif2tiff	creates a TIFF file from a GIF87 format image file.
pal2rgb	converts a palette color TIFF image to a full color image.
ppm2tiff	creates a TIFF file from a PPM image file.
ras2tiff	creates a TIFF file from a Sun rasterfile.
raw2tiff	converts a raw byte sequence into TIFF.
rgb2ycbcr	converts non-YCbCr TIFF images to YCbCr TIFF images.
thumbnail	creates a TIFF file with thumbnail images.
tiff2bw	converts a color TIFF image to grayscale.
tiff2pdf	converts a TIFF image to a PDF document.
tiff2ps	converts a TIFF image to a PostScript file.
tiff2rgba	converts a wide variety of TIFF images into an RGBA TIFF image.
tiffcmp	compares two TIFF files.
tiffcp	copies (and possibly converts) a TIFF file.
tiffdither	converts a grayscale image to bilevel using dithering.
tiffdump	prints verbatim information about TIFF files.
tiffgt	displays an image stored in a TIFF file in an X window.
tiffinfo	prints information about TIFF files.
tiffmedian	applies the median cut algorithm to data in a TIFF file.
tiffset	sets the value of a TIFF header to a specified value.
tiffsplit	splits a multi-image TIFF into single-image TIFF files.
`libtiff.{so,a}`	contains the API functions used by the libtiff programs as well as other programs to read and write TIFF files.
`libtiffxx.{so,a}`	contains the C++ API functions used by programs to read and write TIFF files.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

giflib-4.1.4

Introduction to giflib

The giflib package contains libraries for reading and writing GIFs as well as programs for converting and working with GIF files. The libraries are useful for any graphics program wishing to deal with GIF files while the programs are useful for conversion purposes as well as cleaning up images.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/giflib/giflib-4.1.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/giflib-4.1.4.tar.gz
Download (HTTP) MD5 sum: 827d338961482a986f39c7f114531636
Download (HTTP) size: 483 KB
Download (FTP) MD5 sum: 950943daa71350a558c3edf41c3f0f9f
Download (FTP) size: 605 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

giflib Dependencies

Optional

X Window System and Utah Raster Toolkit (or URT-3.1b)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/giflib

Installation of giflib

Install giflib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.4/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{png,html} \
    /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.4/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.4

Installed Programs: gif2epsn, gif2ps, gif2rgb, gif2x11, gifasm, gifbg, gifburst, gifclip, gifclrmp, gifcolor, gifcomb, gifcompose, giffiltr, giffix, gifflip, gifhisto, gifinfo, gifinter, gifinto, gifovly, gifpos, gifrotat, gifrsize, gifspnge, giftext, gifwedge, icon2gif, raw2gif, rgb2gif, and text2gif

Installed Library: libgif.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.4

Short Descriptions

gif2epsn	dumps images saved as GIF files on Epson type printers.
gif2ps	prints GIF files on laser printers supporting PostScript.
gif2rgb	converts images saved as GIF to 24-bit RGB images.
gif2x11	displays images saved as GIF files under X Window System.
gifasm	assembles multiple GIFs into one, or burst a multiple-image GIF.
gifbg	generates a single-color test pattern GIF.
gifburst	bursts a GIF image into subrectangles.
gifclip	clips or crops a GIF image.
gifclrmp	modifies GIF image colormaps.
gifcolor	generates color test patterns.
gifcomb	combines two GIF images of exactly the same size into one.
gifcompose	uses giflib tools to compose images.
giffiltr	is a template for filtering a GIF sequentially.
giffix	clumsily attempts to fix truncated GIF images.
gifflip	flips a GIF image along the X or Y axis or rotates an image by 90 degrees.
gifhisto	generate a color-frequency histogram from a GIF.
gifinfo	gives information about a GIF file.
gifinter	converts between interlaced and non-interlaced images.
gifinto	is an end-of-pipe fitting for GIF-processing pipelines.
gifovly	generates one composite GIF from a multiple-image GIF.
gifpos	changes a GIF's screen size or reconditions it.
gifrotat	rotates a GIF through any desired angle.
gifrsize	resizes a GIF by deletion or duplication of bits.
gifspnge	is a template for filtering a GIF with in-core operations.
giftext	prints (text only) general information about a GIF file.
gifwedge	creates a test GIF image resembling a color monitor test pattern.
icon2gif	is a converter/deconverter to/from an editable text format.
raw2gif	converts raw 8-bit image data into GIF files.
rgb2gif	converts 24 bit images to a GIF image using color quantization.
text2gif	generates GIF images out of regular text in 8x8 font.
`libgif.{so,a}`	contains API functions required by the giflib programs and any other programs needing library functionality to read, write and manipulate GIF images.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

little cms-1.16

Introduction to little cms

The little cms library is used by other programs to provide color management facilities.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.littlecms.com/lcms-1.16.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/lcms-1.16.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: b07b623f3e712373ff713fb32cf23651
Download size: 911 KB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU (includes building the Python module)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/lcms-1.16-swig_fixes-1.patch

little cms Dependencies

Optional

LibTIFF-3.8.2, libjpeg-6b, and Python-2.5.2 (with SWIG also)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/lcms

Installation of little cms

Install little cms by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../lcms-1.16-swig_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/lcms-1.16 &&
install -v -m644 README.1ST doc/* /usr/share/doc/lcms-1.16

Installed Programs: icc2ps, icclink, icctrans, wtpt and optionally, jpegicc, tiffdiff and tifficc

Installed Libraries: liblcms.{so,a} and the optional _lcms.so Python module

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/lcms-1.16

Short Descriptions

icc2ps	generates PostScript CRD or CSA from ICC profiles.
icclink	links two or more profiles into a single device link profile.
icctrans	is a color space conversion calculator.
jpegicc	is an ICC profile applier for JPEG files.
tifficc	is an ICC profile applier for TIFF files.
wtpt	shows media white of profiles, identifying black body locus.
`liblcms.{so,a}`	is used by the lcms programs as well as other programs to provide color management facilities.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

libmng-1.0.9

Introduction to libmng

The libmng libraries are used by programs wanting to read and write Multiple-image Network Graphics (MNG) files which are the animation equivalents to PNG files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/libmng/libmng-1.0.9.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ff1205ef70855a75c098ea09690413c6
Download size: 554 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libmng Dependencies

Required

libjpeg-6b and little cms-1.16

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libmng

Installation of libmng

Install libmng by running the following commands:

cp makefiles/makefile.linux Makefile &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr install &&
install -v -m644 doc/man/*.3 /usr/share/man/man3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/man/*.5 /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libmng-1.0.9 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{png,txt} /usr/share/doc/libmng-1.0.9

Command Explanations

cp makefiles/makefile.linux Makefile: There are no autotools shipped with this package. The Linux Makefile is copied to the root of the source tree, facilitating the installation.

install ...: The documentation files are not installed by the installation procedure, so they are copied manually.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libmng.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libmng-1.0.9

Short Descriptions

libmng.{so,a}

provides functions for programs wishing to read and write MNG files which are animation files without the patent problems associated with certain other formats.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

FreeType-2.3.7

Introduction to FreeType2

The FreeType2 package contains a library to allow applications to properly render TrueType fonts.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/freetype/freetype-2.3.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/freetype-2.3.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 83306194817ebdea554133b4232a34aa
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 28.2 (includes installing additional documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Additional Documentation

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/freetype/freetype-doc-2.3.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/freetype-doc-2.3.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2ba135e6a126ed86e9b462167511ced8
Download size: 97 KB

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/freetype2

Installation of FreeType2

If you downloaded the additional documentation, unpack it into the source tree using the following command:

tar xf ../freetype-doc-2.3.7.tar.bz2 \
    --strip-components=2 -C docs

Install FreeType2 by running the following commands:

sed -i -r -e 's:.*(#.*BYTE.*) .*:\1:' \
          -e 's:.*(#.*SUBPIX.*) .*:\1:' \
          include/freetype/config/ftoption.h &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/freetype-2.3.7 &&
cp -v -R docs/* /usr/share/doc/freetype-2.3.7

Command Explanations

sed -i ... 's:.*(#.*BYTE.*) .*:\1:' ... 's:.*(#.*SUBPIX.*) .*:\1:' include/freetype/config/ftoption.h: This command enables the TrueType native bytecode interpreter and LCD optimized rendering features. These options result in improved rendering of fonts, but may have patent restrictions. Be sure to read http://www.freetype.org/patents.html before enabling these options.

Installed Program: freetype-config

Installed Library: libfreetype.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/freetype2

Short Descriptions

freetype-config	is used to get FreeType compilation and linking information.
`libfreetype.{so,a}`	contains functions for rendering various font types, such as TrueType and Type1.

Last updated on 2008-07-09 10:51:58 -0500

Fontconfig-2.4.2

Introduction to Fontconfig

The Fontconfig package is a library for configuring and customizing font access.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fontconfig.org/release/fontconfig-2.4.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/fontconfig-2.4.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f035852f521b54677f2b5c9e2f6d54a4
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 11.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Fontconfig Dependencies

Required

FreeType-2.3.7 and either expat-2.0.1 or libxml2-2.6.31 (requires pkg-config-0.22)

Optional

DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Note

If you have DocBook-utils installed and you remove the --disable-docs parameter from the configure command below, you must have SGMLSpm-1.03ii and JadeTeX-3.13 installed also, or the Fontconfig build will fail.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Fontconfig

Installation of Fontconfig

Install Fontconfig by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
    --sysconfdir=/etc --localstatedir=/var \
    --disable-docs --without-add-fonts \
    --with-docdir=/usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.3 /usr/share/man/man3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.5 /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m755 \
        -d /usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2/fontconfig-devel &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{html,pdf,txt} \
        /usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2 &&
install -v -m644 doc/fontconfig-devel/* \
        /usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2/fontconfig-devel

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var: This switch places the system font cache files in /var/cache/fontconfig.

--disable-docs: This switch avoids building the documentation (the release tarball includes pre-generated documentation).

--without-add-fonts: This switch disables the automatic search for X Window System fonts which, if found, may confuse some applications.

--with-docdir=/usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2: Though this parameter seems counter-intuitive following the preceding parameter to the configure command, it is used so that if the builder removes the --disable-docs parameter, the documentation will be installed in a versioned directory name instead of the default /usr/share/doc/fontconfig.

Configuring Fontconfig

Config Files

/etc/fonts/*, /etc/fonts/conf.avail/*, and /etc/fonts/conf.d/*

Configuration Information

The main configuration file for Fontconfig is /etc/fonts/fonts.conf. Generally you do not want to edit this file. It will also read /etc/fonts/local.conf and any files in /etc/fonts/conf.d. To put a new font directory in the configuration, create (or update) the /etc/fonts/local.conf file with your local information or add a new file in /etc/fonts/conf.d. The default location of fonts in Fontconfig is:

/usr/share/fonts
~/.fonts

Fontconfig also ships many example configuration files in the /etc/fonts/conf.avail directory. Symlinking to specific files from /etc/fonts/conf.d will enable them. The default setup is generally good enough for most users. See /etc/fonts/conf.avail/README for a description of the configuration files.

More information about configuring Fontconfig can be found in the user's manual in file:///usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2/fontconfig-user.html.

Installed Programs: fc-cache, fc-cat, fc-list, and fc-match

Installed Library: libfontconfig.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/fonts, /usr/include/fontconfig, /usr/share/doc/fontconfig-2.4.2 and /var/cache/fontconfig

Short Descriptions

fc-cache	is used to create font information caches.
fc-cat	is used to read font information caches.
fc-list	is used to create font lists.
fc-match	is used to match available fonts, or find fonts that match a given pattern.
`libfontconfig.{so,a}`	contains functions used by the Fontconfig programs and also by other programs to configure or customize font access.

Last updated on 2008-05-06 00:26:07 -0500

libart_lgpl-2.3.19

Introduction to libart_lgpl

The libart_lgpl package contains the libart libraries. These are useful for high-performance 2D graphics.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libart_lgpl/2.3/libart_lgpl-2.3.19.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libart_lgpl/2.3/libart_lgpl-2.3.19.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ac885805d1918026a18b560f4015bc66
Download size: 302 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libart_lgpl-2.3.19-upstream_fix-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libart_lgpl

Installation of libart_lgpl

Install libart_lgpl by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libart_lgpl-2.3.19-upstream_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: libart2-config

Installed Library: libart_lgpl_2.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libart-2.0

Short Descriptions

libart_lgpl_2.{so,a}

is used as the anti-aliased render engine for libgnomecanvas and as a graphics support library for many other packages.

Last updated on 2007-04-09 10:10:01 -0500

librsvg-2.16.1

Introduction to librsvg

The librsvg package contains librsvg libraries and tools used to manipulate, convert and view Scalable Vector Graphic (SVG) images.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/librsvg/2.16/librsvg-2.16.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/librsvg/2.16/librsvg-2.16.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 37e046571097ff7ce77ae6e07f096324
Download size: 416 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

librsvg Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1, libgnomeprintui-2.18.0, GTK-Doc-1.8, DocBook-utils-0.6.14, and Python-2.5.2, providing a legacy wrapper interface rsvg for the newer rsvg-convert.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/librsvg

Installation of librsvg

Install librsvg by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --disable-mozilla-plugin &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-mozilla-plugin: This parameter prevents building the browser plugin as Firefox and SeaMonkey have built-in SVG render capability and don't need it.

--disable-gtk-doc: This parameter prevents the rebuilding of documentation during the make command. It will also prevent the existing documentation in the source tree from being installed.

Installed Programs: rsvg, rsvg-convert and rsvg-view

Installed Libraries: librsvg-2.{so,a}, GTK+ modules and optionally a Mozilla plugin

Installed Directories: /usr/include/librsvg-2 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/rsvg

Short Descriptions

rsvg	is a legacy wrapper interface to rsvg-convert.
rsvg-convert	is used to covert SVG images into PNG, JPEG and ICO raster images.
rsvg-view	is used to view an SVG file in an X window.
`librsvg-2.{so,a}`	libraries provide the functions to render Scalable Vector Graphics.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

AAlib-1.4rc5

Introduction to AAlib

AAlib is a library to render any graphic into ASCII Art.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/aa-project/aalib-1.4rc5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ratmir.tver.ru/pub/FreeBsd/ports/distfiles/aalib-1.4rc5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9801095c42bba12edebd1902bcf0a990
Download size: 388 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.15 SBU

AAlib Dependencies

Optional

X Window System, S-Lang-2.1.3, and GPM-1.20.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/aalib

Installation of AAlib

Install AAlib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: aafire, aainfo, aalib-config, aasavefont, and aatest

Installed Library: libaa.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

aafire	is little toy of AAlib, rendering an animated fire in ASCII Art.
aainfo	provides information for your current settings related to AAlib.
aalib-config	provides configuration info for AAlib.
aatest	shows the abilities of AAlib in a little test.
`libaa.{so,a}`	is a collection of routines to render any graphical input in portable format to ASCII Art. It can be used through many programs and has a very well documented API, so you can easily put it into your own programs.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Imlib2-1.4.0

Introduction to Imlib2

Imlib2 is a graphics library for fast file loading, saving, rendering and manipulation.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/enlightenment/imlib2-1.4.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 69f7ee996c943142332b4c98597b095c
Download size: 955 KB
Estimated disk space required: 16 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Imlib2 Dependencies

Required

FreeType-2.3.7, libpng-1.2.29, and libjpeg-6b

Optional

LibTIFF-3.8.2, giflib-4.1.4, and libid3tag

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/imlib2

Installation of Imlib2

Install Imlib2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/imlib2-1.4.0 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{*.gif,index.html} \
    /usr/share/doc/imlib2-1.4.0

Command Explanations

--without-x: Add this parameter if you do not have an X Window System installed.

Installed Programs: imlib2_bumpmap, imlib2_colorspace, imlib2-config, imlib2_conv, imlib2_grab, imlib2_poly, imlib2_show, imlib2_test, and imlib2_view

Installed Libraries: libImlib2.{so,a} and various filters and image loader modules.

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/imlib2, /usr/share/doc/imlib2-1.4.0, and /usr/share/imlib2

Short Descriptions

libImlib2.{so,a}

provides the functions for programs to deal with various image data formats.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 20:55:50 -0500

libexif-0.6.16

Introduction to libexif

The libexif package contains a library for parsing, editing, and saving EXIF data. Most digital cameras produce EXIF files, which are JPEG files with extra tags that contain information about the image. All EXIF tags described in EXIF standard 2.1 are supported.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/libexif/libexif-0.6.16.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: deee153b1ded5a944ea05d041d959eca
Download size: 691 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libexif Dependencies

Optional (to Build Documentation)

Doxygen-1.5.2 and Graphviz-2.12

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libexif

Installation of libexif

Install libexif by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-doc-dir=/usr/share/doc/libexif-0.6.16 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Documentation was built and installed if you have the dependencies shown above installed. If you don't have the dependencies installed, there is a compressed tarball in the source tree doc directory that can be unpacked into /usr/share/doc/libexif-0.6.16.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libexif.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libexif and /usr/share/doc/libexif-0.6.16

Short Descriptions

libexif.{so,a}

contains functions used for parsing, editing, and saving EXIF data.

Last updated on 2007-07-08 11:14:30 -0500

FriBidi-0.10.8

Introduction to FriBidi

The FriBidi package is an implementation of the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (bidi). This is useful for supporting Arabic and Hebrew alphabets in other packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fribidi.org/download/fribidi-0.10.8.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: fe6a1e370353e330bbe043bb1697d04e
Download size: 619 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/fribidi-0.10.8-test_fixes-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/fribidi

Installation of FriBidi

Install FriBidi by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../fribidi-0.10.8-test_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: fribidi and fribidi-config

Installed Library: libfribidi.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/include/fribidi

Short Descriptions

fribidi	is a command-line interface to the `libfribidi` library and can be used to convert a logical string to visual output.
fribidi-config	is used to acquire information about the installed `libfribidi` library.
`libfribidi.{so,a}`	contains functions used to implement the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm.

Last updated on 2007-08-05 18:41:15 -0500

Poppler-0.5.4

Introduction to Poppler

The Poppler package contains a PDF rendering library and command line tools used to manipulate PDF files. This is useful for providing PDF rendering functionality as a shared library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://poppler.freedesktop.org/poppler-0.5.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 053fdfd70533ecce1a06353fa945f061
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 49 MB (additional 15 MB to install the encoding data package)
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU (includes building with all dependencies)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/poppler-0.5.4-security_fixes-2.patch
Poppler Encoding Data: http://poppler.freedesktop.org/poppler-data-0.1.tar.gz

The additional package consists of encoding files for use with Poppler. The encoding files are optional and poppler will automatically read them if they are present. When installed, they enable Poppler to render CJK and Cyrillic properly.

Poppler Dependencies

Required

pkg-config-0.22 and Fontconfig-2.4.2

Optional

libjpeg-6b, cairo-1.4.14, GTK+-2.10.13, Qt-3.3.8b, and Qt-4.x.x

If you're installing Poppler to support kdegraphics-3.5.9, you will need to have Qt-3.3.8b installed so that the libpoppler-qt library is built.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/poppler

Installation of Poppler

Caution

Poppler will overwrite command-line utilities and man pages previously installed by the Xpdf package. If you prefer to keep the Xpdf versions of these files, pass the --disable-utils parameter to the configure command below.

The configure command below includes three parameters which disable various rendering back-ends. Ensure you remove any of the parameters for which you have the corresponding dependency installed. Install Poppler by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../poppler-0.5.4-security_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --enable-zlib \
            --disable-cairo-output \
            --disable-poppler-glib \
            --disable-gtk-test &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d      /usr/share/doc/poppler-0.5.4 &&
install -v -m644 README* /usr/share/doc/poppler-0.5.4

If you downloaded the additional encoding data package, install it by issuing the following command after unpacking the tarball and changing into the newly-created package source directory (as the root user):

make prefix=/usr install

Command Explanations

--enable-zlib: This parameter forces the build to link with the system-installed libz library to enable compressed PDF functionality.

--disable-cairo-output: This parameter disables building the cairo graphics backend. Remove this parameter if you have cairo installed.

--disable-poppler-glib and --disable-gtk-test: These parameters disable building the GLib wrapper and GTK+ test program. Remove these parameters if you have GTK+-2 installed. Note that if you plan on building Evince-0.8.3, you must build the GLib wrapper.

Configuring Poppler

Config Files

/etc/xpdfrc

Installed Programs: See the Xpdf-3.02 program descriptions

Installed Libraries: libpoppler.{so,a}, libpoppler-glib.{so,a}, libpoppler-qt.{so,a} and libpoppler-qt4.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/poppler, /usr/share/doc/poppler-0.5.4, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/poppler and /usr/share/poppler

Short Descriptions

`libpoppler.{so,a}`	contains the API functions to render PDF files.
`libpoppler-glib.{so,a}`	is a wrapper library used to interface the PDF rendering functions with GTK+.
`libpoppler-qt.{so,a}`	is a wrapper library used to interface the PDF rendering functions with Qt.
`libpoppler-qt4.{so,a}`	is a wrapper library used to interface the PDF rendering functions with Qt-4.

Last updated on 2008-07-12 13:29:07 -0500

Chapter 10. General Utilities

This chapter contains various utilities that do not fit conveniently into other chapters. Programs include a command line calculator, several utilities for manipulating text and graphics, a program to interface with a palm-pilot, a program for entering PIN numbers and pass-phrases, and a hash generator.

Bc-1.06

Introduction to Bc

The bc package contains an arbitrary precision numeric processing language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/bc/bc-1.06.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/bc/bc-1.06.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: d44b5dddebd8a7a7309aea6c36fda117
Download size: 273 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.36 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU (0.2 SBU if running the testsuite)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/bc

Installation of Bc

Install bc by running the following commands:

sed -i '/PROTO.*readline/d' bc/scan.l &&
sed -i '/flex -I8/s/8//' configure &&
sed -i '/stdlib/a #include <string.h>' lib/number.c &&
sed -i 's/program.*save/static &/' bc/load.c &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-readline &&
make

To test bc, run the commands below. There is quite a bit of output, so you may want to redirect it to a file. There are a very small percentage of tests (10 of 12,144) that will indicate a roundoff error at the last digit.

echo "quit" | ./bc/bc -l Test/checklib.b

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i '/PROTO.*readline/d' bc/scan.l: This command fixes the Readline library call.

sed -i '/flex -I8/s/8//' configure: This command fixes the Flex invocation.

sed -i '/stdlib/a #include <string.h>' lib/number.c: This command inserts a missing header.

sed -i 's/program.*save/static &/' bc/load.c: This command fixes a segfault when running bc with bc -l.

--with-readline: This option enables Readline support in interactive mode.

Installed Programs: bc and dc

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

bc	is a calculator.
dc	is a reverse-polish calculator.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Rep-gtk-0.18

Introduction to Rep-gtk

The rep-gtk package contains a Lisp and GTK binding. This is useful for extending GTK-2 and GDK libraries with Lisp. Starting at rep-gtk-0.15, the package contains the bindings to GTK and uses the same instructions. Both can be installed, if needed.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/rep-gtk/rep-gtk-0.18.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 220b0d728656472c068e40823f0a3b22
Download size: 152 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.18 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/rep-gtk-0.18-gtk2.4-1.patch

Rep-gtk Dependencies

Required

libglade-2.6.1 and librep-0.17

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/rep-gtk

Installation of Rep-gtk

Install rep-gtk by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../rep-gtk-0.18-gtk2.4-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Lisp bindings

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/rep/i686-pc-linux-gnu/gui/

Short Descriptions

Lisp bindings

are libraries stored in /usr/lib/rep/i686-pc-linux-gnu/gui/ that assist communication between Lisp and the GTK libraries.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Compface-1.5.2

Introduction to Compface

Compface provides utilities and a library to convert from/to X-Face format, a 48x48 bitmap format used to carry thumbnails of email authors in a mail header.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/aux/compface-1.5.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 62f4f79c0861ad292ba3cf77b4c48319
Download size: 47 KB
Estimated disk space required: 520 KB
Estimated build time: Less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/compface

Installation of Compface

Install Compface by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -m755 -v xbm2xface.pl /usr/bin

Installed Programs: compface, uncompface and xbm2xface.pl

Installed Library: libcompface.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

compface	is a filter for generating highly compressed representations of 48x48x1 face image files.
uncompface	is an inverse filter which performs an inverse transformation with no loss of data.
xbm2xface.pl	is a script to generate xfaces.
`libcompface.{so,a}`	allows the compression and decompression algorithms to be used in other programs such as MTAs.

Last updated on 2007-11-22 15:22:21 -0600

ImageMagick-6.3.5-10

Introduction to ImageMagick

ImageMagick is a collection of tools and libraries to read, write, and manipulate an image in various image formats. Image processing operations are available from the command line. Bindings to various programming languages are also available.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/imagemagick/ImageMagick-6.3.5-10.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.imagemagick.net/pub/ImageMagick/legacy/ImageMagick-6.3.5-10.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0e638f94ab70272a645b4d6ae06201d8
Download size: 7.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 211 MB (additional 75 MB if you run the Image::Magick demo)
Estimated build time: 4.2 SBU (Additional 1.8 SBU to run the test suite)

The ImageMagick source releases are updated frequently and the version shown above may no longer be available from the download locations. You can download a more recent version and use the existing BLFS instructions to install it. Chances are that it will work just fine, but this has not been tested by the BLFS team. If the package version shown above is not available from the locations shown above, you can download it from the BLFS package server at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/i/ImageMagick-6.3.5-10.tar.bz2.

ImageMagick Dependencies

The optional dependencies listed below should be installed if you need support for the specific format or the conversion tool the dependency provides. Many of the dependencies' capabilities and uses are described in the “MAGICK DELEGATES” section of the README.txt file located in the source tree. Additional information about the dependencies can be found in the Install-unix.txt file located in the source tree as well as issuing the ./configure --help command. A summary of this information, as well as some additional notes can be viewed on-line at http://www.imagemagick.org/script/advanced-unix-installation.php.

Optional System Utilities

pkg-config-0.22, CUPS-1.2.12 or LPRng-3.8.28 (or any other print utility that provides an lpr command), dcraw, Dmalloc, Electric Fence, PGP or GnuPG-1.4.7 or GnuPG-2.0.8 (you'll have to do some hacking to use GnuPG), SANE-1.0.18, and Wget-1.10.2

Optional Graphics Libraries

corefonts, FlashPIX (or FlashPIX library), FreeType-2.3.7, Jasper, JBIG-KIT, little cms-1.16, libexif-0.6.16, libjpeg-6b, libpng-1.2.29, librsvg-2.16.1, LibTIFF-3.8.2, libxml2-2.6.31, DjVuLibre, and RALCGM (or RALCGM-3.50)

Optional Graphics Utilities

ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.53, GhostPCL, GIMP-2.2.17, Gnuplot, Graphviz-2.12, POV-Ray, and Radiance

Optional Conversion Tools

AutoTrace, Enscript-1.6.4, hp2xx, html2ps, libwmf, MPEG-2 Video Codec, Netpbm, teTeX-3.0, Transfig, txt2html (requires Module::Build-0.2808 and Perl Module Getopt::ArgvFile), and Utah Raster Toolkit (or URT-3.1b)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/imagemagick

Installation of ImageMagick

Install Imagemagick by running the following commands:

sed -i -e "s/\xc2\xae/\\\[rg\]/g" \
   -e "s/B...'e./Be/" utilities/ImageMagick.1.in &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-modules &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that some of the tests may fail due to system and/or build parameter settings.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e "..." -e "...": One man page is installed with character encoding not displayable using the Man-db package. This command changes the offending bytes to characters man can properly display.

--with-modules: Enables support for dynamically loadable modules.

--with-gslib=/usr/lib: Enables support to use the Ghostscript shared library.

--with-fpx: Enables support to use the FlashPix library.

--with-windows-font-dir=<Some/Directory>: This option specifies the directory where the Windows CoreFonts are installed.

The options and parameters listed above are the only ones you should have to pass to the configure script to activate all the delegate dependencies. All other dependencies will be automatically detected and utilized in the build if they are installed.

Installed Programs: animate, compare, composite, conjure, convert, display, identify, import, Magick-config, Magick++-config, mogrify, montage, stream, and Wand-config

Installed Libraries: libMagick.{so,a}, libMagick++.{so,a}, libWand.{so,a}, the Magick.so Perl module, and numerous plugin modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/Magick++, /usr/include/magick, /usr/include/wand, /usr/lib/ImageMagick-6.3.5, /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8/i686-linux/auto/Image/Magick, /usr/share/ImageMagick-6.3.5 and /usr/share/doc/ImageMagick-6.3.5

Short Descriptions

animate	animates a sequence of images.
compare	compares an image to a reconstructed image.
composite	composites various images into the given base image.
conjure	processes a MSL script to create an image.
convert	converts image(s) from one format to another.
display	displays an image.
identify	describes the format and characteristics of an image file.
import	captures an X window.
Magick-config and Magick++-config	show information about the installed versions of ImageMagick and Magick++.
mogrify	transforms an image.
montage	composites various images into a new image.
stream	streams one or more pixel components of an image or portion of the image to your choice of storage formats.
Wand-config	shows the options required to use the Wand library.
`Image::Magick`	allows the reading, manipulation and writing of a large number of image file formats using the ImageMagick library. Run make in the `PerlMagick/demo` directory of the package source tree after the package is installed to see a nice demo of the module's capabilities.

Last updated on 2008-05-19 17:38:54 -0500

Hd2u-1.0.1

Introduction to Hd2u

The hd2u package contains an any to any text format converter.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.megaloman.com/~hany/_data/hd2u/hd2u-1.0.1.tgz
Download MD5 sum: dbab0f0c3ee473880ee1fc9740e43515
Download size: 54 KB
Estimated disk space required: 364 KB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Hd2u Dependencies

Required

popt-1.10.4

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/hd2u

Installation of Hd2u

Install hd2u by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: dos2unix

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

dos2unix

converts text between various OS formats (such as converting from DOS format to Unix).

Last updated on 2007-08-13 18:29:22 -0500

GTK-Doc-1.8

Introduction to GTK-Doc

The GTK-Doc package contains a code documentor. This is useful for extracting specially formatted comments from the code to create API documentation. This package is optional; if it is not installed, packages will not build the documentation. This does not mean that you will not have any documentation. If GTK-Doc is not available, the install process will copy any pre-built documentation to your system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtk-doc/1.8/gtk-doc-1.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtk-doc/1.8/gtk-doc-1.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e61595df21431db28c83fe4c7d4a4fa8
Download size: 186 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GTK-Doc Dependencies

Required

libxslt-1.1.22, DocBook XML DTD-4.5, and DocBook XSL Stylesheets-1.71.1

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, OpenJade-1.3.2, DocBook SGML DTD-4.5, and DocBook DSSSL Stylesheets-1.79

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gtk-doc

Installation of GTK-Doc

Install GTK-Doc by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This parameter is used so that all ScrollKeeper files are installed in, and the ScrollKeeper database is properly updated in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of some files being installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gtkdocize, gtkdoc-fixxref, gtkdoc-mkdb, gtkdoc-mkhtml, gtkdoc-mkman, gtkdoc-mktmpl, gtkdoc-scan, gtkdoc-scangobj, and gtkdoc-scanobj

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of /usr/share/: doc/gtk-doc-1.8, gnome/help/gtk-doc-manual, gtk-doc/data and {omf,sgml}/gtk-doc

Short Descriptions

gtkdoc*

these are all Perl scripts used by package Makefile scripts to generate documentation for the package being built.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Introduction to ScrollKeeper

The ScrollKeeper package contains a cataloging system for documentation. This is useful for managing documentation metadata and providing an API to help browsers find, sort and search the document catalog.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/scrollkeeper/0.3/scrollkeeper-0.3.14.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/scrollkeeper/0.3/scrollkeeper-0.3.14.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b175e582a6cec3e50a9de73a5bb7455a
Download size: 546 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ScrollKeeper Dependencies

Required

libxslt-1.1.22, DocBook XML DTD-4.5, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/scrollkeeper

Installation of ScrollKeeper

Install ScrollKeeper by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --localstatedir=/var \
            --disable-static \
            --with-omfdirs=/usr/share/omf:\
/opt/kde-3.5.9/share/omf:\
/opt/gnome-2.18.3/share/omf &&

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch puts the configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var: This switch puts ScrollKeeper's database directory in /var/lib/scrollkeeper.

--disable-static: This switch prevents the static library from being built.

--with-omfdirs=...: This switch defines the locations of OMF files for ScrollKeeper. Change the locations if you have KDE and/or GNOME-2 installed in a prefix other than the ones shown. This information is stored in /etc/scrollkeeper.conf and can be updated manually, if necessary.

Configuring ScrollKeeper

Config Files

/etc/scrollkeeper.conf

Configuration Information

The configuration file sets the OMF_DIR variable to the location of all of the omf directories in the system. This was set in the configure command so no further action is needed until another OMF directory is created.

Installed Programs: scrollkeeper-config, scrollkeeper-extract, scrollkeeper-gen-seriesid, scrollkeeper-get-cl, scrollkeeper-get-content-list, scrollkeeper-get-extended-content-list, scrollkeeper-get-index-from-docpath, scrollkeeper-get-toc-from-docpath, scrollkeeper-get-toc-from-id, scrollkeeper-install, scrollkeeper-preinstall, scrollkeeper-rebuilddb, scrollkeeper-uninstall, and scrollkeeper-update

Installed Library: libscrollkeeper.so

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/scrollkeeper-0.3.14, /usr/share/{omf, {,xml/}scrollkeeper}, and /var/lib/scrollkeeper

Short Descriptions

ScrollKeeper utility programs	The ScrollKeeper utility programs and scripts listed above are for performing installation, building, getting and updating table of contents files.
`libscrollkeeper.so`	provides the API necessary for help browsers to interact with documentation written to utilize ScrollKeeper.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 18:09:31 -0500

Intltool-0.35.5

Introduction to Intltool

The intltool package contains an internationalization tool. This is useful for extracting translatable strings from source files, collecting the extracted strings with messages from traditional source files (<source directory>/<package>/po) and merging the translations into .xml, .desktop and .oaf files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/intltool/0.35/intltool-0.35.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/intltool/0.35/intltool-0.35.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f52d5fa7f128db94e884cd21dd45d2e2
Download size: 132 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Intltool Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/intltool

Installation of Intltool

Install intltool by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/I18N-HOWTO \
    /usr/share/doc/intltool-0.35.5/I18N-HOWTO

Installed Programs: intltoolize, intltool-extract, intltool-merge, intltool-prepare, and intltool-update

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/intltool and /usr/share/doc/intltool-0.35.5

Short Descriptions

intltoolize	prepares a package to use intltool.
intltool-extract	generates header files that can be read by gettext.
intltool-merge	merges translated strings into various file types.
intltool-prepare	updates pot files and merges them with translation files.
intltool-update	updates the `po` template files and merges them with the translations.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Screen-4.0.3

Introduction to Screen

Screen is a terminal multiplexor that runs several separate processes, typically interactive shells, on a single physical character-based terminal. Each virtual terminal emulates a DEC VT100 plus several ANSI X3.64 and ISO 2022 functions and also provides configurable input and output translation, serial port support, configurable logging, multi-user support, and many character encodings, including UTF-8. Screen sessions can be detached and resumed later on a different terminal.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.uni-erlangen.de/pub/utilities/screen/screen-4.0.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uni-erlangen.de/pub/utilities/screen/screen-4.0.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8506fd205028a96c741e4037de6e3c42
Download size: 821 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Screen Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/screen

Installation of Screen

Install Screen by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --with-socket-dir=/var/run/screen \
    --with-sys-screenrc=/etc/screenrc &&
sed -i -e "s%/usr/local/etc/screenrc%/etc/screenrc%" {etc,doc}/* &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -m 644 etc/etcscreenrc /etc/screenrc

Command Explanations

--with-socket-dir=/var/run/screen: This option places the per-user sockets in a standard location.

--with-sys-screenrc=/etc/screenrc: This option places the global screenrc file in /etc.

sed -i -e "s%/usr/local/etc/screenrc%/etc/screenrc%" {etc,doc}/*: This command corrects the configuration and documentation files to the location that is used here for the global screenrc file.

Configuring Screen

Config Files

/etc/screenrc and ~/.screenrc

Configuration Information

You may want to look at the example configuration file that was installed and customize it for your needs.

Installed Program: screen

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /var/run/screen

Short Descriptions

screen

is a terminal multiplexor with VT100/ANSI terminal emulation.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

HTML Tidy-cvs_20070326

Introduction to HTML Tidy

The HTML Tidy package contains a command line tool and libraries used to read HTML, XHTML and XML files and write cleaned up markup. It detects and corrects many common coding errors and strives to produce visually equivalent markup that is both W3C compliant and compatible with most browsers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/sources/tidy-cvs_20070326.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 468bfaa5cf917a8ecbe7834c13a61376
Download size: 872 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

HTML Tidy tarballs are no longer generated by the maintainers. To build from source, the HTML Tidy developers recommend using current CVS. The source tarball shown above was created by the BLFS team by pulling a CVS version and generating the autotool components. BLFS made no changes to the existing source files.

HTML Tidy Dependencies

Optional

Dmalloc

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/tidy

Installation of HTML Tidy

Install HTML Tidy by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you wish to install the API documentation, issue the following command as the root user:

make -C htmldoc install_apidocs

Configuring HTML Tidy

Config Files

The absolute path of the file specified in $HTML_TIDY.

Configuration Information

The default configuration options can be set in the file defined in $HTML_TIDY. Additional configuration options can be passed to tidy via command line parameters or the -config <file> parameter.

Installed Programs: tab2space and tidy

Installed Library: libtidy.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/tidy-051020

Short Descriptions

tab2space	is a utility to expand tabs and ensure consistent line endings.
tidy	validates, corrects, and pretty-prints HTML files.
`libtidy.{so,a}`	libraries provide the HTML Tidy API functions to tidy and can also be called by other programs.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

desktop-file-utils-0.13

Introduction to desktop-file-utils

The desktop-file-utils package contains command line utilities for working with desktop entries. These utilities are used by GNOME-2 and other applications to manipulate the MIME-types application databases and help adhere to the Desktop Entry Specification.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freedesktop.org/software/desktop-file-utils/releases/desktop-file-utils-0.13.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 2ee84d0de753d4052011714c20d6efae
Download size: 347 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

desktop-file-utils Dependencies

Required

Optional

Emacs-22.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/desktop-file-utils

Installation of desktop-file-utils

Install desktop-file-utils by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring desktop-file-utils

Configuration Information

The XDG Base Directory specification defines the standard locations for applications to place data and configuration files. These files can be used, for instance, to define the menu structure and menu items in a desktop environment.

The default location for configuration files to be installed is /etc/xdg, and the default locations for data files are /usr/local/share and /usr/share. These locations can be extended with the environment variables XDG_CONFIG_DIRS and XDG_DATA_DIRS, respectively. The GNOME, KDE and XFCE environments respect respect these settings. Update the XDG_DATA_DIRS (if necessary) and XDG_CONFIG_DIRS environment variables so that the additional MIME-types application databases and desktop menu files are properly maintained and discovered by adding the following to the system-wide or personal profile:

For GNOME:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=$GNOME_PREFIX/share:/usr/local/share:/usr/share
XDG_CONFIG_DIRS=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/xdg:/etc/xdg
export XDG_DATA_DIRS XDG_CONFIG_DIRS

For KDE:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=$KDE_PREFIX/share:/usr/local/share:/usr/share
XDG_CONFIG_DIRS=/etc/kde/xdg:/etc/xdg
export XDG_DATA_DIRS XDG_CONFIG_DIRS

For XFCE, the default locations should be appropriate if the instructions in the BLFS book were followed.

When a package installs a .desktop file to a location in one of the base data directories, the database that maps MIME-types to available applications can be updated. For instance, the cache file at /usr/share/applications/mimeinfo.cache can be rebuilt by executing the following command as the root user:

update-desktop-database /usr/share/applications

Installed Programs: desktop-file-install, desktop-file-validate, and update-desktop-database

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

desktop-file-install	is used to install a new, or modify an existing desktop file entry. It is also used to rebuild or modify the MIME-types application database.
desktop-file-validate	is used to verify the integrity of a desktop file.
update-desktop-database	is used to update the MIME-types application database.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 16:12:44 -0500

XScreenSaver-5.03

Introduction to XScreenSaver

The XScreenSaver is a modular screen saver and locker for the X Window System. It is highly customizable and allows the use of any program that can draw on the root window as a display mode. The purpose of XScreenSaver is to display pretty pictures on your screen when it is not in use, in keeping with the philosophy that unattended monitors should always be doing something interesting, just like they do in the movies. However, XScreenSaver can also be used as a screen locker, to prevent others from using your terminal while you are away.

There may be a more recent release available from the XScreenSaver home page. You can check http://www.jwz.org/xscreensaver/ and probably use the existing BLFS instructions. Note that versions other than the one shown in the download URLs have not been tested in a BLFS environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/x/xscreensaver-5.03.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/x/xscreensaver-5.03.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 367b0397132102faf43e71e27bbdc181
Download size: 5.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 129 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU

XScreenSaver Dependencies

Required

bc-1.06 and libglade-2.6.1 (alternatively LessTif-0.95.0 but not recommended)

Optional

libjpeg-6b, libgnome-2.18.0, GLE, Netpbm, XDaliClock, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 (built with Kerberos V4 backwards compatibility), and krb4 and Heimdal-1.1 (Kerberos authentication requires having Kerberos V4 and V5 on the system)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xscreensaver

Installation of XScreenSaver

Install XScreenSaver by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-setuid-hacks: This switch allows some demos to be installed setuid root which is needed in order to ping other hosts.

--enable-locking: This switch provides support for locking the display.

Configuring XScreenSaver

Config Files

/etc/X11/app-defaults/XScreenSaver, ~/.xscreensaver and /etc/pam.d/xscreensaver or /etc/pam.conf

Installed Programs: xscreensaver, xscreensaver-command, xscreensaver-demo, xscreensaver-getimage, xscreensaver-getimage-file, xscreensaver-getimage-video, xscreensaver-gl-helper, and xscreensaver-text

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/xscreensaver and /usr/share/xscreensaver

Short Descriptions

xscreensaver	is a screen saver and locker daemon.
xscreensaver-command	controls a running xscreensaver process by sending it client messages.
xscreensaver-demo	is a graphical front-end for setting the parameters used by the background xscreensaver daemon.
xscreensaver-getimage	is a helper program for the xscreensaver modules that manipulate images.
xscreensaver-getimage-file	is a helper program for the xscreensaver modules that manipulate images.
xscreensaver-getimage-video	is a helper program for the xscreensaver modules that manipulate images.
xscreensaver-gl-helper	is a helper program for the xscreensaver OpenGL modules.
xscreensaver-text	prints some text to stdout, for use by screen savers.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

pilot-link-0.12.2

Introduction to pilot-link

The pilot-link package provides a suite of tools containing a series of conduits, libraries, and language bindings for moving information to and from your Palm device and your desktop or server/workstation system, as well as across a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.pilot-link.org/pilot-link-0.12.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/pilot-link-0.12.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c1f4db8f32a2ee916fedb9a2dac8aa26
Download size: 964 KB
Estimated disk space required: 20 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/pilot-link-0.12.2-bindings_fix-1.patch

pilot-link Dependencies

Optional

libpng-1.2.29, popt-1.10.4, libusb-0.1.12, JDK-6 Update 5, Tcl-8.4.18, Python-2.5.2, BlueZ, and Electric Fence

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pilot-link

Kernel Configuration

You may need to configure the “USB_SERIAL_VISOR” device into the kernel before your system can communicate with your Palm device. Add this device by enabling the following kernel parameter setting and rebuilding the kernel (and modules, if applicable):

Device Drivers:
  USB support:
    USB Serial Converter support:
      USB Handspring Visor / Palm m50x / Sony Client Driver

For additional information about connecting your USB Palm device, see: http://www.pilot-link.org/README.usb.

Installation of pilot-link

Install pilot-link by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../pilot-link-0.12.2-bindings_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-threads \
            --enable-conduits \
            --with-perl &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/pilot-link-0.12.2 &&
install -v -m644 README doc/{README.*,TODO,CodingGuidelines} \
                    /usr/share/doc/pilot-link-0.12.2

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This parameter is required to link the threading library into the build.

--enable-conduits: This parameter is required to build the userspace programs. Omit it if you only need the pilot-link libraries.

--with-perl: This parameter is required to build the Perl bindings.

--with-java --with-tcl=/usr/lib --with-python: Use any or all of these options to enable the respective language bindings desired.

Installed Programs: pilot-650foto, pilot-addresses, pilot-clip, pilot-csd, pilot-debugsh, pilot-dedupe, pilot-dlpsh, pilot-file, pilot-foto, pilot-getram, pilot-getrom, pilot-getromtoken, pilot-hinotes, pilot-ietf2datebook, pilot-install-datebook, pilot-install-expenses, pilot-install-hinote, pilot-install-memo, pilot-install-netsync, pilot-install-todo, pilot-install-todos, pilot-install-user, pilot-memos, pilot-nredir, pilot-read-expenses, pilot-read-ical, pilot-read-notepad, pilot-read-palmpix, pilot-read-screenshot, pilot-read-todos, pilot-read-veo, pilot-reminders, pilot-schlep, pilot-sync-plan, pilot-treofoto, pilot-undelete, pilot-wav, pilot-xfer and optionally, pitclsh

Installed Libraries: libjpisock.so JDK library, libpitcl.{so,a} Tcl library, _pisock.so Python module and Pilot.so Perl module

Installed Bindings: /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8/i686-linux/auto/PDA, /usr/share/doc/pilot-link-0.12.2 and/usr/share/pilot-link

Short Descriptions

pilot-link programs and utilities

Describing the functionality of each pilot-link program and utility would take several pages. Instead, after you've installed the package, review the pilot-link man page (man pilot-link). If you wish to review before installing the package, unpack the tarball and issue man doc/man/pilot-link.7.in.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 07:37:23 -0500

unixODBC-2.2.12

Introduction to unixODBC

The unixODBC package is an Open Source ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) sub-system and an ODBC SDK for Linux, Mac OSX, and UNIX. ODBC is an open specification for providing application developers with a predictable API with which to access data sources. Data sources include SQL Servers and any data source with an ODBC Driver. unixODBC contains the following components used to assist with the manipulation of ODBC data sources: a driver manager, an installer library and command line tool, command line tools to help install a driver and work with SQL, drivers and driver setup libraries and a suite of graphical tools used to administer ODBC, test drivers and browse data sources.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.unixodbc.org/unixODBC-2.2.12.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/unixODBC-2.2.12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9a116aad4059c31d231b626ffdf1869a
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 101 MB
Estimated build time: 3.5 SBU (includes building the GUI tools)

unixODBC Dependencies

Optional

Qt-3.3.8b (required to build the GUI tools), Pth-2.0.7, and Mini SQL

Note

There is a circular dependency with Qt and unixODBC. If you need to build the Qt unixODBC plugin module, you will have to build and install unixODBC once without the GUI tools to satisfy the Qt build. Then, after Qt has been installed, you'll need to build and install unixODBC again if you wish to build the GUI tools.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/unixodbc

Installation of unixODBC

Install unixODBC by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/unixodbc \
            --enable-fdb \
            --disable-gui &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

find doc -name "Makefile*" -exec rm {} \; &&
chmod 644 doc/{lst,ProgrammerManual/Tutorial}/* &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/unixODBC-2.2.12 &&
cp -v -R doc/* /usr/share/doc/unixODBC-2.2.12

Command Explanations

--enable-fdb: This parameter enables support for file-based data access.

--disable-gui: This parameter disables building the GUI tools. Remove it if you have Qt installed and wish to build the GUI tools.

Configuring unixODBC

Config Files

/etc/unixodbc/*

Configuration Information

The files in /etc/unixodbc are meant to be configured by the system administrator (or the ODBC site administrator if appropriate privileges are granted to /etc/unixodbc). These files are not meant to be directly edited. The ODBC installer library is responsible for reading and writing the unixODBC config files.

Unfortunately, there are no man or info pages for the various programs available in the unixODBC package. Along with the information in the “Short Descriptions” below and the documentation installed in /usr/share/doc/unixODBC-2.2.12, there are many README files throughout the source tree where the use and functionality of the programs can be found. Additionally, you can use the parameter -? with the non-GUI tools for syntax and usage information. Lastly, the unixODBC web site at http://www.unixodbc.org/ has very good information.

Installed Programs: DataManager, DataManagerII, ODBCConfig, dltest, isql, iusql, odbc_config, odbcinst and odbctest

Installed Libraries: libboundparam.so, libesoobS.so, libgtrtst.so, libmimerS.so, libnn.so, libodbc.so, libodbccr.so, libodbcdrvcfg1S.so, libodbcdrvcfg2S.so, libodbcinst.so, libodbcinstQ.so, libodbcminiS.so, libodbcmyS.so, libodbcnnS.so, libodbcpsql.so, libodbcpsqlS.so, libodbctxt.so, libodbctxtS.so, liboplodbcS.so, liboraodbcS.so, libsapdbS.so, libtdsS.so and libtemplate.so

Installed Directories: /etc/unixodbc and /usr/share/doc/unixODBC-2.2.12

Short Descriptions

DataManager	is a graphical program which can be used to browse/explore ODBC data sources.
DataManagerII	is an enhanced version of DataManager.
ODBCConfig	is a graphical program used to make configuration of ODBC data sources extremely easy.
dltest	is a utility used to check a share library to see if it can be loaded and if a given symbol exists in it.
isql	is a utility which can be used to submit SQL to a data source and to format/output results. It can be used in batch or interactive mode.
iusql	provides the same functionality as the isql program.
odbc_config	is used to find out details about the installation of the unixODBC package.
odbcinst	is a utility created for install script/RPM writers. It is a command line interface to key functionality in the `libodbcinst` library. It does not copy any files (i.e., libraries) but it will modify the ODBC System Information for the user.
odbctest	is a graphical program used to test the ODBC API.

Last updated on 2007-08-15 18:06:57 -0500

Graphviz-2.12

Introduction to Graphviz

The Graphviz package contains graph visualization software. Graph visualization is a way of representing structural information as diagrams of abstract graphs and networks. Graphviz has several main graph layout programs. It also has web and interactive graphical interfaces, auxiliary tools, libraries, and language bindings.

The Graphviz layout programs take descriptions of graphs in a simple text language, and creates diagrams in several useful formats such as images and SVG for web pages, Postscript for inclusion in PDF or other documents, or as objects displayed in an interactive graph browser. (Graphviz also supports GXL, an XML dialect.) In practice, graphs are usually generated from external data sources, but they can also be created and edited manually, either as raw text files or within a graphical editor. (Graphviz was not intended to be a Visio replacement, so it would probably be frustrating to try to use it that way.)

This package is useful for automatic graph drawing which has many important applications in software engineering, database and web design, networking, and in visual interfaces for many other domains. Graphviz has many useful features for concrete diagrams, such as options for colors, fonts, tabular node layouts, line styles, hyperlinks, and custom shapes.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.graphviz.org/pub/graphviz/ARCHIVE/graphviz-2.12.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/graphviz-2.12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e5547bc0ec47943c72f5c3e2b5dff58f
Download size: 4.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 102 MB
Estimated build time: 1.8 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/graphviz-2.12-gd_fixes-1.patch

Graphviz Dependencies

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, expat-2.0.1, libpng-1.2.29, libjpeg-6b, FreeType-2.3.7, Fontconfig-2.4.2, X Window System, Pango-1.16.4 (built with cairo support), GTK+-2.10.13, libgnomeui-2.18.1, libglade-2.6.1, Tcl-8.4.18, Tk-8.4.18, GD Library, and Electric Fence

Optional (to Build Language Bindings)

SWIG (SWIG must be installed or no bindings will be built), Guile-1.8.2, JDK-6 Update 5, PHP-5.2.3, Python-2.5.2, Ruby-1.8.6-p111, Tcl-8.4.18, C# (DotGNU Portable.NET or Mono), Io, Lua, and Objective Caml

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/graphviz

Installation of Graphviz

If you wish to compile the Java language bindings, you will need to supply the path to the Java headers with the following command:

export CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -I$JAVA_HOME/include -I$JAVA_HOME/include/linux"

Install Graphviz by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../graphviz-2.12-gd_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite that provides meaningful results.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If desired, create a symbolic link in the system documents directory to the documentation installed in /usr/share/graphviz/doc using the following command as the root user:

ln -v -s /usr/share/graphviz/doc \
         /usr/share/doc/graphviz-2.12

Configuring Graphviz

Config Files

/usr/lib/graphviz/config

Configuration Information

There are no specific configuration requirements for Graphviz. You may consider installing the additional plugins and tools available from the download page at http://www.graphviz.org/Download_source.php for additional capabilities. If additional plugins are installed, you can run dot_static -c (as the root user) to update the config file in /usr/lib/graphviz.

Installed Programs: acyclic, bcomps, ccomps, circo, dijkstra, dot, dot2gxl, dot_static, dotty, fdp, gc, gvcolor, gvpack, gvpr, gxl2dot, lefty, lneato, nop, prune, sccmap, tred, twopi and unflatten

Installed Libraries: libagraph.{so,a}, libcdt.{so,a}, libexpr.{so,a}, libgraph.{so,a}, libpack.{so,a}, libpathplan.{so,a}, additional support libraries and language bindings

Installed Directories: /usr/include/graphviz, /usr/lib/graphviz and /usr/share/graphviz

Short Descriptions

acyclic	is a filter that takes a directed graph as input and outputs a copy of the graph with sufficient edges reversed to make the graph acyclic. The reversed edge inherits all of the attributes of the original edge.
bcomps	decomposes graphs into their biconnected components, printing the components to standard output.
ccomps	decomposes graphs into their connected components, printing the components to standard output.
circo	draws graphs using a circular layout. The tool identifies biconnected components and draws the nodes of the component on a circle. The block-cutpoint tree is then laid out using a recursive radial algorithm. Edge crossings within a circle are minimized by placing as many edges on the circle's perimeter as possible. In particular, if the component is outerplanar, the component will have a planar layout.
dijkstra	reads a stream of graphs and for each computes the distance of every node from sourcenode.
dot	draws directed graphs. It works well on DAGs and other graphs that can be drawn as hierarchies. It reads attributed graph files and writes drawings. By default, the output format dot is the input file with layout coordinates appended.
dot2gxl	converts between graphs represented in GXL and in the DOT language. Unless a conversion type is specified using a flag, gxl2dot will deduce the type of conversion from the suffix of the input file, a `.dot` suffix causing a conversion from DOT to GXL, and a `.gxl` suffix causing a conversion from GXL to DOT.
dot_static	is a version of dotthat has all the Graphviz libraries compiled statically.
dotty	is a graph editor for the X Window System. It may be run as a standalone editor, or as a front end for applications that use graphs. It can control multiple windows viewing different graphs.
fdp	draws undirected graphs using a “spring” model. It relies on a force-directed approach in the spirit of Fruchterman and Reingold.
gc	is a graph analogue to wc in that it prints to standard output the number of nodes, edges, connected components or clusters contained in the input files. It also prints a total count for all graphs if more than one graph is given.
gvcolor	is a filter that sets node colors from initial seed values. Colors flow along edges from tail to head, and are averaged (as HSB vectors) at nodes. The graph must already have been processed by dot.
gvpack	reads in a stream of graphs, combines the graphs into a single layout, and produces a single graph serving as the union of the input graphs. The input graphs must be in dot format, and must have all necessary layout information.
gvpr	is a graph stream editor inspired by awk. It copies input graphs to its output, possibly transforming their structure and attributes, creating new graphs, or printing arbitrary information.
gxl2dot	converts between graphs represented in GXL and in the DOT language. Unless a conversion type is specified using a flag, gxl2dot will deduce the type of conversion from the suffix of the input file, a `.dot` suffix causing a conversion from DOT to GXL, and a `.gxl` suffix causing a conversion from GXL to DOT.
lefty	is a two-view graphics editor for technical pictures.
lneato	is a graph editor for the X Window System. It may be run as a standalone editor, or as a front end for applications that use graphs. It can control multiple windows viewing different graphs.
nop	reads a stream of graphs and prints each in pretty-printed (canonical) format on stdout. If no files are given, it reads from stdin.
prune	reads directed graphs in the same format used by dot and removes subgraphs rooted at nodes specified on the command line via options. These nodes themselves will not be removed, but can be given attributes so that they can be easily located by a graph stream editor such as gpr. prune correctly handles cycles, loops and multi-edges.
sccmap	decomposes digraphs into strongly connected components and an auxiliary map of the relationship between components. In this map, each component is collapsed into a node. The resulting graphs are printed to standard out. The number of nodes, edges and strongly connected components are printed to standard error. sccmap is a way of partitioning large graphs into more manageable pieces.
tred	computes the transitive reduction of directed graphs, and prints the resulting graphs to standard output. This removes edges implied by transitivity. Nodes and subgraphs are not otherwise affected. The “meaning” and validity of the reduced graphs is application dependent. tred is particularly useful as a preprocessor to dot to reduce clutter in dense layouts.
twopi	draws graphs using a radial layout. Basically, one node is chosen as the center and put at the origin. The remaining nodes are placed on a sequence of concentric circles centered about the origin, each a fixed radial distance from the previous circle.
unflatten	is a preprocessor to dot that is used to improve the aspect ratio of graphs having many leaves or disconnected nodes. The usual layout for such a graph is generally very wide or tall. unflatten inserts invisible edges or adjusts the minlen on edges to improve layout compaction.
`libagraph.{so,a}`	supports graph programming by maintaining graphs in memory and reading and writing graph files. Graphs, nodes and edges may be attributed with programmer-defined records and string name-value pairs. Graphs are composed of nodes, edges, and nested subgraphs. Internally, `libagraph` depends extensively on `libcdt` (formerly `libdict`) for set representation.
`libcdt.{so,a}`	manages run-time dictionaries using standard container data types: unordered set/multiset, ordered set/multiset, list, stack, and queue.
`libexpr.{so,a}`	is a C-like expression library.
`libgraph.{so,a}`	maintains directed and undirected attributed graphs in memory and reads and writes graph files. Graphs are composed of nodes, edges, and nested subgraphs. A subgraph may contain any nodes and edges of its parents, and may be passed to any `libgraph` function taking a graph pointer, except the three that create new attributes (where a main graph is required).
`libpack.{so,a}`	supports the use of connected components in the context of laying out graphs using other Graphviz libraries. One set of functions can be used to take a single graph and break it apart into connected components. A complementary set of functions takes a collection of graphs (not necessarily components of a single graph) which have been laid out separately, and packs them together moderately tightly. The packing is done using the polyomino algorithm of K. Freivalds et al.
`libpathplan.{so,a}`	contains functions to find the shortest path between two points in a simple polygon.

Last updated on 2007-07-24 00:02:11 -0500

xterm-231

Introduction to xterm

xterm is a terminal emulator for the X Window System.

Package Information

Download (FTP): ftp://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm-231.tgz
Download MD5 sum: b767d702e1464e16802b90c2187252c6
Download size: 830 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

xterm Dependencies

Required

Xorg Libraries

Optional

luit-1.0.2 (required in non-UTF-8 locales if the user wants TrueType fonts, and always required in Chinese, Japanese, and Korean locales). Configuration instructions below assume that Luit is installed.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xterm

Installation of xterm

Install xterm by running the following commands:

sed -i '/v0/,+1s/new:/new:kb=^?:/' termcap &&
echo -e '\tkbs=\\177,' >>terminfo &&
TERMINFO=/usr/lib/terminfo ./configure $XORG_CONFIG \
    --enable-luit --enable-wide-chars \
    --with-app-defaults=$XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/app-defaults &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-ti

Command Explanations

sed -i ... termcap, echo ... >>terminfo: these commands modify the terminal description, so that the Backspace key is expected to send the character with ASCII code 127, for consistency with the Linux console.

TERMINFO=/usr/lib/terminfo: This ensures that the xterm terminfo file is installed to the system terminfo database when the installation prefix is not /usr.

--with-app-defaults=...: Sets the location for the app-defaults directory.

--enable-luit: Enables the luit filter for translation between Unicode (used by xterm internally in the configuration below) and the locale encoding. If luit is not found in the PATH, the default of /usr/X11R6/bin/luit will be used.

--enable-wide-chars: Adds support for wide characters.

make install-ti: This command installs corrected terminfo description files for use with xterm.

Configuring xterm

There are two ways to configure xterm. You can add X resource definitions to the user's ~/.Xresources file, or add them to the system-wide $XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/app-defaults/Xterm file.

In order for xterm to follow the locale settings in the environment, use TrueType fonts, and follow the Linux convention about the code sent by the Backspace key, add the following definitions as the root user:

cat >> $XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/app-defaults/XTerm << "EOF"
*VT100*locale: true
*VT100*faceName: Monospace
*VT100*faceSize: 10
*backarrowKeyIsErase: true
*ptyInitialErase: true
EOF

Installed Programs: resize, uxterm, and xterm

Short Descriptions

`resize`	prints a shell command for setting the TERM and TERMCAP environment variables to indicate the current size of xterm window.
`uxterm`	is a wrapper script that modifies the current locale to use UTF-8 and starts xterm with the proper settings.
`xterm`	is a terminal emulator for the X Window System.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

rman-3.2

Introduction to rman

rman is a utility to convert manual pages into other formats. It can currently supports HTML, ASCII, LaTeX, LaTeX2e, RTF, POD, and partial DocBook XML output.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/polyglotman/rman-3.2.tar.gz?download
Download MD5 sum: 6d1d67641c6d042595a96a62340d3cc6
Download size: 80 KB
Estimated disk space required: 629 KB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/rman

Installation of rman

rman is no longer part of the Xorg distribution, however, packages that use it may expect it to be in the same location as your Xorg programs. Adjust the makefile to account for this:

sed -i -e "s@/opt/local@$XORG_PREFIX@" \
    -e "s@/usr/local@$XORG_PREFIX@" Makefile

Build rman by running the following command:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: rman

Short Description

rman

is a manpage converter.

Last updated on 2008-02-05 11:44:55 -0600

Recode-3.6

Introduction to Recode

The Recode package contains a program for converting text between character sets, and a library that exposes this functionality to other applications. Note that the same functionality (but with different API) is provided by iconv, which is installed in LFS as a part of Glibc.

Note

The Recode package is no longer maintained upstream. Wishlist bugs such as http://bugs.debian.org/94966 will never be fixed.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/recode/recode-3.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/recode/recode-3.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: be3f40ad2e93dae5cd5f628264bf1877
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 24 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/recode-3.6-fixes-1.patch

Recode Dependencies

Optional

Python-2.5.2 (for the “bigauto” test) and Dmalloc

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/recode

Installation of Recode

Install Recode by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../recode-3.6-fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --without-included-gettext &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. The testsuite will warn about the “bigauto” test being skipped. The editors did not attempt to run this test to the end, because it uses obsolete Python constructions.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--without-included-gettext: This parameter forces the use of gettext implementation provided by Glibc instead of the very old internal copy. The internal copy produces incorrect output in UTF-8 locales.

Installed Program: recode

Installed Library: librecode.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

recode	converts text between character sets.
`librecode.{so,a}`	contains functions for character set conversion.

Last updated on 2007-01-19 00:38:19 +0500

icon-naming-utils-0.8.2

Introduction to icon-naming-utils

The icon-naming-utils package contains a Perl script used for maintaining backwards compatibility with current desktop icon themes, while migrating to the names specified in the Icon Naming Specification.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://tango.freedesktop.org/releases/icon-naming-utils-0.8.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/icon-naming-utils-0.8.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 76e6afde567bd17b4fe095aa0ec90531
Download size: 66 KB
Estimated disk space required: 500 KB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

icon-naming-utils Dependencies

Required

XML::Simple-2.18

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/icon-naming-utils

Installation of icon-naming-utils

Install icon-naming-utils by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --libexecdir=/usr/lib/icon-naming-utils &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib/icon-naming-utils: This parameter is used so that the main program script is placed in /usr/lib/icon-naming-utils instead of /usr/libexec.

Installed Programs: icon-name-mapping

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/dtds and /usr/share/icon-naming-utils

Short Descriptions

icon-name-mapping

is a Perl script used for maintaining backwards compatibility with current desktop icon themes, while migrating to the names specified in the Icon Naming Specification.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

rxvt-unicode-9.02

Introduction to rxvt-unicode

rxvt-unicode is a clone of the terminal emulator rxvt, an X Window System terminal emulator which includes support for XFT and Unicode.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://dist.schmorp.de/rxvt-unicode/Attic/rxvt-unicode-9.02.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f3c4fea3d544a340fa5a1d601ff5f204
Download size: 860 KB
Estimated disk space required: 27 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/rxvt-unicode-9.02-DISPLAY_fix-1.patch

rxvt-unicode Dependencies

Required

Optional

libAfterImage (adds support for transparency and background images)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/rxvt-unicode

Installation of rxvt-unicode

Install rxvt-unicode by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../rxvt-unicode-9.02-DISPLAY_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-everything &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-everything: Add support for all non-multichoice options. Details about the different options can be found in the file README.configure.

--disable-xft: Remove support for Xft fonts.

--disable-perl: Disable the embedded Perl interpreter.

--disable-afterimage: Remove support for libAfterImage.

Configuring rxvt-unicode

The rxvt-unicode terminal emulator uses the resource class URxvt and the resource name urxvt. You can add X resource definitions to a user's ~/.Xresources file or to the system-wide /etc/X11/app-defaults/URxvt file. The following example will load the matcher Perl extension (assuming Perl support wasn't disabled), which enables a middle button click to open an underlined URL in the specified browser, sets a background and foreground color and loads an Xft font:

cat >> /etc/X11/app-defaults/URxvt << "EOF"
URxvt*perl-ext: matcher
URxvt*urlLauncher: firefox
URxvt.background: black
URxvt.foreground: yellow
URxvt*font: xft:Monospace:pixelsize=12
EOF

The rxvt-unicode application can also run in a daemon mode, which makes it possible to open multiple terminal windows within the same process. The urxvtc client then connects to the urxvtd daemon and requests a new terminal window. Use this option with caution. If the daemon crashes, all the running processes in the terminal windows are terminated.

You can start the urxvtd daemon in the system or personal startup X session script (e.g., ~/.xinitrc) by adding the following lines near the top of the script:

# Start the urxvtd daemon
urxvtd -q -f -o &

For more information, examine the urxvt, urxvtd, urxvtc, and urxvtperl man pages.

Installed Programs: urxvt, urxvtd, and urxvtc

Installed Libraries: Many Perl extensions located under /usr/lib/urxvt/perl

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/urxvt

Short Descriptions

urxvt	is a terminal emulator for the X Window System.
urxvtd	is the urxvt terminal daemon.
urxvtc	controls the urxvtd daemon.

Last updated on 2008-05-14 09:22:03 -0500

PIN-Entry-0.7.3

Introduction to PIN-Entry

The PIN-Entry package contains a collection of simple PIN or pass-phrase entry dialogs which utilize the Assuan protocol as described by the Äegypten project. PIN-Entry programs are usually invoked by the gpg-agent daemon, but can be run from the command line as well. There are programs for various text-based and GUI environments, including interfaces designed for Ncurses (text-based), Gtk+, Gtk+-2, and Qt-3.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/p/pinentry-0.7.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/pinentry/pinentry-0.7.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 59282278405a8264b39ea28678c78cf4
Download size: 417 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

PIN-Entry Dependencies

Optional

GTK+-1.2.10, GTK+-2.10.13, Qt-3.3.8b, and libcap

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pinentry

Installation of PIN-Entry

Install PIN-Entry by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-pin-entry-curses        \
            --enable-fallback-curses         \
            --disable-pinentry-gtk           \
            --disable-pinentry-gtk2          \
            --disable-pinentry-qt            &&
make

Only info documentation is shipped in the package tarball. If you wish to build alternate formats of the documentation, you must have teTeX-3.0 installed, then issue the following commands:

make -k -C doc pdf ps html &&
makeinfo --html --no-split -o doc/pinentry_nochunks.html doc/pinentry.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext       -o doc/pinentry.txt           doc/pinentry.texi

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D README /usr/share/doc/pinentry-0.7.3/README

If you built the additional documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/pinentry-0.7.3/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/pinentry.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/pinentry-0.7.3/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/pinentry_*.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/pinentry-0.7.3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/pinentry.{pdf,ps,dvi,txt,texi} \
                    /usr/share/doc/pinentry-0.7.3

Command Explanations

--enable-...: These two parameters are used to fix a problem with the configure script if the optional dependencies are not installed. If the dependencies are installed, these parameters may be omitted.

--disable-...: These three parameters are used to fix a problem with the configure script if the optional dependencies are not installed. If the dependencies are installed, these parameters may be omitted.

Installed Programs: pinentry, pinentry-curses, pinentry-gtk, pinentry-gtk-2, and pinentry-qt

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/pinentry-0.7.3

Short Descriptions

pinentry	is a symbolic link to the default PIN-Entry program.
pinentry-curses	is an Ncurses text-based PIN-Entry program.
pinentry-gtk	is a Gtk GUI PIN-Entry program.
pinentry-gtk-2	is a Gtk-2 GUI PIN-Entry program.
pinentry-qt	is a Qt GUI PIN-Entry program.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 12:34:50 -0500

Gperf-3.0.3

Introduction to Gperf

Gperf generates a perfect hash function from a key set.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gperf/gperf-3.0.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gperf/gperf-3.0.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: cc20e58975a38075440423c8fb85fd00
Download size: 866 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gperf

Installation of Gperf

Install Gperf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If desired, create a text version of the documentation by issuing the following command:

makeinfo -o doc/gperf.txt --plaintext doc/gperf.texi

To test the results, issue make check. There should be no output from the diff commands.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gperf-3.0.3 &&
install -m644 -v doc/gperf.{dvi,ps,pdf,txt} /usr/share/doc/gperf-3.0.3

Command Explanations

install -m644 -v doc/gperf.{dvi,ps,pdf,txt} ...: This command installs documentation. Modify the command (remove ',txt') if you did not build the text version.

Installed Programs: gperf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/gperf-3.0.3

Short Descriptions

gperf

generates a perfect hash function from a key set.

Last updated on 2008-04-09 10:40:36 -0500

Chapter 11. System Utilities

This chapter contains mainly hardware utilities. It also contains some applications used by other applications in the book for installation or configuration purposes.

GPM-1.20.1

Introduction to GPM

The GPM (General Purpose Mouse daemon) package contains a mouse server for the console and xterm. It not only provides cut and paste support generally, but its library component is used by various software such as Links to provide mouse support to the application. It is useful on desktops, especially if following (Beyond) Linux From Scratch instructions; it's often much easier (and less error prone) to cut and paste between two console windows than to type everything by hand!

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.schottelius.org/pub/linux/gpm/gpm-1.20.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/gpm-1.20.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2c63e827d755527950d9d13fe3d87692
Download size: 556 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/gpm-1.20.1-segfault-1.patch
Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/gpm-1.20.1-silent-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/GPM

Installation of GPM

Install GPM by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gpm-1.20.1-segfault-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../gpm-1.20.1-silent-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
LDFLAGS="-lm" make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
cp -v conf/gpm-root.conf /etc &&
ldconfig

Command Explanations

LDFLAGS="-lm": The math library must be linked with gpm, as ceil() is used in some cursor scrolling logic.

Configuring GPM

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/gpm init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-gpm

Config Files

/etc/gpm-root.conf and ~/.gpm-root: The default and individual user gpm-root configuration files.

/etc/sysconfig/mouse: This file contains the name of your mouse device and the protocol which it uses. To create this file, run the following as the root user:

cat > /etc/sysconfig/mouse << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/sysconfig/mouse

MDEVICE="<yourdevice>"
PROTOCOL="<yourprotocol>"
GPMOPTS="<additional options>"

# End /etc/sysconfig/mouse
EOF

Configuration Information

Examples of values to set MDEVICE, PROTOCOL, and GPMOPTS to are:

MDEVICE="/dev/psaux"
PROTOCOL="imps2"
GPMOPTS=""

A list of which protocol values are known can be found by running gpm -m [device] -t -help. The MDEVICE setting depends on which type of mouse you have. For example, /dev/ttyS0 for a serial mouse (on Windows this is COM1), /dev/input/mice is often used for USB mice and /dev/psaux for PS2 mice. GPMOPTS is the 'catch all' for any additional options that are needed for your hardware.

Installed Programs: disable-paste, gpm, gpm-root, hltest, mev, and mouse-test

Installed Libraries: libgpm.{so.a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

disable-paste	is a security mechanism used to disable the paste buffer.
gpm	is a cut and paste utility and mouse server for virtual consoles.
gpm-root	is a default handler for gpm. It is used to draw menus on the root window.
hltest	is a simple sample application using the high-level library, meant to be read by programmers trying to use the high-level library.
mev	is a program to report mouse events.
mouse-test	is a tool for determining the mouse type and device it's attached to.
`libgpm.{so.a}`	contains the API functions to access the GPM daemon.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

Fcron-3.0.3

Introduction to Fcron

The Fcron package contains a periodical command scheduler which aims at replacing Vixie Cron.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fcron.free.fr/archives/fcron-3.0.3.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.seul.org/pub/fcron/fcron-3.0.3.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: c85e6eecd0564f37658ae250a491fd31
Download size: 536 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Fcron Dependencies

Optional

An MTA, text editor (default is vi from the Vim-7.1 package), Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/fcron

Installation of Fcron

Fcron uses the cron facility of syslog to log all messages. Since LFS does not set up this facility in /etc/syslog.conf, it needs to be done prior to installing Fcron. This command will append the necessary line to the current /etc/syslog.conf (perform as the root user):

cat >> /etc/syslog.conf << "EOF"
# Begin fcron addition to /etc/syslog.conf

cron.* -/var/log/cron.log

# End fcron addition
EOF

The configuration file has been modified, so reloading the sysklogd daemon will activate the changes (again as the root user).

/etc/rc.d/init.d/sysklogd reload

For security reasons, an unprivileged user and group for Fcron should be created (perform as the root user):

groupadd -g 22 fcron &&
useradd -d /dev/null -c "Fcron User" -g fcron -s /bin/false -u 22 fcron

Install Fcron by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var --without-sendmail --with-boot-install=no  &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--without-sendmail: By default, Fcron will attempt to use the sendmail command from an MTA package to email you the results of the fcron script. This switch is used to disable default email notification. Omit the switch to enable the default. Alternatively, you can use the --with-sendmail=</path/to/MTA command> to use a different mailer command.

--with-boot-install=no: This prevents installation of the bootscript included with the package.

--with-editor=</path/to/editor>: This switch allows you to set the default text editor.

Configuring Fcron

Config Files

/etc/fcron.conf, /etc/fcron.allow, and /etc/fcron.deny

Configuration Information

There are no required changes in any of the config files. Configuration information can be found in the man page for fcron.conf.

fcron scripts are written using fcrontab. Refer to the fcrontab man page for proper parameters to address your situation.

If Linux-PAM is installed, two PAM configuration files are installed in /etc/pam.d. Alternatively if /etc/pam.d is not used, the installation will append two configuration sections to the exiting /etc/pam.conf file. You should ensure the files match your preferences. Modify them as required to suit your needs.

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/fcron init script from the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-fcron

Installed Programs: fcron, fcrondyn, fcronsighup, and fcrontab

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/fcron-3.0.3 and /var/spool/fcron

Short Descriptions

fcron	is the scheduling daemon.
fcrondyn	is a user tool intended to interact with a running fcron daemon.
fcronsighup	instructs fcron to reread the Fcron tables.
fcrontab	is a program used to install, edit, list and remove the tables used by fcron.

Last updated on 2007-11-01 16:53:39 -0500

Hdparm-7.7

Introduction to Hdparm

The hdparm package contains a utility that is useful for controlling ATA/IDE controllers and hard drives both to increase performance and sometimes to increase stability.

Warning

As well as being useful, incorrect usage of hdparm can destroy your information and in rare cases, drives. Use with caution and make sure you know what you are doing. If in doubt, it is recommended that you leave the default kernel parameters alone.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/hdparm/hdparm-7.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0d96f03155fe5c119ca338a51ad1eaa7
Download size: 62 KB
Estimated disk space required: 524 KB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/hdparm

Installation of Hdparm

Build hdparm by running the following command:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note that by default, hdparm is installed in /sbin as some systems may require it during the boot process before /usr is mounted. If you wish to install hdparm under the /usr hierarchy, then replace the above command with the following:

make binprefix=/usr/ install

Installed Program: hdparm

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

hdparm

provides a command-line interface to various hard disk ioctls supported by the stock Linux ATA/IDE device driver subsystem.

Last updated on 2007-08-13 18:57:32 -0500

Which-2.19 and Alternatives

The presence or absence of the which program in the main LFS book is probably one of the most contentious issues on the mailing lists. It has resulted in at least one flame war in the past. To hopefully put an end to this once and for all, presented here are two options for equipping your system with which. The question of which “which” is for you to decide.

The first option is to install the actual GNU which package.

Introduction to Which

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.xs4all.nl/~carlo17/which/which-2.19.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/which/which-2.19.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: bbd094cec2444cd78befbc0cf09deea4
Download size: 132 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/which

Installation of Which

Install which by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: which

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

which

shows the full path of (shell) commands installed in your PATH.

The 'which' Script

The second option (for those who don't want to install the package) is to create a simple script (execute as the root user):

cat > /usr/bin/which << "EOF"
#!/bin/bash
type -pa "$@" | head -n 1 ; exit ${PIPESTATUS[0]}
EOF
chmod -v 755 /usr/bin/which
chown -v root:root /usr/bin/which

This should work OK and is probably the easiest solution for most cases, but is not the most comprehensive implementation.

Last updated on 2008-04-02 16:28:16 -0500

UnZip-5.52

Introduction to UnZip

The UnZip package contains ZIP extraction utilities. These are useful for extracting files from ZIP archives. ZIP archives are created with PKZIP or Info-ZIP utilities, primarily in a DOS environment.

Caution

The UnZip package has some locale related issues. See the discussion below in the section called “UnZip Locale Issues”. A more general discussion of these problems can be found in the Program Assumes Encoding section of the Locale Related Issues page.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/infozip/unzip552.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/tools/zip/info-zip/src/unzip552.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9d23919999d6eac9217d1f41472034a9
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 6.7 MB
Estimated build time: Less than 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/unzip-5.52-security_fix-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/unzip-5.52-security_fix-2.patch
Optional patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/unzip-5.50-alt-iconv-v1.1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/unzip

UnZip Locale Issues

Note

Use of UnZip in the JDK, Mozilla, DocBook or any other BLFS package installation is not a problem, as BLFS instructions never use UnZip to extract a file with non-ASCII characters in the file's name.

The UnZip package assumes that filenames stored in the ZIP archives created on non-Unix systems are encoded in CP850, and that they should be converted to ISO-8859-1 when writing files onto the filesystem. Such assumptions are not always valid. In fact, inside the ZIP archive, filenames are encoded in the DOS codepage that is in use in the relevant country, and the filenames on disk should be in the locale encoding. In MS Windows, the OemToChar() C function (from User32.DLL) does the correct conversion (which is indeed the conversion from CP850 to a superset of ISO-8859-1 if MS Windows is set up to use the US English language), but there is no equivalent in Linux.

When using unzip to unpack a ZIP archive containing non-ASCII filenames, the filenames are damaged because unzip uses improper conversion when any of its encoding assumptions are incorrect. For example, in the ru_RU.KOI8-R locale, conversion of filenames from CP866 to KOI8-R is required, but conversion from CP850 to ISO-8859-1 is done, which produces filenames consisting of undecipherable characters instead of words (the closest equivalent understandable example for English-only users is rot13). There are several ways around this limitation:

1) For unpacking ZIP archives with filenames containing non-ASCII characters, use WinZip while running the Wine Windows emulator.

2) After running unzip, fix the damage made to the filenames using the convmv tool (http://j3e.de/linux/convmv/). The following is an example for the ru_RU.KOI8-R locale:

Step 1. Undo the conversion done by unzip:
convmv -f iso-8859-1 -t cp850 -r --nosmart --notest \
    </path/to/unzipped/files>
Step 2. Do the correct conversion instead:
convmv -f cp866 -t koi8-r -r --nosmart --notest \
    </path/to/unzipped/files>

3) Apply the optional unzip-5.50-alt-iconv-v1.1.patch patch to UnZip. It will apply with some offsets.

It allows to specify the assumed filename encoding in the ZIP archive using the -O charset_name option and the on-disk filename encoding using the -I charset_name option. Defaults: the on-disk filename encoding is the locale encoding, the encoding inside the ZIP archive is guessed according to the builtin table based on the locale encoding. For US English users, this still means that unzip converts from CP850 to ISO-8859-1 by default.

Caveat: this method works only with 8-bit locale encodings, not with UTF-8. Attempting to use a patched unzip in UTF-8 locales may result in a segmentation fault and is probably a security risk.

Installation of UnZip

Note that if you applied the patch described above for locale issues, the first required security patch will have some offsets. Now install UnZip by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../unzip-5.52-security_fix-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../unzip-5.52-security_fix-2.patch &&
make -f unix/Makefile LOCAL_UNZIP=-D_FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 linux

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr install

Command Explanations

linux: This target in the Makefile makes assumptions that are useful for a Linux system when compiling the executables. To obtain alternatives to this target, use make list

LOCAL_UNZIP=...: This sets the compilation flags to allow UnZip to handle files up to 4 GB.

Installed Programs: funzip, unzip, unzipfsx, zipgrep, and zipinfo

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

funzip	allows the output of unzip commands to be redirected.
unzip	lists, tests or extracts files from a `ZIP` archive.
unzipfsx	is a self-extracting stub that can be prepended to a `ZIP` archive. Files in this format allow the recipient to decompress the archive without installing UnZip.
zipgrep	searches files in a `ZIP` archive for lines matching a pattern.
zipinfo	produces technical information about the files in a `ZIP` archive, including file access permissions, encryption status, type of compression, etc.
`libunzip.so`	contains the API functions required by the UnZip programs.

Last updated on 2008-04-15 03:34:07 -0500

Zip-2.32

Introduction to Zip

The Zip package contains Zip utilities. These are useful for compressing files into ZIP archives.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fresh.t-systems-sfr.com/unix/src/misc/zip232.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/tools/zip/info-zip/src/zip232.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8a4da4460386e324debe97f3b7fe4d96
Download size: 789 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.0 MB
Estimated build time: Less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/zip

Installation of Zip

Install Zip by running the following commands:

make -f unix/Makefile generic_gcc

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr -f unix/Makefile install

Command Explanations

make prefix=/usr -f unix/Makefile install: This command overrides the prefix variable that is set to /usr/local in the unix/Makefile. Alternatives to generic_gcc can be seen with a make -f unix/Makefile list command.

Installed Programs: zip, zipcloak, zipnote, and zipsplit

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

zip	compresses files into a `ZIP` archive.
zipcloak	is a utility to encrypt and decrypt a `ZIP` archive.
zipnote	reads or writes comments stored in a `ZIP` file.
zipsplit	is a utility to split `ZIP` files into smaller files.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

UnRar-3.7.8

Introduction to UnRar

The UnRar package contains a RAR extraction utility. This is useful for extracting files from RAR archives. RAR archives are usually created with WinRAR, primarily in a Windows environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.rarlab.com/rar/unrarsrc-3.7.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: b783f1932bc0c73902c6399f7c2c6f43
Download size: 131 KB
Estimated disk space required: 175 KB
Estimated build time: Less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/unrar

Installation of UnRar

Install UnRar by running the following commands:

make -f makefile.unix

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m755 unrar /usr/bin

Installed Programs: unrar

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

unrar

uncompresses a RAR archive.

Last updated on 2008-08-17 08:22:54 -0500

PCI Utilities-2.2.3

Introduction to PCI Utilities

The PCI Utilities package is a set of programs for listing PCI devices, inspecting their status and setting their configuration registers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/utils/pciutils/pciutils-2.2.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/utils/pciutils/pciutils-2.2.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 86cc20eaa0360587497a8105d33e57fc
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 3.3 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pciutils

Installation of PCI Utilities

Install PCI Utilities by running the following commands:

sed -i 's/null ;/null 2>\&1 ;/' update-pciids.sh &&
make PREFIX=/usr

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr install

Some packages require the PCI static library. To install the library and headers, issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m 755 -d /usr/include/pci &&
install -v -m 644 lib/libpci.a /usr/lib &&
install -v -m 644 lib/*.h /usr/include/pci

Command Explanations

sed -i 's/null ;/null 2>\&1 ;/' update-pciids.sh: This command suppresses some unneeded screen output from the update-pciids command if you don't have either Lynx, Wget, or Curl installed by redirecting the stderr output of the embedded which command to /dev/null.

Configuring PCI Utilities

The pci.ids data file is constantly being updated. To get a current version of this file, run update-pciids as the root user. This program requires the which-2.19 script or program to find cURL-7.16.3, Wget-1.10.2 or Lynx-2.8.6rel.5 which are used to download the most current file, and then replace the existing file in /usr/share.

You may wish to add an entry to root's (or any other user who has write privilege to /usr/share) crontab to automatically update the pci.ids file periodically.

Installed Programs: lspci, setpci and update-pciids

Installed Library: libpci.a

Installed Directory: /usr/include/pci

Short Descriptions

lspci	is a utility for displaying information about all PCI buses in the system and all devices connected to them.
setpci	is a utility for querying and configuring PCI devices.
update-pciids	fetches the current version of the PCI ID list. Requires cURL-7.16.3, Wget-1.10.2 or Lynx-2.8.6rel.5.
`libpci.a`	is the static library that allows applications to access the PCI subsystem.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 11:05:41 -0500

usbutils-0.72

Introduction to usbutils

The usbutils package contains a utility used to display information about USB buses in the system and the devices connected to them.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/linux-usb/usbutils-0.72.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ee345fe605ffcfce843dae4aed81122b
Download size: 166 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

usbutils Dependencies

Required

libusb-0.1.12

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/usbutils

Installation of usbutils

Install usbutils by running the following commands:

sed -i 's|DEST=|&/usr/share/|' update-usbids.sh &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 update-usbids.sh /usr/sbin/update-usbids

Command Explanations

sed -i '...' update-usbids.sh: This command is used to modify the download script so that it will replace the existing file in /usr/share instead of in the current directory.

Configuring usbutils

The usb.ids data file is constantly being updated. To get a current version of this file, run update-usbids as the root user. This program requires the which-2.19 script or program to find Wget-1.10.2 or Lynx-2.8.6rel.5 which are used to download the most current file, and replace the existing file in /usr/share.

You may wish to add an entry to root's (or any other user who has write privilege to /usr/share) crontab to automatically update the usb.ids file periodically.

Installed Programs: lsusb and update-usbids

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

lsusb	is a utility for displaying information about all USB buses in the system and all devices connected to them.
update-usbids	downloads the current version of the USB ID list. Requires Wget-1.10.2 or Lynx-2.8.6rel.5.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 11:05:41 -0500

pkg-config-0.22

Introduction to pkg-config

The pkg-config package contains a tool for passing the include path and/or library paths to build tools during the configure and make file execution.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://pkgconfig.freedesktop.org/releases/pkg-config-0.22.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/pkg-config-0.22.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: fd5c547e9d66ba49bc735ccb8c791f2a
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pkgconfig

Installation of pkg-config

Install pkg-config by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. The “check-requires-private” test has been known to fail for undetermined reasons.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring pkg-config

The default setting for PKG_CONFIG_PATH is /usr/lib/pkgconfig:/usr/share/pkgconfig because of the prefix used to install pkg-config. You may add to PKG_CONFIG_PATH by exporting additional paths on your system where .pc files are installed. Note that PKG_CONFIG_PATH is only needed when compiling packages, not during run-time.

Installed Program: pkg-config

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

pkg-config

returns meta information for the specified library or package.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

cpio-2.9

Introduction to cpio

The cpio package contains tools for archiving.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/cpio/cpio-2.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/cpio/cpio-2.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e387abfdae3a0b9a8a5f762db653a96d
Download size: 758 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/cpio

Installation of cpio

Install cpio by running the following commands:

./configure CPIO_MT_PROG=mt \
            --prefix=/usr \
            --bindir=/bin \
            --libexecdir=/tmp \
            --with-rmt=/usr/sbin/rmt &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and wish to create alternate forms of the documentation, issue the any or all of the following commands:

make -C doc pdf &&
make -C doc ps &&
texi2html -o doc/cpio.html doc/cpio.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o doc/cpio.txt doc/cpio.texi

To test the results, issue make check

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built any of the alternate forms of documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/cpio-2.9 &&
install -v -m644 doc/cpio.{pdf,ps,dvi,html,txt} \
                 /usr/share/doc/cpio-2.9

Command Explanations

CPIO_MT_PROG=mt: This parameter forces the building and installation of the mt program.

--bindir=/bin: This parameter installs cpio to /bin instead of /usr/bin as recommended by the FHS guidelines.

--libexecdir=/tmp: This parameter is used so that /usr/libexec is not created.

--with-rmt=/usr/sbin/rmt: This parameter inhibits building the rmt program as it is already installed by the Tar package in LFS.

Installed Programs: cpio and mt

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

cpio	copies files to and from archives.
mt	controls magnetic tape drive operations.

Last updated on 2007-07-11 12:15:17 -0500

MC-4.6.1

Introduction to MC

MC (Midnight Commander) is a text-mode full-screen file manager and visual shell. It provides a clear, user-friendly, and somewhat protected interface to a Unix system while making many frequent file operations more efficient and preserving the full power of the command prompt.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/utils/file/managers/mc/mc-4.6.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uni-koeln.de/util/shell/mc-4.6.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 18b20db6e40480a53bac2870c56fc3c4
Download size: 3.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 29 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/mc-4.6.1-bash32-1.patch
Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/mc-4.6.1-debian_fixes-1.patch

Do I Need the Debian Patch?

Midnight Commander without the Debian patch is completely unusable in multibyte locales because it assumes that characters and bytes are the same thing. The issue manifests itself as massive screen content corruption similar to what is depicted in this screenshot (taken in the ru_RU.UTF-8 locale). For a general discussion of this type of issue, see the Breaks Multibyte Characters section of the Locale Related Issues page. The Debian patch mostly fixes this issue, and adds support for recoding remote FTP filenames. Debian also fixed 64-bit issues, rare segfaults in mcedit, and improved syntax highlighting.

If you do not use a multibyte locale and do not need any of the new features or fixes, the patch is still supposed to be harmless. However, the patch changes the dependencies and build instructions, and in the past it caused unacceptable regressions for non-UTF-8 locale users. Thus, failsafe instructions without the patch are left in the book just in case. Due to the size and unofficial nature of the patch, please do not report bugs in the patched MC to the original MC developers.

MC Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 (untested with Debian patch) or GLib-2.12.12

Optional

GPM-1.20.1, X Window System, Samba-3.0.30, S-Lang-2.1.3 (required when building with Debian patch), Zip-2.32, UnZip-5.52, and GNOME Libraries-1.4

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/MC

Installation of MC

Fix incompatibility of MC-4.6.1 with Bash-3.2:

patch -Np1 -i ../mc-4.6.1-bash32-1.patch

If desired, apply Debian fixes:

patch -Np1 -i ../mc-4.6.1-debian_fixes-1.patch

Install MC by running the following commands:

CPPFLAGS="-DUTF8" ./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-charset &&
make

MC with Debian patches expects its documentation to be stored in UTF-8 encoding on disk, and automatically converts it to the locale encoding when displaying on the terminal. This is different from the expectations of the unpatched MC, so the documentation files have to be converted if (and only if) the Debian patch has been applied:

convert-mans ISO-8859-1 UTF-8 lib/mc.hint{,.es,.it,.nl} &&
convert-mans ISO-8859-2 UTF-8 lib/mc.hint{.cs,.hu,.pl} &&
convert-mans ISO-8859-5 UTF-8 lib/mc.hint.sr &&
convert-mans KOI8-R UTF-8 lib/mc.hint.ru &&
convert-mans KOI8-U UTF-8 lib/mc.hint.uk &&
convert-mans BIG5 UTF-8 lib/mc.hint.zh &&
convert-mans ISO-8859-1 UTF-8 doc/{es,it}/mc.hlp.* &&
convert-mans ISO-8859-2 UTF-8 doc/{hu,pl}/mc.hlp.* &&
convert-mans ISO-8859-5 UTF-8 doc/sr/mc.hlp.sr &&
convert-mans KOI8-R UTF-8 doc/ru/mc.hlp.ru

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod 1755 /usr/lib/mc/cons.saver

Command Explanations

CPPFLAGS="-DUTF8": This parameter activates UTF-8 support in the Debian patch and has no effect without this patch.

--enable-charset: This option adds support to mcedit for editing files in encodings different from the one implied by the current locale. This feature works in non-UTF-8 locales only, even with the Debian patch.

--with-screen=(slang|mcslang|ncurses): This parameter selects the screen library used by MC. NCurses support is currently buggy (MC does not handle mouse events in xterm correctly). UTF-8 support in the Debian patch is functional only when external S-Lang-2.1.3 is used as a screen library (this is the default).

--with-codepagedir=DIR: This parameter was useful only with SAMBA-2.x. New versions of SAMBA do not have codepage files.

chmod 1755 /usr/lib/mc/cons.saver: The cons.saver program has to be installed setuid root, because on LFS regular users have no access to /dev/vcsa* devices. This step is optional if MC is going to be started from X terminal emulators or ssh sessions only (thus rendering the cons.saver binary completely unneeded).

Configuring MC

Config Files

~/.mc/*

Configuration Information

The ~/.mc directory and its contents are created when you start mc for the first time. Then you can edit the main ~/.mc/ini configuration file manually or through the MC shell. Consult the mc(1) man page for details.

Installed Programs: cons.saver, mc, mcedit, mcmfmt, and mcview

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/mc and /usr/lib/mc

Short Descriptions

cons.saver	is used internally by mc for saving and restoring the text behind the panels on Linux text console.
mc	is a visual shell.
mcedit	is an internal file editor.
mcmfmt	is used internally by mcview when viewing mailbox files.
mcview	is an internal file viewer.

Last updated on 2007-08-05 17:14:40 -0500

Sysstat-7.0.4

Introduction to Sysstat

The Sysstat package contains utilities to monitor system performance and usage activity. Sysstat contains the sar utility, common to many commercial Unixes, and tools you can schedule via cron to collect and historize performance and activity data.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://perso.wanadoo.fr/sebastien.godard/sysstat-7.0.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/linux/system/status/sysstat-7.0.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 46a6af9c5486809c4f1fb4f8fcdf2684
Download size: 124 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Sysstat Dependencies

Installation of Sysstat

Install Sysstat by running the following commands:

make config &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

make config: Runs the interactive configuration process. The first question prompts you for an “Installation directory”. Reply with /usr, as this is equivalent to Autoconf's --prefix=/usr parameter to configure. For all other prompts, you may press Enter to accept the (very sane) defaults. When prompted for “Number of daily data files to keep: [7]”, you may wish to keep a larger number of files.

Configuring Sysstat

Cron Information

To begin gathering Sysstat history information, you must add to, or create a privileged user's crontab. The default history data location is /var/log/sa. The user running Sysstat utilities via cron must have write access to this location.

Below is an example of what to install in the crontab. Adjust the parameters to suit your needs. Use man sa1 and man sa2 for information about the commands.

# 8am-7pm activity reports every 10 minutes during weekdays
0 8-18 * * 1-5 /usr/lib/sa/sa1 600 6 &

# 7pm-8am activity reports every hour during weekdays
0 19-7 * * 1-5 /usr/lib/sa/sa1 &

# Activity reports every hour on Saturday and Sunday
0 * * * 0,6 /usr/lib/sa/sa1 &

# Daily summary prepared at 19:05
5 19 * * * /usr/lib/sa/sa2 -A &

Ensure you submit the revised crontab to the cron daemon.

System Startup Information

At system startup, a LINUX RESTART message must be inserted in the daily data file to reinitialize the kernel counters. This can be automated by installing the /etc/rc.d/init.d/sysstat init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package using the following command as the root user:

make install-sysstat

Installed Programs: iostat, mpstat, sar, sa1, sa2, sadc and sadf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/sa, /usr/share/doc/sysstat-7.0.4 and /var/log/sa

Short Descriptions

iostat	reports CPU statistics and input/output statistics for devices and partitions.
mpstat	reports individual or combined processor related statistics.
sar	collects, reports and saves system activity information.
sa1	collects and stores binary data in the system activity daily data file. It is a front end to `sadc` designed to be run from cron.
sa2	writes a summarized daily activity report. It is a front end to sar designed to be run from cron.
sadc	is the system activity data collector, used as a backend for sar.
sadf	is used for displaying the contents of data files created by the sar command. But unlike sar, sadf can write its data in many different formats.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Apache Ant-1.7.0

Introduction to Apache Ant

The Apache Ant package is a Java-based build tool. In theory, it is kind of like make, but without make's wrinkles. Ant is different. Instead of a model where it is extended with shell-based commands, Ant is extended using Java classes. Instead of writing shell commands, the configuration files are XML-based, calling out a target tree where various tasks get executed. Each task is run by an object that implements a particular task interface.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/a/apache-ant-1.7.0-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 22b378e27ab300e4d73bf09d91c7e2a6
Download size: 6.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 109 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Apache Ant Dependencies

Required

JDK-6 Update 5 and JUnit-4.3.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/apache-ant

Installation of Apache Ant

Note

You may need additional libraries to satisfy the build requirements of various packages installed using Apache Ant. Review the table at http://ant.apache.org/manual/install.html#librarydependencies for any prerequisite libraries you may need.

Install Apache Ant by running the following commands:

sed -i 's|${dist.dir}/etc|/etc/ant|'        build.xml
sed -i 's|/etc/ant.conf|/etc/ant/ant.conf|' src/script/ant

The unit regression tests are performed in the build step below.

Now, as the root user:

./build.sh -Ddist.dir=/opt/ant-1.7.0 dist &&
ln -v -sf /etc/ant /opt/ant-1.7.0/etc &&
ln -v -sf ant-1.7.0 /opt/ant

Command Explanations

sed ...: These commands change the configuration directory to /etc/ant to conform with FHS guidelines.

./build.sh -Ddist.dir=/opt/ant-1.7.0 dist: This command does everything. It builds, tests, then installs the package into /opt/ant-1.7.0.

ln -v -sf /etc/ant /opt/ant-1.7.0/etc: The sed commands change the configuration directory to /etc/ant and this command creates a symlink from the configuration directory back to the installation directory as the package is expecting to find some files there.

ln -v -sf ant-1.7.0 /opt/ant: This command is optional, and creates a convenience symlink.

Configuring Apache Ant

Config Files

/etc/ant/ant.conf, ~/.ant/ant.conf, and ~/.antrc

Configuration Information

Some packages will require ant to be in the search path and the $ANT_HOME environment variable defined. Satisfy these requirements by adding the following lines to /etc/profile or to individual user's ~/.profile or ~/.bashrc files:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/ant/bin
export ANT_HOME=/opt/ant

Installed Programs: ant, antRun, antRun.pl, complete-ant-cmd.pl, runant.pl, and runant.py

Installed Libraries: ant.jar, ant-*.jar, xercesImpl.jar, and xml-apis.jar

Installed Directories: /etc/ant and /opt/ant-1.7.0

Short Descriptions

ant	is a Java based build tool used by many packages instead of the conventional make program.
antRun	is a support script used to start ant build scripts in a given directory.
antRun.pl	is a Perl script that provides similar functionality offered by the antRun script.
complete-ant-cmd.pl	is a Perl script that allows Bash to complete an ant command-line.
runant.pl	is a Perl wrapper script used to invoke ant.
runant.py	is a Python wrapper script used to invoke ant.
`ant-*.jar`	files are the Apache Ant Java class libraries.
`xercesImpl.jar`	is a Java class library used by Apache Ant to perform XML parsing.
`xml-apis.jar`	contains the DOM Java classes required by the Apache Ant XML formatter.

Last updated on 2008-08-10 16:20:51 -0500

D-BUS-1.0.2

Introduction to D-BUS

D-BUS is a message bus system, a simple way for applications to talk to one another. D-BUS supplies both a system daemon (for events such as “new hardware device added” or “printer queue changed”) and a per-user-login-session daemon (for general IPC needs among user applications). Also, the message bus is built on top of a general one-to-one message passing framework, which can be used by any two applications to communicate directly (without going through the message bus daemon).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://dbus.freedesktop.org/releases/dbus/dbus-1.0.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/dbus-1.0.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0552a9b54beb4a044951b7cdbc8fc855
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 39.5 MB (includes building and installing all docs)
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (additional 0.7 SBU to run the test suite)

D-BUS Dependencies

Required

expat-2.0.1 or both pkg-config-0.22 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

X Window System, Doxygen-1.5.2 (to generate the API documentation), and xmlto (to generate HTML documentation and manuals)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dbus

Kernel Configuration

Ensure the following option is enabled in the kernel configuration and recompile the kernel if necessary:

General Setup
  System V IPC

Installation of D-BUS

As the root user, create a system user and group to handle the system message bus activity:

groupadd -g 18 messagebus &&
useradd -c "D-BUS Message Daemon User" -d /dev/null \
        -u 18 -g messagebus -s /bin/false messagebus

This package's test suite cannot be run without passing additional parameters to configure and exposing additional functionality in the binaries. These interfaces are not intended to be used in a production build of D-BUS, so it will have to be built twice in this situation. If you would like to run the unit tests, issue the following commands:

./configure --enable-tests &&
make &&
make check &&
make distclean

Install D-BUS by running the following commands (you may wish to review the output from ./configure --help first and add any desired parameters to the configure command shown below):

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --localstatedir=/var &&
make

The --enable-doxygen-docs parameter does not work properly. If you have Doxygen installed and you wish to build the API documentation, issue doxygen.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/dbus-1.0.2 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{TODO,*.{dtd,xml,xsl,txt,c}} \
    /usr/share/doc/dbus-1.0.2

If you built the HTML documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m644 doc/*.html /usr/share/doc/dbus-1.0.2

If you built the API documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/dbus-1.0.2/api \
    /usr/share/man/man3dbus &&
install -v -m644 doc/api/html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/dbus-1.0.2/api &&
install -v -m644 doc/api/man/man3dbus/* \
    /usr/share/man/man3dbus

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var: This parameter causes the daemon PID file, system bus socket and machine uuid file to be created in the /var directory instead of the /usr/var directory.

Configuring dbus

Config Files

/etc/dbus-1/session.conf, /etc/dbus-1/system.conf and /etc/dbus-1/system.d/*

Configuration Information

The configuration files listed above should probably not be modified. If changes are required, you should create /etc/dbus-1/session-local.conf and/or /etc/dbus-1/system-local.conf and make any desired changes to these files.

If any packages install a D-Bus .service file outside of the standard /usr/share/dbus-1/services directory, that directory should be added to the local session configuration. For instance, /usr/local/share/dbus-1/services can be added by performing the following commands as the root user:

cat > /etc/dbus-1/session-local.conf << "EOF"
<!DOCTYPE busconfig PUBLIC
 "-//freedesktop//DTD D-BUS Bus Configuration 1.0//EN"
 "http://www.freedesktop.org/standards/dbus/1.0/busconfig.dtd">
<busconfig>

  <!-- Search for .service files in /usr/local -->
  <servicedir>/usr/local/share/dbus-1/services</servicedir>

</busconfig>
EOF

Boot Script

To automatically start dbus-daemon when the system is rebooted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/dbus bootscript from the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-dbus

Note that this boot script only starts the system-wide D-BUS daemon. Each user requiring access to D-BUS services will also need to run a session daemon as well. There are many methods you can use to start a session daemon using the dbus-launch command. Review the dbus-launch man page for details about the available parameters and options. Here are some suggestions and examples:

Add dbus-launch to the line in the ~/.xinitrc file that starts your graphical desktop environment as shown in the section called “Configuring the Core GNOME Packages”.
If you use xdm or some other display manager that calls the ~/.xsession file, you can add dbus-launch to the line in your ~/.xsession file that starts your graphical desktop environment. The syntax would be similar to the example in the ~/.xinitrc file.
If you use gdm or some other display manager that utilizes custom files to initiate sessions, use the example in the section called “Configuration Information” of the GDM instructions to create a file containing dbus-launch.
The examples shown previously use dbus-launch to specify a program to be run. This has the benefit (when also using the --exit-with-session parameter) of stopping the session daemon when the specified program is stopped. You can also start the session daemon in your system or personal startup scripts by adding the following lines:
```
# Start the D-BUS session daemon
eval `dbus-launch`
export DBUS_SESSION_BUS_ADDRESS
```
This method will not stop the session daemon when you exit your shell, therefore you should add the following line to your ~/.bash_logout file:
```
# Kill the D-BUS session daemon
kill $DBUS_SESSION_BUS_PID
```
A hint has been written that provides ways to start scripts using the KDM session manager of KDE. The concepts in this hint could possibly used with other session managers as well. The hint is located at http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/hints/downloads/files/execute-session-scripts-using-kdm.txt.

Installed Programs: dbus-cleanup-sockets, dbus-daemon, dbus-launch, dbus-monitor, dbus-send, dbus-uuidgen

Installed Library: libdbus-1.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/dbus-1, /usr/include/dbus-1.0, /usr/lib/dbus-1.0, /usr/share/dbus-1, /usr/share/doc/dbus-1.0.2, /usr/share/man/man3dbus, /var/lib/dbus and /var/run/dbus

Short Descriptions

dbus-cleanup-sockets	is used to clean up leftover sockets in a directory.
dbus-daemon	is the D-BUS message bus daemon.
dbus-launch	is used to start dbus-daemon from a shell script. It would normally be called from a user's login scripts.
dbus-monitor	is used to monitor messages going through a D-BUS message bus.
dbus-send	is used to send a message to a D-BUS message bus.
dbus-uuidgen	is used to generate or read a universally unique ID.
`libdbus-1.{so,a}`	contains the API functions used by the D-BUS message daemon. D-BUS is first a library that provides one-to-one communication between any two applications; dbus-daemon is an application that uses this library to implement a message bus daemon.

Last updated on 2007-07-21 17:17:44 -0500

HAL-0.5.9.1

Introduction to HAL

HAL is a hardware abstraction layer, which is a piece of software that provides a view of the various hardware attached to a system. In addition to this, HAL keeps detailed metadata for each piece of hardware and provides hooks such that system and desktop-level software can react to changes in the hardware configuration in order to maintain system policy.

The most important goal of HAL is to provide plug-and-play facilities for UNIX-like desktops with focus on providing a rich and extensible description of device characteristics and features. One example of the functionality provided by HAL is when you plug in a USB storage device. HAL can automatically create a mount point in /media and mount the device.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freedesktop.org/~david/dist/hal-0.5.9.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6a40f49f964e64358e53652038f3059f
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 24 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

Additional Package Download

Required Hardware Data

Download (HTTP): http://freedesktop.org/~david/dist/hal-info-20070618.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: c7005ccb1765d8359fd2348350770495
Download size: 118 KB

HAL Dependencies

Required

D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74 and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional (to Build hal-device-manager)

Optional (to Create Documentation)

libxml2-2.6.31 and xmlto

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8, libusb-0.1.12, Parted*, libsmbios, PolicyKit, and intltool-0.35.5

* Use the following command after changing into the HAL source directory to modify the package configure script if you have Parted version 1.8.7 installed.

sed -i -e   's%, 1.8.6%&, 1.8.7%' \
       -e   's% or 1.8.6%/1.8.6 or 1.8.7%' \
       -e   's%6))%6) ||\
            (major == 1 \&\& minor == 8 \&\& micro == 7))%' \
    configure

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/hal

Installation of HAL

You must create a dedicated user and group before installing the package. Though the default BLFS instructions run the HAL daemon as the root user, a configuration file is installed which has the dedicated user's name hard-coded in it. This causes a confusing message to be generated when starting the D-BUS daemon. Issue the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 19 haldaemon &&
useradd -c "HAL Daemon User" -d /dev/null -u 19 \
        -g haldaemon -s /bin/false haldaemon

Install HAL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --libexecdir=/usr/lib/hal \
            --localstatedir=/var &&
make

To test the results, issue make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Install the HAL hardware data with the following commands:

tar -xf ../hal-info-20070618.tar.gz &&
cd hal-info-20070618 &&
./configure --prefix=/usr

Finally, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib/hal: This parameter forces the installation of libexec files to /usr/lib/hal instead of /usr/libexec.

--localstatedir=/var: This parameter forces the creation of the pid file to /var/run/hald instead of /usr/var/run/hald.

--enable-docbook-docs --docdir=/usr/share/doc/hal-0.5.9.1: If libxml2-2.6.31 and xmlto are available, these parameters enable the HAL specification documentation to be built.

Run-Time Dependencies

A few more packages enable more functionality in HAL at run-time. These include Eject, ConsoleKit, dmidecode, Device-mapper, Cryptsetup-LUKS, and pm-utils.

The hal-device-manager program requires several additional Python modules to be available at runtime. These are D-Bus Python Bindings-0.82.0, PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk and gtk.libglade modules), and Gnome-Python-2.18.2 (including the gnome.ui module).

Configuring HAL

Config Files

/etc/dbus-1/system.d/hal.conf, /etc/dbus-1/system.d/halusers.conf and /etc/hal/*

Configuration Information

Allowing users to invoke HAL methods

The default setup for HAL is to allow only certain users to invoke methods such as Mount(). These are the root user and the user determined to be at the active console using pam_console. If you are not set up to use Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 and pam_console, create a group that is allowed to invoke HAL methods with the following commands:

groupadd -g 61 halusers &&
cat > /etc/dbus-1/system.d/halusers.conf << "EOF"
<!DOCTYPE busconfig PUBLIC
 "-//freedesktop//DTD D-BUS Bus Configuration 1.0//EN"
 "http://www.freedesktop.org/standards/dbus/1.0/busconfig.dtd">
<busconfig>

 <!-- Allow users in the halusers group invoke HAL methods -->
 <policy group="halusers">
  <allow send_interface="org.freedesktop.Hal.Device.SystemPowerManagement"/>
  <allow send_interface="org.freedesktop.Hal.Device.LaptopPanel"/>
  <allow send_interface="org.freedesktop.Hal.Device.Volume"/>
  <allow send_interface="org.freedesktop.Hal.Device.Volume.Crypto"/>
 </policy>

</busconfig>
EOF

Now add the users you would like to the halusers group to use HAL.

usermod -a -G halusers <username>

Note that these users still need to have appropriate permissions to access the devices that HAL will invoke its methods on.

With the above configuration in place, authorized users now have the ability to unmount disk partitions mounted at non-standard locations such as /pub. If you'd like to restrict this policy to only drives which are considered removable or hotpluggable, add the following configuration file as the root user:

cat > /etc/hal/fdi/policy/no-fixed-drives.fdi << "EOF"
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!-- -*- SGML -*- -->

<!-- Don't allow HAL methods on disks that are not
     removable or hotpluggable -->

<deviceinfo version="0.2">
<device>
  <match key="@block.storage_device:storage.hotpluggable" bool="false">
    <match key="@block.storage_device:storage.removable" bool="false">
      <merge key="volume.ignore" type="bool">true</merge>
    </match>
  </match>
</device>
</deviceinfo>
EOF

Installing mount helpers

HAL only provides the methods such as Mount() to act on hardware. In order to take advantage of these, a HAL event handler such as gnome-volume-manager-2.17.0 or Ivman should be installed.

Changing default mount options

In some cases, it is necessary to specify some default mount options for filesystems. E.g., in non-English environments, the iocharset and codepage options are needed for filesystems of Windows origin in order to show national characters correctly. Also, due to a bug in the Linux kernel version in LFS (2.6.22.x), you may want to pass the usefree option to vfat filesystems in order to reduce the time needed to determine the amount of free space on the filesystem.

Google search results for “hal default mount options” are still full of recommendations to create *.fdi files mentioning either volume.policy or storage.policy keys. Such recommendations worked for HAL-0.4.x only and are invalid now. For HAL-0.5.9.1, mount options are expected to be handled as follows:

An event handler from the desktop environment receives an event describing the newly-added storage device.
If the storage device is not already mentioned in /etc/fstab, mount options are fetched from a database of user preferences, which is specific to the desktop environment, and passed back to HAL. This process can be influenced by the filesystem type and possibly other volume properties available from HAL.
If the options are in the list of permitted ones, HAL mounts the volume.

The important point above is that the configuration procedure is desktop-specific. However, as of December, 2007, only GNOME allows the user to set default mount options on a per-filesystem basis, as described in the next paragraph. KDE allows the mount options to be set only on a per-volume basis, not per-filesystem, which is a bug, because, as mentioned in the report, “for every new device (let's say your friend's USB stick) you have to first not mount it, then change options and then mount”. Xfce, if compiled with HAL support, hard-codes the mount options without any means to override them, which is even worse. In KDE and Xfce, if the built-in default mount options are not suitable, it is needed to mention every possible removable storage device in /etc/fstab with the correct options, thus mostly defeating the point of installing HAL.

In order to adjust the default mount options, GNOME users should change the /system/storage/default_options/[fs_type]/mount_options GConf key either using GConf Editor-2.18.0, or from the command line, as demonstrated in the following example:

gconftool-2 --type list --list-type=string \
    --set /system/storage/default_options/vfat/mount_options \
    "[shortname=mixed,uid=,usefree,iocharset=koi8-r,codepage=866]"

See more details in the gnome-mount(1) manual page.

Adding allowed mount options

The list of mount options permitted in the default HAL configuration resides in the /usr/share/hal/fdi/policy/10osvendor/20-storage-methods.fdi file. GNOME and KDE users may want to use options not in this list (in the above example, this applies to the usefree option). In this case, as root user, create a custom policy file that mentions unknown mount options:

cat > /etc/hal/fdi/policy/user-options.fdi << "EOF"
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!-- -*- SGML -*- -->

<!--
This file is used to set custom options to the HAL policy settings.
The default policy settings are defined in files contained in the
/usr/share/hal/fdi/policy subdirectories. User defined customizations
should be in files contained in the /etc/hal/fdi/policy directory.
-->

<deviceinfo version="0.2">
<device>

<!-- this is to be able to mount media in drives we cannot poll,
     e.g. IDE Zip Drives and PC style floppy drives -->
<match key="storage.media_check_enabled" bool="false">
  <match key="storage.no_partitions_hint" bool="true">
    <append key="volume.mount.valid_options" type="strlist">usefree</append>
    <!-- Insert other options here -->
  </match>
</match>

<match key="volume.fsusage" string="filesystem">

  <!-- allow these mount options for vfat -->
  <match key="volume.fstype" string="vfat">
    <append key="volume.mount.valid_options" type="strlist">usefree</append>
    <!-- Insert other options here -->
  </match>
</match>

</device>
</deviceinfo>
EOF

Boot Script

To automatically start the hald daemon when the system is rebooted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/haldaemon bootscript from the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

Important

If the system-wide D-BUS daemon was running during the installation of HAL, ensure you stop and restart the D-BUS daemon before attempting to start the hald daemon.

make install-haldaemon

Installed Programs: hal-device, hal-device-manager, hal-disable-polling, hal-find-by-capability, hal-find-by-property, hal-get-property, hal-is-caller-locked-out, hal-lock, hal-set-property, hald and lshal

Installed Libraries: libhal.{so,a} and libhal-storage,{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/hal, /usr/include/hal, /usr/lib/hal, /usr/share/doc/hal-0.5.9.1, /usr/share/hal, /var/cache/hald, /var/lib/hal, and /var/run/hald

Short Descriptions

hal-device	is used to create, remove or show a HAL device.
hal-device-manager	shows a graphical representation of all the devices HAL is aware of. Here is a screenshot of hal-device-manager communicating with the HAL daemon and displaying a tree of device objects. The shown properties in the screenshot are for a device object representing a hard disk.
hal-disable-polling	can be used to to disable and enable media detection on drives with removable storage.
hal-find-by-capability	prints the Unique Device Identifiers for HAL device objects of a given capability.
hal-find-by-property	prints the Unique Device Identifiers for HAL device objects where a given property assumes a given value.
hal-get-property	retrieves a property from a device.
hal-set-property	attempts to set property for a device. Note that, due to security considerations, it may not be possible to set a property.
hal-is-caller-locked-out	determines if a specific caller is locked out of a specific D-Bus interface on a specific device.
hald	is the HAL daemon program.
lshal	shows all devices and their properties. If the --monitor option is given then the device list and all devices are monitored for changes.
`libhal.{so,a}`	contains the API functions required by the HAL programs.
`libhal-storage.{so,a}`	contains the API functions required by the HAL storage and volume utility programs.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 19:15:25 -0500

Chapter 12. Programming

A base LFS system can be used as a development platform, however the base system only includes language support for C, C++ and Perl. This chapter provides instructions to build many popular programming environments to greatly expand your system's development capabilities.

DejaGnu-1.4.4

Introduction to DejaGnu

DejaGnu is a framework for running test suites on GNU tools. It is written in expect, which uses Tcl (Tool command language).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freshmeat.net/redir/dejagnu/12564/url_tgz/dejagnu-1.4.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/dejagnu/dejagnu-1.4.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 053f18fd5d00873de365413cab17a666
Download size: 1.08 MB
Estimated disk space required: 8.5 MB
Estimated build time: .04 SBU

DejaGnu Dependencies

Required (Run-time Only)

Expect-5.43.0

Optional

DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dejagnu

Installation of DejaGnu

Install DejaGnu by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-doc

To test the installation, issue make check as an unprivileged user.

Installed Program: runtest

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Scripts: There are numerous Expect scripts installed in the /usr/share/dejagnu hierarchy.

Installed Directory: /usr/share/dejagnu

Short Descriptions

runtest

is the DejaGnu test driver program. It is used to control what tests to run, and variations on how to run them.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Doxygen-1.5.2

Introduction to Doxygen

The Doxygen package contains a documentation system for C++, C, Java, Objective-C, Corba IDL and to some extent PHP, C# and D. This is useful for generating HTML documentation and/or an off-line reference manual from a set of documented source files. There is also support for generating output in RTF, PostScript, hyperlinked PDF, compressed HTML, and Unix man pages. The documentation is extracted directly from the sources, which makes it much easier to keep the documentation consistent with the source code.

You can also configure Doxygen to extract the code structure from undocumented source files. This is very useful to quickly find your way in large source distributions. Used along with Graphviz, you can also visualize the relations between the various elements by means of include dependency graphs, inheritance diagrams, and collaboration diagrams, which are all generated automatically.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.stack.nl/pub/users/dimitri/doxygen-1.5.2.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.stack.nl/pub/users/dimitri/doxygen-1.5.2.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f2782e5bd31a7d10b092500bf0d96ae2
Download size: 3.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 56 MB
Estimated build time: 1.7 SBU (includes building the GUI frontend)

Doxygen Dependencies

Optional

Qt-3.3.8b, Graphviz-2.12, Python-2.5.2, teTeX-3.0, ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.53

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/doxygen

Installation of Doxygen

Install Doxygen by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix /usr \
            --docdir /usr/share/doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you wish to generate and install the package documentation (note that man pages have already been installed), you must have Python, teTeX (for HTML docs) and Ghostscript (for PDF docs) installed, then issue the following command as the root user:

make install_docs

Command Explanations

--with-doxywizard: Use this parameter if Qt is installed and you wish to build the GUI front-end.

Configuring Doxygen

There is no real configuration necessary for the Doxygen package although three additional packages are required if you wish to use extended capabilities. If you need to use the language translation features, you must have Python-2.5.2 installed. If you require formulas to create PDF documentation, then you must have teTeX-3.0 installed. If you require formulas to convert PostScript files to bitmaps, then you must have AFPL Ghostscript-8.53 or ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 installed.

Installed Programs: doxygen, doxytag, and optionally, doxywizard

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/doxygen

Short Descriptions

doxygen	is a command-line based utility used to generate template configuration files and then generate documentation from these templates. Use doxygen --help for an explanation of the command-line parameters.
doxytag	is used to generate a tag file and/or a search index for a set of HTML files.
doxywizard	is a GUI front-end for configuring and running doxygen.

Last updated on 2007-04-19 18:17:33 -0500

Expect-5.43.0

Introduction to Expect

The Expect package contains tools for automating interactive applications such as telnet, ftp, passwd, fsck, rlogin, tip, etc. Expect is also useful for testing these same applications as well as easing all sorts of tasks that are prohibitively difficult with anything else.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://expect.nist.gov/old/expect-5.43.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 230400129630335b3060a42f66fec11d
Download size: 525 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.07 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/expect-5.43.0-spawn-2.patch

Expect Dependencies

Required

Tcl-8.4.18

Optional

Tk-8.4.18

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/expect

Installation of Expect

Install Expect by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../expect-5.43.0-spawn-2.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-tcl=/usr/lib \
            --with-tclinclude=/usr/include \
            --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -sf ../libexpect5.43.a /usr/lib/expect5.43

Command Explanations

-with-tcl=/usr/lib: This parameter is required in some cases to link in the Tcl library.

--enable-shared: This option enables building the shared library.

ln -sf ../libexpect5.43.a /usr/lib/expect5.43: This command creates a required link to the static library.

Configuring Expect

Config Files

$exp_library/expect.rc and ~/.expect.rc

Configuration Information

Reference the expect man page for information about utilizing the expect.rc configuration files. Additionally, many of the tools contained in the Expect package will use their own configuration files. Reference the respective man page, or examine the script directly for configuration file information.

Installed Programs: autoexpect, autopasswd, cryptdir, decryptdir, dislocate, expect, ftp-rfc, kibitz, lpunlock, mkpasswd, passmass, rftp, rlogin-cwd, timed-read, timed-run, unbuffer, weather, and optionally (if Expect was linked against Tk), expectk, multixterm, tknewsbiff, tkpasswd, xkibitz, and xpstat

Installed Library: libexpect5.43.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/expect5.43

Short Descriptions

autoexpect	generates an Expect script from watching a session.
autopasswd	is a wrapper to make passwd(1) be non-interactive.
cryptdir	encrypts all files in a directory.
decryptdir	decrypts all files in a directory.
dislocate	allows processes to be disconnected and reconnected to a terminal.
expect	is a program that “talks” to other interactive programs according to a script.
ftp-rfc	retrieves an RFC (or the index) from UUNET.
kibitz	allows two (or more) people to interact with one shell (or any arbitrary program).
lpunlock	unhangs a printer which claims it is “waiting for lock”.
mkpasswd	generates passwords and can apply them automatically to users.
passmass	changes a password on multiple machines.
rftp	is much like ftp except it uses `~g` and `~p` instead of `mget` and `mput`.
rlogin-cwd	is rlogin except it uses the local current directory as the current working directory on the remote machine.
timed-read	reads a complete line from stdin and aborts after a given number of seconds.
timed-run	runs a program for a given amount of time.
unbuffer	disables the output buffering that occurs when program output is redirected.
weather	retrieves a weather report (courtesy University of Michigan) for a given city or geographical area.
expectk	is a combination of Expect with Tk and should run any wish or Expect script.
multixterm	creates multiple xterms that can be driven together or separately.
tknewsbiff	pops up a window when there is unread news in your favorite newsgroups and removes the window after you've read the news.
tkpasswd	is a script to change passwords using expectk.
xkibitz	allows users in separate xterms to share one shell (or any program that runs in an xterm).
xpstat	is a script that acts as a front-end for xpilot.
`libexpect5.43.{so,a}`	contains functions that allow Expect to be used as a Tcl extension or to be used directly from C or C++ (without Tcl).

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

GC-6.8

Introduction to GC

The GC package contains the Boehm-Demers-Weiser conservative garbage collector, which can be used as a garbage collecting replacement for the C malloc function or C++ new operator. It allows you to allocate memory basically as you normally would, without explicitly deallocating memory that is no longer useful. The collector automatically recycles memory when it determines that it can no longer be otherwise accessed. The collector is also used by a number of programming language implementations that either use C as intermediate code, want to facilitate easier interoperation with C libraries, or just prefer the simple collector interface. Alternatively, the garbage collector may be used as a leak detector for C or C++ programs, though that is not its primary goal.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Hans_Boehm/gc/gc_source/gc6.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/gc6.8.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 418d38bd9c66398386a372ec0435250e
Download size: 739 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gc

Installation of GC

Install GC by running the following commands:

sed -i "s|\$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@|&-6.8|" doc/Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
    --datadir=/usr/share/doc --enable-cplusplus &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 doc/gc.man /usr/share/man/man3/gc_malloc.3 &&
ln -v -s gc_malloc.3 /usr/share/man/man3/gc.3

Command Explanations

sed -i "s|\$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@|&-6.8|" ...: This command appends “-6.8” to the default documentation installation path of /usr/share/doc/gc.

--datadir=/usr/share/doc: This parameter changes the installation path of the documentation to /usr/share/doc/gc instead of /usr/share/gc.

--enable-cplusplus: This parameter forces the building and installation of the C++ library along with the standard C library.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgc.{so,a} and libgccpp.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gc and /usr/share/doc/gc-6.8

Short Descriptions

`libgc.{so,a}`	contains a C interface to the conservative garbage collector, primarily designed to replace the C malloc function.
`libgccpp.{so,a}`	contains a C++ interface to the conservative garbage collector.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

GCC-4.1.2

Introduction to GCC

The GCC package contains GNU compilers. This package is useful for compiling programs written in C, C++, Fortran, Java, Objective C and Ada. Also included is GNU Treelang. Treelang is a sample language, useful only to help people understand how to implement a new language front end to GCC. It is not a useful language in itself other than as an example or basis for building a new language. Therefore only language developers are likely to have an interest in it.

Note

The Fortran compiler included with the GCC-4.x package now aims to be conformant with the Fortran 95 standard, not the Fortran 77 standard as all previous versions of GCC have been. Please note the following paragraph copied directly from the GCC-4.1.2 gfortran man page.

“Gfortran is not yet a fully conformant Fortran 95 compiler. It can generate code for most constructs and expressions, but work remains to be done. In particular, there are known deficiencies with ENTRY, NAMELIST, and sophisticated use of MODULES, POINTERS and DERIVED TYPES. For those whose Fortran codes conform to either the Fortran 77 standard or the GNU Fortran 77 language, we recommend to use g77 from GCC 3.4.x”

Instructions to install the 3.4.6 version of the Fortran compiler can be found in GCC-3.3.6 and on the BLFS Wiki.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-4.1.2/gcc-4.1.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-4.1.2/gcc-4.1.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a4a3eb15c96030906d8494959eeda23c
Download size: 39.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 1.9 GB
Estimated build time: 77 SBU (build, test and install all compilers)

GCC Dependencies

Optional (Required to Build the Fortran Compiler)

GMP-4.2.2 and MPFR

Note

If you plan to compile Ada, you will need to install GNAT temporarily to satisfy the circular dependency when you recompile GCC to include Ada. The download location shown below requires that you create an account on the AdaCore site before you can download the package. Nothing is required other than a valid email address.

Ensure you download the 2005 version of the GNAT compiler. The 2006 version will not work. The file name you need is: gnat-gpl-2005-i686-gnu-linux-gnu-libc2.3-bin.tar.gz.

GNAT GPL 2005 Package Information

Download (HTTP): https://libre.adacore.com/dynamic/download_page
Download MD5 sum: 659b7f57e00b73ecaa4863dabea5e0e2
Download size: 44.6 MB

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gcc

Installation of GNAT

Install GNAT by running the following command as the root user:

make ins-all prefix=/opt/gnat

The GNAT compiler can be invoked by executing the gcc binary installed in /opt/gnat/bin.

You may now remove the GNAT source directory:

cd .. &&
rm -rf gnat-gpl-2005-i686-gnu-linux-gnu-libc2.3-bin

Prepare to compile GCC by placing the GNAT version of gcc at the beginning of the PATH variable by using the following commands:

PATH_HOLD=$PATH &&
export PATH=/opt/gnat/bin:$PATH_HOLD

Installation of GCC

Install GCC by running the following commands:

Important

The installation process may overwrite your existing GCC gcc and c++ compilers and libraries. It is highly recommended that you have the Tcl, Expect and DejaGnu packages installed before beginning the build so you can run the full suite of tests.

Do not continue with the make install command until you are confident the build was successful. You can compare your test results with those found at http://gcc.gnu.org/ml/gcc-testresults/. There's also an i686 platform test result produced by an LFS-SVN-20070304 system at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/gcc412_test.txt. You may also want to refer to the information found in the GCC section of Chapter 6 in the LFS book (../../../../lfs/view/6.3/chapter06/gcc.html).

The instructions below perform a “make bootstrap” instead of just a plain “make” intentionally. Even though it is assumed that the current version of GCC is installed in LFS, because this installation includes the Ada compiler as an installed language, a bootstrap is required. The GNAT compiler must be used for stage1 of the bootstrap in order to build Ada. If the process didn't use a “bootstrap” you could end up having a gcc installed on the system that was produced by a foriegn compiler.

sed -i 's/install_to_$(INSTALL_DEST) //' libiberty/Makefile.in &&
sed -i 's@\./fixinc\.sh@-c true@' gcc/Makefile.in &&
sed -i 's/@have_mktemp_command@/yes/' gcc/gccbug.in &&
mkdir ../gcc-build &&
cd ../gcc-build &&
../gcc-4.1.2/configure \
    --prefix=/usr \
    --libexecdir=/usr/lib \
    --enable-shared \
    --enable-threads=posix \
    --enable-__cxa_atexit \
    --enable-clocale=gnu \
    --enable-languages=c,c++,ada,fortran,java,objc,treelang &&
make bootstrap &&
make -k check &&
../gcc-4.1.2/contrib/test_summary

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -sf ../usr/bin/cpp /lib &&
ln -v -sf gcc /usr/bin/cc &&
chown -v -R root:root \
    /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/4.1.2/include &&
chown -v -R root:root \
    /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/4.1.2/ada{lib,include}

The libffi interface header is installed in a location where other packages will not be able to find it. If you included Java as one of the installed languages, create a symbolic link in /usr/include to remedy this:

ln -v -sf `find /usr/lib/gcc -name ffitarget.h` /usr/include

As the root user, remove the GNAT installation:

rm -rf /opt/gnat

Now, as the unprivileged user, restore your old PATH:

export PATH=$PATH_HOLD &&
unset PATH_HOLD

Command Explanations

The three sed commands are the same ones used during the build of LFS. A fourth one in LFS is ommitted intentionally, due to the bootstrap build.

mkdir ../gcc-build; cd ../gcc-build: The GCC documentation recommends building the package in a dedicated build directory.

--enable-shared --enable-threads=posix --enable-__cxa_atexit: These parameters are required to build the C++ libraries to published standards.

--enable-clocale=gnu: This command is a failsafe for incomplete locale data.

--enable-languages=c,c++,ada,fortran,java,objc,treelang: This command identifies which languages to build. You may modify this command to remove undesired languages.

make -k check: This command runs the test suite without stopping if any errors are encountered.

../gcc-4.1.2/contrib/test_summary: This command will produce a summary of the test suite results. You can append | grep -A7 Summ to the command to produce an even more condensed version of the summary. You may also wish to redirect the output to a file for review and comparison later on.

ln -v -sf ../usr/bin/cpp /lib: This command creates a link to the C PreProcessor as some packages expect it to be installed in the /lib directory.

ln -v -sf gcc /usr/bin/cc: This link is created as some packages refer to the C compiler using an alternate name.

chown -v -R root:root /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/...: If the package is built by a user other than root, the ownership of the installed include and adalib directories (and their contents) will be incorrect. These commands change the ownership to the root user and group . Omit the command changing the Ada directories if you did not include Ada as one of the installed languages.

Installed Programs: addr2name.awk, fastjar, gcj, gcj-dbtool,gcjh, gfortran, gij, gjnih, gnat, gnatbind, gnatbl, gnatchop, gnatclean, gnatfind, gnatkr, gnatlink, gnatls, gnatmake, gnatname, gnatprep, gnatxref, gprmake, grepjar, grmic, grmiregistry, gtreelang, jcf-dump, jv-convert, jv-scan and architecture specific names for gcj and gcjh

Installed Libraries: libffi.{so,a}, libgcj.{so,a}, libgfortran.{so,a}, libgfortranbegin.a, libgij.{so,a}, libobjc.{so,a} and numerous other run-time libraries and executables in /usr/lib/gcc

Installed Directories: /usr/include/c++/4.1.2/{gcj,gnu,java,javax,org}, /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/4.1.2/ada{include,lib}, /usr/lib/gcj-4.1.2, /usr/lib/security and /usr/share/java

Some program and library names and descriptions are not listed here, but can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/6.3/chapter06/gcc.html#contents-gcc as they were initially installed during the building of LFS.

Short Descriptions

addr2name.awk	emulates some of the functionality of addr2line.
fastjar	is an archive tool for Java archives.
gcj	is an ahead-of-time compiler for the Java language.
gcj-dbtool	is a tool for creating and manipulating class file mapping databases.
gcjh	generates header files from Java class files.
gfortran	is the Fortran compiler invoked by gcc.
gij	is the GNU interpreter for Java bytecode.
gjnij	is used to generate JNI header files from class files. Running it is equivalent to running gcjh -jni.
gnat	is the Ada compiler invoked by gcc.
gnatbind	is used to bind compiled objects.
gnatbl	is the Ada linker.
gnatchop	is useful for renaming files to meet the standard Ada default file naming conventions.
gnatclean	is used to remove files associated with a GNAT project.
gnatfind	is the GNAT definition/use finder.
gnatkr	is used to determine the crunched name for a given file, when crunched to a specified maximum length.
gnatlink	is used to link programs and build an executable file.
gnatls	is the compiled unit browser.
gnatmake	is an automatic make facility.
gnatname	will list the files associated with a GNAT project.
gnatprep	is the GNAT external preprocessor.
gnatxref	is the GNAT cross-referencer.
gprmake	is a tool used to create `Makefile`s that support compilation by multiple languages.
grepjar	searches `jar` files for a pattern.
grmic	generates stubs for Remote Method Invocation.
grmiregistry	starts a remote object registry on the current host.
gtreelang	is largely a cut down version of C, designed to showcase the features of the GCC code generation back end. Only those features that are directly supported by the GCC code generation back end are implemented. Features are implemented in a manner which is easiest and clearest to implement. Not all or even most code generation back end features are implemented. The intention is to add features incrementally until most features of the GCC back end are implemented in Treelang.
jcf-dump	prints information about Java class files.
jv-convert	converts files from one encoding to another.
jv-scan	prints information about Java source files.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 11:05:41 -0500

GCC-3.3.6

Introduction to GCC-3.3.6

There are several reasons why you may wish to install GCC-3.3.6. Some packages have not been updated so they can be successfully compiled by GCC-4.1.2 as version 4.x.x of GCC is much stricter in enforcing coding standards. Additionally, some pre-compiled packages may require the GCC-3.3.6 libraries at run-time. Another reason you may need to install GCC-3.3.6 is to use the g77 Fortran 77 compiler provided by pre-4.x.x versions of GCC. GCC-4.x.x only includes gfortran, a Fortran 95 compatible compiler that is not yet ready to be used in a production environment.

If all you need is a working {f,g}77 Fortran 77 compiler, you may wish to use the one provided by GCC-3.4.x. This is what the GCC developers recommend. Instructions for building the GCC-3.4.x Fortran compiler can be found on the BLFS Wiki.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-3.3.6/gcc-3.3.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-3.3.6/gcc-3.3.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 6936616a967da5a0b46f1e7424a06414
Download size: 24 MB
Estimated disk space required: 433 MB (includes running the test suite)
Estimated build time: 5.2 SBU (additional 11.2 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/gcc-3.3.6-no_fixincludes-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/gcc-3.3.6-linkonce-1.patch

GCC-3.3.6 Dependencies

Optional

DejaGnu-1.4.4 (required to run the full test suite)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gcc3

Installation of GCC-3.3.6

Install GCC-3.3.6 by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gcc-3.3.6-no_fixincludes-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../gcc-3.3.6-linkonce-1.patch &&
mkdir ../gcc-build &&
cd ../gcc-build &&
../gcc-3.3.6/configure --prefix=/opt/gcc-3.3.6 \
    --enable-shared --enable-languages=c,c++ --enable-threads=posix &&
make bootstrap

If desired, run the test suite using the following commands. The test_summary commands create log files which can be compared to known good results located at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/gcc336_test.txt.

make -k check &&
../gcc-3.3.6/contrib/test_summary >test_summary.log 2>&1 &&
../gcc-3.3.6/contrib/test_summary | \
    grep -A7 Summ >test_summary_short.log 2>&1

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib/libstdc++.so.5* /usr/lib &&
ln -v -sf /usr/lib/libstdc++.so.5.0.7 /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib &&
ln -v -sf libstdc++.so.5.0.7 /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib/libstdc++.so.5 &&
chown -v -R root:root \
    /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib/gcc-lib/i686-pc-linux-gnu/3.3.6/include

Command Explanations

mkdir ../gcc-build; cd ../gcc-build: The GCC development team recommends building in a separate directory.

--enable-shared --enable-languages=c,c++ --enable-threads=posix: Configures GCC to build the C and C++ compilers and enable the related C++ options. In addition to c and c++, you can add f77 for FORTRAN (called g77). Note that GCC-4 no longer provides a FORTRAN 77 compiler.

mv -v /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib/libstdc++.so.5* /usr/lib: Moves the C++ library to the standard lib directory to avoid having to add /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib to /etc/ld.so.conf.

Configuring GCC-3.3.6

Configuration information

If you only need the GCC-3.3.6 C++ library, you may delete /opt/gcc-3.3.6.

Whenever you need to use GCC-3.3.6 instead of your system installed compiler, add /opt/gcc-3.3.6/bin to the front of your PATH or (preferably) set the CC environment variable before compiling the concerned package.

If you use g77 programs, you also should move the libg2c.* libraries and symbolic links to /usr/lib. Using export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib or updating /etc/ld.so.conf to point to /opt/gcc-3.3.6/lib is not recommended as it may conflict with your normal libraries.

Installed Programs: c++, cpp, g++, gcc, gccbug, gcov, and architecture specific names of these programs.

Installed Libraries: libgcc_s.so, libiberty.a, libstdc++.{a,so}, libsupc++.a, and other support libraries and files.

Installed Directory: /opt/gcc-3.3.6

Short Descriptions

The GCC-3.3.6 package contains the gcc-3.3.6 C and C++ compilers and the GCC-3.3.6 libstdc++.so library that is required by some commercial and pre-compiled packages.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Guile-1.8.2

Introduction to Guile

The Guile package contains the Project GNU's extension language library. Guile also contains a stand alone Scheme interpreter.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/guile/guile-1.8.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/guile/guile-1.8.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: a4b64a992deae0532f8015bcc6c40784
Download size: 3.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 49 MB (additional 40 MB to install all the docs)
Estimated build time: 1.2 SBU (includes building all documentation)

Guile Dependencies

Required

GMP-4.2.2

Optional

Emacs-22.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/guile

Installation of Guile

Install Guile by running the following commands:

sed -i -e '20,$ d' \
       -e 's|slib)|&)\n(load-from-path "slib/guile.init")|' \
    ice-9/slib.scm

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and wish to build alternate formats of the documentation, issue the following commands:

for DIRNAME in goops r5rs ref tutorial
do
  make -k -C doc/$DIRNAME pdf ps html
done &&

makeinfo --plaintext -o doc/goops/goops.txt doc/goops/goops.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o doc/r5rs/r5rs.txt doc/r5rs/r5rs.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o doc/ref/guile.txt doc/ref/guile.texi &&
makeinfo --plaintext -o doc/tutorial/guile-tut.txt \
    doc/tutorial/guile-tut.texi &&

unset DIRNAME

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

find examples -name "Makefile*" -exec rm {} \; &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2 &&
cp -v -R examples   /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2

If you built the alternate formats of the documentation, install them using the following commands issued by the root user:

for DIRNAME in goops r5rs ref tutorial
do
  install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2/$DIRNAME/html
  install -v -m644 doc/$DIRNAME/*.{pdf,ps,dvi,txt} \
      /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2/$DIRNAME
  if [ -d doc/$DIRNAME/$DIRNAME.html ]; then
    install -v -m644 doc/$DIRNAME/$DIRNAME.html/* \
        /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2/$DIRNAME/html
  fi
done &&

install -v -m644 doc/goops/hierarchy.{eps,png} \
    /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2/goops &&
install -v -m644 doc/ref/guile.html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2/ref/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/tutorial/guile-tut.html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2/tutorial/html

Command Explanations

sed -i -e '20,$ d' -e '...' ice-9/slib.scm: This command is used to modify the Guile SLIB initialization script. There are incompatibilities with newer versions of SLIB and this command modifes the script to use the installed SLIB script.

Installed Programs: guile, guile-config, guile-snarf, and guile-tools

Installed Libraries: libguile.{so,a}, libguile-srfi-srfi-*.{so,a} and /libguilereadline-v-17.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/guile, /usr/include/libguile, /usr/share/doc/guile-1.8.2 and /usr/share/guile

Short Descriptions

guile	is a stand-alone Scheme interpreter for Guile.
guile-config	is a Guile script which provides the information necessary to link your programs against the Guile library, in much the same way pkg-config-0.22 does.
guile-snarf	is a script to parse declarations in your C code for Scheme visible C functions, i Scheme objects to be used by C code, etc.
guile-tools	is a wrapper program installed along with guile which knows where a particular module is installed and calls it passing its args to a program.

Last updated on 2007-08-03 06:50:56 -0500

JDK-6 Update 5

Introduction to JDK

The JDK package contains Sun's Java development environment. This is useful for developing Java programs and provides the runtime environment necessary to run Java programs. It also includes a plug-in for browsers so that they can be Java aware.

Note

Sun has recently decided not to provide JRL sources for the latest update versions of the JDK. Sun is actively working on a GPL'd version of the JDK, titled OpenJDK. This new JDK will be licensed under the GNU General Public License, version 2, with the Classpath Exception. A stable OpenJDK was not available at the time of writing.

Package Information

Download (jdk-6u5-linux-i586.bin): http://java.sun.com/javase/downloads/index.jsp
Download MD5 sum: f7528500c17c09546566e05988beda86
Download size (binary): 67 MB
Estimated disk space required: 207 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

JDK Dependencies

Optional Runtime Dependencies

ALSA Library-1.0.13, CUPS-1.2.12, and GTK+-2.10.13

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/jdk

Installation of JDK

Tip

The ./jdk-6u5-linux-i586.bin command below unpacks the distribution into a jdk1.6.0_05 directory. You will be required to view, and then accept (by entering a y keypress), a license agreement before any files are unpacked. If you are scripting (automating) the build, you'll need to account for this. There is information about automating build commands in the Automated Building Procedures section of Chapter 2. Towards the end of this section, specific information for automating this type of installation is discussed.

Normally in BLFS, the files are unpacked into a subdirectory and the starting point for the installation procedures is that location. For this application only, start in the directory where all the downloaded files are located.

Install the JDK with the following commands:

chmod 755 jdk-6u5-linux-i586.bin &&
./jdk-6u5-linux-i586.bin

Note

The installation will end with a message "./jdk-6u5-linux-i586.bin: line 43: 20283 Aborted" as javaprefix is unset in the environment. This is by design as GTK+ may not be installed during the installation, however, the installation will still exit with a zero error value if scripting the build.

Now, as the root user:

cd jdk1.6.0_05 &&
install -v -m755 -d /opt/jdk-6u5 &&
mv -v * /opt/jdk-6u5 &&
chown -v -R root:root /opt/jdk-6u5 &&
ln -v -sf xawt/libmawt.so \
    /opt/jdk-6u5/jre/lib/i386/ &&
cd ..

Recent versions of libX11 break libmawt when used with the Xinerama extension. While still the root user, apply the following sed to work around this problem:

sed -i 's@XINERAMA@FAKEEXTN@g' \
    /opt/jdk-6u5/jre/lib/i386/xawt/libmawt.so

Command Explanations

ln -sf xawt/libmawt.so /opt/jdk-6u5/jre/lib/i386/: This fixes linking issues with other applications that expect to find the motif libraries with the other JDK libraries.

Configuring JDK

Configuration Information

As the root user, create a symlink to the installation directory:

ln -v -nsf jdk-6u5 /opt/jdk

The information below assumes your system is set up using the instructions found in “The Bash Shell Startup Files”. You may need to extract the relevant information below and incorporate it into your system's startup files if your system is set up differently.

Add the following jdk.sh shell startup file to the /etc/profile.d directory with the following commands as the root user:

cat > /etc/profile.d/jdk.sh << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/profile.d/jdk.sh

# Set JAVA_HOME directory
JAVA_HOME=/opt/jdk

# Adjust PATH
pathappend ${JAVA_HOME}/bin PATH

# Auto Java CLASSPATH
# Copy jar files to, or create symlinks in this directory
AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR=/usr/lib/classpath
pathprepend . CLASSPATH
for dir in `find ${AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR} -type d 2>/dev/null`; do
    pathappend $dir CLASSPATH
done

export JAVA_HOME CLASSPATH
unset AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR
unset dir

# End /etc/profile.d/jdk.sh
EOF

The Java plugin is located in $JAVA_HOME/jre/plugin/i?86/ns7/. Make a symbolic link to the file in that directory from your browser(s) plugins directory.

Important

The plugin must be a symlink for it to work. If not, the browsers will crash when you attempt to load a Java application.

Installed Programs: appletviewer, apt, extcheck, idlj, HtmlConverter, jar, jarsigner, java, javac, javadoc, javah, javap, java-rmi.cgi, javaws, jconsole, jdb, jhat, jinfo, jmap, jps, jrunscript, jsadebugd, jstack, jstat, jstatd, keytool, native2ascii, orbd, pack200, policytool, rmic, rmid, rmiregistry, schemagen, serialver, servertool, tnameserv, unpack200, wsgen, wsimport, and xjc

Installed Libraries: $JAVA_HOME/lib/*, $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/*, and libjavaplugin_oji.so

Installed Directory: /opt/jdk-6u5

Short Descriptions

appletviewer	runs Java applets outside of the context of a browser.
apt	is an annotation processing tool.
extcheck	checks a specified jar file for title and version conflicts with any extensions installed in the JDK software.
HtmlConverter	adds Java auto download to html and asp pages.
idlj	generates Java bindings from a given IDL file.
jar	combines multiple files into a single jar archive.
jarsigner	signs jar files and verifies the signatures and integrity of a signed jar file.
java	launches a Java application by starting a Java runtime environment, loading a specified class and invoking its main method.
javac	reads class and interface definitions, written in the Java programming language, and compiles them into bytecode class files.
javadoc	parses the declarations and documentation comments in a set of Java source files and produces a corresponding set of HTML pages describing the classes, interfaces,constructors, methods, and fields.
javah	generates C header and source files that are needed to implement native methods.
javap	disassembles a Java class file.
java-rmi.cgi	is the Java RMI client.
javaws	launches Java application/applets hosted on a network.
jconsole	is a graphical console tool to monitor and manage both local and remote Java applications and virtual machines.
jdb	is a simple command-line debugger for Java classes.
jhat	parses a java heap dump file and allows viewing in a webbrowser.
jinfo	prints Java configuration information for a given Java process, core file, or a remote debug server.
jmap	prints shared object memory maps or heap memory details of a given process, core file, or a remote debug server.
jps	lists the instrumented JVMs on the target system.
jrunscript	is a command line script shell.
jsadebugd	attaches to a Java process or core file and acts as a debug server.
jstack	prints Java stack traces of Java threads for a given Java process, core file, or a remote debug server.
jstat	displays performance statistics for an instrumented JVM.
jstatd	is an RMI server application that monitors for the creation and termination of instrumented JVMs.
keytool	is a key and certificate management utility.
native2ascii	converts files that contain non-supported character encoding into files containing Latin-1 or Unicode-encoded characters.
orbd	is used to enable clients to transparently locate and invoke persistent objects on servers in the CORBA environment.
pack200	is a Java application that transforms a jar file into a compressed pack200 file using the Java gzip compressor.
policytool	creates and manages a policy file graphically.
rmic	generates stub and skeleton class files for remote objects from the names of compiled Java classes that contain remote object implementations.
rmid	starts the activation system daemon.
rmiregistry	creates and starts a remote object registry on the specified port on the current host.
schemagen	is a Java XML binding schema generator.
serialver	returns the serialVersionUID for one or more classes in a form suitable for copying into an evolving class.
servertool	provides an ease-of-use interface for application programmers to register, unregister, startup and shutdown a server.
tnameserv	starts the Java IDL name server.
unpack200	is a native implementation that transforms a packed file produced by pack200 into a jar file.
wsgen	generates JAX-WS portable artifacts used in JAX-WS web services.
wsimport	generates JAX-WS portable artifacts.
xjc	is a Java XML binding compiler.

Last updated on 2008-08-10 15:33:05 -0500

JUnit-4.3.1

Introduction to JUnit

The JUnit package contains a simple, open source framework to write and run repeatable tests. It is an instance of the xUnit architecture for unit testing frameworks. JUnit features include assertions for testing expected results, test fixtures for sharing common test data, and test runners for running tests.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/junit/junit4.3.1.zip
Download MD5 sum: 6c22e6733f4ba9d755a437375e3d476e
Download size: 643 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.7 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

JUnit Dependencies

Required

UnZip-5.52

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/junit

Installation of JUnit

Install JUnit by running the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/{,doc/}junit-4.3.1 &&
chown -R root:root . &&
cp -v -R junit* org  /usr/share/junit-4.3.1 &&
cp -v -R *.html *doc /usr/share/doc/junit-4.3.1

Add the junit-4.3.1.jar and /usr/share/junit-4.3.1 directory to your system CLASSPATH environment variable:

export CLASSPATH=$CLASSPATH:\
/usr/share/junit-4.3.1/junit-4.3.1.jar:/usr/share/junit-4.3.1

To run the JUnit regression self-tests, you'll need to have JDK-6 Update 5 or Jikes installed and the CLASSPATH environment variable updated. Then, as an unprivileged user, issue:

java org.junit.runner.JUnitCore org.junit.tests.AllTests

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: junit-4.3.1.jar

Installed Directories: /usr/share/junit-4.3.1, /usr/share/doc/junit-4.3.1

Short Descriptions

junit-4.3.1.jar

contains java classes to support the xUnit framework testing architecture.

Last updated on 2007-07-16 08:54:37 -0500

Librep-0.17

Introduction to Librep

The librep package contains a Lisp system. This is useful for scripting or for applications that may use the Lisp interpreter as an extension language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/librep/librep-0.17.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ad4ad851ff9f82a5d61024cd96bc2998
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 13.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.47 SBU

Librep Dependencies

Required

GDBM-1.8.3

Optional

GMP-4.2.2 and GCC-4.1.2 (build Java so that libffi is built)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/librep

Installation of Librep

Install librep by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib: This parameter installs files to /usr/lib/rep instead of /usr/libexec/rep.

Installed Programs: rep, rep-config, rep-remote, rep-xgettext, and repdoc

Installed Libraries: librep.so and numerous modules installed in the /usr/lib/rep hierarchy

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/rep, /usr/share/emacs/site-lisp, and /usr/share/rep

Short Descriptions

rep	is the Lisp interpreter.
`librep.so`	contains the functions necessary for the Lisp interpreter.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

NASM-0.98.39

Introduction to NASM

NASM (Netwide Assembler) is an 80x86 assembler designed for portability and modularity. It includes a disassembler as well.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/nasm/nasm-0.98.39.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2032ad44c7359f7a9a166a40a633e772
Download size: 543 KB
Estimated disk space required: 17.3 MB (includes building and installing all docs)
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch to fix a buffer overrun vulnerability: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/nasm-0.98.39-security_fix-1.patch

NASM Dependencies

Optional (for Building Documentation)

teTeX-3.0, and ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.53

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/nasm

Installation of NASM

Install NASM by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../nasm-0.98.39-security_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make &&
make -C rdoff/doc &&
make -C rdoff/doc html

To build the base NASM documentation, ensure you have Ghostscript installed and issue:

make doc

To build the RDOFF Postscript documentation, ensure you have teTeX-3.0 installed and issue:

sed -i -e "s/dvips \$</& -o rdoff.ps/" rdoff/doc/Makefile &&
make -C rdoff/doc ps

To build the RDOFF PDF documentation, ensure you have Ghostscript installed and issue:

make -C rdoff/doc pdf

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install_rdf &&
install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/rdoff.info /usr/share/info &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/nasm/html &&
install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/v1-v2.txt /usr/share/doc/nasm &&
cp -v -R rdoff/doc/rdoff /usr/share/doc/nasm/html

If you built the Ghostscript generated documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

make install_doc &&
install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/rdoff.pdf /usr/share/doc/nasm

Lastly, if you built the RDOFF Postscript documentation, install it using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/rdoff.ps /usr/share/doc/nasm

Installed Programs: nasm, ndisasm, ldrdf, rdf2bin, rdf2com, rdf2ihx, rdfdump, rdflib, and rdx

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/nasm

Short Descriptions

nasm	is a portable 80x86 assembler.
ndisasm	is an 80x86 binary file disassembler.
ldrdf	is an RDOFF linker.
rdfdump	dumps the contents of an RDOFF file.
rdflib	is an RDOFF librarian.
rdx	is used to load and execute an RDOFF module.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

PDL-2.4.2

Introduction to PDL

PDL (Perl Data Language) gives standard Perl the ability to compactly store and quickly manipulate the large N-dimensional data arrays common to scientific computing. PDL turns Perl into an array-oriented, numerical language similar to such commercial packages as IDL and MatLab. One can write simple Perl expressions to manipulate entire numerical arrays all at once.

PDL provides extensive numerical and semi-numerical functionality with support for two- and three-dimensional visualisation as well as a variety of I/O formats. The goal is to allow PDL to interact with a variety of external numerical packages, graphics and visualisation systems. Easy interfacing to such systems is one of the core design features of PDL.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/pdl/PDL-2.4.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/PDL-2.4.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: edd056a006eae8b46e8ef804b9774a93
Download size: 2.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 74 MB
Estimated build time: 2.56 SBU

PDL Dependencies

PDL is a collection of over 90 Perl modules. Some of these modules require additional libraries, packages and/or Perl modules for full functionality. Listed below are the modules which require additional software or configuration. If you don't need a particular module's functionality, you don't need to install its dependencies. The dependency tree for each module is listed downward, meaning you'll need to start at the bottom of a module's tree and work up. The dependencies are listed in the same order as they are in the DEPENDENCIES file, found in the package source tree.

This package (and many of the dependency packages) requires a Fortran compiler for full functionality of all the different modules. The gfortran compiler installed with the current BLFS version of GCC (4.1.2) will not work. If you want to compile the parts of this package that require a Fortran compiler, you'll need to install a GCC-3.x.x version of Fortran. The GCC developers recommend using Fortran from GCC-3.4.6. You can find specific instructions to install a GCC-3.4.6 compiler on the BLFS Wiki. Alternatively, if you have a need to install GCC-3.3.6, you can add the Fortran compiler to the list of compilers installed in those instructions. Don't forget to put the directory containing the {g,f}77 commands at the beginning of your PATH environment variable before beginning the compilation.

PDL::NiceSlice

The PDL::NiceSlice module is used to enhance PDL's slice syntax. “Slicing” is a term used in the process of creating a cross-section, or slice, of a PDL object (piddle).

Filter-1.32

Inline::Pdlpp

The Inline::Pdlpp module allows you to define fast PP code inline in your scripts.

Inline-0.44
- Parse-RecDescent-1.94

Perldl

perldl is a simple shell (written in Perl) which allows interactive use of PDL.

Term-ReadLine-Gnu-1.15

PDL::Graphics::TriD

The PDL::Graphics::TriD module implements a generic 3D plotting interface for PDL. Points, lines and surfaces (among other objects) are supported.

OpenGL (X Window System)

PDL::Graphics::PGPLOT

The PDL::Graphics::PGPLOT module is a convenience interface to the PGPLOT commands, implemented using the object oriented PGPLOT plotting package in the PDL::Graphics::PGPLOT::Window module.

PGPLOT-2.19
- ExtUtils-F77-1.15
  - a Fortran compiler
- PGPLOT
  - X Window System, LessTif-0.95.0, Tk-8.4.18, and a Fortran compiler

PDL::Graphics::PLPLOT

The PDL::Graphics::PLPLOT module is a simple interface to the PLplot plotting library.

PLplot
- pkg-config-0.22, X Window System, GTK+-1.2.10, FreeType-2.3.7, GD, SVGAlib, GNOME Libraries-1.4, JDK-6 Update 5, Tk-8.4.18, Python-2.5.2 (with Numeric Python), a Fortran compiler, SWIG, and iTcl

PDL::Graphics::IIS

The PDL::Graphics::IIS module provides an interface to any image display “device” which supports the “IIS protocol”.

SAOimage
- X Window System
X11 IRAF
- X Window System and Tk-8.4.18

PDL::Graphics::Karma

The PDL::Graphics::Karma module is an interface to Karma visualisation applications.

Karma
- X Window System

Note: You may need to modify the WHERE_KARMA => undef line in the source tree perldl.conf file to point to your installation of Karma

PDL::IO::Pic

The PDL::IO::Pic module implements I/O for a number of popular image formats by exploiting the xxxtopnm and pnmtoxxx converters from the Netpbm package and the cjpeg and djpeg converters. It also contains the routine wmpeg to write MPEG movies from piddles representing image stacks.

Netpbm, libjpeg-6b and mpeg_encode

PDL::Slatec

The PDL::Slatec module serves the dual purpose of providing an interface to parts of the slatec library and showing how to interface PDL to an external library. The module provides routines to manipulate matrices, calculate FFTs, fit data using polynomials, and interpolate/integrate data using piecewise cubic Hermite interpolation.

ExtUtils-F77-1.15
- a Fortran compiler

PDL::GSL

The PDL::GSL module is an interface to the functions provided by the Gnu Scientific Library.

PDL::FFTW

The PDL::FFTW module is a means to interface PDL with the FFTW library. It's similar to the standard FFT routine but it's usually faster and has support for real transforms. It works well for the types of piddles for which the library was compiled (otherwise it must do conversions).

FFTW-2.x

PDL::IO::Browser

The PDL::IO::Browser module is a 2D cursor terminal data browser for piddles.

There is no additional software required to use the module. However, the default is to not install the module because some platforms don't provide a curses compatible library. To enable the module, issue the following command:

sed -i -e "s/WITH_IO_BROWSER => 0/WITH_IO_BROWSER => 1/" \
    perldl.conf

PDL::IO::NDF

The PDL::IO::NDF module adds the ability to read and write Starlink N-dimensional data files as N-dimensional piddles.

Astro-FITS-Header-2.8.1
- Astro-FITS-CFITSIO-1.03
  - CFITSIO
- NDF-1.45
  - Starlink-Config-1.00
    
    Starlink IMG
    
    Starlink NDF (requires the following Starlink modules installed in this order, some will already be installed if you installed Starlink GSD): HTX, SAE, HLP, CNF, SLA, CHR, EMS, PSX, HDS, PCS, MER, PRM, PAR, ARY, AST)
    
    a Fortran compiler
- GSD-1.13
  - Starlink-Config-1.00
    
    Starlink GSD (requires the following Starlink modules installed in this order: HTX, SAE, CNF, CHR, EMS, PRM)
    
    a Fortran compiler

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pdl

Installation of PDL

Install PDL (and all the dependency Perl modules) by running the following commands:

sed -i 's/\(dirname);\)/\1\nuse blib;/' Demos/BAD*demo.pm.PL &&
perl Makefile.PL &&
make &&
make test

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i '...' Demos/BAD*demo.pm.PL: This is necessary to fix a build issue caused by changes in ExtUtils::MakeMaker-6.30 which was introduction in Perl-5.8.8.

Configuring PDL

Config Files

~/.perldlrc and local.perldlrc in the current directory

Configuration Information

See http://pdl.sourceforge.net/PDLdocs/perldl.html#the startup file ~/.perldlrc for information about configuring perldl to suit your needs.

Installed Programs: pdl, pdldoc, perldl, and pptemplate

Installed Modules: 90+ individual Perl modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8/i686-linux/{,auto/}PDL

Short Descriptions

pdl	is a binary program called from PDL scripts which is used to interface perldl.
pdldoc	is a shell interface to PDL documentation.
perldl	is a simple shell (written in Perl) for interactive use of PDL.
pptemplate	is a script to generate `Makefile.PL` and PP file skeletons.

Last updated on 2007-08-05 17:14:40 -0500

Perl Modules

Introduction to Perl Modules

The Perl module packages add useful objects to the Perl language. Modules utilized by packages throughout BLFS are listed here, along with their dependencies. Installation of the modules shown on this page should be accomplished by installing the listed dependencies (from the bottom and working up to the top) and then the desired module. Most references to Perl modules are in the form of Module, Module::SubName or Module::Sub::Name, though sometimes you'll see Module, Module-SubName or Module-Sub-Name. The references on this page that reflect an external URL are in the latter form, as these are the official package names.

Download MD5 sums (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/perl-modules/
Download MD5 sums (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/perl-modules/

Note

Some dependencies, such as the Test::Pod-1.26 module, are used by several of the listed dependencies of the main module and perhaps also the module being installed. Dependencies such as this are only listed once in the dependency chain for each main module (typically near the bottom-most dependency) to avoid redundancy and additional clutter in the instructions.

Archive::Zip-1.20

The Archive::Zip module allows a Perl program to create, manipulate, read, and write Zip archive files. The modules listed below are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Archive-Zip-1.20
- Compress::Zlib-2.005
- Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)

Compress::Zlib-2.005

The Compress::Zlib module provides a Perl interface to the Zlib compression library. Most of the functionality provided by Zlib is available in Compress::Zlib. The module can be split into two general areas of functionality, namely in-memory compression/decompression and read/write access to gzip files. This module and all the dependencies are installed using the standard build and installation instructions.

Note

The Compress::Raw::Zlib module requires the following sed after untarring the distribution tarball (before any other build commands) to use the system-installed copy of Zlib.

sed -i -e "s|BUILD_ZLIB\s*= True|BUILD_ZLIB = False|" \
       -e "s|INCLUDE\s*= ./zlib-src|INCLUDE    = /usr/include|" \
       -e "s|LIB\s*= ./zlib-src|LIB        = /usr/lib|" \
    config.in

Compress-Zlib-2.005 (uses the standard build and installation instructions)
- IO-Compress-Zlib-2.005
  - Compress-Raw-Zlib-2.005
    
    IO-Compress-Base-2.005
  - IO-Compress-Bzip2-2.005 (used during the tests)
    
    Compress-Raw-Bzip2-2.005
    
    IO-Compress-Base-2.005

Date::Manip-5.54

Date::Manip is a set of routines designed to make any common date/time manipulation easy to do. Operations such as comparing two times, calculating a time a given amount of time from another, or parsing international times are all easily done. From the very beginning, the main focus of Date::Manip has been to be able to do ANY desired date/time operation easily.

Date-Manip-5.54 (uses the standard build and installation instructions)

Finance::Quote-1.13

Finance::Quote is used to get stock quotes from various Internet sources, including Yahoo! Finance, Fidelity Investments, and the Australian Stock Exchange. There are two methods of using this module – a functional interface that is depreciated, and an object-orientated method that provides greater flexibility and stability. With the exception of straight currency exchange rates, all information is returned as a two-dimensional hash (or a reference to such a hash, if called in a scalar context).

After you've installed the package, issue perldoc Finance::Quote for full information. Alternatively, you can issue perldoc lib/Finance/Quote.pm after unpacking the distribution tarball and changing into the top-level directory. The module and dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Note

To run the regression test suite, you'll need a working Internet connection and then create a symbolic link to the test directory using the following command after unpacking the tarball and changing into the root directory of the source tree:

ln -s test t

Some tests will fail depending on certain conditions. See the INSTALL file for full details.

Finance-Quote-1.13
- HTML::TableExtract-2.10
- libwww-perl-5.806

Finance::QuoteHist-1.11

The Finance::QuoteHist bundle is several modules designed to fetch historical stock quotes from the web. The module and dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Finance-QuoteHist-1.11

HTML::Parser-3.56

The HTML::Parser distribution is a collection of modules that parse and extract information from HTML documents. The modules listed below are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

HTML-Parser-3.56
- HTML-Tagset-3.10
  - Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)
- libwww-perl-5.806 (run-time requirement for the included HTML::HeadParser module)

HTML::TableExtract-2.10

HTML::TableExtract is a module that simplifies the extraction of the content contained in tables within HTML documents, extracted either as text or encoded element trees. Tables of note may be specified using Headers, Depth, Count, Attributes, or some combination of the four. The module and dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

HTML-TableExtract-2.10
- HTML-Element-Extended-1.17
  - HTML-Tree-3.23
    
    HTML::Parser-3.56
    
    Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)
- Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08 (optionally used during the tests)

libwww-perl-5.806 (a.k.a. LWP)

The libwww-perl (LWP) collection is a set of Perl modules which provide a simple and consistent application programming interface to the World-Wide Web. The main focus of the library is to provide classes and functions that allow you to write WWW clients. The library also contains modules that are of more general use and even classes that help you implement simple HTTP servers. The LWP collection and all its Perl module dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

libwww-perl-5.806
- URI-1.35
- HTML::Parser-3.56
- Compress::Zlib-2.005
- Crypt-SSLeay-0.56 (optional, for HTTPS support)
  - OpenSSL-0.9.8g
  - A “testcover” Makefile target is created (which creates a /usr/bin/testcover script) if the Extutils::MakeMaker::Coverage module is installed.

Module::Build-0.2808

The Module::Build module is a system for building, testing, and installing Perl modules. It is meant to be an alternative to ExtUtils::MakeMaker. Developers may alter the behavior of the module through subclassing in a much more straightforward way than with MakeMaker. It also does not require a make command on your system. Most of the Module::Build code is pure-Perl and written in a very cross-platform way.

The Module::Build module (as well as any other Perl module that uses the Module::Build build system) uses modified build instructions. All the dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Module-Build-0.2808
- ExtUtils-ParseXS-2.18
  - ExtUtils-CBuilder-0.19
- Archive-Tar-1.32
  - IO-Zlib-1.09
    
    Compress::Zlib-2.005
  - Text::Diff-0.35
- Pod-Readme-0.09 (optionally used to create a README file when creating a new module distribution)
  - Test-Portability-Files-0.05 (optionally used during the tests)
  - Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08 (optionally used during the tests)
  - Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)
- Module::Signature-0.55 (required to use the Module::Build “distsign” run-time method and optionally used during the tests)
- YAML-0.65 (optional, provides additional features to Module::Build)

Module::Build Build and Installation Instructions

perl Build.PL &&
./Build &&
./Build test

Now, as the root user:

./Build install

Module::Info-0.31

The Module::Info module is quite useful for tasks other than just support of other modules. It can be used from the command-line to tell you if a particular module is included in, or has been installed into your Perl installation. Additionally, Module::Info can tell you what version of a module is installed and what dependencies are required for it. You can even use Module::Info to gather dependencies of uninstalled modules. The Module::Info module and dependencies install using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Module-Info-0.31
- version-0.74 (optionally used during the tests)
  - Module::Build-0.2808 (optional)
- Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)

Module::Signature-0.55

The Module::Signature module is used to check and create SIGNATURE files for CPAN distributions. After installing Module::Signature you can verify the content of a distribution tarball (if it includes a SIGNATURE file) by unpacking the tarball, changing into the newly created directory and issuing the command cpansign -v. It will check each file's integrity, as well as the signature's validity. Note that some of the dependencies appear to be circular, however, they are only run-time conflicts and you should be able to fully utilize them as long as everything is installed. Module::Signature and the dependency modules are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Module-Signature-0.55
- Text::Diff-0.35
- PAR-Dist-0.31
- Digest-SHA-5.45
  - Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08 (optionally used during the tests)
- GnuPG-1.4.7

Net::DNS-0.57

Net::DNS is a DNS resolver implemented in Perl. It can be used to perform nearly any type of DNS query from a Perl script. The Net::DNS module and all its dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Net-DNS-0.57
- Digest-HMAC-1.01
  - Digest-SHA1-2.11
- Net-IP-1.24
- IO-Socket-INET6-2.51 (required for IPv6 support)
  - Socket6-0.19
- Digest-BubbleBabble-0.01
- Test::Pod-1.26 (optional, only used during the test suite)

Pod::Coverage-0.18

The Pod::Coverage module is a Perl library used to check if the documentation of a module is comprehensive. This module can use the Module::Build modified build instructions, but is not required. All the dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Pod-Coverage-0.18
- Devel-Symdump-2.07
  - Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08 (optionally used during the tests, and is a circular dependency)
  - Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)
- Module::Build-0.2808 (optional)

SGMLSpm-1.03ii

The SGMLSpm module is a Perl library used for parsing the output from James Clark's SGMLS and NSGMLS parsers. This module requires modified installation instructions, shown below.

SGMLSpm-1.03ii

If your system's Perl version is different than 5.8.8, you'll need to modify the sed command below to reflect the version you have installed.

sed -i -e "s@/usr/local/bin@/usr/bin@" \
       -e "s@/usr/local/lib/perl5@/usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8@" \
       -e "s@/usr/local/lib/www/docs@/usr/share/doc/perl5@" \
    Makefile

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/perl5 &&
make install_html &&
rm -v -f /usr/share/doc/perl5/SGMLSpm/sample.pl &&
install -v -m644 DOC/sample.pl /usr/share/doc/perl5/SGMLSpm

Test::Pod-1.26

The Test:Pod module is (most of the time, optionally) used by other modules during the build process to check the validity of POD (Plain Old Documentation) files. The Test::Pod module is typically included by module authors to automatically find and check all POD files in a module distribution. This module and all the dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Test-Pod-1.26
- Pod-Simple-3.05
  - Pod-Escapes-1.04
- Test::Simple-0.70

Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08

The Test::Pod::Coverage module is used to check files in a distribution for POD coverage. It is normally used by developers to ensure their projects are adequately covered with POD and it is also used in the test suites of many module distributions. This module and all the dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Test-Pod-Coverage-1.08
- Test::Simple-0.70 or Test-Builder-Tester-1.01
- Pod::Coverage-0.18

Test::Simple-0.70

The Test::Simple module contains utilities designed to assist developers in creating tests. A version of Test::Simple was installed during LFS with the Perl-5.8.8 installation, however, some of the sub-modules contained in Test::Simple have been updated (notably, the Test::More module) and these updated modules are now required by other modules. This updated version of Test::Simple also now includes the Test:Builder:Tester module, required by many of the modules on this page. Note that installing this updated version of Test::Simple will overwrite some files from the original Perl installation, but there's really nothing to be alarmed about as these modules are only used by developers creating tests, or for running the test suites during additional module installations.

Test-Simple-0.70 (uses the standard build and installation instructions)
- Module::Signature-0.55 (optionally used during the tests)
- Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08 (optionally used during the tests, and is circular)
- Pod::Coverage-0.18 (optionally used during the tests, and is circular)

Text::Diff-0.35

Text::Diff is used to perform diffs on files and record sets. It provides a basic set of services akin to the GNU diff utility. It is not anywhere near as feature complete as GNU diff, but it is better integrated with Perl and available on all platforms. Text::Diff is often faster than shelling out to a system's diff executable for small files, and generally slower on larger files. The modules listed below are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Text-Diff-0.35
- Algorithm-Diff-1.1902

Tk-804.027

The Tk module is a Perl interface to the Tk package. The goal of this release is Unicode support via Perl's and core-Tk's use of UTF-8. Tk-804.027 builds and loads into a threaded Perl but is NOT yet thread safe. The module is installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Tk-804.027
- Tk-8.4.18 and libjpeg-6b

URI-1.35

The URI module implements the URI class. Objects of this class represent Uniform Resource Identifier references as specified in RFC 2396 and updated by RFC 2732 and can be used to access and manipulate the various components that make up these strings. The URI module and all its dependencies are installed using the standard build and installation instructions.

URI-1.35
- Business-ISBN-1.84 (optional, only used during the test suite)
  - LWP::Simple is required for many of the tests. This is a circular dependency.
  - Business-ISBN-Data-1.17
    
    Test-Prereq-1.033 (you may need to set up your CPAN access parameters by issuing the command perl -MCPAN -e shell before running the test suite, else the tests may hang)
    
    Module::Info-0.31
    
    Module::Build-0.2808 (optional)
    
    Module-CoreList-2.12
    
    Test::Pod-1.26 (optionally used during the tests)
    
    Test::Pod::Coverage-1.08 (optionally used during the tests)

XML::Parser-2.34

The XML::Parser module is a Perl extension interface to James Clark's XML parser, expat. The module is installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

XML-Parser-2.34
- expat-2.0.1
- libwww-perl-5.806 (optionally used during the tests)

XML::Simple-2.18

The XML::Simple module is a Perl extension that provides an easy API to read and write XML (especially config files). The module and all dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

XML-Simple-2.18
- One of the following four modules must be installed:
- Tie-IxHash-1.21

YAML-0.65

The YAML modules implement a YAML Loader and Dumper based on the YAML 1.0 specification http://www.yaml.org/spec/. YAML is a generic data serialization language that is optimized for human readability. It can be used to express the data structures of most modern programming languages. The module and dependencies are installed using the standard Perl module build and installation instructions.

Note

The YAML, Test::Base and Spiffy modules will install UTF-8 encoded manual pages. To modify the manual pages so that non-UTF-8 encoded pages are installed, issue the following commands (before any other build commands):

For Spiffy:     sed -i 's,\xc3\xb6,o,' lib/Spiffy.pm

For Test::Base: sed -i 's,\xc3\xb6,o,' \
                  lib/Test/Base{,/Filter}.pm \
                  lib/Module/Install/TestBase.pm

For YAML:       sed -i 's,\xc3\xb6,o,' \
                  ysh \
                  lib{,/Test}/YAML.pm \
                  lib/YAML/{Types,Node,Error,Marshall,Tag,Base}.pm \
                  lib/YAML/{Loader,Dumper}{,/Base}.pm

YAML-0.65
- Test-Base-0.54 (optionally used during the tests)
  - Spiffy-0.30
- Text::Diff-0.35 (optionally used during the tests)
- Test::Simple-0.70 (optionally used during the tests)

Standard Installation of Perl Modules

Install Perl modules by running the following commands:

perl Makefile.PL &&
make &&
make test

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note

When reinstalling a Perl module, sometimes older versions of the module being reinstalled are in other directories specified in @INC. To delete all other versions of the module being reinstalled (not simply older ones) set the UNINST variable:

make install UNINST=1

(Alternate) Auto Installation of Perl Modules.

There is an alternate way of installing the modules using the cpan shell install command. The command automatically downloads the source from the CPAN archive, extracts it, runs the compilation, testing and installation commands mentioned above, and removes the build source tree. You may still need to install dependent library packages before running the automated installation method.

The first time you run cpan, you'll be prompted to enter some information regarding download locations and methods. This information is retained in files located in ~/.cpan. Start the cpan shell by issuing 'cpan' as the root user. Any module may now be installed from the cpan> prompt with the command:

install <Module::Name>

For additional commands and help, issue 'help' from the cpan> prompt.

Alternatively, for scripted or non-interactive installations, use the following syntax as the root user to install one or more modules:

cpan -i <Module1::Name> <Module2::Name>

Review the cpan.1 man page for additional parameters you can pass to cpan on the command line.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 17:10:49 -0500

PHP-5.2.3

Introduction to PHP

PHP is the PHP Hypertext Preprocessor. Primarily used in dynamic web sites, it allows for programming code to be directly embedded into the HTML markup.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://us2.php.net/distributions/php-5.2.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isu.edu.tw/pub/Unix/Web/PHP/distributions/php-5.2.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: eb50b751c8e1ced05bd012d5a0e4dec3
Download size: 7.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 250 MB (includes installing all documentation)
Estimated build time: 2.5 SBU (additional 2.7 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Pre-built documentation (optional): http://www.php.net/download-docs.php

PHP Dependencies

Required

Apache-2.2.8

Optional System Utilities and Libraries

libxslt-1.1.22, GMP-4.2.2, PCRE-7.6, Aspell-0.60.5, pkg-config-0.22, Recode-3.6, expat-2.0.1 (deprecated alternative to libxml2-2.6.31), OSSP mm, Net-SNMP, Pth-2.0.7, re2c, XMLRPC-EPI, Dmalloc, and an MTA (that provides a sendmail command)

Optional Graphics Utilities and Libraries

libjpeg-6b, LibTIFF-3.8.2, libpng-1.2.29, libexif-0.6.16, FreeType-2.3.7, X Window System, ClibPDF, GD, t1lib, and FDF Toolkit

Optional Web Utilities

cURL-7.16.3, HTML Tidy-cvs_20070326, mnoGoSearch, Hyperwave, Roxen WebServer, Caudium, and WDDX

Optional Data Management Utilities and Libraries

OpenLDAP-2.3.39, GDBM-1.8.3, MySQL-5.0.41, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, unixODBC-2.2.12, QDBM, cdb, SQLite, Mini SQL, Empress, Birdstep, DBMaker, Adabas, FrontBase, and Monetra

PHP also provides support for many commercial database tools such as Oracle, SAP and ODBC Router.

Optional Security/Encryption Utilities and Libraries

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1, libmcrypt, and mhash

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/php

Installation of PHP

You can use PHP for server-side scripting, command-line scripting or client-side GUI applications. This book provides instructions for setting up PHP for server-side scripting as it is the most common form.

Note

PHP has many more configure options that will enable support for various things. You can use ./configure --help to see a full list of the available options. Also, use of the PHP web site is highly recommended, as their online docs are very good. An example of a configure command that utilizes many of the most common dependencies can be found at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/php_configure.txt.

If, for whatever reason, you don't have libxml2-2.6.31 installed, you need to add --disable-libxml to the configure command in the instructions below. Note that this will prevent the pear command from being built.

Install PHP by running the following commands:

sed -i 's/const char \*errpfx,/const DB_ENV *dbenv, & const/' \
    ext/dba/dba_db4.c &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --with-apxs2 \
            --enable-force-cgi-redirect \
            --enable-discard-path \
            --with-config-file-path=/etc \
            --with-zlib \
            --enable-bcmath \
            --with-bz2 \
            --enable-calendar \
            --enable-dba \
            --enable-exif \
            --enable-ftp \
            --with-gettext \
            --enable-mbstring \
            --with-ncurses \
            --with-readline &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test. Some of the tests are known to fail.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 php.ini-recommended /etc/php.ini &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3 &&
install -v -m644 CODING_STANDARDS EXTENSIONS INSTALL NEWS \
                 README* TODO* UPGRADING php.gif \
    /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3 &&
ln -v -s /usr/lib/php/doc/Archive_Tar/docs/Archive_Tar.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3

The pre-built HTML documentation is packaged in two forms: a tarball containing many individual files, useful for quick loading into your browser, and one large individual file, which is useful for using the search utility of your browser. If you downloaded either, or both, of the documentation files, issue the following commands as the root user to install them (note these instructions assume English docs, modify the tarball names below if necessary).

For the “Single HTML” file:

install -v -m644 ../php_manual_en.html.gz \
    /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3 &&
gunzip -v /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3/php_manual_en.html.gz

For the “Many HTML files” tarball:

tar -xvf ../php_manual_en.tar.gz -C /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3 &&
chown -v -R root:root /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3/html

Command Explanations

sed -i '...' ext/dba/dba_db4.c: This command is used to fix an issue with the use of Berkeley DB >= 4.3.x.

--with-apxs2: This parameter builds the Apache HTTPD 2.0 module.

--with-config-file-path=/etc: This parameter makes PHP look for the php.ini configuration file in /etc.

--with-zlib: This parameter adds support for Zlib compression.

--enable-bcmath: Enables bc style precision math functions.

--with-bz2: Adds support for Bzip2 compression functions.

--enable-calendar: This parameter provides support for calendar conversion.

--enable-dba: This parameter enables support for database (dbm-style) abstraction layer functions.

--enable-exif: Enables functions to access metadata from images.

--enable-ftp: This parameter enables FTP functions.

--with-gettext: Enables functions that use Gettext text translation.

--enable-mbstring: This parameter enables multibyte string support.

--with-ncurses: Provides ncurses terminal independent cursor handling.

--with-readline: This parameter enables command line Readline support.

--disable-libxml: This parameter allows building PHP without libxml2 installed.

Configuring PHP

Config Files

/etc/php.ini and /etc/pear.conf

Configuration Information

The file used as the default /etc/php.ini configuration file is recommended by the PHP development team. This file modifies the default behavior of PHP. If no /etc/php.ini is used, all configuration settings fall to the defaults. You should review the comments in this file and ensure the changes are acceptable in your particular environment.

You may have noticed the following from the output of the make install command:

You may want to add: /usr/lib/php to your php.ini include_path

If desired, add the entry using the following command as the root user:

sed -i 's@php/includes"@&\ninclude_path = ".:/usr/lib/php"@' \
    /etc/php.ini

To enable PHP support in the Apache web server, a new LoadModule (which should be handled automatically by the make install command) and AddType directives must be added to the httpd.conf file:

LoadModule php5_module lib/apache/libphp5.so
AddType application/x-httpd-php .php

Additionally, it can be useful to add an entry for index.php to the DirectoryIndex directive of the httpd.conf file. Lastly, adding a line to setup the .phps extension to show highlighted PHP source may be desirable:

AddType application/x-httpd-php-source .phps

You'll need to restart the Apache web server after making any modifications to the httpd.conf file.

Installed Programs: pear, peardev, pecl, php, php-config and phpize

Installed Library: libphp5.so Apache module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/php, /usr/lib/php and /usr/share/doc/php-5.2.3

Short Descriptions

php	is a command line interface that enables you to parse and execute PHP code.
pear	is the PHP Extension and Application Repository (PEAR) package manager.

Last updated on 2007-08-15 18:06:57 -0500

Python-2.5.2

Introduction to Python

The Python package contains the Python development environment. This is useful for object-oriented programming, writing scripts, prototyping large programs or developing entire applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.python.org/ftp/python/2.5.2/Python-2.5.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/Python-2.5.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: afb5451049eda91fbde10bd5a4b7fadc
Download size: 9.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 180 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU (additional 2.7 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required Patch

http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/Python-2.5.2-gdbm-1.patch

Optional HTML Documentation

http://docs.python.org/ftp/python/doc/2.5/html-2.5.tar.bz2

Python Dependencies

Optional

Pth-2.0.7

Optional (to create package-specific support modules)

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Tk-8.4.18, GDBM-1.8.3, and SQLite 3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Python

Installation of Python

Install Python by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../Python-2.5.2-gdbm-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test. Note that if you have an existing Python installation which includes the PyXML module, the tests could produce a segmentation fault.

Now, as the root user:

make install

There is no documentation installed using the instructions above. However, There are LaTeX sources included with the distribution. See the Doc/README file in the source distribution for instructions to format the LaTeX sources. Alternatively, you can download preformatted documentation from http://docs.python.org/download.html.

In order to use the help ('name_string') feature of the python interpreter with some statements and keywords, you must download (or create) the optional HTML documentation and install it. If you downloaded the HTML docs, issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/Python-2.5.2/html &&
tar --strip-components=1 \
    --no-same-owner \
    --no-same-permissions \
    -C /usr/share/doc/Python-2.5.2/html \
    -xvf ../html-2.5.tar.bz2

In order for python to find the installed documentation, you must add the following environment variable to individual user's or the system's profile:

export PYTHONDOCS=/usr/share/doc/Python-2.5.2/html

Installed Programs: pydoc, python, python2.5, smtpd.py, and optionally if Tk is installed, idle

Installed Libraries: libpython2.5.so and numerous modules installed in /usr/lib/python2.5/lib-dynload

Installed Directories: /usr/include/python2.5, /usr/lib/python2.5, and /usr/share/doc/python-2.5.2

Short Descriptions

idle	is a wrapper script that opens a Python aware GUI editor.
pydoc	is the Python documentation tool.
python	is an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language.
python2.5	is a version-specific name for the python program.
smtpd.py	is an SMTP proxy implemented in Python.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 15:13:59 -0500

Python Modules

Introduction to Python Modules

The Python module packages add useful objects to the Python language. Modules utilized by packages throughout BLFS are listed here, along with their dependencies. Installation of the modules shown on this page is meant to follow from top to bottom to handle optional dependencies in each module.

PyXML-0.8.4
Pycairo-1.4.0
PyGObject-2.12.3
PyGTK-2.10.6
PyORBit-2.14.3
Gnome-Python-2.18.2
Gnome-Python-Desktop-2.18.0

PyXML-0.8.4

The PyXML package contains a validating XML parser, an implementation of the SAX and DOM programming interfaces, an interface to the Expat parser, and a C helper module that can speed up xmllib.py by a factor of five. This is useful for validating, parsing and manipulating XML files using Python programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/pyxml/PyXML-0.8.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/PyXML-0.8.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1f7655050cebbb664db976405fdba209
Download size: 734 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14.6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

PyXML Dependencies

Required

Nautilus CD Burner-2.18.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pyxml

Installation of PyXML

Install PyXML by running the following commands:

python setup.py build

Now, as the root user:

python setup.py install &&
install -v -m644 doc/man/xmlproc_*.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/PyXML-0.8.4 &&
cp -v -R doc demo test /usr/share/doc/PyXML-0.8.4 &&
install -v -m644 README* /usr/share/doc/PyXML-0.8.4

To run the regression tests, the package must first be installed. Then, as an unprivileged user, issue the following commands:

cd test &&
python regrtest.py &&
cd ..

Command Explanations

python setup.py build: This command copies the *.py files to a staging area and compiles the C extensions.

python setup.py install: This command installs the package.

Installed Programs: xmlproc_parse and xmlproc_val

Installed Libraries: PyXML Python library modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/_xmlplus and /usr/share/doc/PyXML-0.8.4

Short Descriptions

xmlproc_parse	is a simple XML file parser using the xmlproc parser.
xmlproc_val	is a validating XML file parser using the xmlproc parser.

Pycairo-1.4.0

Pycairo provides Python bindings to Cairo.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://cairographics.org/releases/pycairo-1.4.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e26e77919b606113f565d70036c1f504
Download size: 468 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Pycairo Dependencies

Required

Python-2.5.2 and cairo-1.4.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pycairo

Installation of Pycairo

Install Pycairo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

To run the regression tests, the package must first be installed. Then, as an unprivileged user, issue the following commands:

(cd test && python test.py)

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Pycairo Python library module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/pycairo and /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/cairo

PyGObject-2.12.3

PyGObject provides Python bindings to the GObject class from GLib.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pygobject/2.12/pygobject-2.12.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pygobject/2.12/pygobject-2.12.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 009986021225b7ea6e0ba848707785af
Download size: 331 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.2
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

PyGObject Dependencies

Required

Python-2.5.2 and GLib-2.12.12

Optional (to Build Documentation)

libxslt-1.1.22

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pygobject

Installation of PyGObject

Install PyGObject by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-docs: This option disables the rebuilding of the html documentation if libxslt-1.1.22 is installed.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: PyGObject Python library module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/pygtk-2.0, /usr/share/pygobject and /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/gtk-2.0

PyGTK-2.10.6

PyGTK lets you to easily create programs with a graphical user interface using the Python programming language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pygtk/2.10/pygtk-2.10.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pygtk/2.10/pygtk-2.10.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f051e25adcbdc1ddcf736fadad3d66f2
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 5.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

PyGTK Dependencies

Required

PyGObject-2.12.3

Required (atk module)

ATK-1.18.0

Required (pango module)

Pango-1.16.4

Required (pangocairo module)

Pycairo-1.4.0 and Pango-1.16.4

Required (gtk and gtk.unixprint modules)

Pycairo-1.4.0 and GTK+-2.10.13

Required (gtk.libglade module)

Pycairo-1.4.0 and libglade-2.6.1

Optional

Numeric (version 24.2)

Optional (to Build Documentation)

libxslt-1.1.22

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pygtk

Installation of PyGTK

Install PyGTK by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

The tests must be run from an active X display. If this is so, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-docs: This option enables rebuilding the html documentation if libxslt-1.1.22 is installed.

Installed Programs: pygtk-codegen-2.0 and pygtk-demo

Installed Libraries: PyGTK Python library modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/pygtk, /usr/share/pygtk and /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/gtk-2.0

Short Descriptions

pygtk-codegen-2.0	is a wrapper script to run the PyGTK codegen module.
pygtk-demo	is a Python wrapper to run the PyGTK demo program.

PyORBit-2.14.3

This is a Python language binding for the ORBit2 CORBA implementation.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pyorbit/2.14/pyorbit-2.14.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pyorbit/2.14/pyorbit-2.14.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3c4d42ae1a7303fd85071a842617043f
Download size: 0.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 5.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

PyORBit Dependencies

Required

Python-2.5.2 and ORBit2-2.14.7

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pyorbit

Installation of PyORBit

Install PyORBit by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: PyORBit Python library module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/pyorbit-2

Gnome-Python-2.18.2

Gnome-Python provides Python modules for various GNOME libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-python/2.18/gnome-python-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-python/2.18/gnome-python-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3df58e4354526d4e0be8524c0bf6ddb8
Download size: 0.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 5.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Gnome-Python Dependencies

Required

PyGTK-2.10.6 and libgnome-2.18.0

Required (gnome.ui module)

PyORBit-2.14.3 and libgnomeui-2.18.1

Required (gnome.canvas module)

libgnomecanvas-2.14.0

Required (gnomevfs module bonobo support)

PyORBit-2.14.3

Required (bonobo.ui module)

libbonoboui-2.18.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-python

Installation of Gnome-Python

Install Gnome-Python by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Gnome-Python library modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gnome-python-2.0

Gnome-Python-Desktop-2.18.0

Gnome-Python-Desktop provides additional Python modules for GNOME libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-python-desktop/2.18/gnome-python-desktop-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-python-desktop/2.18/gnome-python-desktop-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ce1b1c095a69c2656177570a2939fabb
Download size: 0.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 5.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Gnome-Python-Desktop Dependencies

Required

Gnome-Python-2.18.2

Required (gnomeapplet module)

GNOME Panel-2.18.3

Required (gnomeprint module)

libgnomeprint-2.18.0

Required (gnomeprint.ui module)

libgnomeprintui-2.18.0

Required (gtksourceview module)

gtksourceview-1.8.5

Required (wnck module)

libwnck-2.18.3

Required (totem.plparser module)

Totem-2.18.2

Required (gtop module)

LibGTop-2.14.9

Required (nautilusburn module)

Required (mediaprofiles module)

GNOME Media-2.18.0

Required (rsvg module)

librsvg-2.16.1

Required (metacity module)

Metacity-2.18.5

Required (gnomekeyring module)

gnome-keyring-0.8.1

Required (gnomedesktop module)

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3

Required (bugbuddy module)

bug-buddy-2.18.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-python-desktop

Installation of Gnome-Python-Desktop

Install Gnome-Python-Desktop by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-metacity: This option enables building the metacity module if Metacity-2.18.5 is installed.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Gnome-Python-Desktop library modules

Installed Directories: None

Last updated on 2008-03-17 13:11:35 -0500

Ruby-1.8.6-p111

Introduction to Ruby

The Ruby package contains the Ruby development environment. This is useful for object-oriented scripting.

Package Information

Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ruby-lang.org/pub/ruby/1.8/ruby-1.8.6-p111.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e1d38b7d4f1be55726d6927a3395ce3b
Download size: 3.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 115 MB
Estimated build time: 2.1 SBU

Ruby Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Tk-8.4.18, and GDBM-1.8.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/ruby

Installation of Ruby

Install Ruby by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-shared \
            --enable-pthread \
            --enable-install-doc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-shared: This parameter builds the libruby shared library.

--enable-pthread: This parameter links the threading library into the Ruby build.

Installed Programs: ruby, irb, erb, rdoc, ri, and testrb

Installed Libraries: libruby.so, libruby-static.a and numerous modules located in the /usr/lib/ruby hierarchy.

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/ruby and /usr/share/ri

Short Descriptions

ruby	is an interpreted scripting language for quick and easy object-oriented programming.
irb	is the interactive interface for Ruby.
erb	is Tiny eRuby. It interprets a Ruby code embedded text file.
ri	displays documentation from a database on Ruby classes, modules and methods.
`libruby.so`	contains the API functions required by Ruby.

Last updated on 2007-12-22 14:27:55 -0600

Tcl-8.4.18

Introduction to Tcl

The Tcl package contains the Tool Command Language, a robust general-purpose scripting language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/tcl/tcl8.4.18-src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/tcl8.4.18-src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 7d8bc95036f797b1a2b62a5a382d2cc1
Download size: 3.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (additional 0.7 SBU to run the test suite)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/tcl

Installation of Tcl

This package is also installed in LFS during the bootstrap phase. As it is not installed during Chapter 6 of LFS, installation instructions are included here in BLFS.

Install Tcl by running the following commands:

cd unix &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-threads \
            --mandir=/usr/share/man &&
make &&
sed -i \
    -e "s@^\(TCL_SRC_DIR='\).*@\1/usr/include'@" \
    -e "/TCL_B/s@='\(-L\)\?.*unix@='\1/usr/lib@" \
    -e "/SEARCH/s/=.*/=''/" \
    tclConfig.sh

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-private-headers &&
ln -v -sf tclsh8.4 /usr/bin/tclsh

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This switch forces the package to build with thread support.

make install-private-headers: This command is used to install the Tcl library interface headers used by other packages if they link to the Tcl library.

ln -v -sf tclsh8.4 /usr/bin/tclsh: This command is used to create a compatibility symbolic link to the tclsh8.4 file as many packages expect a file named tclsh.

sed -i -e ... tclConfig.sh: The Tcl package expects that its source tree is preserved so that packages depending on it for their compilation can utilize it. This sed removes the references to the build directory and replaces them with saner system-wide locations.

Installed Programs: tclsh and tclsh8.4

Installed Libraries: libtcl.so and libtclstub8.4.a

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/tcl8.4

Short Descriptions

tclsh	is a symlink to the tclsh8.4 program.
tclsh8.4	is a simple shell containing the Tcl interpreter.
`libtcl.so`	contains the API functions required by Tcl.

Last updated on 2008-04-09 14:15:48 -0500

Tk-8.4.18

Introduction to Tk

The Tk package contains a TCL GUI Toolkit.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/tcl/tk8.4.18-src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/tk8.4.18-src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: bf52be013df31198b144d1ca72b094fb
Download size: 3.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 23 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Tk Dependencies

Required

X Window System and Tcl-8.4.18

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/tk

Installation of Tk

Install Tk by running the following commands:

cd unix &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-threads \
            --mandir=/usr/share/man &&
make &&
sed -i \
    -e "s@^\(TK_SRC_DIR='\).*@\1/usr/include'@" \
    -e "/TK_B/s@='\(-L\)\?.*unix@='\1/usr/lib@" \
    -e "/SEARCH/s/=.*/=''/" \
    tkConfig.sh

Running the tests is not recommended. Some tests may crash your X Server. To test the results anyway, issue: make test. Ensure you run it from an X Window display device with the GLX extensions loaded, else the tests will hang.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-private-headers &&
ln -v -sf wish8.4 /usr/bin/wish

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This switch forces the package to build with thread support.

make install-private-headers: This command is used to install the Tk library interface headers used by other packages if they link to the Tk library.

ln -v -sf wish8.4 /usr/bin/wish: This command is used to create a compatibility symbolic link to the wish8.4 file as many packages expect a file named wish.

sed -i -e ... tkConfig.sh: The Tk package expects that its source tree is preserved so that packages depending on it for their compilation can utilize it. This sed removes the references to the build directory and replaces them with saner system-wide locations.

Installed Programs: wish and wish8.4

Installed Libraries: libtk.so and libtkstub8.4.a

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/tk8.4

Short Descriptions

wish	is a symlink to the wish8.4 program.
wish8.4	is a simple shell containing the Tk toolkit that creates a main window and then processes Tcl commands.
`libtk.so`	contains the API functions required by Tk.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Other Programming Tools

Introduction

This section is provided to show you some additional programming tools for which instructions have not yet been created in the book or for those that are not appropriate for the book. Note that these packages may not have been tested by the BLFS team, but their mention here is meant to be a convenient source of additional information.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/OtherProgrammingTools

Programming Frameworks, Languages and Compilers

A+

A+ is a powerful and efficient programming language. It is freely available under the GNU General Public License. It embodies a rich set of functions and operators, a modern graphical user interface with many widgets and automatic synchronization of widgets and variables, asynchronous execution of functions associated with variables and events, dynamic loading of user compiled subroutines, and many other features. Execution is by a rather efficient interpreter. A+ was created at Morgan Stanley. Primarily used in a computationally-intensive business environment, many critical applications written in A+ have withstood the demands of real world developers over many years. Written in an interpreted language, A+ applications tend to be portable.

Project Home Page: http://www.aplusdev.org/
Download Location: http://www.aplusdev.org/Download/index.html

ABC

ABC is an interactive programming language and environment for personal computing, originally intended as a good replacement for BASIC. It was designed by first doing a task analysis of the programming task. ABC is easy to learn (an hour or so for someone who has already programmed), and yet easy to use. Originally intended as a language for beginners, it has evolved into a powerful tool for beginners and experts alike. Some features of the language include: a powerful collection of only five data types that easily combines strong typing, yet without declarations, no limitations (such as max int), apart from sheer exhaustion of memory refinements to support top-down programming, nesting by indentation and programs typically are one fourth or one fifth the size of the equivalent Pascal or C program.

Project Home Page: http://homepages.cwi.nl/~steven/abc/
Download Location: http://homepages.cwi.nl/~steven/abc/implementations.html

ALF

ALF is a language which combines functional and logic programming techniques. The foundation of ALF is Horn clause logic with equality which consists of predicates and Horn clauses for logic programming, and functions and equations for functional programming. The ALF system is an efficient implementation of the combination of resolution, narrowing, rewriting and rejection. Similarly to Prolog, ALF uses a backtracking strategy corresponding to a depth-first search in the derivation tree.

Project Home Page: http://www.informatik.uni-kiel.de/~mh/systems/ALF.html
Download Location: http://www.informatik.uni-kiel.de/~mh/systems/ALF/

ASM

ASM is a Java bytecode manipulation framework. It can be used to dynamically generate stub classes or other proxy classes, directly in binary form, or to dynamically modify classes at load time, i.e., just before they are loaded into the Java Virtual Machine. ASM offers similar functionalities as BCEL or SERP, but is much smaller (33KB instead of 350KB for BCEL and 150KB for SERP) and faster than these tools (the overhead of a load time class transformation is of the order of 60% with ASM, 700% or more with BCEL, and 1100% or more with SERP). Indeed ASM was designed to be used in a dynamic way (though it works statically as well) and was therefore designed and implemented to be as small and as fast as possible.

Project Home Page: http://asm.objectweb.org/
Download Location: http://forge.objectweb.org/projects/asm/

BCPL

BCPL is a simple typeless language that was designed in 1966 by Martin Richards and implemented for the first time at MIT in the Spring of 1967.

Project Home Page: http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/users/mr/BCPL.html
Download Location: http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/users/mr/BCPL/

BETA

BETA is developed within the Scandinavian School of object-orientation, where the first object-oriented language, Simula, was developed. BETA is a modern language in the Simula tradition. The resulting language is smaller than Simula in spite of being considerably more expressive. BETA is a strongly typed language like Simula, Eiffel and C++, with most type checking being carried out at compile-time. It is well known that it is not possible to obtain all type checking at compile time without sacrificing the expressiveness of the language. BETA has optimum balance between compile-time type checking and run-time type checking.

Project Home Page: http://www.daimi.au.dk/~beta/
Download Location: ftp://ftp.daimi.au.dk/pub/beta/

<bigwig>

<bigwig> is a high-level programming language for developing interactive Web services. Programs are compiled into a conglomerate of lower-level technologies such as C code, HTTP, HTML, JavaScript, and SSL, all running on top of a runtime system based on an Apache Web server module. It is a descendant of the Mawl project but is a completely new design and implementation with vastly expanded ambitions. The <bigwig> language is really a collection of tiny domain-specific languages focusing on different aspects of interactive Web services. These contributing languages are held together by a C-like skeleton language. Thus, <bigwig> has the look and feel of C-programs but with special data and control structures.

Project Home Page: http://www.brics.dk/bigwig/
Download Location: http://www.brics.dk/bigwig/download/

Bigloo

Bigloo is a Scheme implementation devoted to one goal: enabling Scheme based programming style where C(++) is usually required. Bigloo attempts to make Scheme practical by offering features usually presented by traditional programming languages but not offered by Scheme and functional programming. Bigloo compiles Scheme modules and delivers small and fast stand-alone binary executables. It enables full connections between Scheme and C programs, between Scheme and Java programs, and between Scheme and C# programs.

Project Home Page: http://www-sop.inria.fr/mimosa/fp/Bigloo/
Download Location: ftp://ftp-sop.inria.fr/mimosa/fp/Bigloo/

C--

C-- is a portable assembly language that can be generated by a front end and implemented by any of several code generators. It serves as an interface between high-level compilers and retargetable, optimizing code generators. Authors of front ends and code generators can cooperate easily.

Project Home Page: http://www.cminusminus.org/
Download Location: http://www.cminusminus.org/code.html

Caml

Caml is a general-purpose programming language, designed with program safety and reliability in mind. It is very expressive, yet easy to learn and use. Caml supports functional, imperative, and object-oriented programming styles. It has been developed and distributed by INRIA, France's national research institute for computer science, since 1985. The Objective Caml system is the main implementation of the Caml language. It features a powerful module system and a full-fledged object-oriented layer. It comes with a native-code compiler that supports numerous architectures, for high performance; a bytecode compiler, for increased portability; and an interactive loop, for experimentation and rapid development.

Project Home Page: http://caml.inria.fr/
Download Location: http://caml.inria.fr/pub/distrib/

Cayenne

Cayenne is a simple(?) functional language with a powerful type system. The basic types are functions, products, and sums. Functions and products use dependent types to gain additional power. There are very few building blocks in the language, but a lot of “syntactic sugar” to make it more readable. There is no separate module language in Cayenne since the dependent types allow the normal expression language to be used at the module level as well. The design of Cayenne has been heavily influenced by Haskell and constructive type theory and with some things borrowed from Java. The drawback of such a powerful type system is that the type checking becomes undecidable.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.chalmers.se/~augustss/cayenne/
Download Location: http://www.cs.chalmers.se/~augustss/cayenne/get.html

Ch

Ch is an embeddable C/C++ interpreter for cross-platform scripting, shell programming, 2D/3D plotting, numerical computing, and embedded scripting.

Project Home Page: http://www.softintegration.com/
Download Location: http://www.softintegration.com/products/chstandard/download/

Clean

Clean is a general purpose, state-of-the-art, pure and lazy functional programming language designed for making real-world applications. Clean is the only functional language in the world which offers uniqueness typing. This type system makes it possible in a pure functional language to incorporate destructive updates of arbitrary data structures (including arrays) and to make direct interfaces to the outside imperative world. The type system makes it possible to develop efficient applications.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.ru.nl/~clean/
Download Location: http://www.cs.ru.nl/~clean/Download/download.html

CORN

CORN is designed for modeling concurrency and advanced computation. It provides lazy evaluation between concurrently worked threads, with object-oriented and functional style of semantic. This language can be also used for parallel computation.

Project Home Page: http://corn.telefonia.pl/
Download Location: http://corn.telefonia.pl/download/download.html

Cyclone

Cyclone is a programming language based on C that is safe, meaning that it rules out programs that have buffer overflows, dangling pointers, format string attacks, and so on. High-level, type-safe languages, such as Java, Scheme, or ML also provide safety, but they don't give the same control over data representations and memory management that C does (witness the fact that the run-time systems for these languages are usually written in C.) Furthermore, porting legacy C code to these languages or interfacing with legacy C libraries is a difficult and error-prone process. The goal of Cyclone is to give programmers the same low-level control and performance of C without sacrificing safety, and to make it easy to port or interface with legacy C code.

Project Home Page: http://www.research.att.com/projects/cyclone/
Download Location: http://www.eecs.harvard.edu/~greg/cyclone/software/

D

D is a general purpose systems and applications programming language. It is a higher level language than C++, but retains the ability to write high performance code and interface directly with the operating system APIs and with hardware. D is well suited to writing medium to large scale million line programs with teams of developers. It is easy to learn, provides many capabilities to aid the programmer, and is well suited to aggressive compiler optimization technology. D is not a scripting language, nor an interpreted language. It doesn't come with a VM, a religion, or an overriding philosophy. It's a practical language for practical programmers who need to get the job done quickly, reliably, and leave behind maintainable, easy to understand code. D is the culmination of decades of experience implementing compilers for many diverse languages, and attempting to construct large projects using those languages. It draws inspiration from those other languages (most especially C++) and tempers it with experience and real world practicality.

Project Home Page: http://www.digitalmars.com/d/
Download Location: ftp://ftp.digitalmars.com/

DMDScript

DMDScript is Digital Mars' implementation of the ECMA 262 scripting language. Netscape's implementation is called JavaScript, Microsoft's implementation is called JScript. DMDScript is much faster than other implementations, which you can verify with the included benchmark.

Project Home Page: http://www.digitalmars.com/dscript/index.html
Download Location: ftp://ftp.digitalmars.com/

DotGNU Portable.NET

DotGNU Portable.NET goal is to build a suite of free software tools to build and execute .NET applications, including a C# compiler, assembler, disassembler, and runtime engine. While the initial target platform was GNU/Linux, it is also known to run under Windows, Solaris, NetBSD, FreeBSD, and MacOS X. The runtime engine has been tested on the x86, PowerPC, ARM, Sparc, PARISC, s390, Alpha, and IA-64 processors. DotGNU Portable.NET is part of the DotGNU project, built in accordance with the requirements of the GNU Project. DotGNU Portable.NET is focused on compatibility with the ECMA specifications for CLI. There are other projects under the DotGNU meta-project to build other necessary pieces of infrastructure, and to explore non-CLI approaches to virtual machine implementation.

Project Home Page: http://www.southern-storm.com.au/portable_net.html
Download Location: http://www.southern-storm.com.au/portable_net.html#download

Dylan

Dylan is an advanced, object-oriented, dynamic language which supports rapid program development. When needed, programs can be optimized for more efficient execution by supplying more type information to the compiler. Nearly all entities in Dylan (including functions, classes, and basic data types such as integers) are first class objects. Additionally, Dylan supports multiple inheritance, polymorphism, multiple dispatch, keyword arguments, object introspection, macros, and many other advanced features... --Peter Hinely.

Project Home Page: http://www.gwydiondylan.org/
Download Location: http://www.gwydiondylan.org/downloading.phtml

E

E is a secure distributed Java-based pure-object platform and p2p scripting language. It has two parts: ELib and the E Language. Elib provides the stuff that goes on between objects. As a pure-Java library, ELib provides for inter-process capability-secure distributed programming. Its cryptographic capability protocol enables mutually suspicious Java processes to cooperate safely, and its event-loop concurrency and promise pipelining enable high performance deadlock free distributed pure-object computing. The E Language can be used to express what happens within an object. It provides a convenient and familiar notation for the ELib computational model, so you can program in one model rather than two. Under the covers, this notation expands into Kernel-E, a minimalist lambda-language much like Scheme or Smalltalk. Objects written in the E language are only able to interact with other objects according to ELib's semantics, enabling object granularity intra-process security, including the ability to safely run untrusted mobile code (such as caplets).

Project Home Page: http://www.erights.org/
Download Location: http://www.erights.org/download/

elastiC

elastiC is a portable high-level object-oriented interpreted language with a C like syntax. Its main characteristics are: open source, interpreted, has portable bytecode compilation, dynamic typing, automatic real very fast garbage collection, object oriented with meta-programming support (a la Smalltalk), functional programming support (Scheme-like closures with lexical scoping, and eval-like functionality), hierarchical namespaces, a rich set of useful built-in types (dynamic arrays, dictionaries, symbols, ...), extensibile with C (you can add functions, types, classes, methods, packages, ...), embeddable in C. elastiC has been strongly influenced by C, Smalltalk, Scheme and Python and tries to merge the best characteristics of all these languages, while still coherently maintaining its unique personality.

Project Home Page: http://www.elasticworld.org/
Download Location: http://www.elasticworld.org/download.html

Erlang/OTP

Erlang/OTP is a development environment based on Erlang. Erlang is a programming language which has many features more commonly associated with an operating system than with a programming language: concurrent processes, scheduling, memory management, distribution, networking, etc. The initial open-source Erlang release contains the implementation of Erlang, as well as a large part of Ericsson's middleware for building distributed high-availability systems. Erlang is characterized by the following features: robustness, soft real-time, hot code upgrades and incremental code loading.

Project Home Page: http://www.erlang.org/
Download Location: http://www.erlang.org/download.html

Euphoria

Euphoria is a simple, flexible, and easy-to-learn programming language. It lets you quickly and easily develop programs for Windows, DOS, Linux and FreeBSD. Euphoria was first released in 1993. Since then Rapid Deployment Software has been steadily improving it with the help of a growing number of enthusiastic users. Although Euphoria provides subscript checking, uninitialized variable checking and numerous other run-time checks, it is extremely fast. People have used it to develop high-speed DOS games, Windows GUI programs, and Linux X Windows programs. It is also very useful for CGI (Web-based) programming.

Project Home Page: http://www.rapideuphoria.com/
Download Location: http://www.rapideuphoria.com/v20.htm

Felix

Felix is an advanced Algol like procedural programming language with a strong functional subsystem. It features ML style static typing, first class functions, pattern matching, garbage collection, polymorphism, and has built in support for high performance microthreading, regular expressions and context free parsing. The system provides a scripting harness so the language can be used like other scripting languages such as Python and Perl, but underneath it generates native code to obtain high performance. A key feature of the system is that it uses the C/C++ object model, and provides an advanced binding sublanguage to support integration with C/C++ at both the source and object levels, both for embedding C/C++ data types and functions into Felix, and for embedding Felix into exitsing C++ architectures. The Felix compiler is written in Objective Caml, and generates ISO C++ which should compile on any platform.

Project Home Page: http://felix.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://felix.sourceforge.net/current/www/download.html

ferite

ferite is a scripting language and engine all in one manageable chunk. It is designed to be easily extended in terms of API, and to be used within other applications making them more configurable and useful to the end user. It has a syntax similar to a number of other languages but remains clean and its own language.

Project Home Page: http://www.ferite.org/
Download Location: http://www.ferite.org/download.html

Forth

Forth is a stack-based, extensible language without type-checking. It is probably best known for its "reverse Polish" (postfix) arithmetic notation, familiar to users of Hewlett-Packard calculators. Forth is a real-time programming language originally developed to control telescopes. Forth has many unique features and applications: it can compile itself into a new compiler, reverse-polish coding, edit time error checking and compiling (similar to BASIC), extremely efficient thread based language, can be used to debug itself, extensible; thus can become what ever you need it to be. The links below lead to the website of the Forth Interest Group (FIG), a world-wide, non-profit organization for education in and the promotion of the Forth computer language. Another worthwhile website dedicated to the Forth community is http://wiki.forthfreak.net/.

Project Home Page: http://www.forth.org/
Download Location: http://www.forth.org/compilers.html

GNU Smalltalk

GNU Smalltalk is a free implementation of the Smalltalk-80 language which runs on most versions on Unix and, in general, everywhere you can find a POSIX-compliance library. An uncommon feature of it is that it is well-versed to scripting tasks and headless processing. See http://www.gnu.org/software/smalltalk/gst-manual/gst_1.html#SEC1 for a more detailed explanation of GNU Smalltalk.

Project Home Page: http://www.gnu.org/software/smalltalk/
Download Location: http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/smalltalk/

Haskell

Haskell is a computer programming language. In particular, it is a polymorphicly typed, lazy, purely functional language, quite different from most other programming languages. The language is named for Haskell Brooks Curry, whose work in mathematical logic serves as a foundation for functional languages. Haskell is based on lambda calculus. There are many implementations of Haskell, among them:

GHC: http://www.haskell.org/ghc/
HBC: http://www.cs.chalmers.se/~augustss/hbc/hbc.html
Helium: http://www.cs.uu.nl/helium/
Hugs: http://www.haskell.org/hugs/
nhc98: http://www.haskell.org/nhc98/

HLA (High Level Assembly)

The HLA language was developed as a tool to help teach assembly language programming and machine organization to University students at the University of California, Riverside. The basic idea was to teach students assembly language programming by leveraging their knowledge of high level languages like C/C++ and Pascal/Delphi. At the same time, HLA was designed to allow advanced assembly language programmers write more readable and more powerful assembly language code.

Project Home Page: http://webster.cs.ucr.edu/AsmTools/HLA/
Download Location: http://webster.cs.ucr.edu/AsmTools/HLA/dnld.html

Icon

Icon is a high-level, general-purpose programming language with a large repertoire of features for processing data structures and character strings. It is an imperative, procedural language with a syntax reminiscent of C and Pascal, but with semantics at a much higher level.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.arizona.edu/icon/
Download Location: ftp://ftp.cs.arizona.edu/icon/

Io

Io is a small, prototype-based programming language. The ideas in Io are mostly inspired by Smalltalk (all values are objects), Self (prototype-based), NewtonScript (differential inheritance), Act1 (actors and futures for concurrency), LISP (code is a runtime inspectable/modifiable tree) and Lua (small, embeddable).

Project Home Page: http://www.iolanguage.com/about/
Download Location: http://www.iolanguage.com/downloads/

J

J is a modern, high-level, general-purpose, high-performance programming language. It is portable and runs on Windows, Unix, Mac, and PocketPC handhelds, both as a GUI and in a console. True 64-bit J systems are available for XP64 or Linux64, on AMD64 or Intel EM64T platforms. J systems can be installed and distributed for free.

Project Home Page: http://www.jsoftware.com/
Download Location: http://www.jsoftware.com/download/

Jamaica

Jamaica, the JVM Macro Assembler, is an easy-to-learn and easy-to-use assembly language for JVM bytecode programming. It uses Java syntax to define a JVM class except for the method body that takes bytecode instructions, including Jamaica's built-in macros. In Jamaica, bytecode instructions use mnemonics and symbolic names for all variables, parameters, data fields, constants and labels.

Project Home Page: http://www.judoscript.com/jamaica.html
Download Location: http://www.judoscript.com/download.html

Joy

Joy is a purely functional programming language. Whereas all other functional programming languages are based on the application of functions to arguments, Joy is based on the composition of functions. All such functions take a stack as an argument and produce a stack as a value. Consequently much of Joy looks like ordinary postfix notation. However, in Joy a function can consume any number of parameters from the stack and leave any number of results on the stack. The concatenation of appropriate programs denotes the composition of the functions which the programs denote.

Project Home Page: http://www.latrobe.edu.au/philosophy/phimvt/joy.html

Judo

Judo is a practical, functional scripting language. It is designed to cover the use cases of not only algorithmic/object-oriented/multi-threaded programming and Java scripting but also a number of major application domain tasks, such as scripting for JDBC, WSDL, ActiveX, OS, multiple file/data formats, etc. Despite its rich functionality, the base language is extremely simple, and domain support syntax is totally intuitive to domain experts, so that even though you have never programmed in Judo, you would have little trouble figuring out what the code does.

Project Home Page: http://www.judoscript.com/home.html
Download Location: http://www.judoscript.com/download.html

JWIG

JWIG is a Java-based high-level programming language for development of interactive Web services. It contains an advanced session model, a flexible mechanism for dynamic construction of XML documents, in particular XHTML, and a powerful API for simplifying use of the HTTP protocol and many other aspects of Web service programming. To support program development, JWIG provides a unique suite of highly specialized program analyses that at compile time verify for a given program that no runtime errors can occur while building documents or receiving form input, and that all documents being shown are valid according to the document type definition for XHTML 1.0. The main goal of the JWIG project is to simplify development of complex Web services, compared to alternatives, such as, Servlets, JSP, ASP, and PHP. JWIG is a descendant of the <bigwig> research language.

Project Home Page: http://www.brics.dk/JWIG/
Download Location: http://www.brics.dk/JWIG/download.html

Lava

Lava is a name unfortunately chosen for several unrelated software development languages/projects. So it doesn't appear as though BLFS has a preference for one over another, the project web sites are listed below, without descriptions of the capabilities or features for any of them.

Project Home Page: http://lavape.sourceforge.net/index.htm
Project Home Page: http://javalab.cs.uni-bonn.de/research/darwin/#The%20Lava%20Language
Project Home Page: http://www.md.chalmers.se/~koen/Lava/
Project Home Page: http://members.tripod.com/mathias/IavaHomepage.html

Lua

Lua is a powerful light-weight programming language designed for extending applications. It is also frequently used as a general-purpose, stand-alone language. It is free software. Lua combines simple procedural syntax with powerful data description constructs based on associative arrays and extensible semantics. It is dynamically typed, interpreted from bytecodes, and has automatic memory management with garbage collection, making it ideal for configuration, scripting, and rapid prototyping. A fundamental concept in the design of Lua is to provide meta-mechanisms for implementing features, instead of providing a host of features directly in the language. For example, although Lua is not a pure object-oriented language, it does provide meta-mechanisms for implementing classes and inheritance. Lua's meta-mechanisms bring an economy of concepts and keep the language small, while allowing the semantics to be extended in unconventional ways. Extensible semantics is a distinguishing feature of Lua. Lua is a language engine that you can embed into your application. This means that, besides syntax and semantics, it has an API that allows the application to exchange data with Lua programs and also to extend Lua with C functions. In this sense, it can be regarded as a language framework for building domain-specific languages. Lua is implemented as a small library of C functions, written in ANSI C, and compiles unmodified in all known platforms. The implementation goals are simplicity, efficiency, portability, and low embedding cost. The result is a fast language engine with small footprint, making it ideal in embedded systems too.

Project Home Page: http://www.lua.org/
Download Location: http://www.lua.org/download.html

Mercury

Mercury is a new logic/functional programming language, which combines the clarity and expressiveness of declarative programming with advanced static analysis and error detection features. Its highly optimized execution algorithm delivers efficiency far in excess of existing logic programming systems, and close to conventional programming systems. Mercury addresses the problems of large-scale program development, allowing modularity, separate compilation, and numerous optimization/time trade-offs.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.mu.oz.au/research/mercury/
Download Location: http://www.cs.mu.oz.au/research/mercury/download/release.html

Mono

Mono provides the necessary software to develop and run .NET client and server applications on Linux, Solaris, Mac OS X, Windows, and Unix. Sponsored by Novell, the Mono open source project has an active and enthusiastic contributing community and is positioned to become the leading choice for development of Linux applications.

Project Home Page: http://www.mono-project.com/Main_Page
Download Location: http://go-mono.com/sources/

MPD

MPD is a variant of the SR programming language. SR has a Pascal-like syntax and uses guarded commands for control statements. MPD has a C-like syntax and C-like control statements. However, the main components of the two languages are the same: resources, globals, operations, procs, procedures, processes, and virtual machines. Moreover, MPD supports the same variety of concurrent programming mechanisms as SR: co statements, semaphores, call/send/forward invocations, and receive and input statements.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.arizona.edu/mpd/
Download Location: http://www.cs.arizona.edu/mpd/download/

Nemerle

Nemerle is a high-level statically-typed programming language for the .NET platform. It offers functional, object-oriented and imperative features. It has a simple C#-like syntax and a powerful meta-programming system. Features that come from the functional land are variants, pattern matching, type inference and parameter polymorphism (aka generics). The meta-programming system allows great compiler extensibility, embedding domain specific languages, partial evaluation and aspect-oriented programming.

Project Home Page: http://nemerle.org/Main_Page
Download Location: http://nemerle.org/Download

Octave

GNU Octave is a high-level language, primarily intended for numerical computations. It provides a convenient command line interface for solving linear and nonlinear problems numerically, and for performing other numerical experiments using a language that is mostly compatible with Matlab. It may also be used as a batch-oriented language. Octave has extensive tools for solving common numerical linear algebra problems, finding the roots of nonlinear equations, integrating ordinary functions, manipulating polynomials, and integrating ordinary differential and differential-algebraic equations. It is easily extensible and customizable via user-defined functions written in Octave's own language, or using dynamically loaded modules written in C++, C, Fortran, or other languages.

Project Home Page: http://www.octave.org/
Download Location: http://www.octave.org/download.html

OO2C (Optimizing Oberon-2 Compiler)

OO2C is an Oberon-2 development platform. It consists of an optimizing compiler, a number of related tools, a set of standard library modules and a reference manual. Oberon-2 is a general-purpose programming language in the tradition of Pascal and Modula-2. Its most important features are block structure, modularity, separate compilation, static typing with strong type checking (also across module boundaries) and type extension with type-bound procedures. Type extension makes Oberon-2 an object-oriented language.

Project Home Page: http://ooc.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/ooc/

Ordered Graph Data Language (OGDL)

OGDL is a structured textual format that represents information in the form of graphs, where the nodes are strings and the arcs or edges are spaces or indentation.

Project Home Page: http://ogdl.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/ogdl/

Pike

Pike is a dynamic programming language with a syntax similar to Java and C. It is simple to learn, does not require long compilation passes and has powerful built-in data types allowing simple and really fast data manipulation. Pike is released under the GNU GPL, GNU LGPL and MPL.

Project Home Page: http://pike.ida.liu.se/
Download Location: http://pike.ida.liu.se/download/pub/pike

Pyrex

Pyrex is a language specially designed for writing Python extension modules. It's designed to bridge the gap between the nice, high-level, easy-to-use world of Python and the messy, low-level world of C. Pyrex lets you write code that mixes Python and C data types any way you want, and compiles it into a C extension for Python.

Project Home Page: http://www.cosc.canterbury.ac.nz/~greg/python/Pyrex/

Q

Q is a functional programming language based on term rewriting. Thus, a Q program or “script” is simply a collection of equations which are used to evaluate expressions in a symbolic fashion. The equations establish algebraic identities and are interpreted as rewriting rules in order to reduce expressions to “normal forms”.

Project Home Page: http://q-lang.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/q-lang/

R

R is a language and environment for statistical computing and graphics. It is a GNU project similar to the S language and environment which was developed at Bell Laboratories (formerly AT&T, now Lucent Technologies) by John Chambers and colleagues. R can be considered as a different implementation of S. There are some important differences, but much code written for S runs unaltered under R. R provides a wide variety of statistical (linear and nonlinear modelling, classical statistical tests, time-series analysis, classification, clustering, ...) and graphical techniques, and is highly extensible. The S language is often the vehicle of choice for research in statistical methodology, and R provides an Open Source route to participation in that activity.

Project Home Page: http://www.r-project.org/
Download Location: http://cran.r-project.org/mirrors.html

Regina Rexx

Regina is a Rexx interpreter that has been ported to most Unix platforms (Linux, FreeBSD, Solaris, AIX, HP-UX, etc.) and also to OS/2, eCS, DOS, Win9x/Me/NT/2k/XP, Amiga, AROS, QNX4.x, QNX6.x BeOS, MacOS X, EPOC32, AtheOS, OpenVMS, SkyOS and OpenEdition. Rexx is a programming language that was designed to be easy to use for inexperienced programmers yet powerful enough for experienced users. It is also a language ideally suited as a macro language for other applications.

Project Home Page: http://regina-rexx.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/regina-rexx

Serp

Serp is an open source framework for manipulating Java bytecode. The goal of the Serp bytecode framework is to tap the full power of bytecode modification while lowering its associated costs. The framework provides a set of high-level APIs for manipulating all aspects of bytecode, from large-scale structures like class member fields to the individual instructions that comprise the code of methods. While in order to perform any advanced manipulation, some understanding of the class file format and especially of the JVM instruction set is necessary, the framework makes it as easy as possible to enter the world of bytecode development.

Project Home Page: http://serp.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://serp.sourceforge.net/files/

Small Device C Compiler (SDCC)

SDCC is a Freeware, retargetable, optimizing ANSI-C compiler that targets the Intel 8051, Maxim 80DS390 and the Zilog Z80 based MCUs. Work is in progress on supporting the Motorola 68HC08 as well as Microchip PIC16 and PIC18 series. The entire source code for the compiler is distributed under GPL.

Project Home Page: http://sdcc.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://sdcc.sourceforge.net/snap.php#Source

SmartEiffel (The GNU Eiffel Compiler)

SmartEiffel claims to be “the fastest and the slimmest multi-platform Eiffel compiler on Earth”. Eiffel is an object-oriented programming language which emphasizes the production of robust software. Its syntax is keyword-oriented in the ALGOL and Pascal tradition. Eiffel is strongly statically typed, with automatic memory management (typically implemented by garbage collection). Distinguishing characteristics of Eiffel include Design by contract (DbC), liberal use of inheritance including multiple inheritance, a type system handling both value and reference semantics, and generic classes. Eiffel has a unified type system—all types in Eiffel are classes, so it is possible to create subclasses of the basic classes such as INTEGER. Eiffel has operator overloading, including the ability to define new operators, but does not have method overloading.

Project Home Page: http://smarteiffel.loria.fr/
Download Location: ftp://ftp.loria.fr/pub/loria/SmartEiffel/

Squeak

Squeak is an open, highly-portable Smalltalk implementation whose virtual machine is written entirely in Smalltalk, making it easy to debug, analyze, and change. To achieve practical performance, a translator produces an equivalent C program whose performance is comparable to commercial Smalltalks. Other noteworthy aspects of Squeak include: real-time sound and music synthesis written entirely in Smalltalk, extensions of BitBlt to handle color of any depth and anti-aliased image rotation and scaling, network access support that allows simple construction of servers and other useful facilities, it runs bit-identical on many platforms (Windows, Mac, Unix, and others), a compact object format that typically requires only a single word of overhead per object and a simple yet efficient incremental garbage collector for 32-bit direct pointers efficient bulk-mutation of objects.

Project Home Page: http://www.squeak.org/
Download Location: http://www.squeak.org/Download/

SR (Synchronizing Resources)

SR is a language for writing concurrent programs. The main language constructs are resources and operations. Resources encapsulate processes and variables they share; operations provide the primary mechanism for process interaction. SR provides a novel integration of the mechanisms for invoking and servicing operations. Consequently, all of local and remote procedure call, rendezvous, message passing, dynamic process creation, multicast, and semaphores are supported. SR also supports shared global variables and operations.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.arizona.edu/sr/index.html
Download Location: ftp://ftp.cs.arizona.edu/sr/

Standard ML

Standard ML is a safe, modular, strict, functional, polymorphic programming language with compile-time type checking and type inference, garbage collection, exception handling, immutable data types and updatable references, abstract data types, and parametric modules. It has efficient implementations and a formal definition with a proof of soundness. There are many implementations of Standard ML, among them:

ML Kit: http://www.it-c.dk/research/mlkit/
MLton: http://mlton.org/
Moscow ML: http://www.dina.kvl.dk/~sestoft/mosml.html
Poly/ML: http://www.polyml.org/
Standard ML of New Jersey: http://www.smlnj.org/

Steel Bank Common Lisp (SBCL)

SBCL is an open source (free software) compiler and runtime system for ANSI Common Lisp. It provides an interactive environment including an integrated native compiler, a debugger, and many extensions. SBCL runs on a number of platforms.

Project Home Page: http://www.sbcl.org/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/sbcl/

Tiny C Compiler (TCC)

Tiny C Compiler is a small C compiler that can be used to compile and execute C code everywhere, for example on rescue disks (about 100KB for x86 TCC executable, including C preprocessor, C compiler, assembler and linker). TCC is fast. It generates optimized x86 code, has no byte code overhead and compiles, assembles and links several times faster than GCC. TCC is versatile, any C dynamic library can be used directly. It is heading toward full ISOC99 compliance and can compile itself. The compiler is safe as it includes an optional memory and bound checker. Bound checked code can be mixed freely with standard code. TCC compiles and executes C source directly. No linking or assembly necessary. A full C preprocessor and GNU-like assembler is included. It is C script supported; just add “#!/usr/local/bin/tcc -run” on the first line of your C source, and execute it directly from the command line. With libtcc, you can use TCC as a backend for dynamic code generation.

Project Home Page: http://www.tinycc.org/
Download Location: http://fabrice.bellard.free.fr/tcc/

TinyCOBOL

TinyCOBOL is a COBOL compiler being developed by members of the free software community. The mission is to produce a COBOL compiler based on the COBOL 85 standards. TinyCOBOL is available for the Intel architecture (IA32) and compatible processors on the following platforms: BeOS, FreeBSD, Linux and MinGW on Windows.

Project Home Page: http://tinycobol.org/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/tiny-cobol/

Yorick

Yorick is an interpreted programming language, designed for postprocessing or steering large scientific simulation codes. Smaller scientific simulations or calculations, such as the flow past an airfoil or the motion of a drumhead, can be written as standalone yorick programs. The language features a compact syntax for many common array operations, so it processes large arrays of numbers very efficiently. Unlike most interpreters, which are several hundred times slower than compiled code for number crunching, Yorick can approach to within a factor of four or five of compiled speed for many common tasks. Superficially, Yorick code resembles C code, but Yorick variables are never explicitly declared and have a dynamic scoping similar to many Lisp dialects. The “unofficial” home page for Yorick can be found at http://www.maumae.net/yorick.

Project Home Page: ftp://ftp-icf.llnl.gov/pub/Yorick/doc/index.html
Download Location: ftp://ftp-icf.llnl.gov/pub/Yorick/doc/download.html

ZPL

ZPL is an array programming language designed from first principles for fast execution on both sequential and parallel computers. It provides a convenient high-level programming medium for supercomputers and large-scale clusters with efficiency comparable to hand-coded message passing. It is the perfect alternative to using a sequential language like C or Fortran and a message passing library like MPI.

Project Home Page: http://www.cs.washington.edu/research/zpl/home/index.html
Download Location: http://www.cs.washington.edu/research/zpl/download/download.html

Programming Libraries and Bindings

Boost

Boost provides free peer-reviewed portable C++ source libraries. The emphasis is on libraries which work well with the C++ Standard Library. The libraries are intended to be widely useful, and are in regular use by thousands of programmers across a broad spectrum of applications, platforms and programming environments.

Project Home Page: http://www.boost.org/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/boost/

Byte Code Engineering Library (BCEL)

BECL is intended to give users a convenient possibility to analyze, create, and manipulate (binary) Java class files (those ending with .class). Classes are represented by objects which contain all the symbolic information of the given class: methods, fields and byte code instructions, in particular. Such objects can be read from an existing file, be transformed by a program (e.g., a class loader at run-time) and dumped to a file again. An even more interesting application is the creation of classes from scratch at run-time. The Byte Code Engineering Library may be also useful if you want to learn about the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) and the format of Java .class files. BCEL is already being used successfully in several projects such as compilers, optimizers, obsfuscators, code generators and analysis tools.

Project Home Page: http://jakarta.apache.org/bcel/index.html
Download Location: http://jakarta.apache.org/site/downloads/downloads_bcel.cgi/

Choco

Choco is a Java library for constraint satisfaction problems (CSP), constraint programming (CP) and explanation-based constraint solving (e-CP). It is built on a event-based propagation mechanism with backtrackable structures.

Project Home Page: http://choco.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://choco.sourceforge.net/download.html

FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West)

FFTW is a C subroutine library for computing the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) in one or more dimensions, of arbitrary input size, and of both real and complex data (as well as of even/odd data, i.e., the discrete cosine/sine transforms or DCT/DST).

Project Home Page: http://www.fftw.org/
Download Location: http://www.fftw.org/download.html

GOB (GObject Builder)

GOB (GOB2 anyway) is a preprocessor for making GObjects with inline C code so that generated files are not edited. Syntax is inspired by Java and Yacc or Lex. The implementation is intentionally kept simple, and no C actual code parsing is done.

Project Home Page: http://www.5z.com/jirka/gob.html
Download Location: http://ftp.5z.com/pub/gob/

GTK+/GNOME Language Bindings (wrappers)

GTK+/GNOME language bindings allow GTK+ to be used from other programming languages, in the style of those languages.

Project Home Page: http://www.gtk.org/bindings.html

gtkmm

gtkmm is the official C++ interface for the popular GUI library GTK+. Highlights include typesafe callbacks, widgets extensible via inheritance and a comprehensive set of widgets. You can create user interfaces either in code or with the Glade designer, using libglademm.

Project Home Page: http://www.gtkmm.org/
Download Location: http://www.gtkmm.org/download.shtml

Java-GNOME

Java-GNOME is a set of Java bindings for the GNOME and GTK+ libraries that allow GNOME and GTK+ applications to be written in Java. The Java-GNOME API has been carefully designed to be easy to use, maintaining a good OO paradigm, yet still wrapping the entire functionality of the underlying libraries. Java-GNOME can be used with the Eclipse development environment and Glade user interface designer to create applications with ease.

Project Home Page: http://java-gnome.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/bin/view
Download Location: http://java-gnome.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/bin/view/Main/GetJavaGnome#Source_Code

gtk2-perl

gtk2-perl is the collective name for a set of perl bindings for GTK+ 2.x and various related libraries. These modules make it easy to write GTK and GNOME applications using a natural, perlish, object-oriented syntax.

Project Home Page: http://gtk2-perl.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/gtk2-perl

PyGTK

PyGTK provides a convenient wrapper for the GTK library for use in Python programs, and takes care of many of the boring details such as managing memory and type casting. When combined with PyORBit and gnome-python, it can be used to write full featured GNOME applications.

Project Home Page: http://www.pygtk.org/
Download Location: http://www.pygtk.org/downloads.html

KDE Language Bindings

KDE and most KDE applications are implemented using the C++ programming language, however there are number of bindings to other languages are available. These include scripting languages like Perl, Python and Ruby, and systems programming languages such as Java and C#.

Project Home Page: http://developer.kde.org/language-bindings/

Numerical Python (Numpy)

Numerical Python adds a fast array facility to the Python language.

Project Home Page: http://numeric.scipy.org/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/numpy/

Perl Scripts and Additional Modules

There are many Perl scripts and additional modules located on the Comprehensive Perl Archive Network (CPAN) web site. Here you will find “All Things Perl”.

Project Home Page: http://cpan.org/

SWIG

SWIG is a software development tool that connects programs written in C and C++ with a variety of high-level programming languages. SWIG is used with different types of languages including common scripting languages such as Perl, Python, Tcl/Tk and Ruby. The list of supported languages also includes non-scripting languages such as C#, Common Lisp (Allegro CL), Java, Modula-3 and OCAML. Also several interpreted and compiled Scheme implementations (Chicken, Guile, MzScheme) are supported. SWIG is most commonly used to create high-level interpreted or compiled programming environments, user interfaces, and as a tool for testing and prototyping C/C++ software. SWIG can also export its parse tree in the form of XML and Lisp s-expressions.

Project Home Page: http://www.swig.org/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/swig/

Integrated Development Environments

A-A-P

A-A-P makes it easy to locate, download, build and install software. It also supports browsing source code, developing programs, managing different versions and distribution of software and documentation. This means that A-A-P is useful both for users and for developers.

Project Home Page: http://www.a-a-p.org/index.html
Download Location: http://www.a-a-p.org/download.html

Anjuta

Anujuta is a versatile Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for C and C++ on GNU/Linux. It has been written for GTK/GNOME and features a number of advanced programming facilities. These include project management, application wizards, an on-board interactive debugger, and a powerful source editor with source browsing and syntax highlighting.

Project Home Page: http://www.anjuta.org/
Download Location: http://www.anjuta.org/downloads

Eclipse

Eclipse is an open source community whose projects are focused on providing an extensible development platform and application frameworks for building software. Eclipse contains many projects, including an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for Java.

Project Home Page: http://www.eclipse.org/
Download Location: http://www.eclipse.org/downloads/

Mozart

The Mozart Programming System is an advanced development platform for intelligent, distributed applications. Mozart is based on the Oz language, which supports declarative programming, object-oriented programming, constraint programming, and concurrency as part of a coherent whole. For distribution, Mozart provides a true network transparent implementation with support for network awareness, openness, and fault tolerance. Security is upcoming. It is an ideal platform for both general-purpose distributed applications as well as for hard problems requiring sophisticated optimization and inferencing abilities.

Project Home Page: http://www.mozart-oz.org/
Download Location: http://www.mozart-oz.org/download/view.cgi

Other Development Tools

cachecc1

cachecc1 is a GCC cache. It can be compared with the well known ccache package. It has some unique features including the use of an LD_PRELOADed shared object to catch invocations to cc1, cc1plus and as, it transparently supports all build methods, it can cache GCC bootstraps and it can be combined with distcc to transparently distribute compilations.

Project Home Page: http://cachecc1.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/cachecc1

ccache

ccache is a compiler cache. It acts as a caching pre-processor to C/C++ compilers, using the -E compiler switch and a hash to detect when a compilation can be satisfied from cache. This often results in 5 to 10 times faster speeds in common compilations.

Project Home Page: http://ccache.samba.org/
Download Location: http://samba.org/ftp/ccache/

DDD (GNU Data Display Debugger)

GNU DDD is a graphical front-end for command-line debuggers such as GDB, DBX, WDB, Ladebug, JDB, XDB, the Perl debugger, the Bash debugger, or the Python debugger. Besides “usual” front-end features such as viewing source texts, DDD has an interactive graphical data display, where data structures are displayed as graphs..

Project Home Page: http://www.gnu.org/software/ddd/
Download Location: http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/ddd/

distcc

distcc is a program to distribute builds of C, C++, Objective C or Objective C++ code across several machines on a network. distcc should always generate the same results as a local build, is simple to install and use, and is usually much faster than a local compile. distcc does not require all machines to share a filesystem, have synchronized clocks, or to have the same libraries or header files installed. They can even have different processors or operating systems, if cross-compilers are installed.

Project Home Page: http://distcc.samba.org/
Download Location: http://distcc.samba.org/download.html

Exuberant Ctags

Exuberant Ctags generates an index (or tag) file of language objects found in source files that allows these items to be quickly and easily located by a text editor or other utility. A tag signifies a language object for which an index entry is available (or, alternatively, the index entry created for that object). Tag generation is supported for the following languages: Assembler, AWK, ASP, BETA, Bourne/Korn/Zsh Shell, C, C++, COBOL, Eiffel, Fortran, Java, Lisp, Lua, Make, Pascal, Perl, PHP, Python, REXX, Ruby, S-Lang, Scheme, Tcl, Vim, and YACC. A list of editors and tools utilizing tag files may be found at http://ctags.sourceforge.net/tools.html.

Project Home Page: http://ctags.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/ctags/

GDB (GNU Debugger)

GDB is the GNU Project debugger. It allows you to see what is going on “inside” another program while it executes. It also allows you to see what another program was doing at the moment it crashed.

Project Home Page: http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/
Download Location: ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gdb/

User Notes and Installation Instructions: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/OtherProgrammingTools

gocache (GNU Object Cache)

ccache is a clone of ccache, with the goal of supporting compilers other than GCC and adding additional features. Embedded compilers will especially be in focus.

Project Home Page: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gocache/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/gocache/

OProfile

OProfile is a system-wide profiler for Linux systems, capable of profiling all running code at low overhead. OProfile is released under the GNU GPL. It consists of a kernel driver and a daemon for collecting sample data, and several post-profiling tools for turning data into information. OProfile leverages the hardware performance counters of the CPU to enable profiling of a wide variety of interesting statistics, which can also be used for basic time-spent profiling. All code is profiled: hardware and software interrupt handlers, kernel modules, the kernel, shared libraries, and applications. OProfile is currently in alpha status; however it has proven stable over a large number of differing configurations. It is being used on machines ranging from laptops to 16-way NUMA-Q boxes.

Project Home Page: http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/news/
Download Location: http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/download/

SCons

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool, i.e, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic make utility with integrated functionality similar to Autoconf/Automake and compiler caches such as ccache.

Project Home Page: http://scons.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/scons/

strace

strace is a system call tracer, i.e., a debugging tool which prints out a trace of all the system calls made by another process or program.

Project Home Page: http://www.liacs.nl/~wichert/strace/
Download Location: http://downloads.sourceforge.net/strace/

Valgrind

Valgrind is a collection of five tools: two memory error detectors, a thread error detector, a cache profiler and a heap profiler used for debugging and profiling Linux programs. Features include automatic detection of many memory management and threading bugs as well as detailed profiling to speed up and reduce memory use of your programs.

Project Home Page: http://valgrind.org/
Download Location: http://valgrind.org/downloads/source_code.html

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Part IV. Basic Networking

Chapter 13. Connecting to a Network

The LFS book covers setting up networking by connecting to a LAN with a static IP address. There are other methods used to obtain an IP address and connect to a LAN and other networks (such as the Internet). The most popular methods (DHCP and PPP) are covered in this chapter.

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used by many sites to automatically provide information such as IP addresses, subnet masks and routing information to computers. If your network uses DHCP, you will need a DHCP client in order to connect to it.

PPP stands for Potint-to-Point Protocol. It is data link protocol commonly used for establishing an authenticated IP connections over a phone line with a modem, or over radio waves with a cellular phone. There is also a variant (PPPoE) that works over Ethernet and is used by cable providers to authenticate the Internet connections.

PPP-2.4.4

Introduction to PPP

The PPP package contains the pppd daemon and the chat program. This is used for connecting to other machines; often for connecting to the Internet via a dial-up or PPPoE connection to an ISP.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://samba.org/ftp/ppp/ppp-2.4.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/ppp-2.4.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 183800762e266132218b204dfb428d29
Download size: 673 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

PPP Dependencies

Optional

libpcap-0.9.6 (needed to do PPP filtering), Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 (to authenticate incoming calls using PAM), and Linux ATM (to build the pppoatm.so plugin)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/PPP

Installation of PPP

Note

PPP support (CONFIG_PPP), the asynchronous line discipline (CONFIG_PPP_ASYNC), the driver for your serial port device and/or the PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) protocol driver (CONGIG_PPPOE) must be compiled into the kernel or loaded as kernel modules. Udev doesn't load the ppp_generic and pppoe modules automatically, they must be mentioned in the /etc/sysconfig/modules file.

Create (as root) the group for users who may run PPP:

groupadd -g 52 pppusers

Install PPP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-etcppp &&
install -d /etc/ppp/peers &&
install -m755 scripts/{pon,poff,plog} /usr/bin &&
install -m644 scripts/pon.1 /usr/share/man/man1

Command Explanations

make install-etcppp: This command puts example configuration files in /etc/ppp.

install -d /etc/ppp/peers: This command creates a directory for PPP peer description files.

USE_PAM=y: Add this argument to the make command to compile in support for PAM, usually needed for authenticating inbound calls against a central database.

HAVE_INET6=y: Add this argument to the make command to compile in support for IPv6.

CBCP=y: Add this argument to the make command to compile in support for Microsoft proprietary Callback Control Protocol.

Configuring PPP

Config Files

/etc/ppp/*

Configuration Information

The PPP daemon requires some configuration. The main trick is scripting the connection. For dialup and GPRS connections, this can be done either using the chat program which comes with this package, or by using external tools such as WvDial or KPPP from kdenetwork-3.5.9. The text below explains how to set up dialup and GPRS and PPPoE connections using only tools provided with the PPP package. All configuration steps in this section are executed as root user.

Add the users who may run PPP to the pppusers group:

usermod -a -G pppusers <username>

Setting the passwords

Warning

Instructions in this section result in your password appearing on the screen in a visible clear-text form. Make sure that nobody else looks at the screen.

Passwords are stored in /etc/ppp/pap-secrets and /etc/ppp/chap-secrets files, depending on the authentication method used by the ISP. If in doubt, place the password into both files. E.g., if the username given by the ISP is “jdoe”, the password is “guessit”, the ISP uses PAP and the user wants to name this account “dialup” in order to distinguish it from other PPP accounts, the following file has to be created:

touch /etc/ppp/pap-secrets
chmod 600 /etc/ppp/pap-secrets
cat >>/etc/ppp/pap-secrets <<"EOF"
# username      remotename    password        IP for the peer
jdoe            dialup        guessit         *
EOF

DNS Server Configuration

If you don't run your own caching DNS server, create a simple ip-up script (to be called by pppd automatically once the connection is brought up) that populates the /etc/resolv.conf file with nameservers specified by the ISP.

cat >/etc/ppp/ip-up <<"EOF"
#!/bin/sh
if [ "$USEPEERDNS" = "1" ] && [ -s /etc/ppp/resolv.conf ]
then
        install -m 644 /etc/ppp/resolv.conf /etc/resolv.conf
fi
EOF
chmod 755 /etc/ppp/ip-up

If you use a caching DNS server such as BIND-9.4.1-P1 or Pdnsd, the script above is wrong for you. In such case, write your own script that tells your caching nameserver to forward queries to upstream DNS servers specified in the $DNS1 and $DNS2 environment variables.

Dialup Modem Connection

Dialup connections are established with the help of a modem connected to a computer and the telephone line. The modem dials a telephone number of the ISP's modem, and they exchange data using the signal frequencies 300-4000 Hz. Typical data transfer rate is 40-50 kilobits per second, and the gateway ping time (latency) is up to 300-400 ms. In order to configure the dialup connection, it is required to know the telephone number of the ISP's modem pool, the username and the password.

In order to configure a dialup connection, two files have to be created: a chat script that automates the connection procedure (common for all dialup accounts), and a peer file that provides configuration information about a specific connection to pppd:

cat >/etc/ppp/dialup.chat <<"EOF"
ABORT BUSY ABORT 'NO CARRIER' ABORT VOICE ABORT 'NO DIALTONE'
ABORT 'NO DIAL TONE' ABORT 'NO ANSWER' ABORT DELAYED
ABORT ERROR ABORT BLACKLISTED

TIMEOUT 5
'' AT
# \T is the phone number, passed from /etc/ppp/peers/dialup
OK-+++\dATH0-OK ATD\T
TIMEOUT 75
CONNECT \d\c
EOF

cat >/etc/ppp/peers/dialup <<"EOF"
# Your username at the ISP
user "jdoe"
# What should be in the second column in /etc/ppp/*-secrets
remotename "dialup"
# Replace TTTTTTT with the ISP phone number
connect "/usr/sbin/chat -T TTTTTTT -f /etc/ppp/dialup.chat"

# Specify your modem serial port and speed below
/dev/ttyS0
115200

# The settings below usually don't need to be changed
updetach
noauth
hide-password
debug
lock
defaultroute
noipdefault
usepeerdns
EOF

The first three lines of the /etc/ppp/dialup.chat file abort the script when it receives an indication of an error from the modem. Then the timeout is set to 5 seconds and the script checks that the modem responds to the dummy AT command at all. If not, measures are taken to dewedge it (by interrupting the data transfer and going on hook). Then the telephone number is dialed, and the script waits for the answer for 75 seconds. The serial connection is considered established when the modem sends the string CONNECT.

GPRS and EDGE Connections

GPRS and EDGE connections are established with the help of a cellular phone connected to a computer via serial or USB cable, or using Bluetooth. The phone exchanges data packets with the nearest base station, which can be up to 35 kilometers away. The maximum possible data transfer rate is 170 kilobits per second for GPRS and 474 kilobits per second for EDGE, but many cellular operators impose lower limits, such as 64 kilobits per second. The gateway ping time is 900 ms for GPRS, which makes playing many online games impossible and causes connection to ICQ to be unreliable. In order to configure a GPRS or EDGE connection, it is required to know the access point name (APN) and, rarely, the username and the password. In most cases, billing is based on the telephone number, and the username/password pair is not needed, as assumed in the example below.

In order to configure a GPRS connection, two files have to be created: a chat script that automates the connection procedure (common for all GPRS accounts), and a peer file that provides configuration information about a specific connection to pppd:

cat >/etc/ppp/gprs.chat <<"EOF"
ABORT BUSY ABORT 'NO CARRIER' ABORT VOICE ABORT 'NO DIALTONE'
ABORT 'NO DIAL TONE' ABORT 'NO ANSWER' ABORT DELAYED
ABORT ERROR ABORT BLACKLISTED

TIMEOUT 5
'' AT
OK-+++\dATH0-OK ATZ
# \T is the APN, passed from /etc/ppp/peers/gprs
# This example stores the APN as profile #1 in the phone.
# The "telephone number", *99***<profile_number>#, is always the same.
# If you want to store this as profile #2, change 1 to 2 in the
# following two lines.
OK AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","\T"
OK "ATD*99***1#"
CONNECT \d\c
EOF

cat >/etc/ppp/peers/gprs <<"EOF"
# Replace inet.example.com with the proper APN for your provider
connect "/usr/sbin/chat -T inet.example.com -f /etc/ppp/gprs.chat"

# Specify your cellphone serial port and speed below
# Note: you must manually send some vendor-specific AT commands
# to certain old cellular phones (such as Sony-Ericsson T200)
# in order to achieve connection speed more than 9600 bits ber second.
/dev/ttyS1
115200

# The settings below usually don't need to be changed
noccp
noauth
updetach
debug
lock
defaultroute
noipdefault
usepeerdns
EOF

PPPoE connections

PPPoE connections are established over Ethernet, typically between a computer and an ADSL router (usually installed in the same room) that forwards the packets down the telephone line using frequencies 25-2500 kHz, thus not interfering with voice calls. Although the router can, in theory, forward any Ethernet packet, PPP encapsulation is used for password-based authentication, so that the ISP can limit the bandwidth and charge money according to the chosen tariff. The maximum data transfer rate on ADSL is 24 megabits per second, and the gateway ping time is typically less than 10 ms. In order to configure a PPPoE connection, it is required to know the username, the password, and, sometimes, the service name and/or the access concentrator name.

In order to configure a PPPoE connection, only the peer file has to be created:

cat >/etc/ppp/peers/adsl <<"EOF"
plugin rp-pppoe.so
# Ethernet interface name
eth0
# Your username at the ISP
user "jdoe"
# What should be in the second column in /etc/ppp/*-secrets
remotename "adsl"
# If needed, specify the service and the access concentrator name
# rp_pppoe_service "internet"
# rp_pppoe_ac "ac1"

# The settings below usually don't need to be changed
noauth
hide-password
updetach
debug
defaultroute
noipdefault
usepeerdns
EOF

Establishing the connection manually

In order to establish a PPP connection described by the /etc/ppp/peers/peername file, run, as root or as a member of the pppusers group:

pon peername

In order to tear the connection down, run:

poff peername

Bringing up PPPoE connection at boot time

If your service provider does not charge by the minute, it is usually good to have a bootscript handle the connection for you. You can, of course, choose not to install the following script, and start your connection manually with the pon command, as described above. If you wish your PPPoE connection to be brought up at boot time, run:

make install-service-pppoe

The above command installs the pppoe service script and the /etc/ppp/peers/pppoe file with some settings that make sense for most PPPoE connections. The bootscript calls pppd with the the following options:

pppd call pppoe ${1} linkname ${1} ${PPP_OPTS}

Here “${1}” is the network interface name, “linkname ${1}” is added for creation of the /var/run/ppp-${1}.pid file with the pppd process ID (to be used when bringing the connection down), and the “${PPP_OPTS}” variable contains user-specified options such as “user” and “remotename”.

Now create the config file for use with the pppoe service script:

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/pppoe << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="pppoe"
PPP_OPTS="user jdoe remotename adsl"
EOF

Note

Instead of specifying additional options in the $PPP_OPTS variable, you can also edit the /etc/ppp/peers/pppoe file, but then your configuration will be lost when upgrading BLFS bootscripts.

Installed Programs: chat, pon, poff, plog, pppd, pppdump, pppoe-discovery and pppstats

Installed Libraries: Several plugin modules installed in /usr/lib/pppd/2.4.4

Installed Directories: /etc/ppp, /usr/include/pppd and /usr/lib/pppd

Short Descriptions

chat	defines a conversational exchange between the computer and the modem. Its primary purpose is to establish the connection between the Point-to-Point Protocol Daemon (PPPD) and the remote pppd process.
pon	is the script that establishes a PPP connection
poff	is the script that tears a PPP connection down.
plog	is a script that prints the tail of the PPP log.
pppd	is the Point to Point Protocol daemon.
pppdump	is used to convert PPP record files to a readable format.
pppstats	is used to print PPP statistics.

Last updated on 2008-06-09 09:48:57 -0500

dhcpcd-3.0.19

Introduction to dhcpcd

dhcpcd is an implementation of the DHCP client specified in RFC2131. This is useful for connecting your computer to a network which uses DHCP to assign network addresses.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://download.berlios.de/dhcpcd/dhcpcd-3.0.19.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/gentoo/distfiles/dhcpcd-3.0.19.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 90d6df62d663bdea65d5905023377b39
Download size: 32.5 KB
Estimated disk space required: 0.3 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dhcpcd

Installation of dhcpcd

Install dhcpcd by running the following commands:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring dhcpcd

Config Files

/etc/dhcpcd.sh

Configuration Information

To configure dhcpcd, you need to first install the network service script, /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/services/dhcpcd included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package (as user root):

make install-service-dhcpcd

Whenever dhcpcd configures or shuts down a network interface, it executes the script /etc/dhcpcd.sh. This script can be customized to perform additional actions for the network interface. See the man page of dhcpcd for more details. An example file is shipped in the tarball which can be used to send the interface details to syslog.

Finally, as the root user create the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhcpcd configuration file using the following commands. Adjust appropriately for additional interfaces:

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhcpcd << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="dhcpcd"
DHCP_START="<insert appropriate start options here>"
DHCP_STOP="-k <insert additional stop options here>"

# Set PRINTIP="yes" to have the script print
# the DHCP assigned IP address
PRINTIP="no"

# Set PRINTALL="yes" to print the DHCP assigned values for
# IP, SM, DG, and 1st NS. This requires PRINTIP="yes".
PRINTALL="no"
EOF

For more information on the appropriate DHCP_START and DHCP_STOP values, examine the man page for dhcpcd.

Note

The default behavior of dhcpcd is to overwrite (after making backup copies) /etc/resolv.conf, /etc/yp.conf and /etc/ntp.conf with new files containing information from the DHCP server. If this is undesirable, review the dhcpcd man page for switches to add to the DHCP_START value.

Installed Program: dhcpcd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: None

Short Descriptions

dhcpcd

is an implementation of the DHCP client specified in RFC2131 (when -r option is not specified) and RFC1541 (when -r option is specified).

Last updated on 2008-03-18 10:49:58 -0500

DHCP-3.0.6 Client Configuration

The DHCP package comes with both a client (dhclient) and a server program for using DHCP. If you want to install this package, the instructions can be found at DHCP-3.0.6. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links provided for the server daemon. You only need to run the DHCP server if you're providing this service to a network, and it's likely that you'll know if that's the case; if it isn't, don't run the server! Once you have installed the package, return here for information on how to configure the client (dhclient).

Configuring DHCP Client

To configure dhclient, you need to first install the network service script, /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/services/dhclient included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package (as root):

make install-service-dhclient

Next, create the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhclient configuration file with the following commands as the root user. Adjust as necessary for additional interfaces:

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhclient << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="dhclient"
DHCP_START="-q <add additional start parameters here>"
DHCP_STOP="-q -r <add additional stop parameters here>"

# Set PRINTIP="yes" to have the script print
# the DHCP assigned IP address
PRINTIP="no"

# Set PRINTALL="yes" to print the DHCP assigned values for
# IP, SM, DG, and 1st NS. This requires PRINTIP="yes".
PRINTALL="no"
EOF

For more information on the appropriate DHCP_START and DHCP_STOP values, examine the man page for dhclient.

Finally, you should create the /etc/dhclient.conf file using the following commands as the root user:

Note

You'll need to add a second interface definition to the file if you have more than one interface.

cat > /etc/dhclient.conf << "EOF"
# dhclient.conf

interface "eth0"{
prepend domain-name-servers 127.0.0.1;
request subnet-mask, broadcast-address, time-offset, routers,
        domain-name, domain-name-servers, host-name;
require subnet-mask, domain-name-servers;
}
# end dhclient.conf
EOF

Last updated on 2008-04-11 13:53:54 -0500

Chapter 14. Networking Libraries

These applications are support libraries for other applications in the book. It is unlikely that you would just install these libraries, you will generally find that you will be referred to this chapter to satisfy a dependency of other applications.

cURL-7.16.3

Introduction to cURL

The cURL package contains curl and its support library. This is useful for transferring files with URL syntax. This ability to both download and redirect files can be incorporated into other programs to support functions like streaming media.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://curl.haxx.se/download/curl-7.16.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://gd.tuwien.ac.at/utils/archivers/curl/curl-7.16.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ed55dfa8946ad53f245fae5db3a9d0ca
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 33 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU (additional 0.9 SBU to run the test suite)

cURL Dependencies

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, OpenSSL-0.9.8g or GnuTLS-1.6.3, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, libidn-0.6.14, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1, krb4, SPNEGO, and c-ares

Optional for Running the Test Suite

Stunnel-4.21 (for the HTTPS and FTPS tests)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/curl

Installation of cURL

Install cURL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that if you have Stunnel and TCP Wrapper installed and you wish to perform the HTTPS tests, you'll need to have an unrestrictive /etc/hosts.deny file.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
find docs -name "Makefile*" -o -name "*.1" -o -name "*.3" | xargs rm &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/curl-7.16.3 &&
cp -v -R docs/* /usr/share/doc/curl-7.16.3

Command Explanations

--with-gssapi: This parameter adds Kerberos 5 support to libcurl.

find docs -name "Makefile*" -o -name "*.1" -o -name "*.3" | xargs rm: This command removes man files from the source tree that have already been installed by the make install command.

Installed Programs: curl and curl-config

Installed Library: libcurl.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/curl, /usr/share/curl and /usr/share/doc/curl-7.16.3

Short Descriptions

curl	is a client that can get documents from or send documents to any of the following protocols: HTTP, HTTPS (needs OpenSSL-0.9.8g), FTP, GOPHER, DICT, TELNET, LDAP (needs OpenLDAP-2.3.39 at run time) or FILE.
curl-config	prints information about the last compile, like libraries linked to and prefix setting.
`libcurl.{so,a}`	provides the API functions required by curl and other programs.

Last updated on 2007-08-16 17:34:29 -0500

GNet-2.0.7

Introduction to GNet

The GNet package contains a simple network library. This is useful for supporting TCP sockets, UDP and IP multicast, asynchronous DNS lookup, and more.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gnetlibrary.org/src/gnet-2.0.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 3a7a40411775688fe4c42141ab007048
Download size: 595 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNet Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 or GLib-2.12.12

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnet

Installation of GNet

Install GNet by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgnet-2.0.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gnet-2.0, /usr/lib/gnet-2.0 and /usr/share/doc/libgnet2.0-dev or /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gnet

Short Descriptions

libgnet-2.0.{so,a}

is a simple network library written in C. It is object-oriented and built upon GLib. It is intended to be easy to use and port.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libsoup-2.2.100

Introduction to libsoup

The libsoup package contains an HTTP library implementation in C. This is useful for accessing HTTP servers in a completely asynchronous mode.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libsoup/2.2/libsoup-2.2.100.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libsoup/2.2/libsoup-2.2.100.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 936e29d705aab0483b9a5b8860f68c13
Download size: 508 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

libsoup Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8, Apache-2.2.8 (required to run the test suite), PHP-5.2.3 compiled with XMLRPC-EPI support (only used for the XMLRPC regression tests), and GnuTLS-1.6.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libsoup

Installation of libsoup

Install libsoup by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libsoup-2.2.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libsoup-2.2 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libsoup

Short Descriptions

libsoup-2.2.{so,a}

provides functions for asynchronous HTTP connections.

Last updated on 2007-08-16 17:34:29 -0500

libpcap-0.9.6

Introduction to libpcap

libpcap provides functions for user-level packet capture, used in low-level network monitoring.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/l/libpcap-0.9.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libpcap-0.9.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 2e1b5e983654c1d5991450e3e0e525ca
Download size: 438 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

libpcap Dependencies

Optional

Software distribution for the DAG and Septel range of passive network monitoring cards.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libpcap

Installation of libpcap

Install libpcap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libpcap-0.9.6 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/libpcap-0.9.6

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libpcap.a

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libpcap-0.9.6

Short Descriptions

libpcap.a

is a library used for user-level packet capture.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 12:50:26 -0500

Chapter 15. Text Web Browsers

People who are new to Unix-based systems tend to ask the question "Why on earth would I want a text-mode browser? I'm going to compile X and use Konqueror/Mozilla/Whatever!". Those who have been around systems for a while know that when (not if) you manage to mess up your graphical browser install and you need to look up some information on the web, a console based browser will save you. Also, there are quite a few people who prefer to use one of these browsers as their principle method of browsing; either to avoid the clutter and bandwidth which accompanies images or because they may use a text-to-speech synthesizer which can read the page to them (of use for instance to partially sighted or blind users). In this chapter you will find installation instructions for three console web browsers:

Links-2.1pre33

Introduction to Links

Links is a text and graphics mode WWW browser. It includes support for rendering tables and frames, features background downloads, can display colors and has many other features.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://links.twibright.com/download/links-2.1pre33.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/links-2.1pre33.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8c4bc1ebbf4962d290df8218bfc21413
Download size: 4.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended patch: ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/links-2.1pre33-utf8.diff.bz2

Do I Need the Patch?

In text mode, unpatched Links cannot be configured to use UTF-8 or other multibyte encodings for the terminal input/output. This limitation renders Links useless as a text-based browser in multibyte locales. See general discussion of this type of issue in the Needed Encoding Not a Valid Option section on the Locale Related Issues page.

The patch adds the “UTF-8 I/O” configuration option. With this option enabled, Links first renders the page using an 8-bit character set configured by the user, and then converts from this character set to UTF-8. The opposite conversion is applied to user input. This approach works if there is an 8-bit character set that contains all the characters that the user considers to be important. Such character set does not exist, e.g., for Chinese hieroglyphs, or when it is required to display both Cyrillic and Greek characters.

Do I Have to Enable Graphics Support?

In graphical mode, Links displays text correctly even in UTF-8 locales, if all characters exist in the built-in font used by Links. This font contains Basic Latin, Latin-1 Supplement (without superscripts and vulgar fractions), Latin Extended-A, Latin Extended-B (partially), Greek, Cyrillic and Hebrew characters. Form submission in non-ISO-8859-1 locales is handled correctly when running in X11-based graphical mode. Input handlers for other graphics drivers (fb, directfb, svgalib) either misinterpret non-ASCII characters, or don't allow them at all.

The patch has no effect on Links behavior in graphical mode.

Links Dependencies

Optional

Support for graphical mode requires at least one of GPM-1.20.1 (to be used with a framebuffer-based console), SVGAlib, DirectFB, and X Window System

For decoding various image formats Links can utilize libpng-1.2.29, libjpeg-6b, and LibTIFF-3.8.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/LinksBrowser

Installation of Links

If desired, apply the patch:

bzcat ../links-2.1pre33-utf8.diff.bz2 | patch -p1 &&
cd intl &&
./gen-intl && ./synclang &&
cd ..

Install Links by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/links-2.1pre33 &&
install -v -m644 doc/links_cal/* KEYS BRAILLE_HOWTO \
    /usr/share/doc/links-2.1pre33

Command Explanations

./gen-intl && ./synclang: These commands regenerate the language table.

--enable-graphics: This switch enables support for graphics mode.

Configuring Links

Config Files

~/.links/*

Configuration Information

Links stores its configuration in per-user files in the ~/.links directory. These files are created automatically when links is run for the first time.

For the correct display of non-ASCII characters, Links has to be configured through the menu (accessible by pressing the ESC key), as follows:

If running Links in the text mode in a UTF-8 based locale, go to the “Setup > Terminal options” menu item and check the “UTF-8 I/O” box.
If running Links in the text mode, go to the “Setup > Character set” menu item and select the character set that matches your locale or, if you use UTF-8 based locale, the character set that contains all characters that you want Links to be able to display.
Optionally, go to the “Setup > Language” menu and select the user interface language.
Finally, select the “Setup > Save options” menu item.

Installed Program: links

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/links-2.1pre33

Short Descriptions

links

is a text and graphics mode WWW browser.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Lynx-2.8.6rel.5

Introduction to Lynx

Lynx is a text based web browser.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://lynx.isc.org/current/lynx2.8.6rel.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://lynx.isc.org/current/lynx2.8.6rel.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: bd44c57d28fd3e4c9db1cd492d403600
Download size: 2.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 26 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

Lynx Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g or GnuTLS-1.6.3 (experimental), Zip-2.32, UnZip-5.52, an MTA (that provides a sendmail command), and sharutils (for a uudecode program)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Lynx

Installation of Lynx

Install Lynx by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/lynx \
            --datadir=/usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.6rel.5 \
            --with-zlib \
            --with-bzlib \
            --with-screen=ncursesw \
            --enable-locale-charset &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install-full &&
chgrp -v -R root /usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.6rel.5/lynx_doc

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/lynx: This parameter is used so that the configuration files are located in /etc/lynx instead of /usr/etc.

--datadir=/usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.6rel.5: This parameter is used so that the documentation files are installed into /usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.6rel.5 instead of /usr/share/lynx_{doc,help}.

--with-zlib: This enables support for linking libz into Lynx.

--with-bzlib: This enables support for linking libbz2 into Lynx.

--with-screen=ncursesw: This switch enables the use of advanced wide-character support present in the system NCurses library. This is needed for proper display of characters and line wrapping in multibyte locales.

--enable-locale-charset: This switch allows Lynx to deduce the proper character encoding for terminal output from the current locale. A configuration step is still needed (see below), but unlike the situation without this switch, the configuration step becomes the same for all users (without the switch one must specify the display character set explicitly). This is important for environments such as a LiveCD, where the amount of system-specific configuration steps has to be reduced to the minimum.

--enable-nls: This switch allows Lynx to print translated messages (such as questions about cookies and SSL certificates).

--with-ssl: This enables support for linking SSL into Lynx.

--with-gnutls: This enables experimental support for linking GnuTLS into Lynx.

make install-full: In addition to the standard installation, this target installs the documentation and help files.

chgrp -v -R root /usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.6rel.5/lynx_doc: This command corrects the improper group ownership of installed documentation files.

Configuring Lynx

Config Files

/etc/lynx/lynx.cfg

Configuration Information

The proper way to get the display character set is to examine the current locale. However, Lynx does not do this by default. Change this setting:

sed -i 's/#\(LOCALE_CHARSET\):FALSE/\1:TRUE/' /etc/lynx/lynx.cfg

The built-in editor in Lynx Breaks Multibyte Characters. This issue manifests itself in multibyte locales, e.g., as the Backspace key not erasing non-ASCII characters properly, and as incorrect data being sent to the network when one edits the contents of text areas. The only solution to this problem is to configure Lynx to use an external editor (bound to the “Ctrl+X e” key combination by default):

sed -i 's/#\(DEFAULT_EDITOR\):/\1:vi/' /etc/lynx/lynx.cfg

Lynx handles the following values of the DEFAULT_EDITOR option specially by adding cursor-positioning arguments: “emacs”, “jed”, “jmacs”, “joe”, “jove”, “jpico”, “jstar”, “pico”, “rjoe”, “vi” (but not “vim”: in order to position the cursor in Vim-7.1, set this option to “vi”).

By default, Lynx doesn't save cookies between sessions. Change this setting:

sed -i 's/#\(PERSISTENT_COOKIES\):FALSE/\1:TRUE/' /etc/lynx/lynx.cfg

Many other system-wide settings such as proxies can also be set in the /etc/lynx/lynx.cfg file.

Installed Program: lynx

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/lynx and /usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.6rel.5

Short Descriptions

lynx

is a general purpose, text-based, distributed information browser for the World Wide Web.

Last updated on 2008-04-09 10:40:36 -0500

W3m-0.5.2

Introduction to W3m

w3m is primarily a pager but it can also be used as a text-mode WWW browser.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/w3m/w3m-0.5.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ba06992d3207666ed1bf2dcf7c72bf58
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 20 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

W3m Dependencies

Required

GC-6.8

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, GPM-1.20.1, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Imlib2-1.4.0, GTK+-2.10.13, Imlib (not recommended: obsolete, abandoned upstream, buggy, and gives no additional functionality as compared to other image loading libraries), GDK Pixbuf-0.22, Compface-1.5.2, nkf, a Mail User Agent and an External Browser

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/W3M

Installation of W3m

Install w3m by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --libexecdir=/usr/lib \
            --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/keymap.default /etc/w3m/keymap &&
install -v -m644    doc/menu.default /etc/w3m/menu &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.2 &&
install -v -m644    doc/{HISTORY,READ*,keymap.*,menu.*,*.html} \
                    /usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.2

Configuring W3m

Config Files

/etc/w3m/* and ~/.w3m/*

Installed Programs: w3m and w3mman

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/w3m, /usr/share/w3m and usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.2

Short Descriptions

w3m	is a text based web browser and pager.
w3mman	is an interface to the on-line reference manuals in w3m.

Last updated on 2007-12-17 10:49:08 -0600

Chapter 16. Basic Networking Programs

These applications are generally client applications used to access the appropriate server across the building or across the world. Tcpwrappers and portmap are support programs for daemons that you may have running on your machine.

CVS-1.11.22

Introduction to CVS

CVS is the Concurrent Versions System. This is a version control system useful for projects using a central repository to hold files and then track all changes made to those files. These instructions install the client used to manipulate the repository, creation of a repository is covered at Running a CVS Server.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/non-gnu/cvs/source/stable/1.11.22/cvs-1.11.22.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/non-gnu/cvs/source/stable/1.11.22/cvs-1.11.22.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f24043a640509aff1aa28871dd345762
Download size: 2.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 32.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (additional ~20 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Recommended patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/cvs-1.11.22-zlib-1.patch

CVS Dependencies

Optional

GDBM-1.8.3, Tcsh-6.15.00, OpenSSH-4.7p1, krb4, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1 (for the GSSAPI libraries), AFPL Ghostscript-8.53 or ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4, and an MTA (that provides a sendmail command)

CVS will invoke a default text editor to create a commit message if the -m "Commit message" parameter was not used when changes are committed to a respository. CVS looks for the following text editors, in the order shown below, during configuration to determine the default. This default can always be overridden by the CVSEDITOR or EDITOR environment variables and can be specified directly by passing the --with-editor=<desired text editor> parameter to the configure script.

Vim-7.1
Emacs-22.1
nano-2.0.7
Pine-4.64 (for Pico)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/cvs

Installation of CVS

By default CVS is statically linked against the Zlib library included in its source tree. This makes it exposed to possible security vulnerabilities in that library. If you want to modify CVS to use the system shared Zlib library, apply the following patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../cvs-1.11.22-zlib-1.patch

Install CVS by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have teTeX-3.0 installed and wish to create DVI, Postscript, HTML or text docs from the documentation source files, issue the following command:

make -C doc html txt dvi ps

To test the results, issue: make check. This will take quite a while. If you don't have rsh configured for access to the host you are building on (or you didn't pass the --with-rsh= parameter to the configure script, some tests may fail. If you passed the --with-rsh=ssh parameter to enable ssh as the default remote shell program, you'll need to issue the following command so that the tests will complete without any failures:

sed -e 's/rsh};/ssh};/' \
    -e 's/g=rw,o=r$/g=r,o=r/' \
    -i src/sanity.sh

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22 &&
install -v -m644 FAQ README /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.pdf /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22

If you created any additional documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m644 doc/*.{ps,dvi,txt} /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22/html/cvs{,client} &&
install -v -m644 doc/cvs.html/* \
                 /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22/html/cvs &&
install -v -m644 doc/cvsclient.html/* \
                 /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22/html/cvsclient

Configuring CVS

Config Files

~/.cvsrc, ~/.cvswrappers, and ~/.cvspass.

Configuration Information

~/.cvsrc is the main CVS configuration file. This file is used by users to specify defaults for different cvs commands. For example, to make all cvs diff commands run with -u, a user would add diff -u to their .cvsrc file.

~/.cvswrappers specifies wrappers to be used in addition to those specified in the CVSROOT/cvswrappers file in the repository.

~/.cvspass contains passwords used to complete logins to servers.

Installed Programs: cvs, cvsbug, and rcs2log

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/cvs and /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.22

Short Descriptions

cvs	is the main program file for the concurrent versions system.
cvsbug	is used to send problem reports about CVS to a central support site.
rcs2log	is a symlink to the contributed RCS to Change Log generator.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Inetutils-1.5

Introduction to Inetutils

The Inetutils package contains network clients and servers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/gnu/gnusrc/inetutils/inetutils-1.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/inetutils/inetutils-1.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: aeacd11d19bf25c89d4eff38346bdfb9
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Inetutils Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, TCP Wrapper-7.6, krb4, and Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/inetutils

Installation of Inetutils

Install Inetutils by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --localstatedir=/var \
            --disable-logger \
            --disable-syslogd &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /usr/bin/ping{,6} /bin

Command Explanations

--disable-logger: This switch prevents Inetutils installing a logger program, which is installed in the LFS book.

--disable-syslogd: This switch prevents Inetutils installing a system log daemon, which is installed in the LFS book.

--disable-whois: This switch will prevent Inetutils installing an outdated whois client. Add this option if you plan on installing Whois-4.7.26.

--disable-ifconfig: This switch will prevent Inetutils installing an ifconfig command. Use this parameter if you have Net-Tools installed and wish to keep its version of ifconfig.

--with-wrap: This switch makes Inetutils compile against tcp-wrappers. Add this option if you want to utilize tcp-wrappers.

--with-pam: This switch makes Inetutils link against Linux-PAM libraries. Add this option if you want to utilize PAM.

--disable-servers: Some of the servers included with Inetutils are insecure in nature and in some cases better alternatives exist. You can choose this switch to enable only the servers you need, avoiding the installation of unneeded servers.

A list of the installed programs not included here, along with their short descriptions can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/6.3/chapter06/inetutils.html#contents-inetutils.

Installed Programs: ftpd, ifconfig, inetd, ping6, rexecd, rlogind, rshd, talkd, telnetd, tftpd, uucpd and whois

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ftpd	is a DARPA Internet File Transfer Protocol Server.
inetd	is an Internet super-server. Note that the xinetd-2.3.14 package provides a much better server that does the same thing.
rexecd	is a remote execution server.
rlogind	is a remote login server.
rshd	is a remote shell server.
talkd	is a remote user communication server.
telnetd	is a DARPA TELNET protocol server.
tftpd	is an Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol server.
uucpd	is a server for supporting UUCP connections over networks.
whois	is a client for the whois directory service. Note that the Whois-4.7.26 package provides a much better client.

Last updated on 2007-06-30 08:30:48 -0500

NcFTP-3.2.1

Introduction to NcFTP

The NcFTP package contains a powerful and flexible interface to the Internet standard File Transfer Protocol. It is intended to replace or supplement the stock ftp program.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/clients/ftp/ncftp/ncftp-3.2.1-src.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ncftp.com/ncftp/ncftp-3.2.1-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d82cdfe0d5448172c03b434607414fb8
Download size: 409 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/ncftp

Installation of NcFTP

There are two ways to build NcFTP. The first (and optimal) way builds most of the functionality as a shared library and then builds and installs the program linked against this library. The second method simply links all of the functionality into the binary statically. This doesn't make the dynamic library available for linking by other applications. You need to choose which method best suits you. Note that the second method does not create an entirely statically linked binary; only the libncftp parts are statically linked in, in this case. Be aware that building and using the shared library is covered by the Clarified Artistic License; however, developing applications that utilize the shared library is subject to a different license.

To install NcFTP using the first (and optimal) method, run the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make -C libncftp shared &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make -C libncftp soinstall &&
make install

To install NcFTP using the second method (with the libncftp functionality linked in statically) run the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

make -C ... && make -C ...: These commands make and install the dynamic library libncftp which is then used to link against when compiling the main program.

Configuring NcFTP

Config Files

/etc/ncftp.* and ~/.ncftp/*; especially /etc/ncftp.prefs_v3 and ~/.ncftp/prefs_v3

Configuration Information

Most NcFTP configuration is done while in the program, and the configuration files are dealt with automatically. One exception to this is ~/.ncftp/prefs_v3. There are various options to alter in there, including:

yes-i-know-about-NcFTPd=yes

This disables the splash screen advertising the NcFTPd server.

There are other options in the prefs_v3 file. Most of these are self-explanatory. Global defaults can be set in /etc/ncftp.prefs_v3.

Installed Programs: ncftp, ncftpbatch, ncftpbookmarks, ncftpget, ncftpls, ncftpput, and ncftpspooler

Installed Library: libncftp.so

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ncftp	is a browser program for File Transfer Protocol.
ncftpbatch	is an individual batch FTP job processor.
ncftpbookmarks	is the NcFTP Bookmark Editor (NCurses-based).
ncftpget	is an internet file transfer program for scripts used to retrieve files.
ncftpls	is an internet file transfer program for scripts used to list files.
ncftpput	is an internet file transfer program for scripts used to transfer files.
ncftpspooler	is a global batch FTP job processor daemon.

Last updated on 2007-08-02 16:49:44 -0500

Net-tools-1.60

Introduction to Net-tools

The Net-tools package is a collection of programs for controlling the network subsystem of the Linux kernel.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/net-tools/net-tools-1.60.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/distributions/rootlinux/rootlinux/ports/base/net-tools/net-tools-1.60.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 888774accab40217dde927e21979c165
Download size: 194 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/net-tools-1.60-gcc34-3.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/net-tools-1.60-kernel_headers-2.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/net-tools-1.60-mii_ioctl-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/net-tools

Installation of Net-tools

Note

The Net-tools package installs a hostname program which will overwrite the existing program installed by Coreutils during a base LFS installation. If, for whatever reason, you need to reinstall the Coreutils package after installing Net-tools, you should apply the coreutils-6.9-suppress_hostname-1.patch patch (after the other patches) if you wish to preserve the Net-tools hostname program.

The instructions below automate the configuration process by piping yes to the make config command. If you wish to run the interactive configuration process (by changing the instruction to just make config), but you are not sure how to answer all the questions, then just accept the defaults. This will be just fine in the majority of cases. What you're asked here is a bunch of questions about which network protocols you've enabled in your kernel. The default answers will enable the tools from this package to work with the most common protocols: TCP, PPP, and several others. You still need to actually enable these protocols in the kernel—what you do here is merely tell the package to include support for those protocols in its programs, but it's up to the kernel to make the protocols available.

Install Net-tools by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../net-tools-1.60-gcc34-3.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../net-tools-1.60-kernel_headers-2.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../net-tools-1.60-mii_ioctl-1.patch &&
yes "" | make config &&
sed -i -e 's|HAVE_IP_TOOLS 0|HAVE_IP_TOOLS 1|g' \
       -e 's|HAVE_MII 0|HAVE_MII 1|g' config.h &&
sed -i -e 's|# HAVE_IP_TOOLS=0|HAVE_IP_TOOLS=1|g' \
       -e 's|# HAVE_MII=0|HAVE_MII=1|g' config.make &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make update

Command Explanations

yes "" | make config: Piping yes to make config skips the interactive configuration and accepts the defaults.

sed -i -e ...: These two seds change the configuration files to force building the ipmaddr, iptunnel and mii-tool programs.

Installed Programs: arp, dnsdomainname, domainname, hostname, ifconfig, ipmaddr, iptunnel, mii-tool, nameif, netstat, nisdomainname, plipconfig, rarp, route, slattach, and ypdomainname

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

arp	is used to manipulate the kernel's ARP cache, usually to add or delete an entry, or to dump the entire cache.
dnsdomainname	reports the system's DNS domain name.
domainname	reports or sets the system's NIS/YP domain name.
hostname	reports or sets the name of the current host system.
ifconfig	is the main utility for configuring network interfaces.
ipmaddr	adds, deletes and shows an interface's multicast addresses.
iptunnel	adds, changes, deletes and shows an interface's tunnels.
mii-tool	checks or sets the status of a network interface's Media Independent Interface (MII) unit.
nameif	names network interfaces based on MAC addresses.
netstat	is used to report network connections, routing tables, and interface statistics.
nisdomainname	does the same as domainname.
plipconfig	is used to fine tune the PLIP device parameters, to improve its performance.
rarp	is used to manipulate the kernel's RARP table.
route	is used to manipulate the IP routing table.
slattach	attaches a network interface to a serial line. This allows you to use normal terminal lines for point-to-point links to other computers.
ypdomainname	does the same as domainname.

Last updated on 2008-08-10 16:51:25 -0500

NFS Utilities-1.1.2 Client

The NFS Utilities package provides NFS server functionality as well as client software such as mount.nfs or umount.nfs. If you want to install it, the instructions can be found in Chapter 19 – NFS Utilities-1.1.2. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server if you actually need it (and if you don't know whether you need it or not, it's likely that you don't!).

Last updated on 2008-03-20 09:38:21 -0500

NTP-4.2.4p0

Introduction to NTP

The NTP package contains a client and server to keep the time synchronized between various computers over a network. This package is the official reference implementation of the NTP protocol.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~ntp/ntp_spool/ntp4/ntp-4.2/ntp-4.2.4p0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6f381e3764eac481bed9cf7e4d508952
Download size: 3.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 27.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

NTP Dependencies

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/ntp

Installation of NTP

Install NTP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --with-binsubdir=sbin &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/ntp-4.2.4p0 &&
cp -v -R html/* /usr/share/doc/ntp-4.2.4p0/

Command Explanations

--with-binsubdir=sbin: This parameter places the administrative programs in /usr/sbin.

Configuring NTP

Config Files

/etc/ntp.conf

Configuration Information

The following configuration file defines various NTP servers with open access from different continents. It also creates a drift file where ntpd stores the frequency offset and a pid file to store the ntpd process ID. Since the documentation included with the package is sparse, visit the NTP website at http://www.ntp.org/ and http://www.pool.ntp.org/ for more information.

cat > /etc/ntp.conf << "EOF"
# Africa
server tock.nml.csir.co.za

# Asia
server 0.asia.pool.ntp.org

# Australia
server 0.oceania.pool.ntp.org

# Europe
server 0.europe.pool.ntp.org

# North America
server 0.north-america.pool.ntp.org

# South America
server 2.south-america.pool.ntp.org

driftfile /var/cache/ntp.drift
pidfile   /var/run/ntpd.pid
EOF

Synchronizing the Time

There are two options. Option one is to run ntpd continuously and allow it to synchronize the time in a gradual manner. The other option is to run ntpd periodically (using cron) and update the time each time ntpd is scheduled.

If you choose Option one, then install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/ntp init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-ntp

If you prefer to run ntpd periodically, add the following command to root's crontab:

ntpd -q

Execute the following command if you would like to set the hardware clock to the current system time at shutdown and reboot:

ln -v -sf ../init.d/setclock /etc/rc.d/rc0.d/K46setclock &&
ln -v -sf ../init.d/setclock /etc/rc.d/rc6.d/K46setclock

The other way around is already set up by LFS.

Installed Programs: ntp-keygen, ntp-wait, ntpd, ntpdate, ntpdc, ntpq, ntptime, ntptrace, sntp and tickadj

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/ntp-4.2.4p0

Short Descriptions

ntp-keygen	generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 authentication and identification schemes.
ntp-wait	is useful at boot time, to delay the boot sequence until ntpd has set the time.
ntpd	is a NTP daemon that runs in the background and keeps the date and time synchronized based on response from configured NTP servers. It also functions as a NTP server.
ntpdate	is a client program that sets the date and time based on the response from an NTP server. This command is deprecated.
ntpdc	is used to query the NTP daemon about its current state and to request changes in that state.
ntpq	is an utility program used to monitor ntpd operations and determine performance.
ntptime	reads and displays time-related kernel variables.
ntptrace	traces a chain of NTP servers back to the primary source.
sntp	is a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client.
tickadj	reads, and optionally modifies, several timekeeping-related variables in older kernels that do not have support for precision timekeeping.

Last updated on 2008-03-12 16:56:11 -0500

OpenSSH-4.7p1 Client

The ssh client is a secure replacement for telnet. If you want to install it, the instructions can be found in Chapter 21 – OpenSSH-4.7p1. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server if you actually need it (and if you don't know whether you need it or not, it's likely that you don't!).

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Portmap-6.0

Introduction to Portmap

The portmap package is a more secure replacement for the original SUN portmap package. Portmap is used to forward RPC requests to RPC daemons such as NFS and NIS.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://neil.brown.name/portmap/portmap-6.0.tgz
Download MD5 sum: ac108ab68bf0f34477f8317791aaf1ff
Download size: 21 KB
Estimated disk space required: 268 KB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

Portmap Dependencies

Required

TCP Wrapper-7.6

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/portmap

Installation of Portmap

Portmap runs as a daemon with a uid of 1. This uid is only configurable at compile time and is used as default. To set up a user to match this uid, as the root user, issue:

useradd -u 1 -g 1 -d /dev/null -s /bin/false bin

Install portmap with the following commands:

make

If you want the portmap daemon to use a uid/gid other than the defaults, pass DAEMON_UID=x and DAEMON_GID=y as shown below:

make DAEMON_UID=x DAEMON_GID=y

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note

The above installation places executable portmap in /sbin. You may choose to move the file to /usr/sbin. If you do, remember to modify the bootscript also.

Configuring Portmap

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/portmap init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-portmap

Installed Programs: pmap_dump, pmap_set, and portmap

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

pmap_dump	saves the port mapping table to an ASCII file.
pmap_set	restores the port mapping table from an ASCII file.
portmap	is an RPC port mapper.

Last updated on 2008-03-08 04:05:42 -0600

Rsync-3.0.2 Client

rsync is a utility for fast incremental file transfers. If you want to install it, the instructions can be found in Chapter 24 – rsync-3.0.2. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server if you actually need it (and if you don't know whether you need it or not, it's likely that you don't!).

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Samba-3.0.30 Client

The Samba client utilities are used to transfer files to and from, mount SMB shares located on or use printers attached to Windows and other SMB servers. If you want to install these utilities, the instructions can be found in Chapter 21 – Samba-3.0.30. After performing the basic installation, configure the utilities using the configuration section titled “Scenario 1: Minimal Standalone Client-Only Installation”.

Note that if you only want to use these client utilities, you do not need to run the server daemons and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server daemons if you actually need them. You'll find an explanation of the services provided by the server daemons in the Samba-3.0.30 instructions.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Subversion-1.4.4

Introduction to Subversion

Subversion is a version control system that is designed to be a compelling replacement for CVS in the open source community. It extends and enhances CVS' feature set, while maintaining a similar interface for those already familiar with CVS. These instructions install the client and server software used to manipulate a Subversion repository. Creation of a repository is covered at Running a Subversion Server.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://subversion.tigris.org/downloads/subversion-1.4.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d4aa5aeb09acb3307841022d279ab895
Download size: 4.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 109 MB (additional 74 MB to install all bindings and 405 MB to run all test suites)
Estimated build time: 1.5 SBU (add 1.7 SBU for bindings and 2.2 SBU to run test suites)

Subversion Dependencies

Required

Apache-2.2.8 (for the APR only) or Apache Portable Runtime or Subversion dependencies (see the INSTALL file for information on how to utilize this package)

If you require the Berkeley DB back-end hooks in Subversion to build or support BDB based repositories, you must have Berkeley DB linked into the APR-util library. There is information in the Apache-2.2.8 instructions that shows the required parameters to pass to the configure script when building any of the APR-util packages.

Optional

Python-2.5.2 (required to run the test suite), Apache-2.2.8 (if you have Apache Portable Runtime installed), neon*, and serf

* The configure script will warn that the installed neon version is not supported if the version is greater than 0.26.2. You can circumvent this warning by passing --disable-neon-version-check to the configure command. Note that this may or may not work, depending on the version of neon you have installed, but neon-0.26.3 is known to work.

Optional to Build the Java Bindings

JDK-6 Update 5 or Dante or Jikes, and JUnit-4.3.1 (to test the Java bindings)

Optional to Build the SWIG Bindings

SWIG**, Python-2.5.2, and Ruby-1.8.6-p111

** The configure script will issue warnings if the installed version of SWIG is greater than 1.3.29, but will attempt to use it anyway if you build the SWIG bindings. Versions of SWIG up to 1.3.31 are known to work.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/subversion

Installation of Subversion

Install Subversion by running the following commands:

sed -i 's/@SVN_APR_INCLUDES@/& @CPPFLAGS@/' \
    subversion/bindings/swig/perl/native/Makefile.PL.in

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have Doxygen-1.5.2 installed and you wish to build the API documentation, issue: doxygen doc/doxygen.conf.

If you passed the --enable-javahl parameter to configure and wish to build the Java bindings, issue the following command:

make javahl

If you have the necessary dependencies installed and you wish to build the Perl, Python and/or Ruby bindings, issue any or all of the following commands:

make swig-pl &&
make swig-py &&
make swig-rb

To test the results, issue: make check.

To test the results of the Java bindings build, issue make check-javahl. Note you must have the JUnit testing framework installed.

To test the results of any or all of the SWIG bindings, you can use the following commands:

make check-swig-pl &&
make check-swig-py &&
make check-swig-rb

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/subversion-1.4.4 &&
cp -v -R doc/* /usr/share/doc/subversion-1.4.4

If you built the Java bindings, issue the following command as the root user to install them:

make install-javahl

If you built any of the SWIG bindings, issue any or all of the following commands as the root user to install them:

make install-swig-pl &&

make install-swig-py &&
echo /usr/lib/svn-python \
    > /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/subversion.pth &&

make install-swig-rb

Command Explanations

sed -i '...' .../Makefile.PL.in: This command is used to fix a problem with compiling the Perl bindings. It can be ommitted if you're not building the bindings.

--with-neon=<prefix>: This option should be used if you wish to use a system-installed version of neon.

--with-apr=<prefix> --with-apr-util=<prefix>: These options should be used if you wish to use the system-installed version of the APR. Ensure you identify the correct installation prefix.

--with-apxs=/usr/sbin/apxs: This option should be used to identify the system-installed version of the apxs command installed during the Apache HTTPD installation as apxs might not be in an unprivileged user's PATH and won't be properly discovered.

--with-installbuilddir=/usr/lib/apr-0: This parameter is used (and only has an effect if you used the Subversion dependencies package) to force the installation of some APR-related support programs to /usr/lib/apr-0 instead of /usr/build.

Configuring Subversion

Config Files

~/.subversion/config and /etc/subversion/config

Configuration Information

/etc/subversion/config is the Subversion system-wide configuration file. This file is used to specify defaults for different svn commands.

~/.subversion/config is the user's personal configuration file. It is used to override the system-wide defaults set in /etc/subversion/config.

Installed Programs: svn, svnadmin, svndumpfilter, svnlook, svnserve, svnsync and svnversion

Installed Libraries: libsvn*.{so,a} and optionally, a Java library, the mod_dav_svn.so, and mod_authz_svn.so Apache HTTP DSO modules and various Perl, Python and Ruby modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/subversion-1, /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8/i686-linux/auto/SVN (optional), /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8/i686-linux/SVN (optional), /usr/lib/ruby/site_ruby/x.x/i686-linux/svn, /usr/lib/svn-javahl (optional), /usr/lib/svn-python (optional) and /usr/share/doc/subversion-1.4.4

Short Descriptions

svn	is a command-line client program used to access Subversion repositories.
svnadmin	is a tool for creating, tweaking or repairing a Subversion repository.
svndumpfilter	is a program for filtering Subversion repository dumpfile format streams.
svnlook	is a tool for inspecting a Subversion repository.
svnserve	is a custom standalone server program, able to run as a daemon process or invoked by SSH.
svnversion	is used to report the version number and state of a working Subversion repository copy.
neon-config	is a script which provides information about an installed copy of the neon library.
`libsvn_*.{so,a}`	are the support libraries used by the Subversion programs.
`libneon.{so,a}`	is used as a high-level interface to common HTTP and WebDAV methods.
`mod_authz_svn.so`	is a plug-in module for the Apache HTTP server, used to authenticate users to a Subversion repository over the Internet or an intranet.
`mod_dav_svn.so`	is a plug-in module for the Apache HTTP server, used to make a Subversion repository available to others over the Internet or an intranet.

Last updated on 2008-03-17 13:11:35 -0500

TCP Wrapper-7.6

Introduction to TCP Wrapper

The TCP Wrapper package provides daemon wrapper programs that report the name of the client requesting network services and the requested service.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://files.ichilton.co.uk/nfs/tcp_wrappers_7.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.porcupine.org/pub/security/tcp_wrappers_7.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e6fa25f71226d090f34de3f6b122fb5a
Download size: 97 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.09 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch (Fixes some build issues and adds building a shared library): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/tcp_wrappers-7.6-shared_lib_plus_plus-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/tcpwrappers

Installation of TCP Wrapper

Install TCP Wrapper with the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../tcp_wrappers-7.6-shared_lib_plus_plus-1.patch &&
sed -i -e "s,^extern char \*malloc();,/* & */," scaffold.c &&
make REAL_DAEMON_DIR=/usr/sbin STYLE=-DPROCESS_OPTIONS linux

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ... scaffold.c: This command removes an obsolete C declaration which causes the build to fail if using GCC >= 3.4.x.

Configuring TCP Wrapper

Config Files

/etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny

File protections: the wrapper, all files used by the wrapper, and all directories in the path leading to those files, should be accessible but not writable for unprivileged users (mode 755 or mode 555). Do not install the wrapper set-uid.

As the root user, perform the following edits on the /etc/inetd.conf configuration file:

finger stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/sbin/in.fingerd in.fingerd

becomes:

finger stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/sbin/tcpd in.fingerd

Note

The finger server is used as an example here.

Similar changes must be made if xinetd is used, with the emphasis being on calling /usr/sbin/tcpd instead of calling the service daemon directly, and passing the name of the service daemon to tcpd.

Installed Programs: tcpd, tcpdchk, tcpdmatch, try-from, and safe_finger

Installed Library: libwrap.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

tcpd	is the main access control daemon for all Internet services, which inetd or xinetd will run instead of running the requested service daemon.
tcpdchk	is a tool to examine a tcpd wrapper configuration and report problems with it.
tcpdmatch	is used to predict how the TCP wrapper would handle a specific request for a service.
try-from	can be called via a remote shell command to find out if the host name and address are properly recognized.
safe_finger	is a wrapper for the finger utility, to provide automatic reverse name lookups.
`libwrap.{so,a}`	contains the API functions required by the TCP Wrapper programs as well as other programs to become “TCP Wrapper-aware”.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Wget-1.10.2

Introduction to Wget

The Wget package contains a utility useful for non-interactive downloading of files from the Web.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/wget/wget-1.10.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/wget/wget-1.10.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 795fefbb7099f93e2d346b026785c4b8
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 8.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Wget Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g and Dante

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/wget

Installation of Wget

Install Wget by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This relocates the configuration file from /usr/etc to /etc.

Configuring Wget

Config Files

/etc/wgetrc and ~/.wgetrc

There are no changes required to these files.

Installed Program: wget

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

wget

retrieves files from the Web using the HTTP, HTTPS and FTP protocols. It is designed to be non-interactive, for background or unattended operations.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Wireless Tools-28

Introduction to Wireless Tools

The Wireless Extension (WE) is a generic API in the Linux kernel allowing a driver to expose configuration and statistics specific to common Wireless LANs to user space. A single set of tools can support all the variations of Wireless LANs, regardless of their type as long as the driver supports Wireless Extensions. WE parameters may also be changed on the fly without restarting the driver (or Linux).

The Wireless Tools (WT) package is a set of tools allowing manipulation of the Wireless Extensions. They use a textual interface to support the full Wireless Extension.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/wireless_tools.28.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 599c94497f9c9073c7b052d3dcb7cd16
Download size: 249 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.7 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/WirelessTools

Kernel Configuration

To use Wireless Tools, the kernel must have the appropriate drivers and other support available. The appropriate bus must also be available. For many laptops, the PCMCIA bus (CONFIG_PCCARD) needs to be built. In some cases, this bus support will also need to be built for embedded wireless cards. The appropriate bridge support also needs to be built. For many modern laptops, the CardBus host bridge (CONFIG_YENTA) will be needed.

In addition to the bus, the actual driver for the specific wireless card must also be available. There are many wireless cards and they don't all work with Linux. The first place to look for card support is the kernel. The drivers are located in Device Drivers → Network Device Support → Wireless LAN (non-hamradio). There are also external drivers available for some very common cards. For more information, look at the user notes.

After the correct drivers are loaded, the interface will appear in /proc/net/wireless.

Installation of Wireless Tools

To install Wireless Tools, use the following commands:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr install

Installed Programs: ifrename, iwconfig, iwevent, iwgetid, iwlist, iwpriv, and iwspy

Installed Library: libiw.so

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ifrename	renames network interfaces based on various static criteria.
iwconfig	configures a wireless network interface.
iwevent	displays wireless events generated by drivers and setting changes.
iwgetid	reports ESSID, NWID or AP/Cell Address of wireless networks.
iwlist	gets detailed wireless information from a wireless interface.
iwpriv	configures optional (private) parameters of a wireless network interface.
iwspy	gets wireless statistics from specific node.
`libiw.so`	contains functions required by the wireless programs and provides an API for other programs.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Other Networking Programs

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/othernetprogs

NCPFS contains client and administration tools for use with Novell networks. See the User Notes for details.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Chapter 17. Basic Networking Utilities

This chapter contains some tools that come in handy when the network needs investigating.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/basicnetworkingutilities

Traceroute-1.4a12

Introduction to Traceroute

The Traceroute package contains a program which is used to display the network route that packets take to reach a specified host. This is a standard network troubleshooting tool. If you find yourself unable to connect to another system, traceroute can help pinpoint the problem.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/platform/sun/packages/solaris/freeware/SOURCES/traceroute-1.4a12.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ee.lbl.gov/traceroute-1.4a12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 964d599ef696efccdeebe7721cd4828d
Download size: 74 KB
Estimated disk space required: 540 KB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/traceroute

Installation of Traceroute

Install Traceroute by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's/-o bin/-o root/' Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-man

Command Explanations

sed 's/-o bin/-o root/' Makefile.in: Adjusts the Makefile so that the program is installed with user root owning the files instead of user bin (which doesn't exist on a default LFS system).

make install: Installs traceroute with SUID set to root in the /usr/sbin directory. This makes it possible for all users to execute traceroute. For absolute security, turn off the SUID bit in traceroute's file permissions with the command:

chmod -v 0755 /usr/sbin/traceroute

The risk is that if a security problem such as a buffer overflow was ever found in the Traceroute code, a regular user on your system could gain root access if the program is SUID root. Of course, removing the SUID permission also makes it impossible for users other than root to utilize traceroute, so decide what's right for your individual situation.

The goal of BLFS is to be completely FHS compliant, so if you do leave the traceroute binary SUID root, then you should move traceroute to /usr/bin with the following command:

mv -v /usr/sbin/traceroute /usr/bin

This ensures that the binary is in the path for non-root users.

Installed Program: traceroute

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

traceroute

does basically what it says: it traces the route your packets take from the host you are working on to another host on a network, showing all the intermediate hops (gateways) along the way.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Nmap-4.20

Introduction to Nmap

Nmap is a utility for network exploration and security auditing. It supports ping scanning, port scanning and TCP/IP fingerprinting.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/n/nmap-4.20.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/nmap-4.20.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ea50419f99472200c4184a304e3831ea
Download size: 2.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Nmap Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, PCRE-7.6, libpcap-0.9.6, GTK+-2.10.13 (for building the graphical front-end), and libdnet

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/nmap

Installation of Nmap

Install Nmap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: nmap and optionally, nmapfe and xnmap

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/nmap

Short Descriptions

nmap	is a utility for network exploration and security auditing. It supports ping scanning, port scanning and TCP/IP fingerprinting.
nmapfe	is the graphical front end to nmap.
xnmap	is a symbolic link to nmapfe.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

Whois-4.7.26

Introduction to Whois

Whois is a client-side application which queries the whois directory service for information pertaining to a particular domain name.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/w/whois_4.7.26.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f069304ae912ff4fdec59f33de405076
Download size: 67 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/whois

Installation of Whois

Install Whois by running the following commands:

make

This package does not come with a test suite (that works).

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr install

Installed Program: whois

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

whois

is a client-side application which queries the whois directory service for information pertaining to a particular domain name.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 09:47:45 -0500

BIND Utilities-9.4.1-P1

Introduction to BIND Utilities

BIND Utilities is not a separate package, it is a collection of the client side programs that are included with BIND-9.4.1-P1. The BIND package includes the client side programs nslookup, dig and host. If you install BIND server, these programs will be installed automatically. This section is for those users who don't need the complete BIND server, but need these client side applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/servers/isc/bind9/9.4.1-P1/bind-9.4.1-P1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/bind9/9.4.1-P1/bind-9.4.1-P1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 44e0514e6105ddaa235394045d9aeb0c
Download size: 6.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 63 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

BIND Utilities Dependencies

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/bind-utils

Installation of BIND Utilities

Install BIND Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make -C lib/dns &&
make -C lib/isc &&
make -C lib/bind9 &&
make -C lib/isccfg &&
make -C lib/lwres &&
make -C bin/dig

This portion of the package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make -C bin/dig install

Command Explanations

make -C lib/...: These commands build the libraries that are needed for the client programs.

make -C bin/dig: This command builds the client programs.

Installed Programs: dig, host, and nslookup

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

See the program descriptions in the BIND-9.4.1-P1 section.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Wireshark-0.99.6

Introduction to Wireshark

The Wireshark package contains a network protocol analyzer, also known as a “sniffer”. This is useful for analyzing data captured “off the wire” from a live network connection, or data read from a capture file. Wireshark provides both a graphical and TTY-mode front-end for examining captured network packets from over 500 protocols, as well as the capability to read capture files from many other popular network analyzers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.wireshark.org/download/src/all-versions/wireshark-0.99.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/w/wireshark-0.99.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e57a8c8b364c38df3da97e2ee9f0d0bc
Download size: 11.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 449 MB
Estimated build time: 6.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Additional Documentation: http://www.wireshark.org/docs/

From this page you can download many different docs in a variety of formats.

Wireshark dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 or GLib-2.12.12 (to build the TTY-mode front-end only)

Note that if you don't have Gtk+ installed, you will need to pass --disable-wireshark to the configure command.

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, GTK+-1.2.10 or GTK+-2.10.13 (to build the GUI front-end), OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, Python-2.5.2, PCRE-7.6, GnuTLS-1.6.3, Net-SNMP, adns, and Lua

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/wireshark

Kernel Configuration

The kernel must have the Packet protocol enabled for Wireshark to capture live packets from the network. Enable the Packet protocol by choosing “Y” in the “Networking” – “Packet socket” configuration parameter. Alternatively, build the af_packet.ko module by choosing “M” in this parameter.

Installation of Wireshark

Install Wireshark by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --enable-threads &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/wireshark-0.99.6 &&
install -v -m644    FAQ README{,.linux} doc/README.* doc/*.{pod,txt} \
                    /usr/share/doc/wireshark-0.99.6 &&
pushd /usr/share/doc/wireshark-0.99.6 &&
for FILENAME in ../../wireshark/*.html; do \
    ln -s -v $FILENAME .
done &&
popd &&

install -v -m644 -D wireshark.desktop \
                    /usr/share/applications/wireshark.desktop &&
install -v -m644 -D image/wsicon48.png \
                    /usr/share/pixmaps/wireshark.png &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/pixmaps/wireshark &&
install -v -m644 image/*.{png,ico,xpm,bmp} \
                 /usr/share/pixmaps/wireshark

If you downloaded any of the documentation files from the page listed in the 'Additional Downloads', install them by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m644 <Downloaded_Files> /usr/share/doc/wireshark-0.99.6

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This parameter enables the use of threads in wireshark.

--with-ssl: This parameter is required if you are linking Kerberos libraries into the build so that the OpenSSL libcrypto library is found.

Configuring Wireshark

Config Files

/etc/wireshark.conf and ~/.wireshark/*

Configuration Information

Though the default configuration parameters are very sane, reference the configuration section of the Wireshark User's Guide for configuration information. Most of Wireshark's configuration can be accomplished using the menu options of the wireshark graphical interface.

Note

If you want to look at packets, make sure you don't filter them out with iptables-1.3.8. If you want to exclude certain classes of packets, it is more efficient to do it with iptables than it is with Wireshark.

Installed Programs: capinfos, dftest, dumpcap, editcap, idl2wrs, mergecap, randpkt, text2pcap, tshark and wireshark

Installed Libraries: libwireshark.so, libwiretap.so and numerous dissector plugin modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/wireshark, /usr/share/doc/wireshark-0.99.6, /usr/share/pixmaps/wireshark and /usr/share/wireshark

Short Descriptions

capinfos	reads a saved capture file and returns any or all of several statistics about that file. It is able to detect and read any capture supported by the Wireshark package.
dftest	is a display-filter-compiler test program.
dumpcap	is a network traffic dump tool. It lets you capture packet data from a live network and write the packets to a file.
editcap	edits and/or translates the format of capture files. It knows how to read libpcap capture files, including those of tcpdump, Wireshark and other tools that write captures in that format.
idl2wrs	takes a user specified CORBA IDL file and generates “C” source code that can be used to create an Wireshark plugin.
mergecap	combines multiple saved capture files into a single output file.
randpkt	creates random-packet capture files.
text2pcap	reads in an ASCII hex dump and writes the data described into a libpcap-style capture file.
tshark	is a TTY-mode network protocol analyzer. It lets you capture packet data from a live network or read packets from a previously saved capture file.
wireshark	is a GUI network protocol analyzer. It lets you interactively browse packet data from a live network or from a previously saved capture file.
`libwireshark.so`	contains functions used by the Wireshark programs to perform filtering and packet capturing.
`libwiretap.so`	is a library being developed as a future replacement for `libpcap`, the current standard Unix library for packet capturing. For more information, see the `README` file in the source `wiretap` directory.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

Chapter 18. Mail/News Clients

Mail Clients help you retrieve (Fetchmail), sort (Procmail), read and compose responses (Heirloom mailx, Mutt, Pine, Kmail, Balsa, Evolution, SeaMonkey) to email.

News clients also help you retrieve, sort, read and compose responses, but these messages travel through USENET (a worldwide bulletin board system) using the Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP).

Heirloom mailx-12.2

Introduction to Heirloom mailx

The Heirloom mailx package (formerly known as the Nail package) contains mailx, a command-line Mail User Agent derived from Berkeley Mail which is intended to provide the functionality of the POSIX mailx command with additional support for MIME messages, IMAP (including caching), POP3, SMTP, S/MIME, message threading/sorting, scoring, and filtering. Heirloom mailx is especially useful for writing scripts and batch processing.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/heirloom/mailx-12.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c13c24db8fb5f5d10b7ad148647f9909
Download size: 269 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Heirloom mailx Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g or NSS-3.11.7, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 (for IMAP GSSAPI authentication), and an MTA

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/mailx

Installation of Heirloom mailx

Install Heirloom mailx by running the following commands.

make SENDMAIL=/usr/sbin/sendmail

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr UCBINSTALL=/usr/bin/install install &&
ln -v -sf mailx /usr/bin/mail &&
ln -v -sf mailx /usr/bin/nail &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/mailx-12.2 &&
install -v -m644 README mailx.1.html /usr/share/doc/mailx-12.2

Command Explanations

make SENDMAIL=/usr/sbin/sendmail: This changes the default MTA path of /usr/lib/sendmail.

make PREFIX=/usr UCBINSTALL=/usr/bin/install install: This changes the default installation path of /usr/local and the default install command path of /usr/ucb.

Configuring Heirloom mailx

Config Files

/etc/nail.rc, ~/.mailrc and ~/.nailrc

Installed Programs: mail, mailx and nail

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

mailx	is a command-line mail user agent compatible with the mailx command found on commercial Unix versions.
mail	is a symbolic link to mailx.
nail	is a symbolic link to mailx.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Procmail-3.22

Introduction to Procmail

The Procmail package contains an autonomous mail processor. This is useful for filtering and sorting incoming mail.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.procmail.org/procmail-3.22.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.procmail.net/pub/procmail/procmail-3.22.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1678ea99b973eb77eda4ecf6acae53f1
Download size: 226 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.08 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/procmail

Installation of Procmail

This package does not come with a test suite.

Install Procmail by running the following commands as the root user:

make LOCKINGTEST=/tmp install &&
make install-suid

Command Explanations

make LOCKINGTEST=/tmp install: This prevents make from asking you where to test file-locking patterns.

make install-suid: Modifies permissions of the installed files.

Configuring Procmail

Config Files

/etc/procmailrc and ~/.procmailrc

Configuration Information

Recipes have to be written and placed in your ~/.procmailrc for execution. The procmailex man page is the starting place to learn how to write recipes. For additional information, see also http://pm-doc.sourceforge.net/pm-tips.html.

Installed Programs: formail, lockfile, mailstat and procmail

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

formail	is a filter that can be used to format mail into mailbox format.
lockfile	is a utility that can lock a file for single use interactively or in a script.
mailstat	prints a summary report of mail that has been filtered by procmail since the last time mailstat was ran.
procmail	is an autonomous mail processor. It performs all the functions of an MDA (Mail Delivery Agent).

Last updated on 2007-12-27 19:14:39 -0600

Fetchmail-6.3.8

Introduction to Fetchmail

The Fetchmail package contains a mail retrieval program. It retrieves mail from remote mail servers and forwards it to the local (client) machine's delivery system, so it can then be read by normal mail user agents.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://download2.berlios.de/fetchmail/fetchmail-6.3.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/fetchmail-6.3.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 66b97500b0a1e3c0916b3b5314f597f5
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 8.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/fetchmail-6.3.8-security_fixes-1.patch

Fetchmail Dependencies

Required

OpenSSL-0.9.8g and a local MDA (Procmail-3.22)

Optional

Python-2.5.2 and Tk-8.4.18

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/fetchmail

Installation of Fetchmail

Install Fetchmail by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../fetchmail-6.3.8-security_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-ssl --enable-fallback=procmail &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-ssl: This enables SSL support, so that you can handle connections to secure POP3 and IMAP servers.

--enable-fallback=procmail: This tells Fetchmail to hand incoming mail to Procmail for delivery, if the port 25 mail server is not present or not responding.

Configuring Fetchmail

Config Files

~/.fetchmailrc

Configuration Information

cat > ~/.fetchmailrc << "EOF"
set logfile /var/log/fetchmail.log
set no bouncemail
set postmaster root

poll SERVERNAME :
    user <username> pass <password>;
    mda "/usr/bin/procmail -f %F -d %T";
EOF

chmod -v 0600 ~/.fetchmailrc

This is an example configuration that should suffice for most people. You can add as many users and servers as you need using the same syntax.

man fetchmail: Look for the section near the bottom named CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES. It gives some quick examples. There are countless other config options once you get used to it.

Installed Program: fetchmail and fetchmailconf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

fetchmail	when executed as a user, this will source `~/.fetchmailrc` and download the appropriate mail.
fetchmailconf	it will assist you in setting up and editing a `~/.fetchmailrc` configuration file, by using a Tk GUI interface. It requires Python and it must have the Tkinker module available.

Last updated on 2008-07-12 16:51:48 -0500

Mutt-1.5.17

Introduction to Mutt

The Mutt package contains a Mail User Agent. This is useful for reading, writing, replying to, saving, and deleting your email.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/mutt/mutt-1.5.17.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/devel/mutt-1.5.17.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 49387458be0cb52b85ae0d73af699aae
Download size: 3.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Mutt Dependencies

Optional

GnuPG-1.4.7 or GnuPG-2.0.8, OpenSSL-0.9.8g or GnuTLS-1.6.3, an MTA (that provides a sendmail command), Aspell-0.60.5, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, S-Lang-2.1.3, libidn-0.6.14, GDBM-1.8.3 or QDBM, and GDB

Optional (To Regenerate HTML Documentation)

libxslt-1.1.22 and either Lynx-2.8.6rel.5, w3m or ELinks

Optional (To Generate PDF Manual)

JadeTeX-3.13 and DocBook DSSSL Stylesheets-1.79

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/mutt

Installation of Mutt

Note

This version of Mutt is a development release. The BLFS staff has determined that it provides a stable program and fixes two issues in the current stable version of Mutt: a segmentation fault that occurs under certain conditions and a compilation problem when building with GCC-4.1.2. To find the current stable release, please refer to the Mutt home page.

Caution

If you choose to link Mutt against GnuTLS-1.6.3, you won't have SSL client certificate support. Specifically the ssl_client_cert configuration variable is recognized as invalid. That means you will lose the ability to use mutt via SMTP over TLS or in the case when a client certification is required for authentication on an IMAP server. For these reasons it is recommended to link Mutt against OpenSSL-0.9.8g if you want SSL/TLS support.

Mutt requires a group named mail. You can add this group, if it does not exist, with this command:

groupadd -g 34 mail

If you did not install an MTA, such as Postfix-2.5.1 or Sendmail-8.14.1, you need to modify the ownership of /var/mail with this command:

chgrp -v mail /var/mail

Install Mutt by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --with-docdir=/usr/share/doc/mutt-1.5.17 \
    --enable-pop --enable-imap \
    --enable-hcache --without-qdbm \
    --without-gdbm --with-bdb &&
make

If you have the necessary dependencies installed and would like to rebuild the HTML documentation, issue the following commands:

make -C doc clean &&
make -C doc

To generate the PDF manual with JadeTeX-3.13, run the following command:

make -C doc manual.pdf

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you generated the PDF manual, install it and the source TeX file by issuing the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 doc/manual.{pdf,tex} \
    /usr/share/doc/mutt-1.5.17

Command Explanations

--enable-pop: This switch enables POP3 support.

--enable-imap: This switch enables IMAP support.

--enable-hcache: This switch enables header caching.

--without-qdbm: This switch disables QDBM as the header cache backend.

--without-gdbm: This switch disables GDBM as the header cache backend.

--with-bdb: This switch enables Berkeley DB as the header cache backend.

--enable-smtp: This switch enables SMTP relay support.

--with-ssl: This parameter adds SSL/TLS support from OpenSSL-0.9.8g in POP3/IMAP/SMTP if they are enabled.

--with-sasl: This parameter adds authentication support from Cyrus SASL-2.1.22 in POP3/IMAP/SMTP if they are enabled. Depending on the server configuration, this may not be needed for POP3 or IMAP. However, it is needed for SMTP authentication.

Configuring Mutt

Config Files

/etc/Muttrc, ~/.muttrc, /etc/mime.types, ~/.mime.types

Configuration Information

No changes in these files are necessary to begin using Mutt. When you are ready to make changes, the man page for muttrc is a good starting place.

In order to utilize GnuPG, use the following command:

cat /usr/share/doc/mutt-1.5.17/samples/gpg.rc >> ~/.muttrc

Installed Programs: flea, mutt, mutt_dotlock, muttbug, pgpewrap, pgpring, and smime_keys

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/mutt-1.5.17

Short Descriptions

flea	is a bug submitter for Mutt.
mutt	is a Mail User Agent (MUA) which enables you to read, write and delete your email.
mutt_dotlock	implements the mail spool file lock.
muttbug	is a script that executes flea.
pgpewrap	prepares a command line for the GnuPG-1.4.7 utilities.
pgpring	is a key ring dumper for PGP. It is not needed for GnuPG-1.4.7.
smime_keys	manages a keystore for S/MIME certificates.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Pine-4.64

Introduction to Pine

The Pine package contains the Pine Mail User Agent and several server daemons for various mail protocols, in addition to some nice file and directory editing/browsing programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirror.sit.wisc.edu/pub/net/mail/pine/pine4.64.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.cac.washington.edu/pine/pine4.64.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 39ca07b3d305b4cd0d6aaf4585123275
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 64 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/pine-4.64-utf8-1.patch

Pine Dependencies

Required

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.3.39 and MIT Kerberos V5-1.6

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pine

Installation of Pine

Install Pine by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../pine-4.64-utf8-1.patch &&
sed -i "s@/usr/local/lib/pine@/etc/pine@g" \
    $(grep -lr /usr/local/lib/pine *) &&
./build DEBUG=-O MAILSPOOL=/var/mail \
    SSLDIR=/usr SSLCERTS=/etc/ssl/certs slx

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m644 doc/*.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -p -m644 doc/tech-notes/*.html /usr/share/doc/pine4.64 &&
install -v -m755 \
bin/{pine,imapd,ipop2d,ipop3d,mailutil,mtest,pico,pilot,rpdump,rpload} \
    /usr/bin

Command Explanations

patch -Np1 -i ../pine-4.64-utf8-1.patch: This patch enables Pine UTF-8 and charset conversion.

sed -i "s@/usr/ ... /lib/pine *): This sed will make Pine use /etc for configuration files. It also alters the documentation to reflect that.

The build procedure for Pine is somewhat unusual, in that options usually passed as ./configure options or housed in $CFLAGS must all be passed on the command line to the ./build script.

./build slx: Pine offers quite a few target platforms, slx specifies Linux using -lcrypt to get the crypt function. See the doc/pine-ports file for more information and other authentication options.

DEBUG=-O: This flag compiles an optimized version of pine and pico that produces no debug files.

MAILSPOOL=/var/mail: Location of mail spool files, /var/mail.

SSLDIR=/usr SSLCERTS=/etc/ssl/certs: Location of OpenSSL files.

Configuring Pine

Config Files

~/.pinerc

Configuration Information

The pine executable needs no global configuration to use. Users set Pine options in ~/.pinerc using an internal configuration menu.

Installed Programs: imapd, ipop2d, ipop3d, mtest, pico, pilot, pine, rpdump, and rpload

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/pine4.64

Short Descriptions

imapd	is the IMAP server daemon.
ipop2d	is an IMAP to POP2 conversion server.
ipop3d	is an IMAP to POP3 conversion server.
metest	is a minimal IMAP mail user agent, used for debugging.
pico	is a stand-alone editor, similar to the Pine internal message composer.
pilot	is a file and directory navigator and browser.
pine	is the Pine mail user agent.
rpdump	is used to copy data from remote Pine configuration files or address books into a local file.
rpload	is the Pine remote data utility, used to convert local Pine configuration files or address books into remote configurations or address books.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

TIN-1.8.3

Introduction to TIN

TIN is a threaded NNTP and spool based console-mode UseNet newsreader. It supports threading, scoring, different charsets, and many other useful things. It has also support for different languages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/newsreaders/tin/v1.8/tin-1.8.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.tin.org/pub/news/clients/tin/v1.8/tin-1.8.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e6ed45205020665c097556822b0d575b
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 12.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

TIN Dependencies

Optional

PCRE-7.6, libidn-0.6.14, an MTA that provides the sendmail command or Heirloom mailx-12.2, GnuPG-1.4.7, Aspell-0.60.5, INN, UUDeview, Socks, Metamail, and Dmalloc or dbmalloc

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Tin

Installation of TIN

Install TIN by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --with-screen=ncursesw \
    --enable-nntp-only --disable-printing &&
make build

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install_sysdefs &&
rm -vf doc/*.? &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/tin-1.8.3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/tin-1.8.3

Command Explanations

--with-screen=ncursesw: This switch forces the use of wide-character functions from the ncursesw library (for UTF-8 and Asian languages support).

--enable-nntp-only: Reading news from a local spool is disabled with this switch. Don't use this if you have installed INN and want to use its spool.

--disable-printing: This switch disables printing since TIN cannot send non-ASCII text to the printer correctly. Remove this switch if you can tolerate this limitation.

--with-editor: This switch sets the default editor used by TIN. The default is vi.

Configuring TIN

Config Files

/etc/tin/tinrc, ~/.tin/tinrc, ~/.newsrc, /etc/tin/tin.defaults, /etc/tin/mime.types, /etc/tin/keymap and /etc/mailcap

Configuration Information

Set some global defaults for TIN by running the following commands as the root user:

cat > /etc/tin/tinrc << "EOF"
use_mouse=ON
getart_limit=100
translit=ON
EOF

Now, as an unprivileged user, subscribe to some newsgroups, specify the news server, and run tin:

cat >> ~/.newsrc << "EOF"
gmane.linux.lfs.devel:
gmane.linux.lfs.beyond.devel:
EOF
export NNTPSERVER=news.gmane.org
tin -Q

For printing, TIN executes the lpr command. This can be provided by CUPS-1.2.12 or LPRng-3.8.28.

If you do not have the metamail program, TIN will use an internal parser for multipart MIME articles. Alternatively, you can use Mutt for MIME parsing through the metamutt shell script. This requires both the Mutt-1.5.17 and Procmail-3.22 programs. To use metamutt, set metamail_prog=metamutt in tin.

Installed Programs: tin, rtin, tinews.pl, metamutt, opt-case.pl, w2r.pl, and url_handler.sh

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /etc/tin

Short Descriptions

tin	is a UseNet news reader.
rtin	is a symbolic link to tin.
tinews.pl	posts and signs an article via NNTP.
metamutt	is a replacement of metamail using Mutt.
opt-case.pl	optimizes case insensitive regexp filters for tin.
w2r.pl	converts tin wildmat filters to tin regexp filters.
url_handler.sh	calls a web browser for viewing hyperlinks.

Last updated on 2008-03-11 11:31:08 -0500

Other Mail and News Programs

Pan-0.14.2 is a GTK2 based newsreader program.

knode is a Qt based newsreader program from kdepim-3.5.9.

kmail is a Qt based mail client from kdepim-3.5.9.

Balsa-2.3.22 is a GTK2 based mail client.

SeaMonkey-1.1.9 includes both a mail client and newsreader in its installation.

Thunderbird-2.0.0.12 is a mail/news client based on the Mozilla code base.

Evolution-2.10.3 includes a GTK2 based mail client.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Part V. Servers

Chapter 19. Major Servers

Major servers are the programs that provide content or services to users or other programs.

Apache-2.2.8

Introduction to Apache

The Apache package contains an open-source HTTP server. It is useful for creating local intranet web sites or running huge web serving operations.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://archive.apache.org/dist/httpd/httpd-2.2.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://apache.mirrors.pair.com/httpd/httpd-2.2.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 76d2598a4797163d07cd50e5304aa7cd
Download size: 4.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 83 MB
Estimated build time: 2.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/httpd-2.2.8-config-1.patch

Apache Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, PCRE-7.6, APR, APR-util, and distcache

Optional (Only if Using the Bundled APR-util)

pkg-config-0.22, expat-2.0.1, GDBM-1.8.3, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, and SQLite

Though you can install APR and APR-util as separate components, it is recommended to use the bundled versions that come with the Apache HTTPD tarball.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/apache

Installation of Apache

For security reasons, running the server as an unprivileged user and group is strongly encouraged. Create the following group and user using the following commands (as root):

groupadd -g 25 apache &&
useradd -c "Apache Server" -d /dev/null -g apache \
        -s /bin/false -u 25 apache

Note

The above command directs the Apache user's home directory to /dev/null. This may not work for some add-ons such as ViewVC, a browser interface for CVS and Subversion version control repositories. See the User Notes for details for specific applications.

The following patch modifies the layout of destination directories and among them, the build directory at /usr/lib/apache/build. This will allow the modules added to Apache to be configured without errors. Apply the patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../httpd-2.2.8-config-1.patch

Note

You may wish to review the output from ./configure --help and include whatever parameters are necessary to the configure command below to build the modules required for your installation. There are as many as 62 additional parameters you can add to the configure command to build additional modules. Some of the extra parameters which aren't described or mentioned in the --help information are listed in the “Command Explanations” section below.

If you are using the bundled version of APR-util and you are going to install Subversion with Berkeley DB back-end support, ensure you use the parameters shown in the “Command Explanations” section below.

Build and install Apache by running the following commands:

./configure --enable-layout=FHS --enable-mods-shared=all &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v root:root /usr/lib/apache/httpd.exp \
    /usr/sbin/{apxs,apachectl,dbmmanage,envvars{,-std}} \
    /usr/share/man/man1/{dbmmanage,ht{dbm,digest,passwd}}.1 \
    /usr/share/man/man8/{ab,apachectl,apxs,htcacheclean,httpd}.8 \
    /usr/share/man/man8/{logresolve,rotatelogs,suexec}.8 &&
chown -v -R apache:apache /srv/www

Command Explanations

--enable-mods-shared=all: The modules should be compiled and used as Dynamic Shared Objects (DSOs) so they can be included and excluded from the server using the run-time configuration directives.

--enable-ssl: Use this parameter to create the mod_ssl module and enable SSL support. This parameter is mentioned as one of many parameters which can be passed to the configure command to create additional DSO modules.

--with-pcre: Add this parameter to use the system installed version of the PCRE library.

--with-z: Add this parameter to use the system installed version of the Zlib library.

--with-ldap: This parameter is required if you passed the --enable-authnz-ldap or --enable-ldap options to configure and enabled the OpenLDAP modules.

--with-dbm=db45 --with-berkeley-db: Use these parameters if you require Berkeley DB support in the bundled version of APR-util (required for Berkeley DB back-end support in Subversion).

chown root:root ...: This command changes the ownership of some installed files, the result of building the package as a user other than root.

chown -R apache:apache /srv/www: By default, the installation process installs files (documentation, error messages, default icons, etc.) with the ownership of the user that extracted the files from the tar file. If you want to change the ownership to another user, you should do so at this point. The only requirement is that the document directories need to be accessible by the httpd process with (r-x) permissions and files need to be readable (r--) by the apache user.

Configuring Apache

Config Files

/etc/apache/*

Configuration Information

The main configuration file is named /etc/apache/httpd.conf. Modify it so that the HTTP server runs as the dedicated user and group:

sed -i -e "s/User daemon/User apache/" \
       -e "s/Group daemon/Group apache/" \
    /etc/apache/httpd.conf

See http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.2/configuring.html for detailed instructions on customizing your Apache HTTP server configuration file.

There's a problem with the ISAPI DSO module caused from compiling with GCC-4.1.2. If you included the parameter to build the module, comment out the module's load command in the configuration file with the following command:

sed -i "s/^LoadModule isapi_module/# &/" \
    /etc/apache/httpd.conf

Boot Script

If you want the Apache server to start automatically when the system is booted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/apache init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-apache

Installed Programs: ab, apachectl, apr-config, apu-config, apxs, checkgid, dbmmanage, htdbm, htdigest, htpasswd, httpd, instdso.sh, logresolve, and rotatelogs

Installed Libraries: libapr-1.{so,a}, libaprutil-1.{so,a}, and /usr/lib/apache/*.so

Installed Directories: /etc/apache, /srv/www, /usr/include/apache, /usr/lib/apache, and /var/log/apache

Short Descriptions

ab	is a tool for benchmarking your Apache HTTP server.
apachectl	is a front end to the Apache HTTP server which is designed to help the administrator control the functioning of the Apache httpd daemon.
apxs	is a tool for building and installing extension modules for the Apache HTTP server.
dbmanage	is used to create and update the DBM format files used to store usernames and passwords for basic authentication of HTTP users.
htdigest	is used to create and update the flat-files used to store usernames, realms and passwords for digest authentication of HTTP users.
htpasswd	is used to create and update the flat-files used to store usernames and passwords for basic authentication of HTTP users.
httpd	is the Apache HTTP server program.
instdso.sh	is a script which installs Apache DSO modules.
logresolve	is a post-processing program to resolve IP-addresses in Apache's access log files.
rotatelogs	is a simple program for use in conjunction with Apache's piped log file feature.

Last updated on 2008-03-22 21:40:43 -0500

BIND-9.4.1-P1

Introduction to BIND

The BIND package provides a DNS server and client utilities. If you are only interested in the utilities, refer to the BIND Utilities-9.4.1-P1.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/servers/isc/bind9/9.4.1-P1/bind-9.4.1-P1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/bind9/9.4.1-P1/bind-9.4.1-P1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 44e0514e6105ddaa235394045d9aeb0c
Download size: 6.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 98 MB
Estimated build time: 1.9 SBU (additional 11 minutes, processor independent, to run the complete test suite)

Additional Downloads

Optional patch (if net-tools is not installed): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/bind-9.4.1-P1-use_iproute2-1.patch

BIND Dependencies

Optional

Optional (to run the test suite)

Net-DNS-0.57 and Net-tools-1.60 (you may omit net-tools by using the optional patch to utilize iproute2)

Optional (to rebuild documentation)

teTeX-3.0 and libxslt-1.1.22

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/bind

Installation of BIND

If you have chosen not to install net-tools, apply the iproute2 patch with the following command:

patch -Np1 -i ../bind-9.4.1-P1-use_iproute2-1.patch

Install BIND by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --localstatedir=/var \
            --mandir=/usr/share/man \
            --enable-threads \
            --with-libtool &&
sed -i "s@198.32.64.12@199.7.83.42@" \
    lib/dns/rootns.c &&
make

Issue the following commands to run the complete suite of tests. First, as the root user, set up some test interfaces:

bin/tests/system/ifconfig.sh up

Now run the test suite as an unprivileged user:

make check 2>&1 | tee check.log

Again as root, clean up the test interfaces:

bin/tests/system/ifconfig.sh down

Issue the following command to check that all 148 tests ran successfully:

grep "R:PASS" check.log | wc -l

Finally, install the package as the root user:

make install &&
chmod 755 /usr/lib/lib{bind9,isc{,cc,cfg},lwres,dns}.so.*.?.? &&

cd doc &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/bind-9.4.1-P1/{arm,draft,misc,rfc} &&
install -v -m644 arm/*.html \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.4.1-P1/arm &&
install -v -m644 draft/*.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.4.1-P1/draft &&
install -v -m644 rfc/* \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.4.1-P1/rfc &&
install -v -m644 \
    misc/{dnssec,ipv6,migrat*,options,rfc-compliance,roadmap,sdb} \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.4.1-P1/misc

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This parameter forces BIND to look for configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--enable-threads: This parameter enables multi-threading capability.

--with-libtool: This parameter forces the building of dynamic libraries and links the installed binaries to these libraries.

sed -i "s@198.32.64.12@199.7.83.42@" lib/dns/rootns.c: Use updated address for L.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.

chmod 755 /usr/lib/{lib{bind9,isc{,cc,cfg},lwres,dns}.so.*.?.?}: Enable the execute bit to prevent a warning when using ldd to check library dependencies.

cd doc; install ...: These commands install additional package documentation. Omit any or all of these commands if desired.

Configuring BIND

Config files

named.conf, root.hints, 127.0.0, rndc.conf and resolv.conf

Configuration Information

BIND will be configured to run in a chroot jail as an unprivileged user (named). This configuration is more secure in that a DNS compromise can only affect a few files in the named user's HOME directory.

Create the unprivileged user and group named:

groupadd -g 20 named &&
useradd -c "BIND Owner" -g named -s /bin/false -u 20 named &&
install -d -m770 -o named -g named /srv/named

Set up some files, directories and devices needed by BIND:

cd /srv/named &&
mkdir -p dev etc/namedb/slave var/run &&
mknod /srv/named/dev/null c 1 3 &&
mknod /srv/named/dev/random c 1 8 &&
chmod 666 /srv/named/dev/{null,random} &&
mkdir /srv/named/etc/namedb/pz &&
cp /etc/localtime /srv/named/etc

Then, generate a key for use in the named.conf and rdnc.conf files using the rndc-confgen command:

rndc-confgen -r /dev/urandom -b 512 | \
    grep -m 1 "secret" | cut -d '"' -f 2

Create the named.conf file from which named will read the location of zone files, root name servers and secure DNS keys:

cat > /srv/named/etc/named.conf << "EOF"
 options {
     directory "/etc/namedb";
    pid-file "/var/run/named.pid";
    statistics-file "/var/run/named.stats";

 };
 controls {
     inet 127.0.0.1 allow { localhost; } keys { rndc_key; };
 };
 key "rndc_key" {
     algorithm hmac-md5;
     secret "<Insert secret from rndc-confgen's output here>";
 };
 zone "." {
     type hint;
     file "root.hints";
 };
 zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
     type master;
     file "pz/127.0.0";
 };

// Bind 9 now logs by default through syslog (except debug).
// These are the default logging rules.

logging {
     category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
     category unmatched { null; };

  channel default_syslog {
      syslog daemon;                      // send to syslog's daemon
                                          // facility
      severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                          // and higher
  };

  channel default_debug {
      file "named.run";                   // write to named.run in
                                          // the working directory
                                          // Note: stderr is used instead
                                          // of "named.run"
                                          // if the server is started
                                          // with the '-f' option.
      severity dynamic;                   // log at the server's
                                          // current debug level
  };

  channel default_stderr {
      stderr;                             // writes to stderr
      severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                          // and higher
  };

  channel null {
     null;                                // toss anything sent to
                                          // this channel
  };
};

EOF

Create the rndc.conf file with the following commands:

cat > /etc/rndc.conf << "EOF"
key rndc_key {
algorithm "hmac-md5";
    secret
    "<Insert secret from rndc-confgen's output here>";
    };
options {
    default-server localhost;
    default-key    rndc_key;
};
EOF

The rndc.conf file contains information for controlling named operations with the rndc utility.

Create a zone file with the following contents:

cat > /srv/named/etc/namedb/pz/127.0.0 << "EOF"
$TTL 3D
@      IN      SOA     ns.local.domain. hostmaster.local.domain. (
                        1       ; Serial
                        8H      ; Refresh
                        2H      ; Retry
                        4W      ; Expire
                        1D)     ; Minimum TTL
                NS      ns.local.domain.
1               PTR     localhost.
EOF

Create the root.hints file with the following commands:

Note

Caution must be used to ensure there are no leading spaces in this file.

cat > /srv/named/etc/namedb/root.hints << "EOF"
.                       6D  IN      NS      A.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      B.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      C.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      D.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      E.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      F.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      G.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      H.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      I.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      J.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      K.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      L.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      M.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
A.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       198.41.0.4
B.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.228.79.201
C.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.33.4.12
D.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       128.8.10.90
E.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.203.230.10
F.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.5.5.241
G.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.112.36.4
H.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       128.63.2.53
I.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.36.148.17
J.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.58.128.30
K.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       193.0.14.129
L.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       199.7.83.42
M.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       202.12.27.33
EOF

The root.hints file is a list of root name servers. This file must be updated periodically with the dig utility. A current copy of root.hints can be obtained from ftp://rs.internic.net/domain/named.root. Consult the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual for details.

Create or modify resolv.conf to use the new name server with the following commands:

Note

Replace <yourdomain.com> with your own valid domain name.

cp /etc/resolv.conf /etc/resolv.conf.bak &&
cat > /etc/resolv.conf << "EOF"
search <yourdomain.com>
nameserver 127.0.0.1
EOF

Set permissions on the chroot jail with the following command:

chown -R named.named /srv/named

Boot Script

To start the DNS server at boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/bind init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-bind

Now start BIND with the new boot script:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/bind start

Testing BIND

Test out the new BIND 9 installation. First query the local host address with dig:

dig -x 127.0.0.1

Now try an external name lookup, taking note of the speed difference in repeated lookups due to the caching. Run the dig command twice on the same address:

dig www.linuxfromscratch.org &&
dig www.linuxfromscratch.org

You can see almost instantaneous results with the named caching lookups. Consult the BIND Administrator Reference Manual located at doc/arm/Bv9ARM.html in the package source tree, for further configuration options.

Installed Programs: dig, dnssec-keygen, dnssec-signzone, host, isc-config.sh, lwresd, named, named-checkconf, named-checkzone, nslookup, nsupdate, rndc, and rndc-confgen

Installed Libraries: libbind9.{so,a}, libdns.{so,a}, libisc.{so,a}, libisccc.{so,a}, libisccfg.{so,a}, and liblwres.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /srv/named, /usr/include/bind9, /usr/include/dns, /usr/include/dst, /usr/include/isc, /usr/include/isccc, /usr/include/isccfg, /usr/include/lwres, and /usr/share/doc/bind-9.4.1-P1

Short Descriptions

dig	interrogates DNS servers.
dnssec-keygen	is a key generator for secure DNS.
dnssec-signzone	generates signed versions of zone files.
host	is a utility for DNS lookups.
lwresd	is a caching-only name server for local process use.
named	is the name server daemon.
named-checkconf	checks the syntax of `named.conf` files.
named-checkzone	checks zone file validity.
nslookup	is a program used to query Internet domain nameservers.
nsupdate	is used to submit DNS update requests.
rndc	controls the operation of BIND.
rndc-confgen	generates `rndc.conf` files.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

NFS Utilities-1.1.2

Introduction to NFS Utilities

The NFS Utilities package contains the userspace server and client tools necessary to use the kernel's NFS abilities. NFS is a protocol that allows sharing file systems over the network.

Package information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/nfs/nfs-utils-1.1.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 76ee9274c2b867839427eba91b327f03
Download size: 778 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

NFS Utilities Dependencies

Required

portmap-6.0 (Runtime dependency)

Optional

TCP Wrapper-7.6

Optional for NFSv4 Support

pkg-config-0.22, libevent, and libnsfidmap

Optional for GSS (RPC Security) Support

pkg-config-0.22, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1 or libgssapi, and librpcsecgss

Optional for SPKM-3 Support

SPKM-3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/nfs-utils

Kernel Configuration

Enable the following options in the kernel configuration and recompile the kernel if necessary:

File systems:
  Network File Systems:
    NFS File System Support: M or Y
    NFS Server Support: M or Y

Select the appropriate sub-options that appear when the above options are selected.

Installation of NFS Utilities

Before you compile the program, ensure that the nobody user and nogroup group have been created. You can add them by running the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 99 nogroup &&
useradd -c "Unprivileged Nobody" -d /dev/null -g nogroup \
    -s /bin/false -u 99 nobody

Note

The classic uid and gid values are 65534 which is also -2 when interpreted as a signed 16-bit number. These values impact other files on some filesystems that do not have support for sparse files. The nobody and nogroup values are relatively arbitrary. The impact on a server is nil if the exports file is configured correctly. If it is misconfigured, an ls -l or ps listing will show a uid or gid number of 65534 instead of a name. The client uses nobody only as the user running rpc.statd.

Install NFS Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --disable-nfsv4 \
            --disable-gss &&
make

If your /usr directory is NFS mounted, you should install the executables in /sbin by passing an additional parameter --sbindir=/sbin to the above ./configure command.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-nfsv4: Disables support for NFS version 4.

--disable-gss: Disables support for RPCSEC GSS (RPC Security).

Configuring NFS Utilities

Server Configuration

/etc/exports contains the exported directories on NFS servers. Refer to the exports.5 manual page for the syntax of this file. Also refer to the "NFS HowTo" available at http://nfs.sourceforge.net/nfs-howto/ for information on how to configure the servers and clients in a secure manner. For example, for sharing the /home directory over the local network, the following line may be added:

/home <192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0>(rw,subtree_check,anonuid=99,anongid=99)

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs-server init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package to start the server at boot.

make install-nfs-server

Now create the /etc/sysconfig/nfs-server configuration file:

cat > /etc/sysconfig/nfs-server << "EOF"
PORT="2049"
PROCESSES="8"
QUOTAS="no"
KILLDELAY="10"
EOF

tcpwrappers Configuration

If you have TCP Wrapper-7.6 installed and there is a restrictive /etc/hosts.deny file, ensure you have an entry in the /etc/hosts.allow file for access from the portmap daemon. See the man page in section 5 for hosts_access for details on creating appropriate rules.

Client Configuration

/etc/fstab contains the directories that are to be mounted on the client. Alternately the partitions can be mounted by using the mount command with the proper options. To mount the /home and /usr partitions, add the following to the /etc/fstab:

<server-name>:/home  /home nfs   rw,_netdev,rsize=8192,wsize=8192 0 0
<server-name>:/usr   /usr  nfs   ro,_netdev,rsize=8192            0 0

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs-client init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package to start the client services at boot.

make install-nfs-client

To automatically mount nfs filesystems, clients will also need to install the netfs bootscript as described in Configuring for Network Filesystems.

Installed Programs: exportfs, mount.nfs, mount.nfs4, nfsstat, rpc.mountd, rpc.nfsd, rpc.statd, rpcdebug, showmount, sm-notify, start-statd and umount.nfs as well as umount.nfs4

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /var/lib/nfs

Short Descriptions

exportfs	maintains a list of NFS exported file systems.
mount.nfs	Used to mount a network share using NFS
mount.nfs4	Used to mount a network share using NFSv4
nfsstat	prints NFS statistics.
rpc.mountd	implements the NFS mount protocol on an NFS server.
rpc.nfsd	implements the user level part of the NFS service on the server.
rpc.statd	is used by the NFS file locking service. Run on both sides, client as well as server, when you want file locking enabled.
rpcdebug	sets or clears the kernel's NFS client and server debug flags.
showmount	displays mount information for an NFS server.
sm-notify	is used to send Network Status Monitor reboot messages.
start-statd	is a script called by nfsmount when mounting a filesystem with locking enabled, if statd does not appear to be running. It can be customised with whatever flags are appropriate for the site.
umount.nfs	Used to unmount a network share using NFS
umount.nfs4	Used to unmount a network share using NFSv4

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

OpenSSH-4.7p1

Introduction to OpenSSH

The OpenSSH package contains ssh clients and the sshd daemon. This is useful for encrypting authentication and subsequent traffic over a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://sunsite.ualberta.ca/pub/OpenBSD/OpenSSH/portable/openssh-4.7p1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.openbsd.org/pub/OpenBSD/OpenSSH/portable/openssh-4.7p1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 50a800fd2c6def9e9a53068837e87b91
Download size: 968 KB
Estimated disk space required: 16.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU (additional 1.2 SBU to run the test suite)

OpenSSH Dependencies

Required

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, TCP Wrapper-7.6, X Window System, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1, Net-tools-1.60, Sysstat-7.0.4, libedit (provides a command-line history feature to sftp), OpenSC, and libsectok

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/OpenSSH

Installation of OpenSSH

OpenSSH runs as two processes when connecting to other computers. The first process is a privileged process and controls the issuance of privileges as necessary. The second process communicates with the network. Additional installation steps are necessary to set up the proper environment, which are performed by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m700 -d /var/lib/sshd &&
chown -v root:sys /var/lib/sshd &&
groupadd -g 50 sshd &&
useradd -c 'sshd PrivSep' -d /var/lib/sshd -g sshd \
    -s /bin/false -u 50 sshd

OpenSSH is very sensitive to changes in the linked OpenSSL libraries. If you recompile OpenSSL, OpenSSH may fail to startup. An alternative is to link against the static OpenSSL library. To link against the static library, execute the following command:

sed -i 's@-lcrypto@/usr/lib/libcrypto.a -ldl@' configure

Install OpenSSH by running the following commands:

sed -i 's@ -ldes@@' configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/ssh --datadir=/usr/share/sshd \
    --libexecdir=/usr/lib/openssh --with-md5-passwords \
    --with-privsep-path=/var/lib/sshd \
    --with-xauth=/usr/bin/xauth &&
make

If you linked tcp_wrappers into the build using the --with-tcp-wrappers parameter, ensure you add 127.0.0.1 to the sshd line in /etc/hosts.allow if you have a restrictive /etc/hosts.deny file, or the test suite will fail. Additionally, the testsuite requires an installed copy of scp to complete the mulitplexing tests. To run the test suite, issue the following commnds as the root user:

if test -f /usr/bin/scp
then
    mv /usr/bin/scp /usr/bin/scp-bak
fi &&
cp scp /usr/bin/scp &&
make tests 2>&1 | tee check.log
grep "FATAL" check.log

If the above command produces no 'FATAL' errors, then proceed with the installation, again as the root user:

rm /usr/bin/scp &&
if test -f /usr/bin/scp-bak
then
    rm /usr/bin/scp-bak
fi &&
make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/openssh-4.7p1 &&
install -v -m644 INSTALL LICENCE OVERVIEW README* WARNING.RNG \
    /usr/share/doc/openssh-4.7p1

Command Explanations

sed -i 's@ -ldes@@' configure: This command fixes a build crash if you used the --with-kerberos5 parameter and you built the Heimdal package in accordance with the BLFS instructions. The command is harmless in all other instances.

--sysconfdir=/etc/ssh: This prevents the configuration files from being installed in /usr/etc.

--datadir=/usr/share/sshd: This switch puts the Ssh.bin file (used for SmartCard authentication) in /usr/share/sshd.

--with-md5-passwords: This is required with the default configuration of Shadow password suite in LFS.

--libexecdir=/usr/lib/openssh: This parameter changes the installation path of some programs to /usr/lib/openssh instead of /usr/libexec.

--with-pam: This parameter enables Linux-PAM support in the build.

--with-xauth=/usr/bin/xauth: Set the default location for the xauth binary for X authentication. Change the location if xauth will be installed to a different path. This can also be controlled from sshd_config with the XAuthLocation keyword. You can omit this switch if Xorg is already installed.

Configuring OpenSSH

Config Files

~/.ssh/*, /etc/ssh/ssh_config, and /etc/ssh/sshd_config

There are no required changes to any of these files. However, you may wish to view the /etc/ssh/ files and make any changes appropriate for the security of your system. One recommended change is that you disable root login via ssh. Execute the following command as the root user to disable root login via ssh:

echo "PermitRootLogin no" >> /etc/ssh/sshd_config

If you added LinuxPAM support, then you will need to add a configuration file for sshd. Issue the following commands as the root user:

sed 's@d/login@d/sshd@g' /etc/pam.d/login > /etc/pam.d/sshd &&
chmod 644 /etc/pam.d/sshd

Additional configuration information can be found in the man pages for sshd, ssh and ssh-agent.

Boot Script

To start the SSH server at system boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/sshd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-sshd

Installed Programs: scp, sftp, sftp-server, slogin, ssh, sshd, ssh-add, ssh-agent, ssh-keygen, ssh-keyscan, and ssh-keysign

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/ssh, /var/lib/sshd and /usr/share/doc/openssh-4.7p1

Short Descriptions

scp	is a file copy program that acts like rcp except it uses an encrypted protocol.
sftp	is an FTP-like program that works over SSH1 and SSH2 protocols.
sftp-server	is an SFTP server subsystem. This program is not normally called directly by the user.
slogin	is a symlink to ssh.
ssh	is an rlogin/rsh-like client program except it uses an encrypted protocol.
sshd	is a daemon that listens for ssh login requests.
ssh-add	is a tool which adds keys to the ssh-agent.
ssh-agent	is an authentication agent that can store private keys.
ssh-keygen	is a key generation tool.
ssh-keyscan	is a utility for gathering public host keys from a number of hosts.
ssh-keysign	is used by ssh to access the local host keys and generate the digital signature required during hostbased authentication with SSH protocol version 2. This program is not normally called directly by the user.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

ProFTPD-1.3.0

Introduction to ProFTPD

The ProFTPD package contains a secure and highly configurable FTP daemon. This is useful for serving large file archives over a network.

Package Information

Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.proftpd.org/distrib/source/proftpd-1.3.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fae47d01b52e035eb6b7190e74c17722
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 12.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

ProFTPD Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/proftpd

Installation of ProFTPD

For security reasons, you should install ProFTPD using an unprivileged user and group. As the root user:

groupadd -g 46 proftpd &&
useradd -c proftpd -d /srv/ftp -g proftpd \
        -s /usr/bin/proftpdshell -u 46 proftpd &&
install -v -d -m775 -o proftpd -g proftpd /srv/ftp &&
ln -v -s /bin/false /usr/bin/proftpdshell &&
echo /usr/bin/proftpdshell >> /etc/shells

Install ProFTPD as an unprivileged user by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var/run &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

install -v -d -m775 -o proftpd -g proftpd /srv/ftp: Create the home directory for ProFTPD.

ln -v -s /bin/false /usr/bin/proftpdshell: Set the default shell as a link to an invalid shell.

echo /usr/bin/proftpdshell >> /etc/shells: Fake a valid shell for compatibility purposes.

Note

The above two commands can be omitted if the following directive is placed in the configuration file:

RequireValidShell off

By default, proftpd will require that users logging in have valid shells. The RequireValidShell directive turns off this requirement. This is only recommended if you are setting up your FTP server exclusively for anonymous downloads.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This prevents the configuration files from going to /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/run: This uses /var/run instead of /usr/var for lock files.

Configuring ProFTPD

Config Files

/etc/proftpd.conf

Configuration Information

This is a simple, download-only sample configuration. See the ProFTPD documentation in /usr/share/doc/proftpd and consult the website at http://www.proftpd.org/ for example configurations.

cat > /etc/proftpd.conf << "EOF"
# This is a basic ProFTPD configuration file
# It establishes a single server and a single anonymous login.

ServerName                      "ProFTPD Default Installation"
ServerType                      standalone
DefaultServer                   on

# Port 21 is the standard FTP port.
Port                            21
# Umask 022 is a good standard umask to prevent new dirs and files
# from being group and world writable.
Umask                           022

# To prevent DoS attacks, set the maximum number of child processes
# to 30.  If you need to allow more than 30 concurrent connections
# at once, simply increase this value.  Note that this ONLY works
# in standalone mode, in inetd mode you should use an inetd server
# that allows you to limit maximum number of processes per service
# (such as xinetd)
MaxInstances                    30

# Set the user and group that the server normally runs at.
User                            proftpd
Group                           proftpd

# Normally, files should be overwritable.
<Directory /*>
  AllowOverwrite                on
</Directory>

# A basic anonymous configuration, no upload directories.
<Anonymous ~proftpd>
  User                          proftpd
  Group                         proftpd
  # Clients should be able to login with "anonymous" as well as "proftpd"
  UserAlias                     anonymous proftpd

  # Limit the maximum number of anonymous logins
  MaxClients                    10

  # 'welcome.msg' should be displayed at login, and '.message' displayed
  # in each newly chdired directory.
  DisplayLogin                  welcome.msg
  DisplayFirstChdir             .message

  # Limit WRITE everywhere in the anonymous chroot
  <Limit WRITE>
    DenyAll
  </Limit>
</Anonymous>
EOF

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/proftpd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-proftpd

Installed Programs: ftpcount, ftpdctl, ftptop, ftpwho, ftpshut, proftpd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /var/run/proftpd

Short Descriptions

proftpd	is the FTP daemon.
ftpcount	shows the current number of connections.
ftpshut	shuts down all proftpd servers at a given time.
ftptop	displays running status on connections.
ftpwho	shows current process information for each session.

Last updated on 2007-07-06 16:22:19 -0500

Samba-3.0.30

Introduction to Samba

The Samba package provides file and print services to SMB/CIFS clients and Windows networking to Linux clients. Samba can also be configured as a Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controller replacement (with caveats working with NT PDC's and BDC's), a file/print server acting as a member of a Windows NT 4.0 or Active Directory domain and a NetBIOS (rfc1001/1002) nameserver (which amongst other things provides LAN browsing support).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://us1.samba.org/samba/ftp/stable/samba-3.0.30.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://us5.samba.org/pub/samba-ftp/samba-3.0.30.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: d647ec1f34414fa8691f74536dcccfb5
Download size: 20 MB
Estimated disk space required: 238 MB
Estimated build time: 2.3 SBU (additional 1.0 SBU to run the test suite)

Samba Dependencies

Optional

popt-1.10.4, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, CUPS-1.2.12, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, Gamin-0.1.9, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, Python-2.5.2 (to build Samba API bindings for the Python installation), libacl (requires libattr), and Valgrind (optionally used by the test suite)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/samba3

Installation of Samba

Note

If you wish to run the test suite after the binaries are built, you must add the --enable-socket-wrapper parameter to the configure script below. You may want to run configure with the --help parameter first. There may be other parameters needed to take advantage of optional dependencies.

Install Samba by running the following commands:

cd source &&

./configure \
    --prefix=/usr \
    --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var \
    --with-piddir=/var/run \
    --with-pammodulesdir=/lib/security \
    --with-fhs \
    --with-smbmount &&
make

You must become the root user to run the test framework. To run the tests, issue: make test. If you have Linux-PAM installed and built the PAM library modules, you can perform a dlopen test by issuing: make test_pam_modules.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /usr/lib/samba/libsmbclient.so /usr/lib &&
ln -v -sf ../libsmbclient.so /usr/lib/samba &&
ln -v -sf libsmbclient.so /usr/lib/libsmbclient.so.0 &&

chmod -v 644 /usr/include/lib{smbclient,msrpc}.h &&

install -v -m755 nsswitch/libnss_win{s,bind}.so /lib &&
ln -v -sf libnss_winbind.so /lib/libnss_winbind.so.2 &&
ln -v -sf libnss_wins.so /lib/libnss_wins.so.2 &&

install -v -m644 ../examples/smb.conf.default /etc/samba &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/samba-3.0.30 &&
install -v -m644 ../docs/*.pdf /usr/share/doc/samba-3.0.30 &&
ln -v -s ../../samba/swat  /usr/share/doc/samba-3.0.30

If you passed the --with-python option to the configure script, issue the following command as the root user to install the Python extensions:

make python_install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: Sets the configuration file directory to avoid the default of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var: Sets the variable data directory to avoid the default of /usr/var.

--with-fhs: Assigns all other file paths in a manner compliant with the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FHS).

--with-smbmount: Orders the creation of an extra binary for use by the mount command so that mounting remote SMB (Windows) shares becomes no more complex than mounting remote NFS shares.

--with-pam: Use this parameter to link Linux-PAM into the build. This also builds the pam_winbind.so and pam_smbpass.so PAM modules. You can find instructions on how to configure and use the pam_winbind.somodule by running man winbindd.

mv -v /usr/lib/samba/libsmbclient.so ...; ln -v -sf ../libsmbclient.so ...: The libsmbclient.so library is needed by other packages. This command moves it to a location where other packages can find it.

install -v -m755 nsswitch/libnss_win{s,bind}.so /lib: The nss libraries are not installed by default. If you intend to use winbindd for domain auth, and/or WINS name resolution, you need these libraries.

ln -v -sf libnss_winbind.so /lib/libnss_winbind.so.2 and ln -v -sf libnss_wins.so /lib/libnss_wins.so.2: These symlinks are required by glibc to use the NSS libraries.

install -v -m644 ../examples/smb.conf.default /etc/samba: This copies a default smb.conf file into /etc/samba. This sample configuration will not work until you copy it to /etc/samba/smb.conf and make the appropriate changes for your installation. See the configuration section for minimum values which must be set.

Configuring Samba

Config Files

/etc/samba/smb.conf

Mounting Shares by Unprivileged Users

If it is desired for unprivileged users to directly mount (and unmount) SMB and CIFS shares, the smbmnt, smbumount, mount.cifs and umount.cifs commands must be setuid root. Note that users can only mount SMB/CIFS shares on a mount point owned by that user (requires write access also). If desired, change these programs to setuid root by issuing the following command as the root user:

chmod -v 4755 /usr/bin/smb{mnt,umount} \
              /usr/sbin/{,u}mount.cifs

Printing to SMB Clients

If you use CUPS for print services, and you wish to print to a printer attached to an SMB client, you need to create an SMB backend device. To create the device, issue the following command as the root user:

ln -v -sf /usr/bin/smbspool /usr/lib/cups/backend/smb

Configuration Information

Due to the complexity and the many various uses for Samba, complete configuration for all the package's capabilities is well beyond the scope of the BLFS book. This section provides instructions to configure the /etc/samba/smb.conf file for two common scenarios. The complete contents of /etc/samba/smb.conf will depend on the purpose of Samba installation.

Note

You may find it easier to copy the configuration parameters shown below into an empty /etc/samba/smb.conf file instead of copying and editing the default file as mentioned in the “Command Explanations” section. How you create/edit the /etc/samba/smb.conf file will be left up to you. Do ensure the file is only writeable by the root user (mode 644).

Scenario 1: Minimal Standalone Client-Only Installation

Choose this variant if you only want to transfer files using smbclient, mount Windows shares and print to Windows printers, and don't want to share your files and printers to Windows machines.

A /etc/samba/smb.conf file with the following three parameters is sufficient:

[global]
    workgroup = MYGROUP
    dos charset = cp850
    unix charset = ISO-8859-1

The values in this example specify that the computer belongs to a Windows workgroup named “MYGROUP”, uses the “cp850” character set on the wire when talking to MS-DOS and MS Windows 9x, and that the filenames are stored in the “ISO-8859-1” encoding on the disk. Adjust these values appropriately for your installation. The “unix charset” value must be the same as the output of locale charmap when executed with the LANG variable set to your preferred locale, otherwise the ls command may not display correct filenames of downloaded files.

There is no need to run any Samba servers in this scenario, thus you don't need to install the provided bootscripts.

Scenario 2: Standalone File/Print Server

Choose this variant if you want to share your files and printers to Windows machines in your workgroup in addition to the capabilities described in Scenario 1.

In this case, the /etc/samba/smb.conf.default file may be a good template to start from. Also add “dos charset” and “unix charset” parameters to the “[global]” section as described in Scenario 1 in order to prevent filename corruption.

The following configuration file creates a separate share for each user's home directory and also makes all printers available to Windows machines:

[global]
    workgroup = MYGROUP
    dos charset = cp850
    unix charset = ISO-8859-1

[homes]
    comment = Home Directories
    browseable = no
    writable = yes

[printers]
    comment = All Printers
    path = /var/spool/samba
    browseable = no
    guest ok = no
    printable = yes

Other parameters you may wish to customize in the “[global]” section include:

    server string =
    security =
    hosts allow =
    load printers =
    log file =
    max log size =
    socket options =
    local master =

Reference the comments in the /etc/samba/smb.conf.default file for information regarding these parameters.

Since the smbd and nmbd daemons are needed in this case, install the samba bootscript. Be sure to run smbpasswd (with the -a option to add users) to enable and set passwords for all accounts that need Samba access, or use the SWAT web interface (see below) to do the same. Using the default Samba passdb backend, any user you attempt to add will also be required to exist in the /etc/passwd file.

Advanced Requirements

More complex scenarios involving domain control or membership are possible if the right flags are passed to the ./configure script when the package is built. Such setups are advanced topics and cannot be adequately covered in BLFS. Many complete books have been written on these topics alone. It should be noted, however, that a Samba BDC cannot be used as a fallback for a Windows PDC, and conversely, a Windows BDC cannot be used as a fallback for a Samba PDC. Also in some domain membership scenarios, the winbindd daemon and the corresponding bootscript are needed.

There is quite a bit of documentation available which covers many of these advanced configurations. Point your web browser to the links below to view some of the documentation included with the Samba package:

Using Samba, 2nd Edition; a popular book published by O'Reilly file:///usr/share/samba/swat/using_samba/toc.html
The Official Samba HOWTO and Reference Guide file:///usr/share/samba/swat/help/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/index.html
Samba-3 by Example file:///usr/share/samba/swat/help/Samba-Guide/index.html
The Samba-3 man Pages file:///usr/share/samba/swat/help/samba.7.html

Configuring SWAT

The built in SWAT (Samba Web Administration Tool) utility can be used for basic configuration of the Samba installation, but because it may be inconvenient, undesirable or perhaps even impossible to gain access to the console, BLFS recommends setting up access to SWAT using Stunnel. Without Stunnel, the root password is transmitted in clear text over the wire, and is considered an unacceptable security risk. After considering the security implications of using SWAT without Stunnel, and you still wish to implement SWAT without it, instructions are provided at this end of this section.

Setting up SWAT using Stunnel

First install, or ensure you have already installed, the Stunnel-4.21 package.

Next you must add entries to /etc/services and modify the inetd/xinetd configuration.

Add swat and swat_tunnel entries to /etc/services with the following commands issued as the root user:

echo "swat            904/tcp" >> /etc/services &&
echo "swat_tunnel     905/tcp" >> /etc/services

If inetd is used, the following command will add the swat_tunnel entry to /etc/inetd.conf (as user root):

echo "swat_tunnel stream tcp nowait.400 root /usr/sbin/swat swat" \
    >> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Samba file as /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel (you may need to modify or remove the “only_from” line to include the desired host[s]):

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel

service swat_tunnel
{
    port            = 905
    socket_type     = stream
    wait            = no
    only_from       = 127.0.0.1
    user            = root
    server          = /usr/sbin/swat
    log_on_failure  += USERID
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to read the new /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel file.

Next, you must add an entry for the swat service to the /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf file (as user root):

cat >> /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf << "EOF"
[swat]
accept  = 904
connect = 905
TIMEOUTclose = 1

EOF

Restart the stunnel daemon using the following command as the root user:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/stunnel restart

SWAT can be launched by pointing your web browser to https://<CA_DN_field>:904. Substitute the hostname listed in the DN field of the CA certificate used with Stunnel for <CA_DN_field>.

Setting up SWAT without Stunnel

Warning

BLFS does not recommend using these procedures because of the security risk involved. However, in a home network environment and disclosure of the root password is an acceptable risk, the following instructions are provided for your convenience.

Add a swat entry to /etc/services with the following command issued as the root user:

echo "swat            904/tcp" >> /etc/services

If inetd is used, the following command issued as the root user will add a swat entry to the /etc/inetd.conf file:

echo "swat stream tcp nowait.400 root /usr/sbin/swat swat" \
    >> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If xinetd is used, the following command issued as the root user will create an /etc/xinetd.d/swat file:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/swat << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/swat

service swat
{
    port            = 904
    socket_type     = stream
    wait            = no
    only_from       = 127.0.0.1
    user            = root
    server          = /usr/sbin/swat
    log_on_failure  += USERID
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/swat
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to read the new /etc/xinetd.d/swat file.

SWAT can be launched by pointing your web browser to http://localhost:904.

Note

If you linked Linux-PAM into the Samba build, you'll need to create an /etc/pam.d/samba file.

Boot Script

For your convenience, boot scripts have been provided for Samba. There are two included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package. The first, samba, will start the smbd and nmbd daemons needed to provide SMB/CIFS services. The second script, winbind, starts the winbindd daemon, used for providing Windows domain services to Linux clients.

The default Samba installation uses the nobody user for guest access to the server. This can be overridden by setting the guest account = parameter in the /etc/samba/smb.conf file. If you utilize the guest account = parameter, ensure this user exists in the /etc/passwd file. To use the default user, issue the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 99 nogroup &&
useradd -c "Unprivileged Nobody" -d /dev/null -g nogroup \
    -s /bin/false -u 99 nobody

Install the samba script with the following command issued as the root user:

make install-samba

If you also need the winbind script:

make install-winbind

Installed Programs: eventlogadm, findsmb, mount.cifs, mount.smbfs, net, nmbd, nmblookup, ntlm_auth, pdbedit, profiles, rpcclient, smbcacls, smbclient, smbcontrol, smbcquotas, smbd, smbget, smbmnt, smbmount, smbpasswd, smbspool, smbstatus, smbtar, smbtree, smbumount, swat, tdbbackup, tdbdump, tdbtool, testparm, unmount.cifs, wbinfo and winbindd

Installed Libraries: libnss_winbind.so, libnss_wins.so, libsmbclient.so, libmsrpc.so, the pam_winbind.so and pam_smbpass.so PAM libraries, and assorted character set, filesystem and support modules.

Installed Directories: /etc/samba, /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/samba, /usr/lib/samba, /usr/share/doc/samba-3.0.30, /usr/share/samba, /var/lib/samba and /var/log/samba

Short Descriptions

eventlogadm	is used to write records to eventlogs from STDIN, add the specified source and DLL eventlog registry entries and display the active eventlog names (from `smb.conf`).
findsmb	lists information about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet.
mount.cifs	mounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It is usually invoked indirectly by the mount command when using the `-t cifs` option.
mount.smbfs	is a symlink to smbmount which provides /bin/mount with a way to mount remote Windows (or Samba) fileshares.
net	is a tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers, similar to the net utility for DOS/Windows.
nmbd	is the Samba NetBIOS name server.
nmblookup	is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses.
ntlm_auth	is a tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function.
pdbedit	is a tool used to manage the SAM database.
profiles	is a utility that reports and changes SIDs in Windows registry files. It currently only supports Windows NT.
rpcclient	is used to execute MS-RPC client side functions.
smbcacls	is used to manipulate Windows NT access control lists.
smbclient	is a SMB/CIFS access utility, similar to FTP.
smbcontrol	is used to control running smbd, nmbd and winbindd daemons.
smbcquotas	is used to manipulate Windows NT quotas on SMB file shares.
smbd	is the main Samba daemon which provides SMB/CIFS services to clients.
smbget	is a simple utility with wget-like semantics, that can download files from SMB servers. You can specify the files you would like to download on the command-line.
smbmnt	is a helper application used by the smbmount program to do the actual mounting of SMB shares. It can be installed setuid `root` if you want unprivileged users to be able to mount their SMB shares.
smbmount	is usually invoked as mount.smbfs by the mount command when using the `-t smbfs` option, mounts a Linux SMB filesystem.
smbpasswd	changes a user's Samba password.
smbspool	sends a print job to an SMB printer.
smbstatus	reports current Samba connections.
smbtar	is a shell script used for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to Linux tape drives or a file.
smbtree	is a text-based SMB network browser.
smbumount	is used by unprivileged users to unmount SMB filesystems, provided that it is setuid root.
swat	is the Samba Web Administration Tool.
tdbbackup	is a tool for backing up or validating the integrity of Samba `.tdb` files.
tdbdump	is a tool used to print the contents of a Samba `.tdb` file.
tdbtool	is a tool which allows simple database manipulation from the command line.
testparm	checks an `smb.conf` file for proper syntax.
umount.cifs	is used by normal, non-`root` users, to unmount their own Common Internet File System (CIFS) mounts.
wbinfo	queries a running winbindd daemon.
winbindd	resolves names from Windows NT servers.

Last updated on 2008-06-07 02:22:19 -0500

vsftpd-2.0.5

Introduction to vsftpd

The vsftpd package contains a very secure and very small FTP daemon. This is useful for serving files over a network.

Package Information

Download (FTP): ftp://vsftpd.beasts.org/users/cevans/vsftpd-2.0.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 146062e8b2f93af43ff6c2c770feea94
Download size: 152 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

vsftpd Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, TCP Wrapper-7.6, and libcap

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/vsftpd

Installation of vsftpd

For security reasons, running vsftpd as an unprivileged user and group is encouraged. Also, a user should be created to map anonymous users. As the root user, create the needed directories, users, and groups with the following commands:

install -v -d -m 0755 /var/ftp/empty &&
install -v -d -m 0755 /home/ftp &&
groupadd -g 47 vsftpd &&
useradd -d /dev/null -c "vsftpd User" -g vsftpd -s /bin/false \
        -u 47 vsftpd &&
groupadd -g 45 ftp &&
useradd -c anonymous_user -d /home/ftp -g ftp -s /bin/false -u 45 ftp

Build vsftpd as an unprivileged user using the following command:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Once again, become the root user and install vsftpd with the following commands:

install -v -m 755 vsftpd /usr/sbin/vsftpd &&
install -v -m 644 vsftpd.8 /usr/share/man/man8 &&
install -v -m 644 vsftpd.conf.5 /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m 644 vsftpd.conf /etc

Command Explanations

install -v -d ...: This creates the directory that anonymous users will use (/home/ftp) and the directory the daemon will chroot into (/var/ftp/empty).

Note

/home/ftp should not be owned by the user vsftpd, or the user ftp.

echo "#define VSF_BUILD_TCPWRAPPERS" >>builddefs.h: Use this prior to make to add support for tcpwrappers.

echo "#define VSF_BUILD_SSL" >>builddefs.h: Use this prior to make to add support for SSL.

install -v -m ...: The Makefile uses non-standard installation paths. These commands install the files in /usr and /etc.

Configuring vsftpd

Config Files

/etc/vsftpd.conf

Configuration Information

vsftpd comes with a basic anonymous-only configuration file that was copied to /etc above. While still as root, this file should be modified because it is now recommended to run vsftpd in standalone mode as opposed to inetd/xinetd mode. Also, you should specify the privilege separation user created above. Finally, you should specify the chroot directory. man vsftpd.conf will give you all the details.

cat >> /etc/vsftpd.conf << "EOF"
background=YES
listen=YES
nopriv_user=vsftpd
secure_chroot_dir=/var/ftp/empty
EOF

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/vsftpd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-vsftpd

Installed Program: vsftpd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /var/ftp, /var/ftp/empty, /home/ftp

Short Descriptions

vsftpd

is the FTP daemon.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

xinetd-2.3.14

Introduction to xinetd

xinetd is the eXtended InterNET services daemon, a secure replacement for inetd.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.xinetd.org/xinetd-2.3.14.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/xinetd-2.3.14.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 567382d7972613090215c6c54f9b82d9
Download size: 301 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

xinetd Dependencies

Optional

TCP Wrapper-7.6 and Avahi

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xinetd

Installation of xinetd

Install xinetd by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --with-loadavg &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring xinetd

Config Files

/etc/xinetd.conf and /etc/xinetd.d/*

Configuration Information

Ensure the path to all daemons is /usr/sbin, rather than the default path of /usr/etc, and install the xinetd configuration files by running the following commands as the root user:

cat > /etc/xinetd.conf << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd
# Configuration file for xinetd
#

defaults
{
      instances       = 60
      log_type        = SYSLOG daemon
      log_on_success  = HOST PID USERID
      log_on_failure  = HOST USERID
      cps             = 25 30
}

# All service files are stored in the /etc/xinetd.d directory
#
includedir /etc/xinetd.d
# End /etc/xinetd
EOF

All of the following files have the statement, "disable = yes". To activate any of the services, this statement will need to be changed to "disable = no".

Note

The following files are listed to demonstrate classic xinetd applications. In many cases, these applications are not needed. In some cases, the applications are considered security risks. For example, telnet, rlogin, rexec, and rsh transmit unencrypted usernames and passwords over the network and can be easily replaced with a more secure alternative: ssh.

install -v -d -m755 /etc/xinetd.d &&
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/login << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/login

service login
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.rlogind
   log_type       = SYSLOG local4 info
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/login
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/shell << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/shell

service shell
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   instances      = UNLIMITED
   flags          = IDONLY
   log_on_success += USERID
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.rshd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/shell
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/exec << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/exec

service exec
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.rexecd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/exec
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/comsat << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/comsat

service comsat
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = nobody
   group          = tty
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.comsat
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/comsat
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/talk << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/talk

service talk
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.talkd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/talk
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/ntalk << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/ntalk

service ntalk
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.ntalkd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/ntalk
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/telnet << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/telnet

service telnet
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.telnetd
   bind           = 127.0.0.1
   log_on_failure += USERID
}

service telnet
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
#  server         = /usr/sbin/in.telnetd
   bind           = 192.231.139.175
   redirect       = 128.138.202.20 23
   log_on_failure += USERID
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/telnet
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/ftp << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/ftp

service ftp
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.ftpd
   server_args    = -l
   instances      = 4
   log_on_success += DURATION USERID
   log_on_failure += USERID
   access_times   = 2:00-8:59 12:00-23:59
   nice           = 10
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/ftp
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/tftp << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/tftp

service tftp
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.tftpd
   server_args    = -s /tftpboot
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/tftp
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/finger << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/finger

service finger
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = nobody
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.fingerd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/finger
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/systat << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/systat

service systat
{
   disable           = yes
   socket_type       = stream
   wait              = no
   user              = nobody
   server            = /usr/bin/ps
   server_args       = -auwwx
   only_from         = 128.138.209.0
   log_on_success    = HOST
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/systat
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/netstat << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/netstat

service netstat
{
   disable           = yes
   socket_type       = stream
   wait              = no
   user              = nobody
   server            = /usr/ucb/netstat
   server_args       = -f inet
   only_from         = 128.138.209.0
   log_on_success    = HOST
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/netstat
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/echo << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/echo

service echo
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = INTERNAL
   id          = echo-stream
   socket_type = stream
   protocol    = tcp
   user        = root
   wait        = no
}

service echo
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = INTERNAL
   id          = echo-dgram
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   user        = root
   wait        = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/echo
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/chargen << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/chargen

service chargen
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = chargen-stream
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   user           = root
   wait           = no
}

service chargen
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = chargen-dgram
   socket_type    = dgram
   protocol       = udp
   user           = root
   wait           = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/chargen
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/daytime << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/daytime

service daytime
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = daytime-stream
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   user           = root
   wait           = no
}

service daytime
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = daytime-dgram
   socket_type    = dgram
   protocol       = udp
   user           = root
   wait           = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/daytime
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/time << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/time

service time
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = time-stream
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   user           = root
   wait           = no
}


service time
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = time-dgram
   socket_type    = dgram
   protocol       = udp
   user           = root
   wait           = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/time
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/rstatd << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/rstatd

service rstatd
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = RPC
   flags       = INTERCEPT
   rpc_version = 2-4
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   server      = /usr/sbin/rpc.rstatd
   wait        = yes
   user        = root
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/rstatd
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/rquotad << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/rquotad

service rquotad
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = RPC
   rpc_version = 1
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   wait        = yes
   user        = root
   server      = /usr/sbin/rpc.rstatd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/rquotad
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/rusersd << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/rusersd

service rusersd
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = RPC
   rpc_version = 1-2
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   wait        = yes
   user        = root
   server      = /usr/sbin/rpc.rusersd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/rusersd
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/sprayd << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/sprayd

service sprayd
{
   disable      = yes
   type         = RPC
   rpc_version  = 1
   socket_type  = dgram
   protocol     = udp
   wait         = yes
   user         = root
   server       = /usr/sbin/rpc.sprayd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/sprayd
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/walld << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/walld

service walld
{
   disable      = yes
   type         = RPC
   rpc_version  = 1
   socket_type  = dgram
   protocol     = udp
   wait         = yes
   user         = nobody
   group        = tty
   server       = /usr/sbin/rpc.rwalld
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/walld
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/irc << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/irc

service irc
{
   disable      = yes
   socket_type  = stream
   wait         = no
   user         = root
   flags        = SENSOR
   type         = INTERNAL
   bind         = 192.168.1.30
   deny_time    = 60
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/irc
EOF

The format of the /etc/xinetd.conf is documented in the xinetd.conf.5 man page. Further information can be found at http://www.xinetd.org.

Boot Script

As the root user, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-xinetd

As the root user, use the new boot script to start xinetd:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd start

Checking the /var/log/daemon.log file should prove quite entertaining. This file may contain entries similar to the following:

Aug 22 21:40:21 dps10 xinetd[2696]: Server /usr/sbin/in.rlogind is not
executable [line=29]
Aug 22 21:40:21 dps10 xinetd[2696]: Error parsing attribute server -
DISABLING SERVICE [line=29]
Aug 22 21:40:21 dps10 xinetd[2696]: Server /usr/sbin/in.rshd is not
executable [line=42]

These errors are because most of the servers xinetd is trying to control are not installed yet.

Installed Programs: itox, xconv.pl, and xinetd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/xinetd.d/

Short Descriptions

itox	is a utility used for converting `inetd.conf` files to `xinetd.conf` format.
xconv.pl	is a Perl script used for converting `inetd.conf` files to `xinetd.conf` format, similar to itox.
xinetd	is the Internet services daemon.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

Chapter 20. Mail Server Software

MTAs are the programs which transport mail from one machine to the other. The traditional MTA is Sendmail, however there are several other choices.

As well as SMTP servers there is a POP server (qpopper) and an IMAP server (Courier-IMAP).

Exim-4.67

Introduction to Exim

The Exim package contains a Mail Transport Agent written by the University of Cambridge, released under the GNU Public License.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.exim.org/ftp/exim4/exim-4.67.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim/exim4/exim-4.67.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9ee83186d9ac99e5ff297112aa6fddf0
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Additional formats of the documentation (text-based docs are shipped with the sources) can be downloaded by following the links shown at http://exim.org/docs.html.

Exim Dependencies

Required

Berkeley DB-4.5.20 (built in LFS) or GDBM-1.8.3 or TDB

Optional

X Window System, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, OpenSSL-0.9.8g or GnuTLS-1.6.3, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, MySQL-5.0.41, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, SQLite, TCP Wrapper-7.6, and Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/exim

Installation of Exim

Before building Exim, as the root user you should create the group and user exim which will run the exim daemon:

groupadd -g 31 exim &&
useradd -d /dev/null -c "Exim Daemon" -g exim -s /bin/false -u 31 exim

Install Exim with the following commands:

sed -e 's,^BIN_DIR.*$,BIN_DIRECTORY=/usr/sbin,' \
    -e 's,^CONF.*$,CONFIGURE_FILE=/etc/exim.conf,' \
    -e 's,^EXIM_USER.*$,EXIM_USER=exim,' \
    -e 's,^EXIM_MONITOR,#EXIM_MONITOR,' src/EDITME > Local/Makefile &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 doc/exim.8 /usr/share/man/man8 &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/exim-4.67 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/exim-4.67 &&
ln -sv exim /usr/sbin/sendmail

Command Explanations

sed -e ... > Local/Makefile: Most of Exim's configuration options are compiled in using the directives in Local/Makefile which is created from the src/EDITME file. This command specifies the minimum set of options. Descriptions for the options are listed below.

BIN_DIRECTORY=/usr/sbin: This installs all of Exim's binaries and scripts in /usr/sbin.

CONFIGURE_FILE=/etc/exim.conf: This installs Exim's main configuration file in /etc.

EXIM_USER=exim: This tells Exim that after the daemon no longer needs root privileges, the process hands off the daemon to the exim user.

#EXIM_MONITOR: This defers building the Exim monitor program, as it requires X Window System support, by commenting out the EXIM_MONITOR line in the Makefile. If you wish to build the monitor program, omit this sed command and issue the following command before building the package (modify Local/eximon.conf, if necessary): cp exim_monitor/EDITME Local/eximon.conf.

ln -sv exim /usr/sbin/sendmail: Creates a link to sendmail for applications which need it. Exim will accept most Sendmail command-line options.

Adding Additional Functionality

To utilize some or all of the dependency packages, you'll need to modify Local/Makefile to include the appropriate directives and parameters to link additional libraries before you build Exim. Local/Makefile is heavily commented with instructions on how to do this. Listed below is additional information to help you link these dependency packages or add additional functionality.

If you wish to build and install the .info documentation, refer to http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch04.html#SECTinsinfdoc.

If you wish to build in Exim's interfaces for calling virus and spam scanning software directly from access control lists, uncomment the WITH_CONTENT_SCAN=yes parameter and review the information found at http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch41.html.

To use a backend database other than Berkeley DB, see the instructions at http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch04.html#SECTdb.

For SSL functionality, see the instructions at http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch04.html#SECTinctlsssl and http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch39.html.

For tcpwrappers functionality, see the instructions at http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch04.html#SECID27.

For information about adding authentication mechanisms to the build, see chapters 33-37 of http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/index.html.

For information about linking Linux-PAM, refer to the instructions http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch11.html#SECTexpcond.

For information about linking database engine libraries used for Exim name lookups, see the instructions at http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch09.html.

If you wish to add Readline support to Exim when invoked in “test expansion” (-be) mode, see the information in the -be section of http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch05.html#id2525974.

You may wish to modify the default configuration and send log files to syslog instead of the default /var/spool/exim/log directory. See the information at http://exim.org/exim-html-4.67/doc/html/spec_html/ch49.html.

Configuring Exim

Config Files

/etc/exim.conf and /etc/aliases

Configuration Information

A default (nothing but comments) /etc/aliases file is installed during the package installation if this file did not exist on your system. Create the necessary aliases and start the Exim daemon using the following commands:

cat >> /etc/aliases << "EOF"
postmaster: root
MAILER-DAEMON: root
EOF
exim -v -bi &&
/usr/sbin/exim -bd -q15m

Note

To protect an existing /etc/aliases file, the command above appends these aliases to it. This file should be checked and duplicate aliases removed, if present.

The /usr/sbin/exim -bd -q15m command starts the Exim daemon with a 15 minute interval in processing the mail queue. Adjust this parameter to suit your desires.

Boot Script

To automate the running of exim at startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/exim init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-exim

The bootscript also starts the Exim daemon and dispatches a queue runner process every 15 minutes. Modify the -q<time interval> parameter in /etc/rc.d/init.d/exim, if necessary for your installation.

Installed Programs: exicyclog, exigrep, exim, exim-4.43-2, exim_checkaccess, exim_dbmbuild, exim_dumpdb, exim_fixdb, exim_lock, exim_tidydb, eximstats, exinext, exipick, exiqgrep, exiqsumm, exiwhat, and optionally, eximon, and eximon.bin

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/exim-4.67 and /var/spool/exim

Short Descriptions

exicyclog	cycles Exim log files.
exigrep	searches Exim log files.
exim	is a symlink to the exim-4.43-2 MTA daemon.
exim-4.43-2	is the Exim mail transport agent daemon.
exim_checkaccess	states whether a given recipient address from a given host is acceptable or not.
exim_dbmbuild	creates and rebuilds Exim databases.
exim_dumpdb	writes the contents of Exim databases to the standard output.
exim_fixdb	modifies data in Exim databases.
exim_lock	locks a mailbox file.
exim_tidydb	removes old records from Exim databases.
eximstats	generates mail statistics from Exim log files.
exinext	queries remote host retry times.
exipick	selects messages based on various criteria.
exiqgrep	is a utility for selective queue listing.
exiqsumm	produces a summary of the messages in the mail queue.
exiwhat	queries running Exim processes.
eximon	is a start-up shell script for eximon.bin used to set the required environment variables before running the program.
eximon.bin	is a monitor program which displays current information in an X window, and also contains a menu interface to Exim's command line administration options.

Last updated on 2008-08-24 11:52:33 -0500

Postfix-2.5.1

Introduction to Postfix

The Postfix package contains a Mail Transport Agent (MTA). This is useful for sending email to other users of your host machine. It can also be configured to be a central mail server for your domain, a mail relay agent or simply a mail delivery agent to your local Internet Service Provider (ISP).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://postfix.energybeam.com/source/official/postfix-2.5.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.porcupine.org/mirrors/postfix-release/official/postfix-2.5.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 95a559c509081fdd07d78eafd4f4c3b4
Download size: 3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 97 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Postfix Dependencies

Optional

PCRE-7.6, MySQL-5.0.41, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, and cdb or TinyCDB

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/postfix

Installation of Postfix

Configuring the Build

The Postfix source tree does not contain a configure script, rather the makefile in the top-level directory contains a makefiles target that regenerates all the other makefiles in the build tree. If you wish to use additional software such as a database back-end for virtual users, or TLS/SSL authentication, you will need to regenerate the makefiles using one or more of the appropriate CCARGS and AUXLIBS settings listed below.

Here is an example that combines the TLS and Cyrus-SASL arguments:

make makefiles \
CCARGS='-DUSE_TLS -DUSE_SASL_AUTH -DUSE_CYRUS_SASL \
    -DDEF_DAEMON_DIR=\"/usr/lib/postfix\" \
    -DDEF_MANPAGE_DIR=\"/usr/share/man\" \
    -DDEF_HTML_DIR=\"/usr/share/doc/postfix-2.5.1/html\" \
    -DDEF_README_DIR=\"/usr/share/doc/postfix-2.5.1/README\" \
    -I/usr/include/openssl -I/usr/include/sasl' \
    AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lssl -lcrypto -lsasl2'

Perl compatible regular expressions

To use PCRE with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_PCRE -I/usr/include'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lpcre'

Cyrus-SASL

To use Cyrus-SASL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DUSE_SASL_AUTH -DUSE_CYRUS_SASL -I/usr/include/sasl'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lsasl2'

Berkely DB

To use Berkely DB with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_DB -I/usr/include'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -ldb'

OpenLDAP

To use OpenLDAP with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_LDAP -I/usr/include'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lldap -llber'

MySQL

To use MySQL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_MYSQL -I/usr/include/mysql'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lmysqlclient -lz -lm'

PostgreSQL

To use PostgreSQL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_PGSQL -I/usr/include/postgresql'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lpq -lz -lm'

CDB/TinyCDB

To use CDB or TinyCDB with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_CDB'
AUXLIBS='</path/to/CDB>/libcdb.a'

StartTLS Authentication

To use OpenSSL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DUSE_TLS -I/usr/include/openssl/'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lssl -lcrypto'

Installing Postfix

Before you compile the program, you need to create users and groups that will be expected to be in place during the installation. Add the users and groups with the following commands issued by the root user:

groupadd -g 32 postfix &&
groupadd -g 33 postdrop &&
useradd -c "Postfix Daemon User" -d /dev/null -g postfix \
    -s /bin/false -u 32 postfix &&
chown -v postfix:postfix /var/mail

Install Postfix by running the following commands:

make makefiles \
CCARGS='-DDEF_DAEMON_DIR=\"/usr/lib/postfix\" \
    -DDEF_MANPAGE_DIR=\"/usr/share/man\" \
    -DDEF_HTML_DIR=\"/usr/share/doc/postfix-2.5.1/html\" \
    -DDEF_README_DIR=\"/usr/share/doc/postfix-2.5.1/README\" \
    <additional args>' \
    <AUXLIBS='additional args'> &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

sh postfix-install -non-interactive

Command Explanations

make makefiles: This command rebuilds the makefiles throughout the source tree to use the options contained in the CCARGS and AUXLIBS variables.

sh postfix-install -non-interactive: This keeps the install script from asking any questions, thereby accepting default destination directories in all but the few cases mentioned in the 'make makefiles' command.

Configuring Postfix

Config Files

/etc/aliases, /etc/postfix/main.cf, and /etc/postfix/master.cf

Configuration Information

cat >> /etc/aliases << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/aliases

MAILER-DAEMON:    postmaster
postmaster:       root

root:             LOGIN
# End /etc/aliases
EOF

Note

To protect an existing /etc/aliases file, the above command appends these aliases to it if it exists. This file should be checked and duplicate aliases removed, if present.

The /etc/aliases file that was just created or appended, the main.cf and the master.cf must be personalized for your system. The aliases file needs your non-root login identity so mail addressed to root can be forwarded to you at the user level. The main.cf file needs your fully qualified hostname. All of these edits can be done with sed commands entered into the console with appropriate substitutions of your non-root login name for <user> and your fully qualified hostname for <localhost.localdomain>. You will find the main.cf file is self documenting, so load it into your editor to make the changes you need for your situation.

sed -i "s/LOGIN/<user>/" /etc/aliases &&
sed -i "s/#myhostname = host.domain.tld/myhostname = \
  <localhost.localdomain>/" /etc/postfix/main.cf &&
/usr/bin/newaliases

If you have an existing configuration, you can run the postfix utility to add any necessary definitions to your existing files. As the root user:

/usr/sbin/postfix upgrade-configuration

Before starting Postfix, you should check that your configuration and file permissions will work properly. Run the following commands as the root user to check and start your Postfix server:

/usr/sbin/postfix check &&
/usr/sbin/postfix start

Boot Script

To automate the running of Postfix at startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/postfix init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-postfix

Installed Programs: anvil, bounce, cleanup, discard, error, flush, lmtp, local, mailq, master, newaliases, nqmgr, oqmgr, pickup, pipe, postalias, postcat, postconf, postdrop, postfix, postkick, postlock, postlog, postmap, postqueue, postsuper, proxymap, qmgr, qmqpd, sendmail, showq, smtp, smtpd, spawn, tlsmgr, trivial-rewrite, verify, and virtual

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/postfix, /usr/lib/postfix and /usr/share/doc/postfix-2.5.1

Short Descriptions

anvil	Provides connection and rate request limiting.
bounce	A daemon that maintains per-message log files with non-delivery status information.
cleanup	A daemon that processes inbound mail, inserts it into the incoming mail queue, and informs the queue manager of its arrival.
discard	Processes delivery requests from the queue manager that cannot be delivered to the recipient.
error	A daemon that processes non-delivery requests from the queue manager.
flush	A daemon that maintains a record of deferred mail by destination.
lmtp	A daemon that processes message delivery requests from the queue manager.
local	A daemon that processes delivery requests from the queue manager to deliver mail to local recipients.
mailq	A symlink to `sendmail`.
master	The resident process that runs Postfix daemons on demand.
newaliases	A symlink to `sendmail`.
nqmgr	A daemon that awaits the arrival of incoming mail and arranges for its delivery.
oqmgr	The old style queue manager. This will be removed soon.
pickup	A daemon that waits for hints that new mail has been dropped into the maildrop directory, and feeds it into the cleanup daemon.
pipe	A daemon that processes requests from the queue manager to deliver messages to external commands.
postalias	Creates or queries one or more Postfix alias databases, or updates an existing one.
postcat	Prints the contents of the named files in human readable format.
postconf	Displays or changes the value of Postfix configuration parameters.
postdrop	Creates a file in the maildrop directory and copies it's standard input to the file.
postfix	Controls the operation of the Postfix mail system.
postkick	Sends requests to the specified service over a local transport channel.
postlock	Locks a mail folder for exclusive use, and executes commands passed to it.
postlog	A Postfix-compatible logging interface for use in, for example, shell scripts.
postmap	Creates or queries one or more Postfix lookup tables, or updates an existing one.
postqueue	The Postfix user interface for queue management.
postsuper	The Postfix user interface for superuser queue management.
proxymap	Provides read-only table lookup services to other Postfix processes.
qmgr	A daemon that awaits the arrival of incoming mail and arranges for its delivery.
qmqpd	A daemon that receives one message per connection, and pipes it through the cleanup daemon, and places it into the incoming queue.
scache	Maintains a connection cache used for sharing a connection multiple times.
sendmail	The Postfix to Sendmail compatibility interface.
showq	A daemon that reports the Postfix mail queue status.
smtp	Looks up a list of mail exchanger addresses for the destination host, sorts the list by preference, and connects to each listed address until it finds a server that responds.
smtpd	Accepts network connection requests and performs zero or more SMTP transactions per connection.
spawn	Listens on a port as specified in the Postfix `master.cf` file and spawns an external command whenever a connection is established.
tlsmgr	Maintains the TLS session cache and acts as the PRNG manager.
trivial-rewrite	A daemon that rewrites addresses to standard form.
verify	Maintains a record of what recipient addresses are known to be deliverable or undeliverable.
virtual	Delivers mail to virtual user's mail directories.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Qpopper-4.0.9

Introduction to Qpopper

The Qpopper package contains a POP3 mail server.

Package Information

Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.qualcomm.com/eudora/servers/unix/popper/qpopper4.0.9.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: de2cd15f95cfd00d0d080fd16287acad
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 9.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Qpopper Dependencies

Required

An MTA

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, GDBM-1.8.3, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, and MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/qpopper

Installation of Qpopper

Install Qpopper with the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-standalone &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -D -m644 GUIDE.pdf /usr/share/doc/qpopper-4.0.9/GUIDE.pdf

Command Explanations

--enable-standalone: This option gives the flexibility to run Qpopper in standalone mode.

Configuring Qpopper

Configuration Information

Update the Syslog configuration file and force the syslogd daemon to reread the new file so that Qpopper events are logged:

echo "local0.notice;local0.debug /var/log/POP.log" >> \
    /etc/syslog.conf &&
killall -HUP syslogd

If you want Qpopper to start automatically when the system is booted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/qpopper init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-qpopper

This startup procedure uses a configuration file. The details of the configuration file can be found in the documentation file GUIDE.pdf.

cat > /etc/mail/qpopper.conf << "EOF"
# Qpopper configuration file

set debug = false

set spool-dir = /var/spool/mail/
set temp-dir  = /var/spool/mail/

set downcase-user = true
set trim-domain = true

set statistics = true

# End /etc/shells
EOF

If you use inetd, the following command will add the Qpopper entry to /etc/inetd.conf:

echo "pop3 stream tcp nowait root /usr/sbin/popper popper" >> \
    /etc/inetd.conf &&
killall inetd || inetd

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Qpopper file as /etc/xinetd.d/pop3:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/pop3 << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/pop3

service pop3
{
    port            = 110
    socket_type     = stream
    protocol        = tcp
    wait            = no
    user            = root
    server          = /usr/sbin/popper
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/pop3
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to reread the changed xinetd.conf file.

Installed Program: popper

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

popper

is the POP3 server daemon.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Sendmail-8.14.1

Introduction to Sendmail

The Sendmail package contains a Mail Transport Agent (MTA).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.sendmail.org/ftp/sendmail.8.14.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.sendmail.org/pub/sendmail/sendmail.8.14.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 462bc9e00fdbef3a71b046b967c9a157
Download size: 2.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Sendmail Dependencies

Required

Procmail-3.22

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, TCP Wrapper-7.6, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, nph, and AFPL Ghostscript-8.53 or ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 (for creating PDF documentation)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/sendmail

Installation of Sendmail

Before building Sendmail, create the required user, group and directory with the following commands issued as the root user:

groupadd -g 26 smmsp &&
useradd -c "Sendmail Daemon" -g smmsp -d /dev/null \
        -s /bin/false -u 26 smmsp &&
chmod -v 1777 /var/mail &&
install -v -m700 -d /var/spool/mqueue

Note: See the source tree sendmail/README file for information on linking optional packages into the build. Use the example below, which adds support for tcpwrappers, SASL, StartTLS (OpenSSL) and OpenLDAP, as a starting point. Of course, modify it to suit your particular needs.

cat >> devtools/Site/site.config.m4 << "EOF"
APPENDDEF(`confENVDEF',`-DSTARTTLS -DTCPWRAPPERS -DSASL -DLDAPMAP')
APPENDDEF(`confLIBS', `-lssl -lcrypto -lwrap -lsasl2 -lldap -llber')
APPENDDEF(`confINCDIRS', `-I/usr/include/sasl')
EOF

Install Sendmail with the following commands:

cat >> devtools/Site/site.config.m4 << "EOF"
define(`confMANGRP',`root')
define(`confMANOWN',`root')
define(`confSBINGRP',`root')
define(`confUBINGRP',`root')
define(`confUBINOWN',`root')
EOF
cd sendmail &&
sh Build &&
cd ../cf/cf &&
cp generic-linux.mc sendmail.mc &&
sh Build sendmail.cf

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /etc/mail &&
sh Build install-cf &&

cd ../.. &&
sh Build install &&

install -v -m644 cf/cf/{submit,sendmail}.mc /etc/mail &&
cp -v -R cf/* /etc/mail &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1/{cf,sendmail} &&
install -v -m644 \
        CACerts FAQ KNOWNBUGS LICENSE PGPKEYS README RELEASE_NOTES \
        /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1 &&
install -v -m644 sendmail/{README,SECURITY,TRACEFLAGS,TUNING} \
        /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1/sendmail &&
install -v -m644 cf/README /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1/cf &&

for manpage in sendmail editmap mailstats makemap praliases smrsh
do
    install -v -m444 $manpage/$manpage.8 /usr/share/man/man8
done &&
install -v -m444 sendmail/aliases.5    /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m444 sendmail/mailq.1      /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m444 sendmail/newaliases.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m444 vacation/vacation.1   /usr/share/man/man1

Install the Sendmail Installation and Operations Guide with the following commands:

cd doc/op &&
sed -i 's/groff/GROFF_NO_SGR=1 groff/' Makefile &&
make op.txt op.pdf

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1 &&
install -v -m644 op.ps op.txt op.pdf /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1 &&
cd ../..

Note: remove op.pdf from the make and install commands if you don't have Ghostscript installed.

Command Explanations

cat > devtools/Site/site.config.m4 << "EOF": This creates a configuration file changing some of the default settings.

sh Build; sh Build sendmail.cf; sh Build install-cf; sh Build install: Sendmail uses an m4 based build script to create the various Makefiles. These commands build and install the package.

for manpage in...;do...;done; install ...: The man pages are installed already formatted and man displays them somewhat garbled. These commands replace the formatted pages with pages man can display properly.

Configuring Sendmail

Config Files

/etc/mail/*

Configuration Information

Create the /etc/mail/local-host-names and /etc/mail/aliases files using the following commands as the root user:

echo $(hostname) > /etc/mail/local-host-names
cat > /etc/mail/aliases << "EOF"
postmaster: root
MAILER-DAEMON: root

EOF
newaliases -v

Sendmail's primary configuration file, /etc/mail/sendmail.cf, is complex and not meant to be directly edited. The recommended method for changing it is to modify /etc/mail/sendmail.mc and various m4 files, then run the m4 macro processor from within /etc/mail as follows:

m4 m4/cf.m4 sendmail.mc > sendmail.cf

A full explanation of the files to modify, and the available parameters can be found in /etc/mail/README.

Boot Script

To automate the running of Sendmail at startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/sendmail init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-sendmail

Note

The -qNm option to sendmail, where N is number of minutes, controls how often Sendmail will process the mail queue. A default of 5 minutes is used in the init script. Individual workstation users may want to set this as low as 1 minute, large installations handling more mail may want to set it higher.

Installed Programs: editmap, hoststat, mailstats, mailq, makemap, newaliases, praliases, purgestat, sendmail, smrsh, and vacation

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/mail, /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.14.1, /var/spool/mqueue, and /var/spool/clientmqueue

Short Descriptions

editmap	queries and edits Sendmail map files.
hoststat	prints Sendmail's persistent host status.
mailstats	displays Sendmail statistics.
mailq	prints a summary of outbound mail messages waiting for delivery.
makemap	creates Sendmail map files.
newaliases	rebuilds `/etc/mail/aliases.db` from the contents of `/etc/mail/aliases`.
praliases	displays current Sendmail aliases.
purgestat	causes Sendmail to clear (purge) all its host-status information.
sendmail	is the Sendmail mail transport agent.
smrsh	is a restricted shell for Sendmail.
vacation	is an email auto responder.

Last updated on 2007-07-10 18:20:04 -0500

Chapter 21. Databases

This chapter includes databases that range from single-user read/write to industrial database servers with transaction support. Generally, you will be sent here to satisfy dependencies to other applications although building a SQL server on a base LFS system is entirely possible.

Berkeley DB-4.5.20

Introduction to Berkeley DB

The Berkeley DB package contains programs and utilities used by many other applications for database related functions. This package is also installed during LFS and may already exist on your system. It is listed here in BLFS as well because you may need to reinstall it if you need the additional language bindings or the RPC server. If you do reinstall Berkeley DB, ensure you use the 4.5.20 version used in the LFS book.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://download-east.oracle.com/berkeley-db/db-4.5.20.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/db-4.5.20.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: b0f1c777708cb8e9d37fb47e7ed3312d
Download size: 9.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 94 MB (additional 100 MB to run parallel standard test suite)
Estimated build time: 1.7 SBU (builds all bindings, add an additional 145 SBU to run parallel standard test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/berkeley-db/db/update/4.5.20/patch.4.5.20.1
Required patch: http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/berkeley-db/db/update/4.5.20/patch.4.5.20.2

Berkeley DB Dependencies

Optional

Tcl-8.4.18, JDK-6 Update 5, and sharutils (for the uudecode command)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/db

Testing Berkeley DB

You may want to skip ahead to the section called “Installation of Berkeley DB”. The test suite can take up to 150 SBUs and has a few bugs causing a report of “Regression tests failed”. However, running the test suite is a very exhaustive test of your hardware, perhaps pushing your machine harder (especially disk I/O) than it will ever see during production use. Note that you must have Tcl installed to run the test suite.

Build for the Berkeley DB test by running the following commands:

patch -Np0 -i ../patch.4.5.20.1 &&
patch -Np0 -i ../patch.4.5.20.2 &&
cd build_unix &&
../dist/configure --prefix=/usr \
                  --enable-test \
                  --enable-tcl  \
                  --with-tcl=/usr/lib &&
make

To test the results, start tclsh:

tclsh

From the tclsh prompt (% ), run:

source ../test/test.tcl
run_parallel 5 run_std
exit

Clean up the source tree with the following command:

make realclean &&
cd ..

Installation of Berkeley DB

The installation commands below are identical to the commands used in the LFS book. If you installed Berkeley DB in LFS, and you don't add anything to the configure script, you'll end up with exactly what you already have. The additional parameters you can use are listed in the Command Explanations section below.

Note

If you plan on installing Berkeley DB with Java support, you should check the system for certain versions of JDK-6 Update 5 and GMime-2.2.10. Specifically, if JDK-6 Update X and the uudecode program from the GMime program is on the system, the build will fail (unless you run the modified ./configure command shown below). You can run two commands (javac -version and uudecode --version) to determine what versions are installed. You can also download and run a shell script from http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/jdk-uudecode-check.sh that will alert you to a non-working condition. If the identified programs exist on the system, you must modify the ./configure command as shown below.

uudecode="no" ../dist/configure --(use the parameters shown below)

Install Berkeley DB by running the following commands:

patch -Np0 -i ../patch.4.5.20.1 &&
patch -Np0 -i ../patch.4.5.20.2 &&
cd build_unix &&
../dist/configure --prefix=/usr \
                  --enable-compat185 \
                  --enable-cxx &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make docdir=/usr/share/doc/db-4.5.20 install &&
chown -v -R root:root \
      /usr/bin/berkeley_db_svc \
      /usr/bin/db_* \
      /usr/include/db{,_185,_cxx}.h \
      /usr/lib/libdb{{,_cxx}.a,{,_cxx,_java,_tcl}-4.5.{so,a,la}} \
      /usr/share/doc/db-4.5.20

Command Explanations

cd build_unix && ../dist/configure --prefix=/usr...: This replaces the normal ./configure command, as Berkeley DB comes with various build directories for different platforms.

--enable-compat185: This switch enables building the DB-1.85 compatibility API.

--enable-cxx: This switch enables building C++ API libraries.

--enable-tcl --with-tcl=/usr/lib: Enables Tcl support in DB and creates the libdb_tcl libraries.

--enable-java: Enables Java support in DB and creates the libdb_java libraries.

--enable-rpc: Enables building the Berkeley DB RPC server.

make docdir=/usr/share/doc/db-4.5.20 install: This installs the documentation in the standard location instead of /usr/docs.

chown -v -R root:root ...:This command changes the ownership of various installed files from the uid:gid of the builder to root:root.

Only the program and libraries not installed in LFS are listed here, the others can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/6.3/chapter06/db.html#contents-db as they were initially installed during the building of LFS.

Installed Program: berkeley_db_svc

Installed Libraries: libdb_java.{so,a}, libdb_tcl.{so,a} and db.jar

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/db-4.5.20

Short Descriptions

berkeley_db_svc

is the Berkeley DB RPC server.

Last updated on 2008-03-24 23:00:38 -0500

MySQL-5.0.41

Introduction to MySQL

MySQL is a widely used and fast SQL database server. It is a client/server implementation that consists of a server daemon and many different client programs and libraries.

There may be a more recent release available from the MySQL home page. You can check http://dev.mysql.com/ and probably use the existing BLFS instructions. Note that versions other than the one shown in the download URLs have not been tested in a BLFS environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/m/mysql-5.0.41.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/m/mysql-5.0.41.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: b45cd6c89e35dfc1cdbe1a1f782aefbf
Download size: 24 MB
Estimated disk space required: 405 MB (additional 65 MB to run the test suite)
Estimated build time: 6.0 SBU (Test suite is an additional 52 minutes, only partially CPU dependent)

MySQL Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.8g and TCP Wrapper-7.6

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/mysql

Installation of MySQL

For security reasons, running the server as an unprivileged user and group is strongly encouraged:

groupadd -g 40 mysql &&
useradd -c "MySQL Server" -d /dev/null -g mysql -s /bin/false \
        -u 40 mysql

Build and install MySQL by running the following commands:

C_EXTRA_FLAGS=-fno-strict-aliasing \
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
            --localstatedir=/srv/mysql \
            --enable-thread-safe-client \
            --enable-assembler \
            --enable-local-infile \
            --with-unix-socket-path=/var/run/mysql/mysql.sock \
            --without-debug \
            --without-bench \
            --without-readline \
            --with-berkeley-db \
            --with-extra-charsets=all &&
make testdir=/tmp/mysql

To test the results, issue: make test. Note that if you have a restrictive /etc/hosts.deny file, you will need to add an appropriate entry to the /etc/hosts.allow file for the mysqld daemon, else many of the tests will fail.

Now, as the root user:

make testdir=/tmp/mysql install &&
rm -rf /tmp/mysql &&
cd /usr/lib &&
ln -v -sf mysql/libmysqlclient{,_r}.so* .

Tip

The only documentation shipped in the source tarball are mysql.info and manual.chm (Microsoft Help format) files. You can download various formats of the MySQL Reference Manual from http://dev.mysql.com/doc/.

Command Explanations

C_EXTRA_FLAGS=-fno-strict-aliasing: This environment variable adjusts the compiler optimization to avoid failures in the testsuite and other operations.

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: This switch installs the mysqld daemon and the mysqlmanager program in an appropriate location.

--localstatedir=/srv/mysql: This switch forces MySQL to use /srv/mysql for database files and other variable data.

--enable-thread-safe-client: This switch compiles a thread-safe MySQL client library.

--enable-assembler: This switch allows using assembler versions of some string functions.

--enable-local-infile: This switch enables the “LOAD DATA INFILE” SQL statement.

--with-unix-socket-path=/var/run/mysql: This switch puts the unix-domain socket into the /var/run/mysql directory instead of the default /tmp.

--without-bench: This switch skips building the benchmark suite.

--without-readline: This switch forces the build to use the system copy of readline instead of the bundled copy.

--with-berkeley-db: This switch enables using Berkeley DB tables as a back end.

--with-extra-charsets=all: This switch enables international character sets within the suite.

make testdir=...: This installs the test suite in /tmp/mysql. The test suite is not required, nor does it function properly on an installed version of MySQL, so it is removed in the next step.

ln -v -sf mysql/libmysqlclient{,_r}.so* .: This command makes the MySQL shared libraries available to other packages at run-time.

--with-openssl: This switch adds OpenSSL support to MySQL.

--with-libwrap: This switch adds tcpwrappers support to MySQL.

Configuring MySQL

Config Files

/etc/my.cnf and ~/.my.cnf

Configuration Information

There are several default configuration files available in /usr/share/mysql which you can use. Create /etc/my.cnf using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 /usr/share/mysql/my-medium.cnf /etc/my.cnf

You can now install a database and change the ownership to the unprivileged user and group (perform as the root user):

mysql_install_db --user=mysql &&
chgrp -v mysql /srv/mysql{,/test,/mysql}

Further configuration requires that the MySQL server is running. Start the server using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -o mysql -g mysql -d /var/run/mysql &&
mysqld_safe --user=mysql 2>&1 >/dev/null &

A default installation does not set up a password for the administrator, so use the following command as the root user to set one. Replace <new-password> with your own.

mysqladmin -u root password <new-password>

Configuration of the server is now finished. Shut the server down using the following command as the root user:

mysqladmin -p shutdown

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/mysql init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package as the root user to start the MySQL server during system boot-up.

make install-mysql

Installed Programs: comp_err, innochecksum, msql2mysql, my_print_defaults, myisam_ftdump, myisamchk, myisamlog, myisampack, mysql, mysql_client_test, mysql_config, mysql_convert_table_format, mysql_create_system_tables, mysql_explain_log, mysql_find_rows, mysql_fix_extensions, mysql_fix_privilege_tables, mysql_install_db, mysql_secure_installation, mysql_setpermission, mysql_tableinfo, mysql_tzinfo_to_sql, mysql_waitpid, mysql_zap, mysqlaccess, mysqladmin, mysqlbinlog, mysqlbug, mysqlcheck, mysqld, mysqld_multi, mysqld_safe, mysqldump, mysqldumpslow, mysqlhotcopy, mysqlimport, mysqlmanager, mysqlshow, mysqltest, mysqltestmanager, mysqltestmanager-pwgen, mysqltestmanagerc, perror, replace, resolve_stack_dump, and resolveip

Installed Libraries: libdbug.a, libheap.a, libmyisam.a, libmyisammrg.a, libmysqlclient.{so,a}, libmysqlclient_r.{so,a}, libmystrings.a, libmysys.a, and libvio.a

Installed Directories: /srv/mysql, /usr/include/mysql, /usr/lib/mysql, /usr/share/mysql, and /var/run/mysql

Short Descriptions

Descriptions of all the programs and libraries would be several pages long. Instead, consult the mysql.info documentation or the on-line reference manual at http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.0/en/index.html.

The Perl DBI modules must be installed for some of the MySQL support programs to function properly.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

PostgreSQL-8.2.4

Introduction to PostgreSQL

PostgreSQL is an advanced object-relational database management system (ORDBMS), derived from the Berkeley Postgres database management system.

There may be a more recent release available from the PostgreSQL home page. You can check http://www.postgresql.org/ and probably use the existing BLFS instructions. Note that versions other than the one shown in the download URLs have not been tested in a BLFS environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/p/postgresql-8.2.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/p/postgresql-8.2.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: af7ec100a33c41bfb8d87b5e0ec2f44a
Download size: 12.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 165 MB (additional 118 MB to run the testsuite)
Estimated build time: 1.4 SBU

PostgreSQL Dependencies

Optional

Python-2.5.2, Tcl-8.4.18, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, krb4, MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 or Heimdal-1.1, and Bonjour

Optional (To Regenerate Documentation)

DocBook SGML DTD-4.5, DocBook DSSSL Stylesheets-1.79, OpenJade-1.3.2, and SGMLSpm-1.03ii

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/postgresql

Installation of PostgreSQL

Install PostgreSQL with the following commands:

sed -i "s|dsssl-stylesheets|& \\\\\n        sgml/docbook/&-1.79|" \
    configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-thread-safety &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v root:root /usr/share/doc/postgresql/html/* &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/postgresql/{FAQ/html,TODO.detail} &&
install -v -m644 doc/TODO /usr/share/doc/postgresql &&
install -v -m644 doc/FAQ* /usr/share/doc/postgresql/FAQ &&
install -v -m644 doc/src/FAQ/* /usr/share/doc/postgresql/FAQ/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/TODO.detail/* \
    /usr/share/doc/postgresql/TODO.detail

Note

If you are upgrading an existing system and are going to install the new files over the old ones, then you should back up your data, shut down the old server and follow the instructions in the official PostgreSQL documentation.

Initialize a database cluster with the following commands issued by the root user:

install -v -m700 -d /srv/pgsql/data &&
groupadd -g 41 postgres &&
useradd -c "PostgreSQL Server" -g postgres -d /srv/pgsql/data \
        -u 41 postgres &&
chown -v postgres /srv/pgsql/data &&
su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/initdb -D /srv/pgsql/data'

As the root user, start the database server with the following command:

su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/postmaster -D /srv/pgsql/data > \
    /srv/pgsql/data/logfile 2>&1 &'

Still as user root, create a database and verify the installation:

su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/createdb test' &&
echo "create table t1 ( name varchar(20), state_province varchar(20) );" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "insert into t1 values ('Billy', 'NewYork');" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "insert into t1 values ('Evanidus', 'Quebec');" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "insert into t1 values ('Jesse', 'Ontario');" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "select * from t1;" | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test')

Command Explanations

sed -i "s|dsssl-stylesheets|...": This command puts an extra line in the configure script so that the BLFS installed version of the DSSSL stylesheets are discovered.

--enable-thread-safety: This switch makes the client libraries thread-safe by allowing concurrent threads in libpq and ECPG programs to safely control their private connection handles.

chown -R root:root /usr/share/doc/postgresql/html/*: This command corrects the improper ownership of documentation files.

groupadd ...; useradd ...: These commands add an unprivileged user and group to run the database server.

createdb test; create table t1; insert into t1 values...; select * from t1: Create a database, add a table to it, insert some rows into the table and select them to verify that the installation is working properly.

Configuring PostgreSQL

Config Files

$PGDATA/pg_ident.con, $PGDATA/pg_hba.conf and $PGDATA/postgresql.conf

The PGDATA environment variable is used to distinguish database clusters from one another by setting it to the value of the directory which contains the cluster desired. The three configuration files exist in every PGDATA/ directory. Details on the format of the files and the options that can be set in each can be found in file:///usr/share/doc/postgresql/html/index.html.

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/postgresql init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-postgresql

Installed Programs: clusterdb, createdb, createlang, createuser, dropdb, droplang, dropuser, ecpg, initdb, ipcclean, pg_config, pg_controldata, pg_ctl, pg_dump, pg_dumpall, pg_resetxlog, pg_restore, pltcl_delmod, pltcl_listmod, pltcl_loadmod, postgres, postmaster, psql, reindexdb, and vacuumdb

Installed Libraries: libecpg.{so,a}, libecpg_compat.{so,a}, libpgport.a, libpgtypes.{so,a}, libpq.{so,a}, and various charset modules.

Installed Directories: /srv/pgsql, /usr/include/libpq, /usr/include/postgresql, /usr/lib/postgresql, /usr/share/doc/postgresql, and /usr/share/postgresql

Short Descriptions

clusterdb	is a utility for reclustering tables in a PostgreSQL database.
createdb	creates a new PostgreSQL database.
createlang	defines a new PostgreSQL procedural language.
createuser	defines a new PostgreSQL user account.
dropdb	removes a PostgreSQL database.
droplang	removes a PostgreSQL procedural language.
dropuser	removes a PostgreSQL user account.
ecpg	is the embedded SQL preprocessor.
initdb	creates a new database cluster.
ipcclean	removes shared memory and semaphores left over by an aborted database server.
pg_config	retrieves PostgreSQL version information.
pg_controldata	returns information initialized during initdb, such as the catalog version and server locale.
pg_ctl	controls stopping and starting the database server.
pg_dump	dumps database data and metadata into scripts which are used to recreate the database.
pg_dumpall	recursively calls pg_dump for each database in a cluster.
pg_resetxlog	clears the write-ahead log and optionally resets some fields in the `pg_control` file.
pg_restore	creates databases from dump files created by pg_dump.
pltcl_delmod	is a support script used to delete a module from a PL/Tcl table. The command requires the Pgtcl package to be installed also.
pltcl_listmod	is a support script used to list the modules in a PL/Tcl table. The command requires the Pgtcl package to be installed also.
pltcl_loadmod	is a support script used to load a module into a PL/Tcl table. The command requires the Pgtcl package to be installed also.
postgres	is a single user database server, generally used for debugging.
postmaster	is a multi-user database daemon.
psql	is a console based database shell.
reindexdb	is a utility for rebuilding indexes in a database.
vacuumdb	compacts databases and generates statistics for the query analyzer.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

Chapter 22. Other Server Software

Here you will find many ways to share your machine with the rest of the world or your local network. Before installing any packages in this chapter, you need to be sure you understand what the package does and how to set it up correctly. It might also be helpful to learn about the consequences of an improper setup so that you can analyze the risks.

DHCP-3.0.6

Introduction to DHCP

The DHCP package contains both the client and server programs for DHCP. dhclient (the client) is useful for connecting your computer to a network which uses DHCP to assign network addresses. dhcpd (the server) is useful for assigning network addresses on your private network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/servers/isc/dhcp/dhcp-3.0.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/dhcp/dhcp-3.0.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 724bad21ad8b638abadd5fcc07df1a0f
Download size: 876 KB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/dhcp-3.0.6-client_dns-1.patch
Optional Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/dhcp-3.0.6-iproute2-1.patch

DHCP Dependencies

Required

Net-tools-1.60 (you may omit net-tools by using the optional patch to utilize iproute2.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/dhcp

Kernel Configuration

You must have Packet Socket support (Device Drivers ⇒ Networking Support ⇒ Networking Options ⇒ Packet Socket) compiled into the kernel.

Installation of DHCP

First fix a problem with always regenerating /etc/resolv.conf whether the DNS server has changed or not.

patch -Np1 -i ../dhcp-3.0.6-client_dns-1.patch

If you chose not to install net-tools, apply the iproute2 patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../dhcp-3.0.6-iproute2-1.patch

Install DHCP by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make LIBDIR=/usr/lib INCDIR=/usr/include install

Command Explanations

LIBDIR=/usr/lib INCDIR=/usr/include: This command installs the library and include files in /usr instead of /usr/local.

Configuring DHCP

Config Files

/etc/dhclient.conf and /etc/dhcpd.conf

Configuration Information

Information on configuring the DHCP client can be found in Chapter 13, Connecting to a Network.

Note that you only need the DHCP server if you want to issue LAN addresses over your network. The DHCP client doesn't need this script to be used. Also note that this script is coded for the eth1 interface, which may need to be modified for your hardware configuration.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/dhcp init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-dhcp

The lease file must exist on startup. The following command will satisfy that requirement:

touch /var/state/dhcp/dhcpd.leases

The following commands will create a base configuration file for a DHCP server. There are several options that you may want to add (information that is passed back to the DHCP client) and those are covered in the man pages for dhcp.conf.

cat > /etc/dhcpd.conf << "EOF"
default-lease-time 72000;
max-lease-time 144000;
ddns-update-style ad-hoc;

subnet <192.168.5.0> netmask <255.255.255.0> {
  range <192.168.5.10> <192.168.5.240>;
  option broadcast-address <192.168.5.255>;
  option routers <192.168.5.1>;
}
EOF

All addresses should be changed to meet your circumstance.

Installed Programs: dhcpd, dhcrelay, dhclient, dhclient-script, and omshell

Installed Libraries: bdhcpctl.a, libomapi.a

Installed Directories: /var/state/dhcp, /usr/include/omapip, and /usr/include/isi-dhcp

Short Descriptions

dhclient	is the implementation of the DHCP client.
dhcpd	implements Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Internet Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) requests for network addresses.
dhcrelay	provides a means to accept DHCP and BOOTP requests on a subnet without a DHCP server and relay them to a DHCP server on another subnet.
omshell	provides an interactive way to connect to, query, and possibly change, the ISC DHCP Server's state via OMAPI, the Object Management API.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Leafnode-1.11.5

Introduction to Leafnode

Leafnode is an NNTP server designed for small sites to provide a local USENET spool.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/leafnode/leafnode-1.11.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/mirrors/sunsite/system/news/transport/leafnode-1.11.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 88552c5cc91cb27146c8906b2d33289d
Download size: 428 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Leafnode Dependencies

Required

PCRE-7.6 and TCP Wrapper-7.6

Installation of Leafnode

As the root user, create the group and user news, if not present:

groupadd -g 36 news &&
useradd -c "Leafnode News Server" -d /var/spool/news -g news \
        -u 36 news

Install Leafnode by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
    --localstatedir=/var --sysconfdir=/etc/leafnode \
    --with-lockfile=/var/lock/leafnode/fetchnews.lck &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var: Change the default spool directory of /usr/var.

--sysconfdir=/etc/leafnode: Leafnode reads its configuration data from a file called config which will be created in /etc/leafnode to avoid any potential conflict with other packages.

make update: Run this command if you are upgrading from a very old version of Leafnode.

Configuring Leafnode

Config Files

/etc/leafnode/config, /etc/nntpserver, /etc/sysconfig/createfiles /etc/inetd.conf or /etc/xinetd.conf or /etc/xinetd.d/nntp

Configuration Information

The /etc/leafnode/config file must be edited to reflect the name of the upstream NNTP provider. Copy the example configuration file to /etc/leafnode/config and save the original for reference:

cp /etc/leafnode/config.example /etc/leafnode/config

Change the

server =

entry to reflect your news provider.

The /etc/nntpserver file must contain 127.0.0.1 to prevent news clients from reading news from the upstream feed. Create this file using the following command:

cat > /etc/nntpserver << "EOF"
127.0.0.1

EOF

The /etc/rc.d/init.d/cleanfs script, part of the LFS bootscript package, will remove the /var/lock/leafnode directory during the system boot sequence. Install the following line in the /etc/sysconfig/createfiles file to re-create the directory:

/var/lock/leafnode   dir   2775   news   news

Leafnode may be configured to use inetd by adding an entry to the /etc/inetd.conf file with the following command:

echo "nntp stream tcp nowait news /usr/sbin/tcpd /usr/sbin/leafnode" \
>> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Leafnode file as /etc/xinetd.d/nntp:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/nntp << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/nntp

        service nntp
        {
           flags           = NAMEINARGS NOLIBWRAP
           socket_type     = stream
           protocol        = tcp
           wait            = no
           user            = news
           server          = /usr/sbin/tcpd
           server_args     = /usr/sbin/leafnode
           instances       = 7
           per_source      = 3
        }

# End /etc/xinetd.d/nntp
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to reread the changed xinetd.conf file.

Add entries to the root or news user's crontab to run the fetchnews and texpire commands at the desired time intervals.

Installed Programs: applyfilter, checkgroups, fetchnews, leafnode, leafnode-version, newsq, and texpire

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/leafnode, /var/lock/leafnode, and /var/spool/news

Short Descriptions

applyfilter	filters newsgroup articles according to regular expressions.
checkgroups	inserts newsgroup titles into the newsgroup database.
fetchnews	sends posted articles to and retrieves new articles from an upstream news server.
leafnode	is an NNTP server daemon.
leafnode-version	prints the Leafnode version.
newsq	shows articles waiting to be sent upstream.
texpire	expires old articles and unread groups.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

OpenLDAP-2.3.39

Introduction to OpenLDAP

The OpenLDAP package provides an open source implementation of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/network/OpenLDAP/openldap-stable/openldap-stable-20071118.tgz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.openldap.org/pub/OpenLDAP/openldap-stable/openldap-stable-20071118.tgz
Download MD5 sum: e3fec2953c948f6990ccdc3af7bf7f18
Download size: 3.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 94 MB
Estimated build time: 1.2 SBU and approximately 30 minutes to run the tests (processor independent)

Note

The OpenLDAP stable releases are packaged without version numbers in the tarball names. You can see the relationship between the version number and name of the tarball at http://www.openldap.org/software/download/.

OpenLDAP Dependencies

Required

Berkeley DB-4.5.20 is recommended (built in LFS) or GDBM-1.8.3

Optional

TCP Wrapper-7.6, unixODBC-2.2.12, GMP-4.2.2, OpenSLP, Pth-2.0.7, and one of MySQL-5.0.41, Oracle, or PostgreSQL-8.2.4

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/openldap

Installation of OpenLDAP

Install OpenLDAP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --localstatedir=/srv/ldap \
            --disable-debug \
            --enable-dynamic \
            --enable-crypt \
            --enable-modules \
            --enable-rlookups \
            --enable-backends \
            --enable-overlays \
            --disable-sql &&
make depend &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test. If you've enabled tcp_wrappers, ensure you add 127.0.0.1 to the slapd line in the /etc/hosts.allow file if you have a restrictive /etc/hosts.deny file.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

for LINK in lber ldap ldap_r; do
    chmod -v 0755 /usr/lib/$(readlink /usr/lib/lib${LINK}.so)
done &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/openldap-2.3.39/{drafts,guide,rfc} &&
install -v -m644 doc/drafts/* /usr/share/doc/openldap-2.3.39/drafts &&
install -v -m644 doc/rfc/*    /usr/share/doc/openldap-2.3.39/rfc &&
cp -v -R doc/guide/*          /usr/share/doc/openldap-2.3.39/guide

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: Installs the slapd and slurpd daemon programs in /usr/sbin instead of /usr/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc: Sets the configuration file directory to avoid the default of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/srv/ldap: Sets the directory to use for the LDAP directory database, replication logs and run-time variable data.

--disable-debug: Disable debugging code.

--enable-dynamic: This forces the OpenLDAP libraries to be dynamically linked to the executable programs.

--enable-crypt: Enables crypt(3) passwords.

--enable-modules: Enables dynamic module support.

--enable-rlookups: This parameter enables reverse lookups of client hostnames.

--enable-backends: This parameter enables all available backends.

--enable-overlays: This parameter enables all available overlays.

--disable-sql: This parameter explicity disables the sql backend. Omit this switch if a SQL server is installed.

--disable-bdb --disable-hdb --with-ldbm-api=gdbm: Pass these parameters to the configure command if you wish to use GDBM instead of Berkeley DB as the primary backend database.

chmod -v 0755 ...: This command adds the executable bit to the shared libraries.

Note

You can run ./configure --help to see if there are other parameters you can pass to the configure command to enable other options or dependency packages.

Configuring OpenLDAP

Config Files

/etc/openldap/*

Configuration Information

Configuring the slapd and slurpd servers can be complex. Securing the LDAP directory, especially if you are storing non-public data such as password databases, can also be a challenging task. You'll need to modify the /etc/openldap/slapd.conf and /etc/openldap/ldap.conf files to set up OpenLDAP for your particular needs.

Resources to assist you with topics such as choosing a directory configuration, backend and database definitions, access control settings, running as a user other than root and setting a chroot environment include:

The slapd man page
The slapd.conf man page
The OpenLDAP 2.3 Administrator's Guide (also installed locally in /usr/share/doc/openldap-2.3.39/guide/admin)
Documents located at http://www.openldap.org/pub/

Utilizing GDBM

To utilize GDBM as the database backend, the “database” entry in /etc/openldap/slapd.conf must be changed from “bdb” to “ldbm”. You can use both by creating an additional database section in /etc/openldap/slapd.conf.

Mozilla Address Directory

By default, LDAPv2 support is disabled in the slapd.conf file. Once the database is properly set up and Mozilla is configured to use the directory, you must add allow bind_v2 to the slapd.conf file.

Boot Script

To automate the startup of the LDAP server at system bootup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/openldap init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package using the following command:

make install-openldap1

Note: The init script you just installed only starts the slapd daemon. If you wish to also start the slurpd daemon at system startup, install a modified version of the script using this command:

make install-openldap2

Note

The init script starts the daemons without any parameters. You'll need to modify the script to include the parameters needed for your specific configuration. See the slapd and slurpd man pages for parameter information.

Testing the Configuration

Start the LDAP server using the init script:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/openldap start

Verify access to the LDAP server with the following command:

ldapsearch -x -b '' -s base '(objectclass=*)' namingContexts

The expected result is:

# extended LDIF
#
# LDAPv3
# base <> with scope base
# filter: (objectclass=*)
# requesting: namingContexts
#

#
dn:
namingContexts: dc=my-domain,dc=com

# search result
search: 2
result: 0 Success

# numResponses: 2
# numEntries: 1

Installed Programs: ldapadd, ldapcompare, ldapdelete, ldapmodify, ldapmodrdn, ldappasswd, ldapsearch, ldapwhoami, slapadd, slapcat, slapd, slapdn, slapindex, slappasswd, slaptest, and slurpd

Installed Libraries: liblber.{so,a}, libldap.{so,a}, and libldap_r.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/openldap, /srv/ldap, and /usr/share/openldap

Short Descriptions

ldapadd	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and adds entries.
ldapcompare	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and performs a compare using specified parameters.
ldapdelete	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and deletes one or more entries.
ldapmodify	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and modifies entries.
ldapmodrdn	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and modifies the RDN of entries.
ldappasswd	is a tool to set the password of an LDAP user.
ldapsearch	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and performs a search using specified parameters.
ldapwhoami	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and displays whoami information.
slapadd	is used to add entries specified in LDAP Directory Interchange Format (LDIF) to an LDAP database.
slapcat	is used to generate an LDAP LDIF output based upon the contents of a slapd database.
slapd	is the stand-alone LDAP server.
slapdn	checks a list of string-represented DNs based on schema syntax.
slapindex	is used to regenerate slapd indices based upon the current contents of a database.
slappasswd	is an OpenLDAP password utility.
slaptest	checks the sanity of the `slapd.conf` file.
slurpd	is the stand-alone LDAP replication server.
`liblber.{so,a}`	is a set of lightweight Basic Encoding Rules routines. These routines are used by the LDAP library routines to encode and decode LDAP protocol elements using the (slightly simplified) Basic Encoding Rules defined by LDAP. They are not normally used directly by an LDAP application program except in the handling of controls and extended operations.
`libldap.{so,a}`	supports the LDAP programs and provide functionality for other programs interacting with LDAP.
`libldap_r.{so,a}`	contains the functions required by the LDAP programs to produce the results from LDAP requests.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 09:35:39 -0500

rsync-3.0.2

Introduction to rsync

The rsync package contains the rsync utility. This is useful for synchronizing large file archives over a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/r/rsync-3.0.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: fd4c5d77d8cb7bb86ab209076fa214d9
Download size: 765 KB
Estimated disk space required: 35 MB (includes installing all documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

rsync Dependencies

Optional

popt-1.10.4, libattr, and libacl

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/rsync

Installation of rsync

For security reasons, running the rsync server as an unprivileged user and group is encouraged. If you intend to run rsync as a daemon, create the rsyncd user and group with the following commands issued by the root user:

groupadd -g 48 rsyncd &&
useradd -c "rsyncd Daemon" -d /home/rsync -g rsyncd \
    -s /bin/false -u 48 rsyncd

Install rsync by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have Doxygen-1.5.2 installed and wish to build HTML API documentation, issue doxygen.

If you have DocBook-utils-0.6.14 installed and wish to build the user documentation, issue any or all of the following commands:

pushd doc &&
docbook2pdf             rsync.sgml &&
docbook2ps              rsync.sgml &&
docbook2dvi             rsync.sgml &&
docbook2txt             rsync.sgml &&
docbook2html --nochunks rsync.sgml &&
popd

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d          /usr/share/doc/rsync-3.0.2/api &&
install -v -m644 dox/html/*  /usr/share/doc/rsync-3.0.2/api &&
install -v -m644 doc/rsync.* /usr/share/doc/rsync-3.0.2

Configuring rsync

Config Files

/etc/rsyncd.conf

Configuration Information

For client access to remote files, you may need to install the OpenSSH-4.7p1 package to connect to the remote server.

This is a simple download-only configuration to set up running rsync as a server. See the rsyncd.conf(5) man-page for additional options (i.e., user authentication).

cat > /etc/rsyncd.conf << "EOF"
# This is a basic rsync configuration file
# It exports a single module without user authentication.

motd file = /home/rsync/welcome.msg
use chroot = yes

[localhost]
    path = /home/rsync
    comment = Default rsync module
    read only = yes
    list = yes
    uid = rsyncd
    gid = rsyncd

EOF

You can find additional configuration information and general documentation about rsync at http://rsync.samba.org/documentation.html.

Boot Script

Note that you only want to start the rsync server if you want to provide an rsync archive on your local machine. You don't need this script to run the rsync client.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/rsyncd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-rsyncd

Installed Program: rsync

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: Optionally, /usr/share/doc/rsync-3.0.2

Short Descriptions

rsync

is a replacement for rcp (and scp) that has many more features. It uses the “rsync algorithm” which provides a very fast method of syncing remote files. It does this by sending just the differences in the files across the link, without requiring that both sets of files are present at one end of the link beforehand.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 09:59:17 -0500

Running a CVS Server

This section will describe how to set up, administer and secure a CVS server.

CVS Server Dependencies

Required

CVS-1.11.22 and OpenSSH-4.7p1

Setting up a CVS Server.

A CVS server will be set up using OpenSSH as the remote access method. Other access methods, including :pserver: and :server: will not be used for write access to the CVS repository. The :pserver: method sends clear text passwords over the network and the :server: method is not supported in all CVS ports. Instructions for anonymous, read only CVS access using :pserver: can be found at the end of this section.

Configuration of the CVS server consists of four steps:

1. Create a Repository.

Create a new CVS repository with the following commands:

mkdir /srv/cvsroot &&
chmod 1777 /srv/cvsroot &&
export CVSROOT=/srv/cvsroot &&
cvs init

2. Import Source Code Into the Repository.

Import a source module into the repository with the following commands, issued from a user account on the same machine as the CVS repository:

cd <sourcedir> &&
cvs import -m "<repository test>" <cvstest> <vendortag> <releasetag>

3. Verify Local Repository Access.

Test access to the CVS repository from the same user account with the following command:

cvs co cvstest

4. Verify Remote Repository Access.

Test access to the CVS repository from a remote machine using a user account that has ssh access to the CVS server with the following commands:

Note

Replace <servername> with the IP address or host name of the CVS repository machine. You will be prompted for the user's shell account password before CVS checkout can continue.

export CVS_RSH=/usr/bin/ssh &&
cvs -d:ext:<servername>:/srv/cvsroot co cvstest

Configuring CVS for Anonymous Read Only Access.

CVS can be set up to allow anonymous read only access using the :pserver: method by logging on as root and executing the following commands:

(grep anonymous /etc/passwd || useradd anonymous -s /bin/false -u 98) &&
echo anonymous: > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/passwd &&
echo anonymous > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/readers

If you use inetd, the following command will add the CVS entry to /etc/inetd.conf:

echo "2401  stream  tcp  nowait  root  /usr/bin/cvs cvs -f \
    --allow-root=/srv/cvsroot pserver" >> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the CVS file as /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver

     service cvspserver
     {
          port        = 2401
          socket_type = stream
          protocol    = tcp
          wait        = no
          user        = root
          passenv     = PATH
          server      = /usr/bin/cvs
          server_args = -f --allow-root=/srv/cvsroot pserver
     }

# End /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver
EOF

Issue a /etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd reload to reread the changed xinetd.conf file.

Testing anonymous access to the new repository requires an account on another machine that can reach the CVS server via network. No account on the CVS repository is needed. To test anonymous access to the CVS repository, log in to another machine as an unprivileged user and execute the following command:

cvs -d:pserver:anonymous@<servername>:/srv/cvsroot co cvstest

Note

Replace <servername> with the IP address or hostname of the CVS server.

Command Explanations

mkdir /srv/cvsroot: Create the CVS repository directory.

chmod 1777 /srv/cvsroot: Set sticky bit permissions for CVSROOT.

export CVSROOT=/srv/cvsroot: Specify new CVSROOT for all cvs commands.

cvs init: Initialize the new CVS repository.

cvs import -m "repository test" cvstest vendortag releasetag: All source code modules must be imported into the CVS repository before use, with the cvs import command. The -m flags specifies an initial descriptive entry for the new module. The cvstest parameter is the name used for the module in all subsequent cvs commands. The vendortag and releasetag parameters are used to further identify each CVS module and are mandatory whether used or not.

(grep anonymous /etc/passwd || useradd anonymous -s /bin/false -u 98): Check for an existing anonymous user and create one if not found.

echo anonymous: > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/passwd: Add the anonymous user to the CVS passwd file, which is unused for anything else in this configuration.

echo anonymous > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/readers: Add the anonymous user to the CVS readers file, a list of users who have read only access to the repository.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /srv/cvsroot

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Running a Subversion Server

This section will describe how to set up, administer and secure a Subversion server.

Subversion Server Dependencies

Required

Subversion-1.4.4 and OpenSSH-4.7p1

Setting up a Subversion Server.

The following instructions will install a Subversion server, which will be set up to use OpenSSH as the secure remote access method, with svnserve available for anonymous access.

Configuration of the Subversion server consists of the following steps:

1. Setup Users, Groups, and Permissions

You'll need to be user root for the initial portion of configuration. Create the svn user and group with the following commands:

groupadd -g 56 svn &&
useradd -c "SVN Owner" -d /home/svn -m -g svn -s /bin/false -u 56 svn

If you plan to have multiple repositories, you should have a group dedicated to each repository for ease of administration. Create the svntest group for the test repository and add the svn user to that group with the following commands:

groupadd -g 57 svntest &&
usermod -G svntest -a svn

Additionally you should set umask 002 while working with a repository so that all new files will be writable by owner and group. This is made mandatory by creating a wrapper script for svn and svnserve:

mv /usr/bin/svn /usr/bin/svn.orig &&
mv /usr/bin/svnserve /usr/bin/svnserve.orig &&
cat >> /usr/bin/svn << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh
umask 002
/usr/bin/svn.orig "$@"
EOF
cat >> /usr/bin/svnserve << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh
umask 002
/usr/bin/svnserve.orig "$@"
EOF
chmod 0755 /usr/bin/svn{,serve}

Note

If you use Apache for working with the repository over HTTP, even for anonymous access, you should wrap /usr/sbin/httpd in a similar script.

2. Create a Subversion repository.

With subversion-1.1.0 and greater, a new type of repository data-store is available, FSFS. There is a tradeoff for speed with the new backend, however, the repository can now be placed on a network mount, and any corruption does not require an admin to recover the repository. For more information and comparison between FSFS and BDB, see http://svnbook.red-bean.com/svnbook-1.1/ch05.html#svn-ch-5-sect-1.2.A.

Create a new Subversion repository with the following commands:

install -v -m 0755 -d /srv &&
install -v -m 0755 -o svn -g svn -d /srv/svn/repositories &&
svnadmin create --fs-type fsfs /srv/svn/repositories/svntest

Now that the repository is created, it should be populated with with something useful. You'll need to have a predefined directory layout set up exactly as you want your repository to look. For example, here is a sample BLFS layout setup with a root of svntest/. You'll need to setup a directory tree similar to the following:

          svntest/            # The name of the repository
             trunk/           # Contains the existing source tree
                BOOK/
                bootscripts/
                edguide/
                patches/
                scripts/
             branches/        # Needed for additional branches
             tags/            # Needed for tagging release points

Once you've created your directory layout as shown above, you are ready to do the initial import:

svn import -m "Initial import." \
    </path/to/source/tree> \
    file:///srv/svn/repositories/svntest

Now change owner and group information on the repository, and add an unprivileged user to the svn and svntest groups:

chown -R svn:svntest /srv/svn/repositories/svntest &&
chmod -R g+w /srv/svn/repositories/svntest &&
chmod g+s /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/db &&
usermod -G svn,svntest -a <username>

svntest is the group assigned to the svntest repository. As mentioned earlier, this eases administration of multiple repositories when using OpenSSH for authentication. Going forward, you'll need to add your unprivileged user, and any additional users that you wish to have write access to the repository, to the svn and svntest groups.

In addition, you'll notice that the new repository's db directory is set-groupID. If the reasoning is not immediately obvious, when using any external authentication method (such as ssh), the sticky bit is set so that all new files will be owned by the user, but group of svntest. Anyone in the svntest group can create files, but still give the entire group write access to those files. This avoids locking out other users from the repository.

Now, return to an unprivileged user account, and take a look at the new repository using svnlook:

svnlook tree /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/

Note

You may need to log out and back in again to refresh your group memberships. 'su <username>' should work as well.

3. Configure the Server

As mentioned previously, these instructions will configure the server to use only ssh for write access to the repository and to provide anonymous access using svnserve. There are several other ways to provide access to the repository. These additional configurations are best explained at http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.

Access configuration needs to be done for each repository. Create the svnserve.conf file for the svntest repository using the following commands:

cp /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/conf/svnserve.conf \
    /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/conf/svnserve.conf.default &&
cat > /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/conf/svnserve.conf << "EOF"
[general]
anon-access = read
auth-access = write
EOF

There is not a lot to the configuration file at all. You'll notice that only the general section is required. Take a look at the svnserve.conf.default file for information on using svnserve's built-in authentication method.

4. Starting the Server

There are a couple of ways to start svnserve. The most common way is to start it as an inetd or xinetd process. Alternately, you can use a bootscript to start the service at startup.

Note

If you do not wish to provide anonymous access to your svn repositories or use svnserve's built-in authentication, you do not need to run svnserve.

If you use inetd, add a line to /etc/inetd.conf using the following commands:

cat >> /etc/inetd.conf << "EOF"
svn stream tcp nowait svn /usr/bin/svnserve svnserve -i
EOF

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Subversion server file as /etc/xinetd.d/svn:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/svn << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/svn

service svn
{
        port                    = 3690
        socket_type             = stream
        protocol                = tcp
        wait                    = no
        user                    = svn
        server                  = /usr/bin/svnserve
        server_args             = -i -r /srv/svn/repositories
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/svn
EOF

Finally, if you wish to simply start the server at startup, install the svn bootscript included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-svn

Last updated on 2008-04-01 15:41:23 -0500

Part VI. X + Window Managers

Chapter 23. X Window System Environment

This chapter contains instructions to build and configure a graphical user environment.

Xorg-7.2 introduces a completely autotooled build system which means that the packages build and install using the conventional configure, make and make install commands, but it requires installing more than 100 different packages. Most large commercial distributions have decided to use the Xorg package.

The X Window System

Last updated on 2008-02-05 11:44:55 -0600

Introduction to Xorg-7.2

Xorg is a freely redistributable, open-source implementation of the X Window System. This system provides a client/server interface between display hardware (the mouse, keyboard, and video displays) and the desktop environment, while also providing both the windowing infrastructure and a standardized application interface (API).

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7

Xorg Download and Installation Instructions

Xorg-7.0.0 introduced a completely auto-tooled, modular build system. With the new modular build system, it is no longer possible to download the entire package in a single file. In fact, there may be as many as 293 files that need to be fetched from the download location. To assist with such a large task, installing Wget-1.10.2 is strongly recommended for downloading the needed files. A complete wget file list is provided for each section that includes multiple packages.

Given the number of packages available, deciding which packages you need to install for your particular setup may seem a bit overwhelming at first. Take a look at this page and this thread to get an idea of what you will need. If you are unsure, you should install all packages at the cost of extra disk space. To see which packages have changed between releases of Xorg, see the upstream update and deprecated directories.

Note

Even if you intend to download only the necessary packages, you should download the wget file lists. The list of files are ordered by dependency, and the package versions listed in the files are known to work well with each other. Further, the wget file lists contain comments for specific packages that are deprecated or are not recommended to install. Newer packages are likely intended for the next release of Xorg and have already proved to be incompatible with current versions of software installed in BLFS. The installed size of Xorg can be reduced considerably by installing only the packages that you will need and use, however, the BLFS book cannot account for all dependencies and build options for the individual Xorg packages. The instructions assume that all packages have been built. A wiki page containing dependency information is under development. You are encouraged to add to these pages if you discover additional information that may be helpful to other users who selectively install individual packages.

Additionally, because of the large number of repetitive commands, you are encouraged to partially automate the build. The commands below (or similar) can be entered at the command line to compile each group of packages (proto, utils, libs, apps, drivers). The wiki links on each group's page contain specific commands to compile the entire group of packages, based on the content of the wget files.

bash -e #exit on all errors
section=proto
version=7.2
mkdir $section
cd $section

# download and check packages
grep -v '^#' ../${section}-${version}.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/${section}/
md5sum -c ../${section}-${version}.md5

# build packages
for package in $(grep -v '^#' ../${section}-${version}.wget)
do
  packagedir=$(echo $package | sed 's/.tar.bz2//')
  tar -xf $package
  cd $packagedir
  ./configure $XORG_CONFIG
  make
  make install
  cd ..
  rm -rf $packagedir
  rm -f $package
done 2>&1 | tee -a ../xorg-${section}-compile.log #log the entire loop

The above shell will exit immediately on error. If it runs to completion, you should manually exit the shell before continuing on to the next set of instructions.

Setting up the Xorg Build Environment

First, you'll need to create a working directory:

mkdir xc &&
cd xc

As with previous releases of the X Window System, it may be desirable to install Xorg into an alternate prefix. This is no longer common practice among Linux distributions. The common installation prefix for Xorg on Linux is /usr. There is no standard alternate prefix, nor is there any exception in the current revision of the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard for Release 7 of the X Window System. Alan Coopersmith of Sun Microsystems, has recently stated "At Sun, we were using /usr/X11 and plan to stick with it." Only the /opt/* prefix or the /usr prefix adhere to the current FHS guidelines.

Choose your installation prefix, and set the XORG_PREFIX variable with the following command:

export XORG_PREFIX="<PREFIX>"

Throughout these instructions, you will use the following configure switches for all of the packages. Create the XORG_CONFIG variable to use for this parameter substitution:

export XORG_CONFIG="--prefix=$XORG_PREFIX --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --mandir=$XORG_PREFIX/share/man --localstatedir=/var"

Note

Make sure that you also add these variables to your personal or system-wide profile as they are used throughout this book. See The Bash Shell Startup Files for more information.

If you've decided to use an alternate prefix, be sure to add $XORG_PREFIX/bin to your PATH environment variable and $XORG_PREFIX/lib/pkgconfig to your PKG_CONFIG_PATH variable. For detailed instructions, see The Bash Shell Startup Files. You should also add $XORG_PREFIX/lib to the /etc/ld.so.conf file and $XORG_PREFIX/share/man as a MANDATORY_MANPATH in /etc/man_db.conf.

Packages in Xorg store their configuration files in $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11 by default. This is strictly against FHS guidelines. To simplify installation, create the proper installation directories in /etc/X11 and create symlinks in $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11 to satisfy the installation. Execute the following commands as the root user:


install -v -m755 -d \
    /etc/X11/{app-defaults,fs,twm,xdm,xinit,xkb,xsm} &&

install -v -m755 -d $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11 &&

for link in \
    /etc/X11/{app-defaults,fs,twm,xdm,xinit,xkb,xsm}
do
    ln -sv $link $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11
done

Last updated on 2008-08-10 15:33:05 -0500

Xorg Protocol Headers

Introduction to Xorg Protocol Headers

The Xorg protocol headers provide the header files required to build the system, and to allow other applications to build against the installed X Window system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/proto/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/proto/
Download MD5 sum: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/proto-7.2.md5
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 4.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required download list: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/proto-7.2.wget

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7ProtocolHeaders

Downloading Xorg Protocol Headers

To download the needed files using wget, use the following commands:

mkdir proto &&
cd proto &&
grep -v '^#' ../proto-7.2.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/proto/ &&
md5sum -c ../proto-7.2.md5

Installation of Xorg Protocol Headers

Install the Xorg protocol headers by running the following commands for each package to be installed.

./configure $XORG_CONFIG

These packages do not provide test suites.

Now as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $XORG_PREFIX/: include/X11, include/GL, and lib/pkgconfig

Last updated on 2007-07-21 11:50:32 -0500

Xorg Utilities

Introduction to Xorg Utilities

The Xorg utility packages provide needed utilities, not for the Xorg installation itself, but for other applications that make use of legacy X11R6 installation methods.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/util/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/util/
Download MD5 sum: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/util-7.2.md5
Download size: 664 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required download list: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/util-7.2.wget

Xorg Utilities Dependencies

Required

pkg-config-0.22 and Xorg Protocol Headers

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7Utilities

Downloading Xorg Utilities

To download the needed files using wget, use the following commands:

mkdir util &&
cd util &&
grep -v '^#' ../util-7.2.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/util/ &&
md5sum -c ../util-7.2.md5

Installation of Xorg Utilities

Install the Xorg utilities by running the following commands for each package:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

These packages do not provide test suites.

Now as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: ccmakedep, cleanlinks, gccmakedep, imake, lndir, makedepend, makeg, mergelib, mkdirhier, mkhtmlindex, revpath, xmkmf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $XORG_PREFIX/: bin, lib/X11/config, share/aclocal, and share/man

Short Descriptions

ccmakedep	creates dependencies in makefiles using a C compiler.
cleanlinks	removes dangling symbolic links and empty directories.
gccmakedep	creates dependencies in makefiles using gcc -M.
imake	is a C preprocessor interface to the make utility.
lndir	creates a shadow directory of symbolic links to another directory tree.
makedepend	creates dependencies in makefiles.
makeg	makes a debuggable executable.
mergelib	merges one library into another.
mkdirhier	makes a directory hierarchy.
mkhtmlindex	generates index files for HTML man pages.
revpath	generates a relative path that can be used to undo a changedirectory.
xmkmf	creates a Makefile from an Imakefile.

Last updated on 2007-07-21 11:50:32 -0500

libXau-1.0.3

Introduction to libXau

The libXau package contains a library implementing the X11 Authorization Protocol. This is useful for restricting client access to the display.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/lib/libXau-1.0.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/lib/libXau-1.0.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 75a9f2b85cd1617b5ca98c9095323853
Download size: 224 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.0 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

libXau Dependencies

Required

Xorg Protocol Headers

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libXau

Installation of libXau

Install libXau by running the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libXau.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libXau.{so,a}

is the library of X authority database routines.

Last updated on 2007-07-09 23:30:55 -0500

libXdmcp-1.0.2

Introduction to libXdmcp

The libXdmcp package contains a library implementing the X Display Manager Control Protocol. This is useful for allowing clients to interact with the X Display Manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/lib/libXdmcp-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/lib/libXdmcp-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 10facf2bc7cbd5e5c1a698b8a210a582
Download size: 216 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libXdmcp Dependencies

Required

Xorg Protocol Headers

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libXdmcp

Installation of libXdmcp

Install libXdmcp by running the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libXdmcp.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libXdmcp.{so,a}

is the X Display Manager Control Protocol library.

Last updated on 2007-07-09 23:30:55 -0500

xcb-proto-1.0

Introduction to xcb-proto

The xcb-proto package provides the XML-XCB protocol descriptions that libxcb uses to generate the majority of its code and API.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xcb.freedesktop.org/dist/xcb-proto-1.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d31407eaae7e52d100645217767a41aa
Download size: 69.4 KB
Estimated disk space required: 788 KB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

xcb-proto Dependencies

Optional (required to run the tests)

libxml2-2.6.31

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xcb-proto

Installation of xcb-proto

Install xcb-proto by running the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -dv -m755 ${XORG_PREFIX}/share/doc/xcb-proto-1.0 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* ${XORG_PREFIX}/share/doc/xcb-proto-1.0

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $XORG_PREFIX/share/xcb

Last updated on 2008-08-11 10:11:37 -0500

libxcb-1.0

Introduction to libxcb

The libxcb package provides an interface to the X Window System protocol, which replaces the current Xlib interface. Xlib can also use XCB as a transport layer, allowing software to make requests and receive responses with both.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xcb.freedesktop.org/dist/libxcb-1.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0eb951fd0fa9542dbe4fc3530b81a3b6
Download size: 410 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch to workaround X11 locking bugs in other applications: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libxcb-1.0-sloppy_lock-1.patch

libxcb Dependencies

Required

libXau-1.0.3, libXdmcp-1.0.2, libpthread-stubs-0.1, xcb-proto-1.0, and libxslt-1.1.22

Optional

Doxygen-1.5.2 (to generate API documentation) and Check (to run tests)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libxcb

Installation of libxcb

Install libxcb by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libxcb-1.0-sloppy_lock-1.patch &&
./configure $XORG_CONFIG --docdir='${datadir}'/doc/libxcb-1.0 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--docdir='${datadir}'/doc/libxcb-1.0: This parameter ensures the libxcb documentation is installed to a versioned directory.

--without-doxygen: This switch can be used to disable the API documentation if Doxygen-1.5.2 is installed.

Configuring libxcb

Configuration Information

The libxcb developers have decided to be strict in asserting locking bugs in X11 applications. This is different than the behavior of libX11 when used on its own, and it will cause some applications to crash when they previously did not. When an application has these types of bugs, it will crash with the following assertion:

xcb_xlib_lock: Assertion `!c->xlib.lock' failed.

The patch applied above to libxcb adds an environment variable, LIBXCB_ALLOW_SLOPPY_LOCK, to be set which will allow the locking bugs to not crash the application. It is a workaround that is known to be needed in a few cases. If it is found that these bugs affect an application in use, add the following to your system or personal profile:

export LIBXCB_ALLOW_SLOPPY_LOCK=1

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libxcb.{so,a} and libxcb-*.{so,a}

Installed Directories: $XORG_PREFIX/include/xcb and $XORG_PREFIX/share/doc/libxcb-1.0

Short Descriptions

libxcb.{so,a}

is an interface to the X Window System protocol.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 10:11:37 -0500

Xorg Libraries

Introduction to Xorg Libraries

The Xorg libraries provide library routines that are used within all X Window applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/lib/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/lib/
Download MD5 sum: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/lib-7.2.md5
Download size: 11.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 186 MB
Estimated build time: 6.6 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required download list: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/lib-7.2.wget
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libX11-1.1.2-badargs-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libXfont-1.2.8-pcf_parser-1.patch

Xorg Libraries Dependencies

Required

Ed-0.8, Fontconfig-2.4.2, pkg-config-0.22, Xorg Protocol Headers, and libXdmcp-1.0.2

Optional

libxcb-1.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7Libraries

Downloading Xorg Libraries

To download the needed files using wget, use the following commands:

mkdir lib &&
cd lib &&
grep -v '^#' ../lib-7.2.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/lib/ &&
md5sum -c ../lib-7.2.md5

Installation of Xorg Libraries

Install the libraries by running the following commands for each package:

case $(basename "$PWD") in
libX11-1.1.2 )
    patch -Np1 -i ../../libX11-1.1.2-badargs-1.patch &&
    sed -i 's/_XGet/XGet/' modules/im/ximcp/imDefLkup.c
    ;;
libXfont-1.2.8 )
    patch -Np1 -i ../../libXfont-1.2.8-pcf_parser-1.patch &&
    sed -i 's/(ft_isdigit/(isdigit/' src/FreeType/fttools.c
    ;;
esac &&
./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

These packages do not provide test suites.

Now as the root user:

make install &&
ldconfig

Command Explanations

--without-xcb: By default, libX11 will use libxcb-1.0 for its transport layer. This parameter is necessary in the ./configure command if libxcb-1.0 is not installed.

patch -Np1 -i ../libX11-1.1.2-badargs-1.patch: This patch fixes an error with argument ordering in one of the functions in libX11.

sed -i 's/_XGet/XGet/' modules/im/ximcp/imDefLkup.c: This command fixes a locking bug in libX11.

patch -Np1 -i ../libXfont-1.2.8-pcf_parser-1.patch: This patch fixes a security vulnerability in the PCF font parser in libXfont.

sed -i 's/(ft_isdigit/(isdigit/' src/FreeType/fttools.c: In newer versions of Freetype2, the ft_isdigit macro has been removed. This command replaces it with the compatible isdigit macro.

Configuration of Xorg Libraries

If you've chosen to install Xorg into /usr, then no further configuration is necessary and you can skip the rest of this section. If you've opted for an alternate prefix, you should create two symlinks to satisfy the expected environment of several packages. Execute the following commands as the root user:

ln -sv $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11 /usr/lib/X11 &&
ln -sv $XORG_PREFIX/include/X11 /usr/include/X11

Installed Programs: cxpm, makestrs, sxpm, xft-config

Installed Libraries: libAppleWM.{so,a}, libdmx.{so,a}, libfontenc.{so,a}, libFS.{so,a}, libICE.{so,a}, liboldX.{so,a}, libSM.{so,a}, libWindowsWM.{so,a}, libX11.{so,a}, libXaw6.{so,a}, libXaw7.{so,a}, libXaw8.{so,a}, libXaw.{so,a}, libXcomposite.{so,a}, libXcursor.{so,a}, libXdamage.{so,a}, libXevie.{so,a}, libXext.{so,a}, libXfixes.{so,a}, libXfontcache.{so,a}, libXfont.{so,a}, libXft.{so,a}, libXinerama.{so,a}, libXi.{so,a}, libxkbfile.{so,a}, libxkbui.{so,a}, libXmu.{so,a}, libXmuu.{so,a}, libXpm.{so,a}, libXprintAppUtil.{so,a}, libXprintUtil.{so,a}, libXp.{so,a}, libXrandr.{so,a}, libXrender.{so,a}, libXRes.{so,a}, libXss.{so,a}, libXTrap.{so,a}, libXt.{so,a}, libXtst.{so,a}, libXvMC.{so,a}, libXvMCW.{so,a}, libXv.{so,a}, libXxf86dga.{so,a}, libXxf86misc.{so,a}, and libXxf86vm.{so,a}

Short Descriptions

cxpm	checks the format of an XPM file.
makestrs	makes string table C source and header(s).
sxpm	shows an XPM file and/or converts XPM 1 or 2 files to XPM 3.
xft-config	reports Xft version, compiler, linker, and/or installation directory information.
`libAppleWM.{so,a}`	is the Apple rootless window management extension.
`libdmx.{so,a}`	is the X Window System DMX (Distributed Multihead X) extension library.
`libfontenc.{so,a}`	is the X11 font encoding library.
`libFS.{so,a}`	is the library interface to the X Font Server.
`libICE.{so,a}`	is the X Inter Client Exchange Library.
`liboldX.{so,a}`	is the interface library to X10 routines.
`libSM.{so,a}`	is the X Session Management Library.
`libWindowsWM.{so,a}`	is the WindowsWM Library based on AppleWM.
`libX11.{so,a}`	is the Xlib Library.
`libXaw6.{so,a}`	is the X Athena Widgets Library, version 6.
`libXaw7.{so,a}`	is the X Athena Widgets Library, version 7.
`libXaw8.{so,a}`	is the X Athena Widgets Library, version 8.
`libXaw.{so,a}`	are symbolic links to the current X Athena Widgets Library, version 8.
`libXcomposite.{so,a}`	is the X Composite Library.
`libXcursor.{so,a}`	is the X Cursor management library.
`libXdamage.{so,a}`	is the X Damage Library.
`libXevie.{so,a}`	is the X Event Interception Extension (XEvIE) Library.
`libXext.{so,a}`	is the Misc X Extension Library.
`libXfixes.{so,a}`	a library to provide augmented versions of core protocol requests.
`libXfontcache.{so,a}`	is the X-TrueType font cache extension client library.
`libXfont.{so,a}`	is the X font library.
`libXft.{so,a}`	is the X FreeType interface library.
`libXinerama.{so,a}`	is the Xinerama Library.
`libXi.{so,a}`	is the X Input Extension Library.
`libxkbfile.{so,a}`	is the xkbfile Library.
`libxkbui.{so,a}`	is the xkbui Library.
`libXmu.{so,a}`	is the X interface library for miscellaneous utilities not part of the Xlib standard.
`libXmuu.{so,a}`	is the Mini Xmu Library.
`libXpm.{so,a}`	is the X Pixmap Library.
`libXprintAppUtil.{so,a}`	is the XprintAppUtil Library.
`libXprintUtil.{so,a}`	is the XprintUtil Library.
`libXp.{so,a}`	is the X Print Client Library.
`libXrandr.{so,a}`	is the X Resize, Rotate and Reflection extension library.
`libXrender.{so,a}`	is the X Render Library.
`libXRes.{so,a}`	is the X-Resource extension client library.
`libXss.{so,a}`	is the X11 Screen Saver extension client library.
`libXTrap.{so,a}`	is the X Trap Library.
`libXt.{so,a}`	is the X Toolkit Library.
`libXtst.{so,a}`	is the Xtst Library.
`libXvMC.{so,a}`	is the X-Video Motion Compensation Library.
`libXvMCW.{so,a}`	is the XvMC Wrapper including the Nonstandard VLD extension.
`libXv.{so,a}`	is the X Window System video extension library.
`libXxf86dga.{so,a}`	is the client library for the XFree86-DGA extension.
`libXxf86misc.{so,a}`	is the client library for the XFree86-Misc X extension.
`libXxf86vm.{so,a}`	is the client library for the XFree86-VidMode X extension.

Last updated on 2008-06-19 19:28:34 -0500

Xbitmaps-1.0.1

Introduction to Xbitmaps

Xbitmaps provides static graphics needed by Xorg applications to draw screen elements.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/data/xbitmaps-1.0.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/data/xbitmaps-1.0.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b28a9840cde3c38d7c09716372fea257
Download size: 54 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.7 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Xbitmaps Dependencies

Required

Xorg Utilities

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xbitmaps

Installation of Xbitmaps

First, configure the Xbitmaps package by running the following command:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now install as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $XORG_PREFIX/include/X11/bitmaps

Last updated on 2007-05-25 17:09:39 -0500

Xorg Applications

Introduction to Xorg Applications

The Xorg applications provide the expected applications available in previous X Window implementations.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/app/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/app/
Download MD5 sum: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/app-7.2.md5
Download size: 9.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 30.7 MB
Estimated build time: 2.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required download list: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/app-7.2.wget

Xorg Applications Dependencies

Required

xbitmaps-1.0.1, libpng-1.2.29, and Xorg Libraries

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 (only used by XDM)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7Applications

Downloading Xorg Applications

To download the needed files using wget, use the following commands:

mkdir app &&
cd app &&
grep -v '^#' ../app-7.2.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/app/ &&
md5sum -c ../app-7.2.md5

Installation of Xorg Applications

Install the applications by running the following commands for each package:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

These packages do not provide test suites.

Now as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: appres, atobm, bdftopcf, beforelight, bitmap, bmtoa, dga, editres, fontname.sh, fontprop.sh, fonttosfnt, fslsfonts, fstobdf, iceauth, ico, listres, mkcfm, mkfontdir, mkfontscale, oclock, rstart, rstartd, sessreg, setxkbmap, showfont, showrgb, smproxy, startx, twm, viewres, x11perf, x11perfcomp, xauth, xauth_switch_to_sun-des-1, xbiff, xcalc, xclipboard, xclock, xcmsdb, xconsole, xcursorgen, xcutsel, xdbedizzy, xditview, xdm, xdmshell, xdpr, xdpyinfo, xdriinfo, xedit, xev, xeyes, xfd, xfontsel, xfs, xfsinfo, xgamma, xgc, xhost, xinit, xkbbell, xkbcomp, xkbevd, xkbprint, xkbvleds, xkbwatch, xkill, xload, xlogo, xlsatoms, xlsclients, xlsfonts, xmag, xman, xmessage, xmh, xmodmap, xmore, xon, xphelloworld, xplsprinters, xpr, xprehashprinterlist, xprop, xpsimplehelloworld, xpxthelloworld, xrandr, xrdb, xrefresh, xset, xsetmode, xsetpointer, xsetroot, xsm, xstdcmap, xtrapchar, xtrapin, xtrapinfo, xtrapout, xtrapproto, xtrapreset, xtrapstats, xvidtune, xvinfo, xwd, xwininfo, and xwud

Short Descriptions

appres	lists the X application resource database.
atobm	is a bitmap converter utility for the X Window System.
bdftopcf	converts an X font from Bitmap Distribution Format to Portable Compiled Format.
beforelight	is a screensaver.
bitmap	is a bitmap editor utility for the X Window System.
bmtoa	is a bitmap converter utility for the X Window System.
dga	is a test program for the XFree86-DGA extension.
editres	is a dynamic resource editor for X Toolkit applications.
fontname.sh	is a script used to generate the FONT properties.
fontprop.sh	is a script used to generate the various XLFD font properties given an XLFD-style font name.
fonttosfnt	wraps a bitmap font in a sfnt (TrueType) wrapper.
fslsfonts	lists fonts served by X font server.
fstobdf	generates a BDF font from X font server.
iceauth	is the ICE authority file utility.
ico	animates an icosahedron or other polyhedron.
listres	lists resources in widgets.
mkcfm	creates summaries of font metric files in CID font directories.
mkfontdir	creates an index of X font files in a directory.
mkfontscale	creates an index of scalable font files for X.
oclock	is a round X clock.
rstart	is a sample implementation of a Remote Start client.
rstartd	is a sample implementation of a Remote Start rsh helper.
sessreg	manages utmp/wtmp entries for non-init clients.
setxkbmap	sets the keyboard using the X Keyboard Extension.
showfont	is a font dumper for X font server.
showrgb	uncompiles an rgb color-name database.
smproxy	is the Session Manager Proxy.
startx	initializes an X session.
twm	is the Tab Window Manager for the X Window System.
viewres	is a graphical class browser for Xt.
x11perf	is an X11 server performance test program.
x11perfcomp	is an X11 server performance comparison program.
xauth	is the X authority file utility.
xauth_switch_to_sun-des-1	switches the current Xserver's authentification to SUN-DES-1.
xbiff	is a mailbox flag for X.
xcalc	is a scientific calculator for X.
xclipboard	is an X clipboard client.
xclock	is an analog/digital clock for X.
xcmsdb	is the Device Color Characterization utility for the X Color Management System.
xconsole	monitors system console messages with X.
xcursorgen	creates an X cursor file from a collection of PNG images.
xcutsel	interchanges between cut buffer and selection.
xdbedizzy	is a demo of DBE creating a double buffered spinning scene.
xditview	displays ditroff output.
xdm	is the X Display Manager with support for XDMCP and a host chooser.
xdmshell	is a simple program for running xdm from login.
xdpr	dumps an X window directly to a printer.
xdpyinfo	is a display information utility for X.
xdriinfo	queries configuration information of DRI drivers.
xedit	is a simple text editor for X.
xev	prints contents of X events.
xeyes	is a a follow the mouse X demo.
xfd	displays all the characters in an X font.
xfontsel	provides point and click selection of X11 font names.
xfs	is the X font server.
xfsinfo	is the X font server information utility.
xgamma	alters a monitor's gamma correction through the X server.
xgc	is an X graphics demo.
xhost	is a server access control program for X.
xinit	is the X Window System initializer.
xkbbell	is an XKB utility program that raises a bell event.
xkbcomp	compiles an XKB keyboard description.
xkbevd	is the XKB event daemon.
xkbprint	prints an XKB keyboard description.
xkbvleds	shows the XKB status of keyboard LEDs.
xkbwatch	monitors modifier keys and LEDs.
xkill	kills a client by its X resource.
xload	is a system load average display for X.
xlogo	is the X Window System logo.
xlsatoms	lists interned atoms defined on the server.
xlsclients	lists client applications running on a display.
xlsfonts	is a server font list displayer for X.
xmag	magnifies parts of the screen.
xman	is a manual page display program for the X Window System.
xmessage	displays a message or query in a window.
xmh	sends and reads mail with an X interface to MH.
xmodmap	is a utility for modifying keymaps and pointer button mappings in X.
xmore	is a plain text display program for the X Window System.
xon	starts an X program on a remote machine.
xphelloworld	sends a test page to an Xprint printer.
xplsprinters	shows a list of Xprint printers and their attributes.
xpr	prints an X window dump.
xprehashprinterlist	recomputes the list of available printers.
xprop	is a property displayer for X.
xpsimplehelloworld	is a "Hello World"-like Xprint sample utility based on plain X11 rendering calls.
xpxthelloworld	is a "Hello World"-like Xprint sample utility based on the Xt toolkit.
xrandr	is a primitive command line interface to RandR extension.
xrdb	is the X server resource database utility.
xrefresh	refreshes all or part of an X screen.
xset	is the user preference utility for X.
xsetmode	sets the mode for an X Input device.
xsetpointer	sets an X Input device as the main pointer.
xsetroot	is the root window parameter setting utility for X.
xsm	is the X Session Manager.
xstdcmap	is the X standard colormap utility.
xtrapchar	parses ANSI character sequences to synthesize input events to X Window servers using the XTrap server extension.
xtrapin	tests the input transport to the XTrap server extension.
xtrapinfo	displays general XTrap configuration information.
xtrapout	tests the output transport from the XTrap extension to the XTrap client library.
xtrapproto	tests the XTrap protocol between a client and server.
xtrapreset	queries the XTrap extension.
xtrapstats	configures XTrap to collect usage statistics on all core input events and requests.
xvidtune	is the video mode tuner for Xorg.
xvinfo	prints out X-Video extension adaptor information.
xwd	dumps an image of an X window.
xwininfo	is a window information utility for X.
xwud	is an image displayer for X.

Last updated on 2008-05-24 00:27:25 -0500

xcursor-themes-1.0.1

Introduction to xcursor-themes

The xcursor-themes package contains the redglass and whiteglass animated cursor themes.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/data/xcursor-themes-1.0.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/lib/xcursor-themes-1.0.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 014bad415e64c49994679cdb71a97e37
Download size: 2.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

xcursor-themes Dependencies

Required

Xorg Applications

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xcursor-themes

Installation of xcursor-themes

Install xcursor-themes by running the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: None

Installed Directories: $XORG_PREFIX/icons

Last updated on 2008-06-25 01:20:31 -0500

Xorg Fonts

Introduction to Xorg Fonts

The Xorg font packages provide needed fonts to the Xorg applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/font/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/font/
Download MD5 sum: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/font-7.2.md5
Download size: 13.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 100 MB
Estimated build time: 2.0 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required download list: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/font-7.2.wget

Required

Xorg Applications and xcursor-themes-1.0.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7Fonts

Downloading Xorg Fonts

To download the needed files using wget, use the following commands:

mkdir font &&
cd font &&
grep -v '^#' ../font-7.2.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/font/ &&
md5sum -c ../font-7.2.md5

Installation of Xorg Fonts

Run the following commands for each package:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG &&
make

These packages do not provide test suites.

Now as the root user:

make install

When all of the fonts have been installed, the system must be configured so that Fontconfig can find the TrueType fonts since they are outside of the default search path of /usr/share/fonts. Make symlinks to the Xorg TrueType font directories by running the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/fonts &&
ln -svn $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11/fonts/OTF /usr/share/fonts/X11-OTF &&
ln -svn $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11/fonts/TTF /usr/share/fonts/X11-TTF

Installed Programs: bdftruncate and ucs2any

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $XORG_PREFIX/fonts and /usr/share/fonts/X11-{TTF,OTF}

Short Descriptions

bdftruncate	generates a truncated BDF font from an ISO 10646-1-encoded BDF font.
ucs2any	generates BDF fonts containing subsets of ISO 10646-1 codepoints.

Last updated on 2008-06-25 01:19:48 -0500

XKeyboardConfig-1.2

Introduction to XKeyboardConfig

The XKeyboardConfig package contains the keyboard configuration database for the X Window System.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xlibs.freedesktop.org/xkbdesc/xkeyboard-config-1.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 667c582a54d5715d24110c20e8c4be38
Download size: 573 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

XKeyboardConfig Dependencies

Required

Xorg Applications and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

The XKB Configuration Guide

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xkeyboard-config

Installation of XKeyboardConfig

Install XKeyboardConfig by running the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG --with-xkb-rules-symlink=xorg &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -dv -m755 $XORG_PREFIX/share/doc/xkeyboard-config-1.2 &&
install -v -m644 docs/{README,HOWTO}* \
    $XORG_PREFIX/share/doc/xkeyboard-config-1.2

Command Explanations

--with-xkb-rules-symlink=xorg: By default, the XKB rules installed are named "base". This creates symlinks named "xorg" to those rules, which is the default name used by Xorg.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/xkb, $XORG_PREFIX/share/doc/xkeyboard-config-1.2

Last updated on 2008-04-25 01:13:38 -0500

Luit-1.0.2

Introduction to Luit

Luit provides a filter for displaying and converting UTF-8 characters in text console windows.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/app/luit-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/app/luit-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: aacda46598ce3af8ca16e2a8132db1b2
Download size: 97 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Luit Dependencies

Required

Xorg Fonts

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Luit

Installation of Luit

Install luit with the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG \
    --with-localealiasfile=$XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/locale/locale.alias &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-localealiasfile=$XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/locale/locale.alias: The default location luit expects the locale.alias file is different than the location libX11 installs it to.

Installed Program: luit

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Description

luit

provides locale and ISO 2022 support for Unicode terminals.

Last updated on 2008-02-05 11:44:55 -0600

Xorg-Server-1.2.0

Introduction to Xorg-Server

The Xorg Server is the core of the X Window system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/xserver/xorg-server-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/xserver/xorg-server-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ea291c89e68832d570d9d5e007218bd6
Download size: 5.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 425 MB
Estimated build time: 4.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/xorg-server-1.2.0-security-1.patch

Xorg Server Dependencies

Required

Xorg Fonts and xkeyboard-config-1.2

Optional

MesaLib-6.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7Server

Installation of Xorg Server

Note

If you intend to build with Mesa, you must have the Mesa source directory available when building the Xorg-server.

Multiple security vulnerabilities have been identified in the xorg-server package. Apply a patch to fix these vulnerabilities with the following command:

patch -Np1 -i ../xorg-server-1.2.0-security-1.patch

Install the server by running the following commands:

./configure $XORG_CONFIG \
    --with-mesa-source=</absolute/path/to>/Mesa-6.5.2 \
    --with-module-dir=$XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11/modules \
    --with-dri-driver-path=$XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11/modules/dri \
    --with-xkb-output=/var/lib/xkb \
    --enable-install-setuid &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-mesa-source=...: This switch directs the build system to the location of the Mesa source directory. This must be an absolute path. If you wish to build without Mesa, omit this switch.

--with-module-dir=...: This parameter sets the destination for the installed modules.

--with-dri-driver-path=...: This is the location of the Mesa DRI drivers.

--enable-install-setuid: The Xorg binary must run as the root user. This switch ensures that the binary is installed setuid when make is run by an unprivileged user.

--disable-glx: Disable building of the GLX extension. This parameter is required if building without Mesa.

--disable-dri: Disable building of the DRI extension. This parameter is required if building without Mesa.

--disable-xprint: Disable building of the Xprint extension and server. This parameter is required if building without Mesa.

Installed Programs: cvt, dmxaddinput, dmxaddscreen, dmxreconfig, dmxresize, dmxrminput, dmxrmscreen, dmxtodmx, dmxwininfo, getconfig, getconfig.pl, gtf, inb, inl, inw, ioport, outb, outl, outw, pcitweak, scanpci, vdltodmx, X, Xdmx, xdmx, xdmxconfig, Xnest, Xorg, xorgcfg, xorgconfig and Xvfb

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /var/lib/xkb and the following subdirectories of $XORG_PREFIX/: include/xorg, include/X11/pixmaps, lib/X11/{getconfig,modules} and lib/xserver

Short Descriptions

cvt	calculates VESA CVT mode lines.
dmxaddinput	adds an input device to an Xdmx server.
dmxaddscreen	adds a screen to an Xdmx server.
dmxreconfig	refreshes the screen attributes in an Xdmx server.
dmxresize	resizes an Xdmx desktop.
dmxrminput	removes an input device from an Xdmx server.
dmxrmscreen	removes a screen from an Xdmx server.
dmxtodmx	is a dmx configuration file parser and printer.
dmxwininfo	queries a window's attributes on an Xdmx server.
getconfig	a wrapper script around getconfig.pl.
getconfig.pl	gets configuration information for the Xorg server.
gtf	calculates VESA GTF mode lines.
inb	is a symbolic link to ioport.
inl	is a symbolic link to ioport.
inw	is a symbolic link to ioport.
ioport	sets input and output ports for the X server.
outb	is a symbolic link to ioport.
outl	is a symbolic link to ioport.
outw	is a symbolic link to ioport.
pcitweak	reads or writes the PCI config space.
scanpci	scans and probes the PCI buses.
vdltodmx	is a VDL format dmx configuration file parser and printer.
X	is a symbolic link to Xorg.
Xdmx	is the Distributed Multi-head X server.
xdmx	prints information about the Xdmx server.
xdmxconfig	is a graphical configuration tool for Xdmx configuration files.
Xnest	is a nested X server.
Xorg	is the X11R7 X Server.
xorgcfg	is a graphical configuration tool for Xorg.
xorgconfig	generates an xorg.conf file.
Xvfb	is the virtual framebuffer X server for X Version 11.

Last updated on 2008-04-22 09:28:24 -0500

Xorg Drivers

Introduction to Xorg Drivers

The Xorg drivers provide the means for the xserver to take advantage of installed hardware.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/driver/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.x.org/pub/individual/driver/
Download MD5 sum: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/driver-7.2.md5
Download size: 16.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 60.3 MB
Estimated build time: 6.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required download list: http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/xorg/driver-7.2.wget

Xorg Drivers Dependencies

Required

Xorg-Server-1.2.0

Optional

MesaLib-6.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Xorg7Drivers

Downloading Xorg Drivers

To download the needed files using wget, use the following commands:

mkdir driver &&
cd driver &&
grep -v '^#' ../driver-7.2.wget | wget -i- -c \
    -B http://xorg.freedesktop.org/releases/individual/driver/ &&
md5sum -c ../driver-7.2.md5

Installation of Xorg Drivers

Warning

It is very important not to build display drivers that cannot be used with your hardware. For instance, do not build Sun drivers for an x86 PC as the Sun drivers will expect to see SPARC symbols exported from the kernel. Failure to follow this warning will result in a display lockup, which requires a hard reboot, when configuring Xorg for the first time. For this reason, these drivers have been commented out in the wget file.

Install the drivers by running the following commands for each package:

case $(basename "$PWD") in
xf86-input-evdev-[0-9]* | xf86-video-ati-[0-9]* | \
xf86-video-fbdev-[0-9]* | xf86-video-glint-[0-9]* | \
xf86-video-newport-[0-9]* )
    sed -i -e "s/\xc3\xb8/\\\\[\/o]/" \
           -e "s/\xc3\xa4/\\\\[:a]/" \
           -e "s/\xc3\x9c/\\\\[:U]/" man/*.man
    ;;
esac &&
./configure $XORG_CONFIG \
    --with-xorg-module-dir=$XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11/modules &&
make

These packages do not provide test suites.

Now as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i ... man/*.man: A few packages install man pages in UTF-8 encoding, and they will not display correctly using Man-DB. This command converts the offending characters to ones that man can properly display.

--with-xorg-module-dir=...: This switch ensures that the drivers are installed into the correct directory.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libI810XvMC.so, libviaXvMC.so, and libviaXvMCPro.so

Installed Directories: $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11/modules/{drivers,input}

Short Descriptions

`libI810XvMC.so`	is the X-Video Motion Compensation client library for the Intel i810 video driver.
`libviaXvMC.so`	is the X-Video Motion Compensation client library for the VIA Unichrome video driver.
`libviaXvMCPro.so`	is the X-Video Motion Compensation client library for the VIA Unichrome Pro video driver.

Last updated on 2007-07-21 11:50:32 -0500

Configuring X Window System

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

X Window System Components

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/XWindowSystemComponents

Creating an X11R6 Compatibility Symlink

Until recently (relatively speaking) almost every X Window installation you performed or came across was installed in the /usr/X11R6 directory. That was the standard for years. Developers picked up on this and wrote their package installation scripts looking for X in the standard location. Things have changed and the trend is to now install X in /usr. Some people want to install it in a custom location.

Many package developers have not caught up to the change and their packages are still trying to find X in /usr/X11R6 and subsequently fail when you try to build the package. Though for most packages it is not difficult to 'hack' the installation script to fix the problem, that is not the long term solution to the problem. Upstream developers need to modernize their installation scripts and eliminate the problem altogether.

Until then, you can create a symbolic link to satisfy the /usr/X11R6 requirement so that you won't be inconvenienced with a package build failure due to this known issue. If you wish to create the symlink, issue the following command as the root user (ensure you modify <$XORG_PREFIX> appropriately):

ln -vsf <$XORG_PREFIX> /usr/X11R6

Configuring The X Window System

If you've installed the X Window System in any prefix other than /usr, become the root user and update the library linker's cache by adding /usr/X11R6/lib to /etc/ld.so.conf and running ldconfig.

Additionally, while still the root user, ensure /usr/X11R6/bin and /usr/X11R6/lib/pkgconfig are added to the PATH and PKG_CONFIG_PATH environment variables, respectively. Instructions for doing this are described in the section The Bash Shell Startup Files.

Ensure you replace /usr/X11R6 with $XORG_PREFIX in the previous two paragraphs if you did not create the compatibility symlink in the previous step.

As the root user create a basic X Window System configuration file with the following command:

cd ~ &&
Xorg -configure

The screen will go black and you may hear some clicking of the monitor. This command will create a file in your home directory, xorg.conf.new for Xorg, or XF86Config.new for XFree86.

Edit the newly created configuration file to suit your system. The details of the files are located in the xorg.conf.5x man page. Some things you may want to do are:

Section "Files". Change the order of the font paths searched. You may want to put 100dpi fonts ahead of 75dpi fonts if your system normally comes up closer to 100 dots per inch. You may want to remove some font directories completely.
Section "Module". If you are going to install NVIDIA drivers, remove the "dri" line.
Sections "InputDevice". You may want to change the keyboard autorepeat rate by adding Option "Autorepeat" "250 30".
Section "Monitor". Specify the VertRefresh and HorizSync values if the system does not automatically detect the monitor and its values.
Section "Device". You may want to set some of the options available for your selected video driver. A description of the driver parameters is in the man page for your driver.
Section "Screen". Add a DefaultDepth statement such as: DefaultDepth 24. In the SubSection for your default depth, add a modes line such as: Modes "1600x1200" "1280x1024" "1024x768". The first mode listed will normally be the starting resolution.

Test the system with the following command:

X -config ~/xorg.conf.new

You will only get a gray background with an X-shaped mouse cursor, but it confirms the system is working. Exit with Control+Alt+Backspace. If the system does not work, take a look at /var/log/Xorg.0.log to see what went wrong.

As the root user, create the configuration directory and move the configuration file to the new directory:

install -v -m644 -D ~/xorg.conf.new /etc/X11/xorg.conf

As the root user, create .xinitrc:

cat > ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
# Begin .xinitrc file
xterm  -g 80x40+0+0   &
xclock -g 100x100-0+0 &
twm
EOF

This provides an initial screen with a small clock that is managed by a simple window manager, Tab Window Manager. For details of twm, see the man page.

Note

Both the default, and the BLFS configuration for Xorg include xterm. Xorg's modular distribution no longer includes xterm, and as a result, the startx command will fail if you have not installed xterm-231 when using the modular X Window System. You can remove the xterm line in the above config file to test the xserver, or install one of the other terminal emulators and make appropriate changes.

When needed, the X Window System creates the directory /tmp/.ICE-unix if it does not exist. If this directory is not owned by root, the X Window System delays startup by a few seconds and also appends a warning to the logfile. This also affects startup of other applications. To improve performance, it is advisable to manually create the directory before the X Window System uses it. Add the file creation to /etc/sysconfig/createfiles that is sourced by the /etc/rc.d/init.d/cleanfs startup script.

cat >> /etc/sysconfig/createfiles << "EOF"
/tmp/.ICE-unix dir 1777 root root
EOF

Start X with:

startx

and a basic functional X Window System should be displayed.

Checking Direct Rendering Infrastructure (DRI) Installation

DRI is a framework for allowing software to access graphics hardware in a safe and efficient manner. It is installed in X by default if you have a supported video card. To enable direct rendering using the OpenGL implementation from MesaLib-6.5.2 (built separately with Xorg-7.2 ), the "glx" and "dri" modules must be loaded. Additionally, the created device nodes in /dev/dri must have proper permissions for your users. A sample xorg.conf file might look like this:

Section "Module"
    ...
    Load  "glx"
    Load  "dri"
    ...
EndSection
...
Section "DRI"
    Group "video"
    Mode  0660
EndSection

The DRI devices are not accessible for any user except root and members of the video group. Add any users that might use X to that group:

usermod -a -G video <username>

Note

DRI configuration may differ if you are using alternate drivers, such as those from NVIDIA or ATI.

To check if DRI is installed properly, check the log file /var/log/Xorg.0.log for statements like:

(II) R128(0): Direct rendering enabled

If you elected to install the Mesa-Demos package when installing MesaLib-6.5.2, from an xterm, run glxinfo and look for the phrase:

direct rendering: Yes

If direct rendering is not enabled, you can add verbosity by running LIBGL_DEBUG=verbose glxinfo. This will show the drivers, device nodes and files used by the DRI system.

Again, if you have added the Mesa-Demos package, you can also run the test program glxgears. This program brings up a window with three gears turning. The xterm will display how many frames were drawn every five seconds, so this is a reasonable benchmark. The window is scalable, and the frames drawn per second is highly dependent on the size of the window.

For troubleshooting problems, check the DRI Users Guide at http://dri.sourceforge.net/doc/DRIuserguide.html.

Setting up Fonts

There are two font systems in the X Window System. The first is the core X font protocol, and the second is Xft. Toolkits that use the core X font protocol include Xt, Xaw, Motif clones and GTK+-1.2. Toolkits that use Xft include GTK+-2 and Qt and use Fontconfig for control. Both font systems should be configured for proper font coverage in the X Window System.

Core X Font Protocol

The core X font protocol finds fonts from the server configuration file (xorg.conf). If no font paths exist in the configuration file, the server will fall back to an internal hard-coded path. Assuming the prefix for your X installation is /usr/X11R6, the core fonts will reside in subdirectories of /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts. For each directory in the path, the server reads three files:

fonts.dir - maps font files to font names; updated with mkfontdir
fonts.alias - defines aliases (such as "9x18") for existing fonts
fonts.scale - lists scalable fonts; updated with mkfontscale

The core X fonts protocol uses names such as -misc-fixed-medium-r-normal--13-120-75-75-c-80-iso8859-1. These fonts are rendered by the X server without antialiasing. The server itself uses the "cursor" font for painting the mouse cursor, and the protocol specification requires the font "fixed" to be available.

Scalable fonts, such as Type1 and TrueType, are read from fonts.scale files by the server. The core X font system uses the "freetype" module for non-antialiased rendering of these fonts. Ensure that the "freetype" module is loaded in the xorg.conf file by adding it to the "Module" section:

Section "Module"
    ...
    Load  "freetype"
    ...
EndSection

The character set used is part of the font name, e.g. "-iso8859-1". It is important that applications which support a non-English interface specify the character set correctly so that the proper glyphs are used. This can be controlled through the X resources, which will be described later.

In some cases, applications rely upon the fonts named "fixed" or something like "9x18". In these cases, it is important that the fonts.alias file specifies the correct character set. Users of ISO-8859-X encodings where X != 1 should modify the /usr/lib/X11/fonts/misc/fonts.alias file by replacing the "iso8859-1" string with the proper encoding name. This is accomplished by running the following command as the root user, substituting the proper value for <X>:

sed -i 's,iso8859-1\( \|$\),iso8859-<X>\1,g' \
    /usr/lib/X11/fonts/{75dpi,100dpi,misc}/fonts.alias

Users of Cyrillic fonts have properly defined aliases in /usr/lib/X11/fonts/cyrillic/fonts.alias. However, this file will not be used unless the /usr/lib/X11/fonts/cyrillic directory is first in the font search path. Otherwise, the /usr/lib/X11/fonts/misc/fonts.alias file will be used.

Xft Font Protocol

Xft provides antialiased font rendering through Freetype, and fonts are controlled from the client side using Fontconfig. The default search path is /usr/share/fonts and ~/.fonts. Fontconfig searches directories in its path recursively and maintains a cache of the font characteristics in fonts.cache-1 files in each directory. If the cache appears to be out of date, it is ignored, and information is (slowly) fetched from the fonts themselves. This cache can be regenerated using the fc-cache command at any time. You can see the list of fonts known by Fontconfig by running the command fc-list.

The X fonts were not installed in a location known to Fontconfig. This prevents Fontconfig from using the poorly rendered Type 1 fonts or the non-scalable bitmapped fonts. Symlinks were created from the OTF and TTF X font directories to /usr/share/fonts/X11-{OTF,TTF}. This allows Fontconfig to use the OpenType and TrueType fonts provided by X (which are scalable and of higher quality).

Fontconfig uses names such as "Monospace 12" to define fonts. Applications generally use generic font names such as "Monospace", "Sans" and "Serif". Fontconfig resolves these names to a font that has all characters that cover the orthography of the language indicated by the locale settings. Knowledge of these font names is included in /etc/fonts/fonts.conf. Fonts that are not listed in this file are still usable by Fontconfig, but they will not be accessible by the generic family names.

Standard scalable fonts that come with X provide very poor Unicode coverage. You may notice in applications that use Xft that some characters appear as a box with four binary digits inside. In this case, a font set with the available glyphs has not been found. Other times, applications that don't use other font families by default and don't accept substitutions from Fontconfig will display blank lines when the default font doesn't cover the orthography of the user's language. This happens, e.g., with Fluxbox in the ru_RU.KOI8-R locale.

In order to provide greater Unicode coverage, it is recommended that you install these fonts:

DejaVu fonts - These fonts are replacements for the Bitstream Vera fonts and provide Latin-based scripts with accents and Cyrillic glyphs. The DejaVu fonts by are not aliased to the generic family names by default, so /etc/fonts/fonts.conf will have to be edited for it to be recognized by the generic names such as "Sans". This will be described below.
FreeFont - This set of fonts covers nearly every non-CJK character, but is not visually pleasing. Fontconfig will use it as a last resort to substitute generic font family names.
Microsoft Core fonts - These fonts provide slightly worse Unicode coverage than FreeFont, but are better hinted. Be sure to read the license before using them. These fonts are listed in the /etc/fonts/fonts.conf aliases by default.
Firefly New Sung font - This font provides Chinese coverage. This font is not listed in the /etc/fonts/fonts.conf aliases by default.
Arphic fonts - A similar set of Chinese fonts to the Firefly New Sung font. These fonts are listed in the /etc/fonts/fonts.conf aliases by default.
Kochi fonts - These provide Japanese characters, and they are listed in the aliases in /etc/fonts/fonts.conf by default.
Baekmuk fonts - These fonts provide Korean coverage, and they are listed in the aliases in /etc/fonts/fonts.conf by default.

The list above will not provide complete Unicode coverage. For more information, please visit the Unicode Font Guide.

As an example, consider the installation of the DejaVu fonts. From the unpacked source directory, run the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/fonts/dejavu &&
install -v -m644 *.ttf /usr/share/fonts/dejavu &&
fc-cache -v /usr/share/fonts/dejavu

Setting up Keyboards

In this version of X, non-Latin keyboard layouts do not include Latin configurations as was previous practice. To set up a keyboard for Latin and non-Latin input, change the XkbLayout keyboard driver option in the InputDevice section of the xorg.conf file. For example:

Section "InputDevice"
    Identifier          "Keyboard0"
    Driver              "kbd"
    Option "XkbModel"   "pc105"
    Option "XkbLayout"  "en_US,ru"
    Option "XkbOptions" "grp:switch,grp:alt_shift_toggle,grp_led:scroll"
EndSection

In this example, you can use the Alt+Shift combination to switch between keyboard layouts and use the Scroll Lock LED to indicate when the second layout is active.

Setting up XDM

xdm provides a graphical logon capability and is normally set up in /etc/inittab. Most of the information you need to customize xdm is found in its man page. To execute xdm during bootup, change the initdefault level to 5 and add the following lines to /etc/inittab:

# Run xdm as a separate service
x:5:respawn:/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon

If Linux-PAM is installed on your system, you should create a PAM entry for xdm by duplicating the login entry using the following command:

cp -v /etc/pam.d/login /etc/pam.d/xdm

Using X Resources

There are many options that can be set in X and X clients via resources. Typically resources are set in the ~/.Xresources file.

The layout of the ~/.Xresources file consists of a list of specifications in the form of

object.subobject[.subobject...].attribute: value

Components of a resource specification are linked together by either tight, represented by a dot (.), or loose, represented by an asterisk (*), bindings. A tight binding indicates that the components on either side of the dot must be directly next to each other as defined in a specific implementation. An asterisk is a wildcard character that means that any number of levels in a defined hierarchy can be between the components. For example, X offers two special cursors: redglass and whiteglass. To use one of these resources, you need to add the following line:

Xcursor.theme: whiteglass

However, you can specify the background for all clients with:

*background: blue

More specific resource variables will override less specific names.

Resource definitions can be found in the man pages for each respective client.

In order to load your resources, the xrdb program must be called with the appropriate parameters. Typically, the first time resources are loaded, you use:

xrdb -load <filename>

To add resources to X's database in memory, use:

xrdb -merge <filename>

The xrdb instruction is usually placed in ~/.xinitrc or ~/.xsession. To get more information, see the xrdb man page.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Additional X Window System Configuration

Below you will find information on fine tuning the components of the X Window System. The documentation links are specifically for XFree86, which has been retired in BLFS, however, the information contained in those documents usually pertains to Xorg as well. Detailed descriptions are also located in the xorg.conf man page.

Setting up X Input Devices

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/XInputDevices

Keyboards

The following external links provide a good introduction to setting up various keyboards.

How to further enhance XKB configuration

Mice

Multi-button mice can be used to their full potential by mapping the additional buttons to X button events. Wheel mice are a common example. The ordinary ones contain two buttons, and a scroll wheel that doubles as a third button. As far as X is concerned, there are 5 buttons as it counts the 'scroll up' and 'scroll down' functions (internally they are buttons). Here is an example 'InputDevice' section for a typical PS/2 wheel mouse:

Section "InputDevice"
  Identifier  "Mouse 0"
  Driver      "mouse"
  Option      "Device"        "/dev/input/mice"
  Option      "Protocol"      "IMPS/2"
  Option      "ZAxisMapping"  "4 5"
  Option      "Buttons"       "5"
EndSection

Button assignments differ for every mouse type. On more exotic mice, you may find that the rocker wheel buttons are 6 and 7. Simply add those values to the ZAxisMapping option, and set the Buttons option appropriately to enable side to side scrolling. Additional information on button assignment can be found in the following XFree86 document:

Mouse Support in XFree86

Fine Tuning Display Settings

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xdisplay

The 'Monitor' Section

One or more monitor sections specify the characteristics of your monitor(s). Usually, the setup program can probe your monitor and setup a monitor properly, however, this does not always work. The most common entries that need to be updated are HorizSync and VertRefresh. If the configuration program does not set these properly, you will notice a resolution much lower than desired. The default HorizSync setting is 28-33kHz which is very conservative. The default VertRefresh is 43-72Hz. Consult your monitor documentation or search online for the proper settings for your monitor.

It is also possible to control many detailed timing characteristics of a monitor with a Modeline setting. Most users will not need to do this, but details are in the man page referenced above.

Warning

Incorrect monitor settings can destroy your monitor or even set it on fire! For most newer monitors, the result of overly aggressive settings is a blank screen, but older monitors do not all have built in safeguards.

Other items that may be of interest in this section is the DPMS and associated StandbyTime, SuspendTime, and OffTime options. These parameters control the energy saving features of your monitor. They may also be controlled at runtime with the xset command or via a graphical interface such as KDE's Control Center.

A typical monitor section will normally look like:

Section "Monitor"
    DisplaySize   400   300 # mm
    Identifier   "Monitor0"
    VendorName   "VSC"
    ModelName    "G810-2"
    HorizSync     30.0 - 92.0
    VertRefresh   50.0 - 180.0
    Option       "DPMS"
    Option       "StandbyTime" "10"
    Option       "SuspendTime" "20"
    Option       "OffTime"     "30"
EndSection

The 'Device' Section

This section basically controls your video card. The key entry is the Driver setting. This can be a driver from the X distribution you are using, from the kernel source, or a proprietary driver for devices such as a Nvidia graphics adaptor. The driver often is a kernel module or built into the kernel itself, but there are also separate non-kernel components usually found in the /usr/X11R6/lib/modules/drivers/ directory. These were either built with the X server or installed via external (i.e., proprietary) programs.

There are many options for device drivers and most are specific to the driver being used. Documentation for many drivers can be found at the XFree86 Driver Manual Pages.

A typical Device section will look like:

Section "Device"
    Identifier  "Videocard0"
    Driver      "radeon"
    VendorName  "Videocard vendor"
    BoardName   "ATI Radeon 7500"
EndSection

Display Layouts

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xlayouts

Within the X Window System configuration file there may be multiple layout sections like:

Section "ServerLayout"
    Identifier     "X.org Configured"
    Screen      0  "Screen0" 0 0
    InputDevice    "Mouse0" "CorePointer"
    InputDevice    "Keyboard0" "CoreKeyboard"
EndSection

The default layout is the first, but if you have special needs, you can create others with different configurations. The Identifier line in each section is the key. Different layouts can be created using different Screen and InputDevice sections.

After the configuration file is updated, an alternate configuration can be specified on the startx line. For instance, to start X with an alternate layout with an Identifier of "layout2", use the following command line:

startx -- -layout layout2

Last updated on 2008-05-03 00:18:57 -0500

Chapter 24. X Libraries

This chapter does not contain libraries that are required to run X. It does contain libraries that enhance X. In some cases the enhancement is as simple as font support. In others it is as complex as libraries that sit between X and applications that run on X whose purpose is to standardize the look and feel and inter-process communications for different applications. They also assist programmers by supplying common elements.

Qt-3.3.8b

Introduction to Qt

The Qt package contains a C++ GUI library. This is useful for creating graphical applications or executing graphical applications that are dynamically linked to the Qt library. One of the major users of Qt is KDE.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.silug.org/mirrors/ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-x11-free-3.3.8b.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-x11-free-3.3.8b.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9f05b4125cfe477cc52c9742c3c09009
Download size: 16.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 261 MB
Estimated build time: 11 SBU (full), 7.5 SBU (sub-tools)

Qt Dependencies

Required

Optional

NAS-1.9, CUPS-1.2.12, MySQL-5.0.41, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, unixODBC-2.2.12, SQLite and Firebird

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/qt

Installation of Qt

This package (unfortunately) expects the X Window system to be installed in the /usr/X11R6 directory. If you're using a recent version of Xorg and it is installed in any other location, ensure you have followed the instructions in the Creating an X11R6 Compatibility Symlink section.

There are several ways to install a complicated package such as Qt. The files are not completely position independent. Installation procedures execute the program pkg-config to determine the location of package executables, libraries, headers, and other files. For Qt, pkg-config will look for the file lib/pkgconfig/qt-mt.pc which must be modified if relocating the package. This file is set up correctly by the build process.

The default installation places the files in /usr/local/qt/. Many commercial distributions place the files in the system's /usr hierarchy. The package can also be installed in an arbitrary directory.

This section will demonstrate two different methods.

Warning

Building Qt in a chroot environment may fail.

Note

The build time for Qt is quite long. If you want to save some time and don't want the tutorials and examples, change the first make command to:

make sub-tools

Method 1 - Installing in the '/usr' Hierarchy

The advantage of this method is that no updates to the /etc/ld.so.conf or /etc/man_db.conf files are required. The package files are distributed within several subdirectories of the /usr hierarchy. This is the method that most commercial distributions use.

Note

If Qt is being reinstalled, run the following commands from a console or non-Qt based window manager. It overwrites Qt libraries that should not be in use during the install process.

sed -i '/QMAKE_RPATH/d' mkspecs/linux*/qmake.conf &&

bash
export PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH &&

./configure -prefix /usr \
            -docdir /usr/share/doc/qt \
            -headerdir /usr/include/qt \
            -plugindir /usr/lib/qt/plugins \
            -datadir /usr/share/qt \
            -translationdir /usr/share/qt/translations \
            -sysconfdir /etc/qt \
            -qt-gif \
            -system-zlib \
            -system-libpng \
            -system-libjpeg \
            -system-libmng \
            -plugin-imgfmt-png \
            -plugin-imgfmt-jpeg \
            -plugin-imgfmt-mng \
            -no-exceptions \
            -thread \
            -tablet &&

make &&
exit

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -sf libqt-mt.so /usr/lib/libqt.so &&
ln -v -snf ../../bin /usr/share/qt/bin &&
ln -v -snf ../../include/qt /usr/share/qt/include &&
ln -v -snf ../../lib /usr/share/qt/lib &&
cp -v -r doc/man /usr/share &&
cp -v -r examples /usr/share/doc/qt

Method 2 - Installing in '/opt'

This is the method recommended by the Qt developers. It has the advantage of keeping all the package files consolidated in a dedicated directory hierarchy. By using this method, an update can be made without overwriting a previous installation and users can easily revert to a previous version by changing one symbolic link.

The Qt developers use a default location of /usr/local/qt/, however this procedure puts the files in /opt/qt-3.3.8b/ and then creates a symbolic link to /opt/qt/.

bash
export QTDIR=$PWD &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH &&
export PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH &&

./configure -prefix /opt/qt-3.3.8b \
            -sysconfdir /etc/qt \
            -qt-gif \
            -system-zlib \
            -system-libpng \
            -system-libjpeg \
            -system-libmng \
            -plugin-imgfmt-png \
            -plugin-imgfmt-jpeg \
            -plugin-imgfmt-mng \
            -no-exceptions \
            -thread \
            -tablet &&

make &&
exit

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -sfn qt-3.3.8b /opt/qt &&
ln -v -s libqt-mt.so /opt/qt/lib/libqt.so &&
cp -v -r doc/man examples /opt/qt/doc

Command Explanations

sed -i '/QMAKE_RPATH/d' mkspecs/linux*/qmake.conf: In Method 1, Qt is being installed into the standard system directories. The runtime library search path does not need to be set in this case.

bash: This command enters a sub-shell to isolate environment changes.

export QTDIR=$PWD: This command defines where the root of the Qt directory is located.

export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH: This command allows the not yet installed Qt libraries to be used by the not yet installed Qt programs.

export PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH: This command allows the build process to find supporting executables.

-qt-gif: This switch adds support for gif files to the libraries.

-system-zlib -system-libpng -system-libjpeg -system-mng: These switches force the build instructions to use the shared libraries that are on your system instead of creating a custom set of support libraries for these functions.

-plugin-imgfmt-png -plugin-imgfmt-jpeg -plugin-imgfmt-mng: These switches enable run-time linking of the referenced libraries.

If you pass the -plugin-sql-<driver> or -qt-sql-<driver> switch to the configure command, you must also pass -I</path/to/sql/headers> so make can find the appropriate header files. For instance, building in MySQL support (as opposed to building the plugin) will need to use -I/usr/include/mysql -qt-sql-mysql.

Note

To check if mysql is autotetected properly, examine the output of ./configure -I/usr/include/mysql -help. Other database support will require similar configure parameters.

-no-exceptions: This switch disables the exceptions coding generated by the C++ compiler.

-thread: This switch adds support for multi-threading.

ln -v -sf libqt-mt.so /usr/lib/libqt.so: This command allows configure scripts to find a working Qt installation.

ln -v -snf ../../bin /usr/share/qt/bin: This command and the following two allow the /usr style installation to mimic the /opt style installation by making all binaries, headers and libraries available from a single directory, /usr/share/qt.

cp -v -r doc/man examples /usr/share (or /opt/qt/doc): This command installs the man pages and examples which are missed by make install.

exit: This command returns to the parent shell and eliminates the environment variables set earlier.

Configuring Qt

Configuration Information

The QTDIR environment variable needs to be set when building packages that depend on Qt. Add the following to the .bash_profile initialization script for each user that builds packages using the Qt libraries. Alternatively, the variable can be set in the system wide /etc/profile file.

For Method 1 (This is optional, only set this if an application is unable to find the installed libraries or headers):

export QTDIR=/usr/share/qt

or for Method 2:

export QTDIR=/opt/qt

If you installed Qt using Method 2, you also need to update the following configuration files so that Qt is correctly found by other packages and system processes.

Update the /etc/ld.so.conf and /etc/man_db.conf files:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF" &&
# Begin qt addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/qt/lib

# End qt addition
EOF
ldconfig &&
cat >> /etc/man_db.conf << "EOF"
# Begin qt addition to man_db.conf

MANDATORY_MANPATH /opt/qt/doc/man

# End qt addition to man_db.conf
EOF

Update the PKG_CONFIG_PATH environment variable in your ~/.bash_profile or /etc/profile with the following:

PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/qt/lib/pkgconfig

If you want the Qt executables in your shell search path, update the PATH environment variable in your ~/.bash_profile or /etc/profile to include /opt/qt/bin.

As with most libraries, there is no explicit configuration to do. After updating /etc/ld.so.conf as explained above, run /sbin/ldconfig so that ldd can find the shared libraries.

Installed Programs: assistant, designer, linguist, lrelease, lupdate, moc, qm2ts, qmake, qtconfig, and uic

Installed Libraries: libqt-mt.so, libqt.so libqui.so, libdesignercore.a, libeditor.a, and libqassistantclient.a

Installed Directories: /opt/qt-3.3.8b or /usr/lib/qt, /usr/share/qt, /usr/share/doc/qt, /usr/include/qt, and /etc/qt

Short Descriptions

assistant	is a tool for presenting on-line documentation.
designer	is a full-fledged GUI builder. It includes powerful features such as preview mode, automatic widget layout, support for custom widgets, and an advanced property editor.
linguist	provides support for translating applications into local languages.
lrelease	is a simple command line tool. It reads a Qt project file and produces message files used by the application.
lupdate	reads a Qt project file, finds the translatable strings in the specified source, header and Qt Designer interface files, and produces or updates the translation files listed in the project file.
moc	generates Qt meta object support code.
qm2ts	is a tool for converting Qt message file formats.
qmake	qmake uses information stored in project files to determine what should go in the makefiles it generates.
qtconfig	is used to customize the appearance of Qt applications.
uic	is a Qt user interface compiler.

Last updated on 2008-05-06 16:29:57 -0500

Qt-4.3.4

Introduction to Qt4

The Qt4 package contains several C++ libraries with both GUI and non-GUI components. One of the major users of Qt4 is KDE4.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.silug.org/mirrors/ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-x11-opensource-src-4.3.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-x11-opensource-src-4.3.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9499101ec54eb7b0de195b3c5e3ffa93
Download size: 42 MB
Estimated disk space required: 1914 MB (full), 608 (essential)
Estimated build time: 26 SBU (full), 13.5 SBU (essential)

Qt Dependencies

Required

Optional

NAS-1.9, D-BUS-1.0.2, GLib-2.12.12, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, CUPS-1.2.12, MySQL-5.0.41, PostgreSQL-8.2.4, unixODBC-2.2.12, and SQLite

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/qt4

Installation of Qt4

There are several ways to install a complicated package such as Qt4. The files are not completely position independent. Installation procedures execute the program pkg-config to determine the location of package executables, libraries, headers, and other files. For Qt4, pkg-config will look for the appropriate lib/pkgconfig/Qt*.pc files which must be modified if relocating the package. These files are set up correctly by the build process.

Note

If Qt4 is being reinstalled and the /usr directory is used as the prefix, run the following commands from a console or non-Qt4 based window manager. It overwrites Qt4 libraries that should not be in use during the install process.

Note

The build time and space required for the full Qt4 is quite long. The instructions below do not build the tutorials and examples. Removing the -nomake lines will create a complete build.

The method recommended by the Qt4 developers does not use the /usr directory prefix. It has the advantage of keeping all the package files consolidated in a dedicated directory hierarchy. By using this method, an update can be made without overwriting a previous installation and users can easily revert to a previous version by changing one symbolic link.

The Qt4 developers use a default location of /usr/local/qt/, however the procedure below puts the files in /opt/qt-4.3.4/ and then creates a symbolic link to /opt/qt/.

Install Qt4 by running the following commands:

./configure -prefix /opt/qt-4.3.4  \
            -release                 \
            -nomake examples         \
            -nomake demos            \
            -no-separate-debug-info &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you installed Qt4 in the /opt directory, again as the root user issue:

ln -v -sfn qt-4.3.4 /opt/qt

Command Explanations

-release, -no-separate-debug-info: These switches minimizes the time and space used to build Qt4 by not adding debug information to the libraries.

-nomake examples, -nomake demos: These switches disable building programs that are only of interest to a Qt4 developer.

There are several optional directories that can be specified in the ./configure line. These include -bindir, -libdir, -docdir, and -headerdir. For a complete list, run ./configure -help.

-plugin-sql-<driver> or -qt-sql-<driver>: These switches build SQL support into the Qt4 libraries.

Note

To check if mysql is autotetected properly, examine the output of ./configure -qt-sql-mysql -help. Other database support will require similar configure parameters.

Configuring Qt4

Configuration Information

If you installed Qt4 in a location other than /usr, you also need to update the following configuration files so that Qt4 is correctly found by other packages and system processes.

Update the /etc/ld.so.conf and /etc/man_db.conf files:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF" &&
# Begin qt addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/qt/lib

# End qt addition
EOF
ldconfig &&
cat >> /etc/man_db.conf << "EOF"
# Begin qt addition to man_db.conf

MANDATORY_MANPATH /opt/qt/doc/man

# End qt addition to man_db.conf
EOF

Update the PKG_CONFIG_PATH environment variable in your ~/.bash_profile or /etc/profile with the following:

PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/qt/lib/pkgconfig

If you want the Qt4 executables in your shell search path, update the PATH environment variable in your ~/.bash_profile or /etc/profile to include /opt/qt/bin.

As with most libraries, there is no explicit configuration to do. After updating /etc/ld.so.conf as explained above, run /sbin/ldconfig so that ldd can find the shared libraries.

Installed Programs: assistant, designer, linguist, lrelease, lupdate, moc, pixeltool, qmake, qt3to4, qtconfig, qtdemo, rcc, uic, and uic3

Installed Libraries: libQt3Support.so, libQtAssistantClient.so, libQtCore.so, libQtDesigner.so, libQtDesignerComponents.so, libQtGui.so, libQtNetwork.so, libQtOpenGL.so, libQtScript.so, libQtSql.so, libQtSvg.so, libQtTest.so, and libQtXml.so

Installed Directories: /opt/qt-4.3.4

Short Descriptions

assistant	is a tool for presenting on-line documentation.
designer	is a full-fledged GUI builder. It includes powerful features such as preview mode, automatic widget layout, support for custom widgets, and an advanced property editor.
linguist	provides support for translating applications into local languages.
lrelease	is a simple command line tool. It reads a Qt project file and produces message files used by the application.
lupdate	reads a Qt project file, finds the translatable strings in the specified source, header and Qt Designer interface files, and produces or updates the translation files listed in the project file.
moc	generates Qt meta object support code.
pixeltool	is a desktop magnifier and as you move your mouse around the screen it will show the magnified contents in its window.
qmake	qmake uses information stored in project files to determine what should go in the makefiles it generates.
qt3to4	qt3to4 is a tool to help update Qt3 code to Qt4.
qtconfig	is used to customize the appearance of Qt applications.
qtdemo	is a portal into various demonstrations of Qt applications.
rcc	is a resource compiler used in conjucntion with designer.
uic	is a Qt user interface compiler.
uic3	is a tool to generate Qt4 code out of user interface files generated by the Qt3 version of designer.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

GTK+-1.2.10

Introduction to GTK+

The GTK+ package contains GTK+ Libraries. This is useful for creating graphical user interfaces for applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/graphics/gimp/gtk/v1.2/gtk+-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v1.2/gtk+-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 4d5cb2fc7fb7830e4af9747a36bfce20
Download size: 2.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 51.1 MB
Estimated build time: 1.01 SBU

GTK+ Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10, and X Window System

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gtk+

Installation of GTK+

Install GTK+ by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gtk+-1.2.10/{html,text} &&
install -v -m644 docs/html/* /usr/share/doc/gtk+-1.2.10/html &&
install -v -m644 docs/text/* /usr/share/doc/gtk+-1.2.10/text

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This installs the configuration files into /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--with-xinput=xfree: This configuration flag is necessary to utilize alternative input devices.

Installed Program: gtk-config

Installed Libraries: libgdk.{so,a} and libgtk.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/gtk, /usr/include/gtk-1.2, and /usr/share/themes

Short Descriptions

gtk-config	is a tool used by configure scripts to determine the compiler and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use GTK+.
`libgtk.{so,a}`	(GIMP Tool Kit) is a library for creating graphical user interfaces similar to the Motif “look and feel”.
`libgdk.{so,a}`	is designed as a wrapper library that lies on top of Xlib. It performs many common and desired operations for a programmer instead of the programmer having to explicitly ask for such functionality from Xlib directly.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

cairo-1.4.14

Introduction to cairo

cairo is a 2D graphics library with support for multiple output devices. Currently supported output targets include the X Window System, win32, image buffers, PostScript, PDF and SVG. Experimental backends include OpenGL (through glitz), Quartz and XCB file output. cairo is designed to produce consistent output on all output media while taking advantage of display hardware acceleration when available (e.g., through the X Render Extension). The cairo API provides operations similar to the drawing operators of PostScript and PDF. Operations in cairo include stroking and filling cubic Bézier splines, transforming and compositing translucent images, and antialiased text rendering. All drawing operations can be transformed by any affine transformation (scale, rotation, shear, etc.).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://cairographics.org/releases/cairo-1.4.14.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e8c442ff821c0719a69508fecba9038f
Download size: 3.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 34 MB (additional 62 MB to run the test suite)
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU (additional 2.5 SBU to run the test suite)

cairo Dependencies

Required

X Window System and pkg-config-0.22

Optional

glitz, DirectFB, Open Quartz, libxcb-1.0 (also requires xcb-util), and GTK-Doc-1.8

Optional (to provide extended test suite coverage)

GTK+-2.10.13 (for testing the PDF backend), Poppler-0.5.4 (for testing the PDF backend), librsvg-2.16.1 (for testing the SVG backend).

Note that the GTK, Poppler and librsvg packages are circular in that using them for test suite coverage requires installing cairo first, then installing the desired package(s), then installing cairo again.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/cairo

Installation of cairo

Install cairo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that as many as 16 of the tests are known to fail for unknown reasons. If you do not have a gs binary in your path, many (up to 87 of the 124) of the tests will fail. Also, to enhance test coverage, the tests should be run with an available X Window screen (e.g. from a local xterm or equivalent window).

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libcairo.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/cairo and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/cairo

Short Descriptions

libcairo.{so,a}

contains the 2D graphics functions required for rendering to the various output targets.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Pango-1.16.4

Introduction to Pango

The Pango package contains the libpango libraries. These are useful for the layout and rendering of text.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/pango/1.16/pango-1.16.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/pango/1.16/pango-1.16.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 025e2ac5e40cac163aae4653aeef559c
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 28 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

Pango Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12 and one of cairo-1.4.14 or X Window System or Fontconfig-2.4.2

cairo is not required to build Pango, but it is highly recommended that you install cairo before building Pango. If you don't build Pango with a cairo backend, then GTK+-2 will not build.

Optional

LibThai

Optional (If cairo is Not Installed)

Optional (To Rebuild the API Documentation)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pango

Installation of Pango

Install Pango by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that the “testboundries” test could fail if you have LibThai installed.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch installs the configuration files into /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Configuring Pango

Config Files

/etc/pango/pangorc, ~/.pangorc, and the file specified in the environment variable PANGO_RC_FILE

Configuration Information

The Pango module path is specified by the key Pango/ModulesPath in the Pango config database, which is read from the config files listed above.

Installed Programs: pango-querymodules and pango-view

Installed Libraries: libpango*-1.0.so and Pango loadable modules.

Installed Directories: /etc/pango, /usr/include/pango-1.0, /usr/lib/pango, and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/pango

Short Descriptions

pango-querymodules	is a module registration utility that collects information about Pango loadable modules.
Pango libraries	contain low level layout rendering routines, a high level driver for laying out entire blocks of text, and routines to assist in editing internationalized text.

Last updated on 2007-07-16 14:53:12 -0500

ATK-1.18.0

Introduction to ATK

The ATK package contains the ATK libraries. They are useful for allowing accessibility solutions to be available for all GTK2 applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/atk/1.18/atk-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/atk/1.18/atk-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9fc33ec48fd32933f7f630479dfad667
Download size: 655 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ATK Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/atk

Installation of ATK

Install ATK by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libatk-1.0.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/atk-1.0 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/atk

Short Descriptions

atklib-1.0.so

contains functions that are used by assistive technologies in order to interact with the desktop and applications.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

GTK+-2.10.13

Introduction to GTK+

The GTK+ package contains GTK+ libraries. These are useful for creating graphical user interfaces for applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtk+/2.10/gtk+-2.10.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v2.10/gtk+-2.10.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d0af87715f3b0f05bf38a3312a528012
Download size: 15.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 240 MB (includes building the experimental backends)
Estimated build time: 3.1 SBU (includes building the experimental backends)

GTK+ Dependencies

Required

cairo-1.4.14, Pango-1.16.4, and ATK-1.18.0

Optional

CUPS-1.2.12, GTK-Doc-1.8, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gtk+2

Installation of GTK+

Install GTK+ by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that you must run the tests from a session with X Window Display capability (i.e., not a text-based terminal/console) as the tests attempt to open an X window.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gtk+-2.10.13/{faq,tutorial} &&
cp -v -R docs/faq/html/* /usr/share/doc/gtk+-2.10.13/faq &&
cp -v -R docs/tutorial/html/* /usr/share/doc/gtk+-2.10.13/tutorial &&
install -v -m644 docs/*.txt /usr/share/doc/gtk+-2.10.13

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch installs the configuration files into /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch will rebuild the API documentation during the make command. Ensure you really want to rebuild this documentation (and end up with what is already shipped in the source tree) as it takes a very long time.

--without-libtiff: Use this switch if you don't have libtiff installed.

--without-libjpeg: Use this switch if you don't have libjpeg installed.

Installed Programs: gdk-pixbuf-csource, gdk-pixbuf-query-loaders, gtk-demo, gtk-query-immodules-2.0, and gtk-update-icon-cache

Installed Libraries: libgdk_pixbuf-2.0.so, libgdk-x11-2.0.so, libgtk-x11-2.0.so, libgdk_pixbuf_xlib-2.0.so, and numerous engine, module, and loader plugins

Installed Directories: /etc/gtk-2.0, /usr/include/gtk-2.0, /usr/lib/gtk-2.0, /usr/share/doc/gtk+-2.10.13, /usr/share/gtk-2.0, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/{gdk,gdk-pixbuf,gtk}, /usr/share/themes/Default/gtk*, /usr/share/themes/Emacs and /usr/share/themes/Raleigh

Short Descriptions

gdk-pixbuf-csource	generates C code containing images, useful for compiling images directly into programs.
gdk-pixbuf-query-loaders	collects information about loadable modules for gdk-pixbuf and writes it to standard output.
gtk-query-immodules-2.0	collects information about loadable input method modules for GTK+ and writes it to standard output.
gtk-update-icon-cache	creates mmap()able cache files for icon themes.
GTK+ Libraries	provide an API to implement graphical user interfaces.

Last updated on 2007-06-30 10:54:25 -0500

LessTif-0.95.0

Introduction to LessTif

The LessTif package contains an Open Source version of OSF/Motif®.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/lesstif/lesstif-0.95.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ab895165c149d7f95843c7584b1c7ad4
Download size: 2.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 160 MB (includes building and running the test suite)
Estimated build time: 4.1 SBU (includes building the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/lesstif-0.95.0-testsuite_fix-1.patch

LessTif Dependencies

Required

Optional

Lynx-2.8.6rel.5 or Links-2.1pre33 (used to generate the INSTALL documentation file) and Dmalloc

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/lesstif

Installation of LessTif

Install LessTif by running the following commands:

sed -i -e '/ShellP/d' \
       -e '/XMLIBEXPORT extern Cardinal/i#include <X11/ShellP.h>\n'  \
    include/Motif-2.1/Xm/VendorSP.h &&

patch -Np1 -i ../lesstif-0.95.0-testsuite_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/X11 \
            --disable-debug \
            --enable-production \
            --with-xdnd &&
sed -i "s@libdir)/X11/mwm@sysconfdir)/mwm@" clients/Motif-2.1/mwm/Makefile &&
make rootdir=/usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.95.0

This package requires that it is installed before the test suite is run. The commands to run the tests are located a bit later in the instructions.

Now, as the root user:

make rootdir=/usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.95.0 install &&
ldconfig

Applicatons that utilize Xorg libraries often, and incorrectly, expect to find configuration files in $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11. While still the root user, create a compatibility symlink with the following command:

ln -v -sf /etc/X11/mwm $XORG_PREFIX/lib/X11

Command Explanations

sed -i -e '...' -e '...' include/Motif-2.1/Xm/VendorSP.h: This command moves one line in the header file to avoid C++ compilation problems.

--disable-debug: Do not generate debugging information.

--enable-production: Build the release version of the LessTif libraries.

--with-xdnd: Enable XDND GNOME compatibility support.

rootdir=/usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.95.0: This installs the documentation into an appropriate directory instead of the non-FHS compliant /usr/LessTif directory.

sed -i "s@libdir)/X11/mwm@sysconfdir)/mwm@" clients/Motif-2.1/mwm/Makefile: This corrects the installation prefix for the mwm directory for FHS compliance.

Testing LessTif

It is advisable to test the installation of LessTif using the included test suite. It is not required to install any of the resulting binaries to validate the installation. Issue the following commands to build the test suite:

cd test &&
./configure &&
make

To run the tests, issue the following commands:

cd Xm &&
./testall *

You may need to manually close four of the test windows. The first one is from test28 in the list directory. The second one is from test10 in the menushell directory. You should click on the button in the window and choose “exit” (do it twice) to finish the test. The third test is from test20 in the PushButton and the last one is from test24 in the scrolledwindow directory.

As many as 101 tests are known to fail. The patch applied at the beginning of the installation created a file used to compare known failures to the failures from the test run. This file was created from an installation using the current LFS book and should be a fairly accurate representation of the failures you'll encounter. You could see some minor variances, however.

Configuring LessTif

Config Files

/etc/X11/mwm/system.mwmrc and ~/.mwmrc

Configuration Information

The config files are used to customize the behavior of the mwm window manager. Information about customizing these files can be found in the mwmrc(5) man page.

Installed Programs: motif-config, mwm, mxmkmf, uil, and xmbind

Installed Libraries: libDtPrints.so, libMrm.so, libUil.so, and libXm.so

Installed Directories: /etc/X11/mwm, /usr/include/Xm, /usr/include/Mrm, /usr/include/uil, /usr/include/Dt, /usr/lib/LessTif, and /usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.95.0

Short Descriptions

motif-config	is used to find out configuration information for packages needing to link to the LessTif libraries.
mwm	is a window manager that adheres largely to the Motif mwm specification.
mxmkmf	is the LessTif version of xmkmf which creates a `Makefile` from an `Imakefile`.
uil	is a user interface language compiler which translates a plain text description of the user interface of a Motif application into a machine-readable form.
xmbind	configures the virtual key bindings of LessTif applications.
`libXm.so`	is an OSF/Motif® source code compatible library for the X Window System. You can download an excellent reference guide (mainly for programmers) for the Motif-2.1 specification from http://unc.dl.sourceforge.net/lesstif/6B_book.pdf.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

startup-notification-0.9

Introduction to startup-notification

The startup-notification package contains startup-notification libraries. These are useful for building a consistent manner to notify the user through the cursor that the application is loading.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/startup-notification/0.9/startup-notification-0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/startup-notification/0.9/startup-notification-0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 624b42f1fac5a12c543a079e2cd3b366
Download size: 226 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

startup-notification Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/startup-notification

Installation of startup-notification

Install startup-notification by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/startup-notification.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/startup-notification-0.9/startup-notification.txt

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libstartup-notification-1.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/startup-notification-1.0 and /usr/share/doc/startup-notification-0.9

Short Descriptions

libstartup-notification-1.{so,a}

provides the functions to assist applications in communicating with the cursor system to provide feedback to the user that the application is loading.

Last updated on 2007-04-19 12:54:29 -0500

libwnck-2.18.3

Introduction to libwnck

The libwnck package contains a Window Navigator Construction Kit.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libwnck/2.18/libwnck-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libwnck/2.18/libwnck-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 1badcbb50e7bc59865f72ec270c15125
Download size: 482 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

libwnck Dependencies

Required

Optional

startup-notification-0.9, intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libwnck

Installation of libwnck

Install libwnck by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libwnck-1.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libwnck-1.0 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libwnck

Short Descriptions

libwnck-1.{so,a}

contains functions for writing pagers and task lists.

Last updated on 2007-07-21 13:46:45 -0500

shared-mime-info-0.21

Introduction to shared-mime-info

The shared-mime-info package contains a MIME database. This allows central updates of MIME information for all supporting applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freedesktop.org/~hadess/shared-mime-info-0.21.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/svn/s/shared-mime-info-0.21.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e1965e129a473683ba395ebc02206367
Download size: 439 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

shared-mime-info Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12, libxml2-2.6.31, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/shared-mime-info

Installation of shared-mime-info

Install shared-mime-info by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring shared-mime-info

Configuration Information

Some applications (including GNOME-2) require a properly set environment variable to locate the MIME database. Satisfy this requirement by setting the following variable in your local shell profile, or the system-wide profile:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=/usr/share
export XDG_DATA_DIRS

Installed Program: update-mime-database

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/mime

Short Descriptions

update-mime-database

assists in adding MIME data to the database.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 14:57:57 -0500

hicolor-icon-theme-0.10

Introduction to hicolor-icon-theme

The hicolor-icon-theme package contains a default fallback theme for implementations of the icon theme specification.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://icon-theme.freedesktop.org/releases/hicolor-icon-theme-0.10.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/hicolor-icon-theme-0.10.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 3534f7b8e59785c7d5bfa923e85510a7
Download size: 33 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/hicolor-icon-theme

Installation of hicolor-icon-theme

Install hicolor-icon-theme by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/icons/hicolor

Short Descriptions

/usr/share/icons/hicolor/*

contains icon definitions used as defaults.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

libxklavier-3.2

Introduction to libxklavier

The libxklavier package contains a utility library for X keyboard.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/gswitchit/libxklavier-3.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8f89a65b2d0aa8f8f5979c7d9de3d051
Download size: 466 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libxklavier Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12, X Window System, and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libxklavier

Installation of libxklavier

Install libxklavier by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-xkb-base=$XORG_PREFIX/share/X11/xkb: Use this parameter if the $XORG_PREFIX is anything other than /usr.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libxklavier.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libxklavier, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libxklavier and /usr/share/libxklavier

Short Descriptions

libxklavier.{so,a}

contains XKB utility functions.

Last updated on 2008-05-07 00:07:59 -0500

freeglut-2.4.0

Introduction to freeglut

freeglut is intended to be a 100% compatible, completely opensourced clone of the GLUT library. GLUT is a window system independent toolkit for writing OpenGL programs, implementing a simple windowing API, which makes learning about and exploring OpenGL programming very easy.

If you built the GLUT library during an installation of MesaLib-6.5.2, you do not need to install this package.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/freeglut/freeglut-2.4.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6d16873bd876fbf4980a927cfbc496a1
Download size: 459 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

freeglut Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/freeglut

Installation of freeglut

Install freeglut by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/freeglut-2.4.0 &&
install -v -m644 doc/freeglut_user_interface.html \
    /usr/share/doc/freeglut-2.4.0

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libglut.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/freeglut-2.4.0

Short Descriptions

libglut.{so,a}

contains functions that implement the OpenGL Utility Toolkit.

Last updated on 2007-08-11 09:51:20 -0500

GOffice-0.6.1

Introduction to GOffice

The GOffice package contains a library of GLib/GTK document centric objects and utilities. This is useful for performing common operations for document centric applications that are conceptually simple, but complex to implement fully. Some of the operations provided by the GOffice library include support for plugins, load/save routines for application documents and undo/redo functions.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/goffice/0.6/goffice-0.6.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/goffice/0.6/goffice-0.6.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a8aa21d089a0ae6f62cb2a9bb70e83db
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 53 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/goffice-0.6.1-gtkdoc_rebase-1.patch

GOffice Dependencies

Required

libgsf-1.14.7, Pango-1.16.4, PCRE-7.6, and which-2.19

Recommended (for the User Interface functionality)

libglade-2.6.1 and libgnomeprint-2.18.0

Note: not installing the recommended dependencies can render the GOffice package incapable of supporting applications which depend on it. If, for whatever reason, you elect not to install the recommended dependencies, you must add the --without-gtk parameter to the configure command in the instructions below.

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GTK-Doc-1.8, and libgnomeui-2.18.1 (with libgsf built to support GNOME by creating the libgsf-gnome-1 library)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/goffice

Installation of GOffice

Install GOffice by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../goffice-0.6.1-gtkdoc_rebase-1.patch &&

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgoffice-0.so and numerous support plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libgoffice-0.4, /usr/lib/goffice, /usr/share/{gtk-doc/html/goffice,{pixmaps/}goffice}

Short Descriptions

libgoffice-0.so

contains API functions to provide support for document centric objects and utilities.

Last updated on 2008-03-16 17:30:00 -0500

MesaLib-6.5.2

Introduction to MesaLib

Mesa is an OpenGL compatible 3-D graphics library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/mesa3d/MesaLib-6.5.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e4d894181f1859651658b3704633e10d
Download size (including recommended download): 3.1 MB
Estimated disk space required (including recommended download): 172 MB
Estimated build time (including recommended download): 1.6 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended demonstration and diagnostic utilities for verifying OpenGL operation

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/mesa3d/MesaDemos-6.5.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e870efe98d3a50be01ab211b9b2e25d9
Download size: 1.3 MB

Optional GLUT library (see also freeglut-2.4.0)

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/mesa3d/MesaGLUT-6.5.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e84edbb11c69c8e408dfadd2ed08e95b
Download size: 306 KB

MesaLib Dependencies

Required

Xorg Libraries, Xorg Utilities, libdrm-2.3.0, and expat-2.0.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/mesalib

Installation of MesaLib

Extract all three tarballs from the same top-level directory as they all will extract to the Mesa-6.5.2 directory.

Install MesaLib by running the following command:

make linux-dri-x86 OPT_FLAGS="-O2 -fno-strict-aliasing" \
    DRI_DRIVER_INSTALL_DIR=${XORG_PREFIX}/lib/X11/modules/dri \
    X11_INCLUDES=-I${XORG_PREFIX}/include \
    EXTRA_LIB_PATH=-L${XORG_PREFIX}/lib

If you downloaded and extracted the Demos package, build the programs with the following commands:

sed -i 's@-l$(GLUT_LIB)@@g' configs/default &&
make -C progs/xdemos PROGS='glxinfo glxgears'

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install INSTALL_DIR=${XORG_PREFIX} \
    DRI_DRIVER_INSTALL_DIR=${XORG_PREFIX}/lib/X11/modules/dri &&
install -dv ${XORG_PREFIX}/share/doc/MesaLib-6.5.2 &&
install -v -m644 docs/* ${XORG_PREFIX}/share/doc/MesaLib-6.5.2

If you built the demo programs, install them using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m755 progs/xdemos/glx{info,gears} ${XORG_PREFIX}/bin

Finally, if installing to any prefix other than /usr, you should create symlinks to the GL headers in /usr/include. Execute the following command as the root user:

ln -s -v ${XORG_PREFIX}/include/GL /usr/include

Tip

Do not remove the Mesa source tree yet, it will be required to build the Xorg-Server-1.2.0.

Command Explanations

make ... linux-dri-x86: The linux-dri-x86 target is specified to use a few other helpful flags in addition to the defaults. See the other targets in the configs directory if your architecture is not x86.

OPT_FLAGS="-O2 -fno-strict-aliasing": A bug where OpenGL applications are shifted to the left by 50% can be worked around by adding -fno-strict-aliasing to the compiler flags.

DRI_DRIVER_INSTALL_DIR=${XORG_PREFIX}/lib/X11/modules/dri: This setting specifies the location that the DRI modules will be installed to. This path is also built into libGL.so.

sed -i 's@-l$(GLUT_LIB)@@g' configs/default: Disables linking against the GLUT libraries for the demo programs, omit this command if you downloaded and extracted the GLUT tarball.

make ... PROGS='glxinfo glxgears': Only builds the glxinfo and glxgears programs.

Installed Programs (optional): glxgears and glxinfo

Installed Libraries: libGL.so, libGLU.so, libGLw.so, *_dri.so and optionally, libglut.so

Installed Directories: $XORG_PREFIX/lib/modules/dri and $XORG_PREFIX/share/doc/MesaLib-6.5.2

Short Descriptions

`glxgears`	is a GL demo useful for troubleshooting graphics problems.
`glxinfo`	is a diagnostic program that displays information about the graphics hardware and installed GL libraries.
`libGL.so`	is the main OpenGL library.
`libGLU.so`	is the OpenGL Utility library.
`libGLw.so`	is the Xt/Motif OpenGL drawing area widget library.
`libglut.so`	is the OpenGL Utility Toolkit (GLUT) library.

Last updated on 2008-05-03 00:18:57 -0500

Chapter 25. Window Managers

Introduction

Window Managers and Desktop Environments are the primary user interfaces into the X Window System. A window manager is a program that controls the appearance of windows and provides the means by which the user can interact with them. A Desktop Environment provides a more complete interface to the operating system, and provides a range of integrated utilities and applications.

There are many Window Managers available. Some of the more well known ones include fvwm2, Window Maker, AfterStep, Enlightenment, Sawfish, and Blackbox.

The Desktop Environments available for Linux are GNOME, KDE, and XFce.

Choosing a Window Manager or Desktop Environment is highly subjective. The choice depends on the look and feel of the packages, the resources (RAM, disk space) required, and the utilities included. One web site that provides a very good summary of what is available, screenshots, and their respective features is Window Managers for X.

In this chapter, the installation instructions of several Window Managers and one lightweight Desktop Environment are presented. Later in the book, both KDE and GNOME have their own sections.

Last updated on 2007-12-07 10:32:27 -0600

sawfish-1.3

Introduction to sawfish

The sawfish package contains a window manager. This is useful for organizing and displaying windows where all window decorations are configurable and all user-interface policy is controlled through the extension language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/sawmill/sawfish-1.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9e5ce5e76c60acecdb1889c1f173295a
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 17.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.26 SBU

sawfish Dependencies

Required

rep-gtk-0.18 and EsounD-0.2.37

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/sawfish

Installation of sawfish

Install sawfish by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexec=/usr/sbin \
    --infodir=/usr/share/info --disable-themer &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-themer: This option prevents building the sawfish themer. This program was not migrated to GTK-2.

--with-audiofile: This command directs sawfish to use libaudiofile for sound manipulation.

--with-esd: This command directs sawfish to use the Enlightened Sound Daemon.

Configuring sawfish

Configuration Information

Be sure to backup your current .xinitrc before proceeding.

cat >> ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
exec sawfish
EOF

Installed Programs: sawfish, sawfish-client, and sawfish-ui

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/sawfish, /usr/sbin/sawfish, and /usr/lib/rep/*/

Short Descriptions

`sawfish`	is the extensible window manager using a Lisp-based scripting language.
`sawfish-client`	allows you to connect to a window manager process and evaluate arbitrary Lisp forms.
`sawfish-ui`	is the sawfish configurator.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Fluxbox-0.9.15.1

Introduction to Fluxbox

The Fluxbox package contains a window manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/fluxbox/fluxbox-0.9.15.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 098eb36a09338aabb63b938a5eab9ef6
Download size: 670 KB
Estimated disk space required: 50.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

Fluxbox Dependencies

Required

Optional

Imlib2-1.4.0 Image display library

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/fluxbox

Installation of Fluxbox

Install Fluxbox by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-imlib2: Use this option if you wish to use other image formats in addition to xpm.

Configuring Fluxbox

Config Files

~/.fluxbox/init, ~/.fluxbox/keys, and ~/.fluxbox/menu

Configuration Information

If Fluxbox is the only Window Manager you want to use, you can start it with an .xinitrc file in your home folder. Be sure to backup your current .xinitrc before proceeding.

echo startfluxbox > ~/.xinitrc

Or alternatively, if you use a login manager like GDM-2.18.3 or kdm and would like to be able to choose Fluxbox at the login prompt, create a fluxbox.desktop file like this.

As root:

cat > /usr/share/xsessions/fluxbox.desktop << "EOF"
[Desktop Entry]
Encoding=UTF-8
Name=Fluxbox
Comment=This session logs you into Fluxbox
Exec=startfluxbox
Type=Application
EOF

If you didn't install GDM-2.18.3 or kdm in /usr, then change that command to fit the prefix you chose.

Now create the Fluxbox configuration files:

mkdir -v ~/.fluxbox &&
cp -v /usr/share/fluxbox/init ~/.fluxbox/init &&
cp -v /usr/share/fluxbox/keys ~/.fluxbox/keys

Now if you have which-2.19 installed:

cd ~/.fluxbox &&
fluxbox-generate_menu

otherwise:

cp -v /usr/share/fluxbox/menu ~/.fluxbox/menu

Menu items are added by editing ~/.fluxbox/menu. The syntax is explained on the fluxbox man page.

If you want to use an image as your desktop background, copy the theme you like into ~/.fluxbox. Then add a line to make it use the correct image. In the following command, change <theme> for the name of the theme you want and change </path/to/nice/image.xpm> to point to the actual image you want to use.

cp /usr/share/fluxbox/styles/<theme> ~/.fluxbox/theme &&
sed -i 's,\(session.styleFile:\).*,\1 ~/.fluxbox/theme,' \
 ~/.fluxbox/init &&
echo "background.pixmap: </path/to/nice/image.xpm>" >> ~/.fluxbox/theme

In some locales the font specified in the theme may not contain the needed characters. This results in menus with blank items. You can fix this by editing ~/.fluxbox/theme with a text editor and altering it so that it names a suitable font.

Installed Programs: fluxbox, fbsetbg, fbsetroot, fluxbox-generate_menu, startfluxbox, and fbrun

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/fluxbox and ~/.fluxbox

Short Descriptions

fluxbox	is a window manager for X11 based on Blackbox 0.61.0.
fbsetbg	is a utility that sets the background image. It requires which to find one of: display, Esetroot, wmsetbg, xv, qiv or xsri.
fbsetroot	is a utility to change root window appearance based on the Blackbox application bsetroot.
fluxbox-generate_menu	is a utility that generates a menu by scanning your `PATH`. It requires which to function properly.
startfluxbox	is a session startup script that allows for command executions prior to fluxbox starting.
fbrun	displays a run dialog window.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Metacity-2.18.5

Introduction to Metacity

The Metacity package contains a window manager. This is useful for organizing and displaying windows.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/metacity/2.18/metacity-2.18.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/metacity/2.18/metacity-2.18.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7928172bf41f6b63976a62554a699674
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 61 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Metacity Dependencies

Required

Optional

startup-notification-0.9 (recommended if you are installing GNOME-2), GConf-2.18.0.1 (recommended if you are installing GNOME-2), intltool-0.35.5, and libcm

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/metacity

Installation of Metacity

Install Metacity by running the following commands:

./configure \
    --prefix=/usr \
    --libexecdir=/usr/lib/metacity \
    --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf/schemas &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/metacity-2.18.5 &&
install -v -m644 README rationales.txt doc/*.txt \
                    /usr/share/doc/metacity-2.18.5

Command Explanations

--with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf/schemas: Omit this parameter if you are not installing Metacity for a GNOME-2 installation.

--enable-compositor: You must use this parameter (and have libcm installed) to build the Metacity composite manager.

Configuring Metacity

Configuration Information

To automatically start the Metacity window manager when you issue the startx command, append to (or create) .xinitrc using the command below (not required if you are installing Metacity for a GNOME-2 installation). Ensure you backup your current ~/.xinitrc before proceeding:

cat >> ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
xterm &
exec metacity
EOF

Installed Programs: metacity, metacity-message, metacity-theme-viewer and metacity-window-demo

Installed Library: libmetacity-private.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/metacity-1, /usr/lib/metacity, /usr/share/doc/metacity-2.18.5, /usr/share/gnome/wm-properties, /usr/share/metacity and the following subdirectories of /usr/share/themes/: AgingGorilla Atlanta Bright Crux/metacity-1 Esco Metabox Simple/metacity-1}

Short Descriptions

metacity	is a window manager used mainly by GNOME.
metacity-theme-viewer	allows you to preview any installed Metacity theme. When designing a new Metacity theme, you can use metacity-theme-viewer to measure the performance of a window frame option, and to preview the option.
metacity-window-demo	demonstrates various kinds of windows that window managers and window manager themes should handle.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

Other Window Managers

twm is the Tab Window Manager. This is the default window manager installed by the X Window System packages.

mwm is the Motif® Window Manager. It is an OSF/Motif® clone packaged and installed with LessTif-0.95.0.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Part VII. KDE

Introduction to KDE

KDE is a comprehensive desktop environment that builds on an X Window System and Qt to provide a window manager and many user tools, including a browser, word processor, spreadsheet, presentation package, games, and numerous other utilities. It provides extensive capabilities for customization.

The KDE instructions are divided into three parts. The first part, the core packages, are needed for the rest of KDE to work. The second part presents additional packages which provide functionality in various areas (multimedia, graphics, etc.) The third part provides resources for software and web developers.

There are two alternatives for installing KDE. Option one, that is used by most of the commercial distributions, is to install KDE in the standard system prefix: /usr. This option allows the use of KDE without the need for any additional configuration such as modification of various environment variables or configuration files. Option two is to install it in a unique prefix such as /opt/kde or /opt/kde-3.5.9. This option allows for easy removal of the KDE version or maintenance of multiple versions for testing.

Tip

All the KDE packages are comprised of various components. The default is to install most of the components. If specific components are to be eliminated, the official way is to set the variable DO_NOT_COMPILE. This comes in handy when there are problems compiling a particular component.

DO_NOT_COMPILE="component1 component2" \
    ./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX ...

The core KDE packages also honor this variable, but omitting components from the core packages is not advisable since it may result in an incomplete KDE installation.

Note

In each of the packages, one other option to configure can be added: --enable-final. This option can speed up the build process, but requires a lot of memory. If you have less than 256MB of RAM, this option may cause swapping and significantly slow compilation.

Chapter 26. KDE Core Packages

KDE Pre-installation Configuration

Based on your preference, set KDE_PREFIX.

One option is to put KDE into the /usr hierarchy. This creates a simpler setup but is more difficult to try multiple versions of KDE.

export KDE_PREFIX=/usr

A method of building multiple versions installs KDE in the /opt hierarchy:

export KDE_PREFIX=/opt/kde-3.5.9

Remember to execute ldconfig after installation of libraries to update the library cache.

If you are not installing KDE in /usr, you will need to make some configuration changes:

You should consider installing the desktop-file-utils-0.13 package. Though not required, this package will allow you to easily use existing .desktop files in /usr/share/applications (and any other locations identified by XDG_DATA_DIRS), and automatically add these applications to the KDE menu system.

Add to your system or personal profile:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/kde-3.5.9/bin
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/kde-3.5.9/lib/pkgconfig

Add to your /etc/ld.so.conf:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF"
# Begin kde addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/kde-3.5.9/lib

# End kde addition
EOF

Add to your /etc/man_db.conf:

cat >> /etc/man_db.conf << "EOF"
# Begin kde addition to man_db.conf

MANDATORY_MANPATH /opt/kde-3.5.9/man

# End kde addition to man_db.conf
EOF

Tip

If you prefer installing KDE in /opt, one trick to avoid the above configuration changes every time you install a new version is to replace /opt/kde-3.5.9 with /opt/kde and to create a symlink from /opt/kde-3.5.9 to /opt/kde.

ln -v -sf kde-3.5.9 /opt/kde

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

aRts-1.5.9

Introduction to aRts

The Analog Real-time Synthesizer (aRts) provides sound support for KDE and necessary libraries for kdelibs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/arts-1.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/arts-1.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 62a5e4d522314bab19288e4702480c93
Download size: 951 KB
Estimated disk space required: 30 MB
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU

aRts Dependencies

Required

Qt-3.3.8b and GLib-2.12.12

Optional

libvorbis-1.2.0, ALSA-1.0.13, Audio File-0.2.6, libmad-0.15.1b, EsounD-0.2.37, NAS-1.9, MAS, and JACK

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/arts

Installation of aRts

Install aRts by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite that works with GCC-4.1.2.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$KDE_PREFIX: This option tells the process to install the package in $KDE_PREFIX. aRts is installed here as it's required before installing KDE.

--disable-debug: This option causes the package to be compiled without debugging code.

--disable-dependency-tracking: This option speeds up one time builds.

Installed Programs: artsd, artswrapper, artsshell, artsplay, artsdsp, artscat, artscontrol, artsc-config, and mcopidl

Installed Libraries: aRts libraries

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/: bin, include/arts, include/artsc, and lib/mcop

Short Descriptions

artsd	is a daemon that provides access to the sound hardware resources.
artswrapper	is a small wrapper program which simply sets real-time priority (running as `root`) and then executes artsd as a non-root user.
artsshell	is intended as a utility to perform miscellaneous functions related to the sound server.
artsplay	is a simple utility to play a sound file.
artsdsp	provides an interim solution that allows most of legacy sound applications to run unchanged.
artscat	is a simple utility to send raw audio data to the sound server.
artscontrol	is a graphical utility for performing a number of tasks related to the sound server.
artsc-config	is a utility to assist developers using the aRts C API.
mcopidl	is the Interface Definition Language (IDL) file compiler for MCOP, the Multimedia Communication Protocol used by aRts.
`aRts Libraries`	contains functions that support aRts programs.

To find out information about aRts and the various programs included in the package, see The aRts Handbook. For information in languages other then English, see the KDE Documentation and navigate to the aRts documentation in your language.

Last updated on 2008-03-10 21:37:42 -0500

Kdelibs-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdelibs

This package includes programs and libraries that are central to the development and execution of a KDE program, as well as internationalization files for these libraries, miscellaneous HTML documentation, theme modules and regression tests.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdelibs-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdelibs-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 55e5f00874933d1a7ba7c95e369a205e
Download size: 15.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 276 MB (additional 431 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 15 SBU (additional 1.25 SBU for API docs)

Kdelibs Dependencies

Required

Qt-3.3.8b

Optional

LibTIFF-3.8.2, Aspell-0.60.5, CUPS-1.2.12, ALSA-1.0.13, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, OpenEXR, JasPer, Lua (version < 5.1), mDNSResponder, LibThai, Hspell, libacl (requires libattr), sudo-1.6.9p15, Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdelibs

Run-Time Dependencies

The KDE libraries access other programs at run time. One additional package that has not been mentioned already is pmount. This enables auto-mounting of hotplugged devices at /media/[device_name] for any user without any fstab modification. It is needed to enable the full integration of KDE with HAL-0.5.9.1.

Installation of Kdelibs

Install kdelibs with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/kde \
            --disable-debug \
            --disable-dependency-tracking &&
LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$QTDIR/lib" make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install. This applies to all packages which can utilize Doxygen.

The make apidox command generates a lot of errors and warnings. In some cases it complains that Helvetica fonts are missing and substitutes a font that does not fit boxes properly. You can add the font by downloading the URW Fonts and unpacking them into ~/.fonts. fc-cache should also be run to update the font properties on your system.

The documents generated are HTML and are found in $KDE_PREFIX/share/doc/HTML/en/kdelibs-apidocs.

This package does not come with a test suite that works with GCC-4.1.2.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$KDE_PREFIX: This option tells the process to install the package in $KDE_PREFIX.

--disable-debug: This option causes the package to be compiled without debugging code.

--disable-dependency-tracking: This option speeds up one time builds.

--sysconfdir=/etc/kde: This option places configuration files in compliance with the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard. If you omit this parameter, the configuration files will be placed in $KDE_PREFIX/etc which may be desirable if you have multiple versions of KDE installed.

LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$QTDIR/lib" make: A bug in the kdelibs build system prevents Qt from being found by the Makefiles if Qt was installed in /opt. Setting LD_LIBRARY_PATH works around the problem.

Installed Programs: Numerous KDE support programs: artsmessage, checkXML, cupsdconf, cupsdoprint, dcop, dcopclient, dcopfind, dcopidl, dcopidl2cpp, dcopidlng, dcopobject, dcopquit, dcopref, dcopserver, dcopserver_shutdown, dcopstart, filesharelist, fileshareset, imagetops, kab2kabc, kaddprinterwizard, kbuildsycoca, kcmshell, kconf_update, kconfig_compiler, kcookiejar, kde-config, kde-menu, kded, kdeinit, kdeinit_shutdown, kdeinit_wrapper, kdesu_stub, kdontchangethehostname, kdostartupconfig, kfile, kfmexec, kgrantpty, khotnewstuff, kinstalltheme, kio_http_cache_cleaner, kio_uiserver, kioexec, kioslave, klauncher, kmailservice, kpac_dhcp_helper, ksendbugmail, kshell, kstartupconfig, ksvgtopng, ktelnetservice, ktradertest, kunittestmodrunner, kwrapper, lnusertemp, make_driver_db_cups, make_driver_db_lpr, makekdewidgets, meinproc, preparetips, and start_kdeinit

Installed Libraries: Numerous KDE libraries and helper modules

Installed Directories: /etc/kde and the following subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/: include/{dnssd, dom, kabc, kate, kdeprint, kdesu, khexedit, kio, kjs, kmdi, kmediaplayer, knewstuff, kparts, kresources, ksettings, kspell2, ktexteditor, kunittest, libkmid}, lib/kde3, and share/{applications, apps, autostart, config, doc, emoticons, icons, mimelnk, services}

Short Descriptions

KDE Support Programs	are essential support programs needed by other KDE applications.
KDE Libraries	contain essential functions that are needed by KDE applications.

The number of programs and libraries installed by kdelibs prohibits an explanation of each one in this section. Instead, see the KDE Documentation.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Kdebase-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdebase

kdebase is the last mandatory package required for the K Desktop Environment. It provides various applications, infrastructure files and libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdebase-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdebase-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c8c35389a238aa1b73e68ef5298eadf8
Download size: 24.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 273 MB (additional 17 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 11 SBU (additional 8.4 SBU for API docs)

Kdebase Dependencies

Required

kdelibs-3.5.9

Optional

libusb-0.1.12, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, Samba-3.0.30, HAL-0.5.9.1 and D-Bus Qt3 Bindings-0.62, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, krb4, OpenEXR, libraw1394, lm_sensors (requires Sysfs Utilities), mDNSResponder, sudo-1.6.9p15, Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdebase

Run-Time Dependencies

Note that there are two additional packages you can install that are used at run-time for konqueror ioslave protocols. You can install the Mtools package to enable the “floppy” ioslave protocol. This will allow easy access to the floppy disk drives on your system. The hfsplus package can be installed to access HFS+ partitions on a Mac OS system using the “mac” ioslave.

One additional package that can be used at run time is PCI Utilities-2.2.3. This enables the KDE Info Center to use lspci for its "pci" info section.

Another package usable at run time is htdig. The enables khelpcenter to create a search index for the KDE application manuals.

Installation of Kdebase

Note

You should ensure a nogroup group exists on your system before performing the configure command, as kdebase installs a program ($KDE_PREFIX/bin/kdesud) with group ownership of nogroup.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Install kdebase with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --sysconfdir=/etc/kde \
    --disable-debug --disable-dependency-tracking &&
LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$KDE_PREFIX/lib" make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$KDE_PREFIX/lib" make: A bug in the kdebase build system prevents kdelibs from being found by the Makefiles when kdelibs is installed in /opt. Setting LD_LIBRARY_PATH works around the problem.

Configuring Kdebase

Configuration Information

There is no real configuration necessary for this package other than to ensure you follow the steps outlined in the last section of this chapter, the section called “Configuring the Core KDE Packages”.

Installed Programs: appletproxy, drkonqi, extensionproxy, genkdmconf, kaccess, kappfinder, kapplymousetheme, kasbar, kate, kblankscrn.kss, kbookmarkmerger, kcheckpass, kcheckrunning, kcminit, kcminit_startup, kcontrol, kcontroledit, kdcop, kdebugdialog, kdeeject, kdeinstallktheme, kdepasswd, kdeprintfax, kdesktop, kdesktop_lock, kdesu, kdesud, kdialog, kdm, kdm_config, kdm_greet, kdmctl, keditbookmarks, keditfiletype, kfind, kfmclient, kfontinst, kfontview, khc_docbookdig.pl, khc_htdig.pl, khc_htsearch.pl, khc_indexbuilder, khc_mansearch.pl, khelpcenter, khotkeys, kicker, kinfocenter (link to kcontrol), kio_media_mounthelper, kio_system_documenthelper, kjobviewer, klipper, klocaldomainurifilterhelper, kmenuedit, knetattach, kompmgr, konqueror, konsole, kpager, kpersonalizer, kpm, kprinter, krandom.kss, krandrtray, krdb, kreadconfig, krootimage, ksmserver, ksplash, ksplashsimple, kstart, ksysguard, ksysguardd, ksystraycmd, ktip, ktrash, kwebdesktop, kwin, kwin_killer_helper, kwin_rules_dialog, kwrite, kwriteconfig, kxkb, nspluginscan, nspluginviewer, and startkde

Installed Libraries: Numerous KDE support libraries, helper modules, and kioslaves

Installed Directories: /etc/xdg/menus/applications-merged and the following subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/: include/{kate, ksgrd, ksplash, kwin}, lib/kconf_update_bin, share/{applnk, apps/{too many to list}, config, config.kcfg, desktop-directories, doc/kdm, fonts, /mimelnk/{fonts, media, print}, services/{searchproviders, useragentstrings}, sounds, templates, wallpapers, and /var/lib/kdm

Short Descriptions

kate	is a programmer's text editor for KDE.
kcontrol	is the KDE Control Center.
kdebugdialog	is a dialog box for managing diagnostic messages at runtime.
kdesu	is a graphical front end for the Unix su command.
kdm	is the KDE display manager (a replacement for xdm).
kfind	is a utility to find files.
khelpcenter	is the KDE help tool.
kicker	is the KDE control panel.
kinfocenter	provides a centralized and convenient overview of your KDE and system settings.
kioslaves	are support modules designed to be intimately familiar with a certain protocol, so that a standard interface (most often these are used by konqueror) can be used to get at data from any number of places. Examples are the http and ftp kioslaves, which will retrieve data from an http or ftp server respectively.
klipper	is a clipboard utility.
kmenuedit	is a utility to rearrange or add items to the K-menu.
konqueror	is a filesystem and web browser.
konsole	is a highly configurable X terminal emulator.
kpager	provides a thumbnail view of all virtual desktops.
kprinter	is the printing module in KDE. It manages the actual printing from KDE applications. It handles print job administration and handles printer and print system management.
ksplash	is a splash screen that shows the progress of an application that is loading.
ksysguard	is a network enabled task manager and system monitor application, with the additional functionality of top.
kwrite	is a text editor for KDE.
kxkb	is a keyboard layout switching utility based on the X11 xkb extension.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Configuring the Core KDE Packages

Back up your existing ~/.xinitrc file and create a new .xinitrc file to start KDE:

echo "exec startkde" > ~/.xinitrc

If you have D-BUS-1.0.2 installed, you can start the D-BUS session daemon here as well. Starting the session daemon here has the added bonus that it will exit when you log out of your KDE session. If you wish to start the daemon here, use the following command instead of the one shown above:

echo "exec dbus-launch --exit-with-session startkde" >> ~/.xinitrc

Note

Check the ~/.xinitrc file and ensure you have no other window managers or other X applications mentioned before KDE.

If you installed the desktop-file-utils-0.13 package, ensure the XDG_DATA_DIRS and XDG_CONFIG_DIRS environment variables are configured properly as explained in that package and update the MIME-type application database (as root):

update-desktop-database

Ensure all libraries can be found with (as root):

ldconfig

At this point you can bring up KDE with:

startx

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Chapter 27. KDE Additional Packages

Each of the packages in this chapter depend on the base KDE installation procedures, but each is an independent group of programs that can be optionally installed. Few users will want to install every package, but instead review and install only the ones desired.

Kdeadmin-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdeadmin

Kdeadmin provides several KDE clients useful for managing a system. Clients include programs for managing users, initialization files, cron, and network connections.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeadmin-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeadmin-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e6607ea27b332616d20f4564656cb885
Download size: 2.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU

Kdeadmin Dependencies

Required

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 and LILO

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdeadmin

Run-Time Dependencies

kcron requires a cron implementation, such as Vixie Cron, at run time. It is not compatible with Fcron-3.0.3.

Installation of Kdeadmin

Install kdeadmin with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kcron, kdat, kpackage, ksysv, and kuser

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kcron	is a task scheduler.
kdat	is a tar-based tape archiver.
kpackage	is a package manager.
ksysv	is a Sys V-Init editor.
kuser	is a graphical user manager.

Last updated on 2008-03-31 19:54:49 -0500

Kdenetwork-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdenetwork

Kdenetwork provides several KDE applications useful in a networking environment. Applications include clients for chat, PPP, news, instant messages, and similar programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdenetwork-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdenetwork-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0ec1d4ccd550510821a622eb91b893e8
Download size: 9.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 194 MB (additional 26 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 12 SBU (additional 0.2 SBU for API docs

Kdenetwork Dependencies

Required

Optional

PPP-2.4.4, XMMS-1.2.10, Graphviz-2.12, Doxygen-1.5.2, Wireless Tools-28, Speex-1.0.5, ALSA-1.0.13, gsmlib, Meanwhile, OpenSLP, libgadu, and Valgrind

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdenetwork

Installation of Kdenetwork

Install kdenetwork with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Kdenetwork

Config Files

/etc/lisarc and ~/.lisarc

Configuration Information

To utilize the LAN Browser of konqueror you will need to create the /etc/lisarc file and start the lisa daemon. Create /etc/lisarc by filling out the information in the “Guided LISa Setup” section of the “LISa Daemon” tab on the “Control Center” — “Internet & Network” — “Local Network Browsing” dialog box.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/lisa init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-lisa

There is no explicit configuration for the rest of the kdenetwork package, however some individual programs need to be set up with user information.

Installed Programs: kdict, kget, knewsticker, kopete, kpf, kppp, krdc, krfb, ksirc, ktalkd, kwifimanager, and lisa

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kdict	is a graphical client for the Dictionary Server Protocol (DICT).
kget	allows you to group downloads.
knewsticker	is a news applet for the KDE Application Launcher Panel.
kopete	is KDE's multi-protocol instant messenger client.
kpf	allows you to share files over a network.
kppp	is a dial-up utility.
krdc	is a client application that allows you to view or even control the desktop session on another machine that is running a compatible (VNC) server.
krfb	is a server application that allows you to share your current session with a user on another machine, who can use a VNC client to view or even control the desktop.
ksirc	is a chat client.
ktalkd	is an enhanced talk daemon—a program to handle incoming talk requests, announce them and allow you to respond to them using a talk client.
kwifimanager	is used to configure and monitor wireless LAN cards.
lisa	is intended to provide a kind of network neighborhood, but only relying on the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Last updated on 2008-05-06 21:45:37 -0500

Kdepim-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdepim

Kdepim provides several KDE programs for managing personal information. Programs include a contact manager, calendar, mail utilities, newsreader, X.509 certificat manager, and sticky notes.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdepim-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdepim-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ba27b06599556c572a26f03608471ee2
Download size: 14.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 281 MB (additional 251 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 22 SBU (additional 1 SBU for API docs)

Kdepim Dependencies

Required

Optional

kdeaccessibility-3.5.9, kdemultimedia-3.5.9, Cyrus SASL-2.1.22, pilot-link-0.12.2, GPGME (requires GnuPG-2.0.8), OpenSync, libmal, gnokii, BlueZ, Boost, Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdepim

Installation of Kdepim

Install kdepim with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
sed -i "s@ \*/@&\n#define HAVE_FOPENCOOKIE@" \
    libkdenetwork/libgpgme-copy/{assuan,gpgme}/funopen.c &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: akregator, kaddressbook, kalarm, kandy, karm, kitchensync, kleopatra, kmail, knode, knotes, konsolekalendar, kontact, korganizer, korn, kpilot, ktnef, kwatchgnupg, and supporting programs

Installed Libraries: Numerous kdepim specific libraries

Installed Directories: Numerous subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

akregator	is a program to read RSS and other online news feeds.
kaddressbook	is the KDE address book.
kalarm	is a system to provide reminder messages.
kandy	is a program to synchronize mobile phone numbers.
karm	is a personal time tracker.
kitchensync	is the universal syncing tool and framework for kde.
kleopatra	is a tool for managing X.509 certificates in a GpgSM keybox and for retrieving certificates from LDAP servers.
kmail	is KDE's email client.
knode	is the KDE newsreader.
knotes	is a popup notes utility.
konsolekalendar	is a command line interface to KDE calendars.
kontact	is the integrated solution to personal information management (PIM) needs.
korganizer	is a personal calendar/todo system.
korn	is a KDE mail checker that has the capabilities to dock itself to kicker.
kpilot	is a program to synchronize a Palm-Pilot.
ktnef	allows handling mail attachments using the TNEF format. Those attachments are usually found in mails coming from Microsoft® mail servers and embed the mail properties as well as the actual attachments.
kwatchgnupg	is simpleGnuPG log viewer.

Last updated on 2008-03-31 19:54:49 -0500

Kdemultimedia-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdemultimedia

Kdemultimedia provides several KDE programs to work with sound. Programs include applications for a jukebox, a soundcard mixer, a midi and karaoke player, and a recording application for aRts.

In this version of Kdemultimedia, some of the functionality provided by the package has been moved into a separate project named Akode. In order for Kdemultimedia to provide the removed functionality, you must install the Akode package first. Instructions to install Akode follow. If you wish to skip the Akode installation, go straight to the Kdemultimedia Instructions.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdemultimedia

Akode-2.0.2

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.kde-apps.org/CONTENT/content-files/30375-akode-2.0.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/a/30375-akode-2.0.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 659ced0c9c735cb3e55b9138ff02342c
Download size: 462 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Reqiured patch (for FFmpeg support): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/akode-2.0.2-FFmpeg_fixes-1.patch

Akode Dependencies

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, FLAC-1.2.1, Speex-1.0.5, libmad-0.15.1b, ALSA-1.0.13, libvorbis-1.2.0, Secret Rabbit Code (a.k.a. libsamplerate), PulseAudio, JACK, and FFmpeg-svn_20070606 (support is experimental)

Installation of Akode

Install Akode by issuing the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --without-ffmpeg \
    --disable-debug --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--without-ffmpeg: This option disables the experimental FFmpeg support in Akode, as the build fails if it is enabled. You can install the patch listed above and remove this switch to enable the experimental FFmpeg support, however, the functionality of Akode built with FFmpeg support has not been tested by the BLFS editors. To install the patch, issue the following command before beginning the build:

patch -Np1 -i ../akode-2.0.2-FFmpeg_fixes-1.patch

Resuming the Kdemultimedia Instructions

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdemultimedia-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdemultimedia-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fdfafe38d2c7e3019dafc80c177add15
Download size: 6.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 125 MB (additional 1 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 9.8 SBU (additional 0.2 SBU for API docs)

Kdemultimedia Dependencies

Required

Optional

Akode-2.0.2, CDParanoia-III-9.8, LAME-3.97, Audio File-0.2.6, libvorbis-1.2.0, xine Libraries-1.1.12, FLAC-1.2.1 (built with libogg-1.1.3 support), GStreamer-0.10.13, Theora, TagLib, TunePimp (requires libmusicbrainz-2.1.5), Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

Installation of Kdemultimedia

Install kdemultimedia with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --sysconfdir=/etc/kde \
    --disable-debug --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: artsbuilder, artscontrol, juk, kaboodle, kaudiocreator, kmid, kmix, kmixctrl, krec, kscd, midisend, mpeglibartsplay, noatun, workman2cddb.pl, yaf-cdda, yaf-mpgplay, yaf-splay, yaf-tplay, yaf-vorbis, and yaf-yuv

Installed Libraries: Numerous kdemultimedia specific libraries

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX: include/{libkcddb, mpeglib, noatun}, lib/mcop/Noatun, and share/apps/{too many to list}

Short Descriptions

artsbuilder	is a tool to create new structures of small connected aRts modules.
juk	is a jukebox, tagger, and music collection manager.
kaboodle	is a multimedia player.
kaudiocreator	is a front-end tool for ripping audio CDs and encoding the wav files.
kmid	is a midi/karaoke player.
kmix	is a sound mixer.
krec	is a recording frontend for aRts.
kscd	is a CD player.
noatun	is another multimedia player.

Last updated on 2008-05-16 10:27:16 -0500

Kdegraphics-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdegraphics

Kdegraphics provides KDE programs to manage the video display and graphical output. Applications include PDF, DVI, and Postscript viewers, an application to adjust monitor gamma correction, a 3D modeling application to generate POV-Ray scenes, and a scanner application.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdegraphics-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdegraphics-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3d75e27180573a4e077e0245055891a5
Download size: 7.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 150 MB (additional 37 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 7.5 SBU (additional 0.6 SBU for API docs)

Kdegraphics Dependencies

Required

Optional

LibTIFF-3.8.2, Imlib (not recommended: obsolete, abandoned upstream, buggy, needed only for the kuickshow image viewer, to which kview is a better alternative), little cms-1.16, Poppler-0.5.4 (libpoppler-qt.so must have been built), SANE-1.0.18, teTeX-3.0, FriBidi-0.10.8, libgphoto2, t1lib, OpenEXR, libpaper, KADMOS (a commercial OCR engine), Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdegraphics

Run-Time Dependencies

The kooka utility is a scanning and OCR program. In order for kooka to utilize the OCR capabilities, you must install an OCR engine. kooka provides full OCR support using the KADMOS and GOCR engines and partial support using the Ocrad engine.

The kghostview program requires a ghostscript interpreter from AFPL Ghostscript-8.53 or ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 to process PS or PDF files.

The kpovmodeler program requires POV-Ray to render 3D scenes.

Installation of Kdegraphics

Install kdegraphics with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kcolorchooser, kcoloredit, kdvi, kfax, kfaxview, kghostview, kiconedit, kolourpaint, kooka, kpdf, kpovmodeler, kruler, ksnapshot, kuickshow, kview, kviewshell, mrmlsearch, printnodetest, svgdisplay, and xf86gammacfg

Installed Libraries: kio_kamera and several other kdegraphics specific libraries and support modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX: include/{svg, kviewshell, libtext2path-0.1}, share/applnk/Graphics, share/apps/{too many to list}, and share/config/magic

Short Descriptions

kcolorchooser	is a color chooser for a given pallette.
kcoloredit	is a color pallette editor.
kdvi	is a DVI viewer.
kfax	is a FAX viewer.
kfaxview	is a FAX previewer used with kviewshell.
kghostview	is a PS/PDF viewer.
kiconedit	is an icon editor.
kolourpaint	is a paint program.
kooka	is a raster image scan program.
kpdf	is a PDF viewer.
kpovmodeler	is a graphical 3D modeler, which can generate scenes for POV-Ray.
kruler	is a screen ruler.
ksnapshot	is a screen capture program.
kuickshow	is an image viewer.
kview	is another image viewer.
kviewshell	is a generic framework for the KDE viewer applications.
xf86gammacfg	is a simple tool for monitor gamma correction.
kio_kamera	is an ioslave that allows you to view and download images from a digital camera using the `kamera:/` URL in konqueror.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Kdeutils-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdeutils

Kdeutils provides KDE programs for miscellaneous tasks. Programs include a calculator, a note taker, a basic editor, a floppy disk manager, and a binary editor.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeutils-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeutils-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dbe5ddff57141f27778601df5571e182
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 64 MB (additional 8 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 3.7 SBU (additional 0.2 SBU for API docs)

Kdeutils Dependencies

Required

Optional

Net-SNMP, tpctl (for Thinkpad support), Python-2.5.2, XMMS-1.2.10, Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdeutils

Run-Time Dependencies

Several programs included in kdeutils are frontends for other software, and so require these external programs to be present at run time. kgpg requires GnuPG-1.4.7 or GnuPG-2.0.8, kdessh requires OpenSSH-4.7p1, while irkick requires LIRC. The ark program will require appropriate utilities to handle various archives, including Zip-2.32, UnZip-5.52, JDK-6 Update 5 (for the jar program), Unrar-3.7.8, rar (binary only shareware), p7zip, zoo, and ncompress.

Installation of Kdeutils

Install kdeutils with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: ark, irkick, kcalc, kcharselect, kdessh, kdf, kedit, kfloppy, kgpg, khexedit, kjots, klaptop_acpi_helper, klaptop_check, kregexpeditor, ktimer, kwalletmanager, kwikdisk, and superkaramba

Installed Libraries: Several kdeutils specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

ark	is an archiving tool.
irkick	is the infrastructure for KDE's Infrared Remote Control functionality; irkick is the server component of that infrastructure.
kcalc	is a scientific calculator.
kcharselect	is a character selector applet.
kdessh	is a graphical interface to OpenSSH-4.7p1
kdf	is a disk usage viewer.
kedit	is a text editor.
kfloppy	is a floppy formatter.
kgpg	a simple graphical interface for GnuPG-1.4.7.
khexedit	is a binary editor.
kjots	is a note taker.
kregexpeditor	is an editor for editing regular expressions in a graphical style (in contrast to the ASCII syntax).
ktimer	is a task scheduler.
kwalletmanager	provides a secure way to manage passwords.
superkaramba	is a tool to create interactive widgets on a KDE desktop.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Kdeedu-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdeedu

Kdeedu provides KDE programs useful in learning. Programs include a touch typing tutor, a program to help revise/teach Latin, a desktop planetarium, an application to study Spanish verbforms, and the classic hangman game for children.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeedu-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeedu-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: cbdabe916ce6fa300f8dab972c5cb4a4
Download size: 29.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 205 MB
Estimated build time: 6.5 SBU

Kdeedu Dependencies

Required

Optional

libusb-0.1.12, Boost.Python, OCaml, and FaCiLe module for OCaml.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdeedu

Installation of Kdeedu

Install kdeedu with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: flashkard, kalzium, kbruch, keduca, khangman, kig, kiten, klettres, kmathtool, kmessedwords, kmplot, kpercentage, kstars, ktouch, kverbos, and kvoctrain

Installed Libraries: Several kdeedu specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kalzium	is a program which shows you the Periodic System of Elements.
kbruch	is a small program to generate tasks with fractions.
keduca	is flash card application, which allows you to make interactive form based tests..
khangman	is the classical hangman game for children, adapted for KDE.
kig	is a KDE application for Interactive Geometry.
kiten	is a Japanese reference/study tool for KDE.
klettres	is an alphabet tutor (French).
kmessedwords	is a simple mind-training word game.
kmplot	is a mathematical function plotter for KDE.
kpercentage	is a small math application that will help pupils to improve their skills in calculating percentages.
kstars	is a desktop planetarium.
ktouch	is a touch typing tutor.
kverbos	is an application specially designed to study Spanish verb forms.
kvoctrain	is a vocabulary trainer.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Kdeaccessibility-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdeaccessibility

Kdeaccessibility provides KDE programs to aid handicapped users. Programs include a screen magnifier, a text to speech plugin service to allow an application to speak using the DCOP interface, and an application for computer speech for mute users.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeaccessibility-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeaccessibility-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 79c7fa53ec60ad51fbdb16aac56d85a1
Download size: 8.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 57 MB
Estimated build time: 2.1 SBU

Kdeaccessibility Dependencies

Required

Optional

Akode-2.0.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdeaccessibility

Run-Time Dependencies

Several KDE accessibility programs access other programs at run time for rendering speech from text. These include FreeTTS-1.2.1, Festival, Festival Lite, Epos, or MBROLA with optionally Txt2pho.

Installation of Kdeaccessibility

Install kdeaccessibility with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kmag, kmousetool, and kmouth

Installed Libraries: kdeaccessibility support libraries

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kmag	is a screen magnifier for KDE.
kmousetool	is a utility which clicks the mouse whenever the mouse cursor pauses briefly.
kmouth	is an application that enables persons that cannot speak to let their computers speak.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Kdetoys-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdetoys

Kdetoys includes KDE applications for a world clock, an applet showing the phases of the moon, and the ability to track weather stations.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdetoys-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdetoys-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 10fd55e004a582f87eed6796811bb3b8
Download size: 3.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Kdetoys Dependencies

Required

Installation of Kdetoys

Install kdetoys with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: amor, kmoon, kodo, kteatime, ktux, kweather, and kworldclock

Installed Libraries: kdetoys support libraries

Installed Directories: Support subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

amor	Amusing Misuse of Resources.
kmoon	is a Moon phase indicator.
kodo	measures your desktop mileage.
kteatime	times your tea brewing.
ktux	small Tux crossing stars.
kworldclock	shows which parts of the world are currently experiencing daylight, and which parts are currently in night. It also shows the current time in a range of cities around the world.

Last updated on 2008-03-10 21:37:42 -0500

Kdegames-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdegames

Kdegames provides many interesting games.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdegames-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdegames-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 472385f21a692270fb5643d7617c7ff3
Download size: 11.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 98 MB (additional 13 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 3.2 SBU (additional 0.6 SBU for API docs)

Kdegames Dependencies

Required

Optional

Graphviz-2.12 and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdegames

Installation of Kdegames

Install kdegames with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: a compilation of various games

Installed Libraries: Support libraries for kdegames

Installed Directories: Subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Last updated on 2008-03-10 21:37:42 -0500

Kdeartwork-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdeartwork

Kdeartwork provides additional KDE themes, screensavers, sounds, wallpapers, widget styles, and window styles.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeartwork-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeartwork-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ec526eba38421fd3b143682b8d683c86
Download size: 16.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 99 MB
Estimated build time: 1.5 SBU

Kdeartwork Dependencies

Required

Optional

XScreenSaver-5.03

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdeartwork

Installation of Kdeartwork

Install kdeartwork with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Objects: additional themes, screensavers, sounds, backgrounds, and widget styles for KDE

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Last updated on 2008-03-10 21:37:42 -0500

Kdeaddons-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdeaddons

Kdeaddons provides additional plugins for konqueror, kate, and kicker.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeaddons-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdeaddons-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: eaa3832a25b483d1a9613f75991c3d7b
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 48 MB
Estimated build time: 5.7 SBU

Kdeaddons Dependencies

Required

Optional

kdenetwork-3.5.9, kdemultimedia-3.5.9, kdepim-3.5.9, kdegames-3.5.9, XMMS-1.2.10, and SDL-1.2.11

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdeaddons

Installation of Kdeaddons

Install kdeaddons with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: Miscellaneous KDE support programs

Installed Libraries: Additional plugins, libraries, and scripts for KDE applications

Installed Directories: None

Last updated on 2008-03-10 21:37:42 -0500

Kde-i18n-3.5.9

Introduction to Kde-i18n

Kde-i18n is a set of internationalization packages to customize KDE for different languages and locales around the world.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kde-i18n/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kde-i18n/
Download MD5 sum: http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/MD5SUMS
Download size: 789 KB to 29 MB (average is about 3 MB)
Estimated disk space required: varies
Estimated build time: varies

Download Details

KDE has 52 separate internationalization packages in the form of:

kde-i18n-<xx>-3.5.9.tar.bz2

where the <xx> is a two to five letter code for the country covered. Download the package(s) you need from the directories above.

Kde-i18n Dependencies

Required

Installation of Kde-i18n

Install kde-i18n with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Kde-i18n

Configuration Information

To use translated programs, select Control Center —> Personalization —> Country & Language —> Language in your K Desktop Environment.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Internationalization support for KDE

Installed Directories: None

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Chapter 28. KDE Software and WEB Development Packages

These KDE applications are generally of interest to software or WEB developers. General users can skip them without a loss of functionality.

Kdesdk-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdesdk

Kdesdk provides several applications useful for developers. Programs include a version control system front-end for CVS, a program to view the differences between files, a UML Modeller, and a profile data visualization tool.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdesdk-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdesdk-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fd86abfe0ac7c5af61b15eb5367d0399
Download size: 5.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 112 MB
Estimated build time: 6.7 SBU

Kdesdk Dependencies

Required

Optional

kdepim-3.5.9

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdesdk

Run-Time Dependencies

Valgrind and CVS-1.11.22 are needed at run time for there respective frontends, kcachegrind and cervisia

Installation of Kdesdk

Install kdesdk with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: cervisia, kbabel, kcachegrind, kompare, and umbrello

Installed Libraries: Several kdesdk specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

cervisia	provides a graphical view of CVS.
kbabel	is a suite of an advanced PO file editor comprising kbabel, a multi functional catalogmanager and a dictionary for translators kbabeldict.
kcachegrind	is a KDE frontend for cachegrind, part of Valgrind.
kompare	is a program to view the differences between files.
umbrello	is a UML modelling diagram tool.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Kdevelop-3.5.1

Introduction to Kdevelop

Kdevelop provides an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) to be used for a wide variety of programming tasks.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdevelop-3.5.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdevelop-3.5.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 80d2216a0089fe142735d34ae8de6a0c
Download size: 9.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 187 MB (additional 23 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 15 SBU (additional 0.2 SBU for API docs)

Kdevelop Dependencies

Required

Optional

Python-2.5.2, DocBase, Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdevelop

Run-Time Dependencies

KDevelop can make use of a large number of external compilers or interpreters for supported languages, version control systems, build tools , and debuggers at run time. Refer to http://www.kdevelop.org/index.html?filename=3.5/requirements.html and the KDevelop User Manual to find out if your development environment is supported.

Installation of Kdevelop

Install kdevelop with:

sed -i -e 's/ kdevutil$//' buildtools/lib/widgets/Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v -R root:root $KDE_PREFIX/kdevbdb

If you created the API documentation, install it with:

make install-apidox

Command Explanations

sed -i -e 's/ kdevutil$//' buildtools/lib/widgets/Makefile.in: Remove a duplicate entry on a line in the Makefile that causes the build of the API documentation to fail.

chown -v -R root:root $KDE_PREFIX/kdevbdb: If kdevelop is built by any user other than root the installed Berkeley-DB files will have incorrect ownership. This command changes the ownership to root:root.

Installed Programs: kdevelop and supporting programs

Installed Libraries: Supporting kdevelop libraries

Installed Directories: $KDE_PREFIX/kdevbdb and supporting subdirectoies in $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

kdevelop

is an Integrated Development Environment to be used for a wide variety of programming tasks in many programming languages.

Last updated on 2008-03-31 19:54:49 -0500

Kdewebdev-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdewebdev

Kdewebdev includes KDE based programmers' utilities to generate GUI dialogs, a Web IDE, a stylesheet debugger, and a utility to search and replace strings.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdewebdev-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdewebdev-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e95d1fbb698ec76966abfa5bdf96bd5e
Download size: 6.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 107 MB
Estimated build time: 5.6 SBU

Kdewebdev Dependencies

Required

Optional

kdesdk-3.5.9

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdewebdev

Run-Time Dependencies

The Quanta application included in kdewebdev can use several other utilities at run time. HTML Tidy-cvs_20070326 can be used to check the validity of HTML documents. Gubed is useful for debugging PHP scripts. GnuPG-1.4.7 or GnuPG-2.0.8 can be used for checking digital signatures. Kompare, from kdesdk-3.5.9 can be used to view changes to files modified outside of Quanta. Cervisia, also from kdesdk-3.5.9, is useful for interacting with CVS.

Installation of Kdewebdev

Install kdewebdev with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kxsldbg and quanta

Installed Libraries: kdewebdev specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kxsldbg	is a GUI front-end to xsldbg, the XSLT debugger.
quanta	is a web development tool that strives to be neutral and transparent to all markup languages, while supporting popular web-based scripting languages, CSS, and other emerging W3C recommendations.

Last updated on 2008-03-31 19:54:49 -0500

Kdebindings-3.5.9

Introduction to Kdebindings

The kdebindings provides the ability to write KDE applications in a variety of languages including Ruby, Perl, Python, Java, JavaScript, C#, and Smoke. For details see http://developer.kde.org/language-bindings/

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdebindings-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.5.9/src/kdebindings-3.5.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ba780920f6b810a30a61b1ffa888706b
Download size: 5.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 490 MB
Estimated build time: 18 SBU

Kdebindings Dependencies

Required

Optional

GLib-1.2.10, GTK+-1.2.10, Python-2.5.2, Ruby-1.8.6-p111, JDK-6 Update 5, SeaMonkey-1.1.9, QScintilla, Mono, DotGNU Portable.NET, and Rotor

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/kdebindings

Installation of Kdebindings

Note: If KDE is installed in /opt/kde-3.5.9, you'll need to make a modification before the build using the following command:

sed -i -e 's@/usr@/opt/kde-3.5.9@' \
    python/pykde/configure.py

Install kdebindings with:

sed -i -e '/configure.*pyqt/s/-c//' \
    -e '/configure.*pykde/s/-c/-i/' python/Makefile.in
sed -i 's%echo "yes" | @PYTHON@ configure.py%& -y qt-mt%' python/Makefile.in
DO_NOT_COMPILE="smoke" ./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e '/configure.*pyqt/s/-c//' -e '/configure.*pykde/s/-c/-i/' python/Makefile.in : Remove a switch that causes concatenation of multiple files for compilation. This fix reduces build time by a factor of five.

sed -i 's%echo "yes" | @PYTHON@ configure.py%& -y qt-mt%' python/Makefile.in: Specifies that the libqt-mt.so library should be used to build the pyqt bindings. configure.py will fail if it finds both libqt-mt.so and libqt.so.

DO_NOT_COMPILE="smoke" ./configure: Disables the building of the smoke module of kdebindings, as the build is currently broken and no workaround has been found.

Installed Programs: Several support programs for software development

Installed Libraries: KDE bindings for various programming languages

Installed Directories: Subdirectories of /usr/lib and $KDE_PREFIX/share

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Part VIII. GNOME

Introduction to GNOME

This chapter presents the instructions to install a complete GNOME-2.18.3 desktop environment. The order of the installed packages follows the build order defined by the GNOME development team and has been thoroughly tested by the BLFS team.

The installation of GNOME-2.18.3 is a large undertaking and one we would like to see you complete with the least amount of stress. One of the first goals in this installation is to protect your previously installed software, especially if you are testing GNOME on your machine. GNOME-2.18 packages utilize the --prefix=option passed to configure, so you will use that and an environment variable (GNOME_PREFIX) to add flexibility to the installation.

To install GNOME as your desktop of choice, it is recommended that you install using --prefix=/usr. If you are not sure that you are going to keep the GNOME installation, or you think you will update to the newest releases as they become available, you should install with --prefix=/opt/gnome-2.18.3. Setting the environment variable and the additional edits required by the second option are covered in the Pre-Installation Configuration section.

If you choose the second option, removal of GNOME-2.18.3 is as easy as removing the edits from the pre-installation page and issuing the following command (you may need to become the root user):

rm -rf /opt/gnome-2.18.3

If your system was completely built per LFS and BLFS instructions, you have a very good chance of using GNOME-2.18.3 after your first installation. If you are a typical LFS user, you have made modifications to the instructions along the way knowing that you have to take those modifications into account on future installations. You should have no problems integrating GNOME-2.18.3 into your unique setup, but you will have to install well over 50 packages before you can run GNOME through any testing (assuming your windowing system is preinstalled and tested). You should anticipate that you will be rebuilding GNOME at least once to make adjustments for your setup.

Alternate Installation Methods

As was previously mentioned, building a GNOME desktop from sources is a significant project. Some may find it too tedious or time-consuming to perform a full installation following the BLFS book. You may wish to review the automated methods mentioned in the GNOME-2.18 Release Notes (they are a bit dated). Note that using any other method to install GNOME-2.18.3 other than using the BLFS instructions cannot be supported by the BLFS team. Alternate methods are only mentioned as a courtesy to builders who would like to build GNOME from sources but do not have the time/desire/patience/whatever to follow the BLFS book.

Chapter 29. GNOME Core Packages

This section contains required elements of the GNOME environment to display a functional desktop. The packages are separated into “Platform” and “Desktop” sections in the same manner as the sources are distributed on the GNOME download mirrors.

Caution

The BLFS team recommends that you carefully evaluate the optional dependencies listed for each of the core GNOME packages. You may lose desired functionality if you don't install an optional dependency before the package that lists the dependency, even if you later install it.

Pre-installation Configuration

Set an environment variable to resolve the prefix destination.

If GNOME is your desktop of choice:

export GNOME_PREFIX=/usr

If you want to try-out GNOME, or install it in an easy-to-remove location:

Note

You may wish to create a symbolic link to the actual versioned directory using a non-versioned name. This has the advantage of an easier path to type in all the changes below and also makes it easy to point to a different/newer version of GNOME without changing all the edits below. If you wish to use a non-versioned name in the changes below, issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /opt/gnome-2.18.3 &&
ln -v -s gnome-2.18.3 /opt/gnome

If you created the symbolic link, change all instances of /opt/gnome-2.18.3 to /opt/gnome in the instructions below.

export GNOME_PREFIX=/opt/gnome-2.18.3

The try-out group will also need to make all the following configuration changes:

Add to your system or personal profile:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/gnome-2.18.3/bin
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/gnome-2.18.3/lib/pkgconfig
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/gnome-2.18.3/share/pkgconfig
export GNOME_LIBCONFIG_PATH=/usr/lib:/opt/gnome-2.18.3/lib

Add to your /etc/ld.so.conf:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF"
# Begin gnome addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/gnome-2.18.3/lib

# End gnome addition
EOF

Add to your /etc/man_db.conf:

cat >> /etc/man_db.conf << "EOF"
# Begin gnome addition to man_db.conf

MANDATORY_MANPATH /opt/gnome-2.18.3/share/man

# End gnome addition to man_db.conf
EOF

Tip

Remember to execute ldconfig as the root user after installation of libraries to update the linker's library cache.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

Platform

Last updated on 2007-07-19 17:17:26 -0500

ORBit2-2.14.7

Introduction to ORBit2

The ORBit2 package contains a high-performance CORBA Object Request Broker. This allows programs to send requests and receive replies from other programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/ORBit2/2.14/ORBit2-2.14.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/ORBit2/2.14/ORBit2-2.14.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3440c44aaef14dd96e4ccd7ce22a7e6e
Download size: 729 KB
Estimated disk space required: 34 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

ORBit2 Dependencies

Required

libIDL-0.8.8

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8 and OpenSSL-0.9.8g

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/orbit2

Installation of ORBit2

Install ORBit2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$GNOME_PREFIX \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$GNOME_PREFIX: This is the base installation for GNOME-2 from which all future package installations will receive their prefix parameter. Be sure that $GNOME_PREFIX is set for this install or globally to your install directory as described in the introduction of this Chapter.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3: This parameter causes the configuration files to be installed in /etc/gnome/2.18.3 instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc. Additionally (if applicable), the parameter ensures that the GConf-2 database is correctly updated.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: ior-decode-2, linc-cleanup-sockets, orbit-idl-2, orbit2-config and typelib-dump

Installed Libraries: libname-server-2.a, libORBit-2.{so,a}, libORBit-imodule-2.{so,a}, libORBitCosNaming-2.{so,a}, and Everything_module.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/orbit-2.0, lib/orbit-2.0 and share/{gtk-doc/html/ORBit2, idl/orbit-2.0}

Short Descriptions

libORBit-2.{so,a}

is the CORBA API.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

libbonobo-2.18.0

Introduction to libbonobo

The libbonobo package contains libbonobo libraries. This is a component and compound document system for GNOME-2.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libbonobo/2.18/libbonobo-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libbonobo/2.18/libbonobo-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8f0676e63420abf622f799cdd24ed9cc
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 38 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

libbonobo Dependencies

Required

ORBit2-2.14.7, libxml2-2.6.31, popt-1.10.4, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

X Window System, intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libbonobo

Installation of libbonobo

Install libbonobo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/bonobo \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0): Setting the prefix using this parameter instead of with $GNOME_PREFIX will ensure that the prefix is consistent with the installation environment and the package will be installed in the correct location.

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/bonobo: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/bonobo instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: activation-client, bonobo-slay, echo-client-2, bonobo-activation-run-query, bonobo-activation-server, and bonobo-activation-sysconf

Installed Libraries: libbonobo-2.{so,a}, libbonobo-activation.{so,a}, ORBit-2 bonobo module, bonobo servers, and libmoniker_std_2.{so,a} bonobo library

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/2.18.3/bonobo-activation and the following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/{bonobo-activation-2.0,libbonobo-2.0}, lib/{bonobo{,-2.0},libbonobo}, and share/{gtk-doc/html/{bonobo-activation,libbonobo}, idl/bonobo-{,activation-}2.0}

Short Descriptions

libbonobo-2.{so,a}

are a set of language and system independent CORBA interfaces for creating reusable components and compound documents.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

GConf-2.18.0.1

Introduction to GConf

The GConf package contains a configuration database system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/GConf/2.18/GConf-2.18.0.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/GConf/2.18/GConf-2.18.0.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: aa0e0a0729fb021bab72b4166fd392f9
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 32 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

GConf Dependencies

Required

ORBit2-2.14.7 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

GTK+-2.10.13, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gconf

Installation of GConf

Install GConf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/GConf \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3: This parameter causes the GConf-2 configuration database to be built in /etc/gnome/2.18.3 instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc. This installation controls all future installations of GConf-2 schemas. If you change the location (which includes eliminating this parameter), it must be consistent for every subsequent package installation that updates the GConf-2 configuration database.

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/GConf: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/GConf instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: gconf-merge-tree and gconftool-2

Installed Library: libgconf-2.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf and the following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gconf, lib/GConf and share/{GConf, gtk-doc/html/gconf, sgml/gconf}

Short Descriptions

gconf-merge-tree	merges an xml filesystem hierarchy.
gconftool-2	is a command line tool for manipulating the GConf database.
`libgconf-2.{so,a}`	provide the functions necessary to maintain the configuration database.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

shared-mime-info-0.21

The shared-mime-info-0.21 package is located in Chapter 26 — X Libraries and is required by GNOME-2 but is not a direct dependency of any GNOME-2 package, therefore the package is mentioned within the GNOME-2 Core Packages (Platform section) chapter to ensure it is installed.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

GNOME MIME Data-2.4.3

Introduction to GNOME MIME Data

The GNOME MIME Data package contains the base set of file types and applications for GNOME-2.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-mime-data/2.4/gnome-mime-data-2.4.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-mime-data/2.4/gnome-mime-data-2.4.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2abe573a6e84b71c58a661d4bafa9bd6
Download size: 563 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GNOME MIME Data Dependencies

Required

libbonobo-2.18.0 and GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-mime-data

Installation of GNOME MIME Data

Note

The instructions below are based on installing the package into a GNOME-2 environment. If, for whatever reason, you're installing this package without having ORBit2 and the core GNOME-2 libraries installed, you'll need to modify the --prefix= parameter on the configure script to point to your desired installation path (e.g., --prefix=/usr).

Install GNOME MIME Data by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D man/gnome-vfs-mime.5 \
    $(pkg-config \
        --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man/man5/gnome-vfs-mime.5

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{application-registry, share/mime-info}

Short Descriptions

`application-registry`	contains the application mime database.
`mime-info`	contains the mime description database.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

hicolor-icon-theme-0.10

The hicolor-icon-theme-0.10 package is located in Chapter 26 — X Libraries and is recommended in a GNOME-2 installation. This package is not a direct dependency of any GNOME-2 package, therefore it is mentioned within the GNOME-2 Core Packages chapter to ensure it is installed.

Last updated on 2007-07-20 07:13:32 -0500

desktop-file-utils-0.13

The desktop-file-utils-0.13 package is located in Chapter 10 — General Utilities and is required by GNOME-2 but is not a direct dependency of any GNOME-2 package, therefore the package is mentioned within the GNOME-2 Core Packages (Platform section) chapter to ensure it is installed.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1

Introduction to GNOME Virtual File System

The GNOME Virtual File System package contains virtual file system libraries. This is used as one of the foundations of the Nautilus file manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-vfs/2.18/gnome-vfs-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-vfs/2.18/gnome-vfs-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: bf4a6d95180d05981893e5d021c6695c
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 56 MB
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU

GNOME Virtual File System Dependencies

Required

D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74, GConf-2.18.0.1, and GNOME MIME Data-2.4.3

Optional

Samba-3.0.30, Gamin-0.1.9, HAL-0.5.9.1, GTK-Doc-1.8, intltool-0.35.5, OpenSSH-4.7p1, OpenSSL-0.9.8g or GnuTLS-1.6.3, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, Avahi, OpenAFS, and CDParanoia-III-9.8 (not recommended)

If you run ./configure --help for the complete list of dependency requirements and available parameters, you may notice a message about the gnome-mount-0.6 package. This package is not required at build-time, and is only a run-time dependency. If gnome-mount is available at run-time, GNOME-VFS will use it. If it is not available, GNOME-VFS will fall back to using other mounting mechanisms.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-vfs

Installation of GNOME Virtual File System

Install GNOME Virtual File System by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-vfs-2.0 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-vfs-2.0: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-vfs-2.0 instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--with-dbus-service-dir=/usr/share/dbus-1/services: Use this parameter if you linked HAL into the build and you want the gnome-vfs-daemon.service file installed in the default D-Bus location instead of in GNOME_PREFIX/share/dbus-1/services. See the information in the configuration section below if you don't use this parameter.

--with-hal-eject=PROGRAM: This parameter does not need to be passed if you have Eject or gnome-mount-0.6 installed, as the eject program is used if gnome-mount is not installed.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Configuring Gnome Virtual File System

Configuration Information

If HAL was linked into the build and GNOME is being installed in any location other than /usr, you should create a local D-Bus session configuration file so that the installed gnome-vfs-daemon.service file can be discovered by D-Bus. You should reference the information on the D-Bus page for instructions on how to create a D-Bus custom services directory.

Installed Programs: gnomevfs-cat, gnomevfs-copy, gnomevfs-info, gnomevfs-ls, gnomevfs-mkdir, gnomevfs-mv, gnomevfs-rm, and gnome-vfs-daemon

Installed Libraries: libgnomevfs-2.{so,a} and modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of /etc/gnome/2.18.3/: gconf/{schemas, gconf.xml.defaults/{desktop, schemas, system}, gnome-vfs-2.0} and the following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-vfs-{,module-}2.0, lib/gnome-vfs{,-2.0}, share/gtk-doc/html/gnome-vfs-2.0

Last updated on 2007-08-16 17:34:29 -0500

GNOME VFS Monikers-2.15.3

Introduction to GNOME VFS Monikers

The GNOME VFS Monikers package contains Bonobo monikers that were pulled out of the GNOME VFS package during the Bonobo to D-Bus conversion. This package is required so that the GNOME VFS API/ABI remains stable.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-vfs-monikers/2.15/gnome-vfs-monikers-2.15.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-vfs-monikers/2.15/gnome-vfs-monikers-2.15.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b16f0db0482263be3318e269f52bb5b6
Download size: 260 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3 MB
Estimated build time: .1 SBU

GNOME VFS Monikers Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-vfs-monikers

Installation of GNOME VFS Monikers

Install GNOME VFS Monikers by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: A Bonobo module

Installed Directories: None

Last updated on 2007-07-19 17:16:31 -0500

libgnome-2.18.0

Introduction to libgnome

The libgnome package contains the libgnome library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnome/2.18/libgnome-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnome/2.18/libgnome-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 73426589d7c6fa3266fe4e8f3be2f5b5
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 24 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

libgnome Dependencies

Required

libbonobo-2.18.0 and GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1

Recommended (if you plan on installing the GNOME desktop)

EsounD-0.2.37

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8 and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnome

Installation of libgnome

Install libgnome by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man \
            --disable-esd &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This parameter sets LIBGNOME_LOCALSTATEDIR to /var/lib instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var to synchronize with the GNOME Games installation and properly record high scores in /var/lib/games.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--disable-esd: This parameter is required if EsounD-0.2.37 is not installed. Remove it if the package is installed.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: gnome-open

Installed Libraries: libgnome-2.{so,a} and the libmoniker_extra_2.{so,a} bonobo library

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/2.18.3/sound, and the following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgnome-2.0, share/gtk-doc/html/libgnome

Short Descriptions

libgnome-2.{so,a}

are the non-GUI portion of the GNOME libraries.

Last updated on 2008-03-26 12:02:13 -0500

libgnomecanvas-2.14.0

Introduction to libgnomecanvas

The libgnomecanvas package contains the GNOME canvas library. It is an engine for structured graphics and one of the essential GNOME libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomecanvas/2.14/libgnomecanvas-2.14.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomecanvas/2.14/libgnomecanvas-2.14.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 516c46fb4a1401b05cfef58c350fbd3d
Download size: 612 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

libgnomecanvas Dependencies

Required

libglade-2.6.1 and libart_lgpl-2.3.19

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnomecanvas

Installation of libgnomecanvas

Note

Install libgnomecanvas by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgnomecanvas-2.{so,a} and the libcanvas.{so,a} Glade library

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgnomecanvas-2.0, lib/libglade and share/gtk-doc/html/libgnomecanvas

Last updated on 2007-07-25 19:31:00 -0500

libbonoboui-2.18.0

Introduction to libbonoboui

The libbonoboui package contains libbonoboui libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libbonoboui/2.18/libbonoboui-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libbonoboui/2.18/libbonoboui-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 22bd67a0a8b7f156c02c5fc08fb1fa24
Download size: 981 KB
Estimated disk space required: 31 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

libbonoboui Dependencies

Required

libgnome-2.18.0 and libgnomecanvas-2.14.0

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8 and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libbonoboui

Installation of libbonoboui

Install libbonoboui by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d $(pkg-config \
        --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/libbonoboui-2.18.0 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{dtd,txt,xml,html} $(pkg-config \
        --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/libbonoboui-2.18.0

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: bonobo-browser and test-moniker

Installed Libraries: libbonoboui-2.{so,a} and libbonobo.{so,a} Glade library

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libbonoboui-2.0, share/{doc/libbonoboui-2.18.0, gnome-2.0, gtk-doc/html/libbonoboui}

Short Descriptions

libbonoboui-2.{so,a}

are the GUI portion of the Bonobo libraries.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

gnome-keyring-0.8.1

Introduction to gnome-keyring

The gnome-keyring package contains a daemon that keeps passwords and other secrets for users.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-keyring/0.8/gnome-keyring-0.8.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-keyring/0.8/gnome-keyring-0.8.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 24b15dedcf40c1c60d0fb989370d80ff
Download size: 448 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

gnome-keyring Dependencies

Required

Optional

D-BUS-1.0.2 and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-keyring

Installation of gnome-keyring

Note

Install gnome-keyring by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-keyring &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d $(pkg-config \
        --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/gnome-keyring-0.8.1 &&
install -v -m644 *.txt $(pkg-config \
        --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/gnome-keyring-0.8.1

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-keyring: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-keyring instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Program: gnome-keyring-daemon

Installed Library: libgnome-keyring.so

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-keyring-1, lib/gnome-keyring and share/doc/gnome-keyring-0.8.1

Short Descriptions

gnome-keyring-daemon	is a session daemon that keeps passwords for users.
`libgnome-keyring.so`	let other applications utilize gnome-keyring-daemon.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0

Introduction to GNOME Icon Theme

The GNOME Icon Theme package contains an assortment of scalable and non-scalable icons of different sizes and themes.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-icon-theme/2.18/gnome-icon-theme-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-icon-theme/2.18/gnome-icon-theme-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0b9aa12c473e0be61dc324b059c106e3
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Icon Theme Dependencies

Required

icon-naming-utils-0.8.2 and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

intltool-0.35.5 and pkg-config-0.22

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-icon-theme

Installation of GNOME Icon Theme

Install GNOME Icon Theme by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/icons/gnome

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

libgnomeui-2.18.1

Introduction to libgnomeui

The libgnomeui package contains libgnomeui libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomeui/2.18/libgnomeui-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomeui/2.18/libgnomeui-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dbdb274517ad643d9397dd6868788631
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 42 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

libgnomeui Dependencies

Required

libbonoboui-2.18.0 and gnome-keyring-0.8.1

Optional

libjpeg-6b, EsounD-0.2.37, intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnomeui

Installation of libgnomeui

Install libgnomeui by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/libgnomeui &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

if [ $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) != "/usr" ]; then
    ln -v -s $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
             ORBit-2.0)/lib/gtk-2.0/2.10.0/filesystems \
        /usr/lib/gtk-2.0/2.10.0
fi

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/libgnomeui: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/libgnomeui instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--with-kde-datadir=$KDE_PREFIX/share: Use this parameter if you have KDE installed in any prefix other than /usr.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

if [ ... != "/usr" ]; then ...; fi: This command is used to create a symbolic link in instances where the GNOME installation prefix is anything other than /usr.

Configuring libgnomeui

Configuration Information

Some applications cannot properly discover the libglade interface library installed by libgnomeui. Get around this problem by initializing an environment variable which identifies the location of the library. Add the following line to the system-wide /etc/profile file, or to individual user's ~/.profile or ~/.bashrc files:

export LIBGLADE_MODULE_PATH=$GNOME_PREFIX/lib/libglade/2.0

Installed Programs:

Installed Libraries: libgnomeui-2.{so,a}, the libgnome.{so,a} Glade library, and the libgnome-vfs.{so,a} GTK+ library

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgnomeui-2.0, lib/{gtk-2.0/2.10.0/filesystems, libgnomeui} and share/gtk-doc/html/libgnomeui

Short Descriptions

libgnomeui-2.{so,a}

are the GUI portion of the GNOME libraries.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 10:33:15 -0500

GAIL-1.18.0

Introduction to GAIL

The GAIL package provides accessibility support for GTK+ and libgnomecanvas by implementing AtkObjects for widgets in GTK+ and libgnomecanvas. The GAIL library is a GTK+ module. This module is normally used with the atk-bridge GTK+ module from AT-SPI to allow an assistive technology, e.g., a screenreader, to query or drive the program.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gail/1.18/gail-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gail/1.18/gail-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d58ad8cc79d3cb6778bc015ef69fb499
Download size: 610 KB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

GAIL Dependencies

Required

libgnomecanvas-2.14.0

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gail

Installation of GAIL

Note

Install GAIL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

if [ $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) != "/usr" ]; then
    ln -v -s $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
             ORBit-2.0)/lib/gtk-2.0/modules \
         /usr/lib/gtk-2.0
fi

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

if [ ... != "/usr" ]; then ...; fi: GTK+ will look for the GAIL modules in /usr/lib even if $GNOME_PREFIX is NOT /usr. This command creates a symbolic link to satisfy this requirement.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgailutil.so and GAIL GTK+ modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gail-1.0, lib/gtk-2.0/modules and share/gtk-doc/html/gail-libgail-util

Short Descriptions

libgailutil.so

provides the functions that solve accessibility problems in a consistent manner across GNOME.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 09:57:59 -0500

Desktop

Last updated on 2007-07-19 17:17:26 -0500

GTK Engines-2.10.2

Introduction to GTK Engines

The GTK Engines package contains eight themes/engines and two additional engines for GTK2.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtk-engines/2.10/gtk-engines-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtk-engines/2.10/gtk-engines-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 01de081b24d7b5d92093cad5c5e4b8c7
Download size: 654 KB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU (additional ~9 SBU to run the test suite)

GTK Engines Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gtk-engines

Installation of GTK Engines

Install GTK Engines by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. This takes quite a while.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: GTK-2 engines libraries

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/gtk-2.0/2.10.0/engines and /usr/share/themes/{theme names}

Installed Themes: Clearlooks, Crux, Industrial, LighthouseBlue, Metal, Mist, Redmond and ThinIce

Short Descriptions

engines libraries

are manager systems for specific themes.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 10:33:15 -0500

GNOME Themes-2.18.1

Introduction to GNOME Themes

The GNOME Themes package contains several more theme sets.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-themes/2.18/gnome-themes-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-themes/2.18/gnome-themes-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: caa1683da286eeeb0f4f7ec8b0cc34bb
Download size: 2.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Themes Dependencies

Required

icon-naming-utils-0.8.2 and GTK Engines-2.10.2

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-themes

Installation of GNOME Themes

Install GNOME Themes by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-all-themes &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-all-themes: Using this parameter enables the installation of additional accessibility themes. Omit this parameter if you have no desire for additional accessibility themes.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: Several directories under /usr/share/{icons,themes}

Installed Themes: Several themes in the /usr/share/themes hierarchy and icons in the /usr/share/icons hierarchy

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3

Introduction to GNOME Doc Utils

The GNOME Doc Utils package is a collection of documentation utilities for the GNOME project. Notably, it contains utilities for building documentation and all auxiliary files in your source tree, and it contains the DocBook XSLT stylesheets that were once distributed with Yelp. Starting with GNOME 2.8, Yelp requires GNOME Doc Utils for the XSLT. Starting with GNOME 2.12, many of the core GNOME packages require GNOME Doc Utils.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-doc-utils/0.10/gnome-doc-utils-0.10.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-doc-utils/0.10/gnome-doc-utils-0.10.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 43f3a4086ec1254cbe20b85948192d18
Download size: 451 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GNOME Doc Utils Dependencies

Required

libxslt-1.1.22, which-2.19, and XML::Parser-2.34

The packages are listed as recommended even though GNOME Doc Utils will build fine without them. If you don't install the recommended packages (and you pass the appropriate flags to the configure command so that it will build without them), functionality will be missing that is expected later in other GNOME packages.

Optional

pkg-config-0.22 and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-doc-utils

Installation of GNOME Doc Utils

Note

Install GNOME Doc Utils by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Programs: gnome-doc-prepare and xml2po

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/share/: gnome-doc-utils, gnome/help/gnome-doc-{make,xslt}, omf/gnome-doc-{make,xslt}, xml/gnome and xml2po}

Installed Stylesheets: Custom DocBook XSLT stylesheets

Short Descriptions

gnome-doc-prepare	prepares a package to use gnome-doc-utils.
xml2po	is a Python script used to translate XML documents.

Last updated on 2008-03-10 16:14:10 -0500

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3

Introduction to GNOME Desktop

The GNOME Desktop package contains the gnome-about program, the libgnome-desktop-2 library and GNOME's core graphics files and icons.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-desktop/2.18/gnome-desktop-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-desktop/2.18/gnome-desktop-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 98de3b7d0da690da8b94cddc74f3914b
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Desktop Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-desktop

Installation of GNOME Desktop

Install GNOME Desktop by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-gnome-distributor="Some Name": Use this parameter to supply a custom name in the “Distributor:” field of the “GNOME About” display window.

--with-kde-datadir=$KDE_PREFIX/share: Use this parameter if KDE is installed in any prefix other than /usr.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: gnome-about

Installed Library: libgnome-desktop-2.{so,a}

Installed Directory: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-desktop-2.0, share/{gnome-about, {gnome/help,omf}/{fdl,gnome-feedback,gpl,lgpl}, gtk-doc/html/gnome-desktop}

Short Descriptions

gnome-about	produces the about screen.
`libgnome-desktop-2.{so,a}`	contains APIs being tested for inclusion in libgnome or libgnomeui.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

gnome-backgrounds-2.18.3

Introduction to gnome-backgrounds

The gnome-backgrounds package contains a collection of graphics files which can be used as backgrounds in the GNOME desktop environment. Additionally, the package creates the proper framework and directory structure so that you can add your own files to the collection.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-backgrounds/2.18/gnome-backgrounds-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-backgrounds/2.18/gnome-backgrounds-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d91b925d358d2cbc705b4a033e7d5c2e
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

gnome-backgrounds Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-backgrounds

Installation of gnome-backgrounds

Note

Install gnome-backgrounds by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{gnome-background-properties, pixmaps/backgrounds}

Short Descriptions

GNOME backgrounds

are backgrounds for the GNOME desktop.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

gnome-menus-2.18.3

Introduction to gnome-menus

The gnome-menus package contains an implementation of the draft “Desktop Menu Specification” from freedesktop.org (http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/menu-spec). Also contained are the GNOME menu layout configuration files, .directory files and a menu related utility program.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-menus/2.18/gnome-menus-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-menus/2.18/gnome-menus-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e2b97b01b33b9744baf26982a8ad588a
Download size: 437 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gnome-menus Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12 and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

Python-2.5.2, Gamin-0.1.9, and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-menus

Installation of gnome-menus

Note

Install gnome-menus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --enable-inotify &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-inotify: This parameter is used so that file polling is accomplished using the kernel inotify calls, instead of using other polling methods. Remove this parameter if you wish to fall back to Gamin as the file polling method.

Configuring gnome-menus

Configuration Information

XDG_CONFIG_DIRS Variable

So that GNOME can find the desktop configuration files, ensure you set the XDG_CONFIG_DIRS environment variable in the system profile, or in individual user's profiles as shown below (you may add additional directories, separated with colons, if desired):

export XDG_CONFIG_DIRS=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/xdg:/etc/xdg

XDG_DATA_DIRS Variable

So that GNOME can find the data to populate the menus, ensure you set the XDG_DATA_DIRS environment variable in the system profile, or in individual user's profiles as shown below (you may add additional directories, separated with colons, if desired):

export XDG_DATA_DIRS=$GNOME_PREFIX/share:/usr/share

PYTHONPATH Variable

If your GNOME-2 installation prefix is anything other than /usr and you have Python installed, you need to update the PYTHONPATH environment variable so that the gmenu module can be located by Python. Set the variable in the system profile, or in individual user's profiles as shown below:

export PYTHONPATH=$PYTHONPATH:$(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
       ORBit-2.0)/lib/python2.5/site-packages:$(pkg-config \
       --variable=prefix \
       ORBit-2.0)/lib/python2.5/site-packages/GMenuSimpleEditor

Installed Programs: gmenu-simple-editor and gnome-menu-spec-test

Installed Library: libgnome-menu.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/2.18.3/xdg and the following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-menus, lib/python2.5/site-packages/GMenuSimpleEditor, share/{desktop-directories, gnome-menus}

Short Descriptions

gmenu-simple-editor	is a simple front-end script to the Python Gmenu Simple Editor module
gnome-menu-spec-test	is used to test GNOME's implementation of the Desktop Menu Specification.
`libgnome-menu.{so,a}`	contains functions required to support GNOME's implementation of the Desktop Menu Specification.

Last updated on 2008-03-17 13:11:35 -0500

GNOME Panel-2.18.3

Introduction to GNOME Panel

The GNOME Panel package contains hooks to the menu sub-system and the applet sub-system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-panel/2.18/gnome-panel-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-panel/2.18/gnome-panel-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 545348de234fa8222e328fa7f3a5ba71
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 67 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

GNOME Panel Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3, libwnck-2.18.3, and gnome-menus-2.18.3

Optional

Evolution Data Server-1.10.3 (required if you plan to install Evolution-2.10.3 or Ekiga-2.0.9), intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

Note

The libxml2 Python module must have been built during the installation of libxml2 else the GNOME Panel build will fail.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-panel

Installation of GNOME Panel

Install GNOME Panel by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-panel \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-panel: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-panel instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: gnome-desktop-item-edit, gnome-panel and panel-test-applets

Installed Library: libpanel-applet-2.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/panel-2.0, lib/gnome-panel, share/{gnome/{help/{too many to list}, panel}, gtk-doc/html/panel-applet, icons, idl/gnome-panel-2.0, omf/{too many too list}}

Short Descriptions

libpanel-applet-2.{so,a}

allow development of small applications (applets) which may be embedded in the panel.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

VTE-0.16.6

Introduction to VTE

The VTE package contains a termcap file implementation for terminal emulators.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/vte/0.16/vte-0.16.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/vte/0.16/vte-0.16.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 131174986ab519b91dfcd6cf22541cbb
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 26 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

VTE Dependencies

Required

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8, intltool-0.35.5, and PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk module)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/vte

Installation of VTE

Install VTE by running the following commands:

sed -i 's%\\177:%&kh=\\EOH:@7=\\EOF:%' termcaps/xterm &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --libexecdir=/usr/lib/vte &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i ... termcaps/xterm: The Home and End keys are broken in the xterm termcap file. This sed command fixes them.

--libexecdir=/usr/lib/vte: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of /usr/lib/vte instead of /usr/libexec.

--with-glX: This parameter can be passed to the configure script to enable additional drawing methods in the VTE library.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Program: vte

Installed Libraries: libvte.{so,a} and the vtemodule.{so,a} Python module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/vte, /usr/lib/vte, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/vte, and /usr/share/vte

Short Descriptions

vte	is a test application for the VTE libraries.
`libvte.{so,a}`	is a library which implements a terminal emulator widget for GTK+.

Last updated on 2007-08-12 11:35:36 -0500

GNOME Terminal-2.18.1

Introduction to GNOME Terminal

The GNOME Terminal package contains the console. This is useful for executing programs from a command prompt.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-terminal/2.18/gnome-terminal-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-terminal/2.18/gnome-terminal-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c1902cf4727f4cd976d6cc0beb1c03fe
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 43 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Terminal Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, VTE-0.16.6, and startup-notification-0.9

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-terminal

Installation of GNOME Terminal

Install GNOME Terminal by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Program: gnome-terminal

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/,omf/}gnome-terminal

Short Descriptions

gnome-terminal

provides the command prompt in the GNOME environment.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

LibGTop-2.14.9

Introduction to LibGTop

The LibGTop package contains the GNOME top libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgtop/2.14/libgtop-2.14.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgtop/2.14/libgtop-2.14.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a228ccab58216f7fef97de9c2b6e328e
Download size: 772 KB
Estimated disk space required: 16 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

LibGTop Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12 and popt-1.10.4

Optional

GDBM-1.8.3, GTK-Doc-1.8, and X Window System

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgtop

Installation of LibGTop

Note

Install LibGTop by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --infodir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/info &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you passed --with-libgtop-examples to the configure script to build the example programs, install them using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d $(pkg-config \
        --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/libgtop/examples &&
install -v -m755 examples/.libs/* \
        $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/libgtop/examples

Command Explanations

--infodir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/info: This switch installs the info documentation in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/info instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/info. You may need to add this directory to your $INFOPATH environment variable if your GNOME installation prefix is anything other than /usr.

--with-libgtop-examples: Adding this parameter to the configure script will build numerous example programs.

--with-libgtop-inodedb: Add this parameter to the configure script if you have GDBM installed and wish to build the inodedb programs.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Configuring LibGTop

Configuration Information

If $GNOME_PREFIX is anything other than /usr, update the INFOPATH environment variable by adding the following to your system-wide or personal profile:

export INFOPATH=/usr/share/info:$(pkg-config \
       --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/info

Installed Programs: file_by_inode2 and mkinodedb2

Installed Library: libgtop-2.0.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgtop-2.0 and lib/libgtop/examples

Short Descriptions

libgtop-2.0.{so,a}

contains the functions that allow access to system performance data.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 19:31:00 -0500

libgnomekbd-2.18.2

Introduction to libgnomekbd

The libgnomekbd package contains xkb hooks used by the GNOME desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomekbd/2.18/libgnomekbd-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomekbd/2.18/libgnomekbd-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e99a9f1de689ba3c0ad03fadd55dd3e4
Download size: 359 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

libgnomekbd Dependencies

Required

libxklavier-3.2 and libgnomeui-2.18.1

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnomekbd

Installation of libgnomekbd

Install libgnomekbd by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Program: gkbd-indicator-plugins-capplet

Installed Libraries: libgnomekbd.{so,a} and libgnomekbdui.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX: /include/libgnomekbd and /share/libgnomekbd

Short Descriptions

gkbd-indicator-plugins-capplet	is used internally by the GNOME desktop to interface with xkb.
`libgnomekbd{,ui}.{so,a}`	contain the X keyboard API functions to support xkb on the GNOME desktop.

Last updated on 2007-07-27 13:49:21 -0500

EEL-2.18.3

Introduction to EEL

The EEL package contains the Eazel Extensions Library. This is a collection of widgets and extensions to the GNOME platform.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/eel/2.18/eel-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/eel/2.18/eel-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c51fea61eb99eaa7995754b8acf787ff
Download size: 643 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

EEL Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3, gnome-menus-2.18.3, and GAIL-1.18.0

Optional

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, GAIL-1.18.0, GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0, GNOME Panel-2.18.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/eel

Installation of EEL

Install EEL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libeel-2.{so,a}

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/eel-2

Short Descriptions

libeel-2.{so,a}

is a collection of widgets developed by the Nautilus project.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

Nautilus-2.18.3

Introduction to Nautilus

The Nautilus package contains the GNOME shell and file manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/nautilus/2.18/nautilus-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/nautilus/2.18/nautilus-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e027b4e1a925122ef3e7f54323cc3c44
Download size: 4.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 103 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU

Nautilus Dependencies

Required

EEL-2.18.3, EsounD-0.2.37, libexif-0.6.16, and librsvg-2.16.1

Optional

startup-notification-0.9, Tracker (see the Tracker README file for the extensive dependencies), Beagle (needs Gnome-Sharp which requires Mono), and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/nautilus

Installation of Nautilus

Install Nautilus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d $(pkg-config \
    --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/nautilus-2.18.3 &&
install -v -m644 docs/*.{txt,dia,pdf,sxw,faq,html} $(pkg-config \
    --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/nautilus-2.18.3

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: nautilus, nautilus-connect-server and nautilus-file-management-properties

Installed Library: libnautilus-extension.so

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/nautilus, share/{doc/nautilus-2.18.3, {,pixmaps}nautilus}

Short Descriptions

nautilus	is the GNOME file manager.
`libnautilus-extension.so`	supplies the functions needed by the file manager.

Last updated on 2007-08-05 17:14:40 -0500

Control Center-2.18.1

Introduction to Control Center

The Control Center package contains the GNOME settings managers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/control-center/2.18/control-center-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/control-center/2.18/control-center-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: bae0fd0f9e32f374bd7236d98788b13f
Download size: 2.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 71 MB
Estimated build time: 2 SBU

Control Center Dependencies

Required

GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13, libgnomekbd-2.18.2, Metacity-2.18.5, and Nautilus-2.18.3

Optional

HAL-0.5.9.1, shared-mime-info-0.21, Evolution Data Server-1.10.3, and ALSA-1.0.13

Though they are only run-time dependencies and Control Center will compile just fine without them installed, there are two screen saver packages that can be installed which will provide a robust collection of screen savers and screen locking capability. gnome-screensaver-2.18.2 is looked for first, with a fallback to XScreenSaver-5.03 if necessary.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/control-center

Installation of Control Center

Install Control Center by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/control-center &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/control-center: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/control-center instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--enable-aboutme: Enables building the gnome-about-me capplet. Evolution Data Server must be installed to use this parameter.

Configuring Control Center

Configuration Information

If HAL was linked into the build and GNOME is being installed in any location other than /usr, you should create a local D-Bus session configuration file so that the installed org.gnome.SettingsDaemon.service file can be discovered by D-Bus. You should reference the information on the D-Bus page for instructions on how to create a D-Bus custom services directory. You may disregard this if you already created the local D-Bus session configuration file during the GNOME VFS installation.

Installed Programs: gnome-about-me,gnome-accessibility-keyboard-properties, gnome-at-properties, gnome-background-properties, gnome-control-center, gnome-default-applications-properties, gnome-display-properties, gnome-font-properties, gnome-font-viewer, gnome-keybinding-properties, gnome-keyboard-properties, gnome-mouse-properties, gnome-network-preferences, gnome-sound-properties, gnome-theme-manager, gnome-theme-thumbnailer, gnome-thumbnail-font, gnome-typing-monitor, gnome-ui-properties, gnome-window-properties, and themus-theme-applier

Installed Libraries: libgnome-window-settings.{so,a}, GNOME VFS and window manager settings library modules and Nautilus library module extensions

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-window-settings-2.0, lib/{control-center, nautilus, window-manager-settings}, share/{{,gnome/help/,omf/}control-center-2.0, gnome/{default-applications,cursor-fonts}}

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

GNOME Applets-2.18.0

Introduction to GNOME Applets

The GNOME Applets package contains small applications which generally run in the background and display their output to the GNOME panel.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-applets/2.18/gnome-applets-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-applets/2.18/gnome-applets-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: db3ef99c00335798f30fc0a9162c0257
Download size: 7.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 118 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU

GNOME Applets Dependencies

Required

Optional to Build the Invest Applet

PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk and gtk.libglade modules) and Gnome-Python-Desktop-2.18.0 (including the gnomeapplet module)

Optional

LibGTop-2.14.9, Control Center-2.18.1, GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13, HAL-0.5.9.1, libgnomekbd-2.18.2, gucharmap-1.10.0, system-tools-backends-1.4.2, DocBook-utils-0.6.14, libapm, and libnotify

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-applets

Installation of GNOME Applets

Install GNOME Applets by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-applets \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make -C man install-man

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-applets: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of in $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-applets instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

make -C man install-man: This command installs the man-pages that are not installed during make install.

Installed Program: cpufreq-selector

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgweather, lib/gnome-applets, share/{gnome-applets, {gnome/help,omf}/{too many to list}, pixmaps/{accessx-status-applet, cpufreq-applet, stickynotes}, xmodmap}

Last updated on 2007-08-12 11:35:36 -0500

GNOME Session-2.18.3

Introduction to GNOME Session

The GNOME Session package contains the GNOME session manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-session/2.18/gnome-session-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-session/2.18/gnome-session-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 59b6809ed1d8e39c1550217e665c75df
Download size: 716 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Session Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3 and Control Center-2.18.1

Optional

TCP Wrapper-7.6 and libnotify

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-session

Installation of GNOME Session

Install GNOME Session by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man \
            --with-at-spi-registryd-directory=$(pkg-config \
               --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/at-spi
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--with-at-spi-registryd-directory=...: This parameter is used to identify where the AT-SPI Registry daemon is located, as the default is $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Programs: gnome-session, gnome-session-properties, gnome-session-remove, gnome-session-save, and gnome-wm

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/splash

Short Descriptions

gnome-session	starts up the GNOME desktop.
gnome-session-*	session utilities includes a configuration program and other session management related utilities.
gnome-wm	uses the `$WINDOW_MANAGER` environment variable to allow a user to define a window manager of choice. If no `$WINDOW_MANAGER` is defined, gnome-wm defaults to metacity as the default window manager.

Last updated on 2007-08-24 21:22:20 -0500

Yelp-2.18.1

Introduction to Yelp

The Yelp package contains the help browser. This is useful for viewing help files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/yelp/2.18/yelp-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/yelp/2.18/yelp-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 84abbfe7e042706cbf21752957e29bf3
Download size: 900 KB
Estimated disk space required: 18 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Yelp Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, startup-notification-0.9, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, and a mozilla.org Gecko layout engine (SeaMonkey-1.1.9 or Firefox-2.0.0.15 or Thunderbird-2.0.0.12 or Mozilla)

Optional

Beagle

Note

The Yelp package is not required for a functional GNOME desktop. Note, however, that without Yelp you will not be able to view the built-in Help provided by core GNOME and many of the support applications. This is mentioned here because you may not wish to install a Gecko layout engine. Without a Gecko layout engine you will have no graphical browser capability as the default GNOME browser, Epiphany-2.18.3, also requires a Gecko layout engine.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/yelp

Installation of Yelp

Install Yelp by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --enable-cpp-rtti &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: gnome-help and yelp

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/yelp

Short Descriptions

gnome-help	is a symbolic link to yelp.
yelp	is the GNOME help browser.

Last updated on 2007-07-27 13:49:21 -0500

GNOME User Docs-2.18.2

Introduction to GNOME User Docs

The GNOME User Docs package contains documentation for GNOME.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-user-docs/2.18/gnome-user-docs-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-user-docs/2.18/gnome-user-docs-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 4d3b5c8bd3cc8008f2a44d98efaa2502
Download size: 6.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 52 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

GNOME User Docs Dependencies

Required

GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3 and which-2.19

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-user-docs

Installation of GNOME User Docs

Note

Install GNOME User Docs by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{gnome/help/{gnome-access-guide, system-admin-guide, user-guide}, omf/{gnome-user-docs,user-guide}}

Short Descriptions

OMF files

contain user documentation. These include introductions and help on the core packages.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

Configuring the Core GNOME Packages

Create (or append to) a ~/.xinitrc file to start GNOME:

echo "exec gnome-session" >> ~/.xinitrc

If you have D-BUS-1.0.2 installed, you can start the D-BUS session daemon here as well. Starting the session daemon here has the added bonus that it will exit when you log out of your GNOME session. If you wish to start the daemon here, use the following command instead of the one shown above:

echo "exec dbus-launch --exit-with-session gnome-session" >> ~/.xinitrc

Note

Check the ~/.xinitrc file and ensure you have no other window managers or other X applications mentioned before GNOME.

Ensure all libraries can be found by udating the linker's cache (as root):

ldconfig

Update the MIME-type application database (as root):

update-desktop-database

At this point you can bring up GNOME with startx.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:48:30 -0500

Chapter 30. GNOME Additional Packages

These packages are modular and add desktop applications and assorted utilities to the GNOME environment. Feel free to install them on an as needed or as desired basis.

Libraries

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Evolution Data Server-1.10.3

Introduction to Evolution Data Server

The Evolution Data Server package provides a unified backend for programs that work with contacts, tasks, and calendar information. It was originally developed for Evolution (hence the name), but is now used by other packages as well.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evolution-data-server/1.10/evolution-data-server-1.10.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evolution-data-server/1.10/evolution-data-server-1.10.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 44438eca3ca3cab861109605611fe778
Download size: 7.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 185 MB
Estimated build time: 3.3 SBU (additional 0.5 SBU to run the test suite)

Evolution Data Server Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1 and libsoup-2.2.100

Recommended (For SSL and S/MIME support)

NSS-3.11.7

The NSS package is not required if you have Firefox-2.0.0.15, Thunderbird-2.0.0.12, SeaMonkey-1.1.9 or Mozilla installed. These packages contain internal copies of NSS (or they used a system-installed copy). If any of the four packages are installed, one way or another you will already have NSS/NSPR libraries on your system.

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.3.39, an MTA (that provides a sendmail command), Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, krb4, GTK-Doc-1.8, intltool-0.35.5, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/evolution-data-server

Installation of Evolution Data Server

Install Evolution Data Server by running the following commands:

Note

The instructions below assume you have the NSS/NSPR libraries installed on your system. If you elected not to install NSS (or one of the other packages mentioned above), you'll need to remove the following two parameter settings from the configure command below:

--enable-nss --enable-smime

The Evolution configure script does not look for the Thunderbird mail client for the NSS/NSPR libraries. If you are using Thunderbird as your source for the NSS/NSPR libraries, you will have to add the following two parameter settings to the configure command below:

--with-nspr-includes=/usr/include/nspr --with-nss-includes=/usr/include/nss

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
                ORBit-2.0)/lib/evolution-data-server-1.2 \
            --enable-nntp \
            --enable-gnome-keyring \
            --enable-nss \
            --enable-smime &&
make

To test the results, issue: make -k check. Some tests are known to fail, however most should pass.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/evolution-data-server-1.2: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/evolution-data-server-1.2 instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--enable-nntp: This parameter is used to build the Usenet news (NNTP) backend.

--enable-gnome-keyring: This parameter is used so that passwords are stored using the gnome-keyring storage manager.

--enable-nss: This parameter is used to pull in the Mozilla Network Security Services libraries for SSL support.

--enable-smime: This parameter is used to pull in the Mozilla Network Security Services libraries for S/MIME support.

Note

To enable many of the optional dependencies, review the information from ./configure --help for the necessary parameters you must pass to the configure script.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libcamel-1.2.so, libcamel-provider-1.2.so, libebook-1.2.so, libecal-1.2.so, libedata-book-1.2.so, libedata-cal-1.2.so, libedataserver-1.2.so, libedataserverui-1.2.so, libegroupwise-1.2.so, libexchange-storage-1.2.so and numerous provider and extension modules.

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/evolution-data-server-1.10, lib/evolution-data-server-1.2, share/{evolution-data-server-1.10, gtk-doc/html/libe{book,cal,data{,server}}, idl/evolution-data-server-1.10, pixmaps/evolution-data-server-1.10}

Short Descriptions

libe*.so

libraries are client, backend and utility libraries for the Evolution address books, calendar and data servers.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:54:33 -0500

gnome-audio-2.0.0

Introduction to gnome-audio

The gnome-audio package contains a set of default sounds for the GNOME GUI desktop. Sound files for startup, shutdown and many GTK+ events are included. These sounds complement the GNOME Media package.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-audio/2.0/gnome-audio-2.0.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-audio/2.0/gnome-audio-2.0.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: cd14b84af59fb2ec673527d32f4e379f
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 4.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-audio

Installation of gnome-audio

Note

Install gnome-audio by running the following command as the root user:

make prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) install

Command Explanations

prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0): Setting the prefix using this parameter instead of with $GNOME_PREFIX will ensure that the prefix is consistent with the installation environment and the package will be installed in the correct location.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/sounds

Last updated on 2007-10-16 06:56:37 -0500

GtkHTML-3.14.3

Introduction to GtkHTML

The GtkHTML package contains a lightweight HTML rendering/printing/editing engine.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtkhtml/3.14/gtkhtml-3.14.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtkhtml/3.14/gtkhtml-3.14.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7c028f07e0eb061b0a895ac514265cf1
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 61 MB
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU

GtkHTML Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, GAIL-1.18.0, GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0, and libgnomeprintui-2.18.0

Optional

libsoup-2.2.100 and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gtkhtml

Installation of GtkHTML

Install GtkHTML by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gtkhtml &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gtkhtml: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gtkhtml instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgtkhtml-3.14.{so,a} and libgnome-gtkhtml-editor-3.14.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgtkhtml-3.14, lib/gtkhtml, and share/gtkhtml-3.14

Short Descriptions

libgtkhtml-3.8.{so,a}

provide the functions to render HTML within applications.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 19:31:00 -0500

gtksourceview-1.8.5

Introduction to gtksourceview

The gtksourceview package contains libgtksourceview libraries. This is useful for extending the GTK text functions to include syntax highlighting.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtksourceview/1.8/gtksourceview-1.8.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtksourceview/1.8/gtksourceview-1.8.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: de67df2944c1cccbc2d0b4a738e11050
Download size: 785 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gtksourceview Dependencies

Required

GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1 and libgnomeprintui-2.18.0

Optional (Required to Build the Test Programs)

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.8 and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gtksourceview

Installation of gtksourceview

Install gtksourceview by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite. If you have the optional dependencies to build the test programs installed, after the package is installed you can change to the tests directory in the source tree and issue ./test-widget. This will test the functionality of the libgtksourceview-1.0 library.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgtksourceview-1.0.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gtksourceview-1.0, share/{gtk-doc/html/gtksourceview, gtksourceview-1.0}

Short Descriptions

libgtksourceview-1.0.{so,a}

contains function extensions for the GtkTextView widget.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:54:33 -0500

libgnomecups-0.2.2

Introduction to libgnomecups

The libgnomecups package contains a library used to wrap the CUPS API in a GLib fashion, so CUPS code can be cleanly integrated with GLib code.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomecups/0.2/libgnomecups-0.2.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomecups/0.2/libgnomecups-0.2.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 959d5524fe9c37efb55ccfa02e3a063b
Download size: 314 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libgnomecups Dependencies

Required

CUPS-1.2.12, GLib-2.12.12, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnomecups

Installation of libgnomecups

Note

Install libgnomecups by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgnomecups-1.0.{so,a}

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnomecups-1

Short Descriptions

libgnomecups-1.0.{so,a}

libraries are used to wrap the CUPS API in a GLib type interface.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libgnomeprint-2.18.0

Introduction to libgnomeprint

The libgnomeprint package contains libgnomeprint libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomeprint/2.18/libgnomeprint-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomeprint/2.18/libgnomeprint-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 5bfc42d67cae1148d1faf238185cbf4d
Download size: 830 KB
Estimated disk space required: 26 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

libgnomeprint Dependencies

Required

Pango-1.16.4, libart_lgpl-2.3.19, popt-1.10.4, libxml2-2.6.31, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional

libgnomecups-0.2.2, GTK-Doc-1.8, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

If you have CUPS-1.2.12 installed, you must also have libgnomecups-0.2.2 installed or pass --without-cups to the configure command in the instructions below.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnomeprint

Installation of libgnomeprint

Note

Install libgnomeprint by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

The test suite requires Acroread-4 to be installed and passing --with-metadata-printer to the configure script. If the previous requirements are met and you wish to run the regression tests, change directories to the tests directory and issue: ./run-test.pl.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-gtk-doc: This switch prevents rebuilding the documentation during the make command. Remove this parameter if you have GTK-Doc installed and wish to rebuild the documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgnomeprint-2-2.{so,a} and numerous filters and modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgnomeprint-2.2, lib/libgnomeprint, share/{,gtk-doc/html/}libgnomeprint

Short Descriptions

libgnomeprint-2-2.{so,a}

implements the GNOME Printing Architecture.

Last updated on 2007-10-16 06:56:37 -0500

libgnomeprintui-2.18.0

Introduction to libgnomeprintui

The libgnomeprintui package contains the libgnomeprintui library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomeprintui/2.18/libgnomeprintui-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgnomeprintui/2.18/libgnomeprintui-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: bea9871059cabee9d108bab32d58d2af
Download size: 656 KB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

libgnomeprintui Dependencies

Required

libgnomecanvas-2.14.0, GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0, and libgnomeprint-2.18.0

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgnomeprintui

Installation of libgnomeprintui

Note

Install libgnomeprintui by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this option if you have GTK-Doc installed and wish to build the API documentation, as the source tarball does not contain any pre-built docs.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgnomeprintui-2-2.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libgnomeprintui-2.2 and share/{,gtk-doc/html/}libgnomeprintui

Short Descriptions

libgnomeprintui-2-2.{so,a}

is the GUI portion of the GNOME Printing Architecture implementation.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 09:54:33 -0500

system-tools-backends-1.4.2

Introduction to system-tools-backends

The system-tools-backends are a set of cross-platform scripts for Linux and other Unix systems. The backends provide a standard XML interface for modifying the configuration regardless of the distribution being used.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/system-tools-backends/1.4/system-tools-backends-1.4.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/system-tools-backends/1.4/system-tools-backends-1.4.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a0af1513becdf3b9bfed3535ad8f7dab
Download size: 708 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

system-tools-backends Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/system-tools-backends

Installation of system-tools-backends

Note

Install system-tools-backends by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/setup-tool-backends

Short Descriptions

System tools backend scripts

are configuration files, Perl and shell scripts used to perform setup of various desktop frontend processes and services.

Last updated on 2007-08-25 06:12:47 -0500

Utilities

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

bug-buddy-2.18.1

Introduction to bug-buddy

The bug-buddy package contains a graphical bug reporting tool. This can extract debugging information from a core file or crashed application.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/bug-buddy/2.18/bug-buddy-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/bug-buddy/2.18/bug-buddy-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ebeaeee4acc1432b59a4ef242abff620
Download size: 553 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

bug-buddy Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3, gnome-menus-2.18.3, Evolution Data Server-1.10.3, LibGTop-2.14.9, and ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Optional

NetworkManager (download), and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/bug-buddy

Installation of bug-buddy

Install bug-buddy by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Program: bug-buddy

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}bug-buddy

Short Descriptions

bug-buddy

is a graphical bug reporting system.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 10:05:53 -0500

Ekiga-2.0.9

Introduction to Ekiga

Ekiga is an H.323 and SIP compatible videoconferencing and VOIP/IP-Telephony application that allows you to make audio and video calls to remote users with H.323 hardware or software (such as Microsoft Netmeeting) and SIP compatible software. It supports all modern videoconferencing features, such as registering to an ILS directory, gatekeeper support, making multi-user conference calls using an external MCU, using modern Quicknet telephony cards, and making PC-To-Phone calls.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/ekiga/2.0/ekiga-2.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/ekiga/2.0/ekiga-2.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 6c7a01faef8203d6f0ba0dfe6188bb1a
Download size: 5.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 70 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Ekiga Dependencies

Required

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, EsounD-0.2.37, Evolution Data Server-1.10.3, PWLib-1.10.7 (compiled with OpenLDAP-2.3.39 support), and OPAL-2.2.8 (home page for PWLib and OPAL)

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, SDL-1.2.11 (required for full-screen video), and Avahi

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/ekiga

Installation of Ekiga

Install Ekiga by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Two D-BUS service scripts were installed in the previous step. If the $GNOME_PREFIX is anything other than /usr, as the root user you should add the $GNOME_PREFIX/share/dbus-1/services directory to the local session configuration as described in the D-BUS-1.0.2 configuration section.

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: ekiga, ekiga-config-tool and ekiga-helper

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{gnome/help/, omf/, pixmaps/, sounds/}ekiga

Short Descriptions

ekiga

is a H.323 and SIP VOIP, telephony and video conferencing application which uses the H.323 and SIP protocols.

Last updated on 2008-03-14 18:44:40 -0500

EOG-2.18.2

Introduction to EOG

The EOG package contains Eye of GNOME. This is useful for viewing and cataloging image files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/eog/2.18/eog-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/eog/2.18/eog-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7e5fc342201ea00404008258c19b4461
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 22 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

EOG Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3 and GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, libexif-0.6.16, and little cms-1.16

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/eog

Installation of EOG

Install EOG by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Program: eog

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/ ,pixmaps/}eog

Short Descriptions

eog

is a fast and functional image viewer as well as an image cataloging program.

Last updated on 2007-09-12 06:46:11 -0500

Epiphany-2.18.3

Introduction to Epiphany

Epiphany is a simple yet powerful GNOME web browser targeted at non-technical users. Its principles are simplicity and standards compliance.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/epiphany/2.18/epiphany-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/epiphany/2.18/epiphany-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2e77f3f0651a27cac29224e82c3cc793
Download size: 4.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 91 MB
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU

Epiphany Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3, startup-notification-0.9, ISO Codes-1.2, and a mozilla.org Gecko layout engine (SeaMonkey-1.1.9 or Firefox-2.0.0.15 or Thunderbird-2.0.0.12 or Mozilla)

Optional for Python Support

PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk module) and Gnome-Python-2.18.2

Optional

Enchant, intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/epiphany

Installation of Epiphany

Install Epiphany by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

A D-BUS service script was installed in the previous step. If the $GNOME_PREFIX is anything other than /usr, as the root user you should add the $GNOME_PREFIX/share/dbus-1/services directory to the local session configuration as described in the D-BUS-1.0.2 configuration section.

If you have GNOME-Python installed, the Epiphany Python extension is automatically built. If your $GNOME_PREFIX is anything but /usr and you have GNOME-Python installed, as the root user create the following symbolic link in the PyGTK extensions directory of /usr/share:

ln -v -s $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pygtk/2.0/defs/epiphany.defs \
    /usr/share/pygtk/2.0/defs

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Program: epiphany

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/epiphany-2.14, lib/epiphany, share/{,gnome/help/, gtk-doc/html/, omf/}epiphany

Short Descriptions

epiphany

is a GNOME web browser based on the Mozilla rendering engine.

Last updated on 2008-03-14 10:09:03 -0500

Evince-0.8.3

Introduction to Evince

The Evince package contains a document viewer for multiple document formats. It currently supports PDF, Postscript, DjVu, TIFF and DVI. This is useful for viewing documents of various types using one simple application instead of the multiple document viewers that once existed on the GNOME Desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evince/0.8/evince-0.8.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evince/0.8/evince-0.8.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0603d3f3f5648c88f10f75c89807c3d1
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 44 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

Evince Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0, and GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3

Run-Time Requirement

shared-mime-info-0.21

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GTK-Doc-1.8, libgnomeprintui-2.18.0 (only used as an alternate method for printing), LibTIFF-3.8.2, teTeX-3.0 (required to build the DVI viewer), Nautilus-2.18.3 (required to build the Nautilus plugin), Poppler-0.5.4 (required for PDF support and must be built with GTK+ support), ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.53 (required for Postscript ability from Evince), DjVuLibre (required for DjVu graphics from Evince), and t1lib (required for Type1 font support in the DVI viewer)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/evince

Installation of Evince

Install Evince by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
              --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man \
            --disable-ps \
            --enable-pixbuf &&
make

The test suite for this package requires a functional dogtail installation. Requirements and download information can be found at http://people.redhat.com/zcerza/dogtail/. The test suite is invoked by issuing make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--disable-ps: This parameter is required if you don't have a Ghostscript package installed. Remove the parameter if you do have a Ghostscript package installed and wish to build the DVI viewer which provides Postscript support.

--enable-djvu: Use this parameter if you have the DjVuLibre package installed and you wish to build support to view DjVu graphic files.

--enable-dvi: Use this parameter if you have the teTeX package installed and you wish to build support to view DVI files.

--enable-t1lib: Use this parameter if you have the t1lib package installed and you wish to build support for Type1 fonts in the DVI viewer.

Installed Programs: evince and evince-thumbnailer

Installed Library: libevince-properties-page.{so,a} Nautilus extension

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}evince

Short Descriptions

evince	is a multiple format document viewer.
evince-thumbnailer	is a simple program used to create thumbnail images of supported documents.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

File Roller-2.18.4

Introduction to File Roller

File Roller is an archive manager for GNOME with support for tar, bzip2, gzip, zip, jar, compress, lzop and many other archive formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/file-roller/2.18/file-roller-2.18.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/file-roller/2.18/file-roller-2.18.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f651f951d5c1c24288c1a25b1f567be0
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

File Roller Dependencies

Required

Optional

intltool-0.35.5 and Nautilus-2.18.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/file-roller

Installation of File Roller

Install File Roller by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --disable-nautilus-actions &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-nautilus-actions: This parameter is required if Nautilus is not installed. Remove the parameter if Nautilus is installed.

Installed Program: file-roller

Installed Libraries: A Nautilus extension

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/file-roller, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}file-roller

Short Descriptions

file-roller

is an archiver for GNOME.

Last updated on 2008-03-13 19:38:41 -0500

gcalctool-5.9.14

Introduction to gcalctool

gcalctool is a powerful graphical calculator with financial, logical and scientific modes. It uses a multiple precision package to do its arithmetic to give a high degree of accuracy.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gcalctool/5.9/gcalctool-5.9.14.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gcalctool/5.9/gcalctool-5.9.14.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dd51bc2fa9e53a3b6d7b3264e1059296
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 20 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gcalctool Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gcalctool

Installation of gcalctool

Install gcalctool by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Programs: gcalctool and gnome-calculator

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{gnome/help/, omf/}gcalctool

Short Descriptions

gcalctool	is a desktop calculator for GNOME.
gnome-calculator	is a symlink to the gcalctool program.

Last updated on 2008-03-13 19:38:41 -0500

GConf Editor-2.18.0

Introduction to GConf Editor

The GConf Editor package contains a GUI editor for the GConf configuration database.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gconf-editor/2.18/gconf-editor-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gconf-editor/2.18/gconf-editor-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: cbaefa1ff8a548a3d381c67aed426fb7
Download size: 694 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

GConf Editor Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gconf-editor

Installation of GConf Editor

Install GConf Editor by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Program: gconf-editor

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{gnome/help, omf, pixmaps}/gconf-editor

Short Descriptions

gconf-editor

allows direct modification of the GConf configuration database.

Last updated on 2007-08-11 16:21:32 -0500

GDM-2.18.3

Introduction to GDM

The GDM package contains GNOME's Display Manager daemon. This is useful for allowing configurable graphical logins.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gdm/2.18/gdm-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gdm/2.18/gdm-2.18.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 08555fce34d247062625c1a451a4d5a6
Download size: 3.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 64 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

GDM Dependencies

Required

libgnomecanvas-2.14.0, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, and librsvg-2.16.1

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, Zenity-2.18.2, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, TCP Wrapper-7.6, ConsoleKit, and OpenAFS

If you configure GDM to offer secure connections to remote machines, you will need to have Zenity-2.18.2, OpenSSH-4.7p1 and which-2.19 installed.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gdm

Installation of GDM

It is recommended to have a dedicated user and group to take control of the gdm-binary daemon after it is started. Issue the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 21 gdm &&
useradd -c "GDM Daemon Owner" -d /dev/null \
        -g gdm -s /bin/bash -u 21 gdm

Install GDM by running the following commands as an unprivileged user:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gdm \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man \
            --with-pam-prefix=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This command puts files in /var/lib instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var. This also has the downside affect of using /var/lib/log/gdm as the log directory. See the “Configuration Information” section below for instructions on relocating the log file directory.

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gdm: This parameter is used so that the GDM internal support programs are installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gdm instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--with-pam-prefix=/etc: This command puts PAM configuration files in /etc/pam.d instead of /etc/gnome/2.18.3.

Configuring GDM

Config Files

/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gdm/defaults.conf

Configuration Information

Starting with the 2.14.x version of GNOME, the default configuration parameters are stored in a static file ($GNOME_PREFIX/share/gdm/defaults.conf). This file is not intended to be edited. If modification of the configuration is necessary, you should add parameters to the /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf file. The settings in this file will override the settings in the static file. The same parameters in the static file are used in the configuration file.

Change the directory containing the GDM log files to the /var/log hierarchy by creating a directory and modifying the /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf configuration file. Issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /var/log/gdm &&
sed -i.orig "/\[daemon\]/ a LogDir=/var/log/gdm" \
    /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf &&
rmdir -v /var/lib/log/gdm &&
rmdir -v /var/lib/log

The GDM PAM configuration files contain modules not present in a BLFS installation. If you have PAM installed, issue the following commands as the root user to replace those files with files containing correctly specified modules:

cat > /etc/pam.d/gdm << "EOF"
auth        required    pam_unix.so
auth        requisite   pam_nologin.so
account     required    pam_unix.so
password    required    pam_unix.so
session     required    pam_unix.so

EOF
cat > /etc/pam.d/gdm-autologin << "EOF"
auth        required    pam_env.so
auth        requisite   pam_nologin.so
auth        required    pam_permit.so
account     required    pam_unix.so
password    required    pam_unix.so
session     required    pam_unix.so

EOF

If you have D-BUS installed and you want to start the session D-BUS daemon when you start the GNOME desktop environment using gdm, you'll need to create a new Xsession file. Create the file using the following command as the root user.

cat > $GNOME_PREFIX/share/xsessions/gnome-dbus.desktop << "EOF"
[Desktop Entry]
Encoding=UTF-8
Name=GNOME with D-BUS
Comment=GNOME Desktop with D-BUS support
Exec=dbus-launch --exit-with-session gnome-session
TryExec=/usr/bin/dbus-launch
Icon=
Type=Application

EOF
chmod -v 644 $GNOME_PREFIX/share/xsessions/gnome-dbus.desktop

Choose this session using the session selection dialog on the display manager login screen. You also have the opportunity to make this your default session.

Note

You may use the .desktop file created above as an example to create additional .desktop files and add any other desired items to the GDM display manager session selection menu.

gdm can be tested by executing it as the root user. Use the gdm-stop command if you wish to stop the display manager.

Boot Script

To start a graphical login when the system is booted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/gdm init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package. If your GNOME_PREFIX environment variable is anything other than /usr or /opt/gnome-2.18.3, you will need to modify the PATH statement in the script to include the path where you have GNOME installed.

make install-gdm

Now edit /etc/inittab so that the line containing:

id:3:initdefault:

is changed to:

id:5:initdefault:

Installed Programs: gdm, gdm-binary, gdm-dmx-reconnect-proxy, gdm-restart, gdm-safe-restart, gdm-stop, gdmXnest, gdmXnestchooser, gdmdynamic, gdmflexiserver, gdmphotosetup, gdmsetup, and gdmthemetester

Installed Libraries: lib*mouselistener.{so,a} GTK+ modules

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/2.18.3/{,g}dm, /var/lib/gdm, /var/log/gdm and the following directories in $GNOME_PREFIX/: share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}gdm

Short Descriptions

gdm	is a wrapper script to execute the GDM binary, the configurable GNOME based login prompt.
gdm-restart	sends the HUP signal to the GDM daemon so that it restarts. It's used after the config file is edited
gdm-safe-restart	sends the USR1 signal to the GDM daemon so that it restarts. It's used after the config file is edited.
gdmsetup	is a graphical interface to edit the `gdm.conf` file.

Last updated on 2007-07-26 13:58:49 -0500

gedit-2.18.2

Introduction to gedit

The gedit package contains a lightweight UTF-8 text editor for the GNOME desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gedit/2.18/gedit-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gedit/2.18/gedit-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7e8bf29bd6bf0d17ceaf42d9bd5d94e6
Download size: 3.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 80 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU (includes spell-check support and Python plugins)

gedit Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, libgnomeprintui-2.18.0, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, gtksourceview-1.8.5, and which-2.19

Optional (to Provide Spell-Checking Capability)

ISO Codes-1.2 and Enchant*

Optional (to Provide Python Bindings and Plugins)

PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk, pango and gtk.libglade modules) and Gnome-Python-Desktop-2.18.0 (including the gtksourceview module)

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GTK-Doc-1.8, libattr

* Aspell-0.60.5 is just one of many backend spell libraries Enchant can use. See the Enchant project page (URL above) for additional information about the available backends.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gedit

Installation of gedit

Install gedit by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --disable-spell &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-spell: This parameter disables spell-checking capability and is required if Enchant is not installed. Remove the parameter if Enchant is installed.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: gedit and gnome-text-editor

Installed Libraries: gedit plugin modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gedit-2.16, lib/gedit-2, share/{gedit-2, {gnome/help, omf}/gedit}

Short Descriptions

gedit	is a lightweight text editor integrated with the GNOME desktop.
gnome-text-editor	is a symlink to gedit.

Last updated on 2007-08-12 11:35:36 -0500

GNOME Games-2.18.2.1

Introduction to GNOME Games

The GNOME Games package contains games. Starting with GNOME-2.8, the background graphics, artwork and themes for the games are supplied in a separate package. You can download the GNOME Games Extra Data package from http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-games-extra-data/2.18/.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-games/2.18/gnome-games-2.18.2.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-games/2.18/gnome-games-2.18.2.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c3434a724cd72a536ba48d9187f10697
Download size: 7.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 118 MB
Estimated build time: 1.8 SBU

GNOME Games Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, Gnome-Python-Desktop-2.18.0, and librsvg-2.16.1

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, EsounD-0.2.37, Guile-1.8.2 (to build the AisleRiot solitaire games), and GGZ (to enable network gaming; see the GNOME Games README file for the specific GGZ packages you will need)

See the glchess/README file for additional optional dependencies for the chess game.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-games

Installation of GNOME Games

Some of the GNOME Games game binaries need to be setgid to track high scores. Create a separate user and group for games. See the README file in the source directory for more information:

install -v -m755 -d /var/lib/games &&
groupadd -g 60 games &&
useradd -c 'Games High Score Owner' -d /var/lib/games \
        -g games -s /bin/false -u 60 games &&
chown -v games:games /var/lib/games

Install GNOME Games by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

To test the results, issue make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This parameter is used so that all ScrollKeeper files are installed in, and the ScrollKeeper database is properly updated in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper and also causes the game programs to use /var/lib/games as the directory holding the high score files.

--disable-setgid: This will prevent the setgid bit on the executables from being set. It provides system administrators with the option to disable setgid binaries, though it also means that the functionality to save high game scores will be disabled.

Installed Programs: blackjack, glchess, glines, gnect, gnectd, gnibbles, gnibblesd, gnobots2, gnome-gnuchess, gnome-sudoku, gnometris, gnomine, gnotravex, gnotski, gtali, iagno, iagnod, mahjongg, same-gnome, and sol

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: share/{{many game names}, {,omf/}gnome-games, {,help,pixmaps,sound}/{game names}, /var/lib/games

Short Descriptions

See the README file in the source tree for a description of each game.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

GNOME Keyring Manager-2.18.0

Introduction to GNOME Keyring Manager

The GNOME Keyring Manager package contains a keyring management program for the GNOME Desktop. This is useful for maintenance of a keyring database using a graphical user interface.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-keyring-manager/2.18/gnome-keyring-manager-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-keyring-manager/2.18/gnome-keyring-manager-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 05183cdea9d933cb1e9a8f4202c6ffc0
Download size: 455 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Keyring Manager Dependencies

Required

Optional

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-keyring-manager

Installation of GNOME Keyring Manager

Install GNOME Keyring Manager by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Program: gnome-keyring-manager

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}gnome-keyring-manager

Short Descriptions

gnome-keyring-manager

is a graphical key management tool for GNOME. It allows the user to create, delete, and otherwise manipulate keys and keyrings which can be used to store passwords.

Last updated on 2008-03-13 19:38:41 -0500

GNOME Media-2.18.0

Introduction to GNOME Media

The GNOME Media package contains GNOME's media applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-media/2.18/gnome-media-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-media/2.18/gnome-media-2.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a472d8c7733b119376bc6127ee55a82d
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 44 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

GNOME Media Dependencies

Required

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, EsounD-0.2.37, and libgnomeui-2.18.1

Optional

GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13 (required to build the sound mixer), GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6 (required to build the sound recorder), Nautilus CD Burner-2.18.2 (required to build the CD player), an MTA (that provides a sendmail command), intltool-0.35.5, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-media

Installation of GNOME Media

Install GNOME Media by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-media &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-media: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-media instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Programs: CDDBSlave2, cddb-slave2-properties, cddb-track-editor, gnome-audio-profiles-properties, gnome-cd, gnome-sound-recorder, gnome-volume-control, gstreamer-properties and vumeter

Installed Libraries: libcddb-slave2.{so,a}, libgnome-media-profiles.{so,a} and a libgnome-media-profiles.{so,a} Glade library

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/{cddb-slave2,gnome-media}, lib/gnome-media, share/{gnome-{media,sound-recorder}, gnome/help/{gnome-{cd, sound-recorder, volume-control}, grecord, gstreamer-properties}, gstreamer-properties, omf/gnome-media, pixmaps/gnome-{cd, media}}

Short Descriptions

gnome-cd	is GNOME's CD Player.
gnome-sound-recorder	is GNOME's recorder.
gnome-volume-control	is GNOME's mixer with volume applet.
gstreamer-properties	is a GUI front-end to GStreamer's audio/video input/output parameters.
vumeter	is a visual volume meter.

Last updated on 2007-10-16 06:56:37 -0500

gnome-mount-0.6

Introduction to gnome-mount

The gnome-mount package contains programs for mounting, unmounting and ejecting storage devices. The goal for gnome-mount is to get the appropriate GNOME software (such as gnome-volume-manager and GNOME-VFS) to use this instead of invoking mount/umount/eject or direct HAL invoking methods.

All the gnome-mount programs utilize the methods on HAL and as such run unprivileged. The rationale for gnome-mount is to have a centralized place (in GConf) where settings (e.g., mount options and mount locations) are maintained.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://people.freedesktop.org/~david/dist/gnome-mount-0.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: d2612aecfa73806e072316033d78b203
Download size: 466 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

gnome-mount Dependencies

Required

gnome-keyring-0.8.1 and HAL-0.5.9.1

Optional

Nautilus-2.18.3, libnotify, and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-mount

Installation of gnome-mount

Install gnome-mount by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: gnome-eject, gnome-mount and gnome-umount

Installed Libraries: libgnome-mount.{so,a} Nautilus extention

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-mount

Short Descriptions

gnome-mount	is used to automatically mount storage media and other removable media.
gnome-umount	is a symbolic link to gnome-mount used to automatically unmount storage media and other removable media.
gnome-eject	is a symbolic link to gnome-mount used to automatically open and close (if supported by the drive) the drive door and tray in CD/DVD drives.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 10:05:53 -0500

GNOME Netstatus-2.12.1

Introduction to GNOME Netstatus

The GNOME Netstatus package contains a panel applet that monitors network interfaces. It provides indicators for incoming and outgoing data, packets received and transmitted, and information about the network interface such as IP information and Ethernet address.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-netstatus/2.12/gnome-netstatus-2.12.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-netstatus/2.12/gnome-netstatus-2.12.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8651ca1694a6c222ae5cad6e21814d24
Download size: 500 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Netstatus Dependencies

Required

GNOME Panel-2.18.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-netstatus

Installation of GNOME Netstatus

Install GNOME Netstatus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-netstatus &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-netstatus: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of in $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-netstatus instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Applet: gnome-netstatus-applet

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}gnome-netstatus

Short Descriptions

gnome-netstatus-applet

displays information about a network interface on your panel.

Last updated on 2008-03-13 19:38:41 -0500

gnome-screensaver-2.18.2

Introduction to gnome-screensaver

The gnome-screensaver package contains a screen saver and locker designed to have simple, sane, secure defaults and be well integrated with the desktop. It supports locking down of configuration settings, has translations into many languages and convenient user switching.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-screensaver/2.18/gnome-screensaver-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-screensaver/2.18/gnome-screensaver-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b5931e1f39c62acee0df1fcf016ddc39
Download size: 2.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

gnome-screensaver Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1 and gnome-menus-2.18.3

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, libexif-0.6.16, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, libgnomekbd-2.18.2, XScreenSaver-5.03 (and libxslt-1.1.22), GDM-2.18.3, and xmlto

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-screensaver

Installation of gnome-screensaver

Note

Optional Features

1. If you have XScreenSaver installed and wish to import any or all of the “hacks” into gnome-screensaver themes, set the following environment variable (modify it if XScreenSaver is installed in a non-standard location):

XSAVERDIR=/usr/share/xscreensaver/config

Also add the following parameter to the configure script below:

            --with-xscreensaverdir=$XSAVERDIR

2. If you have GDM installed and wish to provide user-switching from the gnome-screensaver unlock-screen dialog box, add the following parameter to the configure script below:

            --with-gdm-config=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf

Install gnome-screensaver by running the following commands:

sed -i 's|etc/pam\.d"|etc"|' data/Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-screensaver \
            --with-pam-prefix=/etc &&
make

If you have XScreenSaver installed and wish to import any or all of the “hacks” into gnome-screensaver themes, you'll need to identify which “hacks” you wish to import. The commands below will import all of them. If you want to import less than all of them, modify the setting of the XSAVERLIST environment variable below (listing the desired hacks by filename without the extension, space delimited) and issue the following commands:

mkdir xscreensavers &&
cd xscreensavers &&

XSAVERLIST="*" &&

for SAVERLIST in $(ls ${XSAVERDIR}/${XSAVERLIST}.xml); do
    ../data/migrate-xscreensaver-config.sh $SAVERLIST
done &&

unset XSAVERDIR
unset XSAVERLIST
unset SAVERLIST

cd ..

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

GNOMEDOCDIR="$(pkg-config \
    --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/gnome-screensaver-2.18.2" &&

install -v -m644 -D doc/gnome-screensaver.html \
                    ${GNOMEDOCDIR}/gnome-screensaver.html &&
unset GNOMEDOCDIR

If you identified some, or all, XScreenSaver hacks to be imported into gnome-screensaver, install them by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
        ORBit-2.0)/share/gnome-screensaver/themes/xscreensaver &&
install -v -m644 xscreensavers/*.desktop \
        $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
            ORBit-2.0)/share/gnome-screensaver/themes/xscreensaver

Command Explanations

sed -i 's|etc/pam\.d"|etc|' data/Makefile.in: This command is used so that an erroneous message to copy the PAM configuration file is not displayed.

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-screensaver: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-screensaver instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--with-pam-prefix=/etc: This parameter is used so that the Linux-PAM configuration file for the gnome-screensaver application is installed in the correct location. You may omit this parameter if you don't have Linux-PAM installed, though it won't affect the build if you don't.

Configuring gnome-screensaver

Config Files

/etc/pam.d/gnome-screensaver, /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf

Configuration Information

General Configuration

Most of the gnome-screensaver configuration parameters can be modified using the Screensaver menu item from the Desktop—Preferences drop-down menu. Some of the fine-tuning parameters are only available using GConf Editor-2.18.0.

Linux-PAM Configuration

If you have Linux-PAM installed, the just-installed gnome-screensaver configuration file does not work with a BLFS system. Replace the existing file with one that can be used on a BLFS system by issuing the following command as the root user:

cat > /etc/pam.d/gnome-screensaver << "EOF"
# File: /etc/pam.d/gnome-screensaver

auth         required      pam_unix.so
account      required      pam_unix.so
session      required      pam_unix.so
password     required      pam_unix.so

EOF
chmod -v 644 /etc/pam.d/gnome-screensaver

User-Switching Configuration

If you have GDM installed and you passed the --with-gdm-config= option to the configure script, the screen-unlocking dialog box will contain an option to “Switch Users”. This user switching option uses the same configuration as GDM to determine what users are displayed in this dialog. You can use the GDM configuration option from the GDM login screen, or you can directly edit the /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gdm/custom.conf file to modify the settings.

Installed Programs: gnome-screensaver, gnome-screensaver-command and gnome-screensaver-preferences

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{doc/gnome-screensaver-2.18.2, gnome-screensaver, pixmaps/backgrounds/cosmos}

Short Descriptions

gnome-screensaver

is a screensaver and screen-locking program designed to work seamlessly with the GNOME desktop.

Last updated on 2007-07-27 13:49:21 -0500

GNOME System Monitor-2.18.2

Introduction to GNOME System Monitor

The GNOME System Monitor package contains gnome-system-monitor, GNOME's replacement for gtop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-system-monitor/2.18/gnome-system-monitor-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-system-monitor/2.18/gnome-system-monitor-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 860047e636522af2c068dddb5df883bd
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 23 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME System Monitor Dependencies

Required

GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1, GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, libwnck-2.18.3, and LibGTop-2.14.9

Optional

Recommended (by the package developer) Run-time Component

libgksu2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-system-monitor

Installation of GNOME System Monitor

Install GNOME System Monitor by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Program: gnome-system-monitor

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{gnome/help, omf}/gnome-system-monitor

Short Descriptions

gnome-system-monitor

displays the process tree and hardware meters.

Last updated on 2008-03-13 19:38:41 -0500

GNOME Utilities-2.18.1

Introduction to GNOME Utilities

The GNOME Utilities package contains a collection of small applications designed to make your life a little easier.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-utils/2.18/gnome-utils-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-utils/2.18/gnome-utils-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 10e8bd928d099a0d1f70919c8b7b7784
Download size: 4.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 55 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

GNOME Utilities Dependencies

Required

GNOME Panel-2.18.3, libgnomeprintui-2.18.0, and LibGTop-2.14.9

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 (only if consolehelper is also installed), and HAL-0.5.9.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-utils

Installation of GNOME Utilities

Install GNOME Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/gnome-utils \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

--with-pam-prefix=/etc/pam.d: This parameter causes the PAM files to be installed in the correct location of /etc/pam.d instead of /etc/gnome/2.18.3.

Installed Programs: gfloppy, gnome-dictionary, gnome-panel-screenshot, gnome-screenshot, gnome-search-tool, and gnome-system-log

Installed Libraries: libgdict-1.0.{so,a}

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gdict-1.0, lib/gnome-utils, share/{gnome-{screenshot, system-log, utils}, gnome/help/{gfloppy, gnome-dictionary, gnome-search-tool, gnome-system-log} omf/gnome-utils, pixmaps/gsearchtool}

Short Descriptions

gfloppy	formats floppy disks under Linux.
gnome-dictionary	allows you to look up definitions and spelling of words.
gnome-screenshot	is used to capture the contents of the current desktop as a graphics formatted file.
gnome-search-tool	allows you to search for files on your system using simple and advanced search options.
gnome-system-log	allows you to monitor and view system log files.

Last updated on 2007-07-26 13:58:49 -0500

gnome-volume-manager-2.17.0

Introduction to gnome-volume-manager

The gnome-volume-manager package contains a volume manager for GNOME. It is a desktop-level daemon that enforces volume-related policy in response to events received from HAL. This is useful for automatic mounting of floppy diskettes, CDROMs and removable storage devices. It can also be used to automatically run a program in response to other hotplug events such as plugging in USB printers or cameras, or inserting DVDs and music CDs. The goal of gnome-volume-manager is to implement all functionality as a state-machine in response to asynchronous events from HAL. It is one component in a larger plan to fully integrate all levels of the Linux system, from the kernel on up through the desktop and its applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-volume-manager/2.17/gnome-volume-manager-2.17.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-volume-manager/2.17/gnome-volume-manager-2.17.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 104cec26e721e0bba69debd392367195
Download size: 341 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

gnome-volume-manager Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1 and HAL-0.5.9.1

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, Nautilus-2.18.3, and libnotify

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-volume-manager

Installation of gnome-volume-manager

Install gnome-volume-manager by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --disable-multiuser &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-multiuser: Without this parameter, gnome-volume-manager will only allow the user who is at the active console to manage volumes. This is determined through the Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0 module pam_console. If your system is configured to use pam_console, you can drop this parameter.

Configuring gnome-volume-manager

Configuration Information

Proper operation of this package is dependant upon the hald daemon running on the system. Ensure the hald daemon is running before attempting to start or configure gnome-volume-manager. Configuration is accomplished using the “Removable Drives and Media” graphical interface found on the “Desktop”—“Preferences” drop-down menu. You can also run the gnome-volume-properties command from the command line to bring up the configuration interface.

Note that the gnome-volume-manager daemon program should be started when your GNOME desktop environment is started. This should be automatically configured during the installation of gnome-volume-manager.

The “Disk Mounter” applet can be installed in the control panel for visual display status of removable media. Installing this applet in the panel is accomplished using conventional methods.

Installed Programs: gnome-volume-manager and gnome-volume-properties

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-volume-manager

Short Descriptions

gnome-volume-manager	is the manager daemon, designed to be run at the desktop level. It is a simple policy engine that implements a state machine in response to events from HAL. Responding to these events, it implements automount, autorun, autoplay, automatic photo management, and so on.
gnome-volume-properties	is a control panel applet for gnome-volume-manager. It is also provides a graphical configuration interface.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 17:49:11 -0500

gucharmap-1.10.0

Introduction to gucharmap

gucharmap is a Unicode character map and font viewer. It allows you to browse through all the available Unicode characters and categories for the installed fonts, and to examine their detailed properties. It is an easy way to find the character you might only know by its Unicode name or code point.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gucharmap/1.10/gucharmap-1.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gucharmap/1.10/gucharmap-1.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a0e01bcff2bc5e35ec88f60a383051d3
Download size: 2.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 30 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gucharmap Dependencies

Required

Optional

GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3 (to build the user manual), libgnomeui-2.18.1, and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gucharmap

Installation of gucharmap

Note

Install gucharmap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: charmap, gnome-character-map, and gucharmap

Installed Library: libgucharmap.so

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gucharmap and share/{gnome/help/,omf/}/gucharmap

Short Descriptions

gucharmap

is a Unicode character map and font viewer.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 10:05:53 -0500

Nautilus CD Burner-2.18.2

Introduction to Nautilus CD Burner

The Nautilus CD Burner package provides an easy method to write files to a CD or DVD burner with GNOME; by drag-and-dropping files using the GNOME file manager, Nautilus.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/nautilus-cd-burner/2.18/nautilus-cd-burner-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/nautilus-cd-burner/2.18/nautilus-cd-burner-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fee9ec2f398a6b1eacfd59e239d06837
Download size: 740 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Nautilus CD Burner Dependencies

Required

Nautilus-2.18.3 and HAL-0.5.9.1

Optional

gnome-mount-0.6 and intltool-0.35.5

Though Nautilus CD Burner happily passes all the configure script checks and then builds successfully without them, the Cdrtools-2.01 and dvd+rw-tools-7.0 packages are required to be installed or you won't be able to create ISO filesystems or burn CDs and DVDs.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/NautilusCdBurner

Installation of Nautilus CD Burner

Install Nautilus CD Burner by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/nautilus-cd-burner &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/lib/nautilus-cd-burner: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/nautilus-cd-burner instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Programs: nautilus-cd-burner

Installed Libraries: libnautilus-burn.so and gnome-vfs and nautilus modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/libnautilus-burn, lib/nautilus-cd-burner and share/nautilus-cd-burner

Short Descriptions

nautilus-cd-burner

is an extension to Nautilus that lets you burn CDs easily.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 10:05:53 -0500

Sound Juicer-2.16.4

Introduction to Sound Juicer

The Sound Juicer package contains the sound-juicer program, a simple and clean CD ripping tool. This is useful for extracting the audio tracks from audio compact discs and converting them into audio files. It can also play the audio tracks directly from the CD, allowing you to preview the CD before ripping it. Sound Juicer is designed to be easy to use, and to work with little user intervention. When you start sound-juicer it will examine the CD in the drive and try to locate information about the audio tracks using the MusicBrainz service.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/sound-juicer/2.16/sound-juicer-2.16.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/sound-juicer/2.16/sound-juicer-2.16.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: bcf1f77027b1d1d4c1667b20c6448122
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Sound Juicer Dependencies

Required

Nautilus CD Burner-2.18.2, GNOME Media-2.18.0, GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13 (for the cdparanoiasrc, gnomevfssink and vorbisenc plugins), and libmusicbrainz-2.1.5

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6 (for the flacenc and wavenc plugins), libcdio (which can use CDParanoia-III-9.8, libcddb, and VCDImager), and TagLib

Optional (Run-Time Only to Encode in MP3 Format)

GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins-0.10.6 (for the lame plugin)

Note

At a minimum you should have the following plugins configured into the GStreamer installation: cdparanoiasrc and gnomevfssink. If either of these plugins are not configured into the GStreamer setup, Sound Juicer will fail at run-time. Additionally, if you need to encode in Ogg Vorbis, FLAC, Wave or MP3 formats, you should ensure the vorbisenc, flacenc, wavenc and lame plugins are configured into GStreamer. You can easily determine if you have the necessary plugins configured by using the gst-inspect program. Here is an example:

gst-inspect | grep cdparanoiasrc

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/sound-juicer

Installation of Sound Juicer

Install Sound_Juicer by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Configuring Sound Juicer

Configuration Information

Configuration is accomplished by using the “Preferences” drop-down menu option. For information on how to configure sound-juicer to use LAME as the default encoding method (creating MP3 files as the default) see the Sound Juicer Help section.

Installed Program: sound-juicer

Installed Libraries: none

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}sound-juicer

Short Descriptions

sound-juicer

is a graphical CD extraction (ripping) tool based on GNOME-2 and GStreamer.

Last updated on 2007-09-12 06:22:54 -0500

Totem-2.18.2

Introduction to Totem

The Totem package contains the official movie player of the GNOME desktop environment based on GStreamer or Xine Libraries. It features a playlist, a full-screen mode, seek and volume controls, as well as keyboard navigation. This is useful for playing any GStreamer or Xine Libraries supported file, DVD, VCD or digital CD.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/totem/2.18/totem-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/totem/2.18/totem-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a77ca6f0c56b2fc6ececd8158bb0cdca
Download size: 2.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 48 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

Totem Dependencies

Required

GNOME Icon Theme-2.18.0, GNOME Desktop-2.18.3, ISO Codes-1.2, and GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6 (default back-end) or xine Libraries-1.1.12 (secondary back-end)

If you anticipate using Totem to play DVDs, you should use the Xine Libraries backend by passing --enable-xine to the configure script as the the GStreamer backend does not work properly. If you elect to use the default GStreamer backend anyway, ensure you built GStreamer Good Plugins with GConf support or the configure script will fail.

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, Nautilus-2.18.3, HAL-0.5.9.1, SeaMonkey-1.1.9 or Firefox-2.0.0.15 (to build the browser plug-in), libirman, LIRC, Gromit (required for the telestrator mode), and NvTv Simple

Note: libdvdcss-1.2.9 is a run-time requirement if you wish to play encrypted DVDs

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/totem

Installation of Totem

Install Totem by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/totem \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/totem: This parameter is used so that the movie player browser plugin is installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/totem instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Configuring Totem

Configuration Information

There are no configuration files that need to be directly edited. Configuration is accomplished by setting the desired values in the various menu options accessed via the totem graphical interface.

Installed Programs: totem, totem-video-thumbnailer and optionally, vanity

Installed Libraries: libtotem-plparser.{so,a}, a Nautilus extension plugin and optionally, a Mozilla video plugin

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/totem, lib/totem, share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}totem

Short Descriptions

totem	is a GNOME-desktop movie player.
totem-video-thumbnailer	is a video thumbnailer for the GNOME desktop used internally by GNOME applications such as Nautilus to generate PNG thumbnails of video files. While it is possible to invoke it manually, it is usually done automatically by Nautilus.

Last updated on 2007-09-11 08:13:41 -0500

Zenity-2.18.2

Introduction to Zenity

Zenity is a rewrite of gdialog, the GNOME port of dialog which allows you to display GTK+ dialog boxes from the command line and shell scripts.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/zenity/2.18/zenity-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/zenity/2.18/zenity-2.18.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 6eb60cebdfddd7f9ad302d0b5477382e
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 11 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Zenity Dependencies

Required

libgnomecanvas-2.14.0 and GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3

Optional

libnotify and intltool-0.35.5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/zenity

Installation of Zenity

Install Zenity by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --mandir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--mandir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/man: This parameter causes the man.(X) files to be installed in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/man/man(X) instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man(X).

Installed Programs: gdialog and zenity

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/{,gnome/help/ ,omf/}zenity

Short Descriptions

gdialog	is a Perl wrapper script which can be used with legacy scripts.
zenity	is a program that will display GTK+ dialogs, and return the user's input.

Last updated on 2007-07-26 13:58:49 -0500

Accessibility

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

AT SPI-1.18.1

Introduction to AT SPI

The AT SPI package contains the Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface. This is useful for redirecting UI events to accessible applications and adaptive/assistive technologies.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/at-spi/1.18/at-spi-1.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/at-spi/1.18/at-spi-1.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 46c531204df5d39f7e83822372b0ce69
Download size: 780 KB
Estimated disk space required: 22 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

AT SPI Dependencies

Required

GAIL-1.18.0 and libbonobo-2.18.0

Optional

intltool-0.35.5 and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/at-spi

Installation of AT SPI

Install AT SPI by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
            --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/at-spi &&
make

This package does not come with a functional test suite. Review the README file for additional information about testing the package.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/at-spi: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/at-spi instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libspi.{so,a}, libcspi.{so,a}, libloginhelper.{so,a}, the libatk-bridge.so GTK+ module, and ORBit-2.0 Accessibility modules

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/at-spi-1.0, lib/at-spi, share/{gtk-doc/html/at-spi-cspi, idl/at-spi-1.0}

Short Descriptions

at-spi-registryd

is the registry daemon that allows communication between the UI and assistance devices.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 11:49:50 -0500

GNOME Magnifier-0.14.6

Introduction to GNOME Magnifier

The GNOME Magnifier includes a screen magnifier, which allows you to zoom in on portions of the desktop. It is expressly designed for users with low vision who wish to use the GNOME desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-mag/0.14/gnome-mag-0.14.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-mag/0.14/gnome-mag-0.14.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c5eafb3c492d2b84c37b9a12e3b7a19e
Download size: 468 KB
Estimated disk space required: 20 MB (includes building reference docs)
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Magnifier Dependencies

Required

AT SPI-1.18.1

Optional (to Build the Colorblind Applet)

GNOME Desktop-2.18.3, colorblind, PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk and gtk.libglade modules), PyORBit-2.14.3, Gnome-Python-2.18.2 (including the gnome.ui module), and Gnome-Python-Desktop-2.18.0 (including the gnomeapplet module)

Optional

intltool-0.35.5 and Doxygen-1.5.2

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-mag

Installation of GNOME Magnifier

If Doxygen-1.5.2 is installed, the reference documentation is automatically generated. Install GNOME Magnifier by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

For full functionality of this package, you should install the libgail-gnome-1.18.0 package.

Command Explanations

Installed Program: magnifier

Installed Library: libgnome-mag.so

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-mag-1.0, lib/colorblind-applet, lib/python2.5/site-packages/colorblind, share/{colorblind,doc/gnome-mag-0.14.6,gnome-mag,idl/gnome-mag-1.0}

Short Descriptions

magnifier

is a screen zooming utility.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

GNOME Speech-0.4.16

Introduction to GNOME Speech

The GNOME Speech package provides a simple general API for producing text-to-speech output. Multiple backends are supported by the GNOME Speech library, but currently only the Festival backend is built by default; the other backends require either Java or proprietary software.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-speech/0.4/gnome-speech-0.4.16.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnome-speech/0.4/gnome-speech-0.4.16.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 381e2e9126e102ace9abb452c9087141
Download size: 308 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Speech Dependencies

Required

libbonobo-2.18.0

Optional Backend Drivers

Java Access Bridge-1.18.0, FreeTTS-1.2.1, DECtalk, eSpeak, Festival, Loquendo, Speech Dispatcher, Speechworks ETI Eloquence, Swift, Theta, and ViaVoice

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnome-speech

Installation of GNOME Speech

Note

You must install at least one of the backend drivers for GNOME Speech to render speech through the audio hardware. You should test the installation of the backend driver and ensure it produces desired results before installing GNOME Speech.

Install GNOME Speech by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/gnome-speech.html \
    $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
    ORBit-2.0)/share/doc/gnome-speech-0.4.16/gnome-speech.html

Command Explanations

--with-jab-dir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/share/jar: Use this option if you have installed the Java Access Bridge package and wish to have GNOME Speech build in Java support.

Note: see the README and INSTALL files in the package source tree for the correct parameters to pass to configure to enable the desired backends.

Testing the Installation

You can test all the available backend drivers, voices and audio hardware using the test-speech command. Invoking test-speech produces a menu allowing you to select a backend driver and the desired voice, then prompts you (with on-screen prompts and text-to-speech audio) for additional information.

If you are using the FreeTTS backend and you do not hear any audio, you may need to use the streaming audio method instead of the clip audio method. As the root user, modify the freetts-synthesis-driver script:

sed -i "s/clip/streaming/" $GNOME_PREFIX/bin/freetts-synthesis-driver

Installed Programs: festival-synthesis-driver, freetts-synthesis-driver, speechd-synthesis-driver and test-speech

Installed Library: libgnomespeech.{so,a}. Other drivers and libraries are also installed if you have enabled additional backends.

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/gnome-speech-1.0, share/{doc/gnome-speech-0.4.16, gnome-speech, idl/gnome-speech-1.0}

Short Descriptions

test-speech	is used to test the various backend drivers and voices installed on the system.
`libgnomespeech.{so,a}`	provides the API for programs to convert text into speech.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 11:49:50 -0500

GOK-1.2.5

Introduction to GOK

GOK is a dynamic onscreen keyboard. It features Direct Selection, Dwell Selection, Automatic Scanning and Inverse Scanning access methods and includes word completion.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gok/1.2/gok-1.2.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gok/1.2/gok-1.2.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2ef1f171385a37f93408dbca7ecfdf11
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 50 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

GOK Dependencies

Required

EsounD-0.2.37, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, AT SPI-1.18.1, libwnck-2.18.3, libgnomeui-2.18.1, and GNOME Speech-0.4.16

Optional

libusb-0.1.12, intltool-0.35.5, and GTK-Doc-1.8

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gok

Installation of GOK

Install GOK by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 644 $(pkg-config --variable=prefix
      ORBit-2.0)/share/gnome/help/gok/C/legal.xml

For full functionality of this package, you should install the libgail-gnome-1.18.0 package.

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Configuring GOK

Configuration Information

It is recommended that you configure your input device as an “Extended” input device. Exact configuration methods depend on the type of hardware attached to your system. See the README file in the package source tree and GOK Help for information on how to configure your input device.

Installed Programs: gok and create-branching-keyboard

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: share/{,gnome/help/ ,gtk-doc/html ,omf}gok

Short Descriptions

gok

is a dynamic onscreen keyboard utility.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 11:49:50 -0500

Java Access Bridge-1.18.0

Introduction to Java Access Bridge

The Java Access Bridge package contains Java components which connect the built-in accessibility support in Java Swing applications to the GNOME Accessibility framework, specifically the Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface (AT-SPI).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/java-access-bridge/1.18/java-access-bridge-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/java-access-bridge/1.18/java-access-bridge-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9d250af333d03a091be06d2baab8cad4
Download size: 108 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7 MB
Estimated build time: 1.2 SBU

Java Access Bridge Dependencies

Required

AT SPI-1.18.1 and JDK-6 Update 5

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/java-access-bridge

Installation of Java Access Bridge

Install Java Access Bridge by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

cat $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
    ORBit-2.0)/share/jar/accessibility.properties \
    >> $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/accessibility.properties &&
chmod -v 644 $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/accessibility.properties &&

ln -v -sf $(pkg-config --variable=prefix \
    ORBit-2.0)/share/jar/gnome-java-bridge.jar \
    $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/ext

Command Explanations

cat $(pkg-config ...: This command appends to (or creates) the Java runtime accessibility.properties file required for Java Access Bridge.

ln -v -sf $(pkg-config ...: This command creates a link from the Access Bridge jar file to the Java runtime library extensions directory.

Configuring Java Access Bridge

Config Files

~/.orbitrc

Configuration Information

Before running a Java program with the Java Access Bridge, you should ensure that your GNOME 2 installation enables CORBA traffic over IP from the ORBit2 ORB. Do this by adding the following line to ~/.orbitrc using the following command:

cat >> ~/.orbitrc << "EOF"
ORBIIOPIPv4=1

EOF

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: gnome-java-bridge.jar and JNav.jar

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/jar

Short Descriptions

gnome-java-bridge.jar

is a Java runtime environment extension that connects the built-in accessibility support in Java Swing applications to the GNOME Accessibility framework.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 11:49:50 -0500

libgail-gnome-1.18.0

Introduction to libgail-gnome

The libgail-gnome package contains the GNOME Accessibility Implementation library additions which implement ATK interfaces for libbonoboui and libgnomeui widgets.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgail-gnome/1.18/libgail-gnome-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgail-gnome/1.18/libgail-gnome-1.18.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2dd239118bf252c7b1e3d1701cd8a954
Download size: 223 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libgail-gnome Dependencies

Required

GNOME Panel-2.18.3 and AT SPI-1.18.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libgail-gnome

Installation of libgail-gnome

Install libgail-gnome by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgail-gnome.so GTK+ module

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libgail-gnome.so

library module is a GAIL addition which implements ATK interfaces for libbonoboui and libgnomeui widgets.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 11:49:50 -0500

Orca-2.18.1

Introduction to Orca

Orca enables users with limited vision, or no vision, to use the GNOME desktop and applications effectively. It provides a number of features, including magnification, focus tracking, braille output, automatic screen reading and more.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/orca/2.18/orca-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/orca/2.18/orca-2.18.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 764f170af318c3ffd63b9cdfdcd19248
Download size: 934 KB
Estimated disk space required: 17 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Orca Dependencies

Required

AT SPI-1.18.1, PyORBit-2.14.3, and Gnome-Python-2.18.2

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GNOME Speech-0.4.16 (required for speech-enabled screen reading), GNOME Magnifier-0.14.6 (required for screen magnification), BRLTTY (required for braille output, must have Pyrex installed first)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/orca

Installation of Orca

Install Orca by running the following commands:

if [ $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) != "/usr" ]; then
    sed -i "s|PATH=\"|&$(pkg-config \
           --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/bin:|" \
        src/orca/orca.in
fi

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --enable-pydoc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/orca-2.18.1 &&
install -v -m644    docs/pydoc/*.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/orca-2.18.1

For full functionality of this package, you should install the libgail-gnome-1.18.0 package.

Command Explanations

if [ ... != "/usr" ]; then ...; fi: This command is used to add the GNOME prefix bin directory to the hard-coded PATH statement in the script if the GNOME prefix is anything other than /usr.

--enable-pydoc: This parameter is used to build the documentation. Remove it if you don't want the documentation (also remove the installation commands).

Installed Program: orca

Installed Libraries: Python assistive technology (accessiblity) modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/python2.5/site-packages/orca and /usr/share/orca

Short Descriptions

orca

is a GUI menu interface used to access and configure the various functionality parameters provided for users with limited vision.

Last updated on 2008-03-17 13:11:35 -0500

Part IX. X Software

Chapter 31. Individual Office Programs

This chapter is a collection of independent projects that can be installed based on specific needs. Together, they create a respectable office suite. While they may be lacking in user interface consistency, they excel in doing one thing and doing it well.

AbiWord-2.4.6

Introduction to AbiWord

The AbiWord package contains a word processing application. This is useful for writing reports, letters and other formatted documents.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.abisource.com/downloads/abiword/2.4.6/source/abiword-2.4.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8ed5fb282b9741aca75b9e47500d39a1
Download size: 25 MB
Estimated disk space required: 262 MB (additional 210 MB to build and install the API docs)
Estimated build time: 4.5 SBU (to build and install the program, docs and all plugins)

AbiWord Dependencies

Required

FriBidi-0.10.8 and libgnomeprintui-2.18.0

Optional

libgnomeui-2.18.1 (for GNOME-2 support), gucharmap-1.10.0, Enchant (uses Aspell-0.60.5), wv (with libwmf installed first), and Valgrind

Optional for Plugins

libgsf-1.14.7 (to build the OpenDocument/OpenOffice plugin), Poppler-0.5.4 (for the pdf plugin, requires installing with unsupported xpdf headers), librsvg-2.16.1, Nautilus-2.18.3 (for GNOME-2 support), GOffice-0.6.1 (you must use a version of GOffice <0.3.0), Link Grammar, Aiksaurus, libgnomedb version <1.3.0* (requires libgda version <1.3.0), libwmf, GtkMathView (requires Gnome DOM Bindings which requires gdome2), libwpd, OTS, and Psiconv

* The libgda/libgnomedb stack required for AbiWord database access may conflict with the versions used by the Gnumeric-1.8.2 database plugin. Though the libraries themselves pose no conflict, the executables and support files will overwrite one another. Note that the current (version 3.0.x) stack does not pose a conflict with any of the previous versions (but does not support AbiWord or Gnumeric database access. AbiWord requires versions <1.3.0 (1.2.2 is known to work).

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/abiword

Installation of AbiWord

Install AbiWord by running the following commands:

cd abi &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make &&

cd ../abiword-plugins &&
sed -i 's/dictionary_file)/reinterpret_cast<const unsigned char *>(&)/' \
        tools/ots/xp/AbiOts.cpp &&

./configure --prefix=/usr --without-inter7eps &&
make &&

cd ..

If you wish to create the API documentation, Doxygen-1.5.2 must be installed and issue the following commands:

pushd abi &&
doxygen &&
popd

This package's test suite requires Valgrind. Though the end message will indicate the tests failed, there will actually be many tests that run to a successful completion. Run the tests by issuing the following commands:

pushd abi &&
make check &&
popd

Now, as the root user:

cd abi &&
make install &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/abiword-2.4.6 &&
install -v -m644    docs/*.* \
                    /usr/share/doc/abiword-2.4.6 &&

cd ../abiword-plugins &&
make install &&

cd ..

AbiWord is now installed and must be used to build the Help files. Issue the following commands as an unprivileged user:

pushd abiword-docs &&
./make-html.sh &&
cd ..

Then as the root user, install the help files:

install -v -m644 man/abiword.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m644 Manual/en/Abiword_Manual.abw \
                 /usr/share/doc/abiword-2.4.6 &&
cp -v -Rf help   /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.4/AbiWord &&
find             /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.4/AbiWord/help \
                 -type d -exec chmod -v 755 {} \;

If you have a GNOME installation, issue the following commands as the root user to install the AbiWord Bonobo component description file:

install -v -m644 abidistfiles/GNOME_AbiWord_Control_2_4.server \
        $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib/bonobo/servers &&

if [ $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) != "/usr" ]; then
    rmdir -v /usr/lib/{bonobo/servers,bonobo}
fi

If you built the API documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d  /usr/share/doc/abiword-2.4.6/api &&

for FILENAME in $(ls abi/docs/dox/html); do
    install -v -m644 abi/docs/dox/html/${FILENAME} \
                     /usr/share/doc/abiword-2.4.6/api
done

Command Explanations

--without-inter7eps: Some of the headers from the EPS package are not compatible with GCC-4.1.2. This parameter prevents linking to the package and incurring a build failure.

sed -i '...' tools/ots/xp/AbiOts.cpp : This command is used to fix an incompatibility with GCC and the libots package.

if [ ... != "/usr" ]; then ...;fi: This command is used to remove unneeded directories if the GNOME installation is in any prefix other than /usr.

Configuring AbiWord

Config File

~/.AbiSuite/templates/normal.awt

Configuration Information

Choose the right template for your language and locale from the list produced by the following command:

ls /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.4/templates

Create the folder ~/.AbiSuite/templates then copy the normal.awt you want into it:

install -v -m750 -d ~/.AbiSuite/templates &&
install -v -m640    /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.4/templates/normal.awt-<lang> \
                    ~/.AbiSuite/templates/normal.awt

Change <lang> in the above command to fit the name of the file you want.

If you have desktop-file-utils-0.13 installed, you should run the update-desktop-database command to update the mimeminfo cache and allow the Help system to work.

Installed Programs: abiword, AbiWord-2.4, ttfadmin.sh, and ttftool

Installed Libraries: Numerous plugin library support modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/AbiWord-2.4 and /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.4

Short Descriptions

abiword	is a symbolic link to the main AbiWord-2.4 executable.
AbiWord-2.4	is the word-processing program executable.
ttfadmin.sh	generates support files required by AbiWord for each TrueType font in a given directory.
ttftool	is a utility for processing TrueType fonts.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Gnumeric-1.8.2

Introduction to Gnumeric

The Gnumeric package contains a spreadsheet program. This is useful for mathematical analysis.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnumeric/1.8/gnumeric-1.8.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gnumeric/1.8/gnumeric-1.8.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f60edc6ca42daa2fb3717f3c90fa8a6e
Download size: 14.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 206 MB
Estimated build time: 3.0 SBU (includes creating HTML documentation)

Gnumeric Dependencies

Required

libgnomeprintui-2.18.0 and GOffice-0.6.1

Optional

PyGTK-2.10.6, libgnomeui-2.18.1 (combined with the libgsf-gnome-1 library from the libgsf-1.14.7 package will provide GNOME-2 support), libgnomedb* (requires libgda), pxlib, Psiconv, Hildon, Gnome Basic (this package is no longer under active development), and Valgrind (to run some of the testsuite)

* The libgda/libgnomedb stack required for Gnumeric database access may conflict with the versions used by the AbiWord-2.4.6 database plugin. Though the libraries themselves pose no conflict, the executables and support files will overwrite one another. Note that the current (version 3.0.x) stack does not pose a conflict with any of the previous versions (but does not support Gnumeric or AbiWord database access. Gnumeric requires versions >1.2.x and <2.x.x (1.99.1 is known to work).

Note

Though only a run-time dependency, if you don't install the Yelp-2.18.1 package, the built-in help functionality in Gnumeric will not be available.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnumeric

Installation of Gnumeric

Install Gnumeric by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package requires that it is installed before the test suite is run. The commands to run the tests are located a bit later in the instructions.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

If you have GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3 installed you can create an HTML version of the Help documentation by issuing the following commands:

./configure \
    --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix gnome-doc-utils) &&
make -C doc html

If you created the HTML documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/figures/icons &&
install -v -m644    doc/C/figures/*.png \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/figures &&
install -v -m644    doc/C/figures/icons/*.png \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/figures/icons &&
install -v -m644    doc/C/html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2 &&

ln -v -s /usr/share/xml/docbook/xsl-stylesheets-1.71.1/images \
    /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/stylesheet

If you wish to install the Developer documentation, issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/developer &&
install -v -m644    doc/developer/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/developer &&

rm -v /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2/developer/Makefile*

Command Explanations

--prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix gnome-doc-utils): This rebuilds the Makefiles with the same prefix used in the GNOME Doc Utils installation.

Testing gnumeric

If you wish to run the testuite, issue:

make check

Two of the seven tests fail because the scripts they use are missing, two others fail for unknown reasons.

Installed Programs: gnumeric, gnumeric-1.8.2, ssconvert, and ssindex

Installed Libraries: libspreadsheet and numerous filters, plugins and GNOME components

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/gnumeric, /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.8.2, and /usr/share/{,gnome/help/, omf/, pixmaps/}gnumeric

Short Descriptions

gnumeric	is a symlink to gnumeric-1.8.2
gnumeric-1.8.2	is GNOME's spreadsheet application.
ssconvert	is a command line utility to convert spreadsheet files between various spreadsheet file formats.
ssindex	is a command line utility to generate index data for spreadsheet files.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

GnuCash-2.2.4

Introduction to GnuCash

GnuCash is a personal finance manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.gnucash.org/pub/gnucash/sources/stable/gnucash-2.2.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.at.gnucash.org/pub/gnucash/gnucash/sources/stable/gnucash-2.2.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f521cea858ee7223325114ec98de86ca
Download size: 6.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 163 MB (additional 50 MB if running test suite; additional 124 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 3.1 SBU (additional 1.8 SBU to run the test suite; additional 0.3 SBU for docs)

Additional Downloads

Help documentation: http://www.gnucash.org/pub/gnucash/sources/stable/gnucash-docs-2.2.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 97a29e499baca1807a3944ae3c0ad61e
Download size: 10.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 27 MB (additional 41 MB for html and pdf)
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU (additional 0.4 SBU for html and pdf)

GnuCash Dependencies

Required

Guile-1.8.2, SLIB-3a4, GOffice-0.6.1, and GtkHTML-3.14.3

Optional

PostgreSQL-8.2.4, Guile-www, and Electric Fence

Optional (Required for the Help System)

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14 and Yelp-2.18.1 (run-time requirement to view the Help documents)

Optional (for On-Line Banking)

LibOFX (requires OpenSP-1.5.2 and cURL-7.16.3), KtoBlzCheck, and AqBanking (requires Gwenhywfar and libchipcard3)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gnucash

Installation of GnuCash

Install GnuCash by running the following commands:

sed -i 's|xml::${sysconfdir}|xml::/etc/gnome/2.18.3|' configure &&

./configure \
    --prefix=/usr \
    --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --libexecdir=/usr/lib \
    --with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf/schemas &&
make

If you wish to create the API documentation in HTML format, you must have Doxygen-1.5.2 and Graphviz-2.12 installed, then issue: make doc. If you wish to create the API Design Guide in several formats, you must have teTeX-3.0 installed and issue: make -C src/doc/design html pdf ps.

To test the results, issue make check. All tests should pass. An easy way to look at the results of the tests is to issue grep -A1 ============== check.log (this is assuming you redirected the output from the tests to the indicated filename).

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

mv -v /usr/share/gnucash/doc /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4 &&
ln -v -s ../doc/gnucash-2.2.4 /usr/share/gnucash/doc &&

for FILENAME in doc/{misc*,gnome*,generic*,build*}.txt \
                doc/{gtkrc*,TRANSLATION_HOWTO,README.translator.txt} \
                doc/README.{build-system,OFX,HBCI}
do
    install -v -m644 ${FILENAME} /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4
done &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/api/engine &&
install -v -m644    src/doc/{TODO*,*.txt,*.html} \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/api &&
install -v -m644    src/engine/*.txt \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/api/engine

If you built the API HTML or Design Guide documentation, issue the following commands (modified as necessary, depending on what docs are being installed) as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/{design,api}/html &&
install -v -m644    src/doc/design/gnucash-design.html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/design/html &&
install -v -m644    src/doc/design/gnucash-design.{pdf,ps,dvi} \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/design &&
install -v -m644    src/doc/html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4/api/html

If you want to install the Help documentation system, you must have ScrollKeeper-0.3.14 installed. Then unpack the additional tarball, change into the gnucash-docs-2.2.0 source directory and issue the following commands as an unprivileged user:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

HTML versions of the Help Manual and Users Guide can be created if the DocBook XML tools are installed (libxslt-1.1.22, DocBook XML DTD-4.5 and DocBook XSL Stylesheets-1.71.1). A PDF version of the Users Guide can be created if you have DocBook-utils-0.6.14 and JadeTeX-3.13 installed. Issue the following commands to create the documentation (modify as appropriate for your desires):

make -C help  html &&
make -C guide html &&
make -C guide pdf

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the Help Manual or Users Guide, install them using the following commands as the root user (modify as necessary):

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.0/{users_guide,help} &&
cp -v -R            help/C/gnucash-help/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.0/help &&
cp -v -R            guide/C/gnucash-guide/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.0/users_guide &&
install -v -m644    guide/C/gnucash-guide.pdf \
                    /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.0

Note that you must have Yelp-2.18.1 installed in order to view the Help documents using the default GnuCash method.

Command Explanations

sed -i 's|xml::${sysconfdir}|xml::/etc/gnome/2.18.3|' configure: This command is used because the location of the GConf source database is hard-coded into the configure script as $sysconfdir/gconf (rendering the --with-gconf-source parameter useless). The modification ensures that the GConf database is properly updated while still allowing the package configuration files to be installed in /etc/gnucash.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This installs configuration files in /etc/gnucash instead of /usr/etc/gnucash.

--with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf/schemas: This parameter ensures that the GConf schema files are installed in the proper location instead of /etc/gconf.

mv -v /usr/share/gnucash/doc /usr/share/doc/gnucash-2.2.4 and ln -v -s ../doc/gnucash-2.2.4 /usr/share/gnucash/doc: These commands are used to relocate the documentation files to the customary location and create a symbolic link to the original location.

--enable-sql: This parameter is required if you want to build in SQL support using PostgreSQL.

--enable-hbci: This parameter is required if you want to build in on-line banking support using AqBanking. See doc/README.HBCI in the GnuCash source tree for complete information.

Configuring GnuCash

Configuration Information

If you wish to use GnuCash to retrieve stock price quotes, you'll need to install the following Perl modules: libwww-perl-5.806, Date::Manip-5.54, HTML::Parser-3.56, HTML::TableExtract-2.10, Crypt::SSLeay-0.56, and Finance::Quote-1.13. Alternatively, you can run the /usr/bin/gnc-fq-update script as the root user.

Installed Programs: gnc-fq-check, gnc-fq-dump, gnc-fq-helper, gnc-fq-update, gnc-test-env, gnucash, gnucash-bin, gnucash-env, gnucash-make-guids, gnucash-valgrind, and update-gnucash-gconf

Installed Libraries: libgnc-backend-file-utils.so, libgnc-backend-postgres.so, libgnc-business-ledger.so,libgnc-core-utils.so, libgnc-gnome.so, libgnc-module.so, libgnc-qof.so and numerous support libraries installed in /usr/lib/gnucash

Installed Directories: /etc/gnucash, /usr/include/gnucash, /usr/lib/gnucash, and the following subdirectories of /usr/share/: doc/gnucash-2.2.4, gnome/help/gnucash, gnucash, omf/gnucash-docs, and /xml/gnucash

Short Descriptions

gnucash

is a personal finance manager.

Last updated on 2008-04-15 03:34:07 -0500

GIMP-2.2.17

Introduction to GIMP

The GIMP package contains the GNU Image Manipulation Program. This is useful for photo retouching, image composition and image authoring.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/misc/grafik/gimp/gimp/v2.2/gimp-2.2.17.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gimp.org/pub/gimp/v2.2/gimp-2.2.17.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 4f509ed4a605452d88e04045ff388d58
Download size: 13.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 310 MB (additional 314 MB to install the help system)
Estimated build time: 4.6 SBU (additional 0.6 SBU to run the test suite and additional 9.1 SBU to build the help files)

Additional Downloads

Help System

Optional help files: ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/svn/g/gimp-help-2-0.12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: fc1e2153eafa04fa701b23818029c3e1
Download size: 59.8 MB

GIMP Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13, libart_lgpl-2.3.19, and XML::Parser-2.34

Note

If the recommended dependencies are not installed, the configure switches below will need to be modified as explained in the section called “Command Explanations” below.

Optional

libmng-1.0.9, librsvg-2.16.1, AAlib-1.4rc5, little cms-1.16, libexif-0.6.16, libxslt-1.1.22, ALSA-1.0.13, libgtkhtml-2.11.1 (required to build the help system browser plugin), libwmf, PyGTK-2.10.6 (including the gtk and pango modules), Gimp-Print version 4.2.7, an MTA (that provides a sendmail program), and GTK-Doc-1.8

Optional (for Building Documentation from the Help Tarball)

libxslt-1.1.22, DocBook XML DTD-4.5, and DocBook XSL Stylesheets-1.71.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gimp

Installation of GIMP

Install GIMP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --disable-print &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gimp-2.2.17 &&
install -v -m644 docs/{Wilber*,keybindings.txt,quick_reference.ps} \
                    /usr/share/doc/gimp-2.2.17

The gimp-help tarball contains a help system designed for use with external web browsers, the internal GIMP help browser, and HTML renderers. The tarball only contains the XML sources, so you will need the xsltproc program from libxslt-1.1.22 to build the HTML files.

If you downloaded the gimp-help tarball, unpack it and change into the root of the newly created source tree (as an unprivileged user). Issue the following commands to install the help files:

./configure &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

-disable-print: This option disables print support and is required if the obsolete Gimp-Print package is not installed. Print support for the Gimp can be provided later by installing the Gutenprint-5.0.1 package.

--without-libjpeg: This option is necessary if libjpeg is not installed.

--without-libtiff: This option is necessary if libtiff is not installed.

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

Configuring GIMP

Config Files

/etc/gimp/2.0/* and ~/.gimp-2.0/gimprc

Configuration Information

GIMP executes a configuration wizard for each user upon their initial use of the program.

GIMP executes the mozilla web browser by default to view the help files. If you do not have Mozilla, or prefer a different web browser, you can set a new system value in /etc/gimp/2.0/gimprc. Execute the following command as the root user, replacing <browser> with your preferred web browser:

echo '(web-browser "<browser> %s")' >> /etc/gimp/2.0/gimprc

Installed Programs: gimp, gimp-2.2, gimp-remote, gimp-remote-2.2, and gimptool-2.0

Installed Libraries: libgimp-2.0.so, libgimpbase-2.0.so, libgimpcolor-2.0.so, libgimpmath-2.0.so, libgimpmodule-2.0.so, libgimpthumb-2.0.so, libgimpui-2.0.so, libgimpwidgets-2.0.so, and many other modules and plugin libraries

Installed Directories: /etc/gimp, /usr/include/gimp-2.0, /usr/lib/gimp, /usr/share/doc/gimp-2.2.17, /usr/share/gimp and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libgimp{,base,color,math,module,thumb,widgets}

Short Descriptions

gimp	is a symbolic link to gimp-2.2.
gimp-2.2	is an image manipulation program. It works with a variety of image formats and provides a large selection of tools.
gimp-remote	is a symbolic link to gimp-remote-2.2.
gimp-remote-2.2	is a small utility that tells a running GIMP to open a local or remote image file.
gimptool-2.0	is a tool that can build plug-ins or scripts and install them if they are distributed in one source file. gimptool-2.0 can also be used by programs that need to know what libraries and include-paths GIMP was compiled with.
`libgimp-2.0.so`	provides C bindings for GIMP's Procedural Database (PDB) which offers an interface to core functions and to functionality provided by plug-ins.
`libgimpbase-2.0.so`	provides the C functions for basic GIMP functionality such as determining enumeration data types, gettext translation, determining GIMP's version number and capabilities, handling data files and accessing the environment.
`libgimpcolor-2.0.so`	provides the C functions relating to RGB, HSV and CMYK colors as well as converting colors between different color models and performing adaptive supersampling on an area.
`libgimpmath-2.0.so`	contains C functions which provide mathematical definitions and macros, manipulate 3x3 transformation matrices, set up and manipulate vectors and the MD5 message-digest algorithm.
`libgimpmodule-2.0.so`	provides the C functions which implements module loading using GModule and keeps a list of GimpModule's found in a given searchpath.
`libgimpthumb-2.0.so`	provides the C functions for handling GIMP's thumbnail objects.
`libgimpui-2.0.so`	contains the GIMP common user interface functions.
`libgimpwidgets-2.0.so`	contains GIMP and GTK widget creation and manipulation functions.

Last updated on 2008-04-10 07:56:53 -0500

Evolution-2.10.3

Introduction to Evolution

The Evolution package contains an integrated mail, calendar and address book suite designed for the GNOME-2 environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evolution/2.10/evolution-2.10.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evolution/2.10/evolution-2.10.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 09cc60b037849b3c9b34961eb7da217f
Download size: 26 MB
Estimated disk space required: 355 MB
Estimated build time: 10 SBU

Evolution Dependencies

Required

GtkHTML-3.14.3, GNOME Doc Utils-0.10.3, and Evolution Data Server-1.10.3

Recommended (For SSL and S/MIME support)

NSS-3.11.7

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.3.39, HAL-0.5.9.1, D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74, GNOME Spell, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, krb4, GNOME Pilot conduits (requires pilot-link-0.12.2 then GNOME Pilot), GStreamer-0.8.x, NetworkManager (download), libnotify, Mono, intltool-0.35.5, GTK-Doc-1.8, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/evolution

Installation of Evolution

Install Evolution by running the following commands:

Note

--enable-nss --enable-smime

The Evolution configure script only looks for the stand-alone NSS package and the Mozilla and Firefox browsers for the NSS/NSPR libraries. If you are using Thunderbird as your source for the NSS/NSPR libraries, you will have to add the following two parameter settings to the configure command below:

--with-nspr-includes=/usr/include/nspr --with-nss-includes=/usr/include/nss

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --libexecdir=$(pkg-config \
                --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib \
            --enable-nntp \
            --enable-nss \
            --enable-smime &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -s evolution-2.10 \
    $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/bin/evolution

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/lib: This parameter causes the libexec files to be installed in the preferred location of $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/evolution instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec/evolution.

--enable-nntp: This parameter is used to build the Usenet news (NNTP) backend.

--enable-nss: This parameter is used to pull in the Mozilla Network Security Services libraries for SSL support.

--enable-smime: This parameter is used to pull in the Mozilla Network Security Services libraries for S/MIME support.

--with-openldap: This parameter will compile LDAP support into Evolution.

--with-krb5: This parameter will compile Kerberos5 support into Evolution.

--with-pilot-conduits: This parameter will build the GNOME Pilot conduits allowing you to synchronize Evolution data on a Palm device.

ln -v -s evolution-2.10 $(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0)/bin/evolution: This optional command creates a convenience symlink to the evolution-2.10 binary.

--with-kde-applnk-path=<$KDE_PREFIX/share/applnk>: Use this parameter if you wnat the installation process to create a .desktop file in the KDE global desktop file directory.

Installed Programs: evolution and evolution-2.10

Installed Libraries: $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/evolution/2.10/* (contains support libraries, conduits, and other components)

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/: include/evolution-2.10, lib/evolution, share/{{,omf/}evolution, {gnome/help,idl}/evolution-2.10}

Short Descriptions

evolution	is a symlink to the evolution-2.10 program.
evolution-2.10	is an email, calendar and address book suite.

Last updated on 2007-07-25 15:19:43 -0500

Chapter 32. Office Suites

This chapter contains applications that bundle all the essential needs of everyday office workers into one neat 'little' package. The benefits are a consistent user interface and cooperation between applications.

KOffice-1.6.3

Introduction to KOffice

KOffice is the integrated office suite for KDE. It provides native OASIS OpenDocument format support.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/koffice-1.6.3/src/koffice-1.6.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/koffice-1.6.3/src/koffice-1.6.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 386d388094734f9759977c3267098e30
Download size: 55.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 489 MB (additional 592 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 44 SBU (additional 4.4 SBU for API docs)

Additional Downloads

KOffice has many localization packages in the form of: koffice-l10n-<xx>-1.6.3.tar.bz2. The <xx> is a two to seven character code for the country covered. The sizes of these files range from about 0.2 MB to 15 MB.

KOffice l10n package listing: http://download.kde.org/stable/koffice-1.6.3/src/koffice-l10n/
Download MD5 sums: http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/koffice-1.6.3/src/MD5SUMS

KOffice Dependencies

Required

Optional

Aspell-0.60.5, Python-2.5.2, Ruby-1.8.6-p111, libpqxx (for kexi, requires PostgreSQL-8.2.4), MySQL-5.0.41 (plugin), little cms-1.16 and ImageMagick-6.3.5-10 (required for krita), OpenEXR (for enhanced image processing), libwv2 (for MS Word filter), libwpd (for Wordperfect filter), libpaper, Graphviz-2.12, and Doxygen-1.5.2 (the last two to build API documentation)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/koffice

Installation of KOffice

Install KOffice with the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(kde-config --prefix) --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and Graphviz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: karbon, kchart, kexi, kformula, kivio, koconverter, koshell, kplato, kprconverter.pl, kpresenter, krita, krossrunner, kspread, ksqlite, ksqlite2, ksqlite2to3, kthesaurus, kudesigner, kugar, and kword

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries (about 50) in $KDE_PREFIX/lib

Installed Directory: Numerous directories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kchart	is a chart drawing application.
kexi	is an integrated data management application.
kformula	is a formula editor.
kivio	is a flowchart program.
kplato	is a project management application.
kpresenter	is a presentation builder/display program.
krita	is a painting and image editing application for KOffice..
kspread	is a scriptable spreadsheet program.
kugar	is a tool for creating reports.
kword	is a framemaker-like word processing and desktop publishing program.

Last updated on 2008-03-11 13:57:01 -0500

OpenOffice-2.3.1

Introduction to OpenOffice

OpenOffice is an office suite, the open source sibling of StarOffice.

Package Information

OpenOffice Core Download (HTTP): http://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_core.tar.bz2
OpenOffice Core Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_core.tar.bz2
OpenOffice Core Download MD5 sum: 9555a2d5fae9a25c788cc732921ef57a
OpenOffice Core Download size: 138 MB
OpenOffice System Download (HTTP): http://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_system.tar.bz2
OpenOffice System Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_system.tar.bz2
OpenOffice System Download MD5 sum: 1e20befe2fdb65c00be11f1f5d9ebdca
OpenOffice System Download size: 36 MB
Estimated disk space required: 4.2-4.8 GB (depending on configured options)
Estimated build time: 75-100 SBU (depending on configured options)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/OOo_2.3.1-use_bin_hsqldb-1.patch
Optional download if you wish to build the in-tree Mozilla browser: ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/mozilla/releases/mozilla1.7.5/source/mozilla-source-1.7.5.tar.gz
Optional download if you wish to build the OpenOffice SDK: ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_sdk.tar.bz2 which also requires MinGW or a precompiled unowinreg.dll for the cross-platform Java components.
Optional download if you would like to localize the installation: ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_l10n.tar.bz2
Optional download if you need to support the old StarOffice-5.x file formats: ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/openoffice/stable/2.3.1/OOo_2.3.1_src_binfilter.tar.bz2

OpenOffice Dependencies

Required

Apache Ant-1.7.0, GTK+-2.10.13, libIDL-0.8.8, Perl Modules XML::Parser-2.34 and Archive::Zip-1.20, UnZip-5.52, which-2.19, and Zip-2.32

Optional

ALTLinuxhyph, boost, CUPS-1.2.12, cURL-7.16.3, Berkeley DB-4.5.20 (built with Java support), desktop-file-utils-0.13, EPM, Evolution-2.10.3, GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1, GPC, KDE, libjpeg-6b, libsndfile, LibTIFF-3.8.2, libwpd, Linux-PAM-0.99.10.0, Firefox-2.0.0.15 (with ldap support), MySpell, MyThes, NAS-1.9, neon, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, PortAudio, Python-2.5.2, Sablotron, SANE-1.0.18, startup-notification-0.9, STLPort, and unixODBC-2.2.12

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/openoffice

Installation of OpenOffice

The OpenOffice source code is now distributed in several tarballs. You should extract each from the same top-level directory before entering the build directory. At a minimum, you will need to extract the “core” and “system” tarballs. Note that the source directory name is not consistent with the tarball name and will be named OOG680_m9.

If you wish to build an in-tree Mozilla, as opposed to using a system wide installation, copy the Mozilla source tarball into the source tree:

cp ../mozilla-source-1.7.5.tar.gz moz/download/

If you want to optimize the build, edit the appropriate makefile in solenv/inc/ and add the desired optimization flags to the CFLAGSOPT variable. The makefiles are arch specific, for instance edit solenv/inc/unxlngi6.mk for i686. Some users have reported problems with -fomit-frame-pointer. The best option is to not use any custom optimizations.

Note

Because of the complexity of the OpenOffice build system, it is not possible to provide generic build instructions for all systems. You should review the output of config_office/configure --help and take advantage of any system installed programs and libraries available using the --enable-*, --disable-*, and --with-system-* parameters. Additionally, if you have installed KDE in the /opt prefix, and would like to use the --enable-kde switch, you must set KDEDIR=$KDE_PREFIX before running configure.

OpenOffice fails to compile if umask is set to something exotic. The build can also fail if the LANG or LC_ALL environment variables are set. Use the following commands to change your environment accordingly:

umask 0022 &&
unset LANG LC_ALL

Install OpenOffice by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../OOo_2.3.1-use_bin_hsqldb-1.patch &&

sed -i 's@..$/dist$/configure@uudecode="no" &@' \
    berkeleydb/makefile.mk &&

pushd config_office &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/openoffice-2.3.1 \
            --enable-libart                \
            --disable-fontooo              \
            --disable-gnome-vfs            \
            --without-fonts                \
            --without-system-jars          \
            --without-pam                  \
            --with-system-stdlibs          \
            --with-system-freetype         \
            --with-system-expat            \
            --with-system-libxml           \
            --with-system-libxslt          \
            --with-system-zlib             \
            --enable-cairo                 \
            --enable-build-mozilla         \
            --with-build-version=BLFS      \
            --with-package-format=native   \
            --disable-binfilter            \
            --disable-odk                  \
            --disable-qadevooo             \
            --with-use-shell=bash &&
popd &&

./bootstrap &&
source LinuxX86Env.Set.sh &&
dmake

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

pushd instsetoo_native/unxlngi6.pro/OpenOffice/\
native/install/en-US/linux-2.6-intel/buildroot/opt &&
cp -r -v openoffice.org2.3 /opt/openoffice-2.3.1 &&
popd &&

for appl in sbase scalc sdraw simpress smath soffice spadmin swriter
do
    ln -v -sf /opt/openoffice-2.3.1/program/$appl /usr/bin
done &&

pushd sysui/desktop/icons &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/icons/{HighContrast,hicolor,locolor} &&
cp -r -v HighContrast/*x* /usr/share/icons/HighContrast &&
cp -r -v hicolor/*x*      /usr/share/icons/hicolor &&
cp -r -v locolor/*x*      /usr/share/icons/locolor &&
popd

If you have installed desktop-file-utils-0.13, you should copy the *.desktop files to /usr/share/applications using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/applications &&
pushd /opt/openoffice-2.3.1/share/xdg/ &&
for appl in *.desktop
do
    sed -i '/Exec/d' $appl &&
    echo "Exec=/usr/bin/s`echo $appl | sed 's/.desktop//'`" >> $appl &&
    sed -i '/Icon/d' $appl &&
    echo "Icon=`echo $appl | sed 's/.desktop//'`" >> $appl
done &&
sed -i 's@bin/sprinteradmin@bin/spadmin@' printeradmin.desktop &&
cp -v *.desktop /usr/share/applications &&
update-desktop-database &&
popd

Finally, if you'd like to edit OpenOffice documents directly from SeaMonkey-1.1.9 or Firefox-2.0.0.15, create a symbolic link in your plugins directory to /opt/openoffice-2.3.1/program/libnpsoplugin.so. Additionally, you must enable the plugin from the Internet Options within any OpenOffice application.

Command Explanations

sed 's@..\$dist\$/configure@uudecode="no"...': This command corrects a build failure if a faulty uudecode program provided by the GMime-2.2.10 package is installed.

--enable-*: The switches listed in the example configure command above force the use of system installed libraries that are known to be available on a BLFS system that meets the required and recommended dependencies.

--disable-fontooo: Use Fontconfig instead of the FontOOo.

--disable-gnome-vfs: Disable the use of Gnome Virtual File System libraries. Omit this switch if you have Gnome installed.

--without-fonts: Do not install Bitstream Vera fonts since they are already included in the X Window System Environment.

--with{,out}-system-*: Determines whether to use the system libraries and programs or to build the source packages included in the build tree.

--without-pam: Disable the use of Linux-PAM functions. Omit this switch if Linux-PAM is installed.

--enable-build-mozilla: Build the in-tree Mozilla suite.

--with-build-version=BLFS: Appends “BLFS” to the end of the version string.

--with-package-format=native: This switch forces the build to skip the packaging process, leaving only the temporary installation that would be used for packaging. This temporary installation is later copied directly to the final destination.

--disable-binfilter: This switch disables the build of legacy StarOffice-5 import filters. Omit this switch if you've downloaded the binfilter package above. Warning: Installation of the legacy import filters increases the build time considerably. Only install them if you have these old file types, and need to edit them in OpenOffice.

--disable-odk: This switch disables the build of the OpenOffice SDK. Omit this switch if you've downloaded the SDK package (and additional requirements) above.

--disable-qadevooo: This switch skips the building of the quality assurance tools used by the OpenOffice development teams.

--with-system-mozilla=<type> : Enables the use of a system installed gecko or XULRunner engine in place of the full Mozilla suite. This will disable the use of a Thunderbird address book as a data source. If you omit the type of installation, configure defaults to and searches for a working XULRunner installation and will fail if one is not found.

--disable-cups: Disable the use of CUPS for printing.

--with-lang=<LANG>: Allows the use of additional languages in OpenOffice. US English (ENUS) is the default.

--with-dict=<LANG>: Allows the use of alternate dictionaries in OpenOffice. US English (ENUS) is the default.

--with-use-shell=bash: Tells the OpenOffice build system to use bash instead of tcsh.

./bootstrap: Build the dmake utility required to complete the build.

dmake: Compiles the package.

for appl in sbase scalc...: Creates symlinks for the applications in /usr/bin.

for appl in *.desktop...: Edit the *.desktop files for use with a standard BLFS system.

Installed Programs: scalc, sdraw, simpress, smath, soffice, spadmin, and swriter.

Installed Libraries: OpenOffice libraries

Installed Directory: /opt/openoffice-2.3.1

Short Descriptions

sbase	is a database application.
scalc	is a spreadsheet application.
sdraw	is a drawing application.
simpress	is a presentation application.
smath	is a mathematical formula editor.
soffice	opens a base window with access to all OpenOffice applications.
spadmin	is the OpenOffice printer configuration utility.
swriter	is a word processing application.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Chapter 33. Graphical Web Browsers

This chapter contains a wonderful selection of browsers. We hope you can find one you enjoy using or give them each a trial run.

SeaMonkey-1.1.9

Introduction to SeaMonkey

SeaMonkey is a browser suite, the Open Source sibling of Netscape. It includes the browser, composer, mail and news clients, and an IRC client. It is the follow-on to the Mozilla browser suite.

The Mozilla project also hosts two subprojects that aim to satisfy the needs of users who don't need the complete browser suite or prefer to have separate applications for browsing and e-mail. These subprojects are Mozilla Firefox, (a stand-alone browser based on the Mozilla source code) and Mozilla Thunderbird, (a stand-alone mail/newsgroup client based on the Mozilla source code). The build instructions for these two applications are discussed in separate sections:

Firefox-2.0.0.15
Thunderbird-2.0.0.12

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/seamonkey/releases/1.1.9/seamonkey-1.1.9.source.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/seamonkey/releases/1.1.9/seamonkey-1.1.9.source.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2b08c472164e80922f715c6e96e0bee7
Download size: 33.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 632 MB
Estimated build time: 17.0 SBU

To enable the Enigmail extension to the SeaMonkey mail client, you'll need to download the tarball listed below. The Enigmail extension allows users to access the authentication and encryption features provided by the GnuPG package. The Enigmail extension will not operate correctly unless you have GnuPG-1.4.7 or GnuPG-2.0.8 installed.

http://www.mozilla-enigmail.org/download/source/enigmail-0.95.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum (Enigmail): cfbe6ff77f80a349b396829757ad952a

SeaMonkey Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13, libIDL-0.8.8, and Zip-2.32

Note

libjpeg-6b should have been installed before GTK+ and should exist on your system. If for some reason you haven't installed libjpeg, you should remove the --with-system-jpeg option from the .mozconfig file created below.

Optional

UnZip-5.52 and libgnomeui-2.18.1 (to build the gnomevfs extension)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/seamonkey

Installation of SeaMonkey

The configuration of SeaMonkey is accomplished by creating a .mozconfig file containing the desired configuration options. A default .mozconfig file is created below. To see the entire list of available configuration options (and an abbreviated description of each one), issue ./configure --help. Additional information can also be found below in the section titled Additional .mozconfig Options. If you are going to use system-installed versions of the NSS and NSPR libraries, ensure you uncomment the two lines near the bottom of the file. If you would prefer to download the file instead of creating it by typing or cut-and-pasting, you can find it at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/seamonkey-1.1.9-mozconfig (the file must be installed in the root of the source tree mozilla directory, and named .mozconfig). Create the file by issuing the following command:

cat > .mozconfig << "EOF"
# This file contains the options used in the SeaMonkey build. You may
# need to specify additional options for your specific build needs.
# Use the information provided by running './configure --help' to
# help you determine if you need to add any additional options.
# Some additional options can be added by uncommenting the examples
# in this file or adding options by inserting a line containing
# 'ac_add_options --some-option-you-need'.


# Create an object directory and specify to build the package in that
# directory. If desired, modify the location of the object directory
# to a directory inside the source tree by removing '../' from the
# line below.
mk_add_options MOZ_OBJDIR=@TOPSRCDIR@/../seamonkey-build

# This option is used to specify that the SeaMonkey suite is
# being built and to use all the default options for SeaMonkey.
ac_add_options --enable-application=suite

# Specify the installation prefix. If you would prefer SeaMonkey
# installed in a different prefix, modify the line below to fit
# your needs. You'll also need to modify some of the instructions in
# the BLFS book to point to your desired prefix.
ac_add_options --prefix=/usr

# These options are used so that the SeaMonkey binaries are linked to
# the system-installed copies of the specified libraries instead of
# the source tree code which may not be the most recent versions.
ac_add_options --with-system-zlib
ac_add_options --with-system-png
ac_add_options --with-system-jpeg
ac_add_options --enable-system-cairo

# This option specifies to include support for rendering the HTML
# <canvas></canvas> tag in the SeaMonkey browser.
ac_add_options --enable-canvas

# This option is used so that the debugging symbols are removed from
# the installed binaries during the installation process. Comment out
# this option if you may have a need to retain the debugging symbols
# in the installed binaries. Note that this can substantially
# increase the size of the installed binaries.
ac_add_options --enable-strip

# This option is added so that test libraries and programs are not
# built. These would only be required for debugging purposes.
ac_add_options --disable-tests

# This option is added so that the Mozilla Installer program is not
# built or installed. The program is not required for a BLFS
# installation of SeaMonkey.
ac_add_options --disable-installer

# This option is used to disable the a11y support in the SeaMonkey
# binaries. Comment out this option if you require a11y support.
ac_add_options --disable-accessibility

# This option is used to enable support for rendering SVG files in the
# SeaMonkey browser.
ac_add_options --enable-svg

# This option is used to enable source tree included LDAP support in
# the SeaMonkey binaries.
ac_add_options --enable-ldap

# These two options enable support for building SeaMonkey with
# system-installed versions of the Network Security Services (NSS)
# and Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) libraries. Uncomment both
# lines to enable support for system-installed NSS/NSPR.
#ac_add_options --with-system-nspr
#ac_add_options --with-system-nss

# Uncomment this option if you desire support for dual-monitor
# display of SeaMonkey using the X-Window Xinerama libraries.
#ac_add_options --enable-xinerama

# Complex scripts such as Thai can only be rendered in SeaMonkey with the
# help of Pango. This option significantly slows rendering, so only use
# it if necessary.
#ac_add_options --enable-pango

# This option identifies the default binary directory of the SeaMonkey
# installation and is used to locate SeaMonkey's installed files. This
# option is not required for end-user browsing, and is only used for
# development purposes.
#ac_add_options --with-default-mozilla-five-home=/usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9

EOF

Compile SeaMonkey by running the following commands:

cat >> layout/build/Makefile.in << "EOF"

ifdef MOZ_ENABLE_CANVAS
EXTRA_DSO_LDOPTS += $(XLDFLAGS) -lX11 -lXrender
endif
EOF

make -f client.mk build

If you're building the SeaMonkey mail/newsgroup client and plan to install the Enigmail extension, issue the following commands:

tar -xf ../enigmail-0.95.6.tar.gz -C mailnews/extensions &&

( cd mailnews/extensions/enigmail && ./makemake -r ) &&

make -C ../seamonkey-build/mailnews/extensions/enigmail &&
make -C ../seamonkey-build/mailnews/extensions/enigmail \
        XPIFILE=enigmail-0.95.6.xpi xpi

This package does not come with a test suite. However, it cn be launched fom the build directory before installing with the command line: ../seamonkey-build/dist/bin/seamonkey.

Install SeaMonkey by issuing the following commands as the root user:

make -f client.mk install &&

install -v -m644 ../seamonkey-build/dist/public/ldap-private/* \
    /usr/include/seamonkey-1.1.9/ldap &&

install -v -m644 ../seamonkey-build/dist/bin/isp/movemail.rdf \
    /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/isp

If you built SeaMonkey utilizing system-installed NSS and NSPR libraries, the seamonkey-ns*.pc pkgconfig files are broken as they point to the wrong directories where the actual libraries and interface headers are located. Issue the following commands as the root user to replace the broken files with symbolic links to known good files:

ln -v -sf nss.pc /usr/lib/pkgconfig/seamonkey-nss.pc &&
ln -v -sf nspr.pc /usr/lib/pkgconfig/seamonkey-nspr.pc

If you did NOT build seamonkey utilizing system-installed NSS and NSPR libraries, issue the following commands as the root user to install the NSS interface headers:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/include/seamonkey-1.1.9/nss &&
cp -v -Lf ../seamonkey-build/dist/{private,public}/nss/*.h \
   /usr/include/seamonkey-1.1.9/nss

If you built the Enigmail extension, issue the following commands as the root user to install the .xpi file into the /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/xpi_store directory:

install -v -m644 -D ../seamonkey-build/dist/bin/enigmail-0.95.6.xpi \
    /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/xpi_store/enigmail-0.95.6.xpi

There are two methods you can use to install the Enigmail extension. Both are shown here and provide similar functionality with one major difference. The first method will install the extension system-wide and all users of SeaMonkey will have an Enigmail-enabled mail client. The method shown later only installs it on a per-user basis. The first method must be accomplished now (before the object directory is removed) and uses the conventional make install command to install the Enigmail files straight from the distribution directory of the object directory. The alternate method is shown as it installs using the .xpi file created earlier and can be done later (at any time you desire) as the file used to install Enigmail was copied into /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/xpi_store in the previous step. This method can be used to install any downloaded Mozilla extension distributed in a .xpi file. There are many extensions available for SeaMonkey. A list containing many of them can be found at http://extensionroom.mozdev.org/.

If you want to install the Enigmail extension now, which offers system-wide access, issue the following command as the root user:

make -C ../seamonkey-build/mailnews/extensions/enigmail install

To install an extension from a created or download .xpi file, you simply need to “open” the .xpi file using the “Open File” option of the “File” menu of the browser window. You can browse to find the file (for example, the Enigmail .xpi file is located in /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/xpi_store), select it, then follow the prompts to install the extension.

Note

You should run /usr/bin/seamonkey once as the root user (or any user with write privileges) to create some necessary additional files in the /usr hierarchy. Also do this each time you install additional system-wide extensions.

Additional .mozconfig Options

Information about some of the additional options which can be added to the .mozconfig configuration file is shown below. Note that this is just a few of the options. You may wish to run ./configure --help and review each of the listed options to discover what affect they have on the build. Feel free to add or remove options to tailor the build to your desires. Listed below are some common options not in the default .mozconfig file but can be added in order to have the described effect on the SeaMonkey compile.

ac_add_options --enable-elf-dynstr-gc: Removes un-referenced strings from ELF shared objects generated during the build. Note that this option breaks the build on alpha.

ac_add_options --disable-mailnews: Disables the mail and news clients.

ac_add_options --disable-ldap: Disables LDAP support, recommended if mail is disabled.

ac_add_options --enable-xterm-updates: Displays the current command in the xterm window title during the compilation.

ac_add_options --enable-plaintext-editor-only: Disables support for HTML editing. Do not use this switch if you are building the mail-news component.

.mozconfig Option Explanations

To simplify reading the options below, they are labeled without ac_add_options inserted at the beginning of the option. These options are also described in the .mozconfig file created earlier.

mk_add_options MOZ_OBJDIR=@TOPSRCDIR@/../seamonkey-build: Creates an object directory and specifies to build the package in that directory. If desired, modify the location of the object directory to a directory inside the source tree by removing “../” from the line.

--enable-application=suite: Identifies the build as a SeaMonkey suite build.

--with-system-zlib --with-system-png --with-system-jpeg --enable-system-cairo: Uses the system-installed versions of these packages.

--enable-xinerama --enable-reorder --enable-strip --enable-cpp-rtti --disable-accessibility --disable-tests --disable-logging --disable-pedantic --disable-installer: Various options that affect what components are built and some optimization options. You can pick and choose from these options. More information on them, and many other available options, can be found by running ./configure --help.

Command Explanations

'EXTRA_DSO_LDOPTS' += -lX11 -lXrender ...: Building the layout backend will break when the canvas element is enabled without adding these two required libraries.

make -f client.mk ...: Mozilla products are packaged to allow the use of a configuration file which can be used to pass the configuration settings to the configure command. make uses the client.mk file to get initial configuration and setup parameters, then depending on the target parameter (build or install), either runs the configure script and compiles the package or installs the package.

./makemake -r: This command is used to recursively create Makefiles in the appropriate subdirectory of seamonkey-build.

make -C ... xpi: This command builds the Enigmail .xpi file which can be used to install Enigmail.

install .../movemail.rdf ...: This command is used to install a file inadvertently left out of the installation script.

Configuring SeaMonkey

No specific configuration is required as long as the seamonkey script is in the user's path. If SeaMonkey is installed in a non-standard location, make a symlink to the seamonkey script in the /usr/bin directory.

Some applications look for netscape when they need to open a browser. You may make the following symlink for convenience (as the root user).

ln -v -sf seamonkey /usr/bin/netscape

For installing various SeaMonkey plugins, refer to Mozdev's PluginDoc Project. If you have JDK-6 Update 5 already installed, create the following link as the root user to utilize the JAVA plugin:

ln -v -s $JAVA_HOME/jre/plugin/i386/ns7/libjavaplugin_oji.so \
    /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/plugins

Some packages install SeaMonkey plugins into the default system-wide directory /usr/lib/mozilla/plugins. If desired, create symbolic links in the SeaMonkey plugin directory /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/plugins to the files in the default plugin directory (you should link to the actual files and not other links). Alternatively, you can move or copy the files in the default plugin directory to the SeaMonkey plugin directory. An example of creating a symbolic link is shown below. Create the links as the root user:

ln -v -s ../../mozilla/plugins/<plugin.so> \
    /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9/plugins

Along with using the “Preferences” menu to configure SeaMonkey's options and preferences to suit individual tastes, finer grain control of many options is only available using a tool not available from the general menu system. To access this tool, you'll need to open a browser window and enter about:config in the address bar. This will display a list of the configuration preferences and information related to each one. You can use the “Filter:” bar to enter search criteria and narrow down the listed items. Changing a preference can be done using two methods. One, if the preference has a boolean value (True/False), simply double-click on the preference to toggle the value and two, for other preferences simply right-click on the desired line, choose “Modify” from the menu and change the value. Creating new preference items is accomplished in the same way, except choose “New” from the menu and provide the desired data into the fields when prompted.

Tip

There is a multitude of configuration parameters you can tweak to customize SeaMonkey. A very extensive and up-to-date list of these parameters can be found at http://preferential.mozdev.org/preferences.html.

Installed Programs: seamonkey and seamonkey-config

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries, browser, and email/newsgroup components, plugins, extensions, and helper modules installed in /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9

Installed Directories: /usr/include/seamonkey-1.1.9, /usr/lib/seamonkey-1.1.9, and /usr/share/idl/seamonkey-1.1.9

Short Descriptions

seamonkey

is a browser/email/newsgroup/chat client suite. The various components such as the Composer, mail-news client, IRC chat client, and address book can be accessed from the menu after seamonkey starts or via command-line switches to the seamonkey script. Issue man seamonkey for additional information.

Last updated on 2008-04-21 21:28:52 -0500

Firefox-2.0.0.15

Introduction to Firefox

Firefox is a stand-alone browser based on the Mozilla codebase.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://releases.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/firefox/releases/2.0.0.15/source/firefox-2.0.0.15-source.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/firefox/releases/2.0.0.15/source/firefox-2.0.0.15-source.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ef827973830cc6453adf8ca3b88a9c6d
Download size: 38 MB
Estimated disk space required: 574 MB
Estimated build time: 13 SBU

Firefox Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13, libIDL-0.8.8, and Zip-2.32

Note: libjpeg should have been installed before GTK+ and should exist on your system. If for some reason you haven't installed libjpeg, you should remove the --with-system-jpeg option from the .mozconfig file created below.

Optional

UnZip-5.52 and libgnomeui-2.18.1 (to build the gnomevfs extension)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/firefox

Installation of Firefox

The configuration of Firefox is accomplished by creating a .mozconfig file containing the desired configuration options. A default .mozconfig is created below. To see the entire list of available configuration options (and an abbreviated description of each one), issue ./configure --help. If you are going to use system-installed versions of the NSS and NSPR libraries, ensure you uncomment the two lines near the bottom of the file. If you are going to build the OpenOffice package and you want to use this Firefox installation as the default Mozilla source, ensure you uncomment the --enable-ldap option in the file created below. You may also wish to review the entire file and uncomment any other desired options. If you would prefer to download the file instead of creating it by typing or cut-and-pasting, you can find it at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/firefox-2.0.0.15-mozconfig (the file must be installed in the root of the source tree mozilla directory, and named .mozconfig). Create the file by issuing the following command:

cat > .mozconfig << "EOF"
# This file contains the options used in the Firefox build. You may
# need to specify additional options for your specific build needs.
# Use the information provided by running './configure --help' to
# help you determine if you need to add any additional options.
# Some additional options can be added by uncommenting the examples
# in this file or adding options by inserting a line containing
# 'ac_add_options --some-option-you-need'.


# Use the default settings specified in the source tree
. $topsrcdir/browser/config/mozconfig

# Create an object directory and specify to build the package in that
# directory. If desired, modify the location of the object directory
# to a directory inside the source tree by removing '../' from the
# line below.
mk_add_options MOZ_OBJDIR=@TOPSRCDIR@/../firefox-build

# Specify the installation prefix. If you would prefer Firefox
# installed in a different prefix, modify the line below to fit
# your needs. You'll also need to modify some of the instructions in
# the BLFS book to point to your desired prefix.
ac_add_options --prefix=/usr

# These options are used so that the Firefox binaries are linked to
# the system-installed copies of the specified libraries instead of
# the source tree code which may not be the most recent versions.
ac_add_options --with-system-zlib
ac_add_options --with-system-png
ac_add_options --with-system-jpeg
ac_add_options --enable-system-cairo

# This option causes the installed binaries to have the official
# Firefox name embedded in them. Due to license restrictions, you
# may not distribute binaries created using this option.
ac_add_options --enable-official-branding

# This option is used to enable support for rendering SVG files in the
# Firefox browser. Comment out the line to disable the option.
ac_add_options --enable-svg

# This option is used so that the debugging symbols are removed from
# the installed binaries during the installation process. Comment out
# this option if you may have a need to retain the debugging symbols
# in the installed binaries. Note that this can substantially
# increase the size of the installed binaries.
ac_add_options --enable-strip

# This option is added so that test libraries and programs are not
# built. These would only be required for debugging purposes.
ac_add_options --disable-tests

# This option is added so that the Mozilla Installer program is not
# built or installed. The program is not required for a BLFS
# installation of Firefox.
ac_add_options --disable-installer

# This option is used to disable the a11y support in the Firefox
# binaries. Comment out this option if you require a11y support.
ac_add_options --disable-accessibility

# This option is used to enable source tree included LDAP support in
# the Firefox binaries.
###################################################################
#
# NOTE: You must uncomment this option if there is any chance of
# compiling the OpenOffice package from source code using this copy
# of Firefox for your Mozilla support.
#
###################################################################
#ac_add_options --enable-ldap

# Uncomment this option if you desire support for dual-monitor
# display of Firefox using the X-Window Xinerama libraries.
#ac_add_options --enable-xinerama

# These two options enable support for building Firefox with
# system-installed versions of the Network Security Services (NSS)
# and Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) libraries. Uncomment both
# lines to enable support for system-installed NSS/NSPR.
#ac_add_options --with-system-nss
#ac_add_options --with-system-nspr

# Complex scripts such as Thai can only be rendered in Firefox with the
# help of Pango. This option significantly slows rendering, so only use
# it if necessary.
#ac_add_options --enable-pango

# This option identifies the default binary directory of the Firefox
# installation and is used to locate Firefox's installed files. This
# option is not required for end-user browsing, and is only used for
# development purposes.
#ac_add_options --with-default-mozilla-five-home=/usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15

EOF

Compile Firefox by issuing the following commands:

cat >> layout/build/Makefile.in << "EOF" &&
ifdef MOZ_ENABLE_CANVAS
EXTRA_DSO_LDOPTS += $(XLDFLAGS) -lX11 -lXrender
endif
EOF

sed -i "s/^    enum$/& xptinfo_enum_1/" \
    xpcom/reflect/xptinfo/public/xptinfo.h &&

make -f client.mk build

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user, install the package:

make -f client.mk install &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15/chrome/icons/default &&
ln -v -s ../../../icons/default.xpm \
    /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15/chrome/icons/default &&

chown -v -R root:root \
    /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15/extensions/inspector@mozilla.org/*

If you enabled LDAP support in the Firefox build, install some additional interface headers as the root user:

install -v -m644 ../firefox-build/dist/public/ldap-private/* \
    /usr/include/firefox-2.0.0.15/ldap

If you built Firefox utilizing system-installed NSS and NSPR libraries, the firefox-ns*.pc pkgconfig files are broken as they point to the wrong directories where the actual libraries and interface headers are located. Issue the following commands as the root user to replace the broken files with symbolic links to known good files:

ln -v -sf nss.pc /usr/lib/pkgconfig/firefox-nss.pc &&
ln -v -sf nspr.pc /usr/lib/pkgconfig/firefox-nspr.pc

If you did NOT build Firefox utilizing system-installed NSS and NSPR libraries, issue the following commands as the root user to install the NSS interface headers:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/include/firefox-2.0.0.15/nss &&
cp -v -Lf ../firefox-build/dist/{private,public}/nss/*.h \
    /usr/include/firefox-2.0.0.15/nss

Note

You should run /usr/bin/firefox once as the root user (or any user with write privileges) to create some necessary additional files in the /usr hierarchy.

Command Explanations

'EXTRA_DSO_LDOPTS' += -lX11 -lXrender ...: Building the layout backend will break when the canvas element is enabled without adding these two required libraries.

sed -i "s/^ enum$/& xptinfo_enum_1/" ...: This command is used to fix an anonymous enum in an external/public interface header file.

install -v -m755 -d .../chrome/icons/default and ln -v -s ../../../icons/default.xpm ...: These two commands are used to create a symlink in the required directory so that the proper icon is displayed in the taskbar and when Firefox windows are minimized.

chown -v -R root:root ...: This command changes the ownership of some installed files to more appropriate user:group names.

Configuring Firefox

No specific configuration is required as long as the firefox script is in the user's path. If Firefox is installed in a non-standard location, then make a symlink to the firefox script in the /usr/bin directory.

If your Window or Desktop Manager does not allow you to configure a default mail client, you can add a configuration parameter to Firefox so that an email client will start when you click on a mailto: URL. There are two parameters you need to check. The procedure to check or modify any of the configuration parameters is quite simple and the instructions here can be used to view or modify any of the parameters.

First, open the configuration dialog by entering about:config in the address bar. This will display a list of the configuration preferences and information related to each one. You can use the “Filter:” bar to enter search criteria and narrow down the listed items. Changing a preference can be done using two methods. One, if the preference has a boolean value (True/False), simply double-click on the preference to toggle the value and two, for other preferences simply right-click on the desired line, choose “Modify” from the menu and change the value. Creating new preference items is accomplished in the same way, except choose “New” from the menu and provide the desired data into the fields when prompted.

The two configuration preference items you need to check so that Firefox uses a specified default mail client are the network.protocol-handler.external.mailto which should be set to True and the network.protocol-handler.app.mailto which should be set to the path of the desired mail client, e.g., /usr/bin/thunderbird.

Tip

There is a multitude of configuration parameters you can tweak to customize Firefox. A very extensive and up-to-date list of these parameters can be found at http://preferential.mozdev.org/preferences.html.

Many applications look for netscape when they need to open a browser. You may wish to make the following symlink for convenience (as the root user).

ln -v -sf firefox /usr/bin/netscape

For installing various Firefox plugins, refer to Mozdev's PluginDoc Project. If you have the JDK-6 Update 5 already installed, create the following link as the root user to utilize the installed Java plugin:

ln -v -s $JAVA_HOME/jre/plugin/i386/ns7/libjavaplugin_oji.so \
    /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15/plugins

Some packages install Mozilla plugins into the default system-wide directory /usr/lib/mozilla/plugins. If desired, create symbolic links in the Firefox plugin directory /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15/plugins to the files in the default plugin directory (you should link to the actual files and not other links). Alternatively, you can move or copy the files in the default plugin directory to the Firefox plugin directory. An example of creating a symbolic link is shown below. Create the links as the root user:

ln -v -s ../../mozilla/plugins/<plugin.so> \
    /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15/plugins

Installed Programs: firefox and firefox-config

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries, browser components, plugins, extensions, and helper modules installed in /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15

Installed Directories: /usr/include/firefox-2.0.0.15, /usr/lib/firefox-2.0.0.15, and /usr/share/idl/firefox-2.0.0.15

Short Descriptions

firefox	is a shell script that sets up the environment and calls the `firefox-bin` binary.
firefox-config	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use Firefox libraries and browser components.

Last updated on 2008-07-12 17:31:53 -0500

Konqueror-3.5.9

konqueror is the default graphical web browser for the KDE desktop environment. It is packaged and installed with kdebase-3.5.9.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Chapter 34. Other X-based Internet Programs

The Internet isn't just about browsing. Here are more graphical applications that utilize other areas of the Internet.

Thunderbird-2.0.0.12

Introduction to Thunderbird

Thunderbird is a stand-alone mail/news client based on the Mozilla codebase.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/6.3/t/thunderbird-2.0.0.12-source.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c23f576a8fd0ceee5135829c8ae5168b
Download size: 37 MB
Estimated disk space required: 629 MB
Estimated build time: 18 SBU

To enable the Enigmail extension to the Thunderbird mail client, you'll need to download the tarball shown below. The Enigmail extension allows users to access the authentication and encryption features provided by the GnuPG package. The Enigmail extension will not operate correctly unless you have GnuPG-1.4.7 or GnuPG-2.0.8 installed.

http://www.mozilla-enigmail.org/download/source/enigmail-0.95.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: cfbe6ff77f80a349b396829757ad952a
Download size: 1.1 MB

Thunderbird Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13, libIDL-0.8.8, and Zip-2.32

Optional

UnZip-5.52 and libgnomeui-2.18.1 (to build the gnomevfs extension)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Thunderbird

Installation of Thunderbird

The configuration of Thunderbird is accomplished by creating a .mozconfig file containing the desired configuration options. A default .mozconfig is created below. To see the entire list of available configuration options (and an abbreviated description of each one), issue ./configure --help. If you are going to use system-installed versions of the NSS and NSPR libraries, ensure you uncomment the two lines near the bottom of the file. You may also wish to review the entire file and uncomment any other desired options. If you would prefer to download the file instead of creating it by typing or cut-and-pasting, you can find it at http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/files/BLFS/6.3/thunderbird-2.0.0.12-mozconfig (the file must be installed in the root of the source tree mozilla directory, and named .mozconfig). Create the file by issuing the following command:

cat > .mozconfig << "EOF"
# This file contains the options used in the Thunderbird build. You may
# need to specify additional options for your specific build needs.
# Use the information provided by running './configure --help' to
# help you determine if you need to add any additional options.
# Some additional options can be added by uncommenting the examples
# in this file or adding options by inserting a line containing
# 'ac_add_options --some-option-you-need'.


# Use the default settings specified in the source tree
. $topsrcdir/mail/config/mozconfig

# Create an object directory and specify to build the package in that
# directory. If desired, modify the location of the object directory
# to a directory inside the source tree by removing '../' from the
# line below.
mk_add_options MOZ_OBJDIR=@TOPSRCDIR@/../thunderbird-build

# Specify the installation prefix. If you would prefer Thunderbird
# installed in a different prefix, modify the line below to fit
# your needs. You'll also need to modify some of the instructions in
# the BLFS book to point to your desired prefix.
ac_add_options --prefix=/usr

# These options are used so that the Thunderbird binaries are linked to
# the system-installed copies of the specified libraries instead of
# the source tree code which may not be the most recent versions.
ac_add_options --with-system-zlib
ac_add_options --with-system-png
ac_add_options --with-system-jpeg
ac_add_options --enable-system-cairo

# This option causes the installed binaries to have the official
# Thunderbird name embedded in them. Due to license restrictions, you
# may not distribute binaries created using this option.
ac_add_options --enable-official-branding

# This option specifies to include support for rendering the HTML
# <canvas></canvas> tag in the Thunderbird mail client.
#ac_add_options --enable-canvas

# This option is used so that the debugging symbols are removed from
# the installed binaries during the installation process. Comment out
# this option if you may have a need to retain the debugging symbols
# in the installed binaries. Note that this can substantially
# increase the size of the installed binaries.
ac_add_options --enable-strip

# This option is added so that test libraries and programs are not
# built. These would only be required for debugging purposes.
ac_add_options --disable-tests

# This option is added so that the Mozilla Installer program is not
# built or installed. The program is not required for a BLFS
# installation of Thunderbird.
ac_add_options --disable-installer

# This option is used to disable the a11y support in the Thunderbird
# binaries. Comment out this option if you require a11y support.
ac_add_options --disable-accessibility

# This option is used to enable source tree included LDAP support in
# the Thunderbird binaries.
ac_add_options --enable-ldap

# This option is used to enable support for rendering SVG files in the
# Thunderbird mail client. Uncomment the line below to enable the option.
#ac_add_options --enable-svg

# Uncomment this option if you desire support for dual-monitor
# display of Thunderbird using the X-Window Xinerama libraries.
#ac_add_options --enable-xinerama

# Complex scripts such as Thai can only be rendered in Thunderbird with
# the help of Pango. This option significantly slows rendering, so only
# use it if necessary.
#ac_add_options --enable-pango

# These two options enable support for building Thunderbird with
# system-installed versions of the Network Security Services (NSS)
# and Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) libraries. Uncomment both
# lines to enable support for system-installed NSS/NSPR.
#ac_add_options --with-system-nss
#ac_add_options --with-system-nspr

# This option identifies the default binary directory of the Thunderbird
# installation and is used to locate Thunderbird's installed files. This
# option is not required for end-user use, and is only used for
# development purposes. Due to PDF line length limitations, the command
# below is modified. If you need to use the command below, change the
# ... to /usr/lib.
#ac_add_options --with-default-mozilla-five-home=.../thunderbird-2.0.0.12

EOF

Compile Thunderbird by issuing the following commands:

cat >> layout/build/Makefile.in << "EOF" &&
ifdef MOZ_ENABLE_CANVAS
EXTRA_DSO_LDOPTS += $(XLDFLAGS) -lX11 -lXrender
endif
EOF

sed -i "s/^    enum$/& xptinfo_enum_1/" \
    xpcom/reflect/xptinfo/public/xptinfo.h &&

make -f client.mk build

This package does not come with a test suite.

If you're building the Enigmail extension, issue the following commands:

tar -xf ../enigmail-0.95.6.tar.gz -C mailnews/extensions &&
( cd mailnews/extensions/enigmail && ./makemake -r ) &&

make -C ../thunderbird-build/mailnews/extensions/enigmail &&
make -C ../thunderbird-build/mailnews/extensions/enigmail \
        XPIFILE=enigmail-0.95.6.xpi xpi

Install Thunderbird by running the following commands as the root user:

make -f client.mk install &&

install -v -m644 ../thunderbird-build/dist/public/ldap-private/* \
    /usr/include/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/ldap &&

install -v -m644 ../thunderbird-build/dist/bin/isp/{movemail,rss}.rdf \
    /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/isp &&
rm -rvf /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/defaults/isp

If you built Thunderbird utilizing system-installed NSS and NSPR libraries, the thunderbird-ns*.pc pkgconfig files are broken as they point to the wrong directories where the actual libraries and interface headers are located. Issue the following commands as the root user to replace the broken files with symbolic links to known good files:

ln -v -sf nss.pc /usr/lib/pkgconfig/thunderbird-nss.pc &&
ln -v -sf nspr.pc /usr/lib/pkgconfig/thunderbird-nspr.pc

If you did NOT build Thunderbird utilizing system-installed NSS and NSPR libraries, issue the following commands as the root user to install the NSS interface headers:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/include/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/nss &&
cp -v -Lf ../thunderbird-build/dist/{private,public}/nss/*.h \
    /usr/include/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/nss

If you built the Enigmail extension, issue the following commands as the root user to install the .xpi file:

install -v -m644 -D ../thunderbird-build/dist/bin/enigmail-0.95.6.xpi \
    /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/xpi_store/enigmail-0.95.6.xpi

If you want to install Enigmail globally so that all users who run Thunderbird will have access to the extension, issue the command shown below. Note that this procedure starts an instance of Thunderbird and you must have an X server running. Issue the following command as the root user:

/usr/bin/thunderbird -install-global-extension \
    /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/xpi_store/enigmail-0.95.6.xpi

Global installation of other extensions can be done using the same basic method as the Enigmail extension. See the “Configuring Thunderbird” section below for information about configuring Enigmail for individual users if you did not not install it globally.

Note

You should run /usr/bin/thunderbird once as the root user (or any user with write privileges) to create some necessary additional files in the /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12 directory.

Command Explanations

'EXTRA_DSO_LDOPTS' += -lX11 -lXrender ...: Building the layout backend will break when the canvas element is enabled without adding these two required libraries.

sed -i "s/^ enum$/& xptinfo_enum_1/" ...: This command is used to fix an anonymous enum in an external/public interface header file.

( cd mailnews/... && ./makemake -r ): This command is used to recursively create Makefiles in the enigmail directory.

make -C ... xpi: This command builds the Enigmail .xpi file which is used to install Enigmail.

install .../{movemail,rss}.rdf: These commands are used to install two mail extensions inadvertantly left out of the installation script or installed to the wrong location.

Configuring Thunderbird

Configuration Information

No specific configuration is required as long as the thunderbird script is in the user's path. If Thunderbird is installed in a non-standard location, then make a symlink to the thunderbird script in the /usr/bin directory.

If you don't have privileges to install extensions globally, or you prefer to not install global extensions, you can configure Thunderbird on an individual user basis for access to extensions. For example, if you built the Enigmail extension and did not install it globally, it can be installed on an as-needed basis for each user of the system who may use Thunderbird. It is accomplished through the Thunderbird “Tools” menu. Choose the “Extensions” – “Install” option and fill in the “Look in:” field with /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12/xpi_store. You'll then see the enigmail-0.95.6-linux-????.xpi file listed. Choose this file and click on “Open”, then click on “Install now”. The Enigmail extension will install and you will be prompted to restart Thunderbird.

If your Window or Desktop Manager does not allow you to configure a default browser, you can add a configuration parameter to Thunderbird so that a browser will start when when you click on an Internet/intranet/local URL. The procedure to check or modify any of the configuration parameters is quite simple and the instructions here can be used to view or modify any of the parameters.

First, open the configuration dialog by opening the “Edit” drop-down menu. Choose “Preferences” and then click on the “Advanced” icon on the top menu bar. Choose the “General” tab and click on the “Config Editor” button. This will display a list of the configuration preferences and information related to each one. You can use the “Filter:” bar to enter search criteria and narrow down the listed items. Changing a preference can be done using two methods. One, if the preference has a boolean value (True/False), simply double-click on the preference to toggle the value and two, for other preferences simply right-click on the desired line, choose “Modify” from the menu and change the value. Creating new preference items is accomplished in the same way, except choose “New” from the menu and provide the desired data into the fields when prompted.

The configuration preference item you need to check so that Thunderbird uses a specified browser is the network.protocol-handler.app.http which should be set to the path of the desired browser, e.g., /usr/bin/firefox.

Tip

There is a multitude of configuration parameters you can tweak to customize Thunderbird. A very extensive and up-to-date list of these parameters can be found at http://preferential.mozdev.org/preferences.html.

Installed Programs: thunderbird and thunderbird-config

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries, email/newsgroups components, plugins, extensions, and helper modules installed in /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12

Installed Directories: /usr/include/thunderbird-2.0.0.12, /usr/lib/thunderbird-2.0.0.12, and /usr/share/idl/thunderbird-2.0.0.12

Short Descriptions

thunderbird

is Mozilla's next-generation email and newsgroup client.

Last updated on 2008-08-11 19:15:25 -0500

Pan-0.14.2

Introduction to Pan

The Pan package contains a graphical newsreader. This is useful for reading and writing news, threading articles and replying via email.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://pan.rebelbase.com/download/releases/0.14.2/SOURCE/pan-0.14.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ed3188e7059bb6d6c209ee5d46ac1852
Download size: 1.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 67.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.72 SBU

Pan Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.10.13, GNet-2.0.7, intltool-0.35.5 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

gtkspell-2.0.4

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pan

Installation of Pan

Install Pan by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: pan

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/gnome/apps/Internet

Short Descriptions

pan

is a graphical newsreader.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Balsa-2.3.22

Introduction to Balsa

The Balsa package contains a GNOME-2 based mail client.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://balsa.gnome.org/balsa-2.3.22.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0f9b8dbdd26a1916dcc92f0767e8b4e4
Download size: 2.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 55 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Balsa Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.18.1, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, GMime-2.2.10, and Aspell-0.60.5 or GtkSpell (GtkSpell provides on-the-fly as you type spell checking)

Optional

GtkHTML-3.14.3, gtksourceview-1.8.5, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, OpenLDAP-2.3.39, Compface-1.5.2, Heimdal-1.1 or MIT Kerberos V5-1.6, libnotify, SQLite, and an MTA (that provides a sendmail command, note that it is only used if you didn't install the recommended libESMTP package)

Optional to Build S/MIME Support

GPGME (requires GnuPG-2.0.8)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/balsa

Installation of Balsa

Install Balsa by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$(pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0) \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib \
            --with-rubrica \
            --with-gtkhtml=no &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-rubrica: This parameter is used to provide Rubrica2 address book support.

--with-gtkhtml=no: This parameter is used if you don't have libgtkhtml installed. Remove this parameter if the package is installed. Note that you won't be able to read or write HTML formatted mail messages if you use this parameter.

--with-esmtp=no: Use this parameter if you don't have libESMTP installed.

--with-ssl: Use this option to enable SSL support if OpenSSL is installed.

--with-ldap: Use this option to enable LDAP address book support if OpenLDAP is installed.

--with-sqlite: Use this option to enable SQLite address book support if SQLite is installed.

--with-gpgme: Use this option to enable GPG support if “GnuPG Made Easy” (GPGME) is installed.

--enable-smime: Use this option to enable S/MIME support if GnuPG-2.x.x is installed.

Configuring Balsa

Configuration Information

All configuration of Balsa is done through the Balsa menu system, with mailbox configuration done with the Settings—>Preferences menu.

If you are unable to connect to your ISP, they probably don't support APOP. Disable it in Settings/Preferences/POP3/advanced.

If you enable filters for your incoming POP3 mail, you must have Procmail-3.22 installed, as the incoming mail will be handed off to procmail for processing.

Installed Programs: balsa and balsa-ab

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: The following subdirectories of $GNOME_PREFIX/share/: {gnome/help, omf, sounds}/balsa

Short Descriptions

balsa

is a GNOME-2 based mail client.

Last updated on 2008-03-07 16:50:38 -0600

Pidgin-2.1.0

Introduction to Pidgin

Pidgin is an instant messaging client that can connect with a wide range of networks including AIM, ICQ, GroupWise, MSN, Jabber, IRC, Napster, Gadu-Gadu, SILC, Zephyr and Yahoo!.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/pidgin/pidgin-2.1.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 83f44bf9c076595967f7374c50250176
Download size: 7.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 172 MB (additinoal 106 MB for API documentation)
Estimated build time: 2.5 SBU

Pidgin Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12, libxml2-2.6.31, and XML::Parser-2.34

Optional for SSL Support

GnuTLS-1.6.3 or NSS-3.11.7

SSL support is required for MSN Messenger and Google Talk. GnuTLS is the preferred method. Note that one of Firefox-2.0.0.15, Thunderbird-2.0.0.12, SeaMonkey-1.1.9, or Mozilla can be used instead of NSS.

Optional GUI Tools

GTK+-2.10.13 (required to build the GUI interface), Gtkspell (for spell-check support and only used if Gtk+ is installed), XScreenSaver-5.03 (to check for idleness and only used if Gtk+ is installed), startup-notification-0.9 (only used if Gtk+ is installed), and X Window System (used for session management support)

Optional

intltool-0.35.5, GConf-2.18.0.1, D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74 (requires Python-2.5.2 also), SILC Client, SILC Toolkit, zephyr, GStreamer-0.10.13 (required for audio support), Evolution Data Server-1.10.3 (required for Evolution integration), SQLite (required for the Contact Availability Prediction plugin), Cyrus SASL-2.1.22 (required for Jabber support), MIT Kerberos V5-1.6 (required for Kerberos support in the Zephyr module), Avahi (required for the Bonjour plugin), Meanwhile (required for Sametime protocol support), NetworkManager (download and requires that D-Bus is installed), check (only used during the test suite), and Gadu-Gadu external libraries (cannot find a URL)

Optional for Programming Language Support

Mono (experimental), Tcl-8.4.18, and Tk-8.4.18

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/pidgin

Installation of Pidgin

Compile Pidgin by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf/schemas \
            --disable-gtkui &&
make

If you have Doxygen-1.5.2 installed (Graphviz-2.12 can be used also) and you wish to create the API documentation, issue: make docs

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that the end result of the suite indicates an error. This error is only due to some locale translation issues and not the actual tests. The actual result of the tests are displayed about half way through the tests and should indicate that they passed.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/pidgin-2.1.0 &&
install -v -m644    README* doc/*.txt doc/gtkrc-2.0 \
                    /usr/share/doc/pidgin-2.1.0

If you created the API documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/pidgin-2.1.0/api &&
install -v -m644    doc/html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/pidgin-2.1.0/api

Command Explanations

--with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf/schemas: This parameter is used so that the GConf schema files are installed into the existing database. If GConf is not installed, the parameter does not affect the build or installation of the package.

--disable-gtkui: This parameter is used if GTK+ is not installed. The build will only produce the finch program, which is a text-based (Ncurses) only version. Remove this parameter if you have GTK+ installed to build the GUI pidgin program.

Configuring Pidgin

Config Files

~/.purple/* and ~/.gtkrc-02

Configuration Information

Most configuration can be accomplished by using the various preference settings inside the programs. Additionally, you can create a ~/.gtkrc-02 file which can store settings that affect the Pidgin application. Note that an example gtkrc-02 file was installed during the package installation and can be used as a starting point or reference.

Installed Programs: finch, pidgin, purple-client-example, purple-remote, purple-send, purple-send-async, and purple-url-handler

Installed Library: libgnt.so, libpurple.so, and libpurple-client.so along with numerous plugin and support modules located in various subdirectories of /usr/lib.

Installed Directories: /usr/include/{finch,gnt,libpurple,pidgin}, /usr/lib/{finch,gnt,pidgin,purple-2}, /usr/share/doc/pidgin-2.1.0, /usr/share/pixmaps/pidgin, and /usr/share/sounds/pidgin

Short Descriptions

finch	is a text-based (Ncurses) instant messaging client.
pidgin	is an instant messaging client based on the Gtk+ GUI toolkit.
purple-remote	is a command-line interface for controlling an already running instance of pidgin

Last updated on 2007-08-16 17:34:29 -0500

XChat-2.8.4

Introduction to XChat

XChat is an IRC chat program. It allows you to join multiple IRC channels (chat rooms) at the same time, talk publicly, have private one-on-one conversations, etc. File transfers are also possible.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.xchat.org/files/source/2.8/xchat-2.8.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/xchat-2.8.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 66d60febc62a01bafac9bb3a35fb37ae
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 33 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://xchat.org/files/source/2.8/patches/xc284-scrollbmkdir.diff

XChat Dependencies

Required

Optional

D-Bus GLib Bindings-0.74, OpenSSL-0.9.8g, Python-2.5.2, Tcl-8.4.18, GConf-2.18.0.1, and libsexy or GtkSpell (not recommended)

Note that using libsexy for spell checking requires Enchant at run-time. Aspell-0.60.5 is just one of many backend spell libraries Enchant can use. See the Enchant project page (URL above) for additional information about the available backends.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xchat

Installation of XChat

Install XChat by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../xc284-scrollbmkdir.diff &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 \
            --enable-shm &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/xchat-2.8.4 &&
install -v -m644    README faq.html \
                    /usr/share/doc/xchat-2.8.4

Command Explanations

--enable-shm: This parameter is used to enable XShm for fast tinting.

Installed Program: xchat

Installed Libraries: XChat binding modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/xchat and /usr/share/doc/xchat-2.8.4

Short Descriptions

xchat

is a graphical Internet Relay Chat (IRC) client.

Last updated on 2007-08-08 13:50:38 -0500

Part X. Multimedia

Chapter 35. Multimedia Libraries and Drivers

Many multimedia programs require libraries and/or drivers in order to function properly. The packages in this section fall into this category. Generally you only need to install these if you are installing a program which has the library listed as either a requirement, or as an option to enable it to support certain functionality.

ALSA-1.0.13

The Linux kernel now provides ALSA support by default. However, applications need to interface to that capability. The following five sections of the book deal with the five separate components of ALSA: the libraries, the utilities, the tools, the firmware and the OSS compatibility libraries.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

ALSA Library-1.0.13

Introduction to ALSA Library

The ALSA Library package contains the ALSA library. This is used by programs (including ALSA Utilities) requiring access to the ALSA sound interface.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/lib/alsa-lib-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/lib/alsa-lib-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d55a9d7d2a79d738a1b7a511cffda4b6
Download size: 694 KB
Estimated disk space required: 34.9 MB (additional 22.2 MB to build and install docs)
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU (less than 0.1 SBU to build and install docs)

ALSA Library Dependencies

Optional

Doxygen-1.5.2 and resmgr

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/alsa-lib

Kernel Configuration

In the Device Drivers ⇒ Sound ⇒ Advanced Linux Sound Architecture section of the kernel configuration, select the settings and drivers appropriate for your hardware. Ensure that the deprecated Device Drivers ⇒ Sound ⇒ Open Sound System is not selected. If necessary, recompile and install your new kernel.

Installation of ALSA Library

Install ALSA Library by running the following commands:

./configure --enable-static &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/asoundrc.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/alsa-lib-1.0.13/asoundrc.txt

If you have Doxygen installed and you wish to build the library API documentation, run the following commands from the top-level directory of the source tree:

make doc

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/alsa-1.0.13/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/doxygen/html/* /usr/share/doc/alsa-1.0.13/html

Command Explanations

--enable-static: This switch is used to enable building the static library as some programs link against it.

Configuring ALSA Library

Config Files

~/.asoundrc, /etc/asound.conf, /usr/share/alsa/alsa.conf, and /usr/share/alsa/{cards,pcm}/*.conf

Configuration Information

The default alsa.conf is adequate for most installations. For extra functionality and/or advanced control of your sound device, you may need to create additional configuration files. For information on the available configuration parameters, visit http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/doc-php/asoundrc.php.

Installed Programs: aserver

Installed Library: libasound.{so,a} and smixer-*.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/alsa, /usr/lib/alsa-lib, /usr/share/alsa and /usr/share/doc/alsa-lib-1.0.13

Short Descriptions

aserver	provides the ALSA server.
`libasound.{so,a}`	provides ALSA functions for application programs.
`smixer-*.{so,a}`	provides hardware dependent ALSA mixer functions.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

ALSA Plugins-1.0.13

Introduction to ALSA Plugins

The ALSA Plugins package contains plugins for various audio libraries and sound servers.

Note

The ALSA Plugins package has not been tested by the BLFS editors.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/plugins/alsa-plugins-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/plugins/alsa-plugins-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7ef5e429b4a2756d0b5f0d7ce5bba0c8
Download size: 225 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

ALSA Plugins Dependencies

Required

pkg-config-0.22 and ALSA Library-1.0.13

Optional

FFmpeg-svn_20070606, JACK, PulseAudio, Secret Rabbit Code (a.k.a. libsamplerate)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/alsa-plugins

Installation of ALSA Plugins

Install ALSA Plugins by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/alsa-plugins-1.0.13 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{README*,*.txt} \
                    /usr/share/doc/alsa-plugins-1.0.13

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Numerous libasound_module_<module>.so modules including ctl_oss, pcm_oss, pcm_upmix, pcm_vdownmix and optionally ctl_pulse, pcm_pulse, pcm_a52, pcm_jack and rate_samplerate*

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/alsa-plugins-1.0.13

Short Descriptions

`libasound_module_pcm_oss.so`	Allows native ALSA applications to run on OSS.
`libasound_module_pcm_upmix.so`	Allows upmixing sound to 4 or 6 channels.
`libasound_module_pcm_vdownmix.so`	Allows downmixing sound from 4-6 channels to 2 channel stereo output.
`libasound_module_pcm_jack.so`	Allows native ALSA applications to work with jackd.
`libasound_module_pcm_pulse.so`	Allows native ALSA applications to access a PulseAudio sound daemon.
`libasound_module_pcm_a52.so`	Converts S16 linear sound format to A52 compressed format and sends it to an SPDIF output.
`libasound_module_rate_samplerate.so`	Provides an external rate converter through `libsamplerate`.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

ALSA Utilities-1.0.13

Introduction to ALSA Utilities

The ALSA Utilities package contains various utilities which are useful for controlling your sound card.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/utils/alsa-utils-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/utils/alsa-utils-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dfe4bb5d3217f3ec662b172ce8397cf0
Download size: 958 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ALSA Utilities Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/alsa-utils

Installation of ALSA Utilities

Install ALSA Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring ALSA Utilities

Config Files

/etc/asound.state

Configuration Information

Use a bootscript to store the values at shutdown.

As the root user, install the init script /etc/rc.d/init.d/alsa included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-alsa

Note that all channels of your sound card are muted by default. You can use the alsamixer program from the ALSA Utilities to change this. Use speaker-test to check that your settings have been applied correctly.

The first time the alsactl program is run from the udev rule below, it will complain that there is no state in /etc/asound.state. You can prevent this by running the following commands as the root user:

touch /etc/asound.state &&
alsactl store

The volume settings will be restored from the saved state by Udev when the device is detected (during boot or when plugged in for USB devices).

As the root user, install a new Udev rules file to create the audio device nodes and run the restore script:

cat > /etc/udev/rules.d/40-alsa.rules << "EOF"
# /etc/udev/rules.d/40-alsa.rules

# When a sound device is detected, restore the volume settings
KERNEL=="controlC[0-9]*", ACTION=="add", RUN+="/usr/sbin/alsactl restore %n"
EOF
chmod -v 644 /etc/udev/rules.d/40-alsa.rules

All sound devices are not accessible for any user except root and members of the audio group. Add any users that might use the sound devices to that group:

usermod -a -G audio <username>

Note

You may need to log out and back in again to refresh your group memberships. 'su <username>' should work as well.

Installed Programs: aconnect, alsaconf, alsactl, alsamixer, amidi, amixer, aplay, aplaymidi, arecord, arecordmidi, aseqnet, aseqdump, iecset, and speaker-test

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

aconnect	is a utility for connecting and disconnecting two existing ports in the ALSA sequencer system.
alsaconf	is a configuration tool which tries to detect the sound cards on your system and write a suitable configuration file for ALSA. This program is incompatible with udev and hotplug.
alsactl	is used to control advanced settings for the ALSA sound card drivers.
alsamixer	is an ncurses-based mixer program for use with the ALSA sound card drivers.
amidi	is used to read from and write to ALSA RawMIDI ports.
amixer	allows command-line control of the mixers for the ALSA sound card drivers.
aplay	is a command-line soundfile player for the ALSA sound card drivers.
aplaymidi	is a command-line utility that plays the specified MIDI file(s) to one or more ALSA sequencer ports.
arecord	is a command-line soundfile recorder for the ALSA sound card drivers.
arecordmidi	is a command-line utility that records a standard MIDI file from one or more ALSA sequencer ports.
aseqdump	is a command-line utility that prints the sequencer events it receives as text.
aseqnet	is an ALSA sequencer client which sends and receives event packets over a network.
iecset	is a small utility to set or dump the IEC958 (or so-called “S/PDIF”) status bits of the specified sound card via the ALSA control API.
speaker-test	is a command-line speaker test tone generator for ALSA.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

ALSA Tools-1.0.13

Introduction to ALSA Tools

The ALSA Tools package contains advanced tools for certain sound cards.

Note

The ALSA Tools package has not been tested by the BLFS editors.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/tools/alsa-tools-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/tools/alsa-tools-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3f30a884848a21910195a3c77f1dbde2
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 14-17 MB depending on the tool being built
Estimated build time: 0.1-0.5 SBU depending on the tool being built

ALSA Tools Dependencies

Required

Optional

pkg-config-0.22 and GTK+-2.10.13 or GTK+-1.2.10 (to build echomixer, envy24control and rmedigicontrol), FLTK (to build hdspconf and hdspmixer), and Qt-3.3.8b (to build qlo10k1).

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/alsa-tools

Installation of ALSA Tools

The ALSA Tools package is only needed by those with advanced requirements for their sound card. The tools are not all built together, instead you need to cd into the directory of each tool you wish to compile and run the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

The ac3dec tool comes with a test suite, but it is not functional since it does not contain the reference results for the dither_test program.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: ac3dec, extract_ac3, as10k1, dl10k1, echomixer, envy24control, hdspconf, hdsploader, hdspmixer, init_audigy, init_audigy_eq10, init_live, lo10k1, ld10k1, ld10k1d, mixartloader, pcxhrloader, qlo10k1, rmedigicontrol, cspctl, sbiload, sscape_ctl, us428control, usx2yloader, and vxloader

Installed Library: liblo10k1.so

Installed Directories: /usr/share/applications, /usr/share/pixmaps, /usr/include/lo10k1, /usr/share/ld10k1, and /usr/share/sounds

Short Descriptions

ac3dec	is a free AC-3 stream decoder.
extract_ac3	will take an MPEG-2 stream and produce AC-3 audio to stdout if it exists.
as10k1	is an assembler for the emu10k1 DSP chip present in the Creative SB Live, PCI 512, and emu APS sound cards. It is used to make audio effects such as a flanger, chorus or reverb.
echomixer	is the Linux equivalent of the Echoaudio console application from Echoaudio. It is a tool to control all the features of any Echoaudio soundcard. This includes clock sources, input and output gains, mixers, etc.
envy24control	is a control tool for Envy24 (ice1712) based sound cards.
hdspconf	is a GUI to control the Hammerfall HDSP Alsa Settings. Up to four hdsp cards are supported.
hdsploader	is used to load the firmware required by the Hammerfall HDSP sound cards.
hdspmixer	is the Linux equivalent of the Totalmix application from RME. It is a tool to control the advanced routing features of the RME Hammerfall DSP soundcard series.
ld10k1	is the server of a EMU10K{1,2} patch loader for ALSA.
lo10k1	is the client of a EMU10K{1,2} patch loader for ALSA.
dl10k1	loads config dumps generated by lo10k1 and ld10k1.
ld10k1d	is an init script for the ld10k1 patch loader.
qlo10k1	is a Qt GUI for the ld10k1 patch loader.
mixartloader	is a helper program to load the firmware binaries onto the Digigram's miXart board sound drivers. The following modules require this program: snd-mixart. These drivers don't work properly at all until the certain firmwares are loaded, i.e. no PCM nor mixer devices will appear.
pcxhrloader	is a helper program to load the firmware binaries onto Digigram's pcxhr compatible board sound drivers. The following modules require this program: snd-pcxhr. These drivers don't work properly at all until the certain firmwares are loaded, i.e. no PCM nor mixer devices will appear.
rmedigicontrol	is a control tool for RME Digi32 and RME Digi96 sound cards. It provides a graphical frontend for all the sound card controls and switches.
cspctl	is an SB16/AWE32 Creative Signal Processor (ASP/CSP) control program.
sbiload	is an OPL2/3 FM instrument loader for the ALSA sequencer.
sscape_ctl	is an ALSA SoundScape control utility.
us428control	is a Tascam US-428 control program.
usx2yloader	is a helper program to load the 2nd Phase firmware binaries onto the Tascam USX2Y USB sound cards. It has proven to work so far for the US122, US224 and US428. The snd-usb-usx2y module requires this program.
vxloader	is a helper program to load the firmware binaries onto the Digigram's VX-board sound drivers. The following modules require this program: snd-vx222, snd-vxpocket, snd-vxp440. These drivers don't work properly at all until the certain firmwares are loaded, i.e. no PCM nor mixer devices will appear.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

ALSA Firmware-1.0.13

Introduction to ALSA Firmware

The ALSA Firmware package contains firmware for certain sound cards.

Note

The ALSA Firmware package has not been tested by the BLFS editors.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/firmware/alsa-firmware-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/firmware/alsa-firmware-1.0.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 97de41a923e68c3d6c52c14f1a2843df
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 27.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

ALSA Firmware Dependencies

Required

ALSA Tools-1.0.13

Optional

AS31 (for rebuilding the firmware from source)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/alsa-firmware

Installation of ALSA Firmware

The ALSA Firmware package is only needed by those with advanced requirements for their sound card. See the README for configure options.

Install ALSA Firmware by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /lib/firmware and/or /usr/share/alsa/firmware

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

ALSA OSS-1.0.12

Introduction to ALSA OSS

The ALSA OSS package contains the ALSA OSS compatibility library. This is used by programs which wish to use the ALSA OSS sound interface.

Note

The ALSA OSS package has not been tested by the BLFS editors.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/oss-lib/alsa-oss-1.0.12.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/oss-lib/alsa-oss-1.0.12.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d4d18bbf63a866d6e065b90e16acd676
Download size: 231 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.3 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

ALSA OSS Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/alsa-oss

Installation of ALSA OSS

Install ALSA OSS by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring ALSA OSS

Configuration Information

Installed Program: aoss

Installed Libraries: libalsatoss.{so,a}, libaoss.{so,a}, and libossredir.a

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

aoss

is a simple wrapper script which facilitates the use of the ALSA OSS compatibility library. It just sets the appropriate LD_PRELOAD path and then runs the command.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

aRts-1.5.9

The Analog Real-time Synthesizer (aRts) provides software that can simulate a complete “modular analog synthesizer” on your computer. It creates sounds and music using small modules like oscillators for creating waveforms, various filters, modules for playing data on your speakers, mixers, and faders. You can build a complete setup with the GUI of the system, using the modules: generators, effects and output — connected to each other.

aRts provides necessary libraries for KDE, however it can be installed as a standalone package. The installation instructions for aRts can be found in the aRts-1.5.9 portion of the KDE installation instructions.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

Audio File-0.2.6

Introduction to Audio File

The Audio File package contains the audio file libraries and two sound file support programs. These are useful to support basic sound file formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.68k.org/~michael/audiofile/audiofile-0.2.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9c1049876cd51c0f1b12c2886cce4d42
Download size: 374 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.23 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/audiofile

Installation of Audio File

Install Audio File by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: audiofile-config, sfinfo, and sfconvert

Installed Library: libaudiofile.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

audiofile-config	is used during the compile process by programs linking to this library.
sfinfo	displays the sound file format, audio encoding, sampling rate and duration for audio formats supported by this library.
sfconvert	converts sound file formats where the original format and destination format are supported by this library.
`libaudiofile.{so,a}`	contains functions used by programs to support AIFF, AIFF-compressed, Sun/NeXT, WAV and BIC audio formats.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

EsounD-0.2.37

Introduction to EsounD

The EsounD package contains the Enlightened Sound Daemon. This is useful for mixing together several digitized audio streams for playback by a single device.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/esound/0.2/esound-0.2.37.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/esound/0.2/esound-0.2.37.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 99cc68770176c8940cf346f60208420e
Download size: 383 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

EsounD Dependencies

Required

Audio File-0.2.6

Optional

ALSA-1.0.13, aRts-1.5.9, TCP Wrapper-7.6, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/esound

Installation of EsounD

Install EsounD by running the following commands:

sed -i 's@doc/esound@&-0.2.37@' configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v root:root /usr/share/doc/esound-0.2.37/html/*

Command Explanations

sed -i '...': This appends the version string to the documentation installation directory.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch puts configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

Configuring EsounD

Config Files

/etc/esd.conf

Configuration Information

Instructions and information about the configuration file is located in the TIPS file in the EsounD source directory.

Installed Programs: esd, esdcat, esdctl, esd-config, esddsp, esdfilt, esdloop, esdmon, esdplay, esdrec, and esdsample

Installed Libraries: libesd.{so,a} and libesddsp.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/esound-0.2.37

Short Descriptions

esd	is the Enlightened Sound Daemon.
esd-config	is used by configure to determine the compiler and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use EsounD.
esdcat	plays a RAW audio stream through the daemon.
esdctl	controls certain aspects of the sound daemon.
esdfilt	is an EsoundD filter.
esdloop	is test scaffolding for sample cache, loop and free.
esdmon	outputs the mixed stream from the daemon.
esdplay	plays the named file on EsoundD.
esdrec	outputs from the sound device's current input.
esdsample	is test scaffolding for sample cache, playback, and free.
`libesd.{so,a}`	contains functions used by the EsounD programs as well as other programs to read, write and play various sound format files.

Last updated on 2007-04-19 15:33:29 -0500

SDL-1.2.11

Introduction to SDL

The Simple DirectMedia Layer (SDL for short) is a cross-platform library designed to make it easy to write multimedia software, such as games and emulators.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.libsdl.org/release/SDL-1.2.11.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 418b42956b7cd103bfab1b9077ccc149
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 23 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

SDL Dependencies

Optional

ALSA-1.0.13, EsounD-0.2.37, aRts-1.5.9, NAS-1.9, NASM-0.98.39, X Window System, AAlib-1.4rc5, DirectFB, SVGAlib, Pth-2.0.7, and PicoGUI

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/sdl

Installation of SDL

Install SDL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/SDL-1.2.11/html &&
install -v -m644 docs/html/*.html /usr/share/doc/SDL-1.2.11/html

Testing SDL

It is advisable to test the installation of SDL using the included test programs. It is not required to install any of the resulting binaries to validate the installation. Issue the following commands to build the test programs:

cd test &&
./configure &&
make

You'll need to manually run all the test programs.

Configuring SDL

Configuration Information

Installed Program: sdl-config

Installed Libraries: libSDL*.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/SDL and /usr/share/doc/SDL-1.2.11

Short Descriptions

sdl-config	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use `libSDL`.
`libSDL*.{so,a}`	libraries provide low level access to audio, keyboard, mouse, joystick, 3D hardware via OpenGL, and 2D frame buffer across multiple platforms.

Last updated on 2007-08-15 18:06:57 -0500

Libao-0.8.8

Introduction to Libao

The libao package contains a cross-platform audio library. This is useful to output audio on a wide variety of platforms. It currently supports WAV files, OSS (Open Sound System), ESD (Enlighten Sound Daemon), ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture), NAS (Network Audio system), aRTS (analog Real-Time Synthesizer and PulseAudio (next generation GNOME sound architecture).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/ao/libao-0.8.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libao-0.8.8.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: b92cba3cbcf1ee9bc221118a85d23dcd
Download size: 405 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Libao Dependencies

Optional

X Window System, EsounD-0.2.37, ALSA-1.0.13, aRts-1.5.9, NAS-1.9, and PulseAudio (requires atomic_ops)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libao

Installation of Libao

Install libao by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 README /usr/share/doc/libao-0.8.8

Configuring Libao

Config Files

/etc/libao.conf and ~/.libao

Configuration Information

Currently, the only configuration option available is setting the default output device. Issue man libao.conf for details.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libao.{so,a} and plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/include/ao, /usr/lib/ao and /usr/share/doc/libao-0.8.8

Short Descriptions

libao.{so,a}

provide functions for programs wishing to output sound over supported platforms.

Last updated on 2007-07-19 11:54:05 -0500

libogg-1.1.3

Introduction to libogg

The libogg package contains the Ogg file structure. This is useful for creating (encoding) or playing (decoding) a single physical bit stream.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/ogg/libogg-1.1.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: eaf7dc6ebbff30975de7527a80831585
Download size: 403 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libogg

Installation of libogg

Install libogg by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libogg.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/ogg and /usr/share/doc/libogg-1.1.3

Short Descriptions

libogg.{so,a}

libraries provide the functions required for programs to read or write Ogg formatted bit streams.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libvorbis-1.2.0

Introduction to libvorbis

The libvorbis package contains a general purpose audio and music encoding format. This is useful for creating (encoding) and playing (decoding) sound in an open (patent free) format.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/vorbis/libvorbis-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7c6e409d7aa1fa8a5481dea571d5bde0
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libvorbis-1.2.0-security_fixes-1.patch

libvorbis Dependencies

Required

libogg-1.1.3

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, and libxslt-1.1.22 and PassiveTeX (to build the PDF documentation)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/Libvorbis

Installation of libvorbis

Install libvorbis by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libvorbis-1.2.0-security_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 doc/Vorbis* /usr/share/doc/libvorbis-1.2.0

Command Explanations

--enable-docs: This switch enables building the documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libvorbis.{so,a}, libvorbisenc.{so,a}, and libvorbisfile.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/vorbis and /usr/share/doc/libvorbis-1.2.0

Short Descriptions

libvorbis*.{so,a}

libraries provide the functions to read and write sound files.

Last updated on 2008-07-09 14:08:43 -0500

FAAC-1.26

Introduction to FAAC

FAAC is an encoder for a lossy sound compression scheme specified in MPEG-2 Part 7 and MPEG-4 Part 3 standards and known as Advanced Audio Coding (AAC). This encoder is useful for producing files that can be played back on iPod. Moreover, iPod does not understand other sound compression schemes in video files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/faac/faac-1.26.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1d7c019bd2dbb4f3101b8937ebc59cf6
Download size: 392 KB
Estimated disk space required: 33 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

FAAC Dependencies

Optional

libmp4v2 from mpeg4ip (untested, as of 2007-09-28, development of the project is stopped; an internal version of the library is used if the external one is not found).

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/faac

Installation of FAAC

Install FAAC by running the following commands:

./bootstrap &&
sed -i -e '/obj-type/d' -e '/Long Term/d' frontend/main.c &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite. However, basic functionality can be tested by encoding a sample WAV file (the sample file is installed by the ALSA Utilities-1.0.13 package:

./frontend/faac -o Front_Left.mp4 /usr/share/sounds/alsa/Front_Left.wav

Then, decode the result using the faad program from the FAAD2-2.6.1 package and play back the decoded file (requires the aplay program from the ALSA Utilities-1.0.13 package:

faad Front_Left.mp4
aplay Front_Left.wav

aplay should identify the file as “Signed 16 bit Little Endian, Rate 48000 Hz, Stereo”, and you should hear the words “front left”.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

./bootstrap: This command runs GNU Autotools to create the configure script and other required build files.

sed -i ...: This command removes documentation for the --obj-type parameter from the faac --long-help command output. This parameter is already disabled in FAAC-1.26 due to sound quality issues with object types other than “Low Complexity”.

--enable-drm: This option is supposed to enable support for encoding files for Digital Radio Mondiale, but actually breaks the base functionality of the package (e.g., the resulting faac program produces files that cannot be decoded by FAAD2-2.6.1, even if compiled with DRM support). Don't use it.

Other AAC encoders

The quality of FAAC is not up to par with the best AAC encoders currently available. Also, it only supports AAC and not High Efficiency AAC (also known as aacPlus), which provides better quality at low bitrates by means of using the “spectral band replication” technology. There are the following alternative programs for producing AAC and HE-AAC streams:

Nero AAC Codec: available only in the binary form, the command-line AAC and HE-AAC encoders for Linux are in the same archive as the Windows application.
3GPP Enhanced aacPlus general audio codec: available in the source form, can encode only HE-AAC up to 48 kbps out of the box, but the maximum bitrate can be changed by editing the tuning table in the FloatFR_sbrenclib/src/sbr_main.c file.

Note, however, that iPod supports only Low Complexity AAC profile, which is the default in FAAC, but may not be the default in Nero AAC Encoder and is completely unavailable in the 3GPP encoder.

Installed Program: faac

Installed Libraries: libfaac.{so,a} and libmp4v2.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

faac	is a command-line AAC encoder.
`libfaac.{so,a}`	contains functions for encoding AAC streams.
`libmp4v2.{so,a}`	contains functions for creating and manipulating MP4 files.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

FAAD2-2.6.1

Introduction to FAAD2

FAAD2 is a decoder for a lossy sound compression scheme specified in MPEG-2 Part 7 and MPEG-4 Part 3 standards and known as Advanced Audio Coding (AAC).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/faac/faad2-2.6.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 74e92df40c270f216a8305fc87603c8a
Download size: 820 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB (without media player plugins)
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (without media player plugins)

Additional Downloads

Sample AAC file: http://www.nch.com.au/acm/sample.aac (7 KB)

FAAD2 Dependencies

Optional (to build corresponding AAC plugins)

XMMS-1.2.10 and mpeg4ip (both are untested, and both projects are dead).

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/faad2

Installation of FAAD2

Install FAAD2 by running the following commands:

./bootstrap &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite. However, basic functionality can be tested by decoding the sample AAC file:

./frontend/faad -o sample.wav ../sample.aac

This should display a copyright message and the following information about the sample file:

sample.aac file info: ADTS, 4.608 sec, 13 kbps, 16000 Hz --------------------- | Config: 2 Ch | --------------------- | Ch | Position | --------------------- | 00 | Left front | | 01 | Right front | ---------------------

Now play the result (requires the aplay program from the ALSA Utilities-1.0.13 package):

aplay sample.wav

aplay should identify the file as “Signed 16 bit Little Endian, Rate 16000 Hz, Stereo”, and you should hear some piano notes.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

./bootstrap: This command runs GNU Autotools to create the configure script and other required build files.

--with-drm: This option is supposed to enable support for decoding Digital Radio Mondiale, but actually breaks the base functionality of the package (e.g., the resulting faad program cannot decode the sample AAC file linked above). Don't use it.

Installed Program: faad

Installed Library: libfaad.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

faad	is a command-line utility for decoding AAC and MP4 files.
`libfaad.{so,a}`	contains functions for decoding AAC streams.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 07:42:27 -0500

NAS-1.9

Introduction to NAS

The Network Audio System is a network transparent, client/server audio transport system used to read , write and play audio files in many formats including .au, .snd, .voc, .wav, .aiff, .aif and .iff. It can be described as the audio equivalent of an X server.

There may be a more recent release available from the NAS home page. You can check http://nas.codebrilliance.com/ and probably use the existing BLFS instructions. Note that versions other than the one shown in the download URLs have not been tested in a BLFS environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/nas/nas-1.9.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/6.3/n/nas-1.9.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: aac031fae04f53bcd1e033b380b1b29d
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

NAS Dependencies

Required

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/nas

Installation of NAS

Install NAS by running the following commands:

xmkmf &&
make World

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install install.man &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/nas-1.9/{html,pdf} &&
install -v -m644 doc/html/* /usr/share/doc/nas-1.9/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/pdf/* /usr/share/doc/nas-1.9/pdf &&
install -v -m644 doc/{README,actions,*.{ps,txt}} \
    /usr/share/doc/nas-1.9

Command Explanations

xmkmf; make World: These commands use the standard for compiling X based applications.

Configuring NAS

Config Files

/etc/nas/nasd.conf

Configuration Information

Create the NAS configuration file using the following command:

install -v -m644 /etc/nas/nasd.conf.eg /etc/nas/nasd.conf

Edit the new configuration file to suit your network and system needs.

Boot Script

Note

The NAS server cannot run simultaneously with other sound servers, such as MAS or JACK.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/nas init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-20080816 package.

make install-nas

The init script uses a default parameter to allow access to all hosts on the network. Review the nasd man page for other available parameters if you need to modify the script.

Installed Programs: auconvert, auctl, audemo, audial, auedit, auinfo, aupanel, auphone, auplay, aurecord, auscope, autool, auwave, checkmail, issndfile, nasd, playbucket, and soundtoh

Installed Library: libaudio.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /etc/nas, /usr/X11R6/include/audio and /usr/share/doc/nas-1.9

Short Descriptions

au{utilities}	are a collection of tools to convert, play, edit, record, and manipulate sound files. See the respective man page for each utility for a full description of each one.
checkmail	plays a sound file when the user receives mail.
issndfile	checks if a file is in a recognized audio file format.
nasd	is the Network Audio System server daemon.
playbucket	plays, or creates, the bucket corresponding to the specified file.
soundtoh	converts a sound file to a C language header file.
`libaudio.{so,a}`	contains API functions to read and write audio files.

Last updated on 2008-05-10 18:53:20 -0500

LibMPEG3-1.7

Introduction to LibMPEG3

LibMPEG3 supports advanced editing and manipulation of MPEG streams.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/heroines/libmpeg3-1.7-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 4a3e8896164d59d7d0dff69b50b75352
Download size: 320 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libmpeg3-1.7-makefile_mods-1.patch

LibMPEG3 Dependencies

Required

NASM-0.98.39

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libmpeg3

Installation of LibMPEG3

Install LibMPEG3 by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libmpeg3-1.7-makefile_mods-1.patch &&
./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

patch -Np1 -i ...: The patch modifies the Makefile so that everything is installed with the make install command instead of just the executables being installed and manual commands used to install the library, interface headers and documentation. The patch also fixes a syntax error in the Makefile.

./configure: This is not a typical Autotools script. It is only used to check for the availability of the NASM compiler.

Installed Programs: mpeg3cat, mpeg3dump, mpeg3peek and mpeg3toc

Installed Library: libmpeg3.a

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libmpeg3-1.7

Short Descriptions

mpeg3cat	concatenates elementary streams or demultiplexes a program stream (separates components of the stream).
mpeg3dump	dumps information or extracts audio to a 24 bit PCM file.
mpeg3peek	prints the byte offset of a given frame. It only works for video and requires a table of contents.
mpeg3toc	creates a table of contents for a DVD or MPEG stream.
`libmpeg3.a`	decodes several MPEG standards into uncompressed data suitable for editing and playback.

Last updated on 2007-08-17 11:34:55 -0500

libmad-0.15.1b

Introduction to libmad

libmad is a high-quality MPEG audio decoder capable of 24-bit output.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/mad/libmad-0.15.1b.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mars.org/pub/mpeg/libmad-0.15.1b.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1be543bc30c56fb6bea1d7bf6a64e66c
Download size: 494 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libmad

Installation of libmad

Install libmad by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Some packages check for the pkg-config file for libmad. This file is particularly needed so that Cdrdao can recognize the installed libmad.

As the root user:

cat > /usr/lib/pkgconfig/mad.pc << "EOF"
prefix=/usr
exec_prefix=${prefix}
libdir=${exec_prefix}/lib
includedir=${prefix}/include

Name: mad
Description: MPEG audio decoder
Requires:
Version: 0.15.1b
Libs: -L${libdir} -lmad
Cflags: -I${includedir}
EOF

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libmad.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libmad.{so,a}

is a MPEG audio decoder library.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

libquicktime-1.0.0

Introduction to libquicktime

The libquicktime package contains the libquicktime library, various plugins and codecs, along with graphical and command line utilities used for encoding and decoding Quicktime files. This is useful for reading and writing files in the Quicktime format. The goal of the project is to enhance, while providing compatibility with, the Quicktime 4 Linux library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/libquicktime/libquicktime-1.0.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libquicktime-1.0.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 2f609e3ef5e760f44022f6c4b66d6a01
Download size: 998 KB
Estimated disk space required: 17 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU (includes building all codec modules)

libquicktime Dependencies

Optional

pkg-config-0.22, libpng-1.2.29, libjpeg-6b, X Window System, GTK+-2.10.13, ALSA-1.0.13, libvorbis-1.2.0, LAME-3.97, libdv-1.0.0, FFmpeg-svn_20070606, x264, FAAC-1.26, and FAAD2-2.6.1

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libquicktime

Installation of libquicktime

Install libquicktime by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have Doxygen-1.5.2 installed and wish to create the API documentation, issue: doxygen.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libquicktime-1.0.0 &&
install -v -m644    README doc/{*.txt,*.html,mainpage.incl} \
                    /usr/share/doc/libquicktime-1.0.0

If you created the API documentation, install it by issuing the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libquicktime-1.0.0/api &&
install -v -m644    doc/html/* \
                    /usr/share/doc/libquicktime-1.0.0/api

Installed Programs: libquicktime_config, lqt-config, lqt_transcode, lqtplay, qt2text, qtdechunk, qtdump, qtinfo, qtrechunk, qtstreamize and qtyuv4toyuv

Installed Libraries: libquicktime.so and several plugin codec libraries

Installed Directories: /usr/include/lqt, /usr/lib/libquicktime and /usr/share/doc/libquicktime-1.0.0

Short Descriptions

libquicktime_config	is a graphical front end to examine and configure the available libquicktime audio and video codecs.
lqt-config	is a simple program used to query the libquicktime installation settings and plugin information.
lqt_transcode	is a command-line program used to encode video and/or audio files from one format to another.
lqtplay	is a simple Quicktime movie player for X11.
qtdechunk	can take movies containing rgb frames and write them out as ppm images.
qtrechunk	concatenates input frames into a Quicktime movie.
qtyuv4toyuv	is used to write a YUV4 encoded movie as a planar YUV 4:2:0 file.
`libquicktime.so`	is a library for reading and writing Quicktime files. It provides convenient access to Quicktime files with a variety of supported codecs. The library contains new functions integrated with all the original Quicktime 4 Linux library functions used to encode and decode Quicktime files.

Last updated on 2008-01-21 09:56:41 -0600

libFAME-0.9.1

Introduction to libFAME

libFAME is a fast (real-time) MPEG-1 as well as MPEG-4 rectangular and arbitrary shaped video encoding library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/fame/libfame-0.9.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libfame-0.9.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 880085761e17a3b4fc41f4f6f198fd3b
Download size: 290 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/libfame-0.9.1-gcc34-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libfame

Installation of libFAME

Install libFAME by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libfame-0.9.1-gcc34-1.patch &&
sed -i 's/$CC --version/$CC -dumpversion/' configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i 's/$CC --version/$CC -dumpversion/' configure: This command causes the configure script to use a different command to find out the version of the compiler. Without this command, the -fstrict-aliasing flag is not added to the CFLAGS variable in the various Makefiles.

--enable-sse: This option is off by default and should be set on if your machine has SSE capability. One way to find out if you have SSE is to issue cat /proc/cpuinfo and see if sse is listed in the flags.

Installed Programs: libfame-config

Installed Libraries: libfame.{so,a}

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libfame-config	provides configuration information for `libfame`.
`libfame.{so,a}`	provides functions for the video encoding programs.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

Speex-1.0.5

Introduction to Speex

Speex is an audio compression format designed especially for speech. It is well-adapted to Internet applications and provides useful features that are not present in most other CODECs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.us.xiph.org/releases/speex/speex-1.0.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 01d6a2de0a88a861304bf517615dea79
Download size: 535 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.12 SBU

Speex Dependencies

Optional

libogg-1.1.3

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/speex

Installation of Speex

Install Speex by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: speexdec and speexenc

Installed Libraries: libspeex.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/speex-1.0.5

Short Descriptions

speexdec	decodes a Speex file and produces a WAV or raw file.
speexenc	encodes a WAV or raw files using Speex.
`libspeex.{so,a}`	provides functions for the audio encoding/decoding programs.

Last updated on 2007-07-19 03:40:08 -0500

Id3lib-3.8.3

Introduction to Id3lib

id3lib is a library for reading, writing and manipulating ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/id3lib/id3lib-3.8.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 19f27ddd2dda4b2d26a559a4f0f402a7
Download size: 950 KB
Estimated disk space required: 21 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/6.3/id3lib-3.8.3-test_suite-1.patch

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/id3lib

Installation of Id3lib

Install id3lib by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../id3lib-3.8.3-test_suite-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/id3lib-3.8.3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{gif,jpg,png,ico,css,txt,php,html} \
    /usr/share/doc/id3lib-3.8.3

Installed Programs: id3convert, id3cp, id3info, and id3tag

Installed Library: libid3.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/id3 and /usr/share/doc/id3lib-3.8.3

Short Descriptions

id3convert	converts between ID3v1/v2 tagging formats.
id3cp	extracts ID3v1/v2 tags from digital audio files.
id3info	prints ID3v1/v2 tag contents.
id3tag	is an utility for editing ID3v1/v2 tags.
`libid3.{so,a}`	provides functions for the ID3v1/v2 tag editing programs as well as other external programs and libraries.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

FLAC-1.2.1

Introduction to FLAC

FLAC is an audio CODEC similar to MP3, but lossless, meaning that audio is compressed without losing any information.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/flac/flac-1.2.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 153c8b15a54da428d1f0fadc756c22c7
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 205 MB (includes running the test suite)
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU (additional 8 SBU to run the test suite)

FLAC Dependencies

Optional

libogg-1.1.3, XMMS-1.2.10, NASM-0.98.39, DocBook-utils-0.6.14, Doxygen-1.5.2 and Valgrind

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/flac

Installation of FLAC

Install FLAC by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --disable-thorough-tests &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Note that if you passed the --enable-exhaustive-tests and --enable-valgrind-testing parameters to configure and then run the test suite, it will take a very long time (up to 300 SBUs) and use about 375 MB of disk space.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-thorough-tests: This parameter is used so that the test suite will complete in a reasonable amount of time. Remove it if you desire more extensive tests.

Installed Programs: flac and metaflac

Installed Libraries: libFLAC.{so,a}, libFLAC++.{so,a} and libxmms-flac.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/FLAC, /usr/include/FLAC++ and /usr/share/doc/flac-1.2.1

Short Descriptions

flac	is a command-line utility for encoding, decoding and converting FLAC files.
metaflac	is a program for listing, adding, removing, or editing metadata in one or more FLAC files.
`libFLAC{,++}.{so,a}`	these libraries provide native FLAC and Ogg FLAC C/C++ APIs for programs utilizing FLAC.
`libxmms-flac.{so,a}`	is a plugin for XMMS.

Last updated on 2007-12-13 05:04:40 -0600

libdvdcss-1.2.9

Introduction to libdvdcss

libdvdcss is a simple library designed for accessing DVDs as a block device without having to bother about the decryption.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.videolan.org/pub/libdvdcss/1.2.9/libdvdcss-1.2.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libdvdcss-1.2.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 553383d898826c285afb2ee453b07868
Download size: 283 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

libdvdcss Dependencies

Optional (to Create Documentation)

Doxygen-1.5.2 and teTeX-3.0

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libdvdcss

Installation of libdvdcss

Note

In certain circumstances the 'inputenc' package in the LaTeX installation may not work properly duing the build, causing it to hang up. If this happens, issue quit at the LaTeX prompt and then issue the following command at the shell prompt:

echo "INPUT_ENCODING         = ISO-8859-1" >>doc/doxygen.cfg

Now either resume the build, or start over. Disregard this note if you do not have a LaTeX package or Doxygen installed.

Install libdvdcss by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have Doxygen and teTeX installed, HTML and Postscript documentation was created during the build. If you also want to install a PDF version of the reference manual, issue the following command:

make -C doc/latex pdf

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you have Doxygen and teTeX installed, install the documentation using the following commands as the root user:


install -v -m755 -d         /usr/share/doc/libdvdcss-1.2.9/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/html/* /usr/share/doc/libdvdcss-1.2.9/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/latex/*.{pdf,ps,dvi} \
                            /usr/share/doc/libdvdcss-1.2.9

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libdvdcss.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/dvdcss and /usr/share/doc/libdvdcss-1.2.9

Short Descriptions

libdvdcss.{so,a}

provides the functionality that is required for transparent DVD access with CSS decryption.

Last updated on 2007-07-19 15:56:20 -0500

Libdvdread-0.9.7

Introduction to Libdvdread

libdvdread is a library which provides a simple foundation for reading DVDs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.dtek.chalmers.se/groups/dvd/dist/libdvdread-0.9.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libdvdread-0.9.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 078788c9241ae16763529e1235502337
Download size: 389 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Libdvdread Dependencies

Optional

libdvdcss-1.2.9

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libdvdread

Installation of Libdvdread

Install libdvdread by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-libdvdcss: This switch is needed if you want libdvdread to link to the libdvdcss library so it can read CSS encrypted DVDs. If you do not pass this switch, libdvdread will dlopen the libdvdcss library at runtime, if it is available, in order to read CSS encrypted DVDs.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libdvdread.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/dvdread

Short Descriptions

libdvdread.{so,a}

provides functionality required to access DVDs.

Last updated on 2007-07-19 16:07:28 -0500

Libdv-1.0.0

Introduction to Libdv

The Quasar DV Codec (libdv) is a software CODEC for DV video, the encoding format used by most digital camcorders.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/libdv/libdv-1.0.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f895162161cfa4bb4a94c070a7caa6c7
Download size: 574 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Libdv Dependencies

Optional

popt-1.10.4, pkg-config-0.22, SDL-1.2.11, GTK+-1.2.10, and X Window System

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libdv

Installation of Libdv

Install libdv by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d      /usr/share/doc/libdv-1.0.0 &&
install -v -m644 README* /usr/share/doc/libdv-1.0.0

Installed Programs: dubdv, dvconnect, encodedv, and playdv

Installed Library: libdv.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libdv and /usr/share/doc/libdv-1.0.0

Short Descriptions

dubdv	inserts audio into a digital video stream.
dvconnect	is a small utility to send or capture raw data from and to the camcorder.
encodedv	encodes a series of images to a digital video stream.
playdv	displays digital video streams on the screen.
`libdv.{so,a}`	provides functions for programs interacting with the Quasar DV CODEC.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 18:44:46 -0500

Liba52-0.7.4

Introduction to Liba52

liba52 is a free library for decoding ATSC A/52 (also known as AC-3) streams. The A/52 standard is used in a variety of applications, including digital television and DVD.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://liba52.sourceforge.net/files/a52dec-0.7.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: caa9f5bc44232dc8aeea773fea56be80
Download size: 236 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/liba52

Installation of Liba52

Install liba52 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/liba52.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/liba52-0.7.4/liba52.txt

Installed Programs: a52dec and extract_a52

Installed Library: liba52.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/a52dec and /usr/share/doc/liba52-0.7.4

Short Descriptions

a52dec	plays ATSC A/52 audio streams.
extract_a52	extracts ATSC A/52 audio from an MPEG stream.
`liba52.{so,a}`	provides functions for the programs dealing with ATSC A/52 streams.

Last updated on 2007-04-04 14:42:53 -0500

XviD-1.1.3

Introduction to XviD

XviD is an MPEG-4 compliant video CODEC.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xvid.org/downloads/xvidcore-1.1.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 29c60d4d991ac18f687a8fd13cfe64b7
Download size: 625 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

XviD Dependencies

Optional

NASM-0.98.39

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xvid

Installation of XviD

Install XviD by running the following commands:

cd build/generic &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&

chmod -v 755 /usr/lib/libxvidcore.so.4.1 &&
ln -v -sf libxvidcore.so.4.1 /usr/lib/libxvidcore.so.4 &&
ln -v -sf libxvidcore.so.4   /usr/lib/libxvidcore.so   &&

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/xvidcore-1.1.3/examples &&
install -v -m644 ../../doc/* /usr/share/doc/xvidcore-1.1.3 &&
install -v -m644 ../../examples/* \
    /usr/share/doc/xvidcore-1.1.3/examples

Command Explanations

ln -v -sf libxvidcore.so.4 /usr/lib/libxvidcore.so: This command makes applications linked against .so names, link to .so.<MAJOR>. This ensures better binary compatibility, as XviD developers take care not changing the <MAJOR> number until there is an incompatible ABI change.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libxvidcore.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/xvidcore-1.1.3

Short Descriptions

libxvidcore.{so,a}

provides functions to encode and decode most MPEG-4 video data.

Last updated on 2007-08-12 15:47:46 -0500

Xine Libraries-1.1.12

Introduction to Xine Libraries

The xine Libraries package contains xine libraries. These are useful for interfacing with external plug-ins that allow the flow of information from the source to the screen and speakers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/xine/xine-lib-1.1.12.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/xine-lib-1.1.12.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b7254614c78c8b0f1652b8dc06f80b3a
Download size: 7.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 233 MB
Estimated build time: 6.1 SBU

Xine Libraries Dependencies

Required

X Window System and EsounD-0.2.37 or OSS or ALSA-1.0.13 or aRts-1.5.9 or PulseAudio or JACK

Optional

AAlib-1.4rc5, libmng-1.0.9, SDL-1.2.11, libFAME-0.9.1, libvorbis-1.2.0, Speex-1.0.5, GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1, FLAC-1.2.1, Samba-3.0.30, ImageMagick-6.3.5-10, DirectFB, Theora, libcaca, libmodplug, libcdio, VCDImager, libmpcdec, WavPack, libdxr3, sgmltools-lite, and Transfig

The developers recommended that you use the internal source tree versions of liba52-0.7.4, libdts (now libdca), libdvdnav, and libmad-0.15.1b and not system-installed versions.

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/xine-lib

Installation of Xine Libraries

Install xine Libraries by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-static --with-external-ffmpeg \
            --docdir=/usr/share/doc/xine-lib-1.1.12 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-static: This switch is used to enable building the static library as some programs link against it.

--with-external-ffmpeg: This switch enables use of an external FFmpeg library. The internaly built library produces poor resuts with some video files.

--docdir=/usr/share/xine-lib-1.1.12: This switch causes the documentation to be installed into a versioned instead of the default /usr/share/doc/xine-lib.

Installed Program: xine-config

Installed Libraries: libxine.{a,so} and numerous plugin modules and video extensions

Installed Fonts: Output display engine fonts located in /usr/share/xine/libxine1/fonts

Installed Directories: /usr/include/xine, /usr/lib/xine, /usr/share/xine, and /usr/share/doc/xine-lib-1.1.12

Short Descriptions

xine-config	provides information to programs trying to link with the xine libraries.
`libxine.so`	provides the API for processing audio/video files.

Last updated on 2008-05-09 08:00:42 -0500

Libmikmod-3.1.11

Introduction to Libmikmod

libmikmod is a sound library capable of playing audio samples as well as tracker modules. Supported module formats include MOD, S3M, XM, IT, MED, MTM and 669.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mikmod.raphnet.net/files/libmikmod-3.1.11.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles/libmikmod-3.1.11.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 705106da305e8de191549f1e7393185c
Download size: 604 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended Patch: http://mikmod.raphnet.net/files/libmikmod-3.1.11-a.diff

Libmikmod Dependencies

Optional

ALSA-1.0.13, EsounD-0.2.37, libGUS, AFlib and SAM9407 driver

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libmikmod

Installation of Libmikmod

Install libmikmod by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libmikmod-3.1.11-a.diff &&
sed -i -e "s/VERSION=10/VERSION=11/" \
       -e "s/sys_asoundlib/alsa_asoundlib/" \
       -e "s/snd_cards/snd_card_load/g" \
       -e "s|sys/asoundlib.h|alsa/asoundlib.h|g" \
       -e "s/^LIBOBJS/#LIBOBJS/" \
    configure.in &&
autoconf &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod 755 /usr/lib/libmikmod.so.2.0.4 &&
install -v -m644 -D docs/mikmod.html \
    /usr/share/doc/libmikmod-3.1.11/mikmod.html

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ...: This increments the package micro version and also modifies the ALSA header search routine so that the package properly discovers the ALSA library. It also fixes a problem which makes autoconf fail.

autoconf: This generates a new configure script, required because of the changes to configure.in.

Installed Program: libmikmod-config

Installed Library: libmikmod.{so,a}

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libmikmod-3.1.11

Short Descriptions

libmikmod-config	provides version information, compiler, and linker flags to programs that utilize libmikmod.
`libmikmod.{so,a}`	contains functions that are required to play various tracker module files.

Last updated on 2007-07-14 18:27:07 -0500

GStreamer-0.10.13

Introduction to GStreamer

The GStreamer package contains a streaming media framework that enables applications to share a common set of plugins for things like video decoding and encoding, audio encoding and decoding, audio and video filters, audio visualisation, Web streaming and anything else that streams in real-time or otherwise. It is modelled after research software worked on at the Oregon Graduate Institute. After installing GStreamer, you'll likely need to install one or more of the GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6, GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins-0.10.6, GStreamer Bad Plug-ins and GStreamer FFmpeg plug-in packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gstreamer.freedesktop.org/src/gstreamer/gstreamer-0.10.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gstreamer/0.10/gstreamer-0.10.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 69b594b43e52e1d0eaf512a89c7b3137
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 72 MB
Estimated build time: 1.5 SBU (includes building manuals and 0.5 SBU to run the test suite)

GStreamer Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.12.12 and libxml2-2.6.31

Optional

Check (required to run the unit regression tests), and Valgrind (optionally used during the unit regression tests)

Optional (Required to Rebuild the API Documentation)

Optional (Required to Build Manuals)

libxslt-1.1.22, teTeX-3.0, AFPL Ghostscript-8.53 or ESP Ghostscript-8.15.4, DocBook-utils-0.6.14, Transfig, and Netpbm

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gstreamer

Installation of GStreamer

Install GStreamer by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. There are many other Makefile targets you can specify for running the tests, issue make -C tests/check help to see the complete list.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gstreamer-0.10/design &&
install -v -m644 docs/design/*.txt \
                    /usr/share/doc/gstreamer-0.10/design &&

if [ -d /usr/share/doc/gstreamer-0.10/faq/html ]; then
    chown -v -R root:root \
        /usr/share/doc/gstreamer-0.10/*/html
fi

Testing the Installation

To test the functionality of the GStreamer installation, you can run a simple test as an unprivileged user (you may have to run ldconfig as the root user before attempting the test).

gst-launch -v fakesrc num_buffers=5 ! fakesink

If the command outputs a series of messages from fakesrc and fakesink, everything is okay.

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: Use this parameter if GTK-Doc is installed and you wish to rebuild the API documentation.

--enable-docbook: This parameter is used to build HTML, PDF and PostScript versions of the GStreamer User's Manual, FAQ and Writer's Guide. Note that you must have all the listed dependencies installed.

chown -v -R root:root ...: The documentation is installed with ownerships of the user who untarred and built the package. This command changes the ownerships of the installed documentation files to root:root and is only executed if the documentation files were built and installed.

Installed Programs: gst-feedback{,-0.10}, gst-inspect{,-0.10}, gst-launch{,-0.10}, gst-typefind{,-0.10}, gst-xmllaunch{,-0.10} and gst-xmlinspect{,-0.10}

Installed Libraries: libgstbase-0.10.{so,a}, libgstcheck-0.10.{so,a}, libgstcontroller-0.10.{so,a}, libgstdataprotocol-0.10.{so,a}, libgstnet-0.10.{so,a}, libgstreamer-0.10.{so,a}, and libgst*.{so,a} plugin modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gstreamer-0.10, /usr/lib/gstreamer-0.10, /usr/share/doc/gstreamer-0.10, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gstreamer{,-libs,-plugins}-0.10

Short Descriptions

gst-feedback-0.10	generates debug info for GStreamer bug reports.
gst-inspect-0.10	prints information about a GStreamer plugin or element.
gst-launch-0.10	is a tool that builds and runs basic GStreamer pipelines.
gst-typefind-0.10	uses the GStreamer type finding system to determine the relevant GStreamer plugin to parse or decode a file, and determine the corresponding MIME type.
gst-xmlinspect-0.10	prints information about a GStreamer plugin or element in XML document format.
gst-xmllaunch-0.10	is used to build and run a basic GStreamer pipeline, loading it from an XML description.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 13:28:44 -0500

GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13

Introduction to GStreamer Base Plug-ins

The GStreamer Base Plug-ins is a well-groomed and well-maintained collection of GStreamer plug-ins and elements, spanning the range of possible types of elements one would want to write for GStreamer. It also contains helper libraries and base classes useful for writing elements. A wide range of video and audio decoders, encoders, and filters are included. Also see the GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6, GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins-0.10.6, GStreamer Bad Plug-ins and GStreamer FFmpeg plug-in packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gstreamer.freedesktop.org/src/gst-plugins-base/gst-plugins-base-0.10.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gst-plugins-base/0.10/gst-plugins-base-0.10.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 735f7b911cd00540d2bea8596a3859cd
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: up to 72 MB (depends on what dependencies are installed)
Estimated build time: up to 1.5 SBU (0.5 SBU to run the test suite)

GStreamer Base Plug-ins Dependencies

Required

GStreamer-0.10.13 and liboil

Optional

ALSA-1.0.13, libogg-1.1.3, libvorbis-1.2.0, Theora, CDParanoia-III-9.8, FreeType-2.3.7, Pango-1.16.4, GTK+-2.10.13 (required to build the examples), X Window System, GNOME Virtual File System-2.18.1, libvisual, Check (required to run the unit regression tests), and Valgrind (optionally used during the unit regression tests)

Optional (Required to Rebuild the API Documentation)

GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gst-plugins-base

Installation of GStreamer Base Plug-ins

Install GStreamer Base Plug-ins by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. There are many other Makefile targets you can specify for running the tests, issue make -C tests/check help to see the complete list.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: gst-visualise-0.10

Installed Libraries: libgst*.{so,a} and numerous GStreamer plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gstreamer-0.10/gst/{too numerous to list} and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gst-plugins-base-libs-0.10

Short Descriptions

gst-visualise-0.10

is used to run a basic GStreamer pipeline to display a graphical visualisation of an audio stream.

Last updated on 2007-07-18 17:20:52 -0500

GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6

Introduction to GStreamer Good Plug-ins

The GStreamer Good Plug-ins is a set of plug-ins considered by the GStreamer developers to have good quality code, correct functionality, and the preferred license (LGPL for the plug-in code, LGPL or LGPL-compatible for the supporting library). A wide range of video and audio decoders, encoders, and filters are included. Also see the GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins-0.10.6, GStreamer Bad Plug-ins and GStreamer FFmpeg plug-in packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gstreamer.freedesktop.org/src/gst-plugins-good/gst-plugins-good-0.10.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gst-plugins-good/0.10/gst-plugins-good-0.10.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 25f111360c2930705b91b4fcf93ae5c5
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: up to 85 MB (depends on which dependencies are installed)
Estimated build time: up to 1.7 SBU

GStreamer Good Plug-ins Dependencies

Required

Optional (Required for the GStreamer Backend in Totem-2.18.2, and Can be Used by Many Other GNOME Applications)

GConf-2.18.0.1

Optional

AAlib-1.4rc5, cairo-1.4.14, libcdio (which can use CDParanoia-III-9.8, libcddb, and VCDImager), libavc1394 (requires libraw1394), libdv-1.0.0, EsounD-0.2.37, FLAC-1.2.1, GTK+-2.10.13 (required to build the examples), HAL-0.5.9.1, libjpeg-6b, LADSPA, libcaca, libpng-1.2.29, libshout, Speex-1.0.5 (version >= 1.1.6 is preferred), WavPack, TagLib, X Window System, Check (required to run the unit regression tests), and Valgrind (optionally used during the unit regression tests)

Optional (Required to Rebuild the API Documentation)

GStreamer Base Plug-ins-0.10.13

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gst-plugins-good

Installation of GStreamer Good Plug-ins

Install GStreamer Good Plug-ins by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. The “generic/states” test is known to fail on some platforms. There are many other Makefile targets you can specify for running the tests, issue make -C tests/check help to see the complete list.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you did not rebuild the API documentation by passing --enable-gtk-doc to the configure script and you wish to install the pre-built documentation, issue the following command as the root user:

make -C docs/plugins install-data

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome/2.18.3: This parameter is used so that the GConf configuration files are installed in the system-wide GNOME GConf database located in /etc/gnome/2.18.3/gconf instead of /usr/etc. You may omit this parameter if you don't have GConf installed.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Numerous GStreamer plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gst-plugins-good-plugins-0.10

Last updated on 2007-09-09 22:23:37 -0500

GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins-0.10.6

Introduction to GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins

The GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins is a set of plug-ins considered by the GStreamer developers to have good quality and correct functionality, but distributing them might pose problems. The license on either the plug-ins or the supporting libraries might not be how the GStreamer developers would like. The code might be widely known to present patent problems. Also see the GStreamer Good Plug-ins-0.10.6, GStreamer Bad Plug-ins and GStreamer FFmpeg plug-in packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gstreamer.freedesktop.org/src/gst-plugins-ugly/gst-plugins-ugly-0.10.6.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f1016148ecbfba968c0ef1773066988b
Download size: 773 KB
Estimated disk space required: up to 21 MB (depends on what dependencies are installed)
Estimated build time: up to 0.4 SBU

GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins Dependencies

Required

Optional

LAME-3.97, liba52-0.7.4, libamrnb, libdvdnav, libdvdread-0.9.7, libmad-0.15.1b (and libid3tag), libmpeg2-0.4.1, and libsidplay

Optional (Required to Rebuild the API Documentation)

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/gst-plugins-ugly

Installation of GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins

Install GStreamer Ugly Plug-ins by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

make -C docs/plugins install-data

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Several GStreamer plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gst-plugins-ugly-plugins-0.10

Last updated on 2007-07-22 11:15:36 -0500

libmusicbrainz-2.1.5

Introduction to libmusicbrainz

The libmusicbrainz package contains a library which allows you to access the data held on the MusicBrainz server. This is useful for adding MusicBrainz lookup capabilities to other applications.

MusicBrainz is a community music metadatabase that attempts to create a comprehensive music information site. You can use the MusicBrainz data either by browsing the web site, or you can access the data from a client program — for example, a CD player program can use MusicBrainz to identify CDs and provide information about the CD, about the artist or other related information.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.musicbrainz.org/pub/musicbrainz/libmusicbrainz-2.1.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.musicbrainz.org/pub/musicbrainz/libmusicbrainz-2.1.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: d5e19bb77edd6ea798ce206bd05ccc5f
Download size: 524 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

libmusicbrainz Dependencies

Required

expat-2.0.1

Optional to Build the Python Bindings

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libmusicbrainz

Installation of libmusicbrainz

Install libmusicbrainz by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If Python is installed, build the bindings with the following commands:

(cd python && python setup.py build)

This package does not come with a stand-alone test suite (to test you must have Python installed and perform the test after the package is installed).

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D docs/mb_howto.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/libmusicbrainz-2.1.5/mb_howto.txt

To test the Python bindings, issue the following: (cd python && python setup.py test).

If you built the Python bindings, issue the following commands as the root user to install them:

(cd python && python setup.py install)

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libmusicbrainz.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/musicbrainz and /usr/share/doc/libmusicbrainz-2.1.5

Short Descriptions

libmusicbrainz.{so,a}

contains API functions to access the MusicBrainz database, both for looking up data and also for submitting new data.

Last updated on 2007-08-12 19:29:41 -0500

libmpeg2-0.4.1

Introduction to libmpeg2

The libmpeg2 package contains a library for decoding MPEG-2 and MPEG-1 video streams. The library is able to decode all MPEG streams that conform to certain restrictions: “constrained parameters” for MPEG-1, and “main profile” for MPEG-2. This is useful for programs and applications needing to decode MPEG-2 and MPEG-1 video streams.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://libmpeg2.sourceforge.net/files/mpeg2dec-0.4.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.ee/pub/gentoo/distfiles/distfiles//mpeg2dec-0.4.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 7631b0a4bcfdd0d78c0bb0083080b0dc
Download size: 494 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

libmpeg2 Dependencies

Optional

X Window System and SDL-1.2.11

User Notes: http://wiki.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/wiki/libmpeg2

Installation of libmpeg2

Install libmpeg2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. To perform a more comprehensive regression test, see the file test/README in the source tree.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/mpeg2dec-0.4.1 &&
install -v -m644 README doc/libmpeg2.txt \
                    /usr/share/doc/mpeg2dec-0.4.1

Command Explanations

--enable-shared: This parameter forces building shared versions of the libraries as well as the static versions.

Installed Programs: corrupt_mpeg2, extract_mpeg2 and mpeg2dec

Installed Libraries: libmpeg2.{so,a} and libmpeg2convert.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/include/mpeg2dec and /usr/share/doc/mpeg2dec-0.4.1

Short Descriptions

extract_mpeg2	extracts MPEG video streams from a multiplexed stream.
mpeg2dec	decodes MPEG1 and MPEG2 video streams.
`libmpeg2.{so,a}`	contains API functions used to decode MPEG video streams.
`libmpeg2convert.{so,a}`	contains API functions used for color conversions of MPEG video streams.

Last updated on 2007-07-19 16:21:53 -0500

Chapter 36. Audio Utilities

This chapter contains programs involved with audio file manipulation; that is to say playing, recording, ripping and the other common things which people want to do. It also includes a package used to render text to speech using your system's audio hardware. To use much of this software, you will need to have the kernel sound drivers installed.

Mpg123-1.4.2

Introduction to Mpg123

The mpg123 package contains a console-based MP3 player. It claims to be the fastest MP3 decoder for Unix.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.sourceforge.net/mpg123/mpg123-1.4.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c571594e81e15c9d5cafe1bb3fdc3386
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 9.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Mpg123 Dependencies

Required